SIMOCODE pro

Motor Management and Control Devices

SIMOCODE pro for PROFINET

System Manual
Gerätehandbuch

Edition 01/2015

Answers for industry.

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET ___________________
Introduction 1

___________________
System description 2
Short instructions for
SIMOCODE pro configuring a reversing 3
starter

SIRIUS Motor protection 4

___________________
SIMOCODE pro PROFINET
5
___________________
Motor control

System Manual ___________________

Monitoring functions 6

7
___________________
Outputs

8
___________________
Inputs

___________________
Analog value recording 9

___________________
Standard functions 10

11
___________________
Logic modules

12
___________________
Communication

___________________
Mounting, wiring, interfaces 13

___________________
Commissioning and service 14
Alarm, fault, and system
15
___________________
events

16
___________________
Tables

01/2015
NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 Continued on next page
 Continuation

Data formats and data

records 17

Dimension drawings 18

Technical data 19
SIRIUS
SIMOCODE pro PROFINET 20
Example circuits

Safety and commissioning

information for EEx areas 21
System Manual
Compartment identification
(PROFINET) 22

List of abbreviations A

Appendix B
Legal information
Warning notice system
This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent
damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert
symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are
graded according to the degree of danger.

DANGER
indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken.

WARNING
indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.

CAUTION
indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.

NOTICE
indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will
be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to
property damage.
Qualified Personnel
The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific
task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions.
Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and
avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems.
Proper use of Siemens products
Note the following:

WARNING
Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical
documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended
or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and
maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible
ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed.

Trademarks
All names identified by ® are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication
may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner.
Disclaimer of Liability
We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software
described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the
information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent
editions.

Siemens AG 3ZX1012-0UF70-1AC1 Copyright © Siemens AG 2012.

Division Digital Factory Ⓟ 01/2015 Subject to change All rights reserved
Postfach 48 48
90026 NÜRNBERG
GERMANY
Table of contents

1 Introduction................................................................................................................................. 17
1.1 Important information......................................................................................................... 17
1.2 IT security information ....................................................................................................... 21
1.3 Current information about operational safety...................................................................... 22
2 System description ...................................................................................................................... 23
2.1 Overview ........................................................................................................................... 24
2.2 Benefits ............................................................................................................................. 25
2.3 Features............................................................................................................................ 27
2.4 Areas of application ........................................................................................................... 30
2.5 SIMOCODE pro V PN device series .................................................................................. 31
2.6 Independent operation ....................................................................................................... 33
2.7 Typical configuration.......................................................................................................... 34
2.8 Simplifying configuration with SIMOCODE pro ................................................................... 35
2.9 Application example .......................................................................................................... 37
2.10 Check list for selecting a device series............................................................................... 39
2.11 Overview of functions ........................................................................................................ 41
2.11.1 Protection functions ........................................................................................................... 41
2.11.2 Monitoring functions .......................................................................................................... 42
2.11.3 Safety-oriented tripping ..................................................................................................... 45
2.11.4 Control functions ............................................................................................................... 46
2.11.5 ETHERNET communication .............................................................................................. 47
2.11.6 Standard functions ............................................................................................................ 48
2.11.7 Freely programmable logic modules .................................................................................. 49
2.11.8 Operating, service and diagnostics data ............................................................................ 50
2.12 An overview of system components ................................................................................... 52
2.13 Description of system components .................................................................................... 60
2.13.1 Basic units (BU) ................................................................................................................ 60
2.13.2 Operator panel (OP) .......................................................................................................... 62
2.13.3 Operator panel with display (OPD)..................................................................................... 64
2.13.4 Operator controls and display elements of the operator panel with display ......................... 68
2.13.5 Menu of the operator panel with display ............................................................................. 70
2.13.6 Displays of the operator panel with display ........................................................................ 81
2.13.7 Read and adapt main display ............................................................................................ 83
2.13.8 Display of measured values in the measured values display .............................................. 86
2.13.9 Motor protection and motor control status .......................................................................... 88
2.13.10 Display of statistical and maintenance-relevant information on the
statistics/maintenance display ........................................................................................... 89
2.13.11 Status display about PROFINET communication ............................................................... 90

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 5
Table of contents

2.13.12 Displays the current status of all device I/Os .......................................................................91

2.13.13 Parameters ........................................................................................................................93
2.13.14 Adapt display settings.........................................................................................................96
2.13.15 Resetting, testing and parameterizing via commands .........................................................98
2.13.16 Display of all pending messages.........................................................................................99
2.13.17 Display of all pending warnings ..........................................................................................99
2.13.18 Display of all pending faults ................................................................................................99
2.13.19 Reading out the device-internal error buffer ........................................................................99
2.13.20 Reading out the device-internal event memory .................................................................100
2.13.21 Identification of the motor feeder and the SIMOCODE pro components ............................101
2.13.22 Current measuring module (IM) ........................................................................................102
2.13.23 Current / voltage measuring module (UM) ........................................................................103
2.13.24 Decoupling module (DCM) for current / voltage measuring modules .................................105
2.13.25 Expansion modules ..........................................................................................................110
2.13.26 Accessories......................................................................................................................115
2.13.27 Software...........................................................................................................................117
2.14 Structural configuration of SIMOCODE pro .......................................................................120
2.14.1 Function blocks ................................................................................................................120
2.15 Overview of function blocks (alphabetical) ........................................................................123
3 Short instructions for configuring a reversing starter ....................................................................... 145
3.1 Introduction and objective of the example .........................................................................146
3.2 Reversing starter with motor feeder and local control station.............................................147
3.3 Parameterization ..............................................................................................................150
3.4 Adding a control station to the reversing starter using PROFINET.....................................154
4 Motor protection......................................................................................................................... 157
4.1 Introduction ......................................................................................................................158
4.2 Overload protection ..........................................................................................................161
4.2.1 Description .......................................................................................................................161
4.2.2 Set current Is1..................................................................................................................162
4.2.3 Set current Is2..................................................................................................................163
4.2.4 Application example .........................................................................................................164
4.2.5 Further overload protection parameters ............................................................................165
4.3 Unbalance protection .......................................................................................................170
4.4 Stalled rotor protection .....................................................................................................171
4.5 Thermistor protection .......................................................................................................172
5 Motor control ............................................................................................................................. 175
5.1 Control stations ................................................................................................................176
5.1.1 Description .......................................................................................................................176
5.1.2 Operating modes and mode selectors ..............................................................................180
5.1.3 Enables and enabled control command ............................................................................182
5.1.4 Control station settings .....................................................................................................184
5.2 Control functions ..............................................................................................................186
5.2.1 Description .......................................................................................................................186
5.2.2 General settings and definitions........................................................................................191

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

6 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Table of contents

5.2.3 "Overload relay" control function ...................................................................................... 196

5.2.4 "Direct starter" control function......................................................................................... 198
5.2.5 "Reversing starter" control function .................................................................................. 200
5.2.6 "Molded case circuit breaker (MCCB)" control function .................................................... 203
5.2.7 "Star-delta starter" control function................................................................................... 206
5.2.8 "Star delta reversing starter" control function ................................................................... 210
5.2.9 "Dahlander" control function ............................................................................................ 214
5.2.10 "Dahlander reversing starter" control function .................................................................. 217
5.2.11 "Pole-changing starter" control function ........................................................................... 221
5.2.12 "Pole-changing reversing starter" control function ............................................................ 224
5.2.13 "Solenoid valve" control function ...................................................................................... 228
5.2.14 "Positioner" control function ............................................................................................. 231
5.2.15 "Soft starter" control function ........................................................................................... 236
5.2.16 "Soft starter with reversing contactor" control function ...................................................... 239
5.2.17 Active control stations, contactor controls, lamp controls and status information for the
control functions .............................................................................................................. 243
6 Monitoring functions................................................................................................................... 247
6.1 Earth-fault monitoring ...................................................................................................... 248
6.1.1 Description ...................................................................................................................... 248
6.1.2 Limits of fault current measurement ................................................................................. 251
6.1.3 Internal earth-fault monitoring .......................................................................................... 252
6.1.4 External ground-fault monitoring (with 3UL22 residual current transformer)...................... 253
6.1.5 External ground-fault monitoring (with residual current transformer 3UL23) ...................... 254
6.2 Current limit monitoring ................................................................................................... 257
6.2.1 Description ...................................................................................................................... 257
6.2.2 I> (upper limit) ................................................................................................................. 258
6.2.3 I< (lower limit).................................................................................................................. 259
6.3 Voltage monitoring .......................................................................................................... 261
6.3.1 Voltage monitoring .......................................................................................................... 261
6.4 Cos phi monitoring .......................................................................................................... 264
6.5 Active power monitoring .................................................................................................. 266
6.6 0 / 4 - 20 mA monitoring .................................................................................................. 269
6.7 Operation monitoring ....................................................................................................... 272
6.7.1 Description ...................................................................................................................... 272
6.7.2 Operating hours monitoring ............................................................................................. 273
6.7.3 Motor stop time monitoring .............................................................................................. 274
6.7.4 Monitoring the number of starts ....................................................................................... 274
6.8 Temperature monitoring .................................................................................................. 276
6.8.1 Temperature monitoring (analog)..................................................................................... 276
6.9 Monitoring interval for mandatory testing ......................................................................... 278
6.10 Hysteresis for monitoring functions .................................................................................. 279

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 7
Table of contents

7 Outputs..................................................................................................................................... 281
7.1 Introduction ......................................................................................................................282
7.2 Basic unit outputs .............................................................................................................284
7.3 Operator panel LEDs (with OPD)......................................................................................286
7.4 Digital module outputs ......................................................................................................289
7.5 Analog module output.......................................................................................................291
7.6 Cyclic Send ......................................................................................................................296
7.7 OPC-UA send ..................................................................................................................298
8 Inputs ....................................................................................................................................... 299
8.1 Introduction ......................................................................................................................300
8.2 Basic unit inputs ...............................................................................................................303
8.3 Operator panel buttons .....................................................................................................305
8.4 Digital module inputs ........................................................................................................308
8.5 Temperature module inputs ..............................................................................................312
8.6 Analog module inputs .......................................................................................................314
8.7 Cyclic Receive..................................................................................................................316
8.8 OPC UA Receive .............................................................................................................317
9 Analog value recording ............................................................................................................... 319
9.1 Description .......................................................................................................................320
9.2 Functional principle ..........................................................................................................321
10 Standard functions ..................................................................................................................... 323
10.1 Introduction ......................................................................................................................324
10.2 Test / Reset......................................................................................................................325
10.3 Test position feedback (TPF)............................................................................................329
10.4 External fault ....................................................................................................................331
10.5 Operational protection off (OPO) ......................................................................................334
10.5.1 Response to positioner control function ............................................................................334
10.5.2 Response to other control functions..................................................................................336
10.6 Power failure monitoring (UVO) ........................................................................................337
10.7 Emergency start ...............................................................................................................339
10.8 Safety-oriented tripping ....................................................................................................341
10.9 Watchdog (Bus monitoring, PLC/PCS monitoring) ............................................................348

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

8 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Table of contents

11 Logic modules........................................................................................................................... 351

11.1 Introduction ..................................................................................................................... 352
11.2 Truth table for 3I / 1O ...................................................................................................... 354
11.3 Truth table for 2I / 1O ...................................................................................................... 357
11.4 Truth table for 5I / 2O ...................................................................................................... 358
11.5 Counter ........................................................................................................................... 359
11.6 Timer............................................................................................................................... 362
11.7 Signal conditioner ............................................................................................................ 365
11.8 Non-volatile elements ...................................................................................................... 368
11.9 Flashing .......................................................................................................................... 371
11.10 Flickering......................................................................................................................... 372
11.11 Limit monitor.................................................................................................................... 373
11.12 Calculators (calculation modules) 1, 2 ............................................................................. 377
11.13 Calculators (calculation modules) 3, 4 ............................................................................. 381
11.14 Analog multiplexer ........................................................................................................... 383
11.15 Pulse width modulator ..................................................................................................... 385
12 Communication ......................................................................................................................... 387
12.1 Definitions ....................................................................................................................... 388
12.2 Data security in automation ............................................................................................. 390
12.3 Data transfer ................................................................................................................... 392
12.4 Communication via PROFINET IO................................................................................... 393
12.5 Integration of SIMOCODE pro into the automation system (PLC) ..................................... 395
12.6 Integration of SIMOCODE pro V PN via GSD .................................................................. 399
12.7 Integration of SIMOCODE pro V PN in SIMATIC STEP 7 V5 via OM SIMOCODE pro...... 400
12.8 Configuring SIMOCODE pro V PN ports .......................................................................... 402
12.9 Configuration of further properties of SIMOCODE pro V PN as an IO device.................... 403
12.10 Identification data for PROFINET IO ................................................................................ 407
12.11 Shared device ................................................................................................................. 408
12.12 Media redundancy ........................................................................................................... 409
12.13 System redundancy ......................................................................................................... 410
12.14 Diagnostics ..................................................................................................................... 416
12.15 Data records.................................................................................................................... 429
12.16 PROFIenergy .................................................................................................................. 430
12.17 Further communication functions via Ethernet.................................................................. 433

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 9
Table of contents

13 Mounting, wiring, interfaces ......................................................................................................... 447

13.1 General information about mounting and wiring ................................................................448
13.2 Mounting ..........................................................................................................................450
13.2.1 Mounting basic units, expansion modules, and decoupling module ...................................450
13.2.2 Digital modules DM-F Local and DM-F PROFIsafe ...........................................................451
13.2.3 Mounting of current measuring modules ...........................................................................452
13.2.4 Mounting the current / voltage measuring modules ...........................................................453
13.2.5 Operator panel and operator panel with display ................................................................454
13.2.6 Exchanging a 3UF52 operator panel for a 3UF720 operator panel ....................................456
13.3 Wiring ..............................................................................................................................458
13.3.1 Basic units, expansion modules and the decoupling module .............................................458
13.3.2 Digital modules DM-F Local and DM-F PROFIsafe ...........................................................472
13.3.3 Current measuring module ...............................................................................................476
13.3.4 Current / voltage measuring modules ...............................................................................478
13.3.5 Measuring current with an external current transformer (interposing transformer)..............480
13.4 System interfaces.............................................................................................................483
13.4.1 General ............................................................................................................................483
13.4.2 System interfaces on basic unit, expansion modules, decoupling module, current
measuring modules and current / voltage measuring modules ..........................................484
13.4.3 System interfaces on the digital modules DM-F Local and DM-F PROFIsafe ....................487
13.4.4 System interfaces on the operator panel and the operator panel with display ....................487
13.4.5 Closing the system interfaces with the system interface cover ..........................................491
13.4.6 Ethernet cable to RJ45 socket ..........................................................................................492
13.4.7 Installation guidelines for the PROFINET ..........................................................................493
14 Commissioning and service......................................................................................................... 495
14.1 General information about commissioning and service......................................................496
14.2 Commissioning.................................................................................................................498
14.2.1 Step sequence .................................................................................................................498
14.2.2 Setting IP parameters and PROFINET device name .........................................................499
14.2.3 Set the time manually after switch-on or recovery of the supply voltage ............................500
14.2.4 Diagnostics via LED display on the basic unit and on the operator panel...........................500
14.2.5 Diagnostics via LED display on the modules DM-F Local or DM-F PROFIsafe ..................501
14.3 Service .............................................................................................................................502
14.3.1 Preventive maintenance ...................................................................................................502
14.3.2 Backing up and saving parameters ...................................................................................503
14.3.3 Replacing SIMOCODE pro components ...........................................................................505
14.3.4 Restoring factory settings .................................................................................................509
14.4 Reading our error buffer / error log (protocol) ....................................................................510
14.5 Event memory ..................................................................................................................512
15 Alarm, fault, and system events ................................................................................................... 513
15.1 Alarms, faults, and system events - error handling ............................................................514

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

10 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Table of contents

16 Tables ...................................................................................................................................... 525

16.1 Active control stations, contactor controls, lamp controls and status information for the
control functions .............................................................................................................. 526
16.2 OPC UA variables ........................................................................................................... 529
16.3 Abbreviations and specifications ...................................................................................... 538
16.4 Socket assignment table - digital ..................................................................................... 540
16.5 Socket assignment table - analog .................................................................................... 547
17 Data formats and data records .................................................................................................... 551
17.1 Handling data records ..................................................................................................... 553
17.1.1 Writing / reading data records .......................................................................................... 553
17.1.2 Abbreviations .................................................................................................................. 554
17.1.3 Specifications .................................................................................................................. 554
17.2 Data record 63 - Analog value recording .......................................................................... 555
17.3 Data record 67 - Process image output............................................................................ 556
17.4 Data record 69 - Process image input .............................................................................. 557
17.5 Data record 72 - Error buffer ............................................................................................ 558
17.6 Data record 73 - Event memory ....................................................................................... 559
17.7 Data record 92 - Device diagnostics ................................................................................ 560
17.8 Data record 94 - measured values ................................................................................... 568
17.9 Data record 95 - Service data/statistical data ................................................................... 570
17.10 Data record 130 - Basic device parameters 1 .................................................................. 572
17.11 Data record 131 - Basic device parameters 2 (plug binary) .............................................. 578
17.12 Data record 132 - Extended device parameters 1 ............................................................ 582
17.13 Data record 133 - Extended device parameters 2 (plug binary) ........................................ 590
17.14 Data record 134 - Extended device parameters 1 ............................................................ 593
17.15 Data record 135 - Extended device parameters 2 ............................................................ 599
17.16 Data record 139 - Marking ............................................................................................... 602
17.17 Data record 140 - Marking 2 ............................................................................................ 603
17.18 Data record 165 - Identification ........................................................................................ 604
17.19 Data record 224 - Password protection ............................................................................ 605
17.20 Assignment of cyclic receive and send data for existing control functions ......................... 606
17.20.1 Overload relay ................................................................................................................. 606
17.20.2 Direct starter.................................................................................................................... 608
17.20.3 Reversing starter ............................................................................................................. 610
17.20.4 Molded-case circuit breaker (MCCB) ............................................................................... 612
17.20.5 Star-delta starter.............................................................................................................. 614
17.20.6 Star-delta reversing starter .............................................................................................. 616
17.20.7 Dahlander ....................................................................................................................... 618
17.20.8 Dahlander reversing starter ............................................................................................. 620

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 11
Table of contents

17.20.9 Pole-changing starter .......................................................................................................622

17.20.10 Pole-changing reversing starter ........................................................................................624
17.20.11 Solenoid valve ..................................................................................................................626
17.20.12 Positioner .........................................................................................................................628
17.20.13 Soft starter .......................................................................................................................630
17.20.14 Soft starter with reversing contactor..................................................................................632
18 Dimension drawings ................................................................................................................... 635
18.1 3UF70 basic unit ..............................................................................................................636
18.1.1 SIMOCODE pro V PN basic unit 3UF7011 .......................................................................636
18.2 3UF710 current measuring module...................................................................................637
18.2.1 Current measuring module (through-hole converter) 3UF7100, 0.3 A to 3 A, 3UF7101,
2.4 A to 25 A ....................................................................................................................637
18.2.2 Current measuring module (through-hole converter) 3UF7102, 10 A to 100 A...................638
18.2.3 Current measuring module (through-hole converter) 3UF7103, 20 A to 200 A...................639
18.2.4 Current measuring module (bus connection) 3UF7103, 20 A to 200 A ..............................640
18.2.5 Current measuring module (bus connection) 3UF7104, 63 A to 630 A ..............................641
18.3 Current / voltage measuring modules ...............................................................................642
18.3.1 Current / voltage measuring module (through-hole converter) 3UF7110, 0.3 A to 3 A,
3UF7111, 2.4 A to 25 A ....................................................................................................642
18.3.2 Current measuring module (through-hole converter) 3UF7112, 10 A to 100 A...................643
18.3.3 Current measuring module (through-hole converter) 3UF7113-1AA, 20 A to 200 A ...........644
18.3.4 Current measuring module (bus connection) 3UF7113-1BA, 20 A to 200 A.......................645
18.3.5 Current measuring module (bus connection) 3UF7114, 63 A to 630 A ..............................646
18.4 3UF7200 and 3UF7210 operator panels ...........................................................................647
18.4.1 3UF7200 operator panel ...................................................................................................647
18.4.2 3UF7210 operator panel with display ................................................................................648
18.5 Expansion modules/decoupling module ............................................................................649
18.6 Digital modules DM-F Local, DM-PROFIsafe ....................................................................650
18.7 Accessories......................................................................................................................651
18.7.1 Door adapter ....................................................................................................................651
18.7.2 Operator panel adapter ....................................................................................................652
18.7.3 Initialization module ..........................................................................................................653
18.7.4 3UL23 residual current transformer ..................................................................................653
19 Technical data ........................................................................................................................... 655
19.1 Common technical data ....................................................................................................656
19.2 Technical data of the basic unit ........................................................................................658
19.3 Technical data of the current measuring modules or current / voltage measuring
modules ...........................................................................................................................661
19.4 Technical data of the decoupling module ..........................................................................663
19.5 Technical data of the expansion modules .........................................................................664
19.5.1 Technical data of the digital modules ................................................................................664
19.5.2 Technical data, digital modules DM-F Local and DM-F PROFIsafe ...................................665
19.5.3 Technical data of the DM-F LOCAL digital module ............................................................667
19.5.4 Technical data of the DM-F-PROFIsafe digital module ......................................................669
19.5.5 Safety-related technical data of the digital modules DM-F Local and DM-F PROFIsafe .....670

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

12 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Table of contents

19.5.6 Technical data of the analog module ............................................................................... 670

19.5.7 Technical data of the ground-fault module 3UF7500-1AA00-0 ......................................... 672
19.5.8 Technical data of the ground-fault module 3UF7510-1AA00-0 ......................................... 673
19.5.9 Technical data of the temperature module ....................................................................... 674
19.6 Technical data of the operator panels .............................................................................. 675
19.6.1 Technical data of the operator panel ................................................................................ 675
19.6.2 Technical data of the operator panel with display ............................................................. 676
19.7 Technical data compartment identification ....................................................................... 677
19.8 Short-circuit protection with fuses for motor feeders for short-circuit currents up to 100
kA and 690 V................................................................................................................... 678
19.9 Typical reaction times of SIMOCODE pro V PN device series .......................................... 683
20 Example circuits ........................................................................................................................ 685
20.1 Example circuits - purpose, steps, preconditions.............................................................. 686
20.2 "Overload relay" example circuit ...................................................................................... 687
20.2.1 "Overload relay" circuit diagram ....................................................................................... 687
20.2.2 "Overload relay" function circuit diagram.......................................................................... 688
20.3 "Direct-on-line starter" example circuit ............................................................................. 689
20.3.1 "Direct starter" circuit diagram.......................................................................................... 689
20.3.2 "Direct starter" function circuit diagram ............................................................................ 690
20.4 "Reversing starter" example circuit .................................................................................. 691
20.4.1 "Reversing starter" circuit diagram ................................................................................... 691
20.4.2 "Reversing starter" function circuit diagram ...................................................................... 692
20.5 "3VL molded-case circuit breaker (MCCB)" example circuit ............................................. 693
20.5.1 "3VL molded-case circuit breaker (MCCB)" circuit diagram .............................................. 693
20.5.2 "3VL molded-case circuit breaker (MCCB)" function circuit diagram ................................. 694
20.6 "Star-delta starter" circuit example ................................................................................... 695
20.6.1 "Star-delta starter" circuit diagram (current measuring in delta) ........................................ 695
20.6.2 "Star-delta starter" function circuit diagram (current measuring in delta) ........................... 696
20.6.3 "Star-delta starter" circuit diagram (current measuring in supply cable) ............................ 697
20.6.4 "Star-delta starter" function circuit diagram (current measuring in supply cable) ............... 698
20.7 "Star-delta reversing starter" circuit example.................................................................... 699
20.7.1 "Star delta reversing starter" circuit diagram .................................................................... 699
20.7.2 "Star-delta reversing starter" function circuit diagram ....................................................... 700
20.8 "Dahlander" circuit diagram ............................................................................................. 701
20.8.1 "Dahlander" circuit diagram ............................................................................................. 701
20.8.2 "Dahlander" function circuit diagram ................................................................................ 702
20.9 "Dahlander reversing starter" circuit diagram ................................................................... 703
20.9.1 "Dahlander reversing starter" circuit diagram ................................................................... 703
20.9.2 "Dahlander reversing starter" function circuit diagram ...................................................... 704
20.10 "Pole-changing starter" example circuit ............................................................................ 706
20.10.1 "Pole-changing starter" circuit diagram ............................................................................ 706
20.10.2 "Pole-changing starter" function circuit diagram ............................................................... 707
20.11 "Pole-changing reversing starter" circuit example............................................................. 708
20.11.1 "Pole-changing reversing starter" circuit diagram ............................................................. 708

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 13
Table of contents

20.11.2 "Pole-changing reversing starter" function circuit diagram .................................................709

20.12 "Solenoid valve" example circuit .......................................................................................711
20.12.1 "Solenoid valve" circuit diagram ........................................................................................711
20.12.2 "Solenoid valve" function circuit diagram...........................................................................712
20.13 "Positioner" example circuit ..............................................................................................713
20.13.1 "Positioner 1" circuit diagram ............................................................................................713
20.13.2 "Positioner 1" function circuit diagram ...............................................................................714
20.13.3 "Positioner 2" circuit diagram ............................................................................................715
20.13.4 "Positioner 2" function circuit diagram ...............................................................................716
20.13.5 "Positioner 3" circuit diagram ............................................................................................717
20.13.6 "Positioner 3" function circuit diagram ...............................................................................718
20.13.7 "Positioner 4" circuit diagram ............................................................................................719
20.13.8 "Positioner 4" function circuit diagram ...............................................................................720
20.13.9 "Positioner 5" circuit diagram ............................................................................................721
20.13.10 "Positioner 5" function circuit diagram ...............................................................................722
20.14 "Soft starter" (3RW402, 3RW403, 3RW404) example circuit .............................................723
20.14.1 Circuit diagram "Soft starter" (example 3RW402, 3RW403, 3RW404) ...............................723
20.14.2 Function circuit diagram "Soft starter" (example 3RW402, 3RW403, 3RW404) .................724
20.15 "Soft starter" (3RW405, 3RW407) example circuit.............................................................725
20.15.1 Circuit diagram "Soft starter" (example 3RW405, 3RW407) ..............................................725
20.15.2 Function circuit diagram "Soft starter" (example 3RW405, 3RW407).................................726
20.16 Circuit diagram "Soft starter with reversing contactor" (3RW402, 3RW403, 3RW404) .......727
20.16.1 Circuit diagram "Soft starter with reversing contactor" (3RW402, 3RW403, 3RW404) .......727
20.16.2 Function circuit diagram of "Soft starter with reversing contactor" (3RW402, 3RW403,
3RW404)..........................................................................................................................728
20.17 Example circuit "Soft starter with reversing contactor" (3RW405, 3RW407).......................729
20.17.1 Circuit diagram "Soft starter with reversing contactor" (3RW405, 3RW407).......................729
20.17.2 Function circuit diagram "Soft starter with reversing contactor" (3RW405, 3RW407) .........730
20.18 Example circuit "Direct-on-line starter for 1-phase loads" ..................................................731
20.18.1 Circuit diagram "Direct-on-line starter for 1-phase loads" ..................................................731
20.18.2 Function circuit diagram "Direct-on-line starter for 1-phase loads" .....................................732
21 Safety and commissioning information for EEx areas ..................................................................... 733
21.1 Information and standards ................................................................................................734
21.2 Set-up and commissioning ...............................................................................................736
21.2.1 Set-up and commissioning ...............................................................................................736
21.2.2 Setting the rated motor current .........................................................................................737
21.2.3 SIMOCODE pro with thermistor input ...............................................................................738
21.2.4 Sensor circuit wiring .........................................................................................................739
21.2.5 Short-circuit protection for type of coordination 2 according to IEC 60947-4-1 ...................740
21.2.6 Cable protection ...............................................................................................................740
21.2.7 Test..................................................................................................................................740
21.2.8 Further safety guidelines ..................................................................................................742
21.2.9 Ambient conditions ...........................................................................................................742
21.2.10 Safety data.......................................................................................................................742

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

14 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Table of contents

21.3 Maintenance and repairs ................................................................................................. 743

21.4 Warranty ......................................................................................................................... 743
21.5 Further information .......................................................................................................... 744
22 Compartment identification (PROFINET) ...................................................................................... 745
22.1 Introduction to compartment identification ........................................................................ 746
22.2 Hardware and software requirements for compartment identification ................................ 748
22.3 Operating compartment identification............................................................................... 749
22.4 Mounting, wiring, interfaces, compartment identification................................................... 753
22.5 Commissioning and service compartment identification ................................................... 756
22.6 Alarm, fault, and system events for compartment identification ........................................ 757
22.7 Dimension drawings compartment identification............................................................... 758
A List of abbreviations ................................................................................................................... 759
A.1 List of abbreviations ........................................................................................................ 759
B Appendix .................................................................................................................................. 763
B.1 Correction sheet .............................................................................................................. 763
Glossary................................................................................................................................... 765
Index ....................................................................................................................................... 785

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 15
Table of contents

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

16 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
Introduction 1
1.1 Important information

Purpose of this manual

The SIMOCODE pro system manual describes in detail the motor management system and
its functions. It contains information about configuring, commissioning, service and
maintenance. A typical example of a reversing starter application is used to teach the user
quickly and practically how to use the system.
In addition to help on how to identify and rectify faults in the event of a malfunction, the
manual also contains specific information for servicing and maintenance.
Furthermore, the manual contains circuit diagrams, dimension drawings and technical data
of the system components as configuring aids.

Required basic knowledge

To understand this manual you will require basic knowledge of low-voltage controls and
distribution, digital circuit engineering and automation technology.

Topics
This manual consists of instructive chapters for reference purposes. The following table lists
the most relevant topics. The highlighted topics correspond largely with the content structure
of the "SIMOCODE ES" parameterization and service software:

Topic Target group

System description Configuring engineers, planners
Short instructions for Configuring engineers, planners, technicians, commissioning engineers
commissioning a
reversing starter
Motor protection Configuring engineers, commissioning engineers
Motor control Configuring engineers, PLC programmers
Monitoring functions Configuring engineers, programmers, commissioning engineers, service
personnel
Outputs Configuring engineers, planners, programmers
Inputs Configuring engineers, planners, programmers
Analog value recording Configuring engineers, programmers, commissioning engineers, service
personnel
Standard functions Configuring engineers, programmers
Logic modules Configuring engineers, programmers
Communication Configuring engineers, PLC programmers

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 17
Introduction
1.1 Important information

Topic Target group

Mounting, wiring, Technicians, electricians, service and maintenance personnel
interfaces
Commissioning and Commissioning engineers, technicians, service and maintenance personnel
service
Alarm, fault, and Commissioning engineers, maintenance and service personnel, configuring
system events engineers, PLC programmers

Scope of application
This manual is applicable to the listed SIMOCODE pro system components. It contains a
description of the components applicable at the time of printing the manual. SIEMENS
reserves the right to include updated information about new components or new versions of
components in a Product Information.

Definitions
When reference is made to "SIMOCODE pro", the reference also includes the device series
"SIMOCODE pro V PN".

SIMOCODE pro response tables

Specific responses (deactivated, signaling, warning, tripping) can be parameterized for
various SIMOCODE pro functions, such as overload. These are always displayed in tabular
form:
● "X" = Applicable
● "—" = not applicable
● Default values are marked "d" for "default" in parentheses:

Response Function 1 Function 2 Function 3

Tripping — X (d) X
Warning X (d) X —
Signaling X X —
Deactivated X X X (d)
Delay 0 to 25.5 s (default: 0). — —

Brief description of the responses:

● Tripping: The contactor controls QE* are tripped. A fault message is generated which is
available as diagnostics via PROFINET. The fault message and the device-internal signal
remain on until the appropriate length of time has elapsed or the cause of the fault has
been eliminated and acknowledged.
● Warning: In addition to the device-internal signal, a warning signal is generated that is
available as diagnostics via PROFINET.

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

18 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Introduction
1.1 Important information

● Signaling: Only a device-internal signal is generated, which can be further processed as

required.
● Deactivated: The appropriate function is switched off, no signals are generated.
A delay time can also be set for specific responses.

Further information
● Please read the operating instructions of the respective components. You can find the
operating instructions for SIMOCODE pro at: SIMOCODE pro operating instructions
(http://www.siemens.com/sirius/manuals)
● You will need the following manuals in addition to this system manual:
– "Failsafe Digital Modules SIMOCODE pro Safety" manual
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/50564852)
– The appropriate manual for the DP master
You will find further information on the Internet:
● Internet (http://www.siemens.com/simocode)
● Information and Download Center (http://www.siemens.com/isirius/infomaterial)
● Product Information System (ProdIS) (http://www.siemens.com/sirius/support)
● Certificates (http://www.siemens.com/sirius/approvals)

Further support (Service and Support)

Technical Assistance (http://www.siemens.com/sirius/technical-assistance)
Telephone: +49 (0) 911-895-5900 (8 a.m. to 5 p.m. CET)
Fax: +49 (0) 911-895-59 07
E-Mail: [email protected]

Correction sheet
A correction sheet is included at the end of this manual. Please use it to enter your
suggestions for improvements, additions and corrections, and send it back to us. This will
help us to improve the next edition of the manual.

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 19
Introduction
1.1 Important information

Disclaimer of liability
The products described here have been developed to carry out safety-related functions as
part of a complete plant or machine. In general, a complete safety system consists of
sensors, evaluation units, signaling devices and methods for safe tripping. The manufacturer
is responsible for ensuring safe functioning of the complete plant or machine. Siemens AG,
its subsidiaries, and associated companies (hereinafter referred to as "Siemens") are not in a
position to guarantee every characteristic of a complete plant or machine not designed by
Siemens.
Siemens also denies all responsibility for any recommendations that are made or implied in
the following description. No new guarantee, warranty, or liability claims above those
standard to Siemens can be derived from the following description.

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

20 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Introduction
1.2 IT security information

1.2 IT security information

Siemens provides products and solution with industrial security functions that support the
secure operation of plants, solutions, machines, equipment, and/or networks. They are
important components of a holistic industrial security concept. The products and solutions
from Siemens are continuously developed with this aspect in mind. Siemens recommends
that you inform yourself regularly about product updates.
For the secure operation of Siemens products and solutions, it is necessary to take suitable
preventive action (e.g. cell protection concept) and integrate each component into a holistic,
state-of-the-art industrial security concept. Third-party products that may be in use should
also be considered. You will find more information about industrial security at Industrial
Security (http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity).
To stay informed about product updates as they occur, sign up for a product-specific
newsletter. You will find more information on this at Support
(http://support.automation.siemens.com).

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 21
Introduction
1.3 Current information about operational safety

1.3 Current information about operational safety

Important note for maintaining operational safety of your system

DANGER
Hazardous Voltage
Can Cause Death, Serious Injury or Risk of Property Damage
Please take note of our latest information!
Systems with safety-related characteristics are subject to special operational safety
requirements on the part of the operator. The supplier is also obliged to comply with special
product monitoring measures. For this reason, we publish a special newsletter containing
information on product developments and features that are (or could be) relevant to
operation of safety-related systems. By subscribing to the appropriate newsletter in the
Industry newsletter system (http://www.siemens.com/industrial-controls/newsletter), you will
ensure that you are always up-to-date and able to make changes to your system, when
necessary. Sign on to the following newsletter under "Products & Solutions":
• Control Components and System Engineering News
• Safety Integrated Newsletter.

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

22 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
System description 2
In this chapter
In this chapter you will find an introduction and general information about the
SIMOCODE pro system including e.g.
● Properties of the SIMOCODE pro V PN device series
● Simplification of SIMOCODE pro circuits
● Overview of functions
● An overview of system components

Target groups
This chapter addresses the following target groups:
● Planners and configuring engineers
● Commissioning engineers, service and maintenance personnel
● System integrators/process technology

Required knowledge
You will require the following knowledge:
● Basic knowledge about load feeders
● Basic knowledge about motor protection
● Basic knowledge of control engineering
● Basic knowledge of industrial bus technology

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 23
System description
2.1 Overview

2.1 Overview

Overview
SIMOCODE pro (SIRIUS Motor Management and Control Device) is a flexible and modular
motor management system for motors with constant speeds in low-voltage applications. It
optimizes the link between the control system and the motor feeder, increases plant
availability and allows significant savings to be made during installation, commissioning,
operation and maintenance. SIMOCODE pro is installed in the low-voltage switchgear
system and links the higher-level automation system (via PROFINET) and the motor feeder
intelligently. It comprises the following functions:
● Multifunctional, solid-state full motor protection which is independent of the automation
system
● Integrated control functions for motor control (instead of hardware)
● Detailed operating, service and diagnostics data
● Open communication via Ethernet/PROFINET
● Parameterization with the SIMOCODE ES software package.
Only the switching and short-circuit protection mechanisms of the main circuit (contactors,
circuit breakers, fuses) are additionally needed.

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

24 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 System description
2.2 Benefits

2.2 Benefits

Benefits
● The quantity of cabling required between the motor feeder and the PLC is reduced
significantly by connecting the entire motor feeder to the process control system via the
bus (see Fig. "SIMOCODE pro, integrated in the main circuit, control circuit and at
automation level (PLC)")
● Automated processes are decentralized by means of configurable control and monitoring
functions in the feeder. This saves automation system resources and ensures that the
feeder is fully functional and protected even if the control system or bus system fails.
● By recording and monitoring operating, service and diagnostics data in the feeder and
process control system, plant availability is increased, and the feeder is easier to service
and maintain.
● The user can implement plant-specific requirements for every motor feeder thanks to the
high degree of modularity.
● SIMOCODE pro provides compact solutions and different levels of functions for every
customer application.
● By replacing the control circuit hardware with an integrated control function, the quantity
of required hardware components with wiring is reduced. This drives down storage costs
and limits potential wiring errors.
● Using electronic full motor protection allows the motors to be used more efficiently and
ensures that the tripping characteristic remains stable and the tripping response stays the
same, even after many years.

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 25
System description
2.2 Benefits

Figure 2-1 SIMOCODE pro, integrated in the main circuit, control circuit and at automation level (PLC)

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

26 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 System description
2.3 Features

2.3 Features

Features

Multifunctional, solid-state full motor protection for rated motor currents up to 820 A
SIMOCODE pro provides comprehensive protection of the motor feeder by means of a
combination of delayable, multi-level protection and monitoring functions:
● Current-dependent electronic overload protection (CLASS 5 to 40) (see Chapter Overload
protection (Page 161))
● Thermistor motor protection (see Chapter Thermistor protection (Page 172))
● Phase failure/phase unbalance protection (see Chapter Unbalance protection
(Page 170))
● Stalled rotor protection (see Chapter Stalled rotor protection (Page 171))
● Monitoring of adjustable limit values for the motor current (see Chapter Current limit
monitoring (Page 257))
● Voltage monitoring (see Chapter Voltage monitoring (Page 261))
● Power monitoring (see Chapter Active power monitoring (Page 266))
● Monitoring of cos phi (no-load operation/load shedding) (see Chapter Cos phi monitoring
(Page 264))
● Ground-fault monitoring (see Chapter Earth-fault monitoring (Page 248))
● Temperature monitoring, e.g. using Pt100 / Pt1000 (see Chapter Temperature monitoring
(Page 276))
● Monitoring of operating hours (see Chapter Operating hours monitoring (Page 273))
● Motor stop time monitoring (see Chapter Motor stop time monitoring (Page 274))
● Monitoring the number of starts within a specific period of time (see Chapter Monitoring
the number of starts (Page 274))
● Safety-related tripping of motor feeders, e.g. fail-safe tripping in the process industry,
locally or via PROFINET (see system manual SIMOCODE pro Safety fail-safe digital
modules (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/50564852))

Recording of measured curves

SIMOCODE pro is able to record measured curves and can, for example, illustrate the
characteristic curve of the motor current during motor startup. For additional information on
this topic, refer to the Analog value recording (Page 319) section.

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 27
System description
2.3 Features

Flexible motor control with integrated control functions (instead of extensive hardware
interlocks):
SIMOCODE pro has many pre-defined, integrated motor control functions, including all
necessary connections and interlocks:
● Overload relays (see Chapter "Overload relay" control function (Page 196))
● Direct starters (see Chapter "Direct starter" control function (Page 198))
● Reversing starters (see Chapter "Reversing starter" control function (Page 200))
● Star-delta starters, possibly combined with reversing starters (see Chapters "Star-delta
starter" control function (Page 206) and "Star delta reversing starter" control function
(Page 210))
● Two speeds, motors with separate windings (pole-changing starters), possibly combined
with reversing starter (see Chapters "Pole-changing starter" control function (Page 221)
and "Pole-changing reversing starter" control function (Page 224))
● Two speeds, motors with separate Dahlander windings, possibly combined with reversing
starter (see Chapters "Dahlander" control function (Page 214) and "Dahlander reversing
starter" control function (Page 217))
● Positioner control (see Chapter "Positioner" control function (Page 231))
● Solenoid valve control (see Chapter "Solenoid valve" control function (Page 228))
● Circuit breaker control (see Chapter "Molded case circuit breaker (MCCB)" control
function (Page 203))
● Soft starter control, possibly combined with reversing starter (see Chapters "Soft starter"
control function (Page 236) and "Soft starter with reversing contactor" control function
(Page 239))
These control functions are pre-defined in SIMOCODE pro and can be assigned freely to
device inputs and outputs (including PROFINET).
These pre-defined control functions can also be adjusted flexibly to meet customer
requirements of the motor feeder, without requiring additional auxiliary relays in the control
circuit. This is achieved by means of freely parameterizable logic modules (truth tables,
counters, timers, pulse width modulators, etc.) (see Chapter Logic modules (Page 351)) and
standard functions (power failure monitoring, emergency start, external fault monitoring) (see
Chapter Standard functions (Page 323)).

Detailed operating, service and diagnostics data:

SIMOCODE pro provides a range of operating, service and diagnostics data and helps to
detect impending faults in good time and stop these occurring with preventative measures. If
a fault occurs, it can be diagnosed, traced and resolved within a short period of time. Plant
downtime is thus reduced to a minimum or does not occur at all. See Chapter Overview of
functions (Page 41).

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

28 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 System description
2.3 Features

Communication
SIMOCODE pro V PN has an integrated PROFINET interface and provides communication
functions via PROFINET IO with the following properties:
● Integrated switch with two ports
● Device replacement without removable medium/programming device
● Shared device
● Media redundancy
● RT communication
● Support for PROFIenergy
See Chapter Communication (Page 387).

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 29
System description
2.4 Areas of application

2.4 Areas of application

Areas of application
SIMOCODE pro is often used for automated processes where plant downtimes are very
expensive (e.g. steel or cement industry) and where it is important to prevent plant
downtimes through detailed operating, service and diagnostics data or to localize the fault
very quickly in the event of a fault.
SIMOCODE pro is modular and space-saving and suited especially for operation in motor
control centers (MCC) in the process industry and in power plants.
Protection and control of motors:
● In potentially explosive areas for type of protection EEx e/d according to ATEX directive
94 / 9 / EC (see also Chapter Safety and commissioning information for EEx areas
(Page 733))
● Heavy-starting motors (paper, cement and metal industries; water management)
● In high-availability plants (chemical, oil, and raw material processing industry, power
plants)
SIMOCODE pro is especially designed for the chemical industry (including oil and gas), the
steel industry, water management, and the paper, pharmaceutical, cement and glass
industries. Further applications include power plant engineering and diamond, gold and
platinum mines. Based on the experience gained with the predecessor system
SIMOCODE DP, SIMOCODE pro has been tailored even more specifically to the
requirements of these industries. The availability of motors and thus the entire process plays
an important role in these industries. Downtimes caused by faults often lead to high costs.
This is why it is even more important to detect potential faults early on and to initiate
targeted, preventative measures. SIMOCODE pro provides the user with a motor
management system based on years of experience and the latest technology.

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

30 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 System description
2.5 SIMOCODE pro V PN device series

2.5 SIMOCODE pro V PN device series

SIMOCODE pro V PN basic unit

For the SIMOCODE system, not only the basic unit with PROFINET communication
(SIMOCODE pro V PN), but also basic units with PROFIBUS DP communication are
available (SIMOCODE pro C, SIMOCODE pro S and SIMOCODE pro V). See SIMOCODE
pro PROFIBUS System Manual
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/20017780).
For each feeder, every system comprises a basic unit and a separate current measuring
module. Both modules are connected to each other electrically via the system interface, by
means of a connecting cable, and can be installed together as a unit (behind one another) or
separately (side-by-side). An operator panel can also be connected optionally via the second
system interface on the basic unit, and installed in the control cabinet door. Both the current
measuring module and the operator panel are connected to the basic unit via connecting
cables, which also supply the power. More inputs, outputs and functions can be added to the
SIMOCODE pro S and SIMOCODE pro V basic units by means of optional expansion
modules, thus supplementing the inputs and outputs already existing on the basic unit. All
modules are interconnected by connecting cables. The connecting cables are available with
different lengths (ribbon cable 0.025 m, 0.1 m, 0.3 m, 0.5 m; round cable 0.5 m, 1.0 m,
2.5 m).

NOTICE
Maximum length of connecting cables
The total length of all connecting cables must not exceed 3 m on either of the system
interfaces of the basic unit!

NOTICE
The maximum distance between modules
The maximum distance between modules (e.g. between the basic unit and the current
measuring module) must not exceed 2.5 m.

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 31
System description
2.5 SIMOCODE pro V PN device series

Additional control programs (star-delta starters, Dahlanders, pole-changing starters, soft

starters) are integrated in SIMOCODE pro V, each program also possible in combination
with reversing starter, solenoid valve and positioner). SIMOCODE pro V is also particularly
versatile. Its functionality can be expanded, if required, for example:
● The number and type of binary inputs and outputs can be increased and adapted in
stages
● A current / voltage measuring module can be used for additional voltage measurement
and for monitoring power-related measured values (power management)
● A temperature module enables the evaluation of several analog temperature sensors
● A ground-fault detection system can be integrated together with a residual current
transformer
● An analog module expands the system by additional analog inputs and outputs, for
example, for fill-level or flow-rate monitoring
● An operator panel with display (OPD) is available as an alternative to the standard
operator panel (OP)

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

32 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 System description
2.6 Independent operation

2.6 Independent operation

Independent operation
SIMOCODE pro V PN protects and controls the motor feeder independently of the
automation system. Even if the automation system (PLC) fails, or if communication is
disrupted, the motor feeder remains fully protected and controllable. SIMOCODE pro V PN
can be used without a connection to the PROFINET. This can easily be connected later, if
required.

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 33
System description
2.7 Typical configuration

2.7 Typical configuration

Typical configuration
The following schematic shows a typical SIMOCODE pro V PN hardware configuration:

Figure 2-2 Typical SIMOCODE pro V PN hardware configuration

For information about system components, see Chapter Description of system components
(Page 60).

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

34 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 System description
2.8 Simplifying configuration with SIMOCODE pro

2.8 Simplifying configuration with SIMOCODE pro

Conventional configuration without SIMOCODE pro

Individual components are used for control, monitoring and signal pre-processing. The
component and wiring requirements for this type of configuration are as follows:
● Use and wiring of overload relays, thermistor evaluation devices, current transformers
and analog/digital converters
● Wiring of the control circuit
● Connection of start/stop control devices
● The contactor must be brought into locking mode via the auxiliary switches
● Wiring of the interlocks
The following figure illustrates the conventional configuration of a direct starter:

Figure 2-3 Conventional configuration of a motor feeder (direct starter)

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 35
System description
2.8 Simplifying configuration with SIMOCODE pro

Configuration with SIMOCODE pro

All control, monitoring and signal pre-processing functions are only performed by
SIMOCODE pro. This provides the following advantages:
● Additional overload relays, thermistor evaluation devices, current transformers and
analog/digital converters are not necessary
● The wiring of the control circuit (interlocking) is simplified
● The start and stop switches are wired directly to the inputs of the basic unit
● The contactor coil is energized via the output of the basic unit. An auxiliary contact for
locking is not required
The following figure illustrates a configuration with SIMOCODE pro:

Figure 2-4 Configuration of a load feeder (direct starter) with SIMOCODE pro

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

36 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 System description
2.9 Application example

2.9 Application example

Description
The fill level of a liquid container is being monitored. A pump keeps the liquid level (reference
value) almost constant by pumping more liquid into the container. The fill level (actual value)
is measured by the fill level indicator and output as an analog signal. When the fill level sinks
below a specific level, the pump is switched on by SIMOCODE pro. Liquid is pumped in until
the reference value is re-attained. The pump is then switched off.

Controlling the pump

The pump can be controlled as follows:
● Locally: Local control [LC] station for manual switching on and off (by visual contact)
● In the control cabinet door: Control station operator panel [OP] for manual switching on
and off
● At automation level: Control station PLC / PCS (DP) for remote-controlled switching on
and off (automatic operation) via PROFINET
● Via SIMOCODE pro, by means of internal fill-level or limit value monitoring

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 37
System description
2.9 Application example

Schematic

Figure 2-5 Schematic of a typical application example

Recording, displaying and evaluating measured values

The following measured values are required for monitoring the process:
● Motor current of the pump is measured by the current measuring module.
● Analog value of the fill-level sensor is acquired by the analog module
The measured values are evaluated directly by SIMOCODE pro and/or transferred via
PROFINET to the PLC/PCS.
Any measured value can be output via the analog module, e.g. the actual motor current to a
connected pointer instrument.
Optionally, a laptop with the SIMOCODE ES software, for example, can be connected to the
operator panel so that further process data can be locally evaluated.

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

38 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 System description
2.10 Check list for selecting a device series

2.10 Check list for selecting a device series

The following check list should help you decide upon the optimum device series for your
requirements:

Function/component pro C pro S pro V pro V PN

Control functions Intelligent overload relay ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Direct starter, reversing starter ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Star-delta starter — ✓ ✓ ✓
Dahlander — — ✓ ✓
Pole-changing starter — — ✓ ✓
Soft starter — ✓ ✓ ✓
Solenoid valve — — ✓ ✓
Positioner — — ✓ ✓
Can be combined with reversing function — — ✓ ✓
Protection functions Overload protection ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Thermistor motor protection with PTC ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
(binary)
Stalled rotor ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Unbalance ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Phase failure ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Measurement functions Current measurement ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Current / voltage / power measurement — — ✓ ✓
Monitoring functions Current limits ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Ground-fault monitoring (internal) ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Ground-fault monitoring (residual current — ✓ ✓ ✓
transformer)
Voltage monitoring — — ✓ ✓
Temperature monitoring — ✓ ✓ ✓
Active power monitoring — — ✓ ✓
Cos phi monitoring — — ✓ ✓
Monitoring operating hours, motor stop ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
time and number of starts
Monitoring additional process variables via — — ✓ ✓
the analog module
Phase sequence detection — — ✓ ✓
Monitoring any measured values using — — ✓ ✓
unrestricted limit monitors
Safety functions Safety-related tripping — — ✓ ✓
Number of inputs/outputs Number of digital inputs of basic unit 4 4 4 4
Max. number of digital inputs with 4 8 12 12
expansion modules
Number of outputs of basic unit 3 2 3 3
Max. number of digital outputs with 3 4 7 7
expansion modules

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 39
System description
2.10 Check list for selecting a device series

Function/component pro C pro S pro V pro V PN

Expansion modules Multifunction module; monostable relay; — ✓ — —
24 V DC inputs, temperature
measurement, ground-fault monitoring
Multifunction module; monostable relay; — ✓ — —
110 - 240 V AC/DC inputs, temperature
measurement, ground-fault monitoring
Digital module; monostable relay; 24 V DC — — ✓ ✓
inputs
Digital module; bistable relay; 24 V DC — — ✓ ✓
inputs
Digital module; monostable relay; — — ✓ ✓
110 to 240 V AC/DC inputs
Digital module; bistable relay; 110 to 240 V — — ✓ ✓
AC/DC inputs
DM-F LOCAL fail-safe digital module — — ✓ ✓
DM-F PROFIsafe fail-safe digital module — — ✓ ✓
Analog module: — — ✓ ✓
Measuring, processing and outputting
analog values
Ground-fault module: — — ✓ ✓
Residual current monitoring using a
residual current transformer
Temperature module: — — ✓ ✓
Analog temperature monitoring of three
measuring circuits with NTC, PT100,
PT1000, and KTY

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

40 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 System description
2.11 Overview of functions

2.11 Overview of functions

2.11.1 Protection functions

Detailed description: See Chapter Motor protection (Page 157).

Overload protection
Current-dependent electronic protection of three-phase and AC motors with adjustable
tripping characteristics (class times) according to IEC 60947-4-1 requirements.

Unbalance protection
Protects motors from excessive temperatures caused by excessive phase unbalance.

Phase failure protection

Protects motors from excessive temperatures caused by phase failure.

Stalled rotor protection

Immediate trip after the motor current overshoots an adjustable threshold.

Thermistor protection
The SIMOCODE pro V PN basic unit provides the option of connecting thermistor sensors
(binary PTC) for monitoring the motor temperature.

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 41
System description
2.11 Overview of functions

2.11.2 Monitoring functions

Detailed description: See Chapter Monitoring functions (Page 247) and Logic modules
(Page 351).

Current limit monitoring

Current limit monitoring is used for process monitoring. This enables incipient anomalies in
the system to be detected in good time. If a current limit is exceeded but is still below the
overload limit, it can, for example, indicate a dirty filter on a pump, or an increasingly
sluggish motor bearing. If the current limit is undershot, it can be the first sign of a worn-out
drive motor belt.

Ground-fault monitoring
Residual current monitoring relays are used in industry to
● Protect systems from damage caused by residual currents
● Prevent production losses caused by unplanned downtime
● Perform maintenance to meet all demands
Basic units have:
● An internal ground-fault monitoring system: For motors with a 3-wire connection, the
basic unit calculates a possible residual current / ground-fault current from the total
current via current measuring modules or current / voltage measuring modules. Internal
ground-fault monitoring is only possible for motors with a 3-phase connection in power
systems that are either grounded solidly or grounded with low impedance.
● External ground-fault monitoring with SIMOCODE pro V PN 4): The external ground-fault
monitoring using 3UL23 residual current transformer and ground-fault module is normally
used in the following cases:
– In cases in which power systems are grounded with high impedance
– Where precise measurement of the ground-fault current is necessary, e.g. for the
purpose of condition monitoring
A ground-fault module can be used to create an additional input on the
SIMOCODE pro V PN basic unit to connect a 3UL23 residual current transformer.
With ground-fault detection using the 3UL23 residual current transformer, it is possible to
determine the precise residual current as a measured value, and to define freely
selectable warning and trip limits in a wide range from 30 mA - 40 A.
See also External ground-fault monitoring (with residual current transformer 3UL23)
(Page 254) for more information.

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

42 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 System description
2.11 Overview of functions

Voltage monitoring1)
SIMOCODE pro V PN allows voltage monitoring of a three-phase current network or a
single-phase network for undervoltage or further availability:
● Monitoring for undervoltage: Two-level monitoring for freely selectable limits. The
response of SIMOCODE pro V PN on reaching a prewarning level or trip level can be
freely parameterized.
● Monitoring for further availability: Even when the motor is switched off,
SIMOCODE pro V PN can indicate the further availability of the feeder by measuring the
voltage directly at the circuit breaker or fuses.

Temperature monitoring 2)
Using the SIMOCODE pro V PN temperature module, it is possible to implement an analog
temperature monitoring system in order to monitor, for example, the motor windings or
bearings by up to 3 sensor measuring circuits. SIMOCODE pro V PN supports two-level
overtemperature monitoring for freely selectable limit values. The response of
SIMOCODE pro on reaching a prewarning level or trip level can be freely parameterized and
delayed. Temperature monitoring takes into account the highest temperature of all the
sensor measuring circuits in use.

Active power monitoring1)

The active power curve of a motor reflects its actual load. Excess load results in increased
wear of the motor and, thus, may lead to premature motor failure. Insufficient active power
can, for example, be a sign of no-load motor operation.
SIMOCODE pro V PN allows two-level active power monitoring for freely selectable upper
and lower limits. The response of SIMOCODE pro V PN on reaching a prewarning level or
trip level can be freely parameterized and delayed.

Cos phi monitoring1)

The power factor fluctuates more than either the motor current or the active power does,
particularly in the low-end performance range of a motor. Monitoring the power factor is
therefore a particularly suitable way of distinguishing between no-load motor operation and
faults, e.g. a broken drive belt or drive shaft.
SIMOCODE pro V PN enables two-level monitoring of the power factor (cos phi) for freely
selectable minimum limits. The response of SIMOCODE pro V PN on reaching a prewarning
level or trip level can be freely parameterized and delayed.

Monitoring operating hours, motor stop time and number of starts

SIMOCODE pro V PN can monitor the operating hours and stop times of a motor in order to
avoid plant downtimes due to failed motors caused by either running too long (wearing out)
or being stopped for too long. For example, if an adjustable limit value is exceeded, a
message indicating that the relevant motor requires maintenance or replacement can be
generated. After replacing the motor, the operating hours and motor stop times can be reset.
To avoid excessive thermal strain and premature aging of a motor, the number of motor
starts in a selected time frame can be limited. The limited number of possible starts can be
indicated by prewarnings.

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 43
System description
2.11 Overview of functions

Monitoring additional process variables via the analog module 3)

SIMOCODE pro V PN allows measuring and monitoring of any other process variables via
the analog module.
For example, the fill level can be monitored to protect a pump against dry operation, or a
differential pressure transducer can be used to monitor the degree of pollution in a filter. If
the fill level undershoots a specified level, the pump can be switched off and, if a specific
differential pressure value is exceeded, the filter must be cleaned.
SIMOCODE pro V PN supports two-level monitoring of the corresponding process variable
for freely selectable upper and lower limits. The response of SIMOCODE pro V PN on
reaching a prewarning level or trip level can be freely parameterized and delayed.

Phase sequence identification1)

SIMOCODE pro allows the direction of rotation of a motor to be determined by identification
of the phase sequence. If the direction of rotation is wrong, a signal can be generated or the
motor switched off. See Chapter Menu of the operator panel with display (Page 70).

Monitoring any measured values using unrestricted limit monitors

SIMOCODE pro can monitor every measured value in the system for undershooting or
overshooting a set threshold value by means of unrestricted limit monitors. See section
"Limit monitor."

1) For use with current / voltage measuring module

2) Temperature module additionally required
3) Analog module additionally required
4) Ground-fault module and residual current transformer additionally required

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

44 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 System description
2.11 Overview of functions

2.11.3 Safety-oriented tripping

Safety-related tripping
The SIMOCODE pro V PN motor management system has two modules for the safety-
related tripping of motors:
● DM-F local fail-safe digital module For applications requiring safety-related tripping of a
motor feeder via a hardware signal that is acquired and evaluated by the module.
● DM-F PROFIsafe fail-safe digital module: For applications requiring safety-related tripping
of a motor feeder by a fail-safe control (F-CPU) via PROFINET with the fail-safe
PROFIsafe profile.
These modules fulfill the general requirements for EMERGENCY STOP mechanisms or
safety circuits, as described in EN 418 and EN 60204-1 (06.2006).
Depending on the external circuit, the following Performance Level/Safety Integrity Level can
be achieved:
● PL e with Category 4 according to ISO 13849-1
● SIL 3 according to IEC 61508/62061
Safety technology and safety-related functions
● Are exclusively restricted to the fail-safe digital modules
● Do not directly affect existing SIMOCODE pro components and concepts

A more detailed description is provided in the documentation listed below:

● Handbuch "Fehlersichere Digitalmodule SIMOCODE pro Safety" (German)
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/de/50564852)
● Manual "Fail-Safe Digital Modules SIMOCODE pro Safety" (English)
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/de/50564852/0/en)
● Manuel "Modules TOR de sécurité SIMOCODE pro Safety" (French)
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/de/50564852/0/fr)
● Manual "Módulos digitales de seguridad SIMOCODE pro Safety " (Spanish)
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/de/50564852/0/es)
● Operating Instructions "Fail-safe Digital Module DM-F Local"
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/49222263)
● Operating Instructions "Fail-safe Digital Module DM-F PROFIsafe"
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/49222281)

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 45
System description
2.11 Overview of functions

You will find the System Manuals and Operating Instructions at Manuals/operating
instructions (http://www.siemens.com/sirius/manuals)

CAUTION
Loss of safety function is possible
Always only use an SELV or PELV power supply unit for the 24 V DC power supply!
For capacitive and inductive loads, an adequate protective circuit is required!

2.11.4 Control functions

The following parameterizable control functions are available:

Table 2- 1 Control functions

Control function SIMOCODE pro V PN

Overload relay ✓
Direct starter ✓
Reversing starter ✓
Molded-case circuit breaker (MCCB) ✓
Star-delta starter, combinable with reversing starter ✓
Dahlander starter, combinable with reversing starter ✓
Pole-changing starter, combinable with reversing starter ✓
Solenoid valve ✓
Positioner ✓
Soft starter, combinable with reversing starter ✓

All the necessary protection functions and interlocks are already available and can be flexibly
adapted and expanded.
For a detailed description of the individual control functions: See Chapter Motor control
(Page 175).

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

46 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 System description
2.11 Overview of functions

2.11.5 ETHERNET communication

PROFINET IO
SIMOCODE pro V PN has integrated PROFINET IO device communication functions, such
as:
● Integrated switch with two RJ45 ports
● Ethernet services: ping, arp, network diagnostics (SNMP) / BIB-2, LLDP, NTP
● Port diagnostics
● Deactivation of ports
● Media redundancy
● Shared device
● Device replacement without PG/PC
● I/O data
● Diagnostics and maintenance alarms
● Data records
● PROFIenergy
● PROFIsafe
Detailed description: See Chapter Communication (Page 387).

OPC UA
In addition to the PROFINET IO device communication functions, SIMOCODE pro V PN also
has OPC UA server functions. Using these functions, an OPC UA client can access
SIMOCODE pro V PN data.
Detailed description: See Chapter Communication (Page 387).

Web server
In addition to the PROFINET IO device communication functions, SIMOCODE pro V PN has
an integrated web server function that permits access to the service and diagnostic data
from a PC on which a web browser is installed.
Detailed description: See Chapter Communication (Page 387).

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 47
System description
2.11 Overview of functions

2.11.6 Standard functions

Standard functions are pre-defined functions that can be easily activated, e.g. time-
staggered restart of the drives after a power failure. SIMOCODE pro has the following
standard functions:

Table 2- 2 Standard functions

Standard function SIMOCODE pro V PN

Number
Test 2
Reset 3
Test position feedback (TPF) 1
External fault 6
Operational Protection OFF (OPO) 1
Power failure monitoring (UVO) 1
Emergency start 1
Watchdog (PLC/PCS monitoring) 1
Safety-related tripping "Local" 1

Detailed description: See Chapter Standard functions (Page 323).

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

48 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 System description
2.11 Overview of functions

2.11.7 Freely programmable logic modules

If you need any other additional functions for your application, you can use the freely
programmable logic modules. These can be used, for example, to implement logical
operations, time relay functions and counter functions. Limit monitors can monitor any value
in SIMOCODE pro for undershooting or overshooting of a freely selected limit. Depending on
the device series, the system provides several freely parameterizable logic modules:

Table 2- 3 Freely programmable logic modules

Logic module SIMOCODE pro V PN

Number
Truth tables 3 inputs /1 output 8
Truth tables 2 inputs /1 output 2
Truth tables 5 inputs / 2 outputs 1
Timer 6
Counter 6
Signal conditioning 6
Non-volatile elements 4
Flashing 3
Flicker 3
Limit monitor 6
Calculation modules (calculators) 4
Analog multiplexer 1
Pulse width modulator PWM 1

Detailed description: See Chapter Logic modules (Page 351).

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 49
System description
2.11 Overview of functions

2.11.8 Operating, service and diagnostics data

SIMOCODE pro supplies a large amount of detailed operating, service and diagnostics data.

Operating data
● Motor switching state (ON, OFF, LEFT, RIGHT, SLOW, FAST), derived from the current
flow in the main circuit: thus, feedback via auxiliary contacts of circuit breakers and
contactors is not necessary.
● Current in phases 1, 2 and 3 and maximum current in % of set current
● Voltage in phases 1, 2 and 3 in V 2)
● Active power in W 2)
● Apparent power in VA 2)
● Power factor in % 2)
● Phase unbalance in %
● Phase sequence 2)
● Ground-fault current 7)
● Temperature in the respective sensor measuring circuits, and maximum temperature in
K 1) 4)
● Actual analog signal values 1) 5)
● Time to trip in s
● Temperature rise for motor model in %
● Remaining cooling down period of the motor in s, etc.
It is possible to adapt the units via the device-internal conversion of individual measured
values with the help of the logic modules (calculators) provided by SIMOCODE pro V PN.
For example, the temperature recorded by SIMOCODE pro can be calculated in either °F or
°C and transmitted to the automation system via PROFINET.

Service data
Among other things, SIMOCODE pro provides the following relevant data for maintenance:
● Number of motor operating hours, also resettable
● Motor stop times, also resettable
● Number of motor starts, also resettable
● Number of permissible starts remaining
● Number of overload trips, also resettable
● Feeder power consumption in kWh, also resettable3)
● Internal feeder-related comments stored in the device, e.g. information regarding
maintenance events, etc.
● Safety-related tripping monitoring in h, also resettable6)

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

50 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 System description
2.11 Overview of functions

Diagnostics data
● Numerous detailed early warning and fault messages, also for further processing in the
device or in the control system
● Device-internal error logging with time stamp
● Value of the last trip current
● Feedback faults (e.g. no current flow in the main circuit after switch-on command), etc.
● "Local" and "PROFIsafe" diagnostic messages

1) When using SIMOCODE pro V PN basic unit

2) When using SIMOCODE pro V PN basic unit with current / voltage measuring module
3) When using SIMOCODE pro V PN basic unit with current / voltage measuring module
4) When using SIMOCODE pro V PN basic unit with 3UF77 temperature module
5) Analog module additionally required
6) SIMOCODE pro V PN together with DM-F
7) When using SIMOCODE pro V basic unit with 3UF7510 ground-fault module

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 51
System description
2.12 An overview of system components

2.12 An overview of system components

Devices
Selection and ordering data: See also Catalog IC 10. You will find this catalog at Technical
documentation (http://www.siemens.com/sirius/infomaterial)

Table 2- 4 System components, devices

System component Control supply MLFB Diagram Number that can be

voltage connected
Basic unit (BU)
SIMOCODE pro V PN basic unit —
The variable system for PROFINET with extensive functions.
4 inputs/3 outputs freely parameterizable, input for thermistor, monostable
relay outputs, expandable with expansion modules
24 V DC 3UF7011-1AB000
110- 3UF7011-1AU000
240 V AC/DC
Operator panel (OP)
Installation in control cabinet door or front plate, for connection to basic unit,
system interface for connecting a PC, 10 LEDs for status indication and user-
assignable buttons for controlling the motor.
— 3UF7 200-1AA00-0 1
— 3UF7 200-1AA01-0 1
Operator panel with display (OPD)
Installation in control cabinet door or front panel, for connection to a pro V PN
basic unit, system interface for connecting a PC, 7 LEDs for status indication
and user-assignable buttons for controlling the motor, multiple-language
display, e.g. for indication of measured values, status information or fault
messages.
— 3UF7 210-1AA00 1
Current measuring module (IM)
Current measuring with through-hole or bus connection system.
0.3 A to 3 A (through-hole — 3UF7 100-1AA00-0 1
transformer) 3UF7 101-1AA00-0 1
2.4 A to 25 A (through-hole 3UF7 102-1AA00-0 1
transformer)
3UF7 103-1AA00-0 1
10 A to 100 A (through-hole
3UF7 103-1BA00-0 1
transformer)
3UF7 104-1BA00-0 1
20 A to 200 A (through-hole
transformer)
20 A to 200 A (bus
connection)
63 A to 630 A (bus
connection)

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

52 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 System description
2.12 An overview of system components

System component Control supply MLFB Diagram Number that can be

voltage connected
Current / voltage measuring module (UM)
Can only be mounted next to the basic unit, otherwise like current measuring
modules.
Additionally:
• Voltage measurement
• Power measurement
• Power factor (cos phi) measurement
• Phase sequence
0.3 A to 3 A (through-hole — 3UF7 110-1AA00-0 1
transformer) 3UF7 111-1AA00-0 1
2.4 A to 25 A (through-hole 3UF7 112-1AA00-0 1
transformer)
3UF7 113-1AA00-0 1
10 A to 100 A (through-hole
3UF7 113-1BA00-0 1
transformer)
3UF7 114-1BA00-0 1
20 A to 200 A (through-hole
transformer)
20 A to 200 A (bus
connection)
63 A to 630 A (bus
connection)
Decoupling module (DCM)
For connecting on the line side of a current/voltage measurement module at
the system interface for use of voltage measurement in isolated-neutral
systems, systems with high-impedance resistive or asymmetrical grounding,
and in single-phase systems.
— 3UF7 150-1AA00-0 —
Digital modules (DM)
Up to two digital modules can be used to add additional binary inputs and relay
outputs to the basic unit. The input circuits of the digital modules are supplied
from an external power supply.
4 binary inputs and 2 relay outputs.
Input voltage 24 V DC; — 3UF7 300-1AB00-0 2
monostable relay outputs 3UF7 300-1AU00-0 2
Input voltage 110 V-
240 V AC/DC; monostable
relay outputs
Input voltage 24 V DC; — 3UF7 310-1AB00-0 2
bistable relay outputs 3UF7 310-1AU00-0 2
Input voltage 110 V-
240 V AC/DC; bistable relay
outputs

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 53
System description
2.12 An overview of system components

System component Control supply MLFB Diagram Number that can be

voltage connected
Fail-safe digital module (DM-F)
DM-F Local fail-safe digital module
For fail-safe tripping via hardware signal.
2 relay enabling circuits, wired in parallel;
2 relay outputs, common ground, fail-safe tripping.
Inputs for sensor circuit, start signal, cascading and feedback circuit
Safety function via DIP switch
Rated control supply voltage Us:
24 V DC 3UF7 320-1AB00-0 1
110 to 240 V 3UF7 320-1AU00-0 1
AC/DC
DM-F PROFIsafe fail-safe digital module
For fail-safe tripping via PROFIBUS/PROFIsafe:
2 relay enabling circuits, wired in parallel
2 relay outputs, common ground, fail-safe tripping
1 input for feedback circuit; 3 binary standard inputs.
Rated control supply voltage Us:
24 V DC 3UF7 330-1AB00-0 1
110 to 240 V 3UF7 330-1AU00-0 1
AC/DC
Analog module (AM)
By means of the analog module, the basic unit can be optionally expanded by
analog inputs and outputs (0 to 20 mA).
2 inputs (passive) for inputting and 1 output for outputting 0/4 to 20 mA signals.
— 3UF7 400-1AA00-0 2
Ground-fault module (EM)
The external ground-fault monitoring using residual current transformer and
ground-fault module is normally used in the following cases:
• In cases in which power systems are grounded with high impedance
• in cases, in which precise detection of the ground-fault current is
necessary, for example, for condition monitoring.
— 3UF7 500-1AA00-0 for 1
connecting a 3UL22 residual
current transformer
— 3UF7 510-1AA00-0 for 1 (as from product
connecting a 3UL23 residual version *E04*)
current transformer

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

54 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 System description
2.12 An overview of system components

System component Control supply MLFB Diagram Number that can be

voltage connected
Temperature module (TM)
Irrespective of the thermistor protection of the basic units, an additional max. 3
analog temperature sensors can be evaluated using a temperature module.
Sensor types: PT100/PT1000, KTY83/KTY84 or NTC
3 inputs for connecting up to 3 analog temperature sensors.
— 3UF7 700-1AA00-0 2

For a detailed description of the system components: See Chapter Description of system
components (Page 60).
Dimension drawings: See Chapter Dimension drawings (Page 635).
Mounting instructions See Chapter Mounting, wiring, interfaces (Page 447).

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 55
System description
2.12 An overview of system components

Accessories
Selection and ordering data: See also Catalog IC 10. You will find this catalog at Technical
documentation (http://www.siemens.com/sirius/infomaterial)

Table 2- 5 System components, accessories that can be connected

System component, accessory MLFB Diagram

Connecting cable
for connecting the basic unit, current measuring module, current / voltage
measuring module, operator panel, and decoupling module
0.025 m ribbon 3UF7 930-0AA00-0
0.1 m ribbon 3UF7 931-0AA00-0
0.3 m ribbon 3UF7 935-0AA00-0
0.5 m ribbon 3UF7 932-0AA00-0
0.5 m round 3UF7 932-0BA00-0
1.0 m round 3UF7 937-0BA00-0
2.5 m round 3UF7 933-0BA00-0
Interface covers 3UF7 950-0AA00-0
For covering unused system interfaces 3RA69 36-0B
Memory module 3UF7901-0AA00-0
Backup of the full set of parameters of a SIMOCODE pro V PN system when
the device is replaced. If a device is replaced, parameter transfer without PC.
Initialization module 3UF7 902-0AA00-0
Storage and initialization of device parameters and device addressing in motor
control centers.
Y connecting cable
Connection of the basic unit and current or current / voltage measuring module
with the initialization module when using the initialization module
Length of system interface Length of open cable end
0.1 m 1.0 m 3UF7 931-0CA00-0
0.5 m 1.0 m 3UF7 932-0CA00-0
1.0 m 1.0 m 3UF7 937-0CA00-0
USB PC cable 3UF7 941-0AA00-A
for connecting SIMOCODE pro to the USB interface of a PC/PG

USB-to-serial adapter 3UF7 946-0AA0-0

For connecting an RS 232 PC cable to the interface of a PC.
Door adapter 3UF7 920-0AA00-0
for bringing out the system interface, for example, out of a cabinet

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

56 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 System description
2.12 An overview of system components

System component, accessory MLFB Diagram

Operator panel adapter 3UF7 922-0AA00-0
Enables use of the smaller operator panel (OP) after system replacement in a
front panel cutout in which a larger 3UF5 2 operator panel of SIMOCODE DP
had previously been used.
Degree of protection: IP54.
Labeling strips
for pushbuttons of the 3UF7 20 operator panel 3UF7 925-0AA00-0
for pushbuttons of the 3UF7 21 operator panel with display 3UF7 925-0AA01-0
for LEDs of the 3UF7 20 operator panel 3UF7 925-0AA02-0
Push-in lugs for screw mounting
e.g. on mounting plate; 2 units required per device

can be used for 3UF7 1.0, 3UF7 1.1 and 3UF7 1.2 3RV2928-0B
can be used for 3UF700, 3UF701, 3UF7 3, 3UF7 4, 3UF7 5 and 3UF7 7 3RP19 03
Terminal covers
Covers for cable lug and busbar connections:
Length 100 mm, can be used for 3UF7 1.3-1BA00-0 3RT19 56-4EA1
Length 120 mm, can be used for 3UF7 1.4-1BA00-0 3RT19 66-4EA1
Covers for box terminals:
Length 25 mm, can be used for 3UF7 1.3-1BA00-0 3RT19 56-4EA2
Length 30 mm, can be used for 3UF7 1.4-1BA00-0 3RT19 66-4EA2
Covers for screw terminals:
between contactor and current measuring module or
between current / voltage measuring module with direct mounting
can be used for 3UF7 1.3-1BA00-0 3RT19 56-4EA3
can be used for 3UF7 1.4-1BA00-0 3RT19 66-4EA3
Box terminal blocks
for round and ribbon cable conductors
up to 70 mm2, can be used for 3UF7 1.3-1BA00-0 3RT19 55-4G
up to 120 mm2, can be used for 3UF7 1.3-1BA00-0 3RT19 56-4G
up to 240 mm2, can be used for 3UF7 1.4-1BA00-0 3RT19 66-4G
Bus termination module
with dedicated power supply;
for bus connection after the last device on the bus
Supply voltage:
115/230 V AC 3UF1 900-1KA00
24 V DC 3UF1 900-1KB00

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 57
System description
2.12 An overview of system components

Software
For parameterization, control, diagnostics and testing.
Selection and ordering data: See also Catalog IC 10. You will find this catalog at Technical
documentation (http://www.siemens.com/sirius/infomaterial).

Software components MLFB

SIMOCODE ES 2007 Basic
• Complete device parameterization
• Online access through local device interface
Floating License for one user
License key on USB stick, Class A 3ZS1 312-4CC10-0YA5
License Key Download, class A 3ZS1 312-4CE10-0YB5
SIMOCODE ES 2007 Standard
• Complete device parameterization
• Online access through local device interface
• Graphic editor
• Extended monitoring and diagnostic functions
Floating License for one user
License key on USB stick, Class A 3ZS1 312-5CC10-0YA5
License Key Download, class A 3ZS1 312-5CE10-0YB5
Upgrade for SIMOCODE ES as from 2004 3ZS1 312-5CC10-0YE5
Floating License for one user
Powerpack for SIMOCODE ES 2007 Basic 3ZS1 312-5CC10-0YD5
Floating License for one user
Software Update Service 3ZS1 312-5CC10-0YL5
for 1 year with automatic extension, requires the current software version.
SIMOCODE ES 2007 Premium
• Complete device parameterization
• Online access through local device interface
• Graphic editor
• Extended monitoring and diagnostic functions
• Convenience functions
• Online access via PROFIBUS DP
• Online access via remote access
• STEP 7 integration
Floating License for one user
License key on USB stick, Class A 3ZS1 312-6CC10-0YA5
License key download, Class A 3ZS1 312-6CE10-0YB5
Upgrade for SIMOCODE ES as from 2004 3ZS1 312-6CC10-0YE5
Floating License for one user
Powerpack for SIMOCODE ES 2007 Basic 3ZS1 312-6CC10-0YD5
Floating License for one user

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

58 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 System description
2.12 An overview of system components

Software components MLFB

Software Update Service 3ZS1 312-6CC10-0YL5
for 1 year with automatic extension, requires the current software version.
SIMOCODE pro block library for SIMATIC PCS 7 Version V8 with Advanced Process Library (APL)
Engineering software V8
for an engineering station (single license), including runtime software for running the AS blocks in an automation system
(single license).
Runtime license V8 3ZS1632-2XX02-0YB0
for running the AS modules in an automation system (single license)
required for use of the AS modules of the engineering software V7 or engineering software
migration V8 on an additional automation system within a plant.
Upgrade for PCS 7 block library SIMOCODE pro, V 6.0 or V 7 to version SIMOCODE pro 3ZS1632-1XX02-0YE0
V8
for an engineering station (single license), including runtime software for running the AS
blocks in an automation system (single license)
Engineering software migration from V7 to V8 3UF7 982-0AA20-0
for upgrading (migrating) an existing engineering software V7 of the SIMOCODE pro block
library for PCS 7
SIMOCODE pro block library for SIMATIC PCS 7 Version V7
Engineering software V7 3UF7982-0AA10-0
for an engineering station (single license), including runtime software for running the AS
modules in an automation system (single license)
Runtime license V7 3UF7982-0AA11-0
for running the AS modules in an automation system (single license)
required for using the AS modules of the engineering software V7 or the engineering
software migration V7-V8 on an additional automation system within a plant
Upgrade for SIMOCODE pro PCS 7 block library, V6.0 or V6.1 to version 3UF7982-0AA13-0
SIMOCODE pro V7.0/V7.1
for an engineering station (single license), including runtime software for running the AS
modules in an automation system (single license)
Engineering software migration from V7 to V8 3UF7982-0AA20-0
for upgrading (migrating) an existing engineering software V7 of the SIMOCODE pro block
library for PCS 7

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 59
System description
2.13 Description of system components

2.13 Description of system components

2.13.1 Basic units (BU)

The SIMOCODE pro V PN basic unit is the basic component. It is always necessary when
SIMOCODE pro is used. It has a standard housing width of 45 mm and detachable terminals

Figure 2-6 SIMOCODE pro V PN basic unit

The SIMOCODE pro V PN basic unit is suitable for DIN rail mounting or with additional push-
in lugs for mounting on a mounting plate. Two different variants of the basic unit for the
following supply voltages are available:
● 24 V DC
● 110 to 240 V AC/DC

SIMOCODE pro V PN basic unit

The SIMOCODE pro V PN basic unit is the fundamental component of the SIMOCODE pro
device series with PROFINET communication interface and is used in conjunction with a
current measuring module or current / voltage measuring module and optional operator
panels. The following motor control functions are supported:
● Overload relay
● Direct starter and reversing starter
● Star-delta starter, possibly combined with reversing starter
● 2 speeds, motors with separate windings (pole-changing starters), possibly combined
with reversing starter
● 2 speeds, motors with separate Dahlander windings, possibly combined with reversing
starter
● Positioner control
● Solenoid valve control
● Circuit breaker control (MCCB)
● Soft starter control, possibly combined with reversing starter

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

60 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 System description
2.13 Description of system components

Operator controls and display elements, system interfaces basic unit

These LEDs on the front of the device are used for device and fault diagnostics, and indicate
the basic status:
● Of the device itself via the "DEVICE" LED
● Of PROFINET communication via the "BUS" LED
● Of any motor feeder faults via the "GEN. FAULT" LED
● By displaying the activity at the two ports via the LEDs "PORT 1" and "PORT 2"
For more information, see Chapter Diagnostics via LED display on the basic unit and on the
operator panel (Page 500).

"TEST/RESET" button
Enables the device to be reset after tripping or after a fault has occurred and makes it
possible to test the device/motor feeder with or without tripping the contactor control. If a
memory module or addressing plug is plugged in, parameterization can be initiated via the
"TEST/RESET" button.
For further information, refer to Chapters Test / Reset (Page 325) and Backing up and
saving parameters (Page 503).

System interfaces
2 system interfaces for connecting
● a current measuring module or a current / voltage measuring module
● expansion modules and
● an operator panel

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 61
System description
2.13 Description of system components

2.13.2 Operator panel (OP)

The operator panel controls the motor feeder from the control cabinet. It has an external
system interface on the front to allow easier parameterization or diagnostics via a
PC/programming device. A PC with the "SIMOCODE ES" software or the memory module
can be connected via this system interface (with a cover for IP54) using a PC cable.
On the rear system interface, it is connected to the basic unit or to an expansion module via
a connecting cable. It is supplied with power via the basic unit.
The operator panel is frequently installed in the front panels of motor control centers. It also
contains all the status LEDs available on the basic unit and the "TEST/RESET" button, and
facilitates access to the system interface from outside the control cabinet.
The following are available:
● 5 buttons, of which 4 are freely parameterizable
● 10 LEDs, of which 7 are freely parameterizable
The following figure shows an operator panel:

Figure 2-7 Operator panel

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

62 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 System description
2.13 Description of system components

Labeling strips
Labeling strips are enclosed for designating buttons 1 to 4 and the yellow LEDs 1 to 3:
● Buttons 1 to 4: 6 pre-assigned labeling strips and 1 individually inscribable labeling strip
● LEDs 1 to 3: 1 individually inscribable labeling strip

Figure 2-8 Labeling strips for operator panel buttons and LEDs

Unused labeling strips can be stored on the back of the operator panel:

Figure 2-9 Storage clips for labeling strips

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 63
System description
2.13 Description of system components

Memory module "park position"

The memory module can be protected from unauthorized use by "parking" it on the rear of
the operator panel inside the control cabinet. In this case, the storage clips for the labeling
strips cannot be used.

Figure 2-10 Memory module "park position"

2.13.3 Operator panel with display (OPD)

As an alternative to the standard operator panel (OP), an optional operator panel with
display (OPD) is also available for SIMOCODE pro V. This operator panel can display actual
measured values, operating and diagnostics data, or status information of the motor feeder
on the control cabinet. It also contains all status LEDs present on the basic unit and
facilitates access to the system interface from outside the control cabinet. The motor can be
controlled via the buttons on the operator panel. Actual measured values, status information,
fault messages or the device-internal error log are simultaneously shown on the display.

Note
Product version of the operator panel with display
For use with the SIMOCODE pro V PN basic unit, an operator panel with display version
*E07* or higher is required.

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

64 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 System description
2.13 Description of system components

The following are available:

● 4 freely parameterizable buttons for controlling the motor feeder
● 4 keys for navigating the display menu, 2 of these are softkeys with different functions (e
g. test/reset)
● 2 system interfaces (front and back)
● 7 LEDs, 4 of which are freely parameterizable (4 green LEDs integrated in the motor
control buttons, primarily for feedback regarding the switching state, e.g. ON, OFF, LEFT,
RIGHT, etc.)
The operator panel with display also permits modification of selected device parameters.
The following figure shows an operator panel with display:

Figure 2-11 Operator panel with display

The operator panel with display can be connected directly to the SIMOCODE pro V PN basic
unit or an expansion module via the rear system interface. Voltage is supplied by the basic
unit. This front system interface (with cover for IP54) can be used to connect (by means of
the PC cable) a PC with the SIMOCODE ES software installed or the memory module.

NOTICE
Live operation
The operator panel with display may not be removed or plugged in during operation!

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 65
System description
2.13 Description of system components

Labeling strips:
Labeling strips for labeling buttons 1 to 4 are included:
● 6 pre-assigned labeling strips and 1 individually inscribable labeling strip

Figure 2-12 Labeling strips for operator panel with display

Unused labeling strips can be stored on the back of the operator panel with display:

Figure 2-13 Storage clips for labeling strips

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

66 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 System description
2.13 Description of system components

Memory module "park position"

The memory module can be "parked" on the front of the operator panel with display beneath
the system interface:

Figure 2-14 Memory module "park position"

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 67
System description
2.13 Description of system components

2.13.4 Operator controls and display elements of the operator panel with display

Displays of the operator panel with display

The display shows actual measured values, operating data and diagnostics data as well as
the status information of the motor feeder in plain text or with the aid of symbols.

Figure 2-15 Display elements of the operator panel with display

1
Shows the set current Is / rated motor current in A. For motors with two speeds, the relevant
set current Is1 or Is2 is always displayed depending on whether the current speed is slow or
fast, e.g. 8 A.For motors with two speeds, the left-hand softkey can be used when the motor
is stopped to alternate between the display of the two set currents. When running, the set
current for the active motor speed is always displayed.
2
Shows the set class time of the overload protection system, e.g.:10 = class 10 (class = trip
class)
3
Indicates that temperature monitoring is active, e.g. the motor temperature is being
monitored by thermistors or analog temperature sensors (Pt100, Pt1000, KTY, NTC). (T =
temperature monitoring active.)
4
The main display enables customized depiction of different measured values when running.
This is the standard display at the topmost menu level. Predefined profiles in the display
settings can be selected for this purpose. By pressing the "Menu" softkey on the right, you
can navigate through the submenus of the main display (see Chapter Read and adapt main
display (Page 83)).

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

68 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 System description
2.13 Description of system components

Operator controls of the operator panel with display

Figure 2-16 Operator controls of the operator panel with display

1
Four freely parameterizable operator keys with status LED. These operator keys are used to
control the motor with integrated status LEDs for any status feedback. The functions can be
user-defined. Labeling can be either freely chosen or achieved using the labeling strips
supplied with the device (see also Chapter Operator panel with display (OPD) (Page 64) and
Chapter Operator panel LEDs (with OPD) (Page 286) and Chapter Operator panel buttons
(Page 305)).
2
Two softkeys. They can have different functions depending on the menu displayed (e.g.
open menu, exit menu, TEST/RESET). The currently assigned functions are shown on the
lower left or right edge of the display.
3
Two arrow keys (one upwards arrow and one downwards arrow). They serve to navigate the
menu or change the display settings, e.g. to adjust the contrast or to select a profile for the
main display.

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 69
System description
2.13 Description of system components

2.13.5 Menu of the operator panel with display

Menu of the operator panel with display

Navigating the menu of the operator panel with display

Main menu, operator panel with display

For details: See Displays of the operator panel with display (Page 81).

Figure 2-17 Main menu, operator panel with display

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

70 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 System description
2.13 Description of system components

Main display, operator panel with display

For details: See Read and adapt main display (Page 83).

1 Measured values, operator panel with display

For details: See Display of measured values in the measured values display (Page 86).

Figure 2-18 Measured values display, operator panel with display

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 71
System description
2.13 Description of system components

2 Status motor protection/motor control, operator panel with display

For details: See Motor protection and motor control status (Page 88).

Figure 2-19 Status display motor protection/motor control, operator panel with display

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

72 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 System description
2.13 Description of system components

3 Statistics/maintenance, operator panel with display

For details: See Display of statistical and maintenance-relevant information on the
statistics/maintenance display (Page 89).

Figure 2-20 Statistics/maintenance, operator panel with display

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 73
System description
2.13 Description of system components

4 Communication, operator panel with display

For details: See Status display about PROFINET communication (Page 90).

Figure 2-21 Communication on the PROFINET, operator panel with display

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

74 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 System description
2.13 Description of system components

5 Device I/Os, operator panel with display

For details: See Displays the current status of all device I/Os (Page 91).

Figure 2-22 Device I/Os, operator panel with display

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 75
System description
2.13 Description of system components

6 Parameters, operator panel with display

SIMOCODE pro V PN allows selected parameters to be set using the operator panel with
display.
List of parameters: See Parameters (Page 93).

Figure 2-23 Parameters, operator panel with display

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

76 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 System description
2.13 Description of system components

7 Display settings, operator panel with display

For details: See Adapt display settings (Page 96).

Figure 2-24 Display settings, operator panel with display

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 77
System description
2.13 Description of system components

8 Commands, operator panel with display

For details: See Resetting, testing and parameterizing via commands (Page 98).

Figure 2-25 Commands, operator panel with display

9 Messages, operator panel with display

For details: See Display of all pending messages (Page 99).

Figure 2-26 Messages, operator panel with display

10 Warnings, operator panel with display

For details: See Display of all pending warnings (Page 99).

Figure 2-27 Warnings, operator panel with display

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

78 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 System description
2.13 Description of system components

11 Faults, operator panel with display

For details: See Display of all pending faults (Page 99).

Figure 2-28 Faults, operator panel with display

12 Fault memory, operator panel with display

For details: See Reading out the device-internal error buffer (Page 99).

Figure 2-29 Fault memory, operator panel with display

13 Event memory, operator panel with display

For details: See Reading out the device-internal event memory (Page 100).

Figure 2-30 Event memory, operator panel with display

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 79
System description
2.13 Description of system components

14 Identification, operator panel with display

For details: See Identification of the motor feeder and the SIMOCODE pro components
(Page 101).

Figure 2-31 Identification, operator panel with display

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

80 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 System description
2.13 Description of system components

2.13.6 Displays of the operator panel with display

You can navigate through the menu using the arrow keys and softkeys. Each menu item
may have one or more submenus. The menu structure and display are, in part, directly
dependent on the device parameterization (e. g. selected control function) and hardware
configuration (e.g. type and number of expansion modules used).
● Main display
The "main display" is the standard display of the SIMOCODE pro. It displays current
measured values, which can be selected via profiles predefined to meet user-specific
requirements. For detailed information: See Read and adapt main display (Page 83).
● Measured values display
The "Measured values display" provides an overview of all values measured by
SIMOCODE pro. For example, all phase currents, phase voltages, power-related measured
values or temperatures. For detailed information: See Display of measured values in the
measured values display (Page 86).
● Status display
The "Status display" shows all higher-level status information, i.e. all status information
relevant to the protection and control of the motor. For detailed information: See Motor
protection and motor control status (Page 88).
● Statistics/Maintenance
The "Statistics/Maintenance" menu item provides an overview of all SIMOCODE pro
information that is primarily relevant to maintenance. For detailed information: See Display of
statistical and maintenance-relevant information on the statistics/maintenance display
(Page 89).
● Communication
The "Communication" menu item displays all important information relating to
communication. For detailed information: See Status display about PROFINET
communication (Page 90).
● Device I/Os
The "Device I/Os" menu item provides a complete overview of the current status of all inputs
and outputs of the basic unit as well as any connected expansion modules. For detailed
information: See Displays the current status of all device I/Os (Page 91).
● Parameters
SIMOCODE pro V PN allows selected parameters to be set using the operator panel with
display: For detailed information: See Parameters (Page 93)
● Display settings
All settings relevant to the operator panel with display can be carried out via "Display
Settings". In addition to selecting the language and adjusting the contrast or illumination, it is
also possible to select the profiles here which are relevant for adjusting the main display. For
detailed information: See Adapt display settings (Page 96)

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 81
System description
2.13 Description of system components

● Commands
The "Commands" menu item contains all commands relating to SIMOCODE pro, e.g. for
testing the feeder, resetting after tripping and/or transferring parameters into the memory
module or into SIMOCODE pro. For detailed information: See Resetting, testing and
parameterizing via commands (Page 98).
● Events
The "Status Information" menu item provides an overview of all pending status information.
For detailed information: See Display of all pending messages (Page 99)
● Warnings
The "Warnings" menu item provides an overview of all pending warnings. For detailed
information: See Display of all pending warnings (Page 99).
● Faults
The "Faults" menu item provides an overview of all pending faults. For detailed information:
See Display of all pending faults (Page 99).
● Error buffer
The "Error buffer" menu item displays the SIMOCODE pro device-internal error buffer. For
detailed information: See Reading out the device-internal error buffer (Page 99).
● Event memory
The "Event Memory" menu item enables access to the SIMOCODE pro device-internal event
memory. For detailed information: See Reading out the device-internal event memory
(Page 100).

Note
Precondition for event memory display
Is only displayed if DM-F present

● Identification
In the "Identification" menu item, you will find detailed information/labeling regarding
SIMOCODE pro hardware components (basic unit, operator panel with display). For detailed
information: See Identification of the motor feeder and the SIMOCODE pro components
(Page 101).
● About SIMOCODE
The "About SIMOCODE" menu item displays further information about SIMOCODE pro. For
detailed information: See Menu of the operator panel with display (Page 70).

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

82 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 System description
2.13 Description of system components

2.13.7 Read and adapt main display

To enable users speedy viewing of the measured values typically shown on their
switchboard, various profiles are stored in the operator panel with display that enable user-
specific adaptation of the standard measured values displayed in the SIMOCODE pro main
display. The profile is selected in the menu "Display settings" → Profiles (see Section Adapt
display settings (Page 96)).
The set current, the selected class time for the overload protection system and the use of
temperature monitoring based on thermistors or analog temperature sensors are displayed
(if programmed) at the bottom left of the main display. The submenus of the main display
can be navigated with the right-hand softkey. For motors with two speeds, the left-hand
softkey can be used to alternate between the display of the two set currents.
● IL1, IL2, IL3 [A] 1)
Shows the currents in all three phases in A.
● IL1, IL2, IL3 [%] 1)
Displays the currents in all three phases as a percentage of the set current.
● Imax [A] 1)
Shows the maximum current of all three phases in A.
● Imax [%] 1)
Displays the maximum current of all three phases as a percentage of the set current.
● Imax, Cos phi 2)
Displays the maximum current of all three phases in amps and the power factor.
● Imax, UL1-N, Cos phi, S 3)
Shows the maximum current of all three phases in amps, the phase voltage UL1 in V, the
power factor, and the apparent power in kVA.
● Imax, UL1-L2, Cos phi, S 4)
Shows the maximum current of all three phases in A, the line-to-line voltage UL1-L2 in V, the
power factor, and the apparent power in kVA.
● Imax, UL1-N, Cos phi, P 3)
Shows the maximum current of all three phases in amps, the phase voltage UL1 in V, the
power factor, and the active power in kW.
● Imax, UL1-L2, Cos phi, P 4)
Shows the maximum current of all three phases in A, the line-to-line voltage UL1-L2 in V, the
power factor, and the active power in W.
● In1/output AM1 / In1/output AM2 5) [mA]
Shows the current value at input 1 of analog module 1 / 2 and at the output of analog module
1 / 2 in mA.

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 83
System description
2.13 Description of system components

● In2/output AM1 / In2/output AM2 5) [mA]

Shows the current value at input 2 of analog module 1 / 2 and at the output of analog module
1 / 2 in mA.
● Inputs AM 1 / inputs AM2 5) [mA]
Shows the current value at the two inputs of analog module 1 / 2 in mA.
● Max. temp. °C TM 1 / TM2 6)
Shows the maximum temperature of all used sensor measuring circuits of the temperature
module 1 / 2 in °C.
● Temperatures °C TM 1 / TM2 6)
Shows the individual temperatures of all used sensor measuring circuits of the temperature
module 1 / 2 in °C.
● Max. temp. °F TM 1 / TM2 6)
Shows the maximum temperature of all used sensor measuring circuits of the temperature
module 1 / 2 in °F.
● Temperatures °F TM 1 / TM2 6)
Shows the individual temperatures of all used sensor measuring circuits of the temperature
module 1 / 2 in °F.
● UL1-N, UL2-N, UL3-N 3)
Shows all phase voltages in V.
● UL1-L1, UL2-L3, UL3-L1 4)
Shows line-to-line voltages UL1-L2, UL2-L3, UL3-L1 in V.
● Imax, UL1-N, Cos phi 3)
Shows the maximum current of all three phases in amps, the phase voltage UL1-N in V, and
the power factor as absolute values.
● Imax, UL1-L2, Cos phi 4)
Shows the maximum current of all three phases in A, the line-to-line voltage UL1-L2 in V and
the power factor.
● Imax, UL1-N, °C 7)
Shows the maximum current of all three phases in amps, the phase voltage UL1-N in V, and
the maximum temperature of all used sensor measuring circuits of the temperature module
in °C.
● Imax, UL1-L2, °F 7)
Shows the maximum current of all three phases in A, the line-to-line voltage UL1-L2 in V,
and the maximum temperature of all used sensor measuring circuits of the temperature
module in °F.

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

84 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 System description
2.13 Description of system components

● Calculator 1
Shows the calculated result that the function block Calculator 1 provides without units in the
range 0 ... 65535.
Permits display, for example, of a 2-byte value sent directly from the automation system on
the display of the switchboard or the display without units of each 2-byte value in
SIMOCODE pro.
● Calculator 2
Shows the calculated result that the function block Calculator 2 provides without units in the
range 0 ... 65535.
Permits display, for example, of a 2-byte or 4-byte value sent directly from the automation
system on the display of the switchboard or the display without units of each 2-byte and 4-
byte value in SIMOCODE pro.
● Energy consumed 2)

Note
Modified system expansion or hardware configuration
If the main display permanently fails to show measured values, this indicates that a profile
has been selected in the display settings that is no longer supported, due, for example, to a
changed system expansion or changed hardware configuration. The profile must be
reselected.

1) Possible only if a current measuring module or current / voltage measuring module is

used
2) Possible only if a current / voltage measuring module is used
3) Possible only if a current / voltage measuring module is used Values will only be displayed
if phase voltage is set/configured
4) Possible only if a current / voltage measuring module is used and line-to-line voltage is
set/configured
5) Possible only if the analog module is used
6) Possible only if the temperature module is used
7) Possible only if a current / voltage measuring module and temperature module are used
Values will only be displayed if phase voltage is set/configured

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 85
System description
2.13 Description of system components

2.13.8 Display of measured values in the measured values display

The "Measured Values" menu item displays all current SIMOCODE pro measured values.
Depending upon the type of expansion modules used, all or only some of the values listed
here will be available. These are the most important menus by way of example:
● Imax 1)
Shows the maximum current of all three phases and can be switched between A or % of
Is
● IL1, IL2, IL3 1)
Shows the currents of all three phases and can be switched between A or % of Is.
● Phase unbalance 1)
Shows the current phase unbalance as a percentage.
● UL1-N, UL2-N, UL3-N 2)
Shows all phase voltages in V.
● U L1-L2, U L2-L3, U L3-L1 3)
Shows all line-to-line voltages in V.
● Cos phi, P, S 4)
Shows the power factor (0 to 100 % or absolute, switchable using the right softkey), the
active power in kW, and the apparent power in kVA.
● Ground-fault current [mA]
Shows the measured value of the residual current.
● Last trip current [mA]
Shows the last measured value of the residual current.
● Analog input 1, analog input 2, analog output (for AM1) 5)
Shows the current values at both inputs and the actual value at the output of analog
module 1 and can be switched over between mA and %.
● Analog input 1, analog input 2, analog output (for AM2) 5)
Shows the actual values at both inputs and the actual value at the output of analog
module 2 and can be switched over between mA and %.
● Max. temperature 6)
Shows the maximum temperature of all used sensor measuring circuits of the
temperature module 1 in °C (can be switched to °F).
● Max. temperature 6)
Shows the maximum temperature of all used sensor measuring circuits of the
temperature module 2 in °C (can be switched to °F).
● T1, T2, T3 6)
Shows the individual temperatures of all used sensor measuring circuits of the
temperature module 1 in °C (can be switched to °F).

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

86 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 System description
2.13 Description of system components

● T1, T2, T3 6)
Shows the individual temperatures of all used sensor measuring circuits of the
temperature module 2 in °C (can be switched to °F).
● Thermal motor model
Shows the current temperature rise of the internal thermal motor model in %.
● Time to trip
Shows the estimated time to trip.
● Cooling down period
Shows the cooling down period remaining before the motor can be switched on again
after an overload trip.
● Last trip current
Shows the magnitude of the current that was measured at the moment of the overload
trip, unit of measurement can be switched between A and % of Is.
1) Possible only if a current measuring module or current / voltage measuring module is
used
2) Possible only if a current / voltage measuring module is used Values will only be displayed
if phase voltage is set/configured
3) Possible only if a current / voltage measuring module is used and line-to-line voltage is
set/configured
4) Possible only if a current / voltage measuring module is used
5) Possible only if the analog module is used
6) Possible only if the temperature module is used

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 87
System description
2.13 Description of system components

2.13.9 Motor protection and motor control status

The status display shows all higher-level status information, i.e. all status information
relevant to the protection and controlling of the motor. The type of status information
depicted is, therefore, in part directly dependent upon the parameterized control function and
the hardware configuration of SIMOCODE pro, and may vary.
These are the most important menus by way of example:

General
● General fault, general warning
● Current flowing, device ok
● Bus ok, PLC/PCS in run

Control

Note
Display status information
The display of the status information can vary according to the control function.

● ON <<, ON <, OFF, ON >, ON >>, start active

● Interlocking time active, change-over pause active
● OPO, Remote, TPF
● FC, FO, TC, TO: Only for "Positioner" control functions.
● Positioner runs in CLOSED direction, positioner runs in OPEN direction: Only for
"Positioner" control functions.
● Non-maintained command mode

Protection
● Cooling down period active, pause time active, emergency start executed

Other
● Device test active
● Phase sequence 1-2-3, phase sequence 3-2-1
Possible only if a current / voltage measuring module is used.

Safety
● Safety DM-F Local: Status enabling circuit, trip "Safety", "Safety o.k." (only when DM-
F Local is installed)
● DIP switches, DM-F Local: Status of DIP switches 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8 (only when DM-F
Local is installed)
● Safety DM-F PROFIsafe: Status enabling circuit, trip "Safety", "PROFIsafe active" (only
when DM-F PROFIsafe is installed)

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

88 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 System description
2.13 Description of system components

2.13.10 Display of statistical and maintenance-relevant information on the

statistics/maintenance display

The "Statistics/Maintenance" menu item gives an overview of all SIMOCODE pro information
that is primarily relevant to maintenance. The states of timers and counters, etc. are
displayed, as well as operating hours, stop times and the number of starts.
These are the most important menus by way of example:

General
● Number of overload trips
● Motor operating hours
● Motor operating hours >: Displays overshooting of the set limit for operating hours
monitoring.
● No. of starts - actual value
● Permissible starts - actual value
● One more start only, no start
● Stop time: Displays overshooting of the set limit for motor stop time monitoring.
● Energy consumed (possible only if a current / voltage measuring module is used)
● Number of parameterizations
● Motor operating hours basic unit
● Real time basic unit
● Timer
● Timer 1 (2, 3, 4, 5, 6) actual value
● Timer 1 (2, 3, 4, 5, 6) output
● Counter
● Counter 1 (2, 3, 4, 5, 6) actual value
● Counter 1 (2, 3, 4, 5, 6) output

Calculators
● Calculator 1
● Calculator 2
● Calculator 3
● Calculator 4

Safety
● Time until test requirement: Remaining time until next test requirement in weeks
(displayed only when DM-F is installed).

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 89
System description
2.13 Description of system components

2.13.11 Status display about PROFINET communication

The "Communication" menu item displays all important information relating to PROFINET
communication. Not only information about IP configuration, device name, MAC address,
PROFIsafe address but also settings about the status of communication and the response of
SIMOCODE pro if communication failures are displayed.
These are the most important menus by way of example:
● IP configuration
● Device name
● MAC address
● PROFIsafe address: Shows the PROFIsafe address (only when DM-F PROFIsafe is
installed)
● Baud rate
● Bus OK, bus monitoring
● PLC/PCS in Run, PLC/PCS monitoring
● Bus / PLC fault - Reset
● Startup parameter block
● Diagnostics device error, diagnostics message: Shows which type of diagnostic
information is sent by SIMOCODE pro to a higher-level automation system via
PROFINET.
● Diagnostics warning, diagnostics fault: Shows which type of diagnostic information is sent
by SIMOCODE pro to a higher-level automation system via PROFINET.

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

90 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 System description
2.13 Description of system components

2.13.12 Displays the current status of all device I/Os

The "Device I/Os" menu item gives a complete overview of the current status of all inputs
and outputs of the basic unit and any connected expansion modules (except for the ground-
fault module). The type of displayed status information is directly dependent on the
SIMOCODE pro hardware configuration.
These are the most important menus by way of example:

Basic unit
● Inputs 1 (2, 3, 4)
● Outputs 1 (2, 3)
● PTC high resistance/not present
● PTC o. k., PTC short circuit

Current measurement
IL1, IL2, IL3: Shows the currents (in A) in all three phases (possible only if a current
measuring module or current / voltage measuring module is used).

Voltage measurement
● UL1-N, UL2-N, UL3-N: Shows all phase voltages in V (possible only if a current / voltage
measuring module is used and phase voltage has been set/configured)
● U L1-L2, U L2-L3, U L3-L1: Shows all line-to-line voltages in V (possible only if a current /
voltage measuring module is used and line-to-line voltage has been set/configured)

Digital module 1, digital module 2

● Inputs 1 (2, 3, 4): Inputs 1, 2, 3, 4 "monostable" or "bistable."
● Outputs 1, 2 monostable: Outputs 1, 2 "monostable" (possible only if digital module 1 is
used as "monostable")
● Outputs 1, 2 "bistable" (possible only if digital module 1 is used as "monostable" or
"bistable")

Digital module 1 as DM-F Local

Possible only if a DM-F Local module is used as digital module 1.
● Inputs DM-F Local: Inputs "IN," "Start," "Feedback circuit," "Cascaded."
● Sensor channels DM-F Local: Sensor channels 1, 2
● Outputs DM-F Local: Outputs 1, 2, "Enabling circuit"

Digital module 1 as DM-F PROFIsafe

Possible only if a DM-F PROFIsafe is used as digital module 1.
● Inputs DM-F PROFIsafe: Inputs 1, 2, 3, "feedback circuit"
● Outputs DM-F PROFIsafe: Outputs 1, 2, "Enabling circuit"

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 91
System description
2.13 Description of system components

Ground-fault module
Possible only if the ground-fault module is used.
● Ground-fault current [mA]
● Inputs
– Open circuit
– Short circuit

Analog module
Possible only if the analog module is used.
● Input 1, input 2
● Output
● Open circuit

Temperature module
Possible only if the temperature module is used.
● Max. temperature
● T1, T2, T3
● Sensor type PT 100, PT 1000, NTC, KTY83, KTY85
● Sensor fault sensor out of range

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

92 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 System description
2.13 Description of system components

2.13.13 Parameters

You can set the following parameters using the operator panel with display:

Parameters Range Note

Overload protection → set currents Possible only if a current measuring module is configured
Set current Is1 0.00 - 9,999.00 A -
Set current Is2 0.00 - 9,999.00 A Possible only in conjunction with the following control
functions:
• Dahlander
• Dahlander reversing starter
• Pole-changing starter
• Pole-changing reversing starter
Current limits Possible only if a current measuring module is configured
Monitoring of current limits → trip 0 - 1020 % of Is -
level I > (upper limit)
Monitoring of current 0 - 1020 % of Is -
limits → warning level I > (upper limit)
Monitoring of current limits → trip 0 - 1020 % of Is -
level I < (lower limit)
Monitoring of current 0 - 1020 % of Is -
limits → warning level I < (lower limit)
Motor protection → stalled rotor 0 - 1020 % of Is -
protection level
Voltage monitoring → voltage limits Possible only if a current / voltage measuring module is
configured
Trip level U < (lower limit) 0 - 2040 V -
Warning level U < (lower limit) 0 - 2040 V -
Cos phi monitoring → Cos phi limits Possible only if a current / voltage measuring module is
configured
Trip level cos phi < (lower limit) 0 - 100 % -
Warning level cos phi < (lower limit) 0 - 100 % -
Active power monitoring → Active Possible only if a current / voltage measuring module is
power limits configured
Trip level P > (upper limit) 0.000 - 9999.000 kW -
Warning level P > (upper limit) 0.000 - 9999.000 kW -
Trip level P < (lower limit) 0.000 - 9999.000 kW -
Warning level P < (lower limit) 0.000 - 9999.000 kW -
Ground fault monitoring → Ground Possible only if a 3UF7510 ground-fault module is
fault limits configured
Trip level 0.00 - 40.00 A -
Warning level 0.00 - 40.00 A -

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 93
System description
2.13 Description of system components

Parameters Range Note

0/4-20 mA monitoring → 0/4-20 mA Possible only if analog module 1 and/or 2 is configured
limits
Analog module 1 - trip level 0 - 255 Represented in 0/4 - 20 mA similar to "Measured values"
0/4-20 mA > (upper limit) menu
Analog module 1 - warning level 0 - 255 Represented in 0/4 - 20 mA similar to "Measured values"
0/4-20 mA > (upper limit) menu
Analog module 1 - trip level 0 - 255 Represented in 0/4 - 20 mA similar to "Measured values"
0/4-20 mA < (lower limit) menu
Analog module 1 - warning level 0 - 255 Represented in 0/4 - 20 mA similar to "Measured values"
0/4-20 mA < (lower limit) menu
Analog module 1 - trip level 0 - 255 Represented in 0/4 - 20 mA similar to "Measured values"
0/4-20 mA > (upper limit) menu
Analog module 1 - warning level 0 - 255 Represented in 0/4 - 20 mA similar to "Measured values"
0/4-20 mA > (upper limit) menu
Analog module 1 - trip level 0/4- 0 - 255 Represented in 0/4 - 20 mA similar to "Measured values"
20 mA < (lower limit) menu
Analog module 1 - warning level 0 - 255 Represented in 0/4 - 20 mA similar to "Measured values"
0/4-20 mA < (lower limit) menu
Temperature Possible only if temperature module 1 and/or 2 is
monitoring → temperature limits configured
Temperature module 1 - trip level > 0 - 65,535 K Represented in °C/F similar to "Measured values" menu
(upper limit)
Temperature module 1 - warning 0 - 65,535 K Represented in °C/F similar to "Measured values" menu
level > (upper limit)
Temperature module 2 - trip level > 0 - 65,535 K Represented in °C/F similar to "Measured values" menu
(upper limit)
Temperature module 2 - warning 0 - 65,535 K Represented in °C/F similar to "Measured values" menu
level > (upper limit)
Limit monitor - limit monitor limit 0 - 65535 -
Limit 1 0 - 65535 -
Limit 2 0 - 65535 -
Limit 3 0 - 65535 -
Limit 4 0 - 65535 -
Limit 5 0 - 65535 -
Limit 6 0 - 65535 -

Note
Password protection
It is only possible to change these parameters if password protection is not active. Only then
can you choose the parameter to be modified with the "OK" button.

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

94 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 System description
2.13 Description of system components

Proceed as follows to change a parameter:

● Choose menu item "Parameters" from the main menu
● Then choose the parameter to be changed in the relevant submenu
● Click OK to confirm the selection
You can now change the value with the ▲ and ▼ buttons. The longer you hold these buttons
for, the larger the step by which the value changes.

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 95
System description
2.13 Description of system components

2.13.14 Adapt display settings

The default settings configured in the basic unit can be modified via the display settings.
However, changes made in this way do not result in a change to the configured defaults. In
addition to selecting the language and adjusting the contrast or illumination, it is also
possible to select the profiles here which are relevant for adjusting the main display. In the
factory settings menu item, the changes made to the display settings can be reset to the
values configured in the basic unit.
These are the most important menus by way of example:

Languages
English, German, French, Polish, Spanish, Portuguese, Italian, Finnish

Contrast
0 % to 100 % (default: 50 %)

Illumination
Specifies how long the backlit display will remain on on the operator panel with display after
the last keystroke and enables permanent activation or deactivation of the backlit display.
Off, 3 s, 10 s (default), 1 min, 5 min

Profiles
Enables selection of the display profiles for the main display. If a defined profile is no longer
supported by SIMOCODE pro, for example, due to a changed hardware configuration, the
start display will be shown instead of the default main display:
● IL1, IL2, IL3 [A] (default)
● Imax [A]
● IL1, IL2, IL3 [%]
● Imax [%]
● Imax, Cos phi
● Imax, UL1-N, Cos phi, S
● Imax, UL1-L2, Cos phi, S
● Imax, UL1-N, Cos phi, P
● Imax, UL1-L2, Cos phi, P
● In1/output AM1 [mA] (only if analog module 1 is present and configured)
● In2/output AM1 [mA] (only if analog module 1 is present and configured)
● In1/output AM2 [mA] (only if analog module 2 is present and configured)
● In2/output AM2 [mA] (only if analog module 2 is present and configured)
● Inputs AM 1 / inputs AM2 [mA]

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

96 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 System description
2.13 Description of system components

● Max. temp. °C/°F TM1 (only if temperature module 1 is present and configured)
● Temperatures °C/°F TM1 (only if temperature module 1 is present and configured)
● Max. temp. °C/°F TM2 (only if temperature module 2 is present and configured)
● Temperatures °C/°F TM2 (only if temperature module 2 is present and configured)
● UL1-N, UL2-N, UL3-N
● UL1-L2, UL2-L3, UL3-L1
● Imax, UL1-N, Cos phi
● Imax, UL1-L2, Cos phi
● Imax, UL1-N °C/°F (temperature display TM1! 1))
● Imax, UL1-L2, °C/°F 1) (temperature display TM1! 1))
● Calculator 1
● Calculator 2
● Energy consumed (only if a current / voltage measuring module is configured).
See Section Read and adapt main display (Page 83).

NOTICE
1) Temperatures
The temperature from temperature module 1 is always shown in this display profile.
The temperature from temperature module 2 is not shown in this profile.

Warnings
Determines whether, in the case of a pending general warning, the display is switched over
to the menu item "Warnings" so that details are displayed (not activated per default): Do not
display (default) - Display

Faults
Determines whether, in the case of a pending general fault, the display is switched over to
the menu item "Faults" so that details are displayed (switched on per default, higher priority
than pending warnings): Do not display - Display (default)

Return to main display

Determines whether and when to return from the current menu to the main display:
Manual, 3 s, 10 s (default), 1 min, 5 min

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 97
System description
2.13 Description of system components

2.13.15 Resetting, testing and parameterizing via commands

The "Commands" menu item contains all commands relating to SIMOCODE pro, e.g. for
testing the feeder, resetting after tripping and/or transferring parameters into the memory
module or into SIMOCODE pro. By safeguarding the device-internal parameterization
against external access, e.g. via a password stipulated in SIMOCODE pro, individual
commands and/or even the entire "Commands" menu item can be blocked.

Program memory module

Parameters are transferred to memory module The memory module must be plugged into
the system interface for this purpose.

Clear memory module

Parameters in memory module are reset. The memory module must be plugged into the
system interface for this purpose.

Read memory module

Acceptance of the parameters from the memory module into the basic unit. The memory
module must be plugged into the system interface for this purpose.

Memory module write protection on

All contents of the memory module are write-protected. This prevents any inadvertent
changes to the contents of the memory module and any parameter changes for the
connected SIMOCODE pro V PN basic unit.
An inadvertent change of parameters for a motor feeder is prevented.
SIMOCODE pro signals the successful execution of the command with the event "Memory
module write-protected".

Memory module write protection off

With this command you can cancel the write protection of the memory module.

Restart
Initialization of SIMOCODE pro. New start.

Factory settings
All parameters have their factory setting again, except for the password. Only possible if
password protection is not active or the password is known.

Set time (= PC time)

If no NTP server address has been configured or no server has been found in the network,
you can set the time of day here, that is, the real-time clock of SIMOCODE pro is set to the
system time of the computer.

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

98 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 System description
2.13 Description of system components

Test
Execute the test function. Same function as "TEST/RESET" button on the basic unit and
operator panel

Reset
Execute a reset operation. Same function at "TEST/RESET" button on the basic unit and
operator panel.

2.13.16 Display of all pending messages

This menu item provides an overview of all pending status information. A precise description
of the pending status information messages can be found in Chapter Alarm, fault, and
system events (Page 513).

2.13.17 Display of all pending warnings

This menu item provides an overview of all pending warnings. In the case of a newly pending
general warning, it is possible to switch to this menu item automatically (this must be set via
the display settings) so that the exact cause of the general warning can be displayed. A
precise description of the pending warnings can be found in Chapter Alarm, fault, and
system events (Page 513).

2.13.18 Display of all pending faults

This menu item provides an overview of all pending faults. In the case of a newly pending
general fault, it is possible to switch to this menu item automatically (this must be set via the
display settings) so that the exact cause of the general faults can be displayed. A precise
description of the pending faults can be found in Chapter Alarm, fault, and system events
(Page 513).

2.13.19 Reading out the device-internal error buffer

The "Error buffer" menu item enables access to the internal error buffer of SIMOCODE pro.
The time and cause of the last 21 faults are displayed here. See also Chapter Reading our
error buffer / error log (protocol) (Page 510). A precise description of the faults can be found
in Chapter Alarm, fault, and system events (Page 513).

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 99
System description
2.13 Description of system components

2.13.20 Reading out the device-internal event memory

The "Event Memory" menu item enables access to the SIMOCODE pro device-internal event
memory. The two most recent events "DM-F enabling circuit closed" and "DM-F enabling
circuit open" are displayed, together with the time, for both digital modules "DM-F Local" and
"DM-F PROFIsafe".

Event memory
Switch to event memory display.

Last event "Enabling circuit closed," DM-F Local

The entry contains the last event "DM-F enabling circuit closed," the time and the related DIP
switch configuration.

Note
Requirement
Possible only if digital module 1 is used as a DM-F Local module.

Last event "Enabling circuit closed," DM-F PROFIsafe

The entry contains the last event "DM-F enabling circuit closed", the time and the related
PROFIsafe address.

Note
Requirement
Possible only if digital module 1 is used as a DM-F PROFIsafe module.

Last event "Enabling circuit open"

The entry contains the last event "DM-F enabling circuit open" and the corresponding time.

Note
Requirement
Possible only if digital module 1 is used as a DM-F Local or DM-F PROFIsafe module.

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

100 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 System description
2.13 Description of system components

2.13.21 Identification of the motor feeder and the SIMOCODE pro components

In the "Identification" menu item, you will find detailed information about the SIMOCODE pro
hardware components used, e.g. hardware and firmware versions. Furthermore, this dialog
box enables the identification of the motor feeder via a plant identifier stored in
SIMOCODE pro, as well as a request for the location designation and display of the device-
internal comment.
These are the most important menus by way of example:

Identification
● Plant identifier
● Location designation
● Date
● Comment

Basic unit
● MLFB (order number)
● Short designation
● Manufacturer
● Device subfamily
● Device class
● System
● Identification number
● HW revision level
● FW revision level
● Time stamp

Display
● MLFB (order number)
● HW revision level
● FW revision level

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 101
System description
2.13 Description of system components

2.13.22 Current measuring module (IM)

The current measuring module must be selected according to the current setting to be
monitored for each feeder (rated operating current of the motor). The current measuring
modules cover current ranges between 0.3 A and 630 A, with intermediate transformers up
to 820 A.
Current measuring modules for the following current ranges are available (see diagram
below):
● 0.3 to 3 A with through-hole technology
● 2.4 to 25 A with through-hole technology
● 10 to 100 A with through-hole technology
● 20 to 200 A with through-hole technology or bus connection system
● 63 to 630 A with bus connection system

Figure 2-32 Variants of current measuring modules

The current measuring module is connected to the basic unit via a connecting cable, which
also supplies the power. Current measuring modules up to 100 A are suitable for standard
rail mounting or can be fixed directly to the mounting plate using additional push-in lugs.
Basic units can be snapped directly onto the current measuring modules. Current measuring
modules up to 200 A can also be mounted on the standard mounting rail or, optionally, they
can be fixed directly to the mounting plate with the screw attachments that are integrated in
the enclosure. The current measuring module up to 630 A can only be mounted using the
integrated screw attachments.

Note
Current measuring modules with a set current of up to 100 A can be connected to the basic
unit mechanically and be installed as a unit (behind one another). Larger current measuring
modules can only be mounted separately.

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

102 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 System description
2.13 Description of system components

2.13.23 Current / voltage measuring module (UM)

It allows a current / voltage measuring module to be used instead of a current measuring
module. In addition to measuring the motor current, current / voltage measuring modules
also enable:
● Monitoring of voltages up to 690 V
● Calculation and monitoring of power and cos phi
● Monitoring of the phase sequence
With SIMOCODE ES, you can define under "Device configuration → Display voltage"
whether the phase voltage or line-to-line voltage will be used system-wide.

Note
Change of parameter "Device configuration → Display voltage"
Each change to this parameter requires that the communication interface be restarted when
the web server is active. A new start interrupts all Ethernet and PROFINET links and
reestablishes them afterward.

The following figure shows the various current / voltage measuring modules:

Figure 2-33 Current / voltage measuring modules

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 103
System description
2.13 Description of system components

The current / voltage measuring module is connected to the basic unit via a connecting
cable, which also supplies the power. Current / voltage measuring modules up to 100 A are
suitable for standard rail mounting or can be fixed directly to the mounting plate using
additional push-in lugs. Current / voltage measuring modules up to 200 A can also be
mounted on the standard mounting rail or, optionally, they can be fixed directly to the
mounting plate with the screw attachments that are integrated in the enclosure. The current /
voltage measuring module up to 630 A can only be mounted using the integrated screw
attachments. Basic units must always be installed separately next to the current / voltage
measuring modules.
For the purpose of calculating or monitoring power-related measured values, current /
voltage measuring modules are equipped with additional, removable terminals to which the
voltages of all three phases of the main circuit are connected. An additional 3-core cable can
be used, for example, to connect the main circuit directly from the bus connections of the
current / voltage measuring module with the connection terminals of the voltage measuring
module.

Using a decoupling module

A decoupling module may be required when using a voltage measuring module. See
Chapter Decoupling module (DCM) for current / voltage measuring modules (Page 105),
device series SIMOCODE pro V PN.

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

104 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 System description
2.13 Description of system components

2.13.24 Decoupling module (DCM) for current / voltage measuring modules

When measuring voltage and power with SIMOCODE pro in ungrounded networks, each
current / voltage measuring module must have a decoupling module connected upstream in
series at the system interface. When measuring voltage and power with SIMOCODE pro in
networks with additional insulation measurement or insulation monitoring, each current /
voltage measuring module must be connected to a preceding decoupling module. If using
the 3UF710 current measuring modules in these networks, it is imperative that additional
decoupling modules are not used.
1 decoupling module for connection in series upstream from a current / voltage measuring
module at the system interface

Figure 2-34 Decoupling module, SIMOCODE pro V PN device series

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 105
System description
2.13 Description of system components

Figure 2-35 Decoupling module - configuration with basic unit and current measuring module

Using the decoupling module in different networks

A decoupling module may be required when using a voltage measuring module, especially
for the following networks:
● Insulated networks
● High-resistance networks
● Asymmetrically grounded networks
● Single-phase networks

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

106 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 System description
2.13 Description of system components

The table below shows decoupling module requirements for different network types and
configurations (star networks, delta networks and single-phase networks):

Star networks:

Table 2- 6 Decoupling module requirements for star networks

Star network Network configuration Decoupling module Note

required?
4-wire, star, grounded No "TN-S system"
with low impedance according to IEC 60364

4-wire, star, grounded Yes —

with high impedance

3-wire, star, grounded No "TN-C system"

with low impedance according to IEC 60364

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 107
System description
2.13 Description of system components

Star network Network configuration Decoupling module Note

required?
3-wire, star, grounded Yes —
with high impedance

3-wire, star, with Yes "IT system" according

isolated neutral to IEC 60364

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

108 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 System description
2.13 Description of system components

Delta networks

Table 2- 7 Decoupling module requirements for delta networks

Delta network1) Network configuration Decoupling module Note

required?
3-wire, delta, one Yes Parameter "Voltage
phase grounded display → line-to-line
voltages" must be
active.

3-wire, delta, isolated Yes Parameter "Voltage

display → line-to-line
voltages" must be
active.

Center tap grounded Yes Parameter "Voltage

display → line-to-line
voltages" must be
active.

1) Mainly in North America

Single-phase networks

Table 2- 8 Decoupling module requirements for single-phase networks

Single-phase network Network configuration Decoupling module Note

required?
Yes Parameter "Voltage
display → line-to-line
voltages" must be
active.

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 109
System description
2.13 Description of system components

2.13.25 Expansion modules

Expansion modules are intended as optional additions for the SIMOCODE pro V PN basic
unit. The following expansion modules are available:
● Digital modules (DM)
● Fail-safe Local (DM-F Local) fail-safe digital module
● PROFIsafe fail-safe digital module (DM-F PROFIsafe)
● Analog modules (AM)
● Ground-fault module (EM)
● Temperature modules (TM)
All expansion modules have an enclosure width of 22.5 mm or 45 mm. They are equipped
with 2 system interfaces (incoming/outgoing) and removable terminals on the front panel.
The expansion module is connected, for example, to the system interface of the basic unit
via the first system interface using a connecting cable. For example, further expansion
modules or the operator panel can be connected via the second system interface.
All expansion modules are suitable for DIN rail mounting or can be fastened directly to a
mounting plate using additional push-in lugs.

Figure 2-36 Expansion module, SIMOCODE pro V PN device series

Up to 5 expansion modules can be connected in any sequence to a basic unit.

Digital module (DM)

Digital modules offer the option of further increasing the types and number of binary inputs
and relay outputs available at the SIMOCODE pro V PN basic unit.
The following digital modules are available for the SIMOCODE pro V PN basic unit:

Table 2- 9 Versions of digital modules

Inputs Supply Outputs

4 inputs External 24 V DC 2 monostable relay outputs
4 inputs External 110 to 240 V AC / DC 2 monostable relay outputs
4 inputs External 24 V DC 2 bistable relay outputs
4 inputs External 110 to 240 V AC / DC 2 bistable relay outputs

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

110 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 System description
2.13 Description of system components

Up to two digital modules can be connected to one SIMOCODE pro V PN basic unit.
4 additional binary inputs and 2 additional binary outputs are thus provided by each module.
All versions can be combined with each other. SIMOCODE pro can therefore be expanded
to provide a maximum of 12 binary inputs and 7 relay outputs.
With the monostable version, the relay outputs open after disconnection / failure /
interruption of the supply voltage. With the bistable version, the switching state of the relay
outputs is maintained even after disconnection / failure / interruption of the supply voltage.
You can set delays (debounce time) for the digital module inputs if required (see Chapter
Digital module inputs (Page 308)).
Supplying the inputs: See Chapter Wiring (Page 458).

Note
To implement some motor control functions, at least one further digital module is required in
addition to the relay outputs of the SIMOCODE pro V PN basic unit.

Note
If 2 digital modules are being used, the digital module connected the closest to the basic unit
via the system interface will be identified as digital module 1. The digital module connected
next in line will be identified as digital module 2. If one digital module is connected to the
front and another to the lower system interface of the basic unit, the digital module on the
front system interface of the basic unit will always be identified as digital module 1.

Fail-safe digital module DM-F

The fail-safe digital module DM-F extends the SIMOCODE pro motor management system
with fail-safe functions for switching off motors:
● DM-F Local fail-safe digital module
● DM-F PROFIsafe fail-safe digital module
These modules conform to the general requirements for EMERGENCY STOP devices or
safety circuits described in EN 418 and EN 60204-1 (06.2006).
The maximum performance / safety integrity levels are as follows, depending on the external
circuitry:
● PL e with Category 4 according to ISO 13849-4
● SIL 3 according to IEC 61508/62061
Safety engineering and safety-related functions:
● These are exclusively restricted to the fail-safe digital modules
● They therefore have no direct impact on existing SIMOCODE pro components and
concepts

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 111
System description
2.13 Description of system components

LEDs for DM-F device diagnostics

See Chapter Technical data of the DM-F LOCAL digital module (Page 667) and Technical
data of the DM-F-PROFIsafe digital module (Page 669) and/or Manual SIMOCODE pro
Safety fail-safe digital modules
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/50564852)).

"TEST/RESET" DM-F button

See Manual SIMOCODE pro Safety fail-safe digital modules
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/50564852).

Setting the DM-F DIP switches

See Chapter Safety-oriented tripping (Page 341) and/or Manual SIMOCODE pro Safety fail-
safe digital modules (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/50564852)

DM-F system interfaces

See Manual SIMOCODE pro Safety fail-safe digital modules
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/50564852).

Documentation for safety-related functions and fail-safe digital modules

Safety-related functions and additional information on fail-safe digital modules can be found
in the following documentation:
● Manual "Fail-safe Digital Modules SIMOCODE pro Safety"
● Operating Instructions "Fail-safe Digital Module DM-F Local"
● Operating Instructions "Fail-safe Digital Module DM-F PROFIsafe"
You will find the System Manuals and Operating Instructions at Manuals/operating
instructions (http://www.siemens.com/industrial-controls/manuals)
The fail-safe DM-F LOCAL digital module facilitates safety-related tripping of a motor feeder
by means of a hardware signal that is detected and evaluated by the module.
From a non-safety-related perspective, the DM-F module comprises:

Table 2- 10 Inputs, outputs and voltage supply to the DM-F Local digital module

Inputs Supply1) Outputs

4 digital inputs (non-safety- 24 V DC 2 non-safety-related monostable
related): relay outputs
• Input 1: Sensor circuit
• Input 2: Start input
• Input 3: Feedback circuit
• Input 4: Cascade input

1)
The fail-safe digital module DM-F PROFIsafe provides safety-related tripping of a motor
feeder by a fail-safe controller (F-CPU) via PROFIBUS with the fail-safe PROFIsafe profile.

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

112 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 System description
2.13 Description of system components

From a non-safety-related perspective, the DM-PROFIsafe module comprises:

Table 2- 11 Inputs, outputs and voltage supply to the DM-F PROFIsafe digital module

Inputs Supply1) Outputs

4 non-safety-related digital 24 V DC 2 non-safety-related monostable
inputs relay outputs

1)

WARNING
Hazardous Voltage.
For the 24 V DC power supply, always use an SELV or PELV power supply unit.
Surge suppressors are required for inductive loads!

Analog module (AM)

By means of the analog module, the basic unit can be optionally expanded by analog inputs
and outputs (0 / 4 mA to 20 mA). This makes it possible to detect and monitor any process
variables that can be mapped onto a 0/4 to 20 mA signal.
Typical applications are, for example, fill-level monitoring for protecting pumps from dry
operation, or the monitoring of pollution in a filter using a differential pressure transducer.
The automation system has free access to the measured process variables. The analog
output can, for example, be used for the visualization of any process variables on a pointer
instrument. The automation system can also freely access the output via PROFINET.
● 2 analog modules can be connected
● For each analog module, 2 analog inputs (passive) for detecting 0 / 4 mA to 20 mA
signals. Both inputs are set either to 0 mA to 20 mA or to 4 mA to 20 mA
● For each analog module, 1 output for outputting a 0 / 4 mA to 20 mA signal

Note
The inputs of the analog module are passive inputs that have to be supplied in each case by
an external, isolated current source (e.g. isolating transducer). If the output of the analog
module is not being utilized, it can be used as current source for an input.

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 113
System description
2.13 Description of system components

Ground-fault module (EM)

The 3UF7 500-1AA00-0 and 3UF7 510-1AA00-0 ground-fault modules are suitable for use
with the SIMOCODE pro V PN basic unit. 1 ground-fault module can be connected to each
SIMOCODE pro V PN basic unit.

NOTICE
Use of residual current transformers
The 3UF7 500-1AA00-0 ground-fault module requires the 3UL22 residual current
transformer.
The 3UF7 510-1AA00-0 ground-fault module requires the 3UL23 residual current
transformer.

Detailed information on ground-fault monitoring: See Monitoring functions (Page 42) and
Earth-fault monitoring (Page 248).

Temperature module (TM)

The temperature module offers the option of expanding SIMOCODE pro V PN with an
analog temperature monitoring system. In addition to the thermistor monitoring system for
the basic units, up to 3 analog sensor measuring circuits per temperature module (per
temperature module in two or three-wire systems) can be connected, the temperatures in the
3 sensor measuring circuits can be measured, and the highest temperature in all sensor
measuring circuits can be determined. The temperatures recorded can be fully integrated
and monitored in the process and can also be transferred to a higher-level automation
system via PROFINET. You can, for example, implement analog temperature monitoring of
the motor windings, bearings, coolant or gearbox oil. SIMOCODE pro V PN supports various
sensor types (NTC, KTY83/84, PT100, and PT1000) for use with solid, fluid or gaseous
media.

Note
The same sensor type must be used in all sensor measuring circuits.

● 2 temperature modules can be connected

● 3 sensor measuring circuits per temperature module in 2 or 3-wire systems

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

114 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 System description
2.13 Description of system components

2.13.26 Accessories
The following figure shows the series-neutral accessories:

Figure 2-37 Accessories

USB PC cable
With the USB PC cable for device parameterization, a PC is connected via its USB interface
to the SIMOCODE pro system interface.

Note
PC cable variant
For SIMOCODE pro V PN, a PC cable serial 3UF7940-0AA00-0 as from product version
*E02* or a USB PC cable USB 3UF7941-0AA00-0 can be used.

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 115
System description
2.13 Description of system components

SIMOCODE pro V PN memory module

The memory module allows all system parameter settings to be backed up and transferred to
a new system without the need for additional resources or specialist expertise, for example,
if the device is replaced (see also Chapter Replacing SIMOCODE pro components
(Page 505)).

Note
Memory module variant
For SIMOCODE pro V PN, the 3UF7901-0AA00-0 memory module is required.
The 3UF7900-0AA00-0 memory module is not supported.

Initialization module
The initialization module enables all system parameter settings to be backed up and
transferred to a new system without the need for additional resources or specialist expertise,
for example, if the device is replaced. It can be installed permanently in the switchgear.
Further information: See Chapter Compartment identification (PROFINET) (Page 745)

Connecting cable
Different types and lengths of connecting cable are available. It is required to connect the
basic unit to its current measuring module and, if applicable, to its expansion modules or to
the operator panel.

Note
The total length of all connecting cables must not exceed 3 m on either of the system
interfaces of the basic unit.

Door adapter
The door adapter is used to facilitate access to the SIMOCODE pro system interface, for
example via the front panel, to ensure fast parameterization.

System interface cover

The system interface cover helps to protect and/or seal the system interfaces against the
ingress of dirt. In normal operation, unused system interfaces must be closed.

Operator panel adapter

The operator panel adapter enables the use of the SIMOCODE pro 3UF720 operator panel
in a front panel cutout, in which a SIMOCODE DP 3UF52 operator panel (IP54 degree of
protection) was previously used, e.g. after system replacement.

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

116 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 System description
2.13 Description of system components

2.13.27 Software

Software overview
With the communication-capable switching devices, the user-friendliness of the
parameterization software and good system integration (in other words, the ability to
integrate optimally and quickly into the most diverse plant configurations and process
automation systems) also play an important role alongside the device functionalities and the
hardware configuration.
For this reason, the SIMOCODE pro system provides suitable software tools for consistent,
time-saving parameterization, configuring and diagnostics:
● SIMOCODE ES for totally integrated commissioning and service
● SIMOCODE pro PCS 7 function block library for total integration into PCS 7

SIMOCODE ES
SIMOCODE ES is the standard parameterization software for SIMOCODE pro.
SIMOCODE ES is a user-friendly, clearly structured user interface for the SIMOCODE pro
motor management system
for parameterizing, operating, monitoring and testing SIMOCODE pro in the field or from a
central location via PROFIBUS. By displaying all operating, service and diagnostics data,
SIMOCODE ES supplies important information when maintenance is required or a fault
occurs. It helps to prevent faults or to localize and rectify them once they have occurred.
Unnecessary plant downtimes can be prevented by changing parameters online (even
during operation).
In addition, the graphic editor enables extremely ergonomic and user-friendly
parameterization by dragging and dropping: Inputs and outputs of function blocks can be
linked graphically and the parameters set. Configured functions can be described in detail
and device parameterization can be documented graphically using comments.
The printing function integrated in SIMOCODE ES allows all parameters to be fully
documented in compliance with DIN EN ISO 7200.
In addition, the graphic editor enables extremely ergonomic and user-friendly
parameterization by dragging and dropping: Inputs and outputs of function blocks can be
linked graphically and the parameters set. Configured functions can be described in detail
and device parameterization can be documented graphically using comments. This speeds
up commissioning and simplifies plant documentation. The optimized user interface and
integrated graphic editor are used to assign parameters.
Further functions: Operation, diagnostics, testing, S7 routing, teleservice via MPI, STEP 7
Object Manager.

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 117
System description
2.13 Description of system components

Versions:
● SIMOCODE ES 2007 Basic
● SIMOCODE ES 2007 Standard
● SIMOCODE ES 2007 Premium.
● SIMOCODE ES in the TIA Portal

Note
SIMOCODE ES 2007
The operating procedures described in this manual are based on SIMOCODE ES 2007.

See also An overview of system components (Page 52) for more information.
You will find a demo version and the latest updates on the Internet at SIMOCODE ES
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/20356462/133100)

Note
SIMOCODE ES is updated and improved continually. You can download the current service
packs and hot fixes from SIMOCODE ES
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/20356462/133100).

OM SIMOCODE pro Object Manager

The OM SIMOCODE pro Object Manager is a component of SIMOCODE ES. When
SIMOCODE ES and OM SIMOCODE pro are installed on a PC / PG, SIMOCODE ES can be
called directly from STEP 7 HW Config, allowing simple and standardized SIMATIC S7
configuring procedures to be employed.

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

118 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 System description
2.13 Description of system components

SIMOCODE pro PCS 7 library

The PCS 7 block libraries for SIMOCODE, motor starters, soft starters and AS-Interface can
be used for simple and easy integration of the corresponding devices into the SIMATIC PCS
7 process control system. PCS 7 block libraries contain the diagnostics and driver blocks
corresponding with the diagnostics and driver concept of SIMATIC PCS 7 as well as the
elements (icons and faceplates) required for operator control and process monitoring.
Types of delivery and license:
The PCS 7 block libraries supplied on CD-ROM allow the user to run the required
engineering software on one engineering station (single license) including the runtime
software for executing the AS blocks in one automation system (single license). If the AS
blocks are to be used in additional automation systems, the corresponding number of
runtime licenses are required which are supplied without a data carrier.

Note
The PCS 7 libraries are subject to continual updating and improvement.
You can download the current service packs and hot fixes from Support
(http://www.siemens.com/simocode)→ Software.

Note
Observe the respective system versions!

GSD file
GSD files are used for integration into SIMATIC S7 or any automation system with
PROFINET IO. The latest version is on the Internet at PROFINET GSD files
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/38702563). Further information on
integrating PROFINET IO devices can be found in the automation system documentation.

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 119
System description
2.14 Structural configuration of SIMOCODE pro

2.14 Structural configuration of SIMOCODE pro

2.14.1 Function blocks

See also Chapter Overview of function blocks (alphabetical) (Page 123).

Properties
Function blocks are stored internally in the SIMOCODE pro system, e.g. for the
administration of various control stations, for the set control function, or for motor protection.
Every function block has a name and can be equipped with inputs and outputs. The inputs
and outputs are used for the internal connection of the various function blocks and, thus, the
setup of a device-internal logic instead of an externally wired logic in the control circuit.
The following table shows the possible input types of the internal function blocks of
SIMOCODE pro:

Table 2- 12 Input types of the internal function blocks of SIMOCODE pro

Input Symbol Example

Plugs (binary) Function blocks in the basic unit may have binary plugs. These are
connected to binary sockets via software. They are relevant for
parameterization, e.g. with SIMOCODE ES.
Plugs (analog) Function blocks in the basic unit may have analog plugs. These are
connected via software to analog sockets. They are relevant for
parameterization, e.g. with SIMOCODE ES. Example: 2-byte word for
cyclic send data.
Screw terminals Screw terminals are outside, e.g. "BU Input" function block. Control
devices and auxiliary switches are normally connected there.
Receive data from the From the IO controller to SIMOCODE pro, e.g. "Cyclic Receive"
IO controller function block.

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

120 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 System description
2.14 Structural configuration of SIMOCODE pro

The following table shows the possible output types of the internal function blocks of
SIMOCODE pro:

Table 2- 13 Output types of the internal function blocks of SIMOCODE pro

Output Symbol Example

Sockets (binary) Function blocks in the basic units may have binary sockets. These are
assigned via software to binary plugs. They are relevant for
parameterization, e.g. with SIMOCODE ES.
Sockets (analog) Function blocks in the basic units may have analog sockets. These are
assigned via software to analog plugs. They are relevant for
parameterization, e.g. with SIMOCODE ES.
Example: 2-byte word, max. current I_max.
Screw terminals Screw terminals are outside, e.g. "BU Output" function block. The
contactors, for example, are connected here.
Send data to the IO From SIMOCODE pro to the IO controller, e.g."Cyclic Send" function
controller block.

Binary terminal block Internal binary signals (binary sockets) that are not assigned to a
function block (fault, status, other), e.g. "Status - Device OK" (in the
graphic editor).
Analog terminal block Internal analog signals (analog sockets) that are not assigned to a
function block, e.g. "Phase Unbalance" (in the graphic editor).

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 121
System description
2.14 Structural configuration of SIMOCODE pro

Diagram of basic structure

The following function block diagram shows the basic structure of SIMOCODE pro with its
external inputs and outputs and internally stored function blocks:

Figure 2-38 Principal configuration of SIMOCODE pro

Connecting plugs with sockets

Note
The function block plugs and sockets have not already been connected at the factory with
the binary inputs and the relay outputs of the basic unit. The internal wiring (connection
between plugs and sockets) is determined by the selected application. 1)

Note
When you have already installed external wiring, but have not yet parameterized
SIMOCODE pro:
If you press a button now, the contactors will not be energized! 1)

1) If you select and load a preset application to the switching device (e.g. reversing starter) in
SIMOCODE ES, all links and interlocks for the reversing starter are set up in the basic unit.

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

122 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 System description
2.15 Overview of function blocks (alphabetical)

2.15 Overview of function blocks (alphabetical)

Analog value recording

Figure 2-39 Analog value recording

See Chapter Analog value recording (Page 319).

AM 1/2 output

Figure 2-40 AM1/2 output

See Chapter Outputs (Page 281).

AM 1/2 inputs

Figure 2-41 AM1/2 inputs

See Chapter Inputs (Page 299).

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 123
System description
2.15 Overview of function blocks (alphabetical)

Analog multiplexer

Figure 2-42 Analog multiplexer

See Chapter Logic modules (Page 351).

OP LED

Figure 2-43 OP LED

See Chapter Outputs (Page 281).

OP buttons

Figure 2-44 OP buttons

See Chapter Inputs (Page 299).

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

124 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 System description
2.15 Overview of function blocks (alphabetical)

Operation monitoring

Figure 2-45 Operation monitoring

See Chapter Monitoring functions (Page 247).

Flashing 1 (2, 3)

Figure 2-46 Flashing 1

See Chapter Logic modules (Page 351).

OPO

Figure 2-47 OPO

See Chapter Standard functions (Page 323).

Calculator 1

Figure 2-48 Calculator 1

See Chapter Logic modules (Page 351).

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 125
System description
2.15 Overview of function blocks (alphabetical)

Calculator 2

Figure 2-49 Calculator 2

See Chapter Logic modules (Page 351).

Calculators 3, 4

Figure 2-50 Calculator 3.4

See Chapter Logic modules (Page 351)

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

126 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 System description
2.15 Overview of function blocks (alphabetical)

DM1(2) outputs

Figure 2-51 DM1(2) outputs

See Chapter Outputs (Page 281).

DM1(2) inputs

Figure 2-52 DM1(2) inputs

See Chapter Inputs (Page 299).

DM1(2) inputs, DM-F = DM-F Local or DM-F PROFIsafe

Figure 2-53 DM1(2) inputs, DM-F = DM-F Local or DM-F PROFIsafe

See Chapter Inputs (Page 299).

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 127
System description
2.15 Overview of function blocks (alphabetical)

Extended protection

Figure 2-54 Extended protection

See Chapter Motor control (Page 175).

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

128 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 System description
2.15 Overview of function blocks (alphabetical)

Extended control

Figure 2-55 Extended control

See Chapter Motor control (Page 175).

External fault 1 (2, 3, 4, 5, 6)

Figure 2-56 External fault 1

See Chapter Standard functions (Page 323).

Flicker 1 (2, 3)

Figure 2-57 Flicker 1

See Chapter Logic modules (Page 351).

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 129
System description
2.15 Overview of function blocks (alphabetical)

BU outputs

Figure 2-58 BU outputs

See Chapter Outputs (Page 281).

BU inputs

Figure 2-59 BU inputs

See Chapter Inputs (Page 299).

Limit monitor 1 (2, 3, 4, 5, 6)

Figure 2-60 Limit monitor 1

See Chapter Logic modules (Page 351).

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

130 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 System description
2.15 Overview of function blocks (alphabetical)

Emergency start

Figure 2-61 Emergency start

See Chapter Standard functions (Page 323).

Non-volatile element 1 (2, 3, 4)

Figure 2-62 Non-volatile element 1

See Chapter Logic modules (Page 351).

OPC UA send data 0 (1)

Figure 2-63 OPC UA send byte 0 (1)

See Chapter Outputs (Page 281).

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 131
System description
2.15 Overview of function blocks (alphabetical)

OPC UA receive data 0 (1, 2/3)

Figure 2-64 OPC UA control byte 0 (1, 2/3)

See Chapter Inputs (Page 299).

Pulse width modulator

Figure 2-65 Pulse width modulator

See Chapter Logic modules (Page 351).

TPF

Figure 2-66 TPF

See Chapter Standard functions (Page 323).

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

132 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 System description
2.15 Overview of function blocks (alphabetical)

Protection/Control

Figure 2-67 Protection/Control

See Chapter Motor control (Page 175).

Signal conditioning 1 (and 2, 3, 4, 5, 6)

Figure 2-68 Signal conditioning 1

See Chapter Logic modules (Page 351).

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 133
System description
2.15 Overview of function blocks (alphabetical)

Safe tripping, DM-F Local

Figure 2-69 Safe tripping, DM-F Local

See Chapter Standard functions (Page 323).

Safe tripping, DM-F PROFIsafe

Figure 2-70 Safe tripping, DM-F PROFIsafe

See Chapter Standard functions (Page 323).

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

134 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 System description
2.15 Overview of function blocks (alphabetical)

Control stations

Figure 2-71 Control stations

See Chapter Motor control (Page 175).

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 135
System description
2.15 Overview of function blocks (alphabetical)

Current limits

Figure 2-72 Current limits

See Chapter Monitoring functions (Page 247).

Test 1 (2) and Reset 1 (2, 3)

Figure 2-73 Test 1, reset 1

See Chapter Standard functions (Page 323).

Thermistor

Figure 2-74 Thermistor

See Chapter Motor protection (Page 157).

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

136 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 System description
2.15 Overview of function blocks (alphabetical)

Timer 1 (and 2, 3, 4, 5, 6)

Figure 2-75 Timer 1

See Chapter Logic modules (Page 351).

TM1/2 inputs

Figure 2-76 TM1/2 inputs

See Chapter Inputs (Page 299).

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 137
System description
2.15 Overview of function blocks (alphabetical)

Monitor 0/4-20 mA AM1-2

Figure 2-77 Monitor 0/4-20 mA AM1-2

See Chapter Monitoring functions (Page 247).

Cos phi monitoring

Figure 2-78 Cos phi monitoring

See Chapter Monitoring functions (Page 247).

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

138 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 System description
2.15 Overview of function blocks (alphabetical)

Ground-fault monitoring with 3UF7500 ground-fault module

Figure 2-79 Ground-fault monitoring with 3UF7500 ground-fault module

See Chapter Monitoring functions (Page 247).

Ground-fault monitoring with 3UF7510 ground-fault module

Figure 2-80 Ground-fault monitoring with 3UF7510 ground-fault module

See Chapter Monitoring functions (Page 247).

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 139
System description
2.15 Overview of function blocks (alphabetical)

Power monitoring

Figure 2-81 Power monitoring

See Chapter Monitoring functions (Page 247).

Monitoring interval for mandatory testing

Figure 2-82 Monitoring interval for mandatory testing

See Chapter Monitoring functions (Page 247).

Voltage monitoring

Figure 2-83 Voltage monitoring

See Chapter Monitoring functions (Page 247).

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

140 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 System description
2.15 Overview of function blocks (alphabetical)

Temperature TM1/2 monitoring

Figure 2-84 Temperature TM1/2 monitoring

See Chapter Monitoring functions (Page 247).

UVO

Figure 2-85 UVO

See Chapter Standard functions (Page 323).

Truth table TT 3I/1O (TT 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 10, 11 3I/1O)

Figure 2-86 Truth table TT 3I/1O

See Chapter Logic modules (Page 351).

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 141
System description
2.15 Overview of function blocks (alphabetical)

Truth table TT 7 2I/1O (TT 8 2I/1O)

Figure 2-87 Truth table TT 7 2I/1O

See Chapter Logic modules (Page 351).

Truth table TT 9 5I/2O

Figure 2-88 Truth table TT 9 5I/2O

See Chapter Logic modules (Page 351).

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

142 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 System description
2.15 Overview of function blocks (alphabetical)

Watchdog

Figure 2-89 Watchdog

See Chapter Standard functions (Page 323).

Counter 1 (2, 3, 4, 5, 6)

Figure 2-90 Counter 1

See Chapter Logic modules (Page 351).

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 143
System description
2.15 Overview of function blocks (alphabetical)

Cyclic send byte 0 (1, 2/3, 4/9, 10/19)

Figure 2-91 Cyclic send

See Chapter Outputs (Page 281).

Cyclic receive byte 0 (1, 2/3, 4/5)

Figure 2-92 Cyclic receive

See Chapter Inputs (Page 299).

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

144 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
Short instructions for configuring a reversing starter 3
In this chapter
In this chapter you will find short instructions for configuring a reversing starter, with the aid
of a practical example. The majority of the parameters have been appropriately preset at the
factory for most applications.
You only need to set a few parameters.

Target groups
This chapter addresses the following target groups:
● Planners
● Configuring engineers
● Technicians
● Electricians
● Commissioning engineers

Required knowledge
You will require the following knowledge:
● Basic SIMOCODE pro knowledge (see Chapter System description (Page 23))
● Basic knowledge about SIMOCODE ES parameterization software (see Chapter Software
(Page 117))
● Basic knowledge of PROFINET IO (integration into the automation system)

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 145
Short instructions for configuring a reversing starter
3.1 Introduction and objective of the example

3.1 Introduction and objective of the example

Introduction
The following simple example of a reversing starter demonstrates step-by-step how to
commission SIMOCODE pro. In this context, the reversing starter will be equipped with:
● Initially, one local control station - Local control.
● Followed by a second control station with PROFINET IO.
SIMOCODE ES software is used for parameterization. The PC / PG is connected to the
basic unit via a PC cable.

Objective of the example

This example is intended to:
1. Show you how to implement a standard switching operation with a reversing starter using
SIMOCODE pro in just a few steps.
2. Help you modify this example for your application.
3. Help you implement other applications easily.

Fundamental steps
The two fundamental SIMOCODE pro steps are always:
● Implementation of external wiring (for control and feedback of main current switching
devices and control and signaling devices)
● Implementation/activation of internal SIMOCODE pro functions (function blocks), with
control and evaluation of the SIMOCODE pro inputs/outputs (internal SIMOCODE pro
wiring).

Requirements
● Load feeder / motor is present
● PLC/PCS with PROFINET interface is present
● The main circuit of the reversing circuit, including the current measuring module, has
already been wired. In this case, the 3 cables leading to the motor must be led through
the feed-through openings of the current measuring module.
● PC / PG is present
● SIMOCODE ES software is installed
● The basic unit has the factory settings. You can find out how to restore the basic factory
settings in Chapter Restoring factory settings (Page 509).

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

146 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Short instructions for configuring a reversing starter
3.2 Reversing starter with motor feeder and local control station

3.2 Reversing starter with motor feeder and local control station

Required components
The following table lists the components required for this example:

Table 3- 1 Components required for this "reversing starter" example

Item Ordering data Order number

1 SIMOCODE pro V PN basic unit 3UF7011-1AU00-0
2 0.3 A to 3 A current measuring module 3UF7100-1AA00-0
3 Connecting cable for connecting basic unit to the current 3UF793.-1AA00-0
measuring module, depending on length
4 "SIMOCODE ES 2007 Basic" software for parameterization 3ZS1312-4CC10-0YA5
via the system interface
Or: "SIMOCODE ES 2007 Standard" software for 3ZS1312-5CC10-0YA5
parameterization via the system interface with graphic editor
Or: "SIMOCODE ES 2007 Premium" software for 3ZS1312-6CC10-0YA5
parameterization via PROFINET and the system interface
with the graphic editor, includes STEP 7 Object Manager
5 PC cable for connecting the basic unit to a PC / PG 3UF7940-0AA00-0 (RS232) (as from product
version *E02*) or 3UF7941-0AA00-0 (USB)

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 147
Short instructions for configuring a reversing starter
3.2 Reversing starter with motor feeder and local control station

Reversing starter circuitry with SIMOCODE pro

The following schematic shows the circuitry of the main circuit and the control circuit:

Figure 3-1 Wiring of the main circuit and the control circuit with SIMOCODE pro

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

148 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Short instructions for configuring a reversing starter
3.2 Reversing starter with motor feeder and local control station

Circuit diagram of a reversing starter control circuit

The following schematic shows the circuit diagram of the control circuit with a local control
station for the commands:
● LEFT
● OFF
● RIGHT
Displays, messages, etc, have not been taken into account.

Figure 3-2 Circuit diagram of a reversing starter control circuit

The necessary interlocks and connections are carried out in the basic unit via software.

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 149
Short instructions for configuring a reversing starter
3.3 Parameterization

3.3 Parameterization

The basics of parameterization

After the external wiring connections have been made (contactor coils connected, current
measuring module integrated in the main circuit), SIMOCODE pro is then parameterized.
For this purpose, you need to understand the following points:

Table 3- 2 Schematic of the various SIMOCODE pro function blocks

Point Description
1 Function blocks are stored internally in the SIMOCODE pro system, e.g. for control stations, control
functions and motor protection.
2 Function blocks have names.
3 Function blocks may have set values, e.g. the type of control function and the set current for overload
protection.
4 Function blocks are equipped with plugs and sockets. These are clearly designated.
5 To achieve the desired functionality, proceed as follows:
1. Interconnect the function blocks by connecting specific plugs to specific sockets (i.e "plug the plugs into
the sockets").
2. If required, set values in the function blocks, e.g. the set current, type of control function.
6 The inputs of the function blocks in the basic unit are designated as plugs and labeled as follows:
7 The outputs of the function blocks in the basic unit are designated as sockets and labeled as follows:
8 The plugs and sockets of the device inputs and outputs are not connected as factory defaults. If you press a
button now, the contactors will not be energized.

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

150 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Short instructions for configuring a reversing starter
3.3 Parameterization

General procedure for parameterizing the reversing starter

Parameterization means:
● Setting values
● Connecting function blocks.
Where this example is concerned, this means:
1. Select the control function "Reversing Starter". This establishes all the interlocks and
connections for the reversing starter in the basic unit.
2. Determine the set current Is for motor protection. In this case, the set current corresponds
to the rated motor current, i.e. 3 A.
3. The "BU Outputs" function block must be connected to the sockets of the
"Protection/Control" function block via the software, i.e:
– "BU Output 1" plug to "Contactor Control QE1" socket (right)
– "BU Output 2" plug to "Contactor Control QE2" socket (left)
4. The plugs on the "Protection/Control" function block must be connected via software to
the sockets on the "BU Inputs" function block, i.e.
– Control station plug - Local Control [LC] ON< to "BU Input 1" socket
– Control station plug - Local Control [LC] OFF to "BU Input 2" socket
– Control station plug - Local Control [LC] ON> to "BU Input 3" socket

Figure 3-3 Schematic of the parameterization example "reversing starter"

The assignment of the contactor controls QE depends on the parameterized control function.
See Chapter Active control stations, contactor controls, lamp controls and status information
for the control functions (Page 243)

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 151
Short instructions for configuring a reversing starter
3.3 Parameterization

Concrete procedure for parameterization with SIMOCODE ES

Proceed as follows:
Table 3- 3 Parameterization with SIMOCODE ES

Step Description
1 Start SIMOCODE ES on your PC / PG.
2 Choose PROFINET → Switching devices → Monitoring and control devices → Motor management system
SIMOCODE → SIMOCODE pro V PN.
3 Select the control function "Reversing Starter" as application. When you select this application, a range of
presets will be automatically carried out that you will have to check later.
4 Under "Device configuration," choose SIMOCODE pro V PN, Version 1.0. Deactivate the operator panel if
none is installed.
5 Open the Device Parameters → Motor Protection → Overload / Unbalance / Stalled Rotor dialog box. Set the
set current Is1 to 3 A.
6 Open the Further Function Blocks → Outputs → Basic Unit dialog box and check the following settings:
• BU Output 1 → Contactor Control QE1
• BU Output 2 → Contactor Control QE2

The relay outputs are connected to the contactor controls.

Note
By choosing a preset application (Step 2), other presets might be made when the BU outputs are assigned to
the contactor controls.
7 Open the Device Parameters → Motor Control → Control Stations dialog box and check the following settings:
• Local Control [LC] ON<: BU - Input 1
• Local Control [LC] OFF: BU - Input 2
• Local Control [LC] ON>: BU - Input 3

The control station "Local Control" is now connected with the binary inputs of the basic unit.
Check whether the enables for "ON" and "OFF" for operating mode "Local2" are set.
8 Parameterization is complete. Save the parameter file on your PC / PG using Device → Save.

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

152 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Short instructions for configuring a reversing starter
3.3 Parameterization

Transferring the parameters to the basic unit and commissioning

After creating the parameter file, you can then transfer it to SIMOCODE pro and commission
the reversing starter.
To do so, proceed as follows:

Table 3- 4 Transferring the parameters to the basic unit and commissioning

Step Description
1 Switch on the power supply of the basic unit.
2 Connect the serial interface of the PC / PG to the system interface of the basic unit using the PC cable.
3 Observe the status LED on the basic unit. The "Device" LED should light up green. SIMOCODE pro can be
started up.
4 Transfer the parameter file to the basic unit via the menu, e.g. using Target System → Load to Switching
Device. Use the interface with which SIMOCODE pro is connected to the PC via the PC cable.
5 After transferring the data to the basic unit, you will receive the message "Download to device successfully
accomplished".

Note
Switching between "RIGHT" and "LEFT" is only possible via "OFF" after the preset, 5-second
interlocking time has expired.

Configuration with local control station completed

The configuration with SIMOCODE pro is now complete. You now have a functional
reversing starter with a local control station. If the wiring and parameterization are correct,
the contactors for clockwise and counterclockwise rotation will be activated when the
corresponding buttons are pushed.

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 153
Short instructions for configuring a reversing starter
3.4 Adding a control station to the reversing starter using PROFINET

3.4 Adding a control station to the reversing starter using PROFINET

In this section
In this section, you will find out how a control station can be added to the previously
configured example by means of PROFINET. You can switch between the local control
station (local) and PLC/PCS (remote). SIMOCODE pro can then be controlled locally via the
buttons and via the PLC/PCS.
The necessary connections are preset as factory defaults in SIMOCODE pro.

Requirements
The following requirements must be fulfilled:
● The motor is switched off.
● The supply voltage for the basic unit is switched on. The "Device" LED lights up green
● You have connected the basic unit to the automation system via PROFINET. The two
PROFINET interfaces are located on the front (RJ-45 female connector). It is immaterial
which of the two PROFINET interfaces you use.
● You have integrated SIMOCODE pro into your automation system and defined the IP
configuration and the PROFINET IO station name for SIMOCODE pro V PN and
transferred it into the device. Further information on integrating PROFINET IO devices
can be found in the automation system documentation.

Setting the IP configuration and station name

The precondition for communication between the automation system and SIMOCODE pro
via PROFINET is definition of the IP configuration and the PROFINET station name. This
can be done in the following ways:
● With the configuration tool of your automation system
● Via SIMOCODE ES.

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

154 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Short instructions for configuring a reversing starter
3.4 Adding a control station to the reversing starter using PROFINET

Proceed as follows:

Table 3- 5 Set IP parameters and PROFINET IO device names with SIMOCODE ES

Ste Description
p
1 Plug the PC cable into the system interface.
2 Start SIMOCODE ES.
3 Open menu Switching device → Open online.
4 Select "Local device interface" and the corresponding COM interface. Confirm with OK.
5 Open the Device Parameters → PROFINET Parameters dialog box.
6 Choose the IP parameters to match the configuration in the automation system. Select the "Overwrite IP parameters
in device" parameter. If the IP parameters are assigned by the IO Controller in the automation system, no setting is
necessary here and the "Overwrite IP parameters in device" parameter must not be selected.
7 Select the PROFINET device name to match the configuration in the automation system. Select the "Overwrite
device name in device" parameter. If the device name is assigned by the configuration tool of the automation system
(e.g. STEP 7), no setting is required here and the parameter "Overwrite device names in device" must not be set.
8 Save the data in the basic unit with Target System → Load to Device. The address is set. Confirm the change of
address.

Set IP parameters and PROFINET device names with STEP 7 HW Config

It is possible to set this parameter with the STEP 7 HW config function "Target system → Edit
Ethernet station."
The precondition for using this function is that the PG or the PC is also connected to
SIMOCODE pro via Ethernet.
If the MAC address of the SIMOCODE pro V PN basic unit is used, you can assign the IP
parameters and the PROFINET device names. You will find the MAC address on the front of
the basic unit.
Alternately, you can read the MAC address out via the local device interface with
SIMOCODE ES with "Switching device → Open online" under PROFINET parameters.

Additional internal components of the basic unit

The local control [LC] station is already wired, the external components are connected and
the necessary internal connections have been made. The following additional internal
components, which have already been connected as factory defaults and do not have to be
parameterized, are now required:
● Cycl. Receive bit 0.0, bit 0.1 and bit 0.2 for the commands "LEFT," "OFF," and "RIGHT"
● Cycl. Receive bit 0.5 for switching between the local control station [LC] and PLC/PCS
[DP] (remote)
– Bit 0.5=0: Local control station [LC] active
– Bit 0.5=1: PLC/PCS [PN] control station active.
The PLC/PCS [PN] control station and the change-over (plug S1) have already been
connected as factory defaults with the bits (sockets) of the cyclic receive data. The
assignments can be found in SIMOCODE ES under Device Parameters → Motor
Control → Control Stations.

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 155
Short instructions for configuring a reversing starter
3.4 Adding a control station to the reversing starter using PROFINET

Figure 3-4 Schematic of basic unit internal components for this example

Not all pre-assigned cyclic send data is shown here. Assignments can be found in
SIMOCODE ES under Further Function Blocks > Outputs > Cyclic Send Data.
Configuration with PLC/PCS [PN] control station is complete
The configuration with SIMOCODE pro is now complete. You now have a reversing starter
with an additional control station implemented via PROFINET.
The contactors for clockwise and counterclockwise rotation are controlled by setting the
corresponding bits.

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

156 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
Motor protection 4
In this chapter
In this chapter you will find information about motor protection.
Motor protection includes:
● Overload protection
● Unbalance protection
● Stalled rotor protection
● Thermistor protection
Motor protection operates alongside motor control "at a higher level in the background". All
motor protection parameters are explained here. They can be active or not, according to the
control function selected.

Target groups
This chapter addresses the following target groups:
● Configuring engineers
● Commissioning engineers

Required knowledge
You will require the following knowledge:
● In-depth knowledge about SIMOCODE pro
● The principle of connecting plugs to sockets
● Electrical drive engineering

Navigation in SIMOCODE ES
You will find the dialog boxes in SIMOCODE ES under "Device Parameters → Motor
Protection".

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 157
Motor protection
4.1 Introduction

4.1 Introduction

Description
The motor protection functions "Overload Protection," "Unbalance Protection," "Stalled Rotor
Protection," and "Thermistor Protection" are described in the following chapters:
Overload protection (Page 161)
Unbalance protection (Page 170)
Stalled rotor protection (Page 171)
Thermistor protection (Page 172)

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

158 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Motor protection
4.1 Introduction

Schematic
The following schematic shows the "Extended Protection" function block ("Overload
protection", "Unbalance protection", and "Stalled rotor protection") with optional parameter
settings and events.

Figure 4-1 "Extended Protection" function block ("Overload Protection", "Unbalance Protection", and
"Stalled Rotor Protection")

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 159
Motor protection
4.1 Introduction

Adjustable responses "Overload Protection", "Unbalance Protection" and "Stalled Rotor Protection"

Response Prewarning level Trip level Level "unbalance" Level "stalled rotor
"overload protection" "overload protection" protection"
Deactivated X X X X (d)
Signaling X X X X
Warning X (d) X X (d) X
Tripping - X (d) X X
Delay 0 to 25.5 s (0.5 s) - 0 to 25.5 s (0.5 s) 0 to 25.5 s (0.5 s)

Responses for "Overload Protection", "Unbalance Protection" and "Stalled Rotor Protection"

See also "Tables of responses of SIMOCODE pro" in Chapter Important information

(Page 17).

Note
Deactivate unbalance protection in SIMOCODE ES when the load type is set to single-
phase!

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

160 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Motor protection
4.2 Overload protection

4.2 Overload protection

4.2.1 Description
SIMOCODE pro protects three-phase or AC motors in accordance with IEC 60947-4-1
requirements. The trip class can be set to eight different settings, ranging from Class 5 to
Class 40. Thus, the tripping time can be adapted precisely to the power-up behavior of the
motor, improving utilization of the motor capacity. Additionally, the "Thermal motor model"
and time to overload trip are calculated and made available to the control system. After an
overload trip, the remaining cooling down period is displayed (see Class). The motor current
is saved in the case of an overload trip.
Depending on the control function, the set current Is is separately parameterizable for one or
two speeds (Is1 and Is2).
The rated motor current is usually set with set current Is1. This value can be found on the
type plate of the motor. The overload trip characteristic is calculated based on this value.
The set current Is2 is only required for motors with two speeds to guarantee suitable
overload protection for the higher speed too. Generally, Is2 should be set higher than Is1.

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 161
Motor protection
4.2 Overload protection

4.2.2 Set current Is1

Setting ranges for set current Is1

Range: Depends on the selected current measuring module or current / voltage measuring
module.

Set current Is1: 0.3 to 3 A (default setting: 0.3)

2.4 to 25 A
10 to 100 A
20 to 200 A
63 to 630 A

Transformation ratio - active

When using an interposing transformer, or if the main supply cable is looped several times
through the current measuring module or the current / voltage measuring module, you can
enter the transformation ratio of the interposing transformer. Activate the checkbox if you
wish to use this option. The parameterized set current corresponds here largely to the actual
rated motor current and does not have to be converted.
The transformation ratio is calculated from the ratio between the rated motor current [A] and
the measured current [A] or any multiple of the ratio.

Transformation ratio - primary

Enter the primary current here, with the "Transformation ratio - active" checkbox activated.
Range: 0 to 8191.875 (default setting: 0).

Transformation ratio - secondary

Enter the secondary current here, with the "Transformation ratio - active" checkbox
activated.
Range: 0 to 15 (default setting: 0).

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

162 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Motor protection
4.2 Overload protection

4.2.3 Set current Is2

Setting ranges for set current Is2

Range: Depends on the selected current measuring module or current / voltage measuring
module.

Set current Is2: 0.3 to 3 A (default setting: 0.3 A)

2.4 to 25 A
10 to 100 A
20 to 200 A
63 to 630 A

Transformation ratio - active

When using an interposing transformer, or if the main supply cable is looped several times
through the current measuring module or the current / voltage measuring module, you can
enter the transformation ratio. Activate the checkbox if you wish to use this option. The
parameterized set current corresponds here largely to the actual rated motor current and
does not have to be converted.
The transformation ratio is calculated from the ratio between the rated motor current [A] and
the measured current [A] or any multiple of the ratio.

Transformation ratio - primary

Enter the primary current here, with the "Transformation ratio - active" checkbox activated.
Range: 0 to 8191.875 (default setting: 0).

Transformation ratio - secondary

Enter the secondary current here, with the "Transformation ratio - active" checkbox
activated.
Range: 0 to 15 (default setting: 0).

Note
In the case of motors with two speeds, the same or different transformation ratios can be set
for each speed, depending upon whether the same or two different interposing transformers
is/are used for each speed.

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 163
Motor protection
4.2 Overload protection

4.2.4 Application example

Example 1:
Rated motor current: 700 A.
A 3UF1868-3G current transformer (205 to 820 A) is used as interposing current transformer
(transformation ratio 820 : 1), and the secondary side is routed once via a current measuring
module 0.3 A to 3 A:
Transformation ratio for Is = 820 : 1; Is = 700 A
Settings (primary and secondary)
● Set current Is1: 700 A
● Is1 Transformation ratio primary: 820
● Is1 transformation ratio secondary: 1

Example 2:
Rated motor current: 225 A.
A 3UF1868-3G current transformer (205 to 820 A) is used as interposing current transformer
(transformation ratio 820 : 1), and the secondary side is routed twice via a current measuring
module 0.3 A to 3 A:
Transformation ratio for Is = 820 : 2; Is = 225 A
Settings (primary and secondary)
● Set current Is1: 225 A
● Is1 Transformation ratio primary: 820
● Is1 transformation ratio secondary: 2

Example 3:
The motor cable is routed twice via a current measuring module (0.3 to 3 A) for a motor with
rated current 0.25 A:
Transformation ratio for Is = 1 : 2; Is = 0.25 A
Settings:
● Set current Is1: 0.25 A
● Is1 Transformation ratio primary: 1
● Is1 transformation ratio secondary: 2

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

164 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Motor protection
4.2 Overload protection

4.2.5 Further overload protection parameters

Class
The Class (trip class) defines the maximum time within which SIMOCODE pro must trip from
cold at 7.2 times the set current Is (motor protection to IEC 60947). With regard to tripping
time precision, SIMOCODE pro fulfills the extended requirements of tolerance band E
according to IEC / EN 60947-4-1. Please take into account that with start-ups > "Class 10",
the admissible AC3 current of the contactor may have to be reduced (derating), i.e. a larger
contactor selected.
The following figure shows trip classes 5, 10 (d), 15, 20, 25, 30, 35 and 40 for 3-pole
balanced loads:

Figure 4-2 Trip classes for 3-pole symmetrical loads

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 165
Motor protection
4.2 Overload protection

The following figure shows trip classes 5, 10 (d), 15, 20, 25, 30, 35 and 40 for 2-pole loads:

Figure 4-3 Trip classes for 2-pole loads

Response to overload
The SIMOCODE pro response to overload can be additionally adjusted here.
Further information: See also "Tables of responses of SIMOCODE pro" in Chapter Important
information (Page 17) and Table "Responses" in Chapter Introduction (Page 158).

Note
With motors for EEx e applications, the response must remain set to "Tripping"!

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

166 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Motor protection
4.2 Overload protection

Cooling down period

The cooling down period is the amount of time that must elapse before an overload trip can
be reset. This is usually 5 minutes. The thermal memory (motor model – see below) is
cleared after the cooling down period elapses. Supply voltage failures of SIMOCODE pro
during this time extend the specified time correspondingly.
Range: 60 to 6553.5 s (default setting: 300).

Thermal motor model (thermal memory)

When the rated motor current (Is) is at 100%, the value of "Thermal motor model" is
87% (1/1.15 x 100%) in a steady state, and 100% at the moment of an overload trip.

"At operating temperature" state

In the "At operating temperature" state, the tripping times are reduced by the factors listed in
the table. These factors apply to 3-pole symmetrical loads, Class 5 to Class 40:

Table 4- 1 Factors for trip times at operating temperature

x Is Preload as a percentage of the set current Is

0 20 40 60 80 100
1,15 1 1 1 1 1 1
1,5 1 0,90 0,78 0,64 0,57 0,24
2 1 0,88 0,74 0,58 0,40 0,19
4 1 0,85 0,69 0,52 0,35 0,16
6 1 0,84 0,68 0,51 0,34 0,15
7,2 1 0,84 0,68 0,51 0,33 0,15
8 1 0,84 0,67 0,51 0,33 0,15

Example:
You have operated and switched off a motor with set current 100% Is.
You immediately switch the motor back on. This causes an overload trip with 2 x Is, Class 10.
● Tripping time in cold state: approximately 40 s (acc. to tripping characteristic)
● Factor for tripping time with preload 100% Is: 0.19 (see Table)
● Reduced tripping time: 0.19 x 40 s = 7.6 s.

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 167
Motor protection
4.2 Overload protection

Pause time
The pause time is the specified time for the cooling down response of the motor when
tripped under normal operating conditions (not in the case of an overload trip). After this
interval, the thermal memory in SIMOCODE pro is deleted and a new cold start is possible.
This means that many startups can be performed in a short space of time.
The following schematic shows the cooling down response with and without pause time:

Figure 4-4 Cooling down response with and without pause time

Note
Both the motor and the switching devices must be dimensioned specifically for this load!

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

168 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Motor protection
4.2 Overload protection

Load type
You can select whether SIMOCODE pro is to protect a 1-phase or a 3-phase load. For a 1-
phase type of load, the internal ground-fault monitoring and the unbalance protection must
be deactivated. Phase failure monitoring is deactivated automatically.
Type of load: 1-phase, 3-phase (default).
See also Table "Decoupling module requirements for star networks."

Delay prewarning
The "Delay" parameter (default: 0.5 s) defines the length of time for which the prewarning
level (1.15 x Is) must be permanently exceeded before SIMOCODE pro will execute the
desired response. If no setting is made, there will be no response. In the event of a loss of
phase or an unbalance > 50%, the prewarning level will be reached earlier, at approximately
0.85 x Is.

Reset
If the "Reset" parameter is set to "Auto", the "Overload", "Overload + Unbalance" and
"Thermistor" faults will be acknowledged automatically
● If the cooling down period has expired.
● If the thermistor value has dropped back down to the specified resetting value.
If the "Reset" parameter is set to "Manual", the faults must be acknowledged by a reset
signal:
● "TEST/RESET" button on the basic unit
● "TEST/RESET" button on operator panel
● Standard functions "Reset."
For this, the "Reset - Input" (plugs) must be connected to the corresponding sockets, e.g.
using reset via bus.
Reset: Manual, Auto (default setting: manual).

WARNING
Unexpected restart of the motor
The "Auto-Reset" mode must not be used for applications where an unexpected motor
restart may cause personal injury or damage to property.

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 169
Motor protection
4.3 Unbalance protection

4.3 Unbalance protection

Description
The extent of the phase unbalance can be monitored and transmitted to the control system.
If a specified limit value is violated, a defined and delayable response can be initiated. If the
phase unbalance is more than 50%, the tripping time is also automatically reduced in
accordance with the overload characteristic since the heat generation of the motors
increases in asymmetrical conditions.

Phase unbalance formula

The phase unbalance is calculated using the following equation:

Level
The level of unbalance to which SIMOCODE pro should react is set here.
Setting range: 0 to 100 % (default setting: 40 %)

Response
Here you can select the response of SIMOCODE pro to phase unbalance: See also "Tables
of responses of SIMOCODE pro" in Chapter Important information (Page 17) and Table
"Responses" in Chapter Introduction (Page 158).

Delay
The unbalance level must be exceeded for the period of the set delay time before
SIMOCODE pro executes the desired response. If no setting is made, there will be no
response.
Setting range: 0 to 25.5 s (default setting: 0.5 s)

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

170 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Motor protection
4.4 Stalled rotor protection

4.4 Stalled rotor protection

Description
If the motor current rises above an adjustable stalled rotor protection level (current
threshold), a defined and delayable response can be configured for SIMOCODE pro. In this
case, for example, the motor can be shut down independently of the overload protection.
The stalled rotor protection is only active after the parameterized class time has elapsed,
e.g. for Class 10 after 10 seconds, and prevents unnecessarily high thermal and mechanical
loads as well as premature aging of the motor.

Level
When the stalled rotor level is exceeded, SIMOCODE pro reacts according to the selected
response.
Level: 0 to 1020 % of ls (default: 0).

Note
Rounding
Intermediate values are automatically rounded.

Response
Here you can determine the response to violation of the stalled rotor level:
See also "Tables of responses of SIMOCODE pro" in Chapter Important information
(Page 17) and Table "Responses" in Chapter Introduction (Page 158).

Delay
The "Delay" parameter determines the amount of time that the stalled rotor level must be
permanently exceeded before SIMOCODE pro executes the desired response. If no setting
is made, there will be no response.
Setting range: 0 to 25.5 s (default: 0.5 s).

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 171
Motor protection
4.5 Thermistor protection

4.5 Thermistor protection

Description
Thermistor protection is based on a direct temperature measurement in the motor via binary
PTC thermistors which can be connected to the SIMOCODE pro basic unit.
Thermistor protection is used for:
● Motors with high switching frequencies
● Converter operation
● Motors with heavy starting
● Intermittent duty and/or braking operation
● Restricted incoming air supply
● Speeds below the rated speed.
In this case, the sensors are mounted in the winding slot or bearing of the motor.

Schematic and characteristic curve

The resistance of the thermistors increases rapidly (abruptly) when the temperature limit is
reached.

Figure 4-5 Thermistor function block (thermistor protection)

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

172 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Motor protection
4.5 Thermistor protection

Response
● Overtemperature: Here you can select how SIMOCODE pro should respond when the
temperature has overshot the trip level.

Note
With motors for EEx e applications, the response must be set to "Tripping"!

● Sensor fault (sensor circuit fault): Here you can select the SIMOCODE pro response in
the case of a short circuit or a break in the thermistor sensor cable.

Table 4- 2 "Thermistor protection, binary" response

Response Trip level Sensor fault

Deactivated - X
Signaling X X
Warning X X (d)
Tripping X (d) X

See also "Tables of responses of SIMOCODE pro" in Chapter Important information

(Page 17).

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 173
Motor protection
4.5 Thermistor protection

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

174 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
Motor control 5
In this chapter
In this chapter you will find information on:
● Control stations which you can select and enable according to need. The following related
topics are explained:
– How control stations, operating modes and enables work together
– How control commands, e.g. "ON", "OFF", are switched through to the control function
● Control functions you can select according to need. The following related topics are
explained:
– How control commands, e.g. "ON," "OFF," are switched through from the control
stations to the contactor controls/relay outputs
– Which parameters apply depending on the control function chosen

Target groups
This chapter addresses the following target groups:
● Configuring engineers
● PLC programmers

Required knowledge
You will require the following knowledge:
● The principle of connecting plugs to sockets
● Electrical drive engineering
● Motor protection

Navigation in SIMOCODE ES
You will find the dialog boxes in SIMOCODE ES under Device Parameters → Motor Control.

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 175
Motor control
5.1 Control stations

5.1 Control stations

5.1.1 Description
Control stations are places from which control commands are issued to the motor. The
"Control Stations" function block is used for administration, switching and prioritization of
these different control stations. SIMOCODE°pro allows parallel administration of up to four
different control stations. Dependent on the set control function, up to five different control
commands can be transmitted from every control station to SIMOCODE pro.
● Local in the direct vicinity of the motor; control commands via pushbuttons.
● PLC/PCS [PN], switching commands are issued by the automation system (remote)
● PC/OPC UA [OCM], control commands are issued via an operator control station or via
OPC UA or via PROFINET with the SIMOCODE ES software
● Operator panel, control commands are issued via the buttons of the operator panel in the
control cabinet door. Examples of control commands:
– Motor ON (ON >), Motor OFF (OFF) for a direct starter
– Motor LEFT (ON <), Motor OFF (OFF), Motor RIGHT (ON >) for a reversing starter
– Motor SLOW (ON >), Motor FAST (ON >>), Motor OFF (OFF) for a Dahlander circuit.
The plugs of the "Control Stations" function block must be connected to any sockets (e.g.
binary inputs on the basic unit, PROFINET control bits, etc.) for the control commands to
take effect.
Up to five different control commands can come from each control station. Up to five plugs
(plug ON <<, ON <, OFF, ON >, ON >>) are available on the function block for each control
station. The number of active plugs depends on the control function selected. With a direct
starter, for example, only the plugs "ON >" and "OFF" are active.

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

176 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Motor control
5.1 Control stations

Control stations
● Control station - local control: In this case, the command devices are usually in the direct
vicinity of the motor and are wired to the inputs of SIMOCODE pro. The plugs of the
"Control Stations" function block must be connected to any sockets (normally the function
blocks for the basic units or the digital module inputs – BU Inputs, DM Inputs) for the
control commands to take effect.

Note
The OFF command "LC OFF" is 0-active. This ensures that SIMOCODE pro shuts the
motor down safely if an open circuit occurs in the supply line, for example. The
precondition is that the control station is active.

Figure 5-1 Control station - local control

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 177
Motor control
5.1 Control stations

● Control station - PLC/PCS [PN]: This control station is primarily intended for control
commands from the automation system (PLC/PCS) via the Cyclic Receive telegram from
PROFINET.
The plugs of the "Control Stations" function block must be connected to any sockets,
normally "Cyclic Receive," for the control commands to take effect.

Figure 5-2 Control station - PLC/PCS [PN]:

● Control station - PC/OPC-UA [OCM]: This control station is primarily intended for
switching commands from any PC which, as a client, accesses the data provided by
SIMOCODE pro as the server via OPC UA. The control commands are thus transmitted
on a client-server link via OPC UA.

Note
If the "SIMOCODE ES Professional" software is connected to SIMOCODE pro via
PROFINET, its control commands automatically take effect via the "PC/OPC UA" control
station. At the same time, the enabled commands for this control station also take effect
for SIMOCODE ES.

Figure 5-3 Control station - PC/OPC-UA [OCM]

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

178 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Motor control
5.1 Control stations

● Control station - operator panel

This control station is primarily intended for control commands issued via the buttons on
the 3UF72 operator panel, which is mounted in a cabinet door, for example. The plugs of
the "Control Stations" function block must be connected to any sockets (normally to the
function block for the buttons of the operator panel - OP buttons) for the control
commands to take effect.

Note
Since the operator panel only has four buttons for controlling the motor feeder, one button
must be used as a speed changeover button for control functions with two speeds and
two directions of rotation.
For this purpose, this button must be assigned to the internal control command
"[OP]<>/<<>>".

Note
If the SIMOCODE ES PC software on a programming device is connected to
SIMOCODE pro via the system interface, its control commands automatically take effect
via the "operator panel [OP]" control station and must also be enabled here as applicable.

Figure 5-4 Control station - Operator panel

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 179
Motor control
5.1 Control stations

5.1.2 Operating modes and mode selectors

Operating modes
You can use the control stations either individually or in combination. There are four different
operating modes available for selection:
● Local 1
● Local 2
● Local 3
● Remote/Automatic: In this operating mode, the system must communicate via PLC.
Not all control stations are usually connected. If more than one control station (e.g. local and
PLC/PCS) is connected, it makes sense and is also mandatory to operate the control
stations selectively. Four operating modes are provided for this purpose which can be
selected via two control signals (mode selectors). For each individual control station in every
operating mode, it can be stipulated if "ON commands" and/or "OFF commands" are to be
accepted. The operating modes are controlled in such a way that only one operating mode is
active at any one time.
Example: There are three operating modes in a system:

Table 5- 1 Operating modes

Operating mode Description

Key-operated switch operation, e.g. Local 1 Only local control inputs are permitted! All other
control stations are disabled.
Manual operation, e.g. Local 3 Only operator panel control commands and local
control commands can be issued.
Remote operation, e.g. remote/automatic Only PLC/PCS control commands are permitted;
only OFF commands are permitted locally.

The key-operated switch must be read in via an input to select these operating modes. The
remote switching operation should be controlled via the bus. The key-operated switch
operation has priority over all other operating modes.

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

180 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Motor control
5.1 Control stations

Mode selector
The S1/S2 mode selectors are used to switch between the operating modes "Local 1",
"Local 2", "Local 3" and "Remote/Automatic". To do this, plugs S1 and S2 must be
connected to any sockets (e.g. device inputs, PROFINET control bits, etc.).
The table below shows the operating modes depending on the signal states of mode
selectors S1 and S2:

Table 5- 2 Operating modes depending on S1 and S2

Input Operating mode

Local 1 Local 2 Local 3 Remote/Automatic
S1 0 0 1 1
S2 0 1 0 1

The different operating modes for enabling the control stations can be used to specify the
switch authorizations for the individual control stations:
● Local control [LC]
● PLC/PCS [PN]
● PC/OPC-UA [OCM]
● Operator panel [OP]
Only the following are active:
● The operating mode set by the plugs S1 and S2 of the "Control Stations" function block
● The enables selected on "Control Stations".
Example of a dynamic mode selection as a function of time:

Figure 5-5 Example - mode selection

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 181
Motor control
5.1 Control stations

5.1.3 Enables and enabled control command

Enables
Enables, which must be activated, are assigned to the "ON" and "OFF" control commands
for each control station in every operating mode. This means, depending on the operating
mode, you can define for every control station whether the motor may be switched on only,
off only, or on and off from the control station. The relevant checkbox is selected in the
"Control stations" dialog box in SIMOCODE ES.

Enables and enabled control command schematic

The following diagram shows the "Control Stations" function block and the operating modes:

Figure 5-6 Function block "Control Stations"

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

182 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Motor control
5.1 Control stations

Example of enabled commands

The following diagram shows an example of enabled commands for the "Local 2" operating
mode, "Dahlander reversing starter" control function:

Figure 5-7 Example of enabled commands

In the example, the motor can only be switched on and off in the "Local 2" operating mode
via the buttons (local) connected to the inputs of the basic unit and the digital module.

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 183
Motor control
5.1 Control stations

5.1.4 Control station settings

Table 5- 3 Control station settings

Control stations Description

LC Activates the control station via any signal (any
ON << sockets , but typically device inputs).
The "OFF" plug is 0-active on the control station
[LC].
ON <

OFF

ОN >

ON >>

PLC/PCS [PN] Activates the control station via any signal (any
ON << sockets , but typically control bits from
PROFINET).

ON <

OFF

ОN >

ON >>

PC/OPC-UA [OCM] Activates the control stations via any signal (any
ON << sockets , but typically control bits via
OPC UA).

ON <

OFF

ОN >

ON >>

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

184 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Motor control
5.1 Control stations

Control stations Description

Operator panel [OP] Activates the control stations via any signal (any
<>/<<>> sockets , but typically buttons on the
operator panel).

ON <

OFF

ОN >

ON >>

Mode selector For switching between the 4 operating modes

S1 Local 1, Local 2, Local 3 and remote with any
signals (any sockets , e.g. device inputs,
control bits from PROFINET, etc.).
S2

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 185
Motor control
5.2 Control functions

5.2 Control functions

5.2.1 Description

Control functions - overview

Table 5- 4 Control functions

Control function SIMOCODE pro V PN

Overload relay (Page 196) ✓
Direct starter (Page 198) ✓
Reversing starter (Page 200) ✓
Circuit breaker (Page 203) ✓
Star-delta starter (Page 206) ✓
Star-delta reversing starter (Page 210) ✓
Dahlander (Page 214) ✓
Dahlander reversing starter (Page 217) ✓
Pole-changing starter (Page 221) ✓
Pole-changing reversing starter (Page 224) ✓
Solenoid valve (Page 228) ✓
Positioner 1 to Positioner 5 (Page 231) ✓
Soft starter (Page 236) ✓
Soft starter with reversing contactor (Page 239) ✓

Control functions (e.g. direct starters, reversing starters) are used for controlling load
feeders.
They are characterized by the following important features:
● Monitoring of the switch ON/OFF operation
● Monitoring the ON/OFF status
● Tripping if a fault occurs.
SIMOCODE pro monitors these statuses using the "Feedback ON" auxiliary control input,
which is usually derived directly from the current flow in the main circuit, via the current
measuring modules.
All the necessary interlocks and logic operations for the respective applications are already
implemented in the control functions.

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

186 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Motor control
5.2 Control functions

Control functions include:

● Plugs for
– control commands (ON <<, ON <, OFF, ON >, ON >>) that are usually connected with
the "Enabled control command" sockets
● Auxiliary control inputs (plug ), e.g. Feedback ON
● Sockets for
– Contactor controls QE1 to QE5.
– Displays (lamp controls) QL, QLS.
– Statuses, e.g. "Status - ON <<, Status - ON >>".
– Faults, e.g. "Fault - Feedback (FB) On", "Fault - Antivalence"
● Settings, e.g. interlocking time, non-maintained command mode ON/OFF, etc.
● A logic component with all necessary interlocks and connections for the control function.
● Like control functions, the motor protection with its parameters and signals is active "at a
higher level in the background". Motor protection and thermistor protection are
independent functions that switch off the motor when activated via the control functions.
Detailed description: See Chapter Motor protection (Page 157)

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 187
Motor control
5.2 Control functions

Control function schematic

The following schematic shows a general view of the control function ("Protection/Control"
function blocks):

Figure 5-8 "Protection/Control" function block

**) See also Chapter Motor protection (Page 157).

Contactor controls
The QE contactor controls are switched dependent on the incoming control commands and
taking the specified control function into consideration including all corresponding interlocks,
feedbacks, corresponding parameters and the higher-level motor protection. In general, the
QE contactor controls are directly connected to the outputs of the basic unit or the digital
modules and switch the connected contactors using relays. The number of usable QE
contactor controls is directly dependent on the set control function.

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

188 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Motor control
5.2 Control functions

Lamp controls and status information:

The feeder status feedback is signaled via the status information or the QL lamp controls.
They are all directly dependent on the status of the auxiliary control input "FB ON". The
number of usable lamp controls and status information is directly dependent on the specified
control function.
Feeder status feedback:
● Status information, e.g. "Status ON <": These are transmitted, for example, via
PROFINET to the automation system and signal the status of the feeder there
● Displays (lamp control) "Display - QLE <": These can, for example, activate a signal lamp
or a pushbutton lamp for status display

Note
If the motor is running in test operation, the QLE... / QLA lamp outputs show a different
response (e.g. flashing).

● In addition to the status signals, the "QL..." lamp controls additionally indicate the
following:
– Unacknowledged fault (lamp output general fault QLS is flashing)
– Save change-over command (QLE lamp outputs are flickering)
– Lamp test: All QL outputs are activated for approx. 2 s

Extended status and fault messages

● Additional status information:
– Start active: If "Motor" is selected as the load type, this signal is present during the
start process of the motor for the duration of the specified class time (e.g. 10 s for
Class 10). Exceptions are the "Overload relay" and "Solenoid valve" control functions.
– Interlocking time active: For control functions with a change in the direction of rotation,
the signal remains present until the specified interlocking time has elapsed.
– Change-over pause active: For the "Dahlander," "Pole-changing starter," and "Star-
delta" control functions the signal is present after changeover until the specified time
has elapsed.
● Additional status information for the "Positioner" or "Solenoid valve" control function:
– Feedback Closed (FC)
– Feedback Open (FO)
– Torque Closed (TC)
– Torque Open (TO).

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 189
Motor control
5.2 Control functions

These feedback signals specify the present status of the corresponding limit switch and/or
torque switch. The amount of usable status information is directly dependent on the selected
control function.
● Additional fault information for the "Positioner" or "Solenoid valve" control function:
– Stalled positioner: The torque switch has been activated before the corresponding limit
switch. The positioner may have stalled
– Double 0: Both torque switches have responded
– Double 1: Both limit switches have responded
– End position: Positioner has left the end position without receiving a control command
– Antivalence: The changeover contacts of the limit switches do not issue an antivalent
signal (only for the "Positioner 5" control function)

Figure 5-9 "Extended Control" function block

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

190 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Motor control
5.2 Control functions

5.2.2 General settings and definitions

Application selection
The following dialog box opens
● when the SIMOCODE ES software starts and
● with menu command Switching Device > New in SIMOCODE ES.
If you select and load a preset application (e.g. the reversing starter) in SIMOCODE ES, all
protective functions, links and interlocks for the reversing starter are set up in the basic unit.
These can be flexibly adapted and expanded:

Figure 5-10 Application selection

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 191
Motor control
5.2 Control functions

Table 5- 5 Application selection

Control function Brief description Further information

Overload relay SIMOCODE pro behaves See "Overload relay" control function
like an overload relay. (Page 196)
Direct starter Switching motor on and off See "Direct starter" control function
(Page 198)
Reversing starter Controlling the direction of See "Reversing starter" control function
rotation of motors (clockwise, (Page 200)
counter-clockwise)
Molded-case circuit breaker (MCCB) Switching a circuit breaker See "Molded case circuit breaker (MCCB)"
on and off (e.g. 3WL, 3VL) control function (Page 203)
Star-delta starter To limit the starting current, See "Star-delta starter" control function
SIMOCODE pro initially (Page 206)
starts the motor with a star-
connected stator winding
and then switches it to delta.
Star-delta reversing starter Star-delta starter with both See "Star delta reversing starter" control
directions of rotation function (Page 210)
(clockwise, counter-
clockwise)
Dahlander Controlling motors with only See "Dahlander" control function (Page 214)
one stator winding in two
speed steps (fast, slow)
Dahlander reversing starter Dahlander starter with both See "Dahlander reversing starter" control
directions of rotation function (Page 217)
(clockwise, counter-
clockwise)
Pole-changing starter Controlling motors with two See "Pole-changing starter" control function
stator windings in two speed (Page 221)
stages (fast, slow)
Pole-changing reversing starter Pole-changing starter with See "Pole-changing reversing starter"
both directions of rotation control function (Page 224)
(clockwise, counter-
clockwise)
Solenoid valve Activation of a solenoid valve See "Solenoid valve" control function
(Page 228)
Positioner (1, 2, 3, 4, 5) Activation of positioners or See "Positioner" control function (Page 231)
actuators. Versions 1 to 5
Soft starter Activation of the 3RW soft See "Soft starter" control function
starter (Page 236)
Soft starter with reversing contactor Controlling the 3RW soft See "Soft starter with reversing contactor"
starter, including an control function (Page 239)
additional reversing
contactor

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

192 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Motor control
5.2 Control functions

Parameters for control functions

Table 5- 6 General settings and definitions

Parameters Description
ON <<, ON <, OFF, ON >, Are usually connected with the "Enabled control command" sockets of the "Control Station"
ON >> function block. From there, the control commands come from the different control stations.
The number of active inputs depends on the control function chosen. With a direct starter,
for example, only the inputs "ON >" and "OFF" are active.
Default setting: Connected
FB ON Auxiliary control input "Feedback ON" (connection with any socket , usually with
"Status - Motor current flowing" socket) as factory default. An auxiliary contact from the
contactor is not required for signaling. Depending on the control function chosen, this state
is signaled by the QLE1 to QLE5 displays and by the "Status - ON <<, - ON <, - ON >,
- ON >>" signals. "No motor current flowing" means: the motor is switched off. An auxiliary
contact from the contactor is not required for signaling. This state is signaled by the QLA
display and the "Status - OFF" signal.
Default setting: Status - Motor current flowing
FC, FO, TC, TO Auxiliary control inputs for the "Positioner" and "Solenoid valve" control functions that are
normally connected with the inputs of the basic unit or the digital modules and are used to
query the present status of the torque switch and the limit switches that are hard-wired to
the inputs.
Non-maintained command • Deactivated (default setting): The control command on the corresponding plug of the
mode control stations "ON <, ON <<, ON >, ON >>" is saved. It can only be revoked by an
"OFF" control command from the corresponding control station. An auxiliary contact for
locking the contactor is not required. Motor feeders are usually operated in locking
mode. Locking is preset.
• Activated: Depending on the control function chosen, non-maintained command mode
acts on the plugs of all control stations "ON <, ON <<, ON >, ON >>". A control
command is only effective as long as there is a "high signal".
Save change-over command • Deactivated (default setting): Change-over commands for switching from one direction
of rotation/rotational speed to the other are only implemented with a previous "OFF" and
after the interlocking time / change-over pause has elapsed. This setting is usually used
and is preset.
• Activated: Change-over commands for switching from one direction of rotation/rotational
speed to the other are implemented without a previous "OFF" once the interlocking
time/change-over pause has elapsed. If the selected direction/speed cannot be
executed immediately due to a parameterized interlocking time/change-over pause, the
selection is signaled by flickering QLE displays. Your selection can be cancelled at any
time with "OFF".
Separate DM-FL/FP function • Deactivated (default setting): Safety-related tripping via the DM-F modules also affects
from control function the SIMOCODE pro control function, so that the contactor control is always tripped, too.
This setting is selected for applications where safety-related tripping directly affects the
motor controlled by SIMOCODE pro.
• Activated: Safety-related tripping via the DM-F modules does not affect the
SIMOCODE pro control function, so that the contactor control is not tripped. This setting
is selected for applications where safety-related tripping does not affect the motor
controlled by SIMOCODE pro.

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 193
Motor control
5.2 Control functions

Parameters Description
Type of consumer load You can select from the following:
• Motor (default)
• Resistive load (e.g. heater): Since overcurrent generally does not flow during start-up on
a resistive load, the "Start active" status is not signaled. In this case, the start-up
override does not occur for the "Signaling", "Warning" and "Tripping" functions.
Feedback time SIMOCODE pro monitors the status of the feeder (ON or OFF) via FB ON. If the status of
FB ON changes - without a corresponding switching command - "Fault - Feedback (FB)"
switches off the feeder.
Default setting: 0.5 s
The feedback time can be used to suppress such "feedback faults" for a defined period of
time, e.g. in the case of network switchover. When the motor is switched off,
SIMOCODE pro continuously checks whether FB ON = 0. If the current flows longer than
the set feedback time without the "ON" control command being issued, a fault message
"Fault - Feedback (FB) ON" is issued. The contactor controls can only be connected after
the fault has been rectified.
When the motor is switched on, SIMOCODE pro continuously checks whether FB ON = 1.
If no current flows for longer than the set feedback time without the "OFF" control command
being issued, a fault message "Fault - feedback (FB) OFF" is issued. The contactor controls
are deactivated.
Execution time SIMOCODE pro monitors the switch-on and switch-off process. The switch-on or switch-off
process must be completed within this time.
Default setting: 1.0 s
After the "ON" control command is issued, SIMOCODE pro must be able to detect current
in the main circuit within the execution time. Otherwise, the fault message "Fault -
Execution ON command" will be issued. SIMOCODE pro deactivates the contactor
controls.
After the "OFF" control command is issued, SIMOCODE pro must not be able to detect
current in the main circuit after expiry of the execution time. Otherwise, the fault message
"Fault - Execution STOP command" will be issued. The contactor controls can only be
connected after the fault has been rectified.
Interlocking time SIMOCODE pro prevents, e.g. in the case of reversing starters, both contactors from
switching on at the same time. Changing from one direction of rotation to the other can be
delayed via the interlocking time.
Default setting: 0 s
Change-over pause In the "Dahlander" and "Pole-changing starter" control functions, switching from FAST to
SLOW can be delayed by the time configured.
In the "Star-delta starter" control function, the change-over pause time extends the time
between switching off the star contactor and switching on the delta contactor by the time
configured.
Default setting: 0.00 s
Max. star time With the "Star-delta starter" or "Star-delta reversing starter" control function: Time-
dependent switching from star to delta.
Max. star time: 0 - 255 s (default setting: 20 s).
Current measuring module With the "Star-delta starter" and the "Star-delta reversing starter" control functions:
installed The set current and the switching levels for star-to-delta switching depend on the
installation location of the current measuring module:
• in delta circuit (default): Set current Is is reduced to Irated x 1/√3
• In supply line: Set current

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

194 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Motor control
5.2 Control functions

Figure 5-11 Execution time (ET) and feedback time (FT) in relation to FB ON

Faults
The contactor controls are deactivated.
The following signals are also output:
● A flashing signal on the QLS lamp control
● A flashing signal on the "GEN. FAULT" LED
● The "Status - General fault" signal
● The corresponding signaling bit of the fault.

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 195
Motor control
5.2 Control functions

5.2.3 "Overload relay" control function

Description
With this control function, SIMOCODE pro functions like a solid-state overload relay. Control
commands (e.g. ON, OFF) cannot be issued to the load. Control stations and inputs of the
control function (e.g. ON >, OFF), do not have any function in the case of overload relays.
When the control voltage is applied, SIMOCODE pro automatically closes the QE3 contactor
control; it remains active until it is deactivated by the fault message of a protection or
monitoring system.
The QE3 contactor control must be connected to any relay output that switches off the
contactor coil of the motor contactor in case of overload.

Schematic

Figure 5-12 Schematic of the "Overload relay" control function, "Protection/Control" function block

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

196 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Motor control
5.2 Control functions

Settings
You will find detailed explanations of the settings in Chapter General settings and definitions
(Page 191).

Table 5- 7 Overload relay settings

Overload relay Description

FB ON "Feedback ON" auxiliary control input
Connection with any socket , usually with socket "Status - current flowing"

Type of consumer load You can choose between

• Motor (default)
• Resistive load (see Chapter General settings and definitions (Page 191)).
Separate fail-safe • Deactivated (default setting): Safety-related tripping via the DM-F modules affects the
function from control SIMOCODE pro control function, so that additional fault messages are avoided. This setting is
function selected for applications where safety-related tripping directly affects the motor controlled by
SIMOCODE pro.
• Activated: Safety-related tripping by the DM-F modules does not affect the SIMOCODE pro
control function. This setting is selected for applications where safety-related tripping does not
affect the motor controlled by SIMOCODE pro.

Note
In the case of overload, the QE3 output is set (=1) and is only reset after an overload trip
(=0).
This output closes when the overload function is parameterized.

Note
Monitoring the number of starts is not possible for this control function.

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 197
Motor control
5.2 Control functions

5.2.4 "Direct starter" control function

Description
SIMOCODE pro can switch a motor on and off with this control function.

Control commands
● Start with "ON >" activates the QE1 internal contactor control.
● Stop with "OFF" deactivates the QE1 internal contactor control.
The control commands can be issued to SIMOCODE pro from any control stations (see also
the description of "control stations"). Thus, the inputs (plugs) must be connected to the
corresponding sockets, preferably to the "Enabled control command" sockets.
Every fault message causes the QE1 contactor control to be deactivated.

Schematic

Figure 5-13 Schematic of the "Direct starter" control function, "Protection/Control" function block

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

198 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Motor control
5.2 Control functions

Settings
You will find detailed explanations of the settings in Chapter General settings and definitions
(Page 191).

Table 5- 8 Direct starter settings

Direct starter Description

OFF Control command OFF
Connection with any socket , usually with socket "Enabled control command - OFF"
ON > Control command ON
Connection with any socket , usually with socket "Enabled control command - ON >"
FB ON "Feedback ON" auxiliary control input
Connection with any socket , usually with socket "Status - current flowing"
Non-maintained command • Deactivated (default setting)
mode
• Activated
Separate fail-safe function • Deactivated (default setting): Safety-related tripping via the DM-F modules also affects
from control function the SIMOCODE pro control function, so that additional fault messages are avoided. This
setting is selected for applications where safety-related tripping directly affects the motor
controlled by SIMOCODE pro.
• Activated: Safety-related tripping by the DM-F modules does not affect the
SIMOCODE pro control function. This setting is selected for applications where safety-
related tripping does not affect the motor controlled by SIMOCODE pro.
Type of consumer load You can choose between
• Motor (default)
• Resistive load (see Chapter General settings and definitions (Page 191)).
Feedback time Range 0 to 25.5 s (default setting: 0.5 s)
Execution time Range 0 to 6553.5 s (default setting: 1.0 s)

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 199
Motor control
5.2 Control functions

5.2.5 "Reversing starter" control function

Description
With this control function, SIMOCODE pro can control the direction of rotation of the motor
(forwards and backwards).

Control commands
● Start with "ON >" activates the QE1 contactor control (clockwise, i.e. forwards)
● Start with "ON <" activates the QE2 contactor control (counter-clockwise, i.e. backwards)
● Stop with "OFF" deactivates the QE1 and QE2 internal contactor controls.
The control commands can be issued to SIMOCODE pro from any control stations (see also
the description of "control stations"). Thus, the inputs (plugs) must be connected to the
corresponding sockets, preferably to the "Enabled control command" sockets.
Every fault message causes the QE1 and QE2 contactor controls to be deactivated.

Switching the direction of rotation

The direction of rotation can be switched once the "Status - ON >" or "Status - ON <" signal
has expired (motor is switched off) and the interlocking time has elapsed:
● Via the "OFF" control command.
● Directly when "Save change-over command" is activated.
SIMOCODE pro prevents both contactors from switching on at the same time. Changing
from one direction of rotation to the other can be delayed via the interlocking time.

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

200 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Motor control
5.2 Control functions

Schematic

Figure 5-14 Schematic of the "Reversing starter" control function, "Protection/Control" function block

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 201
Motor control
5.2 Control functions

Settings
You will find detailed explanations of the settings in Chapter General settings and definitions
(Page 191).

Table 5- 9 Reversing starter settings

Reversing starter Description

ON < Control command ON <, counter-clockwise
Connection with any socket , usually with socket "Enabled control command
- ON <"
OFF Control command OFF
Connection with any socket , usually with socket "Enabled control command
OFF"
ON > Control command ON >, clockwise
Connection with any socket , usually with socket "Enabled control command
- ON >"
FB ON "Feedback ON" auxiliary control input
Connection with any socket , usually with socket "Status - current flowing"
Non-maintained command mode • Deactivated (default setting)
• Activated
Save change-over command • Deactivated (default setting)
• Activated
Separate fail-safe function from control • Deactivated (default setting): Safety-related tripping via the DM-F modules
function also affects the SIMOCODE pro control function, so that additional fault
messages are avoided. This setting is selected for applications where safety-
related tripping directly affects the motor controlled by SIMOCODE pro.
• Activated: Safety-related tripping by the DM-F modules does not affect the
SIMOCODE pro control function. This setting is selected for applications
where safety-related tripping does not affect the motor controlled by
SIMOCODE pro.
Type of consumer load You can choose between
• Motor (default)
• Resistive load (see Chapter General settings and definitions (Page 191))
Feedback time Range 0 to 25.5 s (default setting: 0.5 s)
Execution time Range 0 to 6553.5 s (default setting: 1.0 s)
Interlocking time Range 0 to 255 s (default setting: 0 s)

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

202 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Motor control
5.2 Control functions

5.2.6 "Molded case circuit breaker (MCCB)" control function

Description
SIMOCODE pro can mainly switch circuit breakers (e.g. 3WL, 3VL) ON and OFF with this
control function. The circuit breakers are then connected to PROFINET via SIMOCODE pro.

Control commands
● Start with "ON >" activates the QE1 contactor control for a pulse of 400 ms.
● Stop with "OFF" activates the QE3 contactor control for a pulse of 400 ms.
● With "Reset", the QE3 contactor control is activated for a pulse of 400 ms when the circuit
breaker is tripped (alarm switch = ON).
The pulse of a control command is always fully executed before the "counter pulse" is set.
The control commands can be issued to SIMOCODE pro from any control stations (see also
the description of "control stations"). Thus, the inputs (plugs) must be connected to the
corresponding sockets, preferably to the "Enabled control command" sockets.

Making internal assignments

You have to make the following assignments:
1. Assign the QE1 contactor control to the relay output that is connected to the "ON
connection" of the motorized operating mechanism of the circuit breaker.
2. Assign the QE3 contactor control to the relay output that is connected to the "OFF
connection" of the motorized operating mechanism of the circuit breaker.
3. Assign the SIMOCODE pro input that is connected to the auxiliary switch (AUXS) of the
circuit breaker to the auxiliary control input "Feedback ON".
4. Assign the SIMOCODE pro input which is connected to the alarm switch (AS) of the
circuit breaker to the input (socket) of the "External fault 1" standard function.

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 203
Motor control
5.2 Control functions

Schematic

Figure 5-15 Schematic of the "circuit breaker" control function, "Protection/Control" function block

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

204 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Motor control
5.2 Control functions

Settings
You will find detailed explanations of the settings in Chapter General settings and definitions
(Page 191).

Table 5- 10 Circuit breaker settings

Circuit breaker Description

OFF Control command OFF
Connection with any socket , usually with socket "Enabled
control command OFF"
ON > Control command ON
Connection with any socket , usually with socket "Enabled
control command - ON >"
FB ON "Feedback ON" auxiliary control input
Connection always with socket , (input) to which the auxiliary
switch of the circuit breaker is connected
Non-maintained command mode • Deactivated (default setting)
• Activated
Separate fail-safe function from control function • Deactivated (default setting): Safety-related tripping via the DM-F
modules also affects the SIMOCODE pro control function, so that
additional fault messages are avoided. This setting is selected for
applications where safety-related tripping directly affects the
motor controlled by SIMOCODE pro.
• Activated: Safety-related tripping by the DM-F modules does not
affect the SIMOCODE pro control function. This setting is
selected for applications where safety-related tripping does not
affect the motor controlled by SIMOCODE pro.
Type of consumer load You can choose between
• Motor (default)
• Resistive load (see Chapter General settings and definitions
(Page 191))
Feedback time A repeated ON pulse is only output by the QE1 contactor control
once the set feedback time has elapsed. The feedback time should
therefore be set higher than the motor off time of the motor-operated
mechanism of the circuit breaker.
Range 0 to 25.5 s (default setting: 0.5 s)
Execution time Range 0 to 6553.5 s (default setting: 1.0 s)

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 205
Motor control
5.2 Control functions

5.2.7 "Star-delta starter" control function

Description
Star-delta starting is used to limit the starting current and to avoid overloading the line
supply. In this control function, SIMOCODE pro initially starts the motor with a star-
connected stator winding and then switches it to delta.

Control commands
● Start with "ON" first activates the QE1 contactor control (star contactor) and then
immediately activates the QE3 contactor control (line contactor)
● Stop with "OFF" deactivates contactor controls QE1, QE2, and QE3.
The control commands can be issued to SIMOCODE pro from any control stations (see also
the description of "control stations"). Thus, the inputs (plugs) must be connected to the
corresponding sockets, preferably to the "Enabled control command" sockets. Every fault
message causes the QE1, QE2 and QE3 contactor controls to be deactivated.

Switching from star to delta

For this purpose, SIMOCODE pro first deactivates contactor control QE1 before connecting
contactor control QE2 (delta contactor).
SIMOCODE pro switches over from star to delta:
● Current-dependent, for decreasing current below the following thresholds:
– Transformer installed in delta circuit: I < 150 % Is
– Transformer installed in supply line: I < 90 % Is
● Time-dependent to the time set in the parameter "Max. star time" when the current in star
operation does not sink below this threshold.

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

206 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Motor control
5.2 Control functions

Safety information

Note
It is recommended that QE contactor controls are wired to the relay outputs of the basic unit.

Note
False tripping can occur if you use internal ground-fault detection for star-delta circuits.
During delta operation, the summation current is non-zero due to harmonics.

Note
If the current measuring module is switched to delta (normal case), a current which is 1/√3
times smaller must be set for the star-delta starter control function.
Example: In = 100 A
Is = In x 1/√3
Is = 100 A x 1/√3 = 57.7 A
Current to be set Is = 57.7 A

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 207
Motor control
5.2 Control functions

Change-over pause
The switching time from star to delta can be extended by the change-over pause. Reason:
For motors with a high ratio between starting current and rated current, the line voltage plus
motor EMF might lead to a very high delta starting current if the change-over pause is too
short. The motor EMF decreases if the pause is longer.

Schematic

Figure 5-16 Schematic of the "Direct starter" control function, "Protection/Control" function block

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

208 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Motor control
5.2 Control functions

Settings
You will find detailed explanations of the settings in Chapter General settings and definitions
(Page 191).

Table 5- 11 Star-delta starter settings

Star-delta starter Description

OFF Control command OFF
Connection with any socket , usually with socket "Enabled control command - OFF"
ON > Control command ON
Connection with any socket , usually with socket "Enabled control command - ON >"
FB ON "Feedback ON" auxiliary control input
Connection with any socket , usually with socket "Status - current flowing"
Non-maintained command • Deactivated (default setting)
mode
• Activated
Separate fail-safe function • Deactivated (default setting): Safety-related tripping via the DM-F modules affects the
from control function SIMOCODE pro control function, so that additional fault messages are avoided. This
setting is selected for applications where safety-related tripping directly affects the motor
controlled by SIMOCODE pro.
• Activated: Safety-related tripping by the DM-F modules does not affect the
SIMOCODE pro control function. This setting is selected for applications where safety-
related tripping does not affect the motor controlled by SIMOCODE pro.
Type of consumer load You can select from the following:
• Motor (default)
• Resistive load (see Chapter General settings and definitions (Page 191))
Feedback time Range 0 to 25.5 s (default setting: 0.5 s)
Execution time Range 0 to 6553.5 s (default setting: 1 s)
Change-over pause Range 0 to 655.3 s (10 ms steps) (default setting: 0.00 s)
Max. star time Time-dependent switching from star to delta.
Range 0 to 255 s (default setting: 20 s)
Current measuring module The set current and the switching levels for star-to-delta switching depend on the installation
installed 1) location of the current measuring module:
• In the delta circuit: Set current Is is reduced to In x 1/√3 (default)
• In supply line: Set current Is = In (rated current of the motor)

Note
1) If a current / voltage measuring module is in use, the transformer must be connected in
the supply line.
It is also necessary to select "Line-to-line voltage" under "Device configuration → Voltage
display".

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 209
Motor control
5.2 Control functions

5.2.8 "Star delta reversing starter" control function

Description
With this control function, a motor can be started in both directions of rotation in star-delta
operation.

Control commands
● Clockwise rotation: Start with "ON >" first activates the QE1 contactor control (star
contactor) and then immediately activates the QE3 contactor control
● Counter-clockwise rotation: Start with "ON <" first activates the QE1 contactor control
(star contactor) and then immediately activates the QE4 contactor control
● Stop with "OFF" deactivates contactor controls QE1, QE2, QE3, and QE4.
The control commands can be issued to SIMOCODE pro from any control stations (see also
the description of "control stations"). Thus, the inputs (plugs) must be connected to the
corresponding sockets, preferably to the "Enabled control command" sockets.
Every fault message causes the QE1, QE2, QE3 and QE4 contactor controls to be
deactivated.

Switching from star to delta

For this purpose, SIMOCODE pro first deactivates the QE1 contactor control before
connecting the QE2 contactor control (delta contactor).
SIMOCODE pro switches over from star to delta:
● Current-dependent, for decreasing current below the following thresholds:
– Transformer installed in delta circuit: I < 150 % Is
– Transformer installed in supply line: I < 90 % Is
● Time-dependent to the time set in the parameter "Max. star time" when the current in star
operation does not sink below this threshold.

Switching the direction of rotation

The direction of rotation can be switched on condition that the signal "Status - ON >" or
"Status - ON <" has expired (motor has been shut down) and the interlocking time has
elapsed:
● Via the OFF control command.
● Directly when "Save change-over command" is activated.
SIMOCODE pro prevents both contactors from switching on at the same time. Switching
from one direction of rotation to the other can be delayed via the "interlocking time".
Start-up is always in star mode.

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

210 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Motor control
5.2 Control functions

Safety information

Note
It is recommended that the QE1 and QE2 contactor controls are wired to the relay outputs of
the basic unit. You need at least 1 digital module for this control function.

Note
False tripping can occur if you use internal ground-fault detection for star-delta circuits.
During delta operation, the summation current is non-zero due to harmonics.

Note
If the current measuring module is switched to delta (normal case), a current which is 1/√3
times smaller must be set for the star-delta starter control function.
Example: In = 100 A
Is = In x 1/√3
Is = 100 A x 1/√3 = 57.7 A
Current to be set Is = 57.7 A

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 211
Motor control
5.2 Control functions

Change-over pause
The switching time from star to delta can be extended by the change-over pause. Reason:
For motors with a high ratio between starting current and rated current, the line voltage plus
motor EMF might lead to a very high delta starting current if the change-over pause is too
short. The motor EMF decreases if the pause is longer.

Schematic

Figure 5-17 Schematic of the "Star-delta reversing starter" control function, "Protection/Control"
function block

Settings
You will find detailed explanations of the settings in Chapter General settings and definitions
(Page 191).

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

212 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Motor control
5.2 Control functions

Table 5- 12 Star-delta reversing starter settings

Star-delta reversing starter Description

OFF Control command OFF
Connection with any socket , usually with socket "Enabled control command -
OFF"
ON > Control command ON >
Connection with any socket , usually with socket "Enabled control command -
ON >"
ON < Control command ON <
Connection with any socket , usually with socket "Enabled control command -
ON <"
FB ON "Feedback ON" auxiliary control input
Connection with any socket , usually with socket "Status - current flowing"
Non-maintained command mode • Deactivated (default setting)
• Activated
Save change-over command • Deactivated (default setting)
• Activated
Separate fail-safe function from • Deactivated (default setting): Safety-related tripping via the DM-F modules also
control function affects the SIMOCODE pro control function, so that additional follow-on fault
messages are avoided. This setting is selected for applications where safety-
related tripping directly affects the motor controlled by SIMOCODE pro.
• Activated: Safety-related tripping by the DM-F modules does not affect the
SIMOCODE pro control function. This setting is selected for applications where
safety-related tripping does not affect the motor controlled by SIMOCODE pro.
Type of consumer load You can choose between
• Motor (default)
• Resistive load (see Chapter General settings and definitions (Page 191))
Feedback time Range 0 to 25.5 s (default setting: 0.5 s)
Execution time Range 0 to 6553.5 s (default setting: 1 s)
Change-over pause Range 0 to 655.3 s (10 ms steps) (default setting: 0 s)
Interlocking time Range 0 to 255 s (default setting: 0 s)
Max. star time Time-dependent switching from star to delta.
Range 0 to 255 s (default setting: 20 s)
Current measuring module The set current and the switching levels for star-to-delta switching depend on the
installed 1) installation location of the current transformer/current measuring module:
• in delta circuit (default): Set current Is is reduced to Irated x 1/√3
• In supply line: Set current Is = In (rated current of the motor)

Note
1) If a current / voltage supply module is in use, the transformer must be connected in the
supply line.

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 213
Motor control
5.2 Control functions

5.2.9 "Dahlander" control function

Description
With this function, SIMOCODE pro can control motors with only one stator winding at two
speeds (FAST and SLOW). SIMOCODE pro connects the stator winding via the contactors
so that there is a high pole number at low speed and a low pole number at high speed.

Control commands
● SLOW: Start with "ON >" first activates the QE2 contactor control (SLOW).
● FAST: Start with "ON >>" first activates the QE3 contactor control (star contactor, FAST)
and then immediately activates the QE1 contactor control (line contactor, FAST).
● Stop with "OFF" deactivates contactor controls QE1, QE2, and QE3.
The control commands can be issued to SIMOCODE pro from any control stations (see also
the description of "control stations"). Thus, the inputs (plugs) must be connected to the
corresponding sockets, preferably to the "Enabled control command" sockets.
Every fault message causes the QE1, QE2 and QE3 contactor controls to be deactivated.

Switching the speed

The speed can be switched once the "Feedback ON" signal has expired (motor is switched
off) and on changeover from "FAST" → "SLOW" after the change-over pause has elapsed:
● Via the "OFF" control command.
● Directly when "Save change-over command" is activated.
SIMOCODE pro prevents the contactors for the "FAST" speed from being switched on at the
same time as the contactor for the "SLOW" speed.

Change-over pause
The "Change-over pause" parameter can be used to delay switching from "FAST" → "SLOW"
to give the motor enough time to run down.

Note
Two set currents must be set for this control function:
• Is1 for the SLOW speed
• Is2 for the FAST speed.
Depending on the current range, the current can in many cases be directly measured at both
speeds with a single current transformer. Otherwise you will need two external current
transformers appropriate for the relevant speed (e.g. 3UF18 with a 1 A secondary
transformer rated current), whose secondary cables must lead through the current
measuring module within the range 0.3 to 3 A. The set current Is1 or Is2 must be converted
according to the secondary currents of the external transformers. For more information, see
Chapter Overload protection (Page 161).

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

214 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Motor control
5.2 Control functions

Schematic

Figure 5-18 Schematic of the "Dahlander" control function, "Protection/Control" function block

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 215
Motor control
5.2 Control functions

Settings
You will find detailed explanations of the settings in Chapter General settings and definitions
(Page 191).

Table 5- 13 Dahlander settings

Dahlander Description
OFF Control command OFF
Connection with any socket , usually with socket "Enabled control command OFF"
ON > Control command ON > (SLOW)
Connection with any socket , usually with socket "Enabled control command - ON >"
ON >> Control command ON >> (FAST)
Connection with any socket , usually with socket "Enabled control command - ON >>"
FB ON "Feedback ON" auxiliary control input
Connection with any socket , usually with socket "Status - current flowing"
Non-maintained command • Deactivated (default setting)
mode
• Activated
Separate fail-safe function • Deactivated (default setting): Safety-related tripping via the DM-F modules also affects
from control function the SIMOCODE pro control function, so that additional fault messages are avoided. This
setting is selected for applications where safety-related tripping directly affects the motor
controlled by SIMOCODE pro.
• Activated: Safety-related tripping by the DM-F modules does not affect the
SIMOCODE pro control function. This setting is selected for applications where safety-
related tripping does not affect the motor controlled by SIMOCODE pro.
Save change-over • Deactivated (default setting)
command
• Activated
Type of consumer load You can choose between
• Motor (default)
• Resistive load (see Chapter General settings and definitions (Page 191))
Feedback time Range 0 to 25.5 s (default setting: 0.5 s)
Execution time Range 0 to 6553.5 s (default setting: 1.0 s)
Change-over pause Range 0 to 655.3 s (10 ms steps) (default setting: 0.00 s)

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

216 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Motor control
5.2 Control functions

5.2.10 "Dahlander reversing starter" control function

Description
This control function can be used to change the direction of rotation of a motor at both
speeds.

Control commands
● RIGHT-SLOW: Start with "ON >" activates the QE2 contactor control (RIGHT-SLOW)
● RIGHT-FAST: Start with "ON >>" first activates the QE3 contactor control (star contactor
FAST) and then immediately activates the QE1 contactor control (RIGHT-FAST)
● LEFT-SLOW: Start with "ON <" activates the QE4 contactor control (LEFT-SLOW)
● LEFT-FAST: Start with "ON <<" first activates the QE3 contactor control (star contactor
FAST) and then immediately activates the QE5 contactor control (LEFT-FAST)
● Stop with "OFF" deactivates the contactor controls.
The control commands can be issued to SIMOCODE pro from any control stations (see also
the description of "control stations"). Thus, the inputs (plugs) must be connected to the
corresponding sockets, preferably to the "Enabled control command" sockets. It does not
matter in what order the control commands are given. Every fault message causes the
contactor control to be deactivated.

Switching the direction of rotation

The direction of rotation can be switched once the "Status - ON >" or "Status - ON <" signal
has expired (motor is switched off) and the interlocking time has elapsed:
● Via the OFF control command
● Directly when "Save change-over command" is activated.
SIMOCODE pro prevents both contactors from switching on at the same time. Switching
from one direction of rotation to the other can be delayed via the "interlocking time".

Switching the speed

The speed can be switched once the "Feedback ON" signal has expired (motor is switched
off) and on changeover from "FAST" → "SLOW" after the change-over pause has elapsed:
● Via the OFF control command
● Directly when "Save change-over command" is activated.

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 217
Motor control
5.2 Control functions

Change-over pause
The "Change-over pause" parameter can be used to delay switching from "FAST" → "SLOW"
to give the motor enough time to run down.

Safety information

Note
You need at least one digital module for this control function. This control function cannot be
implemented with bistable relay outputs.

Note
Two set currents must be set for this control function:
• Is1 for the SLOW speed
• Is2 for the FAST speed.
Depending on the current range, the current can in many cases be directly measured at both
speeds with a single current transformer. Otherwise you will need two external current
transformers appropriate for the relevant speed (e.g. 3UF18 with a 1 A secondary
transformer rated current), whose secondary cables must lead through the current
measuring module within the range 0.3 to 3 A. The set current Is1 or Is2 must be converted
according to the secondary currents of the external transformers. For more information, see
Chapter Overload protection (Page 161).

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

218 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Motor control
5.2 Control functions

Schematic

Figure 5-19 Schematic of the "Dahlander reversing starter" control function, "Protection/Control"
function block

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 219
Motor control
5.2 Control functions

Settings
You will find detailed explanations of the settings in Chapter General settings and definitions
(Page 191).

Table 5- 14 Control function settings for Dahlander reversing starter

Dahlander reversing starter Description

OFF Control command OFF
Connection with any socket , usually with socket "Enabled control command
OFF"
ON > Control command ON > (RIGHT, SLOW)
Connection with any socket , usually with socket "Enabled control command -
ON >"
ON >> Control command ON >> (RIGHT, FAST)
Connection with any socket , usually with socket "Enabled control command -
ON >>"
ON < Control command ON < (LEFT, SLOW)
Connection with any socket , usually with socket "Enabled control command -
ON <"
ON << Control command ON << (LEFT, FAST)
Connection with any socket , usually with socket "Enabled control command -
ON <<"
FB ON "Feedback ON" auxiliary control input
Connection with any socket , usually with socket "Status - current flowing"
Non-maintained command mode • Deactivated (default setting)
• Activated
Save change-over command • Deactivated (default setting)
• Activated
Separate fail-safe function from • Deactivated (default setting): Safety-related tripping via the DM-F modules also
control function affects the SIMOCODE pro control function, so that additional fault messages
are avoided. This setting is selected for applications where safety-related
tripping directly affects the motor controlled by SIMOCODE pro.
• Activated: Safety-related tripping by the DM-F modules does not affect the
SIMOCODE pro control function. This setting is selected for applications where
safety-related tripping does not affect the motor controlled by SIMOCODE pro.
Type of consumer load You can choose between
• Motor (default)
• Resistive load (see Chapter General settings and definitions (Page 191))
Feedback time Range 0 to 25.5 s (default setting: 0.5 s)
Execution time Range 0 to 6553.5 s (default setting: 1.0 s)
Interlocking time Range 0 to 255 s (default setting: 0 s)
Change-over pause Range 0 to 655.3 s (10 ms steps) (default setting: 0.00 s)

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

220 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Motor control
5.2 Control functions

5.2.11 "Pole-changing starter" control function

Description
With this control function, SIMOCODE pro can control motors with two stator windings at two
speeds (FAST and SLOW).

Control commands
● SLOW: Start with "ON >" first activates the QE2 contactor control (SLOW).
● FAST: Start with "ON >>" activates the QE1 contactor control (FAST).
● Stop with "OFF" deactivates the contactor controls.
The control commands can be issued to SIMOCODE pro from any control stations (see also
the description of "control stations"). Thus, the inputs (plugs) must be connected to the
corresponding sockets, preferably to the "Enabled control command" sockets.
It does not matter in what order the control commands are given.
Every fault message causes the contactor control to be deactivated.

Switching the speed

The speed can be switched once the "Feedback ON" signal has expired (motor is switched
off) and on change-over from "FAST" → "SLOW" after the change-over pause has elapsed:
● Via the OFF control command.
● Directly when "Save change-over command" is activated.

Change-over pause
The "Change-over pause" parameter can be used to delay switching from "FAST" → "SLOW"
to give the motor enough time to run down.

Note
Two set currents must be set for this control function:
• Is1 for the SLOW speed
• IS2 for the FAST speed
Depending on the current range, the current can in many cases be directly measured at both
speeds with a single current transformer. Otherwise you will need two external current
transformers appropriate for the relevant speed (e.g. 3UF18 with a 1 A secondary
transformer rated current), whose secondary cables must lead through the current
measuring module within the range 0.3 to 3 A. The set current Is1 or Is2 must be converted
according to the secondary currents of the external transformers. For more information, see
Chapter Overload protection (Page 161).

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 221
Motor control
5.2 Control functions

Schematic

Figure 5-20 Schematic of the "Pole-changing starter" control function, "Protection/Control" function
block

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

222 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Motor control
5.2 Control functions

Settings
You will find detailed explanations of the settings in Chapter General settings and definitions
(Page 191).

Table 5- 15 Pole-changing starter settings

Pole-changing starter Description

OFF Control command OFF
Connection with any socket , usually with socket "Enabled control command -
OFF"
ON > Control command ON > (SLOW)
Connection with any socket , usually with socket "Enabled control command -
ON >"
ON >> Control command ON >> (FAST)
Connection with any socket , usually with socket "Enabled control command -
ON >>"
FB ON "Feedback ON" auxiliary control input
Connection with any socket , usually with socket "Status - current flowing"
Non-maintained command mode • Deactivated (default setting)
• Activated
Save change-over command • Deactivated (default setting)
• Activated
Separate fail-safe function from • Deactivated (default setting): Safety-related tripping via the DM-F modules also
control function affects the SIMOCODE pro control function, so that additional follow-on fault
messages are avoided. This setting is selected for applications where safety-
related tripping directly affects the motor controlled by SIMOCODE pro.
• Activated: Safety-related tripping by the DM-F modules does not affect the
SIMOCODE pro control function. This setting is selected for applications where
safety-related tripping does not affect the motor controlled by SIMOCODE pro.
Type of consumer load You can choose between
• Motor (default)
• Resistive load (see Chapter General settings and definitions (Page 191))
Feedback time Range 0 to 25.5 s (default setting: 0.5 s)
Execution time Range 0 to 6553.5 s seconds (default setting: 1.0 s)
Change-over pause Range 0 to 655.3 s (10 ms steps) (default setting: 0.00 s)

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 223
Motor control
5.2 Control functions

5.2.12 "Pole-changing reversing starter" control function

Description
This control function can be used to change the direction of rotation of a motor at both
speeds.

Control commands
● RIGHT-SLOW: Start with "ON >" first activates the QE2 contactor control (RIGHT-SLOW)
● RIGHT-FAST: Start with "ON >>" activates the QE1 contactor control (RIGHT-FAST).
● LEFT-SLOW: Start with "ON <" activates the QE4 contactor control (LEFT-SLOW).
● LEFT-FAST: Start with "ON <<" activates the QE5 contactor control (LEFT-FAST).
● Stop with "OFF" deactivates the contactor controls.
The control commands can be issued to SIMOCODE pro from any control stations. Thus, the
inputs (plugs) must be connected to the corresponding sockets, preferably to the "Enabled
control command" sockets.
It does not matter in what order the control commands are given. Every fault message
causes the contactor control to be deactivated.

Switching the direction of rotation

The direction of rotation can be switched once the "Status - ON >" or "Status - ON <" signal
has expired (motor is switched off) and the interlocking time has elapsed:
● Via the "OFF" control command.
● Directly when "Save change-over command" is activated.
SIMOCODE pro prevents both contactors from switching on at the same time. Switching
from one direction of rotation to the other can be delayed via the "interlocking time".

Switching the speed

The speed can be switched once the "Feedback ON" signal has expired (motor is switched
off) and on change-over from "FAST" → "SLOW" after the change-over pause has elapsed:
● Via the "OFF" control command.
● Directly when "Save change-over command" is activated.

Change-over pause
SIMOCODE pro prevents the contactors for "FAST" and "SLOW" from being switched on
simultaneously. The "Change-over pause" can be used to delay switching from
"FAST" → "SLOW" to give the motor enough time to run down.

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

224 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Motor control
5.2 Control functions

Safety information

Note
At least one additional digital module is required for this control function.

Note
Two set currents must be set for the pole-changing starter:
• Is1 for the SLOW speed
• Is2 for the FAST speed.
Depending on the current range, the current can in many cases be directly measured at both
speeds with a single current transformer. Otherwise you will need two external current
transformers appropriate for the relevant speed (e.g. 3UF18 with a 1 A secondary
transformer rated current), whose secondary cables must lead through the current
measuring module within the range 0.3 to 3 A. The set current Is1 or Is2 must be converted
according to the secondary currents of the external transformers. For more information, see
Chapter Overload protection (Page 161).

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 225
Motor control
5.2 Control functions

Schematic

Figure 5-21 Schematic of the "Pole-changing reversing starter" control function, "Protection/Control"
function block

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

226 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Motor control
5.2 Control functions

Settings
You will find detailed explanations of the settings in Chapter General settings and definitions
(Page 191).

Table 5- 16 Pole-changing reversing starter settings

Pole-changing reversing starter Description

OFF Control command OFF
Connection with any socket , usually with socket "Enabled control command -
OFF"
ON > Control command ON > (RIGHT, SLOW)
Connection with any socket , usually with socket "Enabled control command -
ON >"
ON >> Control command ON >> (RIGHT, FAST)
Connection with any socket , usually with socket "Enabled control command -
ON >>"
ON < Control command ON < (LEFT, SLOW)
Connection with any socket , usually with socket "Enabled control command -
ON <"
ON << Control command ON << (LEFT, FAST)
Connection with any socket , usually with socket "Enabled control command -
ON <<"
FB ON "Feedback ON" auxiliary control input
Connection with any socket , usually with socket "Status - current flowing"
Non-maintained command mode • Deactivated (default setting)
• Activated
Save change-over command • Deactivated (default setting)
• Activated
Separate fail-safe function from • Deactivated (default setting): Safety-related tripping via the DM-F modules also
control function affects the SIMOCODE pro control function, so that additional follow-on fault
messages are avoided. This setting is selected for applications where safety-
related tripping directly affects the motor controlled by SIMOCODE pro.
• Activated: Safety-related tripping by the DM-F modules does not affect the
SIMOCODE pro control function. This setting is selected for applications where
safety-related tripping does not affect the motor controlled by SIMOCODE pro.
Type of consumer load You can choose between
• Motor (default)
• Resistive load (see Chapter General settings and definitions (Page 191))
Feedback time Range 0 to 25.5 s (default setting: 0.5 s)
Execution time Range 0 to 6553.5 s (default setting: 1.0 s)
Interlocking time Range 0 to 55 s (default setting: 0 s)
Change-over pause Range 0 to 655.3 s (10 ms steps) (default setting: 0.00 s)

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 227
Motor control
5.2 Control functions

5.2.13 "Solenoid valve" control function

Description
SIMOCODE pro can use this function to control a solenoid valve. The solenoid valve is
brought into the corresponding end position using the control commands "OPEN" and
"CLOSED". SIMOCODE pro must be informed via corresponding limit switches (OPEN,
CLOSED) when the end position has been reached.

Control commands
● OPEN: Start with "ON >" activates the QE1 internal contactor control.
● CLOSE: Start with "OFF" deactivates the QE1 internal contactor control.
The control commands can be issued to SIMOCODE pro from any control stations (see also
the description of "control stations"). Thus, the inputs (plugs) must be connected to the
corresponding sockets, preferably to the "Enabled control command" sockets.
Every fault message causes the QE1 contactor control to be deactivated and puts the
solenoid valve into the "CLOSED" position.

Safety information

Note
The motor protection functions are not active. A current measuring module is not necessary.

Note
If both limit switches respond at the same time (FO = 1 and FC = 1), the solenoid valve is
immediately switched off via the fault message "Fault - Double 1" (= "CLOSED").
If the end position feedback does not correspond to the control command, the valve is
switched off with the fault message "Fault - end position fault" (="CLOSED").

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

228 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Motor control
5.2 Control functions

Schematic

Figure 5-22 Schematic of the "Solenoid valve" control function, "Protection/Control" function block

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 229
Motor control
5.2 Control functions

Settings
You will find detailed explanations of the settings in Chapter General settings and definitions
(Page 191).

Table 5- 17 Solenoid valve control function settings

Solenoid valve Description

OFF Control command OFF (CLOSED)
Connection with any socket , usually with socket
"Enabled control command - OFF"
ON > Control command ON (OPEN)
Connection with any socket , usually with socket
"Enabled control command - ON >"
Non-maintained command mode • Deactivated (default setting)
• Activated
Separate fail-safe function from control function • Deactivated (default setting): Safety-related tripping via
the DM-F modules also affects the SIMOCODE pro
control function, so that additional follow-on fault
messages are avoided. This setting is selected for
applications where safety-related tripping directly affects
the motor controlled by SIMOCODE pro.
• Activated: Safety-related tripping by the DM-F modules
does not affect the SIMOCODE pro control function. This
setting is selected for applications where safety-related
tripping does not affect the motor controlled by
SIMOCODE pro.
Execution time Time until the end position is reached.
Range 0 to 6553.5 s (default setting: 1.0 s)

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

230 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Motor control
5.2 Control functions

5.2.14 "Positioner" control function

Description
SIMOCODE pro can control positioners / actuators with this function. The positioner is
moved into the corresponding end position with the "OPEN" and "CLOSE" control
commands and is deactivated via its limit switches (1-active) or torque switches (0-active).
The response of the limit / torque switches must be passed to SIMOCODE pro via its inputs.

Control commands
● OPEN: Start with "ON >" activates the QE1 contactor control until "End position OPEN" is
reached (Feedback OPEN).
● CLOSED: Start with "ON <" activates the QE2 contactor control until "End position
CLOSED" is reached (Feedback CLOSED).
● Stop with "OFF" deactivates the contactor controls. The drive remains in the present
position.
The control commands can be issued to SIMOCODE pro from any control stations (see also
the description of "control stations"). Thus, the inputs (plugs) must be connected to the
corresponding sockets, preferably to the "Enabled control command" sockets.

Function schematic

Figure 5-23 Function schematic of the torque and limit switches when controlling positioners

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 231
Motor control
5.2 Control functions

Switching the direction of travel

The direction of travel can be switched once the "Feedback ON" signal has expired (motor is
switched off) and the interlocking time has elapsed:
● Via the OFF control command
SIMOCODE pro prevents both contactors from switching on at the same time. Switching
from one direction of travel to the other can be delayed via the "interlocking time".

Note
The corresponding torque switch must not respond before the associated limit switch when
the torque switch TO (OPEN) and/or TC (CLOSED) is connected! In this case, the positioner
is switched off immediately with the fault message "Fault - stalled positioner." If both limit
switches respond at the same time (FO = 1 and FC = 1), the positioner is immediately
switched off via the fault message "Fault - Double 1". If both torque switches respond at the
same time (TO = 0 and TC = 0), the positioner is immediately switched off via the fault
message "Fault - Double 0". If the end position feedback does not correspond to the control
command, the positioner is switched off with the fault message "Fault - end position fault."

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

232 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Motor control
5.2 Control functions

Schematic

Figure 5-24 Schematic of the "Positioner" control function, "Protection/Control" function block

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 233
Motor control
5.2 Control functions

Types of positioner control

The following table shows the five types of positioner control:

Table 5- 18 Variants of positioner control

Tripping variant TC FC FO TO
Torque Limit closed Limit open Torque open
closed
Positioner 1 — X X —
After reaching the end position FO (OPEN) or
FC (CLOSED)
Positioner 2 X X X X
After reaching the end position FO (OPEN) or FC
(CLOSED) and response of the associated torque
switch TO (OPEN) or TC (CLOSED)
Positioner 3 X X X —
After reaching the end position FO (OPEN). After
reaching end position FO (CLOSED), the respective
torque switch TC must also respond after the limit
switch FC has responded.
Positioner 4 — X X X
After reaching the end position FC (CLOSED). After
reaching end position FO (OPEN), the respective torque
switch FO must also respond after the limit switch TO
has responded.
Positioner 5 Antivalent active Antivalent active
After reaching the end position or the torque. The valve
actuator is monitored either just with the limit switches or
just with the torque switches. The switches are
implemented as change-over contacts and are checked
for antivalence. In the case of non-antivalent feedback
(e.g. FC = 0 and TC = 0), SIMOCODE pro detects an
open circuit and deactivates the positioner with the fault
message "Fault - Antivalence".

Note
The signals of the torque switches and the limit switches must be wired to the inputs of the
basic unit. Torque switches must be 0-active, whereas the limit switches must be 1-active.

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

234 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Motor control
5.2 Control functions

Settings
You will find detailed explanations of the settings in Chapter General settings and definitions
(Page 191).

Table 5- 19 Positioner control function settings

Positioner Description
ON < Control command ON < (CLOSED)
Connection with any socket , usually with socket "Enabled control command -
ON <"
OFF Control command STOP
Connection with any socket , usually with socket "Enabled control command
OFF"
ON > Control command ON > (OPEN)
Connection with any socket , usually with socket "Enabled control command -
ON >"
FB ON "Feedback ON" auxiliary control input
Connection with any socket , usually with socket "Status - current flowing"
FC "Feedback CLOSED" auxiliary control input
Connection with any socket , usually with the socket of an input to which the
limit switch is wired
FO "Feedback OPEN" auxiliary control input
Connection with any socket , usually with the socket of an input to which the
limit switch is wired
TC "Torque CLOSED" auxiliary control input
Connection with any socket , usually with the socket of an input to which the
torque switch is wired
TO "Torque OPEN" auxiliary control input
Connection with any socket , usually with the socket of an input to which the
torque switch is wired)
Non-maintained command mode • Deactivated (default setting)
• Activated
Separate fail-safe function from • Deactivated (default setting): Safety-related tripping via the DM-F modules also
control function affects the SIMOCODE pro control function, so that additional follow-on fault
messages are avoided. This setting is selected for applications where safety-
related tripping directly affects the motor controlled by SIMOCODE pro.
• Activated: Safety-related tripping by the DM-F modules does not affect the
SIMOCODE pro control function. This setting is selected for applications where
safety-related tripping does not affect the motor controlled by SIMOCODE pro.
Type of consumer load You can choose between
• Motor (default)
• Resistive load (see Chapter General settings and definitions (Page 191))
Feedback time Range 0 to 25.5 s (default setting: 0.5 s)
Execution time Time until the end position is reached.
Range 0 to 6553.5 s (default setting: 1.0 s)
Interlocking time Range 0 to 255 s (default setting: 0 s)

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 235
Motor control
5.2 Control functions

5.2.15 "Soft starter" control function

Description
With this control function, SIMOCODE pro can activate the 3RW soft starter. Thus, the
3RW soft starters are connected via SIMOCODE pro to the PROFINET.

Control commands
● Start with "ON >" activates the QE1 and QE4 contactor controls.
● Stop with "OFF" first deactivates the QE4 contactor control. When the signal "Feedback
ON" has expired, the QE1 contactor control is deactivated 3 s later in order to facilitate a
smooth run down via the soft starter.
● With "Reset", the QE3 contactor control is activated for 20 ms and sends the soft starter
an acknowledgement signal via a parameterizable relay output.
The control commands can be issued to SIMOCODE pro from any control stations (see also
the description of "control stations"). Thus, the inputs (plugs) must be connected to the
corresponding sockets, preferably to the "Enabled control command" sockets.
Every fault message causes the contactor control to be deactivated.

Making internal assignments

You have to make the following assignments:
1. Assign the QE1 contactor control to the relay output which controls the coil of the line
contactor.
2. Assign the QE4 contactor control to any relay output from which the "ON input" of the soft
starter should be controlled.
3. Assign the QE3 contactor control to the relay output that supplies the 20 ms
acknowledgment signal to the soft starter.
4. Assign the "ON >" and "OFF" control commands to the enabled control commands.
5. Assign the SIMOCODE pro input to which the "Fault" signal output of the soft starter is
connected to the input (socket) of the standard function "External fault 1."
6. The "startup end" signal of the soft starter can also be wired to one of the inputs and
processed by SIMOCODE pro.

Note
In order to avoid disconnections due to faults, the "Execution time" parameter in
SIMOCODE pro must be set at least to the soft run-down time of the soft starter.

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

236 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Motor control
5.2 Control functions

Schematic

Figure 5-25 Schematic of "Soft starter" control function, "Protection/Control" function block

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 237
Motor control
5.2 Control functions

Settings
You will find detailed explanations of the settings in Chapter General settings and definitions
(Page 191).

Table 5- 20 Soft starter settings

Soft starter Description

OFF Control command OFF
Connection with any socket , usually with socket "Enabled control command
OFF"
ON > Control command ON
Connection with any socket , usually with socket "Enabled control command -
ON >"
FB ON "Feedback ON" auxiliary control input
Connection with any socket , usually with socket "Status - current flowing"
Non-maintained command mode • Deactivated (default setting)
• Activated
Separate fail-safe function from • Deactivated (default setting): Safety-related tripping via the DM-F modules also
control function affects the SIMOCODE pro control function, so that additional follow-on fault
messages are avoided. This setting is selected for applications where safety-
related tripping directly affects the motor controlled by SIMOCODE pro.
• Activated: Safety-related tripping by the DM-F modules does not affect the
SIMOCODE pro control function. This setting is selected for applications where
safety-related tripping does not affect the motor controlled by SIMOCODE pro.
Type of consumer load You can choose between
• Motor (default)
• Resistive load (see Chapter General settings and definitions (Page 191))
Feedback time Range 0 to 25.5 s (default setting: 0.5 s)
Execution time At least ≥ soft run-down time
Range 0 to 6553.5 s (default setting: 1.0 s)

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

238 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Motor control
5.2 Control functions

5.2.16 "Soft starter with reversing contactor" control function

Description
With this control function, SIMOCODE pro can activate the 3RW soft starter including an
additional reversing contactor. Thus, the 3RW soft starters are connected via
SIMOCODE pro to the PROFINET. SIMOCODE pro can also control the direction of rotation
of the motor (forwards and backwards).

Control commands
● Start with "ON >" activates the QE1 and QE4 contactor controls (clockwise, i.e. forwards)
● Start with "ON <" activates the QE2 and QE4 contactor controls (counter-clockwise, i.e.
backwards).
● Stop with "OFF" first deactivates contactor control QE4. When the "Feedback ON" signal
is no longer issued, the QE1 / QE2 contactor control is deactivated 3 s later in order to
facilitate a soft run-down via the soft starter.
● With "Reset", the QE3 contactor control is activated for 20 ms and sends the soft starter
an acknowledgement signal via a parameterizable relay output.
The control commands can be issued to SIMOCODE pro from any control stations (see also
the description of "control stations"). Thus, the inputs (plugs) must be connected to the
corresponding sockets, preferably to the "Enabled control command" sockets.
Every fault message causes the contactor control to be deactivated.

Switching the direction of rotation

The direction of rotation can be switched once the "Status - ON >" or "Status - ON <" signal
has expired (motor is switched off) and the interlocking time has elapsed:
● Via the "OFF" control command.
● Directly when "Save change-over command" is activated.
SIMOCODE pro prevents both contactors from switching on at the same time. Switching
from one direction of rotation to the other can be delayed via the interlocking time.

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 239
Motor control
5.2 Control functions

Making internal assignments

You have to make the following assignments:
1. Assign the QE1 contactor control to the relay output which controls the coil of the line
contactor (right).
2. Assign the QE2 contactor control to the relay output which controls the coil of the line
contactor (left).
3. Assign the QE4 contactor control to any relay output from which the "ON input" of the soft
starter should be controlled.
4. Assign the QE3 contactor control to the relay output that supplies the 20 ms
acknowledgment signal to the soft starter.
5. Assign the "ON >", "ON <" and "OFF" control commands to the enabled control
commands.
6. Assign the SIMOCODE pro input to which the "Fault" signal output of the soft starter is
connected to the input (socket) of the standard function "External fault 1."
7. The "startup end" signal of the soft starter can also be wired to one of the inputs and
processed by SIMOCODE pro.

Note
An additional digital module may be necessary for this control function.

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

240 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Motor control
5.2 Control functions

Schematic

Figure 5-26 Schematic of the "Soft starter with reversing contactor" control function,
"Protection/Control" function block

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 241
Motor control
5.2 Control functions

Settings
You will find detailed explanations of the settings in Chapter General settings and definitions
(Page 191).

Table 5- 21 Soft starter with reversing contactor settings

Soft starter with reversing Description

contactor
ON > Control command ON > (clockwise)
Connection with any socket , usually with socket "Enabled control command -
ON >"
OFF Control command OFF
Connection with any socket , usually with socket "Enabled control command -
OFF"
ON < Control command ON < (counter-clockwise)
Connection with any socket , usually with socket "Enabled control command -
ON <"
FB ON "Feedback ON" auxiliary control input
Connection with any socket , usually with socket "Status - current flowing"
Non-maintained command mode • Deactivated (default setting)
• Activated
Save change-over command • Deactivated (default setting)
• Activated
Separate fail-safe function from • Deactivated (default setting): Safety-related tripping via the DM-F modules also
control function affects the SIMOCODE pro control function, so that additional follow-on fault
messages are avoided. This setting is selected for applications where safety-
related tripping directly affects the motor controlled by SIMOCODE pro.
• Activated: Safety-related tripping by the DM-F modules does not affect the
SIMOCODE pro control function. This setting is selected for applications where
safety-related tripping does not affect the motor controlled by SIMOCODE pro.
Type of consumer load You can choose between
• Motor (default)
• Resistive load (see Chapter General settings and definitions (Page 191))
Feedback time Range 0 to 25.5 s (default setting: 0.5 s)
Execution time Execution time ≥ Soft run-down time
Range 0 to 6553.5 s (default setting: 1.0 s)
Interlocking time Range 0 to 255 s (default setting: 0 s)

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

242 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Motor control
5.2 Control functions

5.2.17 Active control stations, contactor controls, lamp controls and status information
for the control functions

Table 5- 22 Active control stations of control functions

Designation/control function Control station

ON << ON < OFF ON > ON >>
Overload - - - - -
Direct starter - - OFF ON -
Reversing starter - LEFT OFF RIGHT -
Circuit breaker - - OFF ON -
Star-delta starter - - OFF ON -
Star-delta reversing starter - LEFT OFF RIGHT -
Dahlander - - OFF SLOW FAST
Dahlander reversing starter LEFT-FAST LEFT-SLOW OFF RIGHT-SLOW RIGHT-FAST
Pole-changing starter - - OFF SLOW FAST
Pole-changing reversing starter LEFT-FAST LEFT-SLOW OFF RIGHT-SLOW RIGHT-FAST
Solenoid valve - - CLOSED OPEN -
Positioner 1 - CLOSED STOP OPEN -
Positioner 2 - CLOSED STOP OPEN -
Positioner 3 - CLOSED STOP OPEN -
Positioner 4 - CLOSED STOP OPEN -
Positioner 5 - CLOSED STOP OPEN -
Soft starter - - OFF ON -
Soft starter with reversing contactor - LEFT OFF RIGHT -

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 243
Motor control
5.2 Control functions

Table 5- 23 Contactor control with control functions

Designation/control function Contactor control

QE1 QE2 QE3 QE4 QE5
Overload - - Active - -
Direct starter ON - - - -
Reversing starter RIGHT LEFT - - -
Circuit breaker ON pulse - OFF pulse - -
Star-delta starter Star contactor Delta Line contactor - -
contactor
Star-delta reversing starter Star contactor Delta RIGHT line LEFT line -
contactor contactor contactor
Dahlander FAST SLOW Star contactor - -
FAST
Dahlander reversing starter RIGHT-FAST RIGHT-SLOW Star contactor LEFT-SLOW LEFT-FAST
FAST
Pole-changing starter FAST SLOW - - -
Pole-changing reversing starter RIGHT-FAST RIGHT-SLOW - LEFT-SLOW LEFT-FAST
Solenoid valve OPEN - - - -
Positioner 1 OPEN CLOSED - - -
Positioner 2 OPEN CLOSED - - -
Positioner 3 OPEN CLOSED - - -
Positioner 4 OPEN CLOSED - - -
Positioner 5 OPEN CLOSED - - -
Soft starter ON line - Reset ON command -
contactor
Soft starter with reversing contactor RIGHT line LEFT line Reset ON command -
contactor contactor

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

244 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Motor control
5.2 Control functions

Table 5- 24 Lamp control with control functions

Designation/control function Lamp control

QLE << (ON <<) QLE < (ON <) QLA (OFF) QLE < (ON >) QLE >>
(ON >>)
Overload - - - - -
Direct starter - - OFF ON -
Reversing starter - LEFT OFF RIGHT -
Circuit breaker - - OFF ON -
Star-delta starter - - OFF ON -
Star-delta reversing starter - LEFT OFF RIGHT -
Dahlander - - OFF SLOW FAST
Dahlander reversing starter LEFT-FAST LEFT-SLOW OFF RIGHT-SLOW RIGHT-FAST
Pole-changing starter - - OFF SLOW FAST
Pole-changing reversing starter LEFT-FAST LEFT-SLOW OFF RIGHT-SLOW RIGHT-FAST
Solenoid valve - - CLOSED OPEN -
Positioner 1 - CLOSED STOP OPEN -
Positioner 2 - CLOSED STOP OPEN -
Positioner 3 - CLOSED STOP OPEN -
Positioner 4 - CLOSED STOP OPEN -
Positioner 5 - CLOSED STOP OPEN -
Soft starter - - OFF ON -
Soft starter with reversing contactor - LEFT OFF RIGHT -

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 245
Motor control
5.2 Control functions

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

246 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
Monitoring functions 6
In this chapter you will find information about monitoring functions.
● Ground-fault monitoring
● Current limit monitoring
● Voltage monitoring
● Cos phi monitoring
● Active power monitoring
● 0 / 4 mA to 20 mA monitoring
● Operation monitoring
● Temperature monitoring (analog)
● Monitoring interval for mandatory testing
As is the case with motor protection and motor control, the monitoring functions work "in the
background". All monitoring function parameters are explained.

Target groups
This chapter addresses the following target groups:
● Configuring engineers
● Programmers
● Commissioning engineers
● Service personnel

Required knowledge
You will require the following knowledge:
● SIMOCODE pro
● Motor protection, motor control
● The principle of connecting plugs to sockets
● Electrical drive engineering

Navigation in SIMOCODE ES
You will find the dialog boxes in SIMOCODE ES under Device Parameters → Monitoring
functions.

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 247
Monitoring functions
6.1 Earth-fault monitoring

6.1 Earth-fault monitoring

6.1.1 Description
Residual current monitoring relays are used in industry to:
● Protect systems from damage caused by residual currents
● Prevent production losses caused by unplanned downtime
● Perform maintenance to meet all demands.
In particular, ground-fault monitoring is used in conjunction with 3UL23 residual current
transformers to monitor systems where environmental conditions increase the chance of
fault currents.

Internal ground-fault monitoring

SIMOCODE pro acquires and monitors all three phase currents. By evaluating the
summation current of the three current values, the motor feeder can be monitored for a
possible fault current or ground fault.
Internal ground-fault monitoring via current measuring modules or current / voltage
measuring modules is only possible for motors with a 3-phase connection in power systems
that are either grounded solidly or with low impedance.
You can activate internal ground-fault monitoring by parameterization. It covers two different
operating conditions.
● Normal operation up to 2 x Is. The actual operating current must be smaller than twice the
set current Is. Residual currents of > 30 % of the set current Is are detected.
● Start-up or overload operation to 2 x Is. The actual operating current is greater than twice
the set current Is. Fault currents of > 15% of the actual motor current will be detected.

NOTICE
Star-delta connection
False tripping can occur if you use internal ground-fault monitoring for star-delta circuits.
During delta operation, the summation current is non-zero due to harmonics.

External ground-fault monitoring

The external ground-fault monitoring is normally used in the following cases:
● In cases in which power systems are grounded with high impedance
● Where precise measurement of the ground-fault current is necessary, e.g. for the purpose
of condition monitoring
With ground-fault detection using the residual current transformer 3UL23, it is possible to
determine the precise residual current as a measured value to define freely selectable
warning and trip thresholds in a wide range 30 mA to 40 A.

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

248 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Monitoring functions
6.1 Earth-fault monitoring

Principle of operation:
The main conductors and, if present, the neutral conductor to which the load is connected,
are routed through the opening of the 3UL23 residual current transformer. Its secondary
winding is connected to the ground-fault module.
If an insulation fault occurs, for example, a residual current arises between the incoming and
the outgoing currents that the ground-fault module evaluates via the residual current
transformer.
For maximum plant availability, the ground-fault module 3UF7 510-1AA00-0 and the residual
current transformer 3UL23 were developed with the following design goals:
● High measuring accuracy: The ground-fault module in conjunction with the residual
current transformer 3UL23 achieves a measuring accuracy of ±7.5 %. This enables set
limit values to be monitored very precisely. Spurious tripping caused by measuring errors
is minimized. The combination of ground-fault module and 3UL23 residual current
transformer is designed so that a warning or alarm is triggered at the latest when the set
limit values are reached. To achieve this, slightly higher residual currents than those
actually measured are displayed and compared with the set limit values. The measuring
accuracy is -15 % to 0 % of the value displayed. This takes into account the measuring
accuracy of monitoring relay and residual current transformer.
● Settable prewarning and trip levels: The threshold levels for the residual current are
defined over a very wide range of 30 mA to 40 A. The response of SIMOCODE pro on
reaching a prewarning level or trip level can be freely parameterized, including a delay.
● Permanent self-monitoring: The permanent self-monitoring of the ground-fault
module 3UF7 510-1AA00-0 and the connected transformer ensures reliable monitoring of
the function. The connected 3UL23 residual current transformer is also permanently
monitored for open-circuit or short-circuit. This means cyclic manual tests to verify the
function are obsolete.
● Settable active status and delay times of the residual current protection. Depending on
the application, the monitoring function can be active permanently, only when the motor is
running, or only after the motor has started. This permits the suppression of residual
currents that are only measured during motor starting due to high starting currents. Short-
term residual currents or radiated interference can be easily suppressed by means of the
adjustable tripping delay time.

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 249
Monitoring functions
6.1 Earth-fault monitoring

Use of the residual current transformers 3UL22 and 3UL23:

● Use the residual current transformer 3UL23 to detect residual currents with the ground-
fault module 3UF7 510-1AA00-0. The residual current transformer 3UL23 is suitable for
detecting pure AC residual currents and AC residual currents with a pulsating DC
component.

Note
Precondition for using a 3UF7 510-1AA00-0 ground-fault module
The use of a ground-fault module requires a SIMOCODE pro V PN basic unit, version *E04*
or later (from 09 / 2013).

● Use the 3UL22 residual current transformer to detect residual currents with the
3UF7 500-1AA00-0 ground-fault module.

Note
Only monitoring of the residual current trip level possible
With this combination, it is only possible to monitor a trip level of the residual current.
Measured values are then not available for the residual current.

DANGER
No personnel protection or fire protection!
The 3UF75* ground-fault modules monitor devices and systems for their correct function.
They are not suitable for personal protection or protection from fires.

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

250 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Monitoring functions
6.1 Earth-fault monitoring

6.1.2 Limits of fault current measurement

In the event of increasing primary currents, imbalances in the cable routing and current loads
in individual cables increasingly cause what appear to be residual currents that are detected
by the evaluation units. Spurious tripping may therefore occur if excessively low monitoring
limit values have been set at high primary currents. Because of these tolerances in the
configuration, the measuring accuracy no longer corresponds to the stated range of ±7.5 %.
To avoid spurious tripping, we recommend setting the limit values to the minimum values
listed in the following graphic, depending on the applicable primary current.

If monitoring is required within limit values that are lower than those recommended, we
recommend the use of delay times, particularly if spurious tripping occurs exclusively during
motor startup. If delay times do not lead to the desired result, the use of shield sleeves may
considerably lower the minimum possible monitoring limit.
You will find more information in Chapters "14.2.5.2 Installation specifications" and
"14.2.5.3 Optimization options" in the Manual 3UG4/3RR2 Monitoring Relay
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/50426183/133300).
The monitored current waveforms also have a strong influence on the measuring accuracy.
In the case of loads with generalized phase control, deviations from the measuring accuracy
can occur when monitoring for high residual current limits. The cause of this is the extreme
difference between the monitored rms values and the peak values of the residual current.
The more extreme the generalized phase control, the shorter the time during which current
flows, and the lower the resulting rms value. To achieve and monitor a high rms value in
such a case, an extremely high peak value of the residual current is necessary. In the case

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 251
Monitoring functions
6.1 Earth-fault monitoring

of high currents, current transformers tend towards saturation in which a further increase in
current on the primary side does not result in an equivalent increase on the secondary side.
In the case of extreme peak values of the residual current, the measuring accuracy suffers
as a result of this principle. Due to the great difference between the peak value and the rms
value, monitoring for lower limits is useful.

6.1.3 Internal earth-fault monitoring

Response
Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro will respond to an internal ground fault:
See also Section "Tables of responses of SIMOCODE pro" in Chapter Important information
(Page 17).

Figure 6-1 "Ground-fault Monitoring" function block

Table 6- 1 "Internal ground-fault monitoring" response

Response Internal ground fault

Deactivated X (d)
Signaling X
Warning X
Tripping X
Delay 0 to 25.5 s (default setting: 0.5 s)

Activity
Unless deactivated, this function is always active, independent of whether the motor is
running or not (operating state "ON").

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

252 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Monitoring functions
6.1 Earth-fault monitoring

6.1.4 External ground-fault monitoring (with 3UL22 residual current transformer)

Response
Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro will respond to an external ground fault.
You will find more information in Section "Tables of responses of SIMOCODE pro" in
Chapter Important information (Page 17).

Figure 6-2 "Ground-fault Monitoring" function block

Table 6- 2 "External ground-fault monitoring" response

Response External ground fault

Deactivated -
Signaling X (d)
Warning X
Tripping X
Delay 0 to 25.5 s (default setting: 0.5 s)1)
1) Extension of the residual current transformer delay

If the response is set to "signal," a ground fault will trigger the "External ground fault" event.
If the response is set to "warn," a ground fault will trigger the "Warning external ground fault."

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 253
Monitoring functions
6.1 Earth-fault monitoring

6.1.5 External ground-fault monitoring (with residual current transformer 3UL23)

Settings
You can parameterize two different response levels (trip level, warning level) for monitoring
the ground-fault current.
If the ground-fault current exceeds the response level, the current limit monitoring will
respond.
See also "Tables of responses of SIMOCODE pro" in Chapter Important information
(Page 17).

Figure 6-3 "Ground-fault Monitoring" function block

Trip level, warning level

You can parameterize two different response levels (trip level, warning level) for monitoring
the ground-fault current.
If the ground-fault current exceeds the response level, the current limit monitoring will
respond.

Trip level: 30 mA to 40 A in steps of 10 mA (default: 1000 mA)

Warning level: 20 mA to 40 A in steps of 10 mA (default: 500 mA)

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

254 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Monitoring functions
6.1 Earth-fault monitoring

Trip level/warning level activity

Unless deactivated, this function is always active, independent of whether the motor is
running or not (operating state "ON").
Here you can specify in which motor operating states the trip level / warning level will be
active:

• Always (on) Trip level / warning level is always active, regardless

of whether the motor is running or at a standstill
• If motor runs, except TPF (run) Trip level / warning level is only active when the motor
is running
• when the motor is on, except TPF, with Trip level / warning level is only active when the motor
startup override (run+) is running and starting has been completed

Response to trip level

Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond if the trip level is overshot.
See also "Tables of responses of SIMOCODE pro" in chapter Important information
(Page 17).

Table 6- 3 Response to "trip level" in ground-fault monitoring

Response Trip level

Signaling X (d)
Warning —
Tripping X
Delay 0 to 25.5 s (default setting: 0.5 s) 1)
1) Extension of the residual current transformer delay

Response to warning level

Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond if the warning level is overshot.
See also "Tables of responses of SIMOCODE pro" in Chapter Important information
(Page 17).

Table 6- 4 Response to "warning level" in ground-fault monitoring

Response Warning level

Deactivated X (d)
Signaling X
Warning X
Tripping —
Delay 0 to 25.5 s (default setting: 0.1 s) 1)
1) Extension of the residual current transformer delay

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 255
Monitoring functions
6.1 Earth-fault monitoring

Hysteresis
Here you can set the hysteresis for the ground-fault current:

Hysteresis 0 to 15% of the level value in steps of 1%

Default setting: 5 %

Response to sensor fault

Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond to a sensor fault. Open circuit and
short-circuit to 3UL23 residual current transformer are recognized as sensor faults.

Response Sensor fault

Deactivated X (d)
Signaling X
Warning X
Tripping X

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

256 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Monitoring functions
6.2 Current limit monitoring

6.2 Current limit monitoring

6.2.1 Description
Monitoring of current limits is used for process monitoring independent of overload
protection.
SIMOCODE pro supports two-level monitoring of the motor current for freely selectable
upper and lower current limits. The response of SIMOCODE pro can be freely configured
and delayed if it reaches a prewarning or trip level.
The motor current is measured using current measuring modules or current / voltage
measuring modules.

Figure 6-4 "Current Limits" function block

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 257
Monitoring functions
6.2 Current limit monitoring

6.2.2 I> (upper limit)

Trip level, warning level

When monitoring current limits I > (upper limit), two different I > response levels can be
parameterized and monitored (upper limit - warning level and upper limit - trip level):
If the current of one or more phases exceeds the response level, current limit monitoring
responds.

Trip level 0 to 1020 % of ls in steps of 4% (default setting: 0)

Warning level 0 to 1020 % of ls in steps of 4% (default setting: 0)

Trip level/warning level activity

The trip level / warning level is active only when the motor is running, the start-up procedure
has been completed and there is no test position feedback (TPF) (run+).

Response to trip level

Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond if the trip level is overshot.
See also "Tables of responses of SIMOCODE pro" in Chapter Important information
(Page 17).

Table 6- 5 "Trip level" response for monitoring current limits I >

Response Trip level

Deactivated X (d)
Signaling X
Warning -
Tripping X
Delay 0 to 25.5 s (default setting: 0.5 s)

Response to warning level

Here you can define how SIMOCODE pro will respond if the warning level is overshot.
See also "Tables of responses of SIMOCODE pro" in Chapter Important information
(Page 17).

Table 6- 6 "Warning level" response for monitoring current limits I >

Response Warning level

Deactivated X (d)
Signaling X
Warning X
Tripping -
Delay 0 to 25.5 s (default setting: 0.5 s)

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

258 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Monitoring functions
6.2 Current limit monitoring

Hysteresis
Here you can set the hysteresis for the current limits I > (upper limit):

Hysteresis 0 to 15% of the level value in steps of 1%

Default setting: 5 %

6.2.3 I< (lower limit)

Trip level / warning level

When monitoring current limits I < (lower limit), two different I< response levels can be
parameterized and monitored (lower limit - trip level and lower limit - warning level):
If the current of the phases (Imax) drops below the response level, the current limit monitor
responds.

Trip level 0 to 1020 % of ls in steps of 4% (default setting: 0)

Warning level 0 to 1020 % of ls in steps of 4% (default setting: 0)

Trip level/warning level activity

The trip level / warning level is active only when the motor is running, the start-up procedure
has been completed and there is no test position feedback (TPF) (run+).

Response to trip level

Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond if the trip level is undershot:
See also "Tables of responses of SIMOCODE pro" in Chapter Important information
(Page 17).

Table 6- 7 "Trip level" response for monitoring current limits I <

Response Trip level

Deactivated X (d)
Signaling X
Warning -
Tripping X
Delay 0 to 25.5 s (default setting: 0.5 s)

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 259
Monitoring functions
6.2 Current limit monitoring

Response to warning level

Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond if the warning level is undershot:
You will find more information in Section "Tables of responses of SIMOCODE pro" in
Chapter Important information (Page 17).

Table 6- 8 "Warning level" response for monitoring current limits I <

Response Warning level

Deactivated X (d)
Signaling X
Warning X
Tripping -
Delay 0 to 25.5 s (default setting: 0.5 s)

Hysteresis
Here you can set the hysteresis for current limits I< (lower limit):

Hysteresis 0 to 15% of the level value in steps of 1%

Default setting: 5 %

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

260 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Monitoring functions
6.3 Voltage monitoring

6.3 Voltage monitoring

6.3.1 Voltage monitoring

Description
SIMOCODE pro supports two-level undervoltage monitoring of either a three-phase network
or a single-phase network for freely selectable limits. The response of SIMOCODE pro on
reaching a prewarning level or trip level can be freely parameterized and delayed.
Voltage measuring is carried out using current / voltage measuring modules. This is based
on the minimum voltage of all voltages Umin.

Figure 6-5 "Voltage Monitoring" function block

Furthermore, even when the motor is switched off, SIMOCODE pro can determine and
signal the further availability of the feeder by measuring the voltage directly at the circuit
breaker or at the fuses in the main circuit.

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 261
Monitoring functions
6.3 Voltage monitoring

Trip level, warning level

You can parameterize two different response levels (trip level/warning level).
If the current of one or more phases undershoots the response level or the warning level,
voltage monitoring responds.

Trip level: 0 to 2040 V in steps of 8 V (default setting: 0)

Warning level: 0 to 2040 V in steps of 8 V (default setting: 0)

Trip level/warning level activity

Here you can specify in which motor operating states the trip level/warning level will be
active:

• Always (on) Trip level/warning level is always active, regardless of

whether the motor is running or at a standstill
• Always, except TPF (on+) (default) Trip level/warning level always active, regardless of
whether the motor is running or at a standstill;
exception: "TPF", i.e. motor feeder is in "test position"
• If motor is running, except TPF (run) Trip level/warning level only active if the motor is ON
and not in the test position

Response to trip level

Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond if the trip level is undershot.
See also Section "Tables of responses of SIMOCODE pro" in Chapter Important information
(Page 17).

Table 6- 9 "Trip level" response for voltage monitoring

Response Trip level

Deactivated X (d)
Signaling X
Warning -
Tripping X
Delay 0 to 25.5 s (default setting: 0.5 s)

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

262 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Monitoring functions
6.3 Voltage monitoring

Response to warning level

Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond if the warning level is undershot.
See also Section "Tables of responses of SIMOCODE pro" in Chapter Important information
(Page 17).

Table 6- 10 "Warning level" response for voltage monitoring

Response Warning level

Deactivated X (d)
Signaling X
Warning X
Tripping -
Delay 0 to 25.5 s (default setting: 0.5 s)

Hysteresis for voltage, cos phi, power

Here you can set the hysteresis for voltage, cos phi and power.

Hysteresis for voltage, cos phi, power 0 to 15% of the level value in steps of 1% (default
setting: 5 %)

Voltage measurement - Load type for voltage, cos phi, power

Here you can specify whether 1-phase or 3-phase loads (default) are to be displayed.

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 263
Monitoring functions
6.4 Cos phi monitoring

6.4 Cos phi monitoring

Description
Cos phi monitoring monitors the load condition of inductive loads. The main field of
application is for asynchronous motors in 1-phase or 3-phase networks with loads that
fluctuate significantly. The power factor fluctuates more than either the motor current or the
active power does, particularly in the low-end performance range of a motor. Therefore,
power factor monitoring is particularly suitable for distinguishing between no-load operation
and faults, e.g. a broken drive belt or drive shaft. If the set trip level or warning level is
undershot, a signal is generated or the motor is switched off, depending upon the setting.

Figure 6-6 Cos Phi Monitoring function block

Trip level, warning level

You can parameterize two different response levels (trip level / warning level) for cos phi
monitoring.
0 % = cos phi = 0.00
50 % = cos phi = 0.50
100 % = cos phi = 1.00

Trip level/warning level activity

The trip level / warning level is active only when the motor is running, the start-up procedure
has been completed and there is no test position feedback (TPF) (run+).

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

264 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Monitoring functions
6.4 Cos phi monitoring

Response to trip level

Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond if the set trip level is undershot:
See also Section "Tables of responses of SIMOCODE pro" in Chapter Important information
(Page 17).

Table 6- 11 "Trip level" response for cos phi monitoring

Response Trip level

Deactivated X (d)
Signaling X
Warning -
Tripping X
Delay 0 to 25.5 s (default setting: 0.5 s)

Response to warning level

Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond if the set warning level is undershot:
See also Section "Tables of responses of SIMOCODE pro" in Chapter Important information
(Page 17).

Table 6- 12 "Warning level" response for cos phi monitoring

Response Warning level

Deactivated X (d)
Signaling X
Warning X
Tripping -
Delay 0 to 25.5 s (default setting: 0.5 s)

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 265
Monitoring functions
6.5 Active power monitoring

6.5 Active power monitoring

Description
SIMOCODE pro can indirectly monitor the state of a device or system via the active power.
For example, by monitoring the active power of a pump motor, conclusions can be drawn
from the active power level about the flow rate or fluid fill levels. The active power curve of a
motor is a precise reflection of its actual load across the entire range. Excess load results in
increased wear of the motor and, thus, may lead to premature motor failure. Excessively low
active power can indicate no-load operation of the motor, for example.
SIMOCODE pro supports two-level monitoring of the active power for freely selectable upper
and lower current limits. The response of SIMOCODE pro can be freely configured and
delayed if it reaches a prewarning or trip level.
Active power measuring is carried out using current / voltage measuring modules.

Figure 6-7 "Power Monitoring" function block

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

266 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Monitoring functions
6.5 Active power monitoring

Trip level, warning level

With active power monitoring, you can parameterize two different response levels (trip level /
warning level) for the upper and lower limits.

Trip level
• P> (upper limit) 0.000 to 4294967.295 kW (default: 0.000).
• P < (lower limit)
Warning level
• P> (upper limit) 0.000 to 4294967.295 kW (default: 0.000).
• P < (lower limit)

Trip level/warning level activity

The trip level / warning level is active only when the motor is running, the start-up procedure
has been completed and there is no test position feedback (TPF) (run+).

Response to trip level P> (upper limit), P< (lower limit)

Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond if the set trip level is
overshot/undershot:
See also "Tables of responses of SIMOCODE pro" in Chapter Important information
(Page 17).

Table 6- 13 "Trip level" response for active power monitoring

Response Trip level

Deactivated X (d)
Signaling X
Warning -
Tripping X
Delay 0 to 25.5 s (default setting: 0.5 s)

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 267
Monitoring functions
6.5 Active power monitoring

Response to warning level P> (upper limit), P< (lower limit)

Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond if the set warning level is
overshot/undershot:
See also "Tables of responses of SIMOCODE pro" in Chapter Important information
(Page 17).

Table 6- 14 "Warning level" response for active power monitoring

Response Warning level

Deactivated X (d)
Signaling X
Warning X
Tripping -
Delay 0 to 25.5 s (default setting: 0.5 s)

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

268 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Monitoring functions
6.6 0 / 4 - 20 mA monitoring

6.6 0 / 4 - 20 mA monitoring

Description
With the aid of an analog module, SIMOCODE pro is capable of measuring and monitoring
further process variables as desired. For example, the fill level can be monitored to protect a
pump against dry operation, or a differential pressure transducer can be used to monitor the
degree of pollution in a filter. If the fill level undershoots a specified level, the pump can be
switched off and, if a specific differential pressure value is exceeded, the filter must be
cleaned.

Figure 6-8 "0/4 - 20 mA (AM1) monitoring" and "0/4 - 20 mA (AM2) monitoring" function blocks

SIMOCODE pro supports two-level monitoring of the analog signals of a transducer

(standardized 0/4 - 20 mA output signal). The analog signals are fed to the "0/4-20 mA
(AM1) monitoring" and "0/4-20 mA (AM2) monitoring" function blocks via the analog module.

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 269
Monitoring functions
6.6 0 / 4 - 20 mA monitoring

Trip level, warning level

With 0/4-20 mA monitoring, you can parameterize two different response levels (trip level /
warning level) for the upper and lower limits.

Trip level
• 0/4 to 20 > (upper limit) 0.0 to 23.6 mA (default setting: 0.0 mA)
• 0/4 to 20 < (lower limit)
Warning level
• 0/4 to 20 > (upper limit) 0.0 to 23.6 mA (default setting: 0.0 mA)
• 0/4 to 20 < (lower limit)

Trip level/warning level activity

Here you can specify in which motor operating states the trip level/warning level will be
active:

• Always (on) (default) Trip level/warning level is always active,

regardless of whether the motor is running or at a
standstill
• Always, except TPF (on+) Trip level / warning level is always active
regardless of whether the motor is running or at a
standstill, with the exception of "TPF," i.e. motor
feeder is in the test position
• If motor is running, except TPF (run) Trip level/warning level only active if the motor is
ON and not in the test position
• If motor is running, except TPF, with startup Trip level / warning level is only active when the
override (run+) motor is running, the startup procedure has been
completed, and no test position (TPF) is detected

Response to trip level 0/4 to 20 mA > (upper limit), 0/4 to 20 mA < (lower limit)
Here, you can define the response of SIMOCODE pro in the event that the monitored
variable overshoots/undershoots the set trip level:
For further information, see also "Tables of responses of SIMOCODE pro" in Chapter
Important information (Page 17).

Table 6- 15 "Trip level" response for 0/4 to 20 mA monitoring

Response Trip level

Deactivated X (d)
Signaling X
Warning -
Tripping X
Delay 0 to 25.5 s (default setting: 0.5 s)

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

270 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Monitoring functions
6.6 0 / 4 - 20 mA monitoring

Response to warning level 0/4 to 20 mA> (upper limit), 0/4 to 20 mA< (lower limit)
Here, you can define the response of SIMOCODE pro in the event that the monitored
variable overshoots/undershoots the set warning level:
For further information, see also "Tables of responses of SIMOCODE pro" in Chapter
Important information (Page 17).

Table 6- 16 "Warning level" response for 0/4 to 20 mA monitoring

Response Warning level

Deactivated X (d)
Signaling X
Warning X
Tripping -
Delay 0 to 25.5 s (default setting: 0.5 s)

Marking
The marking is saved in the device and assigned and displayed in the "Faults/Warnings"
online dialog box. Optional marking for identifying the message, e.g. "0/4 to 20 >"; range:
maximum 10 characters. Each change to the marking requires that the communication
interface be restarted when the web server is active. A new start interrupts all Ethernet and
PROFINET links and reestablishes them afterward.

Hysteresis for 0/4-20 mA

Here you can set the fluctuation range (hysteresis) for the analog signal: 0 to 15 % in steps
of 1% (default setting: 5%)

Note
Monitoring of a second process variable via input 2 of the analog module can be done, for
example, by free limit monitors.

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 271
Monitoring functions
6.7 Operation monitoring

6.7 Operation monitoring

6.7.1 Description

Motor operation monitoring - use

SIMOCODE pro can monitor the operating hours and stop times of a motor and restrict the
number of start-ups in a defined time frame in order to avoid plant downtimes due to failed
motors caused by running or being stopped for too long.
When an adjustable limit is violated, a message or alarm can be generated which can
indicate that the corresponding motor must be serviced or replaced.
After the motor has been replaced, the operating hours and stop times can be reset.
To avoid excessive thermal loads and premature wear of the motor, it is possible to limit the
number of motor startups for a specifiable period. The number of still possible starts is
available in the SIMOCODE pro for further processing. The limited number of possible starts
can be indicated by prewarnings.

Note
Operating hours, motor stop times and the number of motor starts can be monitored
completely in the device and/or transmitted to the automation system via PROFINET.

Figure 6-9 "Operation Monitoring" function block

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

272 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Monitoring functions
6.7 Operation monitoring

Response

Table 6- 17 "Operation monitoring" response

Response Monitoring of operating Stop time monitoring - Number of starts Number of starts
hours - Threshold level overshoot prewarning
Deactivated X (d) X (d) X (d) X (d)
Signaling X X X X
Warning X X X X
Tripping - - X -

6.7.2 Operating hours monitoring

Motor operating hours monitoring - use

The motor operating hours monitoring function enables the operating hours (service life) of a
motor to be recorded so that motor maintenance prompts can be generated in good time as
applicable.

Level
If the operating hours exceed the set response level, the monitoring function responds.
Response level: 0 to 1193046 hours (default setting: 0 h)

Activity
Unless deactivated, this function is always active, independent of whether the motor is
running or not (operating state "ON").

Response
You can define the response to overshoot here.
See also "Tables of responses of SIMOCODE pro" in Chapter Important information
(Page 17) and Table "Response of operation monitoring".

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 273
Monitoring functions
6.7 Operation monitoring

6.7.3 Motor stop time monitoring

Motor stop time monitoring - use

System parts for important processes often have dual drives (A and B drives). Ensure that
these are always operated alternately. This prevents long motor stop times and reduces the
risk of non-availability. The motor stop time monitoring function can be used, for example, to
generate an alarm, thus initiating connection of the motor.

Level
The length of the permissible motor stop time is stipulated here; if exceeded, the monitoring
function responds. Level: 0 to 65535 hours (default: 0 h)

Activity
Unless deactivated, this function is always active, independent of whether the motor is
running or not (operating state "ON").

Response
You can define the response to overshoot of the permissible stop time here:
See also "Tables of responses of SIMOCODE pro" in Chapter Important information
(Page 17) and Table "Response of operation monitoring".

6.7.4 Monitoring the number of starts

Number of starts monitoring - use

Monitoring the number of starts can protect system parts (motors and switching devices such
as soft starters and converters) from too many start processes within a parameterizable time
frame and thus prevent damage. This is particularly useful for commissioning or manual
control.
The schematic below illustrates the principle of monitoring the number of starts:

Figure 6-10 Number of starts monitoring

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

274 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Monitoring functions
6.7 Operation monitoring

Permissible starts
The maximum permissible number of starts is set here. The time interval "Time range for
starts" commences to run after the first start. After the second to last permissible start has
been executed, the "Just one start possible" prewarning is generated.
Permissible starts: 1 to 255 (default setting: 1)

Time range for starts

The time range for permissible start processes is set here. The maximum number of starts is
only available again after the parameterized time range for starts has elapsed. The number
of available starts is shown by the analog value "Permissible starts - Actual value".
Time range for starts: 00:00:00 to 18:12:15 hh:mm:ss (default setting: 00:00:00 hh:mm:ss).

Activity
Unless deactivated, this function is always active, independent of whether the motor is
running or not (operating state "ON").

Response to overshoot
You can define the response to overshoot of the number of starts within the time range for
starts here:
See also "Tables of responses of SIMOCODE pro" in Chapter Important information
(Page 17) and Table "Response of operation monitoring".

Response to prewarning
You can define the response after the penultimate start here.
See also "Tables of responses of SIMOCODE pro" in Chapter Important information
(Page 17) and Table "Response of operation monitoring".

Interlocking time
If a new start command is issued within the time range for starts after the last permissible
start, this new start command will no longer be executed if the setting "Response to
overshoot - Tripping" has been set. "Trip - No. of starts >" will be displayed and the set
interlocking time activated.
Interlocking time: 00:00:00 to 18:12:15 hh:mm:ss (default setting: 00:00:00 hh:mm:ss).

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 275
Monitoring functions
6.8 Temperature monitoring

6.8 Temperature monitoring

6.8.1 Temperature monitoring (analog)

Schematic and characteristic curve

Temperature monitoring of, for example, motor windings, motor bearings, coolant and
gearbox temperature, can be carried out via up to three analog temperature sensors such as
NTC, KTY 83/84, PT100, PT1000.
SIMOCODE pro supports two-level monitoring for overtemperature: Separate levels for
warning and tripping temperature can be set.
Temperature monitoring takes into account the highest temperature of all the sensor
measuring circuits of the temperature module.

Figure 6-11 "Temperature TM1, TM2 monitoring" function blocks

Settings

Table 6- 18 "Temperature monitoring" settings

Temperature Description
Trip level T > - 273 to 65262 °C (default: - 273 °C)
Response to trip level T > Setting of response when the temperature is overshot (see the following table and
Chapter Important information (Page 17))
Marking for trip level T > No parameter. Optional marking for identifying the message, e.g. "Temperature>";
range: maximal 10 characters
Warning level T > - 273 to 65262 °C (default setting: - 273 °C)
Response to warning level T > Setting of response when the temperature is overshot (see the following table and
Chapter Important information (Page 17))
Marking warning level T > No parameter. Optional marking for identifying the event, e.g. "Temperature>";
range: maximal 10 characters.
Each change to the marking requires that the communication interface be restarted when
the web server is active. A new start interrupts all Ethernet and PROFINET links and
reestablishes them afterward.
Hysteresis 0 to 255 ℃ in steps of 1℃ (default: 5 ℃)

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

276 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Monitoring functions
6.8 Temperature monitoring

Trip level/warning level activity

The trip level / warning level is always active, independent of whether the motor is running or
not (operating state "ON").

Response
See also "Tables of responses of SIMOCODE pro" in Chapter Important information
(Page 17).
● Overtemperature: Here you can select how SIMOCODE pro should respond when the
temperature has overshot the warning level / trip level.

Note
With motors for EEx e applications, the response must be set to "Tripping"!

Note
The sensor type, the number of measuring circuits in use and the response to a sensor fault
must be set in the "Temperature Module Inputs (TM Inputs)" function block if temperature
monitoring is being used.

Note
To monitor several sensor measuring circuits individually and independently, a suitable
number of free limit monitors can be linked to the "Temperature Module Inputs (TM Inputs)"
function block and differing limits set for the individual temperature sensors, instead of the
"Temperature Monitoring" function block.

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 277
Monitoring functions
6.9 Monitoring interval for mandatory testing

6.9 Monitoring interval for mandatory testing

Description
Function for monitoring the interval between the connection and the tripping of the enabling
circuit (actuator tripping). The monitoring time starts anew every time the enabling circuit
closes. This function supports you in maintaining test intervals requiring verification.
In the enabling circuit of the DM-F Local and the DM-F PROFIsafe, relay contacts perform
safety-related tripping. You can only determine whether or not the relay contacts of the
enabling circuit actually open by changing the switching state of the contacts.
The function "Monitoring interval for mandatory testing" supports plant operators in
monitoring the time that has elapsed since the enabling circuit was last switched in.
When the set limit is reached, the set response is triggered (deactivated, signaling, warning;
see response). This is logged in the event memory.
This monitoring function is an organizational measure that supports the system operator in
detecting faults by carrying out regular tests, see information in the operating instructions on
regularly testing the function of a safety device. The monitoring function itself need not be
safety-related.

Note
The function "Time until test" is not a safety-related function

Figure 6-12 "Monitoring Interval for Mandatory Testing" function block

Response
You can define the response here.
See also "Tables of responses of SIMOCODE pro" in Chapter Important information
(Page 17).

Table 6- 19 "Safe tripping" response

Response
Deactivated X (d)
Signaling X
Warning X
Tripping -

Test interval
Adjustable limit value for the interval to mandatory testing: 0 to 255 weeks (default
setting: 0).

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

278 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Monitoring functions
6.10 Hysteresis for monitoring functions

6.10 Hysteresis for monitoring functions

The following diagram illustrates the function of the hysteresis for monitoring functions:

Figure 6-13 The hysteresis operating principle for monitoring functions

TL = Trip level (trip)

WL = Warning level (warn)

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 279
Monitoring functions
6.10 Hysteresis for monitoring functions

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

280 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
Outputs 7
In this chapter
In this chapter you will find information about the outputs of SIMOCODE pro:
● Relay outputs on the basic unit and the digital modules
● Analog module output
● Operator panel LEDs
● Send data via PROFINET

Target groups
This chapter addresses the following target groups:
● Planners and configuring engineers
● Programmers

Required knowledge
You will require the following knowledge:
● The principle of connecting plugs to sockets
● PROFINET

Navigation in SIMOCODE ES
You will find the dialog boxes in SIMOCODE ES under Further Function Blocks → Outputs.

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 281
Outputs
7.1 Introduction

7.1 Introduction

Description
SIMOCODE pro has various outputs. These are represented by different function blocks in
SIMOCODE pro. They are the external SIMOCODE pro interfaces. Within SIMOCODE pro,
the outputs are represented as plugs on the corresponding function blocks and can be
assigned to any functions or events via connections.
Outputs include:
● Output terminals , located on the outside of basic units, digital modules, and on the
analog module
● LEDs on the operator panel for visualizing the operating state or different statuses
● Outputs to the PROFINET.

Schematic
The following schematic shows the general representation of the various output types:

Figure 7-1 General representation of the various output types

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

282 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Outputs
7.1 Introduction

Scope and application

Outputs are used, e.g. for controlling motor contactors, displaying states or signaling via
PROFINET.

Table 7- 1 Outputs

Outputs SIMOCODE pro V PN

Basic unit outputs (BU Outputs) ✓
Operator panel LEDs (OP LED) ✓
Digital module 1 outputs (DM1 Outputs) ✓
Digital module 2 outputs (DM2 Outputs) ✓
Analog module output (AM1 output/AM2 output) ✓
OPC-UA send ✓
Cyclic send data (Cyclic Send) ✓

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 283
Outputs
7.2 Basic unit outputs

7.2 Basic unit outputs

Description
SIMOCODE pro has a "BU Outputs" function block with two or three relay outputs. You can,
for example, switch contactors or lamps via these relay outputs. For this, the inputs (plugs) of
the function block must be connected to the respective sockets (usually the "QE..." contactor
controls of the control function). The "BU Outputs" function block consists of:
● Three plugs corresponding to the relay outputs Out1 to Out3
● Three relays
● Output terminals.
Overall, there is one "BU Outputs" function block for the SIMOCODE pro V PN basic unit.

Schematic
The following schematic shows the "BU Outputs" function block:

Figure 7-2 BU Outputs function block

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

284 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Outputs
7.2 Basic unit outputs

Application examples
● Activation of the main contactor in the motor feeder: You can, for example, define which
relay output is used for activating the motor contactor in the motor feeder. To do this,
connect the desired relay output to the respective "QE..." contactor control of the control
function.
● Activation of lamps for displaying operating states: You can define, for example, which
relay outputs are to be used for controlling the lamps / LEDs that display the operating
states of the motor (Fault, ON, OFF, FAST, SLOW, ...). To do this, connect the desired
relay output to the respective "QE..." contactor control of the control function. These are
provided specially for controlling lamps and LEDs. In addition to the status signals, the
"QL..." lamp controls automatically signal the following using a 2-Hz flashing frequency:
– Test mode (QLE.../QLA lamp outputs are flashing)
– Unacknowledged fault (lamp output general fault QLS is flashing)
– Transfer of any other information, status information, warnings, faults, etc. to the relay
outputs.
– Lamp test: All QL outputs are activated for approx. 2 s.
In most cases, the outputs of the basic unit will be connected to the QE or QL outputs. By
referring to Table Active control stations, contactor controls, lamp controls and status
information for the control functions (Page 243), you can determine which QE outputs are
required for which control functions.

Settings

Table 7- 2 Basic unit output settings

BU Outputs Description
Outputs 1 to 3 Control of the "BU Outputs" function block via any signal (any socket , e.g.
device inputs, PROFINET control bits, etc.), usually from the QE contactor
controls.

Default settings depend on the selected application (template): See Chapter Example
circuits (Page 685).

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 285
Outputs
7.3 Operator panel LEDs (with OPD)

7.3 Operator panel LEDs (with OPD)

Description
SIMOCODE pro has an "OP LED" function block for controlling the seven freely assignable
LEDs. The LEDs are located in the operator panel and can be used for any status displays.
For this, the inputs (plugs) of the "OP LED" function block must be connected to the
respective sockets (e.g. to the sockets for the status information of the control function).

Note
The "OP LED" function block can only be used if the operator panel (OP) is connected and
configured in the device configuration.

The "OP LED" function block consists of:

● Four plugs, "OP LED Green 1" to "OP LED Green 4," corresponding to the green LEDs.
The green LEDs are visually / mechanically allocated to the buttons on the operator
panel. They normally display feedback concerning the motor operating state.
● Three plugs, "OP LED yellow 1" to "OP LED Yellow 3," corresponding to the yellow LEDs.
● Four green LEDs.
● Three yellow LEDs (not for the operator panel with display).
Overall, there is one "OP LED" function block for the SIMOCODE pro V PN basic unit.

LEDs of the operator panel

The following diagram shows the front view of the operator panel and the LEDs:

Figure 7-3 LEDs of the operator panel

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

286 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Outputs
7.3 Operator panel LEDs (with OPD)

LEDs of the operator panel with display

The following diagram shows the front view of the operator panel with display and the LEDs:

Figure 7-4 LEDs of the operator panel with display for SIMOCODE pro

Schematic
The following schematic shows the "OP LED" function block:

Figure 7-5 Schematic of the "OP LED" function block

Note
The three yellow LEDs mentioned in this section are not available for the operator panel with
display. Status information can be read out here directly via the display. While it is still
possible to connect the corresponding three plugs via the software, they remain non-
functional.

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 287
Outputs
7.3 Operator panel LEDs (with OPD)

Application examples
● Display of operating states: You can define which LEDs are to be used for displaying the
operating states (Fault, ON, OFF, FAST, SLOW,...). To do this, connect the desired LED
to the respective "QL." lamp control of the control function. In many cases, the LEDs are
connected to the QL outputs. By referring to Table Active control stations, contactor
controls, lamp controls and status information for the control functions (Page 243), you
can determine which QL outputs are required for which control functions.
● Transfer of any other information, status information, warnings, faults, etc. to the yellow
LEDs.

Settings

Table 7- 3 Operator panel LED settings

OP LED Description
Green 1 to The "OP LED" function block can be activated by any signal (any sockets ,
Green 4 e.g. "motor" operating state feedback).

Yellow 1 to The "OP LED" function block can be activated by any signal (any sockets ,
Yellow 3 1) e.g. displays for status, events, faults).

1) No function when using the operator panel with display.

Default settings depend on the selected application (template): See Chapter Example
circuits (Page 685).

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

288 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Outputs
7.4 Digital module outputs

7.4 Digital module outputs

Description
SIMOCODE pro has two "DM1 Outputs" and "DM2 Outputs" function blocks, which are each
equipped with two relay outputs. You can, for example, switch contactors or lamps via these
relay outputs. For this, the inputs (plugs of the "DM Outputs" function blocks) must be
connected to the respective sockets (e.g. of the control function).

Note
"DM Outputs" function blocks can only be used if the corresponding digital modules (DM) are
connected and configured in the device configuration.

Each function block has:

● Two plugs, corresponding to relay outputs Out1, Out2
● Two relays
● Output terminals.
Overall, there is one "DM1 Outputs" function block and one "DM2 Outputs" function block for
the SIMOCODE pro V PN basic unit.

Note
In addition to the two jointly-switched fail-safe enabling circuits, the fail-safe DM-F Local and
DM-F PROFIsafe digital modules are equipped with two standard relay outputs, the common
potential of which is switched off for safety reasons via an enabling circuit.
From a logical connection point of view, the standard relay outputs are always switched. The
state of the fail-safe enabling circuits is not affected by the logical wiring.

Schematic
The following schematic shows the "DM Outputs" function blocks:

Figure 7-6 Schematic of the "DM1 Outputs" / "DM2 Outputs" function blocks

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 289
Outputs
7.4 Digital module outputs

Application examples
● Activation of the motor contactor in the motor feeder: You can, for example, define which
relay output is used for activating the main contactor in the motor feeder. To do this,
connect the desired relay output to the respective "QE" contactor control of the control
function.
● Activation of lamps for displaying operating states: You can define, for example, which
relay outputs are to be used for controlling the lamps / LEDs that display the operating
states of the motor (Fault, ON, OFF, FAST, SLOW, ...). To do this, connect the desired
relay output to the respective "QL..." lamp control of the control function.
● Transfer of any other information, status information, warnings, faults, etc. to the relay
outputs.
In many cases, the outputs of the digital module will be connected to the QE outputs. By
referring to Table Active control stations, contactor controls, lamp controls and status
information for the control functions (Page 243), you can determine which QE outputs are
required for which control functions.

Settings

Table 7- 4 "DM1 / DM2 Outputs" settings

"DM1 / DM2 Outputs" Description

Outputs 1 to 2 Control of the "DM1 Outputs" and "DM2 Outputs" function blocks via
any signal (any socket , e.g. device inputs, PROFINET control
bits, etc., usually from the QE contactor controls.)

Default settings depend on the selected application (template): See Chapter Example
circuits (Page 685).

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

290 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Outputs
7.5 Analog module output

7.5 Analog module output

Description
The analog module allows you to expand the SIMOCODE pro V PN basic unit by two analog
outputs. The corresponding function blocks allow every analog value (2 bytes / 1 word) in
SIMOCODE pro to be output as a 0/4 to 20 mA signal to a connected pointer instrument, for
example. By activating the function blocks via the "Assigned analog output value" plug with
any integer value between 0 and 65535, an equivalent analog signal of 0 to 20 mA or 4 to 20
mA will be sent to the output terminals of the analog module.

Note
The "AM1 Output" and "AM2 Output" function blocks can only be used if the analog module
(AM) is connected and configured in the device configuration.

Schematic
The following schematic shows the "AM1 Output" and "AM2 Output" function blocks:

Figure 7-7 Schematic of the "AM1/2 Output" function blocks

Settings

Table 7- 5 "Analog module output" settings

Signal/value Range
Assigned analog output value Any value (1 word / 2 bytes) in SIMOCODE pro

Output signal 0 to 20 mA (default setting) or 4 to 20 mA

Start value of value range 0 to 65535 (default setting: 0)
End value of value range 0 to 65535 (default setting: 0)

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 291
Outputs
7.5 Analog module output

Application examples

1) Output of the actual motor current - across the entire motor current range
The motor current of a motor is within the range 0 to 8 A.
The rated current Irated of the motor at rated load is 2 A.
The set current in SIMOCODE ES Is corresponds to the rated current IN (2 A). In
SIMOCODE pro, the present phase currents or the maximum current (current IL_1, IL_2,
IL_3, max. current I_max) are represented as a percentage of the parameterized set
current Is in accordance with the selected range:
● 0 A motor current corresponds to 0 % of Is
● 8 A motor current corresponds to 400% of Is
● The smallest unit for the effective motor current in SIMOCODE pro is 1% (see measured
values data record 94).

Figure 7-8 Application example: Motor current output - entire range

As a result,
● The "Start value of value range" to be selected is: 0
● The "End value of value range" to be selected is: 400.

Figure 7-9 Application example: Motor current output - output values to function block

When the parameterized "Output signal" = 0 - 20 mA:

● 0.0 % motor current: 0 mA at the analog module output
● 400 % motor current: 20 mA at the analog module output.

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

292 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Outputs
7.5 Analog module output

When the parameterized "Output signal" = 4 - 20 mA:

● 0.0 % motor current: 4 mA at the analog module output
● 400 % motor current: 20 mA at the analog module output.

2) Output of the actual motor current - only part of the motor current range (overload range)
The motor current of a motor is within the range 0 to 8 A.
The rated current Irated of the motor at rated load is 2 A.
The set current in SIMOCODE ES Is corresponds to the rated current IN (2 A). However, only
the overload range (2 to 8 A) is to be displayed on an instrument via the analog module
output. In SIMOCODE pro, the present phase currents or the maximum current (current IL_1,
IL_2, IL_3, max. current I_max) are represented as a percentage of the parameterized set
current Is in accordance with the selected range:
● 2 A motor current corresponds to 100 % of Is
● 8 A motor current corresponds to 400% of Is
● The smallest unit for the effective motor current in SIMOCODE pro is 1% (see measured
values data record 94).

Figure 7-10 Application example: Motor current output - Overload range

As a result,
● The "Start value of value range" to be selected is: 100
● The "End value of value range" to be selected is: 400

Figure 7-11 Application example: Motor current output - output value to function block at output

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 293
Outputs
7.5 Analog module output

When the parameterized "Output signal" = 0 - 20 mA:

● 100 % motor current: 0 mA at the analog module output
● 400 % motor current: 20 mA at the analog module output.
When the parameterized "Output signal" = 4 - 20 mA:
● 100 % motor current: 4 mA at the analog module output
● 400 % motor current: 20 mA at the analog module output.

Note
(relating to examples 1 and 2):
In SIMOCODE pro, phase currents are available as a percentage of the set current Is. When
using the analog module output to display the present motor current on a connected pointer
instrument, the present motor current is always indicated as a percentage of the set current.
If the selected control function is for a motor with only one speed, the pointer instrument can
display a percentage (% of Is) and an absolute value (e.g. in A).
In the case of motors / control functions with two speeds and, thus, two set currents (e.g.
pole-changing starters or Dahlanders), the motor current is only shown on the pointer
instrument as a percentage of the present set current Is1 or Is2, depending upon which of the
two speeds (slow or fast) currently applies.

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

294 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Outputs
7.5 Analog module output

3) Output of any analog value from the automation system via PROFINET
Two words (2 x 2 bytes) can be transmitted from the automation system to SIMOCODE pro
via PROFINET, depending on the basic type. Any value can be output as a 0/4 to 20 mA
signal by directly connecting this cyclic control word to the analog module output. If the
transmitted value is in S7 Format (0 to 27648) this must be taken into consideration when
parameterizing:

Figure 7-12 Output of an analog value from the automation system

As a result,
● The "Start value of value range" to be selected is: 0
● The "End value of value range" to be selected is: 27648.
When the parameterized "Output signal" = 0 - 20 mA:
● 0: 0 mA at the analog module output
● 27648: 20 mA at the analog module output.
When the parameterized "Output signal" = 4 - 20 mA:
● 0: 4 mA at the analog module output
● 27648: 20 mA at the analog module output.

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 295
Outputs
7.6 Cyclic Send

7.6 Cyclic Send

Description
The "Cyclic Send" function blocks allow you to specify the information to be transferred
cyclically to the automation system via PROFINET.
"Cyclic Send" function blocks consist of:
● Eight bits each (two bytes, byte 0 and byte 1 for binary information)
● Nine words (= 18 bytes, bytes 2 to 19 for nine analog values, freely parameterizable).
A total of five "Cyclic Send" function blocks (0, 1, 2/3, 4/9, 10/19) are available.

Schematic
The following schematic shows the "Cyclic Send" function blocks:

Figure 7-13 Schematic of the "Cyclic Send" function blocks

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

296 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Outputs
7.6 Cyclic Send

Cyclic services
The Cyclic Send data are exchanged between the IO Device (SIMOCODE pro) and the IO
Controller (automation system). The IO Controller sends the Cyclic Receive data to
SIMOCODE pro in each case. In response, SIMOCODE pro returns the Cyclic Send data.

Settings

Table 7- 6 Cyclic send data settings

Cyclic send data Description

Bytes 0 to 1, bits 0 to 7, Setting and resetting of bits by means of any signal (any sockets
basic types 1, 2, 3 , e.g. device inputs, send data, etc.)
Bytes 2 / 3, basic types 1, 2, Control of one word (two bytes) by means of any analog value (any
3 socket , e.g. maximum current Imax, remaining cooling down
period, timer actual value, etc.)
Bytes 4 / 5, 6 / 7, 8 / 9, Control of three words (six bytes) by means of any analog value (any
basic type 1 sockets )
Bytes 10/11, 12/13, 14/15, Control of five words (ten bytes) by means of any analog value (any
16/17, 18/19, basic type 3 sockets )

Byte 0 of the send data is already preset; byte 2/3 is preset with the max. current I_max.

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 297
Outputs
7.7 OPC-UA send

7.7 OPC-UA send

Description
In addition to "Cyclic Send," it is possible to transfer a further 16 bits of binary information via
OPC UA.
With the "OPC UA Send" function block, you can specify which information is to be
transferred. The inputs (plugs) of the function blocks must be connected to the respective
sockets.
The OPC-UA Send function blocks consist of
● Eight bits each (= two bytes, byte 0 and byte 1 for binary information)
A total of two "OPC-UA Send" function blocks are available.

Schematic
The following schematic shows the "OPC-UA Send" function blocks:

Figure 7-14 "OPC-UA send" function blocks

Settings

Table 7- 7 OPC-UA Send Data settings

OPC-UA Send Data Description

Bytes 0 to 1, bits 0 to 7 Control of bits by means of any signal (any socket , e.g.
device inputs, send data, status information, events, etc.)

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

298 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
Inputs 8
In this chapter
In this chapter you will find information about SIMOCODE pro inputs.
The inputs are:
● Binary inputs on the basic units and digital modules (Basic unit inputs (Page 303) Digital
module inputs (Page 308))
● Operator panel buttons (Operator panel buttons (Page 305))
● Temperature module inputs (Temperature module inputs (Page 312))
● Analog module inputs (Analog module inputs (Page 314))
● Receive data from PROFINET (Cyclic Receive (Page 316) OPC UA Receive (Page 317))

Target groups
This chapter addresses the following target groups:
● Planners
● Configuring engineers

Required knowledge
You will need to understand the principle of connecting plugs to sockets.

Navigation in SIMOCODE ES
You will find the dialog boxes in SIMOCODE ES under Device Parameters → Inputs.

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 299
Inputs
8.1 Introduction

8.1 Introduction

Description
SIMOCODE pro has various inputs. These are represented by different function blocks in
SIMOCODE pro. These function blocks are the ingoing SIMOCODE pro interfaces. Within
SIMOCODE pro, these inputs are represented as sockets on the corresponding function
blocks and can be assigned via connections to any functions. Inputs can be:
● Input terminals , located on the outside of the basic unit and digital modules
● Buttons on operator panels (one Test / Reset button, four freely parameterizable buttons),
and basic units (one Test / Reset button)
● Temperature module inputs
● Analog module inputs
● Inputs from PROFINET (cyclic and acyclic).

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

300 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Inputs
8.1 Introduction

Schematic
The following schematic shows the general representation of input types:

Figure 8-1 General representation of the input types

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 301
Inputs
8.1 Introduction

Scope and application

Inputs are used, for example, to input external signals e.g. via pushbuttons, key-operated
switches, etc. These external signals are processed further internally via appropriate
connections. The system has different inputs depending upon the device series:

Table 8- 1 Inputs

Inputs SIMOCODE pro V PN

Basic unit inputs (BU Inputs) ✓
Operator panel buttons (OP Buttons) ✓
Digital module 1 inputs (DM1 Inputs) ✓
Digital module 2 inputs (DM2 Inputs) ✓
Temperature module inputs (TM Inputs) ✓
Analog module inputs (AM Inputs) ✓
Ethernet / OPC-UA Receive ✓
PROFINET (Cycl. receive) ✓

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

302 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Inputs
8.2 Basic unit inputs

8.2 Basic unit inputs

Description
SIMOCODE pro has a "BU Inputs" function block with four binary inputs connected to
common potential. You can connect, for example, the buttons for a local control station to the
inputs. These signals can be further processed in SIMOCODE pro by internally connecting
the sockets of the "BU Inputs" function block.
The "BU inputs" function block consists of:
● Input terminals located on the outside of the basic unit, corresponding to the sockets
"BU Input 1" to "BU Input 4"
● Sockets in SIMOCODE pro that can be connected to any plugs, e.g. to the "Control
Stations" function block
● Socket for "TEST/RESET" button: The function of the "TEST/RESET" button is generally
dependent upon the operating state of the device:
– Reset function for the acknowledgement of pending faults
– Test function for carrying out device tests
In addition, other functions can be assigned to the "TEST/RESET" button (e.g. operation of
the memory module).
See also Chapter Test / Reset (Page 325).
A total of 1 "BU Inputs" function block is available in each case.

Schematic
The following schematic shows the "BU Inputs" function block:

Figure 8-2 Schematic of the "BU Inputs" function block

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 303
Inputs
8.2 Basic unit inputs

Application examples
You can wire the start and stop buttons of the local control station, for example, to the inputs.
These can then be assigned to the "Local control stations" function block.
If assigned accordingly, the input signals can also be used to activate function blocks such
as "Reset" or "External Fault".

Supply of the inputs

See Chapter Mounting basic units, expansion modules, and decoupling module (Page 450).

Settings

Table 8- 2 "Basic unit inputs" settings

Inputs Description
Delays You can set delays for the inputs, if required. Range: 6, 16, 26, 36 ms (default
setting: 16 ms)

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

304 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Inputs
8.3 Operator panel buttons

8.3 Operator panel buttons

Description
The operator panel contains buttons 1 to 4 as well as the "TEST/RESET" button.
Correspondingly, the "OP Buttons" function block is available in SIMOCODE pro with five
sockets.

Note
The "OP Buttons" function block can only be used if the operator panel (OP) is connected
and configured in the device configuration.

Note
The operator panel with display does not have a TEST/RESET button. The allocated
functions can be carried out via the operator panel menu or via softkeys. Similarly, the
corresponding status signal will then be available at the "OP TEST/RESET Button" socket.

● Operator panel, buttons 1 to 4: Buttons 1 to 4 are usually used to input control commands
for the motor feeder. Control commands can be, for example:
– Motor ON (ON >), Motor OFF (OFF) for a direct starter
– Motor LEFT (ON <), Motor OFF (OFF), Motor RIGHT (ON >) for a reversing starter
– Motor SLOW (ON>), Motor FAST (ON>>), Motor OFF (OFF) for a Dahlander circuit.
However, buttons 1 to 4 are not rigidly assigned to the above mentioned control commands,
and can be assigned to other functions via different internal connection of the respective
function block socket in SIMOCODE pro.
● "TEST/RESET" button, operator panel: The function of the "TEST/RESET" button is
generally assigned to fixed functions:
– Reset function for the acknowledgement of pending faults
– Test function for carrying out device tests.
– Operation of the memory module.
Nevertheless, the status of the "TEST/RESET" button can be picked off at the corresponding
socket of the function block and assigned to further functions in SIMOCODE pro.
See also Chapters Test / Reset (Page 325) , Setting IP parameters and PROFINET device
name (Page 499) and Backing up and saving parameters (Page 503).

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 305
Inputs
8.3 Operator panel buttons

Operator panel buttons

The following figure shows the front view of the operator panel and the buttons:

Figure 8-3 Operator panel buttons

Buttons on the operator panel with display

The following diagram shows the front view of the operator panel with display and the
buttons:

Figure 8-4 Buttons on the operator panel with display for SIMOCODE pro V

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

306 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Inputs
8.3 Operator panel buttons

Schematic
The following schematic shows the "OP buttons" function block:

Figure 8-5 Schematic of the "OP Buttons" function block

1) For menu-assisted operation on the operator panel with display

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 307
Inputs
8.4 Digital module inputs

8.4 Digital module inputs

Description
SIMOCODE pro has two "DM Inputs" function blocks, each with four binary inputs connected
to common potential. You can connect, for example, the buttons for a local control station to
the inputs. These signals can be further processed in SIMOCODE pro by internally
connecting the sockets of the "DM Inputs" function blocks.

Note
"DM Inputs" function blocks can only be used if the corresponding digital modules (DM) are
connected and configured in the device configuration!

Each "DM Inputs" function block consists of:

● Input terminals located on the outside of the digital module, corresponding to the
sockets "DM Input 1" to "DM Input 4"
● Sockets in SIMOCODE pro that can be connected to any plugs, e.g. to the "Control
Stations" function block
One function block "DM1 Inputs" and "DM2 Inputs" is provided in each case.

Schematic
The following schematic shows the "DM1/DM2 Inputs" function blocks:

Figure 8-6 Schematic of the "DM1 / DM2 Inputs" function blocks

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

308 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Inputs
8.4 Digital module inputs

The following schematic shows the "DM1 Inputs" function block as a DM-F Local fail-safe
digital module:

Figure 8-7 The following schematic shows the "DM1 Inputs" function block as DM-F Local fail-safe
digital module:

Table 8- 3 Inputs, "DM1 Inputs" function block as DM-F Local fail-safe digital module

Input Description
Input 1 - "tripped" state (connection of states sensor circuit 1 and sensor circuit 2)
Start Start input state (Y33)
Feedback Feedback circuit state (Y34): 1 - closed, 0 - open
Cascade Cascade input state (1)
Sensor 1 Sensor circuit 1 state (Y12)
Sensor 2 Sensor circuit 2 state (Y22)

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 309
Inputs
8.4 Digital module inputs

The following schematic shows the "DM1 Inputs" function block as DM-F PROFIsafe fail-safe
digital module:

Figure 8-8 The following schematic shows the "DM1 Inputs" function block as DM-F PROFIsafe fail-
safe digital module:

Table 8- 4 The following schematic shows the "DM1 Inputs" function block as DM-F PROFIsafe fail-
safe digital module

Input Description
input 1 IN1 (83) state
input 2 IN2 (85) state
input 3 IN3 (89) state
Feedback Feedback circuit state FBC (91):
1 - closed, 0 - open
Sensor 1 -
Sensor 2 -

Application examples
Digital modules allow the number of binary inputs and binary outputs on basic unit to be
increased in increments. In this way, SIMOCODE pro V PN can be expanded to a maximum
of twelve binary inputs and seven binary outputs. If assigned accordingly, the input signals
can be also used to activate, for example, function blocks such as "Reset" or "External
Fault". An external fault can be, for example, the binary signal of an external speed monitor,
signaling that the nominal speed of a motor has been undershot.

Supply of the inputs

See Chapter Expansion modules (Page 110).

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

310 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Inputs
8.4 Digital module inputs

Settings

Table 8- 5 "DM1 / DM2 Inputs" settings

Basic unit Description

Delay for inputs You can set delays for the inputs, if required.
Range: 6, 16, 26, 36 ms (default setting: 16 s).
These values apply to digital modules with a 24 V DC input supply. The values
are approximately 40 ms higher for digital modules with AC/DC input supplies of
110 to 240 V AC/DC.

Note
Delays for the digital module inputs can only be set, or are only relevant, if "monostable" or
"bistable" is set for digital module 1.
If digital module 1 is a DM-F PROFIsafe, the delay cannot be set.
If digital module 1 is a DM-F Local, the delays are set using the DIP switches at the front of
the DM-F Local.

Non-safety functions (fail-safe digital modules)

● If digital module 1 is a DM-F Local, the DM-F Local is a digital module with non-safety
inputs, relay outputs and diagnostics in a SIMOCODE pro system.
● If digital module 1 is a DM-F PROFIsafe, the DM-F PROFIsafe is a digital module with
non-safety inputs, relay outputs and diagnostics in a SIMOCODE pro system.
Detailed information on fail-safe digital modules: See Chapter Expansion modules
(Page 110).

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 311
Inputs
8.5 Temperature module inputs

8.5 Temperature module inputs

Description
SIMOCODE pro has two function blocks, "TM1 Inputs" and "TM2 Inputs," with three analog
sockets corresponding to the three sensor measuring circuits of the temperature modules.
The temperature (in K) of the three measuring circuits can be read from these sockets and
processed internally. An additional analog socket always supplies the maximum temperature
of all three measured temperatures. Furthermore, the two binary sockets of the function
blocks reflect the status of the sensor measuring circuits. The analog values can be
processed internally and/or transmitted cyclically to the automation system via the "Cyclic
Send" function blocks.

Note
The "TM1/TM2 Inputs" function blocks can only be used if the corresponding temperature
modules (TM1 and/or TM2) have been connected and configured in the device configuration!

Schematic
The following schematic shows the "TM1/2 Inputs" function blocks:

Figure 8-9 Schematic of the "TM1/2 Inputs" function blocks

Notes on wiring
You can connect up to three 2-wire or 3-wire temperature sensors to a temperature module.
For more information, see Chapter Wiring (Page 458).

Application examples
Among other things, you can monitor the following motor components:
● Motor windings
● Motor bearings
● Motor coolant temperature
● Motor gearbox oil temperature.
The individual temperatures of the three sensor measuring circuits can be monitored
independently of each other by connecting free limit monitors.

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

312 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Inputs
8.5 Temperature module inputs

Settings

Table 8- 6 Temperature module input settings

Temperature module Description

Sensor type PT100 (default), PT1000, KTY83, KTY84, NTC
Response 1) to sensor fault/out of range Deactivated, signaling, warning (default),, tripping
Number of active sensors 1 sensor, 2 sensors, 3 sensors (default)
1) see Table "Sensor fault / Out of range response"

Table 8- 7 "Sensor fault / Out of range" response

Response Sensor fault/Out of range

Deactivated X
Signaling X
Warning X (d)
Tripping X
Delay -

See also "Tables of responses of SIMOCODE pro" in Chapter Important information

(Page 17).

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 313
Inputs
8.6 Analog module inputs

8.6 Analog module inputs

Description
SIMOCODE pro has two function blocks, "AM1 Inputs" and "AM2 Inputs," with two analog
sockets each, corresponding to the two analog inputs of the analog module. The effective
analog value of each input can be read from these sockets and processed internally. An
additional binary socket of the function block represents the status of the analog measuring
circuits. The analog values can be processed internally and/or transmitted cyclically to the
automation system via the "Cyclic Send" function blocks.

Note
The "AM1/AM2 Inputs" function blocks can only be used if the corresponding analog
modules (AM1 and/or AM2) have been connected and configured in the device
configuration!

Schematic
The following schematic shows the "AM1/AM2 Inputs" function blocks:

Figure 8-10 Schematic of the "AM1/2 Inputs" function blocks

Application examples
Typical applications are:
● Fill-level monitoring for implementing dry running protection for pumps
● Monitoring of pollution in a filter using a differential pressure transducer.

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

314 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Inputs
8.6 Analog module inputs

Settings

Table 8- 8 Analog module input settings

Analog module Description

Input signal 0 to 20mA (default), 4 to 20 mA
Response to open circuit Signaling, warning (default), tripping
Active inputs 1 input (default), 2 inputs

Notes

Note
The value of the analog module inputs is in S7 format.

Note
The inputs of the analog module are passive inputs, i.e. to configure an analog input circuit,
each input will require an additional, isolated external current source connected in series. If
the output of the analog module is not being used by another application, it can also be used
as a current source for an analog module input circuit. The "Start value of value range" and
the "End value of value range" of the analog module output have to be set to 65535 for this.
Thus, the maximum possible current will always be available via the analog module output.

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 315
Inputs
8.7 Cyclic Receive

8.7 Cyclic Receive

Description
With the "Cyclic Receive" function block, you can specify which cyclic data from the
automation system will be further processed via PROFINET in SIMOCODE pro. These will
normally be PLC/PCS binary control commands. Connection with the "Control Stations"
function block in SIMOCODE pro will allow the motor to be controlled via PROFINET. Direct
connection of the analog value with the "AM Output" function block will result in, for example,
the cyclic output of the value sent via PROFINET at the output of the analog module.
The "Cyclic Receive" function blocks consist of:
● Eight bits each (= two bytes, byte 0 and byte 1 for binary information)
● Two words (= two bytes, bytes 2 and 3 and bytes 4 and 5 for one analog value each,
freely programmable).
Overall there are four "Cyclic Receive" function blocks (0, 1, 2/3, 4/5).

Schematic
The following schematic shows the "Cyclic Receive" function blocks:

Figure 8-11 Schematic of the "Cyclic Receive" function blocks

Cyclic services
The Cyclic Send data are exchanged between the IO Device (SIMOCODE pro) and the IO
Controller (automation system). The IO Controller sends the Cyclic Receive data to
SIMOCODE pro in each case. In response, SIMOCODE pro returns the Cyclic Send data.

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

316 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Inputs
8.8 OPC UA Receive

8.8 OPC UA Receive

Description
In addition to "Cyclic Receive," it is possible to transfer further data to SIMOCODE pro via
OPC-UA. With the "OPC UA Receive" function block, you can specify which information will
be further processed in SIMOCODE pro. For this, you only have to link the sockets of the
"OPC-UA Receive" function blocks to any other function blocks in SIMOCODE pro.
The "OPC-UA Receive" function blocks consist of:
● Eight bits each (= two bytes, byte 0 and byte 1 for binary information)
● One word (= two bytes, byte 2 to 3 for an analog value, freely parameterizable).
A total of three "OPC-UA Receive" function blocks (0, 1, 2/3) are provided.

Schematic
The following schematic shows the "OPC-UA Receive" function blocks:

Figure 8-12 Schematic of the "OPC-UA Receive" function blocks

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 317
Inputs
8.8 OPC UA Receive

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

318 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
Analog value recording 9
In this chapter
This chapter describes the tools provided by SIMOCODE pro V PN which allow you to
record the measured curves of different measured values, e.g. the motor current during
motor startup.
As the wear on the motor and the equipment driven by the motor increases, the motor
current curve will change. By recording the motor current at different points in time and
making direct comparisons, conclusions can be drawn regarding the condition of the motor
and the equipment.

Target groups
This chapter addresses the following target groups:
● Configuring engineers
● Programmers
● Commissioning engineers
● Service personnel

Required knowledge
You will require the following knowledge:
● SIMOCODE pro
● Motor protection, motor control
● The principle of connecting plugs to sockets
● Electrical drive engineering

Navigation in SIMOCODE ES
You will find the dialog boxes in SIMOCODE ES under Device Parameters → Analog Value
Recording.

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 319
Analog value recording
9.1 Description

9.1 Description
The "Analog Value Recording" function block can be used to record any analog values
(2 bytes/1 word) in SIMOCODE pro over a set period of time. For example, you can use this
function block to record the characteristic curve of the motor current during motor startup.
The recording is made directly in SIMOCODE pro, related to the motor feeder, and
independently of PROFINET or the automation system. Every analog value present at the
"Allocated analog value" analog socket is recorded and saved. Recording starts on the basis
of the edge (positive / negative) via any binary signal at the trigger input of the function block.
Up to 60 values can be saved internally in the device. The time frame of the recording is
indirectly determined by the selected sampling rate:
Sampling time = sampling rate [s] * 60 values
The pre-trigger can be used to specify how far in advance the recording should commence
before the trigger signal is issued. The pre-trigger is set as a percentage of the entire
sampling time. In addition, with SIMOCODE ES you can also export the measured curve into
a *.csv file for further processing, for example, in MS Excel.

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

320 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Analog value recording
9.2 Functional principle

9.2 Functional principle

Measured curve

Figure 9-1 Functional principle of analog value recording

The old measured curve will be overwritten in SIMOCODE pro each time a new trigger signal
is sent to the trigger input.

Schematic
The following schematic shows the "Analog Value Recording" function block:

Figure 9-2 Schematic of the "Analog Value Recording" function block

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 321
Analog value recording
9.2 Functional principle

Settings

Table 9- 1 "Analog value recording" settings

Signal/value Range
Trigger input Activate analog value recording with any signal (any sockets ,
e.g. device inputs, current flowing)
Allocated analog value Any value (1 word / 2 bytes) in SIMOCODE pro
Trigger edge positive (default) / negative
Sampling rate 0.1 to 50 s, in steps of 0.1 s (default setting: 0.1 s)
Pre-trigger 0 to 100 % in steps of 5 % (default setting: 0 %)

Application example
Record the motor current when the motor starts / sampling time = 12 s / pre-trigger = 25 %
(3 s):

Figure 9-3 Application example of the analog value recording

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

322 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
Standard functions 10
In this chapter
In this chapter you will find information about the standard functions stored as function
blocks in SIMOCODE pro. Standard functions are typical motor functions that can be
activated according to need and, as applicable, individually set for each motor feeder.

Target groups
This chapter addresses the following target groups:
● Configuring engineers
● Programmers of application programs for reference purposes

Required knowledge
You will require the following knowledge:
● The principle of connecting plugs to sockets
● Motor protection
● Control functions, control stations

Navigation in SIMOCODE ES
You will find the dialog boxes in SIMOCODE ES under "Standard Functions."

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 323
Standard functions
10.1 Introduction

10.1 Introduction

Description
So-called "Standard functions" in the form of function blocks are also stored in
SIMOCODE pro, and can be used as required. These function blocks may contain:
● Plugs ( )
● Sockets ( ) in the form of status information
● Setting values, e.g. the response when an external fault occurs ("Signaling", "Warning,"
or "Tripping").

Schematic
The following schematic shows the general representation of the function block of a standard
function:

Figure 10-1 General representation of the function block of a standard function

Scope and application

These function blocks work independently of the selected control function and can be used
as optional supplements. They are ready to use and only require activating by connecting
the plug(s) of the respective function block. Depending on the device series, the system
offers several different function blocks for such standard functions.

Standard function block SIMOCODE pro V PN

Test 2
Reset 3
Test position feedback (TPF) 1
External fault 6
Operational Protection OFF (OPO) 1
Power failure monitoring (UVO) 1
Emergency start 1
Watchdog (PLC / PCS monitoring) 1
Safe tripping 1

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

324 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Standard functions
10.2 Test / Reset

10.2 Test / Reset

TEST/RESET description
The function of the "TEST/RESET" button on the basic unit or operator panel is generally
dependent upon the operating state of the device:
● Reset function: If a fault occurs
● Test function: In other operating states
In addition to the TEST/RESET buttons, SIMOCODE pro allows internal TEST/RESET
tripping via the "Test" function blocks. The "Test" function block consists of one plug.
A total of two function blocks, "Test 1" and "Test 2," are provided, each function block having
a slightly different function:
● Test 1: Tests / trips the output relays
● Test 2: Does not trip the output relays (normally for testing via the bus).

Schematic
The following schematic shows a general representation of the "Test / Reset" function
blocks:

Figure 10-2 "Test / Reset" function blocks

1) The operator panel with display does not have a "TEST/RESET" button. The respective
functions can be carried out via the operator panel menu or via softkeys.

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 325
Standard functions
10.2 Test / Reset

Testing
Testing can be carried out as follows:
● Via the "TEST/RESET" button on the basic unit and on the operator panel (can be
deactivated), as well as via PC with SIMOCODE ES software.
● Via the plugs of the internal "Test 1" or "Test 2" function blocks
● Via the menu of the operator panel with display (e.g. the "Commands" menu item).
Testing can be terminated at any time - it does not influence the thermal motor model of the
overload function, i.e. after tripping via test, the system can be reset immediately. Tripping
only occurs for the "Test 1" function block when the operating mode is set to "Remote".

Reset function
Resetting can be carried out as follows:
● Via the "TEST/RESET" button on the basic unit and on the operator panel (can be
deactivated), as well as via PC with SIMOCODE ES software.
● Using the "Reset input" plug of the internal function blocks via the plugs of the internal
function blocks "Reset 1", "Reset 2" and "Reset 3".
● Via the menu of the operator panel with display (e.g. the "Commands" menu item).
The "Reset" function block consists of one plug.
There are three function blocks "Reset 1" to "Reset 3."
All reset inputs (sockets) are equal (OR function).

Test function
A SIMOCODE pro function test can also be initialized via the test function. The test function
comprises the following steps:
● Lamp / LED test (test function activated for < 2 s)
● Test of the device functionality (test function activated for 2 to 5s)
● For "Test 1" function block only: Switching off the QE (test function activated for > 5 s).

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

326 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Standard functions
10.2 Test / Reset

Test phases
The following table shows the test phases performed when the "TEST/RESET" button is
pressed for the required length of time:

Table 10- 1 States of the status LEDs / contactor controls during testing

Test phase State Without main current With main current

OK Fault1) OK Fault
Hardware test / lamp test
<2s "DEVICE" LED orange green orange green
"GEN. FAULT" LED
Contactor control Unchanged Unchanged Unchanged Unchanged
Show QL
Results of the hardware test / lamp test
2-5s "DEVICE" LED green red green red
"GEN. FAULT" LED
Contactor control Unchanged Deactivated Unchanged Deactivated
Relay test
>5s "DEVICE" LED green red green red
"GEN. FAULT" LED
Contactor control Deactivated Deactivated Deactivated Deactivated
LED lit/switched on LED flashing LED flickering LED off
1) "Fault" only displayed after 2 s

Test settings

Table 10- 2 Test settings

Test 1 to 2 Description
Input Activation of the "Test" function block by any signal (any sockets , e.g.
device inputs, PROFINET control bits, etc.).
TEST/RESET keys disabled The blue TEST/RESET buttons on the basic unit and the operator panel are
usually intended for acknowledging faults and for performing a device test.
The buttons can be disabled with "TEST/RESET keys disabled". These can then
be used for other purposes. On the operator panel with display, blocking is
carried out via the corresponding menu function. (Default: Unblocked)

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 327
Standard functions
10.2 Test / Reset

Acknowledgment of faults
Generally, the following applies to the acknowledgement of faults:
● Faults can only be acknowledged
– if the cause of the fault has been eliminated
– if there is no "ON" control command pending.
● A reset will not be possible if the cause of the fault has not been eliminated and/or if an
"ON" control command is pending. The reset will be saved depending on the type of fault.
Saving a reset is indicated by the "GEN. FAULT" LED on the basic unit and on the control
panel. The LED changes from flashing to continuous signal.

Automatic acknowledgement of faults

Faults are automatically acknowledged in the following cases:
● A reset has been saved and the cause of the fault is no longer present (user has
previously acknowledged the fault)
● Auto reset of an overload trip or thermistor trip if motor protection reset = Auto (an
automatic acknowledgment is issued here after expiry of the cooling down period). The
motor cannot start immediately since reset cannot be performed when an ON command
is pending.
● If a configured module fails, all related faults will be acknowledged automatically.
However, a configuration fault will be generated (exception: operator panel, if
parameterized accordingly). This ensures that a module fault does not cause the general
fault to be acknowledged automatically.
● If a function or module is deactivated in the device configuration (via parameterization), all
related faults are acknowledged automatically. The motor cannot start immediately since
parameters cannot be entered if an ON command is pending.
● If a parameter of a function is changed from "Tripping" to "Warning", or to "Signaling" or
"Deactivated", all related faults will be acknowledged automatically.
● For an external fault: With its own parameter: "Auto-Reset."

Reset settings

Table 10- 3 Reset settings

Reset 1 to 3 Description
Input Activation of the "Reset" function block by any signal (any sockets , e.g.
device inputs, PROFINET control bits, etc.).
Test / Reset keys disabled The blue TEST/RESET buttons on the basic unit and the operator panel are
usually intended for acknowledging faults and for performing a device test.
The buttons can be disabled with "TEST/RESET keys disabled." These can then
be used for other purposes. On the operator panel with display, the keys are
disabled via the corresponding menu function (default setting: not disabled).

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

328 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Standard functions
10.3 Test position feedback (TPF)

10.3 Test position feedback (TPF)

Description
You can carry out the "Cold run" function test using the "Test Position Feedback (TPF)"
function block. For this purpose, the function block input (plug) must be connected to the
respective socket. The activated test position will be indicated by the flashing QL of the
control function.
The "Test Position Feedback (TPF)" function block consists of
● 1 plug
● 1 "Status - test position" socket. It is set if a signal is pending at the input.
● 1 "Fault - test position feedback error" socket. It is set if
– "TPF" is activated although current is flowing in the main circuit
– "TPF" is activated and current is flowing in the main circuit.
In total, 1 "Feedback test position" function block is available.

Note
When the test position is enabled, the QLE / QLA sockets of the control function are
activated, to indicate test operation of the motor feeder via a flashing button LED, for
example.

Schematic
The following schematic shows the "Test Position Feedback" function block:

Figure 10-3 "Test Position Feedback" function block

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 329
Standard functions
10.3 Test position feedback (TPF)

Cold run
If the motor feeder is in the test position, its main circuit is isolated from the network.
However, the control voltage is connected.
The "cold run" function test is performed with the feeder in this state. This means the motor
feeder is tested without a current in the main circuit.
To enable this function to be differentiated from normal operation, it must be activated via the
socket on the function block.
The feedback that the motor feeder is disconnected from the line voltage on the primary
current side can be made, for example, via an auxiliary contact of the main switch in the
motor feeder, wired to any device input (terminal). This is then internally connected to the
"Test position feedback (TPF) - Input" plug of the function block. When using
current / voltage measuring modules, this type of auxiliary contact is entirely unnecessary.
The "TPF" function block can be activated by monitoring for undervoltage ("Voltage
Monitoring" function block).
Thereafter, the contactor outputs can be set via the control stations (see Chapter Control
stations (Page 176)), enabling the current-free status to be tested.
If current flows erroneously during test operation, the contactor outputs are switched off by
"Trip - Test position feedback".

"Fault - Test Position Feedback (TPF)" fault message and acknowledgement

Note
"Trip - Test position feedback (TPF)" will be generated if:
• "TPF" is activated, although current is flowing in the motor feeder
• "TPF" is activated and current is flowing in the motor feeder.

Acknowledge with "Reset."

Settings

Table 10- 4 Test position feedback (TPF) settings

Test position feedback (TPF) Description

Input Activation of the "Test position feedback (TPF)" function block by any
signal (any sockets , e.g. device input)
Type Specification of the input logic:
• NO contact (1-active) (default)
• NC contact (0-active)

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

330 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Standard functions
10.4 External fault

10.4 External fault

Description
The "External Fault 1 to 6" function blocks can be used to monitor any statuses and/or
external devices, to generate fault messages and, if necessary, to switch off the motor. To
do this, the inputs (plugs) of the "External Fault" function blocks must be connected to any
sockets (e.g. device inputs, PROFINET control bits, etc.). External faults can also be
"marked" in SIMOCODE pro. This facilitates their allocation to the actual malfunction.
Example: monitoring the rotational speed of the motor using an external speed monitor.
The "External Fault" function block consists of:
● 2 plugs (1 plug for setting, 1 plug for resetting)
● 1 "Event - External fault" socket. It is set if a signal is pending at the input.
The following are available:
● 6 "External Faults 1 to 6" function blocks on the SIMOCODE pro V basic unit.

Schematic
The following schematic shows the "External Fault" function blocks:

Figure 10-4 "External Fault" function blocks

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 331
Standard functions
10.4 External fault

Special reset options:

A specific reset input is also available in addition to the other reset options (remote reset,
TEST/RESET buttons, OFF command reset). Furthermore, Auto-Reset can also be
activated. See table below.

Settings

Table 10- 5 Settings for "External fault"

External fault 1 to 6 Description

Input Activation of the "External Fault" function block by the monitored signal (any sockets ,
e.g. device inputs, PROFINET control bits, etc.)
Type Specification of the input logic:
• NO contact (1-active) (default)
• NC contact (0-active)
Activity Specify in which motor operating state the external fault is to be evaluated:
• Always (default): Always evaluate, regardless of whether the motor is running or at a
standstill
• Only if motor is ON: Evaluation only if motor is switched ON.
Response Specify the response to an external fault when activated via the input (see the following table
and Chapter Important information (Page 17)).
Reset Acknowledge the "External fault" fault via any signal (any sockets , e.g. device inputs,
PROFINET control bits, etc.)
Reset also by Specification of further (common) acknowledgement options using additional reset types:
• Test/Reset buttons on the basic unit and the operator panel or, in the case of the operator
panel with display, via the menu (panel reset) (default)
• Remote reset: Acknowledgment via reset 1 to 3, DPV1, "Reset" command (default)
• Auto reset: The fault resets itself after the cause has been eliminated (after removal of the
activation signal).
• OFF command reset: "OFF" control command, resets the fault
Marking 1) No parameter. Optional marking for designating the event, e.g. "Rotational speed ", e.g. with
SIMOCODE ES. Range: maximum 10 characters.

1)

Note
Changing the marking
Each change to the marking requires that the communication interface be restarted when the
web server is active. A new start interrupts all Ethernet and PROFINET links and
reestablishes them afterward.

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

332 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Standard functions
10.4 External fault

"External fault" response

Table 10- 6 "External fault" response

Response External fault

Tripping X
Warning X
Signaling X (d)
Deactivated -

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 333
Standard functions
10.5 Operational protection off (OPO)

10.5 Operational protection off (OPO)

10.5.1 Response to positioner control function

Description
The "Operational Protection Off (OPO)" function block returns the positioner to a safe
position. To do this, the input (plug) must be connected to an appropriate socket (e.g. device
inputs, PROFINET control bits, etc.).
The "Operational Protection OFF" function block consists of
● one plug
● one "Status - OPO" socket. It is set if a signal is pending at the input.
● one "Fault - OPO Fault" socket. It is set when the respective, safe end position has been
reached.
There is 1 "Operational Protection OFF (OPO)" function block for the SIMOCODE pro V PN
basic unit.
The following table shows the basic operating principle:

Table 10- 7 Basic operating principle of Operational Protection OFF(OPO) for the "Positioner" control function

OPO Initial position when OPO is pending

Positioner is open Positioner opens Positioner Positioner closes Positioner is
stop / OFF closed
Reaction to OPO
Parameterized Fault reset: With Fault reset: With Fault reset: With — —
response Close command Close command Close command
"Positioner closes"
Positioner closes Positioner closes Positioner closes Positioner closes
Parameterized — — Fault Reset: With Fault Reset: With Fault Reset: With
"Positioner opens" open command open command open command
response
Positioner opens Positioner opens Positioner opens Positioner opens

Schematic
The following schematic shows the "Operational Protection OFF (OPO)" function block:

Figure 10-5 "Operational Protection OFF (OPO)" function block

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

334 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Standard functions
10.5 Operational protection off (OPO)

Settings

Table 10- 8 Operational Protection OFF settings

Operational Protection Description

OFF (OPO)
Input Activation of the "Operational Protection OFF" function block by the monitored signal (any sockets
, e.g. device inputs, etc.)
Positioner response Specification of the response for the "Positioner" control function when activated via the input:
• CLOSED: Positioner runs to the end position in the "closed" direction (default).
• OPEN: Positioner moves to the "Open" end position.
Type Specification of the input logic:
• NO contact (1-active) (default)
• NC contact (0-active)

Safety information

Note
A "Fault - Operational Protection OFF (OPO)" fault message is not generated if the "OPO"
command attempts to run the positioner to the end position if it is approaching or has already
reached this end position.

Note
No other control command (counter command or stop command) is performed while
"Operational Protection OFF (OPO)" is active.

Note
The "Fault - Operational Protection OFF (OPO)" fault message must be acknowledged by
the OPEN or CLOSED control command, depending on the present "OPO" end position.

Note
Acknowledgment is performed even if the desired end position has not yet been reached.

Note
The fault message is available as diagnosis via PROFINET.

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 335
Standard functions
10.5 Operational protection off (OPO)

10.5.2 Response to other control functions

Description
For other control functions, the following scenarios can be differentiated between for OPO:
● Motor in operation: The motor is switched off with a "Trip - Operational Protection OFF
(OPO)" fault.
● The motor is off. Initially no fault. "Fault - Operational protection OFF (OPO)" only occurs
when an "ON command" is issued.

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

336 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Standard functions
10.6 Power failure monitoring (UVO)

10.6 Power failure monitoring (UVO)

Description
The "Power Failure Monitoring (UVO)" function block is activated via the plug. This is carried
out via an external voltage relay that is connected to the function block via the binary inputs
of SIMOCODE pro.
Sequence (see timing charts below):
1. All contactors (QE) are disconnected immediately after the monitoring relay has been
operated/the input has been activated (UVO).
2. If the voltage is restored within the "power failure time", the motor will be reset to its
previous state. This can either take place immediately or with a time delay (restart time
delay).
3. If the "power failure time" elapses before the voltage returns, the device signals a fault
(UVO fault).
Prerequisite: The SIMOCODE pro control voltage is buffered and not interrupted.

Schematic
The following schematic shows the "Power Failure Monitoring (UVO)" function block:

Figure 10-6 "Power Failure Monitoring (UVO)" function block

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 337
Standard functions
10.6 Power failure monitoring (UVO)

Figure 10-7 Power failure monitoring (UVO) sequence charts

Settings

Table 10- 9 Power failure monitoring settings

Power failure monitoring Description

(UVO)
Input Activation of the "Power Failure Monitoring (UVO)" function block by the monitored signal
(any sockets , e.g. device inputs, PROFINET control bits, etc.)
Type Specification of the type of power failure monitoring:
• Deactivated (default setting)
• No interruption of device power supply. The SIMOCODE pro control supply voltage is
maintained. The failure of the line voltage must be detected, for example, by a separate
voltage relay.
Power failure time Time that starts when the power fails. If the line voltage is restored within the power failure
time, all drives which were running prior to the power failure are reconnected automatically.
If the line voltage is not restored within the power failure time, the drives remain
disconnected and the "Fault - Power failure (UVO)" message is generated. Once the line
voltage has been restored, this fault message can be acknowledged using "Reset".
Range:
• 0 to 25.5 s, in steps of 0.1 s
• 26 to 255 s, in steps of 1 s
• 256 to 2550 s, in steps of 10 s.
Restart time delay The restart time delay can be set so that not all motors restart simultaneously. (The line
voltage would otherwise dip again).
Range: 0 to 255 s (default setting: 0).

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

338 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Standard functions
10.7 Emergency start

10.7 Emergency start

Description
Emergency start deletes the thermal memory from SIMOCODE pro each time it is activated.
This allows the motor to be immediately restarted after an overload trip. This function can be
used to:
● Enable an immediate reset and restart after an overload trip
● Delete the thermal memory (motor model) during operation, if required.

NOTICE
Do not perform an emergency start more often than absolutely necessary!
If emergency starts are performed too frequently this may result in thermal overloading of
the motor!

Since the emergency start is "edge-triggered", this function cannot permanently affect the
thermal motor model. An emergency start is carried out as follows:
● Using the plug of the function block. To do this, the input (plug) of the function block must
be connected to any socket (e.g. device inputs, PROFINET control bits, etc.).
The "Emergency Start" function block consists of:
● one plug
● one "Status - emergency start executed" socket. It is set when an emergency start has
been executed.
There is 1 "Emergency Start" function block.

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 339
Standard functions
10.7 Emergency start

Schematic
The following schematic shows the "Emergency start" function block:

Figure 10-8 Emergency Start function block

Settings

Table 10- 10 Emergency start settings

Emergency start Description

Input Activation of the "Emergency Start" function block by any signal (any
sockets , e.g. device inputs, PROFINET control bits, etc.).

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

340 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Standard functions
10.8 Safety-oriented tripping

10.8 Safety-oriented tripping

Description

Note
Please note that the information made available for further processing is in the form of non-
safety-related signals.

Note
Please note that the "Safe Tripping" function block does not itself represent a safety-related
function.
The safety function of the DM-F Local is determined exclusively by the setting of the DIP
switches on the module.
The safety function of the DM-F PROFIsafe is determined by the fail-safe program in the F-
CPU.

Further information: See Manual Fail-safe Digital Modules SIMOCODE pro Safety
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/50564852).
The "DM-F Local Safe Tripping" function block consists of 3 sockets:
● Event - DM-F LOCAL ok: The DM-F LOCAL is ON.
● Event - Safe tripping: A safety-related tripping has been carried out.
● Status - Enabling circuit closed: The enabling circuit is closed.
The "DM-F PROFIsafe Safe Tripping" function block consists of 3 sockets:
● Event - PROFIsafe active: Fail-safe communication between the F-CPU and the DM-
F PROFIsafe is active.
● Event - Safe tripping: A safety-related tripping has been carried out.
● Status - Enabling circuit closed: The enabling circuit is closed.
1 "Safe Tripping" function block is available in each case for SAFETY (Local) and
PROFIsafe.

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 341
Standard functions
10.8 Safety-oriented tripping

Schematic
The following schematic shows the "Safe Tripping" function block:

Figure 10-9 "Safe Tripping" function block

SET / RESET button on DM-F Local

Figure 10-10 SET / RESET button

See Manual Fail-safe Digital Modules SIMOCODE pro Safety

(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/50564852).

DANGER
Automatic starting after power failure. Risk of death or serious injury.
In the case of automatic starting after a power failure, the enabling circuits are connected
without pressing the Start button.

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

342 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Standard functions
10.8 Safety-oriented tripping

Settings of the DIP switches (DM-F Local)

Table 10- 11 Settings of the DIP switches (DM-F Local)

Switch position OFF / ON

1 With /without cross-circuit detection
2 1 NC + 1 NO evaluation / 2 NC evaluation
3 2x 1-channel / 1x 2-channel
4 Delay for sensor inputs 50 ms / 10 ms
5 Sensor input automatic start / monitored start
6 Cascading input automatic start / monitored start
7 With / without startup testing
8 With automatic starting / without automatic starting after
power failure

Note
The target setting of the DIP switches in the SIMOCODE ES user interface (can be made
using the mouse pointer) is transferred to the basic unit on download but does not affect the
function of the DM-F Local digital module. The desired function is thus saved as soon as the
parameterization has been created.
You must set the effective parameterization via the DIP switches on the front of the
DM-F Local (see tables below and / or the manual "Fail-safe digital modules
SIMOCODE pro Safety"). The basic unit compares the target setting (from the download)
with the actual setting on the DM-F Local. If these differ "Configuration deviation" is output!

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 343
Standard functions
10.8 Safety-oriented tripping

Settings of the DIP switches (DM-F Local)

Table 10- 12 Description of the settings of the DIP switches on the DM-F Local

DIP switches (DM-F Local) Description

With/without cross-circuit detection Cross-circuit detection is only possible with floating sensors. The sensors must be
connected between T1 - Y12, Y33 and T2 - Y22, Y34. The device anticipates the T1
terminal test signal at the terminals Y12 and Y33, and the T2 terminal test signal at
the terminals Y22 and Y34. The device detects a sensor fault if the signal at the Y12,
Y33 or the Y22, Y34 terminals is not identical to the test signals T1, T2. Cross-circuit
detection must be deactivated if electronic sensors such as light arrays or laser
scanners are connected. In this case, the DM-F LOCAL no longer monitors the
sensor inputs for cross-circuits. Usually, the outputs of safety sensors (OSSD) are
already monitored for cross-circuits in the sensor.
If "Without cross-circuit detection" is set on the device, the test outputs T1, T2 are
deactivated and may no longer be connected. At the Y12, Y22, Y33, and Y34 inputs,
the DM-F LOCAL expects a +24 V DC signal from the same current source as the
one from which the device receives its power supply (possible only in the case of
DM-F LOCAL-1AB00) or from T3 (static +24 V DC). In the case of the DM-F LOCAL-
1AU00 device version, it is imperative to connect the T3 terminal to the floating
sensor contacts due to the electrical isolation between the input circuit and the
sensor power supply.
1 NC + 1 NO evaluation / 2 NC In addition to 2-channel connection of the same types of sensor contacts (NC / NC),
evaluation sensors with opposite types of contacts (NC / NO), as are frequently used for
magnetically-operated switches, can also be evaluated. Make sure that the NC
contact is connected to Y12 and the NO contact to Y22.
2x 1-channel / 1x 2-channel • 2 sensors with one contact each (2x 1-channel) (NC / NC). It is expected that
both sensors are AND-connected. Simultaneity is not monitored.
• 1 sensor with two contacts each (1x 2-channel) (NC / NC). The system expects
both contacts to be simultaneously open.
Delay for sensor inputs Any change in the sensor signal during the delay is not evaluated.
50 ms / 10 ms
• Delay 50 ms: Changes in the switch position of strongly bouncing contacts are
suppressed (e.g. position switches on heavy protective doors).
• Delay 10 ms: The shorter delay permits faster tripping in the case of bounce-free
sensors (e.g. light arrays).
Sensor input automatic start / • Autostart: The enabling circuits are switched to the operative position as soon as
monitored start the starting condition at sensor inputs Y12, Y22, Y34 and terminal 1 has been
fulfilled. The start button connection terminal Y33 is not queried.
• Monitored start: The enabling circuits are switched to the operative position, as
soon as the starting condition at sensor inputs Y12, Y22, Y34 and terminal 1 has
been fulfilled and the start button at terminal Y33 has subsequently been actuated
(start with the falling edge).
Cascading input automatic start / Autostart: The enabling circuits are switched to the active position as soon as the
monitored start starting condition at cascading input 1 has been fulfilled, i.e. as soon as a static
+24 V DC signal is present (e.g. from T3).
Monitored start: The enabling circuits are switched to the operative position as soon
as the starting condition at cascading input 1 has been fulfilled, i.e. as soon as a
static +24 V DC signal is present (e.g. from T3), and the start button at terminal Y33
has subsequently been actuated (start with the falling edge).

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

344 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Standard functions
10.8 Safety-oriented tripping

DIP switches (DM-F Local) Description

With / without startup testing After a power failure, start-up testing requires that the sensors at Y12 and Y22 are
actuated once by the system operator.
With automatic starting / without The DM-F Local can be parameterized in such a way that the enabling circuits
automatic starting after power automatically switch to the operative position after a power failure, i.e. without
failure actuation of the start button Y33.
Requirements:
• Y12, Y22 or the cascade input 1 are set to "monitored start".
• The starting condition at the sensor inputs and at the cascade input has been
fulfilled.
• Valid actuation of the start button prior to the power failure, i.e. the enabling
circuits were in the operative position.

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 345
Standard functions
10.8 Safety-oriented tripping

Settings of the DIP switches, DM-F PROFIsafe

Before commissioning the DM-F PROFIsafe, set the PROFIsafe address as follows:

Table 10- 13 DIP switch settings (DM-F PROFIsafe)

Switch position Value

1 = 20 1
2 = 21 2
3= 22 4
4 = 23 8
5= 24 16
6= 25 32
7 = 26 64
8= 27 128
9 = 28 256
10 = 29 512

If 1 DIP switch is at ON, the respective value is active.

If more than 1 DIP switch is at ON, the respective values must be added.
● Briefly press the "SET/RESET" button. LEDs 1 to 10 indicate the current PROFIsafe
address.
● Setting the PROFIsafe address:
– Switch off the supply voltage
– Set the DIP switch configuration
– Switch on the supply voltage again.

Figure 10-11 "SET/RESET" button

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

346 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Standard functions
10.8 Safety-oriented tripping

"Safe tripping" response

Here, you set the SIMOCODE pro response to safety-related tripping via DM-F Local or DM-
F PROFIsafe.

Note
The response of the modules is not influenced by this setting.
If the conditions for safety-related tripping are met, the enable circuits are always disabled.

Table 10- 14 "Safe tripping" response

Response Safe tripping

Tripping X
Deactivated X (d)
Signaling X
Warning X

Note
In the event that the option "DM-F LOCAL / Separate PROFIsafe function from control
function" has been activated under "Motor control > Control function > Operating mode," only
"Deactivated," "Signaling" or "Warning" can be set as the response, not "Tripping."

"Safe tripping" reset

Here, you can select manual or automatic acknowledgment of SIMOCODE pro faults caused
by safety-related tripping: Manual (default), Auto.

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 347
Standard functions
10.9 Watchdog (Bus monitoring, PLC/PCS monitoring)

10.9 Watchdog (Bus monitoring, PLC/PCS monitoring)

Description
The "Watchdog" function block monitors communication with the PLC via PROFINET, as
well as the operating state of the PLC in the "Remote" operating mode.

Schematic
Bus monitoring: With this type of monitoring, the "Fault - bus" fault is generated if
● "Bus monitoring" is active.
● The cyclic data transfer between the PLC and SIMOCODE pro is interrupted in the
"Remote" operating mode (mode selector S1 = 1 and S2 = 1), , e.g. by the PROFINET
connection being interrupted.
"Status - Bus o.k." can always be evaluated. If SIMOCODE pro is cyclically exchanging data
with the PLC, "Status - Bus o.k." is set to "1."
PLC / PCS monitoring:With this type of monitoring, the "Fault - PLC/PCS" message is
generated if
● "PLC / PCS monitoring" is active.
● The PROFINET switches to the "Hold/Stop" status when in the "Remote" operating mode
(mode selector S1=1 and S2=1).
The "Status - PLC / PCS in Run" can always be evaluated. If the PROFINET is in the
"Hold/Stop" state, the "Status - PLC / PCS in Run" is set to"0."
If the "PLC / PCS monitoring - Input" is connected primarily to the "Cyclic Receive - Bit 0.7"
bit, the status of the PLC is deduced from this bit only.

Figure 10-12 "Watchdog (PLC/PCS Monitoring)" function block

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

348 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Standard functions
10.9 Watchdog (Bus monitoring, PLC/PCS monitoring)

Settings

Table 10- 15 Watchdog settings

Watchdog - Description
PLC / PCS monitoring - Input Activates the "Watchdog" function block using the
monitored signal (any sockets , e.g. PROFINET
control bits, etc.)
Bus monitoring • Deactivated (default setting). If a bus fault occurs, the
"Fault - Bus" fault message is generated and must be
acknowledged.
• Deactivated: No fault message; however, the "Status -
Bus ok" information can be evaluated at any time.
PLC / PCS monitoring • Deactivated (default setting). If a bus fault occurs, the
"Fault - PLC / PCS" fault message is generated and
must be acknowledged.
• Deactivated: No fault message
Bus / PLC fault - Reset You can select whether faults are to be acknowledged
automatically or manually.
Range: Manual / Auto

"Bus fault" / "PLC / PCS fault" response

Table 10- 16 "Bus fault" / "PLC / PCS fault" response

Response Bus fault PLC / PCS fault

Fault X (d) X (d)
Warning - -
Event - -
Deactivated X X

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 349
Standard functions
10.9 Watchdog (Bus monitoring, PLC/PCS monitoring)

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

350 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
Logic modules 11
In this chapter
In this chapter you will find information about SIMOCODE pro logic modules. Logic modules
are function blocks which are modeled not only on standard logic functions, e.g. truth tables
(AND, OR,...), but also on counters and timers. In addition to the predefined control
functions, you can use this, for example, to implement logical functions, time relay functions
and counter functions without depending on external components (relays).

Target groups
This chapter addresses the following target groups:
● Configuring engineers
● Programmers

Required knowledge
You will require the following knowledge:
● The principle of connecting plugs to sockets
● The basic principles of digital signal processing, e.g. timers, counters, etc.

Navigation in SIMOCODE ES
You will find the dialog boxes in SIMOCODE ES under "Further Function Blocks → Logic
Modules".

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 351
Logic modules
11.1 Introduction

11.1 Introduction

Description
Freely programmable logic modules are function blocks that process input signals and
supply binary or analog output signals according to their internal logic components. Logic
modules can contain:
● Plugs
● An internal logic component
● Sockets
● Settings, e.g. the time for a timer.

Schematic
The following schematic shows a general representation of a logic module:

Figure 11-1 General representation of a logic module

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

352 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Logic modules
11.1 Introduction

Scope and application

You can use the logic modules to carry out additional functions for your application. These
can be used, for example, to implement logical operations, time relay functions and counter
functions. Depending on the device series, the system provides several logic modules:

Table 11- 1 Freely programmable logic modules

Logic module SIMOCODE pro V PN

Number
Truth tables 3 inputs /1 output 8
Truth table 2 inputs /1 output 2
Truth tables 5 inputs / 2 outputs 1
Timer 6
Counter 6
Signal conditioners 6
Non-volatile elements 4
Flashing 3
Flicker 3
Limit monitor 6
Calculation modules (calculators) 4
Analog multiplexer 1
Pulse width modulator 1

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 353
Logic modules
11.2 Truth table for 3I / 1O

11.2 Truth table for 3I / 1O

Description
The truth table 3I / 1O consists of
● Three plugs
● One logic component
● One socket.
You can choose which of the eight possible input conditions an output signal should be
generated for.
There are 8 truth tables 1 through 11 on the SIMOCODE pro V PN basic unit.

Schematic
The following schematic shows the "Truth Table for 3I / 1O" logic modules:

Figure 11-2 "Truth Table for 3I / 1O" logic modules

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

354 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Logic modules
11.2 Truth table for 3I / 1O

Example
You want to implement the following circuit:

Figure 11-3 Example of a truth table

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 355
Logic modules
11.2 Truth table for 3I / 1O

Circuit and parameterization

Figure 11-4 Example circuit and parameterization for "truth table 3I / 1O"

Settings

Table 11- 2 Settings for "truth table 3I / 1O"

Truth table 1 to 11 (3I / 1O) Description

Inputs 1 to 3 Activation of the truth table by any signal (any sockets , e.g.
device inputs, PROFINET control bits, etc.).

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

356 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Logic modules
11.3 Truth table for 2I / 1O

11.3 Truth table for 2I / 1O

Description
The truth table for 2I / 1O consists of:
● Two plugs
● One logic component
● One socket.
You can choose which of the four possible input conditions an output signal should be
generated for.
There are a total of 2 truth tables (7 and 8) on the SIMOCODE pro V PN basic unit.

Schematic
The following schematic shows the "Truth Table for 2I / 1O" logic modules:

Figure 11-5 "Truth Table for 2I / 1O" logic modules

Example
You want to implement the following circuit:

Figure 11-6 Example of "truth table 2I / 1O"

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 357
Logic modules
11.4 Truth table for 5I / 2O

11.4 Truth table for 5I / 2O

Description
The truth table for 5I / 2O consists of:
● Five plugs
● One logic component
● Two sockets.
You can choose for which of the 32 possible input conditions a maximum of two output
signals should be generated.
There is 1 truth table (No. 9) on the SIMOCODE pro V PN basic unit.

Schematic
The following schematic shows the "Truth Table for 5I / 2O" logic modules:

Figure 11-7 "Truth Table for 5I / 2O" logic modules

Settings

Table 11- 3 "Truth Table for 5I / 2O" settings

Truth table 9 (5I / 2O) Description

Input 1 to 5 Activation by any signal (any sockets , e.g., device inputs,
control bits from PROFINET, etc.).

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

358 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Logic modules
11.5 Counter

11.5 Counter

Description
Counters are integrated in the SIMOCODE pro system. These are activated via the plugs "+"
or "-". The counter output switches to "1" when the preset limit is reached. The counter is
reset with "Reset". The current actual value is available as a socket for further internal
processing and can also be transmitted to the automation system.
● Plug +: Increases the actual value by 1 (maximum: limit).
● Plug –: Reduces the actual value by 1 (minimum: 0).
● Reset: Resets the actual value to 0.
The counter consists of
● Three plugs (input +, input - and reset)
● One logic component
● One socket
● One "actual value" analog socket with the current value in the range between 0 and the
limit.
It is buffered through power failures.
There are 6 counters 1 through 6 on the SIMOCODE pro V PN basic unit.

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 359
Logic modules
11.5 Counter

Schematic
The following schematic shows the "Counter" logic modules:

Figure 11-8 "Counter 1-6" logic modules

Note
The time between the events to be counted depends on:
• The input delay
• The device cycle time.

Note
The actual value remains the same:
• During parameterization or failure of the supply voltage
• If there are simultaneous input signals at input + and input –

Note
The output is always 0 if a reset is pending.

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

360 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Logic modules
11.5 Counter

Settings

Table 11- 4 Counter settings

Counters 1 to 4 - Description
Input + Increments actual value by 1
Activation by any signal (any sockets , e.g., device inputs, control bits from PROFINET, etc.).
Input - Decrements the actual value by 1.
Activation by any signal (any sockets , e.g., device inputs, control bits from PROFINET, etc.).
Reset Reset the actual value to 0 (count value and output).
Activation by any signal (any sockets , e.g., device inputs, control bits from PROFINET, etc.).
Limit Maximum value that can be reached when counting and at which the counter issues an output
signal.
Range: 0 to 65535 (default setting: 0)

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 361
Logic modules
11.6 Timer

11.6 Timer

Description
The timer consists of:
● Two plugs (input and reset)
● One socket
● One "Actual value" analog socket with the actual value.
The current actual value is available as a socket for further internal processing and can also
be transmitted to the automation system. If an input signal is pending, the timer issues an
output signal according to the chosen timer type:
● With closing delay
● With closing delay with memory
● With opening delay
● With fleeting closing.
There are 6 timers 1 through 6 on the SIMOCODE pro V PN basic unit.

Schematic
The following schematic shows the "Timer" logic modules:

Figure 11-9 "Timer 1-6" logic modules

Note
Reset
The output is always 0 if a reset is pending.

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

362 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Logic modules
11.6 Timer

Output response of the timer

Figure 11-10 Output response of the timer

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 363
Logic modules
11.6 Timer

Settings of timer output response

Table 11- 5 Settings of timer output response

Timers 1 to 4 - Description
Input Activation by any signal (any sockets , e.g., device inputs, control bits from PROFINET, etc.).

Reset Resetting the actual value to 0.

Activation by any signal (any sockets , e.g., device inputs, control bits from PROFINET, etc.).
Type Different output responses
Range: With closing delay (default), closing delay with memory, with opening delay, with fleeting
closing
Value Time during which the timer provides an output signal when activated, depending on the output
response (type).
Range: 0 … 6553.5 s, unit: 100 ms (default setting: 0)

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

364 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Logic modules
11.7 Signal conditioner

11.7 Signal conditioner

Description
If an input signal is pending, the signal conditioning issues an output signal according to the
selected signal conditioning type:
● Non-inverting
● Inverting
● Edge rising with memory
● Edge falling with memory
You can set the output response.
The signal conditioning consists of:
● 2 plugs (input and reset)
● One logic component
● One socket.
There are 6 signal conditioners 1 through 6 on the SIMOCODE pro V PN basic unit.

Schematic
The following schematic shows the "Signal conditioning" logic modules:

Figure 11-11 "Signal conditioner 1-6" logic modules

Note
The output is always 0 if a reset is pending.

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 365
Logic modules
11.7 Signal conditioner

Types of signals/output responses

Figure 11-12 Types of signals/output responses of the signal conditioners

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

366 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Logic modules
11.7 Signal conditioner

NOR function
You can implement a NOR function with the "Level inverted" type of signal:

Table 11- 6 NOR function

Input Reset Output Schematic

0 0 1
1 0 0
0 1 0
1 1 0

Settings

Table 11- 7 Settings

Signal conditioner 1 to 4 - Description

Input Activation by any signal (any sockets , e.g., device inputs, control
bits from PROFINET, etc.).
Reset Resetting the signal conditioning to 0.
Activation by any signal (any sockets , e.g., device inputs, control
bits from PROFINET, etc.).
Type Different output responses.
Range: Non-inverting (default), inverting, edge rising with memory,
edge falling with memory

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 367
Logic modules
11.8 Non-volatile elements

11.8 Non-volatile elements

Description
Non-volatile elements behave like signal conditioners. However, these output signals are
retained after a power supply failure.
If an input signal is pending, the signal conditioner issues an output signal according to the
selected signal conditioner type:
● Non-inverting
● Inverting
● Edge rising with memory
● Edge falling with memory
You can set the output response.
The non-volatile element consists of
● Two plugs (input and reset)
● One logic component
● One socket.
There are 4 non-volatile elements 1 through 4 on the SIMOCODE pro V PN basic unit.

Schematic
The following schematic shows the "Non-volatile elements" logic modules:

Figure 11-13 "Non-volatile Element" logic modules

Note
The output is always 0 if a reset is pending.

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

368 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Logic modules
11.8 Non-volatile elements

Types of signals/output responses

Figure 11-14 Types of signals/output responses of non-volatile elements

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 369
Logic modules
11.8 Non-volatile elements

NOR function
You can implement a NOR function with the "Level inverted" type of signal:

Table 11- 8 NOR function

Input Reset Output Schematic

0 0 1
1 0 0
0 1 0
1 1 0

Non-volatile element settings

Table 11- 9 Non-volatile element settings

Non-volatile elements 1 to 4 Description

Input Activation by any signal (any sockets , e.g., device inputs, control
bits from PROFINET, etc.).
Reset Resets the signal conditioning to 0.
Activation by any signal (any sockets , e.g. device inputs,
PROFINET control bits, etc.).
Type Different output responses
Range: Non-inverting (default), inverting, edge rising with memory,
edge falling with memory

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

370 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Logic modules
11.9 Flashing

11.9 Flashing

Description
If an input signal is pending at its plug, the "Flashing" logic module issues a signal to its
socket, which alternates between binary 0 and 1 at a fixed frequency of 1 Hz. You can use
this to make the LEDs on the operator panel flash, for example. The logic module consists
of:
● One plug
● One logic component
● One socket.
There are 3 logic modules "Flashing 1" through "Flashing 3."

Schematic
The following schematic shows the "Flashing" logic modules:

Figure 11-15 "Flashing" logic modules

Settings

Table 11- 10 Flashing settings

Flashing 1 to 3 Description
Input Activation by any signal (any sockets , e.g. device inputs,
status information, status, etc.)

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 371
Logic modules
11.10 Flickering

11.10 Flickering

Description
You can use the "Flicker" logic modules to assign the "Flicker" function to the operator panel
LEDs, for example.
The "Flicker" function block provides an output signal with a frequency of 4 Hz when an input
signal is present.
The function block consists of:
● One plug
● One logic component
● One socket.
There are 3 logic modules "Flicker 1" through "Flicker 3."

Schematic
The following schematic shows the "Flicker" logic modules:

Figure 11-16 "Flicker" function blocks

Flicker settings

Table 11- 11 Flicker settings

Flicker 1 to 3 Description
Input Activation by any signal (any sockets , e.g. status information,
etc.)

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

372 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Logic modules
11.11 Limit monitor

11.11 Limit monitor

Description
With the limit monitor, any analog values (2 bytes / 1 word) can be monitored for limit
overshooting or limit undershooting The limit monitor issues the "Limit" signal at its socket. In
addition, limit monitors can be "marked" according to their function. Example: Monitoring the
individual sensor measuring circuits of the temperature module (Temperature 1 to 3) for
overtemperature.
The limit monitor consists of:
● One analog plug
● One logic component
● One socket.
There are 6 limit monitors 1 through 6 on the SIMOCODE pro V PN basic unit.

Schematic
The following schematic shows the "Limit Monitor" logic modules:

Figure 11-17 "Limit monitor 1-6" logic modules

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 373
Logic modules
11.11 Limit monitor

Limit monitor response

Table 11- 12 Limit monitor response

Response Limit 1 to 4
Tripping -
Warning -
Signaling X (d)
Deactivated -
Delay 0 - 25.5 s (default setting: 0.5 s)

See also "Tables of responses of SIMOCODE pro" in Chapter Important information

(Page 17).

Functional principle
The limit signal issued depends on:
● The operating state of the motor
● The TPF function
● The parameterized "activity":
– ON
– ON+
– RUN
– RUN+.
The following diagram shows a flow chart with the different "activities" parameters.

Figure 11-18 Active status of limit monitor

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

374 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Logic modules
11.11 Limit monitor

Limit monitor settings

Table 11- 13 Limit monitor settings

Limit Description
monitor
Input Analog plug of the limit monitor for linking to the analog value to be monitored (2 bytes), e.g. maximum
current Imax, remaining cooling down period, actual value of timers, etc.)
Type Specifies if the limit has to be monitored for overshooting (default) or undershooting.
Activity Determines in which motor operating state the limit monitor is to be evaluated:
• ON, i.e. always (default) evaluate, regardless of whether or not the motor is running
• ON+, i.e. always evaluate, regardless of whether or not the motor is running
Exception: "TPF", i.e. motor feeder is in test position
• RUN, i.e. evaluate only if the motor is in the ON state and not in the test position (TPF).
• run+, i.e. evaluate only if the motor is running and the start-up procedure is finished (i.e. the "Start active"
message is no longer active) and there is no test position feedback (TPF); example: Cos phi monitoring
Limit Monitor response value. The return value is always determined by the "Limit monitor - Delay" parameter.
Range: 0 to 65535 (default setting: 0)
Delay Specifies the time period for which the limit must be constantly overshot before the "Event - Limit" output is
set.
Range: 0 to 25.5 s (default setting: 0.5 s)
Marking 1) No parameter.
Optional marking for identifying the message, e.g. "Limit>"; range: max. 10 characters.

1)

NOTICE
Changing the marking
Each change to the marking requires that the communication interface be restarted when
the web server is active. A new start interrupts all Ethernet and PROFINET links and
reestablishes them afterward.

Note
When using limit monitors, always ensure that the correct range and unit are used for the
analog values connected to the limit input. These always have a direct influence on the unit
of the limit value to be set. You will find the units and ranges of all relevant analog values in
Chapter Data record 94 - measured values (Page 568) and in Chapter Data record 95 -
Service data/statistical data (Page 570).

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 375
Logic modules
11.11 Limit monitor

Table 11- 14 Examples of typical units and ranges in SIMOCODE pro

Unit Range
Temperatures (e.g. max. temperature) 1K 0 - 65535
Operating hours 1s 0 - 1193046
Motor stop time 1h 0 - 65535
Active power 1W 0 - 4294967295
Apparent power 1 VA 0 - 4294967295
Timer actual value 100 ms 0 - 65535
Currents (e.g. max. current Imax) 1 % of Ie 0 - 65535
Analog module inputs - 0 to 27648 (S7 format)

Thus, for example, a limit of 473 (K) must be parameterized for a limit monitor to monitor a
maximum temperature of 200°C.

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

376 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Logic modules
11.12 Calculators (calculation modules) 1, 2

11.12 Calculators (calculation modules) 1, 2

Description
The two logic modules "Calculator 1" and "Calculator 2" integrated in the
SIMOCODE pro V PN basic unit are capable of the standard calculation modes and enable
all analog values featured in SIMOCODE pro to be adapted, calculated, and converted,
for example:
● Conversion of the measured temperatures from K (Kelvin) to °F or °C
● Conversion of the motor current from [%] to [A]
● Conversion of the 0/4 to 20mA signals of the analog module directly into fill levels,
pressures and flow rates.
The analog value (2 bytes / 1 word) present at the analog sockets is calculated using a
defined formula and using freely-selectable parameters (numerators, denominators,
operators, offsets). The result of the calculation is output as an analog value (2 bytes/1 word)
at the analog socket of the logic module for further processing.
Each calculator consists of:
● One analog plug (Calculator 1) or two analog plugs (Calculator 2)
● One logic component
● One analog socket.

Schematic
The following schematic shows the "Calculators" logic modules:

Figure 11-19 "Calculators" logic modules

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 377
Logic modules
11.12 Calculators (calculation modules) 1, 2

Operating modes for calculator 2

The mode of the "Calculator 2" logic module can be changed via the "Operating mode"
parameter:
● Operating mode 1: The analog value at input 1 is combined with the analog value at
input 2 using a predefined formula and taking into account the specified parameters
(numerators, denominators, offsets, operators). The result is available as an analog value
(1 word / 2 bytes) at the output of the function block for further processing.
● Operating mode 2: The analog values at inputs 1 and 2 are processed together as a
double word. Input 1 represents the high word and input 2 the low word. The result is
calculated by means of the formula defined for this operating mode using the specified
parameters (numerators, denominators, offsets) and is output by the function block as
1 word /2 bytes. In operating mode 2, it is also possible to process double words (e.g.
active power, apparent power) and to display them (2 bytes / 1 word).

Settings Calculators 1, 2

Table 11- 15 Calculator settings

Calculator Description
Calculator 1 - Input Any value (2 bytes / 1 word); Range: 0 - 65535
Calculator 1 - Output Calculated value / (2 bytes / 1 word); Range: 0 - 65535
Calculator 1 - Numerator Range: -32766 to +32767, increment 1
Calculator 1 - Denominator Range: 0 to 255, in steps of 1
Calculator 1 - Offset Range: -32766 to +32767, in steps of 1
Calculator 2 - Input 1 Any value (2 bytes / 1 word); Range: 0 - 65535
Calculator 2 - Input 2 Any value (2 bytes / 1 word); Range: 0 - 65535
Calculator 2 - Output Calculated value (2 bytes / 1 word); Range: 0 - 65535
Calculator 2 - Numerator 1 Range: -128 to +127, in steps of 1
Calculator 2 - Denominator 1 Range: 0 to 255, in steps of 1
Calculator 2 - Numerator 2 1) Range: 0 to 255, in steps of 1
Calculator 2 - Denominator 2 1) Range: -128 to +127, in steps of 1
Calculator 2 - Offset Range: -2147483648 to +2147483647, increment 1
Calculator 2 - Operating mode 1 or 2
Calculator 2 - Operator 1) +, -, *, /
1) Only relevant for operating mode = 1

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

378 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Logic modules
11.12 Calculators (calculation modules) 1, 2

Formulas calculators 1, 2

Figure 11-20 Calculator formulas

Calculator examples

Example 1 - Calculator
● Conversion of the maximum temperature of the temperature module from K to °C

Figure 11-21 Example 1 - Calculator

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 379
Logic modules
11.12 Calculators (calculation modules) 1, 2

Example 2 - Calculator
● Conversion of the maximum temperature of the temperature module from K to °F

Figure 11-22 Example 2 - Calculator

Example 3 - Calculator
● Conversion of motor current I_max from % to A (e.g. set current Is = 3.36 A) (only possible
for motors with one rotational speed)

Figure 11-23 Example 3 - Calculator

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

380 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Logic modules
11.13 Calculators (calculation modules) 3, 4

11.13 Calculators (calculation modules) 3, 4

Description
Using the "Calculator 3" and "Calculator 4" function blocks (for SIMOCODE pro V PN basic
unit only), analog values can be processed according to the following arithmetic:
Output = Input 1 [Operator 1] Input 2 [Operator 2] Input 3 [Operator 3] Input 4.
You can connect the corresponding analog signals to the 4 inputs "Calculator 3/4 - Inputs 1
to 4". As operators "Calculator 3/4 - Operator 1 to 3," you can choose one of the four
standard operators ("+", "-", "*," or "/").
With "Calculator 3/4 - Priority 1 to 3," you can specify the processing sequence (high,
medium, low). You must clearly define a priority for each operator. The priority determines
the processing sequence comparable to the placement of a term inside parentheses.
Example:
Output = I1 OP1 I2 OP2 I3 OP3 I4, where
● OP1 = "*"; Medium,
● OP2 = "+"; High,
● OP3 = "-"; Low
Associated equation: Output = (I1 * I2 + I3)) - I4.
If you interconnect the input to the device-internal analog output data element "Output 1 -
Fixed level", the input is assigned the constant "Const x" (x = 1 - 4). In this case, the
respective edit field for the constant is activated. You can enter a value between 0 and
65535.
The "Calculator 3" and "Calculator 4" function blocks each consist of:
● Four analog plugs
● One analog socket
● Logic.

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 381
Logic modules
11.13 Calculators (calculation modules) 3, 4

Schematic
The following schematic shows the "Calculator 3" and "Calculator 4" logic modules:

Figure 11-24 "Calculator 3" and "Calculator 4" function blocks

Settings Calculator 3, 4

Table 11- 16 Settings Calculator 3, 4

Calculators 3, 4 Description
Input Any analog value
Output Calculated analog value
Constant 1 to 4 Any analog value; range: 0 to 65535 (default setting: 0)
Operator 1 to 3 • "+": Addition
• "-": Subtraction
• "*": Multiplication
• "/": Subtraction
Priority 1 to 3 • OP1 = "*"; Medium
• OP2 = "+"; High
• OP3 = "-"; Low

Formula Calculators 3, 4
Output = Input 1 [Operator 1] Input 2 [Operator 2] Input 3 [Operator 3] Input 4

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

382 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Logic modules
11.14 Analog multiplexer

11.14 Analog multiplexer

Description
The analog multiplexer (for SIMOCODE pro V PN basic unit only) outputs one of 4 possible
analog values Input 1 to Input 4 at the output, depending on control signals S1 and S2.
If you interconnect the input to "Fixed level," the input is assigned the constant "Const x" (x =
1 - 4). In this case, the respective edit field for the constant is activated. You can enter a
value between 0 and 65535.
The "Analog Multiplexer" function block consists of:
● two digital plugs (control signal 1 and 2)
● Four analog plugs (Input 1 to 4)
● One analog socket
● Logic.

Schematic
The following schematic shows the Analog Multiplexer logic module:

Figure 11-25 Analog multiplexer function block

Settings Analog Multiplexer

Table 11- 17 Settings Analog Multiplexer

Analog multiplexer Description

Control signal S1 to S4 Activation by any signal (any sockets , e.g.,
device inputs, control bits from PROFINET, etc.).
Input 1 to 4 Any analog value or "Fixed level"
Output Output value according to panel (see below)
Constant 1 to 4 Any analog value; range: 0 … 65535

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 383
Logic modules
11.14 Analog multiplexer

Analog multiplexer example

Pressing an operator panel button multiple times will output the maximum motor current and
the three phase currents one after the other (e.g., via the output of the analog module):

Figure 11-26 Analog multiplexer example

● Pressing the OP button 1x: Phase current IL1

● Pressing the OP button 2x: Phase current IL2
● Pressing the OP button 3x: Phase current IL3
● Pressing the OP button 4x: Maximum motor current I_max.

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

384 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Logic modules
11.15 Pulse width modulator

11.15 Pulse width modulator

Description
The pulse width modulator (PWM) (for SIMOCODE pro V PN basic unit only) modulates the
analog input value into a digital output signal "PWM Output" with a variable duty factor that is
proportional to the analog input value.
If you interconnect the input to "Fixed value," the input is assigned the parameterized
constant "Input (const)." In this case, the edit field for the constant is activated. You can
enter a value between 0 and 65535.
The "Pulse Width Modulator" function block consists of:
● One analog plug (input)
● One digital socket (PWM output)
● Logic.

Schematic

Figure 11-27 "Pulse width modulator" function block

Settings Pulse Width Modulator

Table 11- 18 Settings Pulse Width Modulator

Pulse width modulator Description

Input Activation by any analog signal or "Fixed value"
Constant input Any constant; range: 0 to 65535 (default setting: 0)
Input Minimum Any constant; range 0 to 65535 (default setting: 0)
Input Maximum Any constant; range 0 to 65535 (default setting: 0)
PWM duration 0.2 to 6553.5 s (default setting: 2)

Pulse width modulator formulas

● Length of 1-signal = PWM period * (PWM Input - PWM Input Minimum) / (PWM Input
Maximum - PWM Input Minimum)
● Length of 0-signal = PWM period - Length of 1-signal.

Note
Signal duration
The shortest signal duration for 0 and 1 is 0.1 s in each case.
If a duration for the 1 signal that is shorter than 0.1 s results from calculation, the output
will remain permanently 0, while for a duration for the 0 signal shorter than 0.1 s the
output remains permanently 1.

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 385
Logic modules
11.15 Pulse width modulator

Example - Pulse width modulator

A load will be switched on and off with a duration of 60 minutes, dependent on a measured
value (e.g., temperature).
● If the measured value exceeds a maximum value of 50°°C (323 K), the load will be
switched on permanently, and if it falls below 20°°C (293 K), it will be switched off
permanently.
● If the measured value falls within the range between the minimum and maximum value,
the On duration will be proportional to the measured value.

● Duration: 60 min (3600 s)

● Lower limit: 20°C (293 K)
● Hi limit: 50°C (323 K).

● At 20°C (293 K): OFF

● At 30℃ (303 K): 20 min ON and 40 min OFF
● At 40°C (313 K): 40 min ON and 20 min OFF
● At 50°C (323 K): ON.

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

386 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
Communication 12
In this chapter
This chapter provides information about options for communication of SIMOCODE pro V PN
with a PLC via PROFINET IO and via further communication functions with PC and HMI
systems via Ethernet.
You are given an overview of the integration of SIMOCODE pro via PROFINET into the
automation system and about the options for parameterization using the
SIMOCODE ES 2007 software.

Target groups
This chapter addresses the following target groups:
● Configuring engineers
● PLC programmers

Required knowledge
You will require the following knowledge:
● PROFINET/Ethernet
● Communication via OPC UA
● Integration of PROFINET IO devices into an automation system
● STEP 7

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 387
Communication
12.1 Definitions

12.1 Definitions

GSD file
The properties of a PROFINET devices are described in a GSD (General Station
Description) file that contains all the necessary information for the configuration. Just like for
PROFIBUS, you can link a PROFINET device into an automation system using a GSD file:
PROFINET GSD (http://www.siemens.com/profinet-gsd)
In the case of PROFINET IO, the GSD file is in XML format. The structure of the GSD file
conforms to ISO 15734, the worldwide standard for device descriptions.

Device name
Before an IO device can be addressed by an IO controller, it must have a device name
because the IP address is permanently assigned to the device name. In the case of
PROFINET, this method was chosen because names are easier to handle than complex IP
addresses.
Assignment of a device name for a specific IO device is comparable to setting the
PROFIBUS address on a DP slave.
An IO device does not have a device name when it is delivered. It can only be addressed by
an IO controller once a device name has been assigned to it, e.g. for transmission of the
configuration data (including the IP address) during startup or for exchanging useful data in
cyclic operation.

IO Device
Distributed field device assigned to one of the IO controllers.
As a field device, the SIMOCODE pro V PN basic unit functions as a PROFINET-IO device.

IP address
To enable a PROFINET device to be addressed as a node on Industrial Ethernet, this device
also requires an IP address that is unique within the network. The IP address is made up of
4 decimal numbers with a range of values from 0 through 255. The decimal numbers are
separated by a period.
The IP address is made up of
● The address of the (sub)net and
● The address of the node (generally called the host or network node)

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

388 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Communication
12.1 Definitions

MAC address
Each PROFINET device is assigned a globally unique device identifier at the factory. This 6-
byte long device identifier is the MAC address.
The MAC address is divided up as follows:
● 3 bytes manufacturer's ID and
● 3 bytes device identifier (consecutive number).
The MAC address can generally be read from the front on the device, e.g.: 08-00-06-6B-80-
C0

OPC Unified Architecture (UA)

OPC Unified Architecture (UA) is the next generation technology of the OPC Foundation for
safe and reliable data transfer and defines access to industrial communication networks.

OPC UA client
An OPC UA client is a user program that accesses process data via the OPC UA interface.
Access to the process data is made possible by the OPC UA server.

OPC UA server
The OPC server provides the OPC client with a wide range of functions with which it can
communicate via industrial networks. SIMOCODE pro V PN provides extensive process data
via OPC UA.

PROFINET
Within the context of Totally Integrated Automation (TIA), PROFINET is the systematic
development of the following systems:
● PROFIBUS DP, the established fieldbus
● Industrial Ethernet, the communications bus for the cell level.
Experiences from both systems have been and are being integrated in PROFINET.
PROFINET was defined as an Ethernet-based automation standard of PROFIBUS
International (PROFIBUS Nutzerorganisation e. V.).

PROFINET IO controller
Device via which the connected IO devices are addressed. That means the IO controller
exchanges input and output signals with assigned field devices. The IO controller is often the
controller on which the automation program runs.

PROFINET IO Supervisor
PG/PC for commissioning and diagnostics.

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 389
Communication
12.2 Data security in automation

12.2 Data security in automation

Introduction
The topic of data security and access protection (security) is becoming more and more
important in industrial environments. Increased networking of entire industrial plants, vertical
integration and networking of the levels within a company, and new technologies, such as
remote maintenance, are resulting in more increased requirements for protection of the
industrial plant. Security is the generic term for all protection measures
● Loss of confidentiality due to unauthorized accessing of data
● Loss of integrity due to data manipulation
● Loss of availability due to destruction of data
To provide protection from manipulation in sensitive plant and production networks, it is not
enough to apply data security solutions for offices to industrial applications without any
adaptation.

Requirements
The special requirements of communication in an industrial environment (e.g.
communication in real time) result in additional requirements for security in industrial use:
● Protection against interaction between automated cells
● Protection of network segments
● Protection from unauthorized access
● Scalability of the security functionality
● No influence on the network structure.

Threats
Threats can arise from external and internal manipulation. Loss of data security is not always
caused by deliberate actions.
Internal threats arise due to:
● Technical faults
● Operating errors
● Errors in programs.
This internal hazards are compounded by external threats. The external hazards do not differ
from the known threats in the office environment:
● Computer viruses and computer worms
● Trojan horses
● Unauthorized access
● Password phishing.
Password phishing means attempting to get a user to divulge access data and passwords by
masquerading as a different identity in an e-mail.

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

390 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Communication
12.2 Data security in automation

Precautions
The most important precautions against manipulation and loss of data security in an
industrial environment are:
● Filtering and verification of data traffic through virtual private networks (VPN). A virtual
private network is used to exchange private data in a public network (e.g. the Internet).
The most common VPN technology is IPsec. IPsec is a collection of protocols based on
the IP protocol at the network layer.
● Segmentation into protected automation cells. The aim of this concept is to protect
devices in the network through security modules. A group of protected devices forms a
protected automation cell. Only security modules in the same group or the device
protected by you can be interchanged.
● Authentication (identification) of the networked devices. The security modules identify
themselves to each other via a secure (encrypted) channel using authentication
procedures. This prevents access to a protected segment by unauthorized persons from
outside.
● Encryption of the data traffic. The confidentiality of the data is ensured by encrypting the
data traffic. For this purpose, every security module is given a VPN certificate which
includes the encryption key.

Guidelines on information security in industrial automation

VDI guideline
The VDI/VDE Association of German Engineers "Measurement and Automation" has
published with the VDI guideline "VDI/VDE 2182 Sheet 1, IT Security for Industrial
Automation - General Model" a guideline in implementation of a security architecture in the
industrial environment. The guideline is found under "VDI guidelines" on the VDI homepage:
VDI guidelines (http://www.vdi.eu/engineering/vdi-standards).

PROFINET Security Guideline

The PROFIBUS & PROFINET user organization supports you with building up safety
standards in your company with the PROFINET Security Guideline. These guidelines are
found under downloads on the homepage of the PROFIBUS & PROFINET user
organization: PI - PROFIBUS & PROFINET International Home (http://www.profibus.com).

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 391
Communication
12.3 Data transfer

12.3 Data transfer

Options for data transfer

The following figure shows an overview of the communication functions supported by
SIMOCODE, which are described in the following sections:

Figure 12-1 SIMOCODE pro V PN communication functions

1 Communication between PLC (IO controller) and SIMOCODE pro (IO device) via
PROFINET / Ethernet
2 Communication between PC with parameterization software
SIMOCODE ES 2007 Premium (IO Supervisor) and SIMOCODE pro via PROFINET
3 Communication between PC with parameterization software
SIMOCODE ES 2007 Premium and SIMOCODE pro via SIMATIC S7 (SIMOCODE pro
integrated into STEP 7)
4 Communication between PC parameterization software SIMOCODE ES 2007 Premium
and SIMOCODE pro via the SIMOCODE pro system interface (point-to-point via RS 232 or
USB)
5 Communication between PC or HMI with OPC UA Client and SIMOCODE pro via
Ethernet/OPC UA
6 Communication between PC with a web browser and SIMOCODE pro via TCP/IP and
HTTP

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

392 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Communication
12.4 Communication via PROFINET IO

12.4 Communication via PROFINET IO

SIMOCODE pro V PN provides communication functions via PROFINET IO with the
following properties:
● Integrated switch with 2 ports
With the integrated 2-port switch, it is possible to build PROFINET bus and ring topologies
without additional switches.
The integrated 2-port switch supports functions for port diagnostics if this functions are used
by the automation system.
● Device replacement without removable medium/programming device
This is a function that permits replacement of a device (e.g. in case of a device defect) by a
new device with factory settings without the help of PCs or programming devices without a
memory module.
● Shared device
Shared device is the function with which an IO device is used simultaneously by two or more
IO controllers.
This function can be used in conjunction with the fail-safe DM-F PROFIsafe digital module.
An automation system communicates with SIMOCODE pro via PROFINET IO and performs
the standard control tasks while a second fail-safe automation system via PROFINET IO can
be used for safety-related tripping using the PROFIsafe profile.
Use of this function depends on whether the automation system supports the function. It is
configured using the configuration tool of the automation system, e.g. with STEP 7 HW
Config.
● Media redundancy
SIMOCODE pro V PN supports media redundancy according to the Media Redundancy
Protocol (MRP). This function is configured using the configuration tool of the automation
system, e.g., HW Config with STEP 7.
● System redundancy
Product version *E05* and higher of SIMOCODE pro V PN supports a redundant-system
connection with two S7-400H CPUs. This provides for a communication link (Application
Relation) between each IO device and each of the two H CPUs. The communication link can
be set up by means of a freely selectable topological connection.
This function is configured using the configuration tool of the automation system, e.g., HW
Config with STEP 7.
● RT communication
As a motor management system, SIMOCODE pro V PN does not have any time-critical
communication functions itself but it does support PROFINET hardware RT used. The
integrated 2-port switch can therefore be used to forward RT data.

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 393
Communication
12.4 Communication via PROFINET IO

● Support for PROFIenergy

PROFIenergy, a protocol defined by the PROFINET User Organization, lays the foundations
for a vendor-neutral, universal system for flexible, short-term, and intelligent shutdown of
individual loads or whole production units.
SIMOCODE pro V PN supports the functions defined in the protocol in the form of a
switchgear with switching and measuring functions
You will find more information in the system manual "SIMATIC PROFINET System
Description" (see System manual "SIMATIC PROFINET System Description"
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/19292127)).

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

394 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Communication
12.5 Integration of SIMOCODE pro into the automation system (PLC)

12.5 Integration of SIMOCODE pro into the automation system (PLC)

I/O configurations
SIMOCODE pro V PN supports a number of I/O configurations which define the structure
and length of the I/O data that are cyclically transferred between the IO controller (PLC) and
the IO device (SIMOCODE pro). In the case of SIMOCODE pro, these configurations are
termed Basic types.

Cyclic data to SIMOCODE pro V (PN)

The following basic types are available:
● Basic type 1, 4 bytes:

Figure 12-2 Cyclic data to SIMOCODE pro, basic type 1, 4 bytes

● Basic type 2, 2 bytes:

Figure 12-3 Cyclic data to SIMOCODE pro, basic type 2, 2 bytes

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 395
Communication
12.5 Integration of SIMOCODE pro into the automation system (PLC)

● Basic type 3, 6 bytes

Figure 12-4 Cyclic data to SIMOCODE pro, basic type 3, 6 bytes

● PROFIsafe, 1 F-DO
Permanently assigned to the fail-safe relay enable circuits of the DM-F PROFIsafe, length 5
bytes.

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

396 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Communication
12.5 Integration of SIMOCODE pro into the automation system (PLC)

Cyclic data from SIMOCODE pro V (PN)

● Basic type 1, 10 bytes

Figure 12-5 Cyclic data from SIMOCODE pro, basic type 1, 10 bytes

● Basic type 2, 4 bytes

Figure 12-6 Cyclic data from SIMOCODE pro, basic type 2, 4 bytes

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 397
Communication
12.5 Integration of SIMOCODE pro into the automation system (PLC)

● Basic type 3, 20 bytes

Figure 12-7 Cyclic data from SIMOCODE pro, basic type 3, 20 bytes

● PROFIsafe
No useful data, length 4 bytes.

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

398 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Communication
12.6 Integration of SIMOCODE pro V PN via GSD

12.6 Integration of SIMOCODE pro V PN via GSD

Using the GSD, integration into the PROFINET-IO system and device diagnostics are
possible. For parameterization of the device function of SIMOCODE pro, use the
SIMOCODE ES 2007 software SP4 and later.
Integrate the GSD for SIMOCODE pro V PN into the configuration tool of your automation
system (e.g. STEP 7 HW Config). The GSD is available for downloading at the following link:
PROFINET GSD (http://www.siemens.com/profinet-gsd)
After installation of the GSD, you will find SIMOCODE pro V PN in the hardware catalog of
STEP7 V5 under "Hardware Catalog → Additional Field Devices → PROFINET IO →
Switching Devices → Siemens AG → Motor Management System." Insert the
SIMOCODE pro V (PN) into the PROFINET IO system.
After insertion of SIMOCODE pro V (PN), configure one of the three possible basic types in
Slot 1 of the IO device inserted in this way (see figures about "Cyclic data to
SIMOCODE pro" and "Cyclic data of SIMOCODE pro").
If SIMOCODE pro V PN is used in conjunction with the fail-safe DM-F PROFIsafe digital
module, additionally configure the I/O configuration for PROFIsafe in Slot 2.

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 399
Communication
12.7 Integration of SIMOCODE pro V PN in SIMATIC STEP 7 V5 via OM SIMOCODE pro

12.7 Integration of SIMOCODE pro V PN in SIMATIC STEP 7 V5 via OM

SIMOCODE pro

Integration of SIMOCODE pro V PN in SIMATIC STEP 7 V5 via OM SIMOCODE pro

In addition to integration via GSD, with SIMATIC S7 controllers from Siemens it is possible to
integrate SIMOCODE pro V PN in STEP 7 V5 using the "Object Manager (OM)
SIMOCODE pro V PN" software as part of Totally Integrated Automation (TIA).
The advantage is that the "SIMOCODE ES 2007 Premium" parameterization software can
be called directly from STEP 7 HW Config and can be used for developing
SIMOCODE pro V PN device parameters.
The SIMOCODE pro device parameters are stored in the STEP 7 project. After transmission
of the hardware configuration, the device parameters are available in the form of start-up
parameter data records in the CPU and are automatically transmitted during start-up.
The necessary OM SIMOCODE pro V PN software is part of SIMOCODE ES 2007 Premium.
During installation of SIMOCODE ES, select the "Integration in STEP 7" installation option to
use the described function.
When the hardware is being configured, SIMOCODE pro V PN is integrated by selecting
SIMOCODE pro in the hardware catalog from STEP 7 HW Config under "PROFINET IO →
Switching Devices → Motor Management System".
Insert the SIMOCODE pro V PN into the PROFINET IO system.
Select one of the three possible basic types (see figure "Cyclic data to SIMOCODE pro" and
figure "Cyclic data from SIMOCODE pro").

Note
Changing the slot
It is only possible to change the slot by selecting another SIMOCODE type!

When using SIMOCODE pro V PN in conjunction with the fail-safe DM-F PROFIsafe digital
module, select the relevant configuration with PROFIsafe.

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

400 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Communication
12.7 Integration of SIMOCODE pro V PN in SIMATIC STEP 7 V5 via OM SIMOCODE pro

Module replacement without exchangeable medium/PC

Note
Precondition for module replacement without exchangeable medium/PC
The use of this function depends whether the IO controller and the neighboring IO devices
support this function.

Assuming SIMOCODE pro in STEP 7 V5 has been integrated and parameterized using
OM SIMOCODE pro, the IO controller can automatically restore the device name, the IP
configuration, and then the complete device parameterization performed with
SIMOCODE ES 2007 Premium of the replaced device.

Note
Do not use a memory module or initialization module!
To use this function, you do not have to and indeed must not use of a memory module or an
initialization module!

See Chapter Restoring factory settings (Page 509).

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 401
Communication
12.8 Configuring SIMOCODE pro V PN ports

12.8 Configuring SIMOCODE pro V PN ports

Configuring the ports

SIMOCODE pro V PN has two RJ45 ports labeled 1 and 2 on the front. In the configuration
tool of the automation system (e.g. STEP 7 HW Config), the settings for topology,
diagnostics and other options of the two ports X1P1 and X1P2 are defined.

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

402 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Communication
12.9 Configuration of further properties of SIMOCODE pro V PN as an IO device

12.9 Configuration of further properties of SIMOCODE pro V PN as an IO

device

Device name and IP parameters

The precondition for PROFINET IO communications is setting and configuring the IO device
name and IP parameters.
The device name and the IP parameters can be assigned in different ways:
● Assigning device names using the configuration tool of the automation system
● Configure device names with SIMOCODE ES 2007 parameterization software and
transfer into the device.

Assigning device names using the configuration tool of the automation system
The device name is assigned during the commissioning phase by the configuration tool of
the automation system (e.g. STEP 7) or with the "SIMOCODE ES Premium" configuration
software and transmitted into the IO device via Ethernet. For transmission, the basic unit
must be connected and accessible via the Ethernet interface. Using the MAC address (e.g.
00-0E-8C-BD-1F-27) printed on the front of the basic unit, the device can be accessible via
LAN. In this case, the "Overwrite device name in device" parameter set with the
SIMOCODE ES 2007 parameterization software under "PROFINET Parameters → Station"
must not be active.

Figure 12-8 Assigning device names using the configuration tool of the automation system

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 403
Communication
12.9 Configuration of further properties of SIMOCODE pro V PN as an IO device

1. Device is given a technological name as part of configuration by the user (device name
here: Motor-1). STEP 7 automatically assigns an IP parameter
2. The user assigns the the device name to the IO device using the MAC address and
transmit this, for example, with the "Edit Ethernet station" function
3. The user loads the configuration into the IO controller
4. IO controller assigns the IP parameters during start-up based on the device name

Configuring device names with SIMOCODE ES 2007 parameterization software and transfer
into the device
In this case, the device name must be configured under "PROFINET Parameters → Station"
and the "Overwrite device name in device" parameter must be active.

Note
Transferring the device parameters
It is always possible to transfer the device parameters via the system interface.
If the PROFINET IO device name has already been configured in a different way, the device
parameters can be transferred via PROFINET, too.

Note
Assignment of the device name
The device name can be assigned with the "SIMOCODE ES 2007 Premium"
parameterization software using the "Target System → Edit Ethernet Station" function. This
function is not identical with parameterization with the "PROFINET parameter" dialog box.
Unlike in this dialog box, under "PROFINET Parameters → Station," the "Overwrite device
name in device" parameter must not be active.

Note
Changing the device name
Every change to the device name with SIMOCODE ES in the "PROFINET Parameters"
dialog box requires a restart of the communication interface. A new start interrupts all
Ethernet and PROFINET links and reestablishes them afterward.

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

404 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Communication
12.9 Configuration of further properties of SIMOCODE pro V PN as an IO device

Figure 12-9 Assigning device names with SIMOCODE ES 2007

1. Device is given a technological name (device name here: Motor-1)

2. Configuration is loaded into the IO controller
3. Configuration of device names and IP parameters with SIMOCODE ES:
a) Device name "Motor-1" is configured with SIMOCODE ES and is transferred into the
device via the system interface / PROFINET
b) Device name and IP parameter are configured with SIMOCODE ES and are
transferred into the device via the system interface / PROFINET

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 405
Communication
12.9 Configuration of further properties of SIMOCODE pro V PN as an IO device

Transferring IP parameters
The IP parameters, consisting of IP address, subnet mask, and router can also be assigned
in various ways and transferred to the IO Device.
Possibilities for this are:
● The IO Controller assigns the IP parameters to the IO Device. In this case, the "Overwrite
IP parameters in device" parameter set with the SIMOCODE ES 2007 parameterization
software under "PROFINET Parameters → IP Parameters" must not be active.

Note
Deleting IP parameters
IP parameters assigned by the IO controller are stored non-retentively in the device, i.e.
they are deleted again when the supply voltage is switched off.

● The IP parameters are configured with "SIMOCODE ES 2007" parameterization software

and transferred to the device. In this case, the "Overwrite IP parameters in device"
parameter under "PROFINET Parameters → IP Parameters" must be active.

Note
Transferring the device parameters
It is always possible to transfer the device parameters via the system interface.
If the PROFINET IO device name has already been configured in a different way, the
device parameters can be transferred via PROFINET, too.

Note
Assigning the IP parameters
The IP parameters can be assigned with the "SIMOCODE ES 2007 Premium"
parameterization software using the "Target System → Edit Ethernet Station" function.
This function is not identical with the parameterization of the IP parameters with the
"PROFINET Parameters" dialog box. Unlike in this dialog box, under "PROFINET
Parameters → IP Parameters," the "Overwrite IP parameters in device" parameter must
not be active.

Note
Restarting the communication interface
Every change to the IP parameter with SIMOCODE ES in the "PROFINET Parameters"
dialog box requires a restart of the communication interface.
A new start of the communication interface interrupts all Ethernet and PROFINET links
and reestablishes them afterward.

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

406 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Communication
12.10 Identification data for PROFINET IO

12.10 Identification data for PROFINET IO

Brief description of the identification data

Identification data are information that is stored in the PROFINET IO device and supports the
user with the following activities:
● Checking the system configuration
● Locating modified system hardware
● Troubleshooting a system.
With the identification data, SIMOCODE pro V PN can be uniquely identified online.
The identification data can be edited with the configuration tool of the automation system
(e.g. STEP 7) and with SIMOCODE ES and transferred to the device or read out of the
device.
In STEP 7, the identification data are displayed on the "Module status" and "Properties ..."
tab cards and loaded into the modules with "Load module identification data ..." with menu
item "Target System." It is possible to transfer data already in the device into the
configuration with "Load module identification data into the programming device" when
configuring via GSD file (see STEP 7 Online Help on this function).
You can also assign the identification data with SIMOCODE ES. You will find this under
"Identification." Only I&M 1 to I&M 3 can be changed.
The following identification data records are supported:
● I&M 0: Identification (device identification); read only
● I&M 1: Tag (plant identifier, location designation)
● I&M 2: Installation Date
● I&M 3: Descriptor (comment).

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 407
Communication
12.11 Shared device

12.11 Shared device

Shared device provision

PROFINET IO provides the shared device function. Shared device enables access by two IO
controllers to one IO device. Input and output data can be flexibly assigned to different IO
controllers.
This function can be used in conjunction with the fail-safe DM-F PROFIsafe expansion
module. While one controller accesses the standard I/O data via an IO controller and
performs the routine control, the fail-safe program is processed in a separate, fail-safe
controller that is responsible for safety-related tripping via PROFIsafe.

Shared device configuration

The I/O data is assigned to the IO controllers in the configuration tool of the automation
system (e.g. STEP 7 HW Config).

Note
Shared device function
The system redundancy function is not available when the "Shared Device Function" is used.

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

408 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Communication
12.12 Media redundancy

12.12 Media redundancy

Media redundancy support

The media redundancy protocol manages a redundant network. The data that are
exchanged between IO controller and IO device are transmitted via two different paths.
If both Ethernet ports are used, the function enables communication to be maintained even if
one of the two transmission channels fails.

Settings for media redundancy

In the configuration tool of the automation system (e.g. STEP 7 HW Config), the settings for
media redundancy in the properties of Slot X1 of the relevant PN-IO devices. In particular,
the MRP domain is assigned and the role is defined that will be taken over in the MRP by the
device. SIMOCODE pro V PN supports ring redundancy in the role as a client.

Information material for media redundancy

You will also find useful information about "Ring redundancy with the Media Redundancy
Protocol (MRP)" under: Ring redundancy with the Media Redundancy Protocol (MRP)
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/33696406)

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 409
Communication
12.13 System redundancy

12.13 System redundancy

System redundancy with H CPUs

The redundant-system connection via PROFINET provides a communication link
(Application Relation) between each SIMOCODE pro V PN IO device and each of the two H
CPUs. The communication link can be set up by means of a freely selectable topological
connection, i.e. the topology of a plant does not indicate whether or not SIMOCODE pro V
PN is interfaced via a redundant-system connection. In addition to operation as a redundant
system, the SIMOCODE pro V PN can also be operated on H CPUs as a so-called "non-
redundant IO device". In this mode, only one of the two CPUs establishes a communication
link to the IO device. The disadvantage of operating an IO device as a non-redundant device
is that it will fail in the event of failure of the CPU to which it is linked.

Note
Firmware version of the H CPU
System redundancy is supported with H CPU firmware version V6.0.3 and higher.

SIMOCODE pro V PN with system redundancy

The diagram below illustrates a configuration with two redundant-system
SIMOCODE pro V PN basic units. This topology offers particular advantages. The entire
system can remain in operation if a line break occurs anywhere in the configuration. One of
the two SIMOCODE pro V PN communication links always remains operational. The
SIMOCODE pro V PN units then function like non-redundant devices.

Figure 12-10 S7-400 H system with redundant I/Os

① S7-400H system
② SIMOCODE pro V PN as a redundant IO device

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

410 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Communication
12.13 System redundancy

PN/IO with non-redundant I/Os

The following diagram illustrates an example of a topographical configuration with one
switch. Two IO devices are connected as non-redundant units and the other three IO devices
as redundant-system units.

Figure 12-11 S7-400 H system with redundant and non-redundant I/Os

① S7-400H system
② SCALANCE (e.g. X400)
③ SIMOCODE pro as a redundant IO device
③ SIMOCODE pro as a non-redundant IO device

Maximum number of IO devices

You can connect a maximum number of 256 IO devices to the two integrated PN/IO
interfaces. The station numbers range from 1 to 256 and must be unique at both the PN/IO
interfaces, i.e. they must not be assigned to a station more than once.

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 411
Communication
12.13 System redundancy

Configuring system redundancy with PROFINET IO

Requirements
In the example below, you will configure a redundant-system PROFINET configuration with
redundant I/Os as discussed in diagram "S7-400 H system with redundant I/Os" in the
previous chapter.
The PROFIBUS elements have been excluded from this example. Please refer to manual
Fault-tolerant S7-400H systems
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/1186523) for basic instructions on
configuring H systems.

Procedure
Set up a new H station in the SIMATIC Manager and open "HW Config" for the station.
1. Insert a rack 400 (e.g. UR2-H) for redundant controllers.
2. Insert a CPU 400-H PN/DP (e.g. CPU 4174-5H PN/DP).
3. Network the Ethernet interface in the normal way and set the IP parameters.
4. Configure a power supply module and the H-Sync modules.
5. Copy the station that you have set up: To do this, select the station and then select
command Edit → Copy followed by command Edit → Paste.
6. Configure SIMOCODE pro V PN as a redundant IO device by dragging the IO devices in
the normal way to one of the two IO systems. The modules will be connected as
redundant units (to both PROFINET lines) as standard.

Figure 12-12 SIMOCODE pro V PN as a redundant I/O unit in HW Config

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

412 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Communication
12.13 System redundancy

There are two methods by which you can connect SIMOCODE pro V PN as a non-redundant
IO device:
● Configure a SIMOCODE pro V PN as a redundant IO device as described above and
then navigate to the tab card labeled "Redundancy" in the module properties dialog. By
activating the checkbox, you can assign the IO device to a single IO system and thus to a
single CPU.

Figure 12-13 "Redundancy" tab card in module properties screen

Configure the SIMOCODE pro V PN specifically as a non-redundant IO at the relevant IO

system.

Figure 12-14 SIMOCODE pro V PN connected as a non-redundant device

Note
H systems and separate subnets
IO devices are connected as redundant units only if the two PROFINET I/O systems of the H
system are in the same subnet. As an alternative, each CPU can be networked with a
different subnet. In this case, the IO devices will always be connected as non-redundant
units.

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 413
Communication
12.13 System redundancy

Note
Shared device function
The system redundancy function is not available when the "Shared Device Function" is used.

Note
Product version of SIMOCODE pro V PN basic unit
System redundancy is supported by product version *E05* and higher of
SIMOCOCE pro V PN with firmware version V1.2.

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

414 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Communication
12.13 System redundancy

Possible topologies
You can also combine PROFINET-based system redundancy with other PROFINET
functions.
System redundancy with media redundancy:

Figure 12-15 Sample configuration for system redundancy with MRP

① S7-400H system
② SCALANCE X400 (non-redundant IO device)
③ SIMOCODE pro V PN (non-redundant/redundant-system IO device)
③ SIMOCODE pro V PN (MRP, non-redundant/redundant-system IO device)

Note
Response monitoring time of IO devices
RT communication is interrupted (station failure) if the reconfiguration time setting of the ring
is higher than the response monitoring time setting of the IO devices.
For this reason, make sure that the response monitoring time of the IO devices is set to a
high enough value. This also applies to IO devices configured with MRP outside the ring.

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 415
Communication
12.14 Diagnostics

12.14 Diagnostics

Diagnosis - Overview
When an error occurs, the defective IO device generates a diagnostics alarm and sends it to
the IO controller. To respond to errors with a defined (programmed) response, this alarm
calls a corresponding part in the user program (e.g. in the case of SIMATIC S7: organization
block OB 82 for the diagnostics alarm).
SIMOCODE pro V PN provides the diagnostics as channel diagnostics data records.
Channel diagnostics data records are generated as an alarm for
● Selected signals (see Chapter Data record 92 - Device diagnostics (Page 560), PNIO
diagnostics column, marked with "1")
● Warnings
● Faults
● Device faults.

Diagnostic status
The channel diagnostics is transmitted with different diagnostics states:
● Maintenance required:
● Maintenance demand (maintenance requested):
All SIMOCODE pro monitoring functions with "warn" configured as their response are
transmitted with this diagnostics status.
● Failure:
All SIMOCODE pro monitoring functions with "trip" configured as their response are
transmitted with this diagnostics status.

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

416 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Communication
12.14 Diagnostics

Configuring the diagnostics response

The diagnostics response is configured with the SIMOCODE ES 2007 configuration
software. The global enable of the diagnostics can be set for the following events under
"PROFINET Parameters → Diagnostics":

Diagnostics for process events

Selected diagnostics events are transmitted with the "maintenance required" diagnostics
status.
See also Chapter Data record 92 - Device diagnostics (Page 560), diagnostics events
marked "1" in the "PNIO diagnostics" column.

Diagnostics for process warnings

All SIMOCODE pro monitoring functions in which the response has been configured with
"warn" are transmitted with the "maintenance demand" diagnostics status.

Diagnostics for process faults

All SIMOCODE pro monitoring functions with "trip" configured as their response are
transmitted with the "fault" diagnostics status.

Diagnostics for device faults

Diagnostics events that can occur in connection with defective hardware or incorrect
parameterization are also transmitted with the "fault" diagnostics status.
The response of the different monitoring functions can be configured individually. Depending
on the function, the following can be selected by configuration:
● Deactivated: There is no response. No diagnostics are produced.
● Signaling: The diagnostics event is entered in data record 92 and is displayed in the
"Faults/Warnings/Events" online dialog box of SIMOCODE ES. No diagnostics alarm is
triggered.
● Warning: A diagnostics alarm is generated with the "maintenance demand" diagnostics
status.
● Tripping: A diagnostics alarm is generated with the "fault" diagnostics status.

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 417
Communication
12.14 Diagnostics

Evaluating diagnostics with SIMATIC S7 300/400 and STEP 7 V5

Diagnostics with STEP 7 HW Config

In the online display of STEP 7 HW Config, after selection of the corresponding module (in
this case: SIMOCODE pro V PN), the status of the module is determined with the "module
status" function.
The following statuses are represented in the overview:

Table 12- 1 Module statuses in diagnostics with STEP 7 HW Config

Symbol representation Status in HW Config Online Possible cause with SIMOCODE

in HW Config Online
Module does not exist SIMOCODE shut down or not
accessible on the bus
Module defective Fault is pending
Maintenance required Warning is pending
Maintenance required Event it pending
OK None

The detailed diagnostics is displayed as follows on the "IO device diagnostics" tab card
under "Channel-specific diagnostics":

Table 12- 2 Detailed diagnostics with STEP 7 HW Config

Slot Channel No. Error

1: I/O address 0 Error text, e.g. "Execution of ON
command"

Diagnostics in the STEP 7 user program

With PROFINET IO, you can perform diagnostics in the user program via system function
modules.
Possibilities of diagnostics evaluation in the S7 user program:
PROFINET IO uses a non-manufacturer-specific structure for data records with diagnostics
information. Diagnostics information are only formed for defective components. Two ways in
which you can evaluate the diagnostics of SIMOCODE pro V PN via PROFINET are shown
below.
You will find more information and detailed examples in the programming manual
"PROFINET IO - from PROFIBUS DP to PROFINET IO"
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/19289930), Chapter 8 "Diagnostics in
the STEP 7 User Program."

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

418 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Communication
12.14 Diagnostics

Evaluating diagnostics alarms with SFB 54 "RALRM" in OB 82

SIMOCODE pro V PN as a diagnostics-capable IO device detects both internal faults (e.g. of
hardware components) and events relating to the motor feeder and generates a diagnostics
alarm to which you can respond using an alarm OB.
Initial information on the cause and class of the error is already available, based on the OB
number and start information for the fault event.
You can then obtain detailed information on the error event in this error OB with the SFB 54
"RALRM" (read supplementary alarm information).

Note
STEP 7 online help
You will find a detailed explanation of SFB 54 "RALRM" in the STEP 7 Online Help.

Alarm processing
On process warnings, process faults, and device faults, SIMOCODE pro V PN makes
diagnostic interrupt requests to the CPU (on both the raised and the cleared event). The
precondition is that the diagnostics response has been enabled for these events in the
device parameterization (see Section "Configuring the diagnostics response" above).
The operating system calls the OB 82 based on the diagnostics request. The local variables
of OB 82 contain the logical base address and four bytes of diagnostics data about the
SIMOCODE pro V PN device in question.
If you have not programmed OB 82, the CPU will switch to the "STOP" status.
Reading diagnostics data records with SFB 52 "RDREC" in OB 1
With SFB 52 "RDREC," you read the data record with number INDEX from the
SIMOCODE pro V PN IO Device addressed by means of ID. ID contains the logical address
with which SIMOCODE pro V PN was configured in STEP 7 HW Config.
Example:
If you want to obtain diagnostic information with the 0xE00A diagnostics data record for the
pending faults from SIMOCODE pro V PN at the device level, INDEX = W#16#E00A.
With the MLEN variable, you specify the maximum number of bytes to be read. For this
reason, you select the target area RECORD to be at least the same size as MLEN.
The "true" value of the VALID output parameter indicates that the data record has been
successfully transferred to the target area RECORD. In this case, the output parameter LEN
has the length of the read data in bytes.

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 419
Communication
12.14 Diagnostics

If an error occurs during data record transmission, this will be displayed in the "ERROR"
output parameter. In case of an error, "ERROR = true" is set and the error data will be
contained in the "STATUS" output parameter.

Note
STEP 7 online help
You will find a detailed explanation of SFB 52 "RDREC" in the STEP 7 Online Help.

Note
Complete diagnostics information from SIMOCODE pro V PN
Note that reading the diagnostics data records 0xCXXX only ever provides the pending
diagnostics.
You can evaluate the complete diagnostics information of SIMOCODE pro V PN by reading
data record 92 (0x005C).

You will find more information and detailed examples in Chapter 8 of the programming
manual "PROFINET IO - from PROFIBUS DP to PROFINET IO"
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/19289930).

Addressing levels
PROFINET IO defines different addressing levels via which diagnostics information of the IO
devices can be accessed. You will find more information in Chapter 5 of the programming
manual "PROFINET IO - from PROFIBUS DP to PROFINET IO"
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/19289930).
Diagnostics information from SIMOCODE pro V PN is evaluated at the addressing level for
the slot.

Overview of the diagnostics data records

Table 12- 3 Diagnostics data records at slot level

Diagnostics data record No. Diagnostic status

0xC010 Maintenance required
0xC011 Maintenance demand
0xC00A Fault
0xC00C All (maintenance required, maintenance demand,
fault)

Example:
● Reading the diagnostics data record 0xC00C provides all pending diagnostics information
(maintenance required, maintenance demand, fault).
● Reading the diagnostics data record 0xC011 provides all pending diagnostics information
with the "maintenance demand" diagnostics status at slot level.

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

420 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Communication
12.14 Diagnostics

Structure of the diagnostics data records

Data blocks, diagnostics data records

In the following description, the main structure of the diagnostics data records at slot level
(0xC010, 0xC011, 0xC00A) is described with the individual data blocks:

Table 12- 4 Data blocks, diagnostics data records

BlockType 2 bytes
BlockLength 2 bytes
BlockVersion 2 bytes
API (Application Process Identifier) 4 bytes
SlotNumber 2 bytes
SubslotNumber 2 bytes
ChannelNumber 2 bytes
ChannelProperties 2 bytes
USI (User Structure Identifier) 2 bytes
Number of repeats = number of entries
ChannelNumber 2 bytes
ChannelProperties 2 bytes
ChannelErrorType 2 bytes

Data block "BlockType"

Table 12- 5 Data block "BlockType"

BlockType Meaning
0x0010 Diagnostics data record
0x0001 Alarm transport channel 1
0x0002 Alarm transport channel 2

Data block "BlockLength"

In the "BlockLength" data field, the number of the following bytes of the diagnostics data
record is coded. This is the length of the diagnostics data record without the number of bytes
for the data fields "BlockType" and "BlockLength," which each have a length of 2 bytes.

Data block "BlockVersion"

Table 12- 6 Data block "BlockVersion"

BlockVersion Value Meaning

BlockVersionHigh 0x01 First value of the version number, 0x01
BlockVersionLow 0x01 Version number, always 0x01 in the case of
SIMOCODE pro

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 421
Communication
12.14 Diagnostics

Data block "API"

API (Application Process Identifier): SIMOCODE pro uses the standard API 0.

Data blocks "SlotNumber," "SubslotNumber"

As a compact PROFINET IO Device, SIMOCODE pro V PN has the following structure:

Table 12- 7 Data blocks "SlotNumber," "SubslotNumber"

Designation SlotNumber SubslotNumber

Head module 0x0000 0x0001
- Interface 0x8000
- Port 1 0x8001
- Port 2 0x8002
I/O module 0x0001 0x0001
PROFIsafe 1) 0x0002 0x0001

1) Only in conjunction with fail-safe DM-F PROFIsafe expansion module

Data block "ChannelNumber"

Table 12- 8 ChannelNumber

ChannelNumber Meaning
0x0000 - 0x7FFF Manufacturer-specific
0x8000 Submodule

Data block "ChannelProperties"

Table 12- 9 ChannelProperties

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
.Type
.Acc.
.Qualifier
.Specifier
.Direction

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

422 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Communication
12.14 Diagnostics

Data block "ChannelProperties.Type (Bit 0 -7)"

Table 12- 10 ChannelProperties.Type (Bit 0 - 7)

Value Meaning
0 If ChannelNumber has the value 0x8000
1 1 bit
2 2 bits
3 4 bits
4 8 bits
5 16 bits
6 32 bits
7 64 bits

Data block "ChannelProperties.Accumulative (bit 8)"

Table 12- 11 ChannelProperties.Accumulative (bit 8)

Value Meaning
0 No channel error group signal
1 Channel error group signal (more than one channel affected)

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 423
Communication
12.14 Diagnostics

Combination of ChannelProperties.Qualifier (bit 9/10) and ChannelProperties.Specifier

(bit 11/12)

Maintenance Maintenance Specifier Meaning Diagnostics in user programs

Required Bit 9 Demanded Bit 10 Bit 12/11 SIMATIC S7 300 and
SIMATIC S7 400
0 0 00 All lower-level diagnostics are no Evaluation of diagnostic
longer pending interrupts with SFB54 in the
OB82
01 Diagnostics active Evaluation of diagnostic
interrupts with SFB54 in the
OB82 read data records with
SFB52
10 Diagnostics no longer active Evaluation of diagnostic
interrupts with SFB54 in the
OB82
11 Status signal - only possible for Evaluation of diagnostic
manufacturer-specific errors interrupts with SFB54 in the
OB82
0 1 00 Reserved -
01 Maintenance required is active Evaluation of diagnostic
interrupts with SFB54 in the
OB82 read data records with
SFB52
10 Maintenance required no longer Evaluation of diagnostic
active interrupts with SFB54 in the
11 Maintenance required no longer OB82
active - all others still active

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

424 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Communication
12.14 Diagnostics

Combination of ChannelProperties.Qualifier (bit 9/10) and ChannelProperties.Specifier

(bit 11/12) (continued)

Maintenance Maintenance Specifier Meaning Diagnostics in user programs

Required Bit 9 Demanded Bit 10 Bit 12/11 SIMATIC S7 300 and
SIMATIC S7 400
1 0 00 Reserved -
01 Maintenance demand is active Evaluation of diagnostic
interrupts with SFB54 in the
OB82 read data records with
SFB52
10 Maintenance demand no longer active Evaluation of diagnostic
11 Maintenance demand no longer active interrupts with SFB54 in the
- all others still active OB82
1 1 00 Reserved -
01 Graded diagnostics is active Evaluation of diagnostic
interrupts with SFB54 in the
OB82 read data records with
SFB52
10 Graded diagnostics no longer active Evaluation of diagnostic
11 Graded diagnostics no longer active - interrupts with SFB54 in the
all others still active OB82

Data block "ChannelProperties.Specifier (Bit 11/12)"

Table 12- 12 ChannelProperties.Specifier (bit 11/12)

Value Meaning Diagnostics in user programs SIMATIC S7 300

and SIMATIC S7 400
00 Reserved -
01 Pending diagnostics Evaluation of diagnostic interrupts with SFB54 in
the OB82 read data records with SFB52
10 Cleared event and no further events Evaluation of diagnostic interrupts with SFB54 in
11 Cleared events, but other events remain the OB82

Data block "ChannelProperties.Direction (bits 13 - 15)"

Table 12- 13 ChannelProperties.Direction (bit 13 - 15)

Value Meaning
000 Manufacturer-specific
001 Input
010 Output
011 Input/Output
100 - 111 Reserved

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 425
Communication
12.14 Diagnostics

Data block "ChannelErrorType"

The ChannelErrorType does not indicate the "Fault" status. For this purpose, there is the
PNIO diagnostics status for the raised alarm: Maintenance Required, Maintenance
Demanded, Failure.

Table 12- 14 ChannelErrorType

ChannelErrorType Meaning
0x0009 Error 1)
0x0010 Parameterization error 1)
Error of the PROFINET interface
0x8000 Data transmission not possible
0x8001 Incorrect neighborhood
0x8002 Loss of redundancy
0x8003 Loss of synchronization (bus end)
0x8004 Loss of clock synchronization (device end)
0x8005 Slave-to-slave traffic connection error
0x8008 Error in network component
0x8009 Timebase error
Device diagnostics
0x1000 Execution ON command
0x1001 Execution stop command
0x1002 Feedback (FB) ON
0x1003 Feedback (FB) OFF
0x1004 Stalled positioner
0x1005 Double 0
0x1006 Double 1
0x1007 End position
0x1008 Antivalence
0x100A Cold start (TPF)
0x100B Power failure (UVO)
0x100C Operational protection OFF (OPO)
0x1021 Unbalance
0x1022 Overload
0x1023 Overload + Loss of phase
0x1024 Thermistor overload
0x1025 Thermistor short circuit
0x1026 Thermistor open circuit
0x1027 Internal ground fault
0x1028 EM/EM+ External ground fault
0x1029 EM+ open circuit
0x1030 TM2 out of range
0x102A EM+ short circuit
0x102B TM1 trip level T>

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

426 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Communication
12.14 Diagnostics

ChannelErrorType Meaning
0x102C TM1 sensor error
0x102D TM1 out of range
0x102E TM2 trip level T>
0x102F TM2 sensor error
0x1040 Trip level I>
0x1041 Trip level I<
0x1042 Trip level P>
0x1043 Trip level P<
0x1045 Trip level cos phi<
0x1047 Trip level U<
0x1048 AM1 trip level 0/4-20mA>
0x1049 AM1 trip level 0/4-20mA<
0x104A AM2 trip level 0/4-20mA>
0x104B AM2 trip level 0/4-20mA<
0x104C Stalled rotor
0x1055 Test trip
0x1057 Number of starts>
0x105B AM1 open circuit
0x105C AM2 open circuit
0x105D DM-F safety-related tripping
0x1061 DM-F wiring
0x1062 DM-F cross circuit
0x1070 External fault 1
0x1071 External fault 2
0x1072 External fault 3
0x1073 External fault 4
0x1074 External fault 5
0x1075 External fault 6

1) Further details of the cause of error can be obtained by reading data record 92 "Device
diagnostics."

Data block "User Structure Identifier (USI)"

Table 12- 15 User Structure Identifier (USI)

USI Meaning
0x0000 - 0x7FFF Manufacturer-specific diagnostics
0x8000 Channel diagnostics
0x8002 Extended channel diagnostics
0x9000 - 0x9FFF Profile-specific

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 427
Communication
12.14 Diagnostics

Example of the diagnostics data records

The following example shows the content of the data record 0xC010 with the pending fault
"execution of ON command":

Table 12- 16 Content of data record 0xC010 for the pending fault "execution ON command"

BlockType 0x0010: Diagnostics data record

BlockLength 0x0016: Block length 22 bytes
BlockVersion 0x0101: always 0x0101 in the case of SIMOCODE
API 0x00000000: always 0 in the case of SIMOCODE
SlotNumber 0x0001: Slot 1 - I/O address
SubslotNumber 0x0001: Sub-slot 1
ChannelNumber 0x8000: Submodule
ChannelProperties 0x0800: Pending diagnostics
USI (User Structure Identifier) 0x8000: Channel diagnostics
ChannelNumber 0x0000: always 0 in the case of SIMOCODE
ChannelProperties 0x6804: Pending diagnostics
ChannelErrorType 0x1000: Execution ON command

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

428 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Communication
12.15 Data records

12.15 Data records

Reading and writing data records in the STEP7 user program

With SFB 52 "RDREC," you read the data record with number INDEX from the
SIMOCODE pro V PN IO Device addressed by means of ID.
ID contains the logical address with which SIMOCODE pro V PN was configured in STEP 7
HW Config.
Example:
SIMOCODE pro V PN was configured in STEP 7 HW Config with basic type 2 (I address
0 / O address 0).
You want to read data record 94 - measured values.

SFB "RDREC"
INDEX: W#16#005E Data record 94 - measured
values (0x005E)
ID: DW#16#0 Logical address 0
LEN: W#16#00AC Data record length 172 bytes (0x00AC)
With SFB 53 "WRREC," you read the data record with number INDEX into the
SIMOCODE pro V PN IO device addressed by means of ID.
ID contains the logical address with which SIMOCODE pro V PN was configured in STEP 7
HW Config.
Example:
SIMOCODE pro V PN was configured in STEP 7 HW Config with basic type 2 (I address
16 / O address 16).
You want to write data record 95 - service data/statistical data (data record length 148
bytes (0x0094)).

SFB "WRREC"
INDEX: W#16#005F Data record 95 - service data/statistical
data (0x005F)
ID: DW#16#F Logical address 16
LEN: W#16#0094 Data record length 148 bytes (0x0094C)

Note
STEP 7 online help
You will find a detailed explanation of SFB 52 "RDREC" in the STEP 7 Online Help.

An overview of the data records is provided in Chapter Data formats and data records
(Page 551).

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 429
Communication
12.16 PROFIenergy

12.16 PROFIenergy

PROFIenergy - definition
PROFIenergy, a protocol defined by the PROFINET User Organization, lays the foundations
for a vendor-neutral, universal system for flexible, short-term, and intelligent shutdown of
individual loads or whole production units.

PROFIenergy - functions supported

With the PROFIenergy data record index 0x80A0, SIMOCODE pro V PN supports the
following PROFIenergy functions of device class type 3 "Switching and measuring devices
without their own energy-saving level":

Table 12- 17 PROFIenergy - functions supported

Service Service-ID Meaning

Start_Pause 0x01 Switching off the motor in "remote"
mode
End_Pause 0x02 Possible to switch on the motor again
Query_Modes 0x03 Energy-saving modes
- list of modes - Query the supported energy-saving
- get mode modes
- Read out the energy-saving mode
PEM_Status 0x04 Read out of the PROFIenergy status
PE_Identify 0x05 Read out of the supported
PROFIenergy services
Query_Measurement 0x10 Measured values
- get measurement list - Query the list of supported measured
- get measurement values values
- Read out the supported measured
values

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

430 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Communication
12.16 PROFIenergy

Start_Pause
The "Start_Pause" command result in direct shutdown of the motor and activation of the OFF
command. This command only affects the control station PLC/PCS [PN] on the precondition
that the commands of this control station are enabled in the relevant mode. It therefore only
has an effect if the control commands of this control station are also active. The "PE
command Start_Pause pending" status is output.
If the motor is already switched off, the "PE energy-saving mode active" status is output. In
this status, the LED "device" flashes green on the basic unit.

Note
Command "Start_Pause"
Use of this function is not meaningful in conjunction with the "overload" control function
because this does not have any control station for routine switch-off and switch-on.

Minimum pause time

A pause time is transferred with the "Start_Pause" command. SIMOCODE pro V PN
executes this command if the pause time is greater than the minimum pause time configured
in the device. The minimum pause time of the motor is configured with the "SIMOCODE ES"
software under "PROFIenergy." The minimum pause time is preset to the smallest possible
value 0.1 s. You can increase the minimum pause time if executing the command in longer
pauses is convenient for technological reasons.

End_Pause
The "End_Pause" command results in the stop command being canceled at the PLC/PCS
control station and the motor being switched on again via enabled control stations.

Note
Command "End_Pause"
The command to switch on has to be output again because subsequent automatic switch-on
is not performed.

Note
Switching on the motor in the paused condition
If the PLC/PCS control station is disabled, the motor can also be switched on in the paused
condition.

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 431
Communication
12.16 PROFIenergy

Query_Measurement
Depending on the use of the current measuring or the current-voltage measuring module,
the following measured values are supported:

Table 12- 18 Query_Measurement

Measurement-ID PROFIenergy identifier SIMOCODE pro identifier Unit

4 Voltage (a-b) Voltage U_L12 V V
5 Voltage (b-c) Voltage U_L31 V V
6 Voltage (c-a) Voltage U_L31 V V
7 Current (a) Phase current I_L1 A A
8 Current (b) Phase current I_L2 A A
9 Current (c) Phase current I_L3 A A
33 Current average (abc) Average phase current I_L A A
34 Active power (total) Active power P W
36 Apparent power (total) Apparent power S VA
37 Power factor (total) Cos phi -
200 Active energy import Energy W Wh
(total)

Function blocks for SIMATIC S7

The application description "Saving Energy with SIMATIC S7 and ET200 S"
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/41986454), which also contains an
example program for using PROFIenergy functions, is available on the Internet service portal
of Siemens AG, Industry Automation and Drives Technologies. You can also make use of
the blocks from the example to implement PROFIenergy functions in conjunction with
SIMOCODE pro V PN.
In the application description in Chapter 4.2 "FB 815 PE_START_END functionality," you will
find the description of the block with which the "PE_START_Pause" or "PE_END_Pause"
commands can be directly transferred to an IO device.
With the FB 815 "PE_START_END" function block, you can transfer the "START_Pause" or
"END_Pause" commands directly to SIMOCODE pro V PN.
For use of further functions, in Chapter 4.3 "FB 816 PE_CMD functionality" you will find a
universal function block with which you can transfer further commands of the PROFIenergy
profile (e.g. Query_Modes, PEM_Status, PE_Identify, Query_Measurement).
You will also find the structure of the command and response data of the FB 816 in Chapter
4.4 "Response Data" of the application description "Saving Energy with SIMATIC S7 and
ET200 S."

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

432 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Communication
12.17 Further communication functions via Ethernet

12.17 Further communication functions via Ethernet

OPC basics
The OPC Foundation (an interest group of renowned manufacturers for definition of standard
interfaces) has defined numerous software interfaces over the past years to standardize the
flow of information from the process level to the management level. In the past, the various
OPC specifications have been drawn up in line with the different requirements within an
industrial application.
Based on the experience of these classic OPC interfaces, the OPC Foundation has defined
a new platform with the name OPC Unified Architecture (UA). The aim of this new standard
is generic description and standardized access to all information that has to be exchanged
between systems and/or applications.
What is OPC?
In the past, OPC was a collection of software interfaces for data exchange between PC
applications and process devices. These software interfaces were defined according to the
rules of Microsoft COM (component object model) and can therefore be easily integrated on
Microsoft operating systems. COM or DCOM (Distributed COM) provides the functionality of
interprocess communication and organizes information exchange between applications,
including across computer boundaries (DCOM).
An OPC client (COM client) can therefore exchange information with an OPC server (COM
server) using mechanisms of the Microsoft operating system.
The OPC server provides process information of a device at its interface. The OPC client
connect to the server and can access the data offered.
The consequence of using COM or DCOM is that the OPC server and clients can only run
on a Windows PC or in the local area network and usually have to implement communication
with the corresponding automation system via proprietary protocols. This practice, in
particular, results in additional communication and software layers that increase the
configuration effort and complexity.
To resolve the above restrictions in practice and to meet the additional requirements, the
OPC Foundation has defined a new platform with the name OPC Unified Architecture, which
provides a standardized basis for exchanging information between components and
systems. OPC-UA will also be available as an IEC 62541 standard and will thus form the
basis for other international standards.

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 433
Communication
12.17 Further communication functions via Ethernet

To summarize, OPC-UA offers the following features:

● Use of open and non-platform-specific protocols for network communication.
● Internet access and communication through firewalls.
● Integrated access control and security mechanisms at the protocol and application level.

Figure 12-16 Block diagram of OPC-UA

Configuring the SIMOCODE pro V PN OPC-UA server - Requirements

Activating the OPC-UA server

The default setting the OPC-UA server is "not active." For activation, the parameter
"PROFINET Parameters → OPC-UA Server Activated" must be set.

Note
Restarting the communication interface
Each change to the "Activate OPC-UA server" parameter requires that the communication
interface be restarted.
A new start of the communication interface interrupts all Ethernet and PROFINET links and
reestablishes them afterward.

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

434 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Communication
12.17 Further communication functions via Ethernet

Setting the IP parameters

To enable a link to be established via OPC-UA, SIMOCODE pro V PN must have valid IP
parameters.
Example of the URL of the SIMOCODE pro V PN-OPC-UA server:
opc.tcp://192.168.0.2:4840, where 192.168.0.2 is the IP address of SIMOCODE pro V PN.
The IP parameters, consisting of IP address, subnet mask, and router can be configured with
SIMOCODE ES 2007 and transferred to the device.
If SIMOCODE pro V PN does not obtain these parameters in another way (e.g. from the
controller via PROFINET IO), the "Overwrite IP parameters in device" parameter must be
activated under "PROFINET Parameters → IP Parameters."

Connecting to the SIMOCODE pro OPC-UA server

Introduction
An OPC-UA client can access process values in the hierarchical namespace of the
SIMOCODE pro V PN-OPC-UA server.
To enable this, the OPC-UA server and the OPC-UA client authorize each other by
exchanging certificates. You can additionally encrypt the data traffic.
The SIMOCODE pro V PN-OPC-UA server classes every certificate of an OPC-UA clients as
"trustworthy" by default.

Note
Configuring the connection on the client side
You can obtain information directly from the manufacturer of the software that is to access
the data of the SIMOCODE pro V PN-OPC-UA server via OPC-UA.

Note
OPC-UA server certificate
With each change of the SIMOCODE pro V PN IP address, a unique OPC-UA certificate with
a validity of five years is created.

Supported OPC-UA services of the SIMOCODE pro V PN OPC-UA server

SIMOCODE pro V PN supports the following OPC-UA services:
● SecurityPolicy:
– None
– Basic128Rsa15
● MessageSecurityMode:
– None
– Sign&Encrypt.

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 435
Communication
12.17 Further communication functions via Ethernet

Explanation of security settings:

The following table shows the security functions supported by the SIMOCODE pro V PN-
OPC-UA server, which have to be set in the connection configuration of the OPC-UA clients:

Table 12- 19 Security functions that have to be set in the connection configuration of the OPC-UA
client

Security Policy MessageSecurityMode

None 1) None
Basic128Rsa152 2) SignAndEncrypt 3)

1) Exchange of certificates is deactivated

2) The data packets are exchanged unsecured between the client and server after the
certificate has been verified
3) The data packets are signed and encrypted with the certificates.

DANGER
Unsecured connection between the client and the server possible!
Use the setting "none" for test purposes only.
During productive operation, use at least the following settings for secure communication
between the client and server:
• Security Policy: Basic128Rsa15
• Message Security Mode: Sign.

Note
Requirement for certificate exchange in SIMOCODE pro V PN
The precondition for certificate exchange in SIMOCODE pro V PN is the presence of a valid
time (see Section "Time-of-day synchronization by the NTP procedure" below).

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

436 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Communication
12.17 Further communication functions via Ethernet

Access to SIMOCODE pro V PN-OPC-UA variables

The OPC-UA server integrated into SIMOCODE pro V PN provides the following structured
objects in its address space to which the client can have read access and, in some case,
write access. The precondition for write access is a secure connection with Security Policy
"Basic128Rsa15" and Message Security Mode "SignAndEncrypt."

Table 12- 20 Access to SIMOCODE pro V PN-OPC-UA variables

Tag Designation Read / write

Diagnostics Device diagnostics Read
Diagnostic events
Diagnostic status
Diagnostic trips
Diagnostic warnings
Measured values Measured values Read
Statistics Display and statistical data Read
Acyclic receive Receive data (OPC-UA Receive) Read / write
Analog Value Analog value
Bit 0.0 - 1.7 Digital receive data
Acyclic send Send data (OPC-UA Send) Read
Bit 0.0 - 1.7 1) Digital send data

1) The current assignment of the OPC-UA send data is displayed as it was configured in
SIMOCODE pro V PN.
You will find a detailed description of each variable in Chapter OPC UA variables
(Page 529).
Write access is only possible via a secure connection.

Table 12- 21 Quantities and update interval

Maximum number of clients Max. 2

Maximum number of subscriptions (subscribable variables) 20

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 437
Communication
12.17 Further communication functions via Ethernet

Configuration of the OPC-UA receive and send data with SIMOCODE ES 2007

OPC-UA Receive
The bit information that is to be transferred via OPC-UA Receive to SIMOCODE is also
assigned by configuring with SIMOCODE ES 2007.
OPC-UA variables (write):
● Receive data byte 0, bits 0-7
● Receive data byte 1, bits 0-7
● Receive data byte 2/3
Data to SIMOCODE pro V PN:

Figure 12-17 OPC-UA receive 0, 1, 2/3 function blocks

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

438 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Communication
12.17 Further communication functions via Ethernet

Example:
The motor is to be switched on and off via the control station "PC/OPC-UA."
OPC-UA - Acyclic receive - Bit 0.0 → Motor ON<
OPC-UA - Acyclic receive - Bit 0.1 → Motor OFF
OPC-UA - Acyclic receive - Bit 0.2 → Motor ON>

Figure 12-18 Example of motor control OPC-UA

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 439
Communication
12.17 Further communication functions via Ethernet

Note
Write access
Write access is only possible if a secure connection is used with Security policy
"Basic128Rsa15" and with Message security mode "SignAndEncrypt."

Note
Non-maintained command mode
Do not use the "non-maintained command mode" for motor control with OPC-UA!

Connection monitoring
If the OPC-UA connection breaks off, all OPC-UA receive variables in SIMOCODE pro will
be deleted. In SIMOCODE pro, no fault is triggered.
If you want to monitor for failure of the OPC-UA connection of SIMOCODE pro, you can
achieve that as follows:
Example:
Makes sure that Bit 0.7 is set statically at the client end. If the connection is interrupted, this
will activate the "PLC/PCS" fault in "remote" mode (mode selector S1=1, S2=1).

Figure 12-19 Example of connection monitoring

OPC-UA send
The bit information that is to be transferred to the client via OPC-UA Send is also defined by
configuring with SIMOCODE ES 2007.
OPC-UA variables (read):
● Send data byte 0, bits 0-7
● Send data byte 1, bits 0-7

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

440 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Communication
12.17 Further communication functions via Ethernet

Data from SIMOCODE PRO V PN:

Figure 12-20 OPC-UA send 0, 1 function blocks

Example:
The feedback of the switching state of the motor is transferred to the client via OPC-UA.
When selecting the variables in the OPC-UA client, the assigned status signals are then as
follows:

Figure 12-21 Configuration of OPC-UA send in SIMOCODE ES (see also table below)

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 441
Communication
12.17 Further communication functions via Ethernet

Figure 12-22 Representation in the object directory of the SIMOCODE pro V PN-OPC-UA server (see
also table below)

Configuration of OPC-UA send in SIMOCODE ES Representation in the object directory of the

SIMOCODE pro V PN-OPC-UA server
OPC-UA send - Bit 0.0: "Status ON<" Acyclic Send → Status - On <
OPC-UA send - Bit 0.1: "Status Off" Acyclic Send → Status - Off
OPC-UA send - Bit 0.2: "Status ON>" Acyclic Send → Status - On >
... ...
OPC-UA send - Bit 0.3: "Not connected" Acyclic Send → Not connected
OPC-UA send - Bit 1.7: "Not connected" Acyclic Send → Status - On <

Note
Restarting the communication interface
Each change to the configuration of the OPC-UA send data requires that the communication
interface be restarted.
A new start of the communication interface interrupts all Ethernet and PROFINET links and
reestablishes them afterward.

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

442 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Communication
12.17 Further communication functions via Ethernet

Web diagnostics (web server)

SIMOCODE pro V PN offers you with the web diagnosis the possibility of calling the
following information of the motor feeder from a PG/PC using an HTTP client:
● Status information
● Faults, warnings, events
● Measured values
● Service and statistical data
● Error buffer, error protocol.
The following functions for controlling the motor feeder is available for authorized users after
log-on with user name and password:
● Receive (switching the motor on and off, not available in non-maintained command
mode)
● Acknowledging faults
● Execution of the test function.
Number of web server connections: One connection is supported.
Web diagnostics are available in Chinese, Russian, English and German.

Activating the web server:

The default setting of the web server is "not active." To activate it, the "PROFINET
Parameters →Web Server Activated" parameter must be active.

Note
Restarting the communication interface
Each change to the configuration of the web server requires that the communication
interface be restarted.
A new start of the communication interface interrupts all Ethernet and PROFINET links and
reestablishes them afterward.

Setting the IP parameters:

To enable a link to be established via the web, SIMOCODE pro V PN must have valid IP
parameters. You can find out how to makes these settings in Chapter Configuration of
further properties of SIMOCODE pro V PN as an IO device (Page 403).

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 443
Communication
12.17 Further communication functions via Ethernet

Configuration of the user name and password:

If the functions are to be used to control the motor feeder, a user must additionally be
configured with the user name and password. User name and password must not contain
any blanks. Configuration is performed under "PROFINET Parameters →
OPC UA server / web server"

Note
Control station PC/OPC-UA
The control via the web uses the SIMOCODE pro control station PC/OPC-UA [HMI, for
which the configured enabled commands are then active.

Web browser
For access to the HTML pages in the SIMOCODE pro V PN, you need a web browser.
The following web browsers are suitable for communication with SIMOCODE pro etc.:
● Internet Explorer (recommended version: Version 10)
● Firefox (recommended version: Version 29).

Note
Connection to a web client
Connection to a web client is supported.

Settings of the web browser for access to the information

Check the following settings, which are a precondition for access to the information made
available via the web:
● To load the diagnostics data, Javascript must be activated in the Internet browser.
● The browser must support frames.
● Cookies must be permitted.
● The browser should be set in such a way that whenever it accesses a page, it
automatically loads the current data from the server.
In the Internet Explorer 8, you will find these settings with menu "Tools" → "Internet Options"
→ "General" tab card → "Temporary Internet Files" group box → "Settings" button.
To use a firewall in your PG/PC, the following port must be enabled for use of the web
diagnostics. "http Port 80/TCP" or, in the case of secure connections, "https Port 443/TCP."

Logging on to the web server

You can only use functions for controlling the motor feeder after you have logged on to the
web server with user name and password. Only then are the buttons with a controlling
function active.
The log-on dialog box is only available via a secure https connection.

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

444 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Communication
12.17 Further communication functions via Ethernet

Certificates:
To enable the web browser to access the web server via an https connection, certificates are
mutually exchanged. On each change of the SIMOCODE pro V PN IP address, a unique
certificate with a validity of five years is created for this purpose.
You can also install a CA certificate with a validity up to 2037 via the integrated web server
as follows: Click the "Download certificate" link in the header of the home page and open or
install the CA certificate.

Note
Installing the SIMOCODE pro CA certificate
You only have to install the SIMOCODE pro CA certificate once for the web client inquestion
and it then applies to all SIMOCODE pro V PN devices.
If you do not install the CA certificate, the web browser will signal a certificate error when the
connection is established to SIMOCODE pro V PN.

Time-of-day synchronization by the NTP procedure

SIMOCODE pro V PN has a non-battery-backed realtime clock that can be synchronized via
the NTP procedure.
Network Time Protocol (NTP) is the implementation of a TCP/IP protocol for time
synchronization in network. The NTP procedure uses hierarchical time synchronization, that
is, an external clock (e.g. SICLOCK TM or a PC in the network) is used for synchronization.
The device transmits time-of-day queries to the configured NTP server at configured time
intervals. Using the responses of the server, the time of day of the non-battery-backed clock
is synchronized in SIMOCODE pro. This ensures that a synchronized time of day is available
shortly before the supply voltage is switched on.
The NTP synchronization is configured with the "SIMOCODE ES 2007" configuration
software under "PROFINET Parameters → NTP procedure/synchronization."
The following settings are also made:
● NTP server address: Enter the NTP server address when the "Activate NTP
synchronization" checkbox is selected.

Note
Adoption of the NTP server address
The NTP server address is not adopted until the device has been restarted or after the
supply voltage has been switched off and on again.

● Cyclic update interval: Time interval in seconds at which synchronization of the time of
day with the NTP server is performed
● Time shift: Time difference in minutes between UTC time (UTC = Universal Time
Coordinated) and the time in the device.

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 445
Communication
12.17 Further communication functions via Ethernet

Examples:
● Time slice of CET (Central European Time): +60 min
● Time shift for CST (Central Standard Time, North America): -360 min.
If an NTP server address has not been configured or a server was not found on the network,
you can also set the time of day using SIMOCODE ES. To do this, proceed as follows:
Select the "Set time ( = PC time)" command in the "Target system → Command" dialog box
in SIMOCODE ES.

Note
Command execution
Commands are executed immediately.

If a valid time of day is available (either synchronized by NTP or set via SIMOCODE ES), the
entries in the error buffer/error protocol (i.e. log) will be additionally displayed with the time of
day. In addition, the "Clock set (NTP)" and "Clock synchronized (NTP)" messages are
displayed.

Note
Access via OPC-UA
A valid time of day is necessary to be able to use the "Sign" and "SignAndEncrypt" OPC-UA
Security Modes.

Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP)

SNMP is a network protocol for monitoring and controlling network elements (e.g. switches).
SIMOCODE pro V PN supports the Ethernet service SNMP. MIB-2 (RFC1213) is supported.
R/W objects change be changed with SNMP tools and are stored in the basic unit.
After replacement with a new basic unit from the factory or a basic unit that has undergone a
general reset, the R/W objects will be in the factory settings.

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

446 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
Mounting, wiring, interfaces 13
In this chapter
This chapter contains information about installation and wiring of individual SIMOCODE pro
components.

Target groups
This chapter addresses the following target groups:
● Technicians
● Electricians
● Service and maintenance personnel

Required knowledge
You require basic general knowledge about SIMOCODE pro.

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 447
Mounting, wiring, interfaces
13.1 General information about mounting and wiring

13.1 General information about mounting and wiring

Safety information

WARNING
Hazardous voltage!
Can cause electric shock and burns.
Ensure the system and devices are disconnected from the power supply before starting
work.

Note
Please also observe the SIMOCODE pro operating instructions (enclosed with the devices),
which are listed in the table below:
You can also view or download the operating instructions for SIMOCODE pro at
Manuals/operating instructions (http://www.siemens.com/sirius/manuals)

Table 13- 1 SIMOCODE pro operating instructions

Device Order No.

Basic unit 3ZX1012-0UF70-3AA1
Operator panel 3ZX1012-0UF72-1AA1
Operator panel adapter 3ZX1012-0UF78-2BA1
Operator panel with display 3ZX3012-0UF72-2AA1
Digital module 3ZX1012-0UF73-1AA1
DM-F Local fail-safe digital module 3ZX1012-0UF73-1BA1
DM-F PROFIsafe fail-safe digital module 3ZX1012-0UF73-3BA1
Expansion modules 3ZX1012-0UF75-1BA1
Current measuring module 3ZX1012-0UF71-1AA1
Current / voltage measuring module 3ZX1012-0UF77-1BA1
Door adapter 3ZX1012-0UF78-1AA1
Decoupling module 3ZX1012-0UF71-5BA1
Initialization module 3ZX1012-0UF70-2AA1

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

448 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Mounting, wiring, interfaces
13.1 General information about mounting and wiring

Mounting lugs for screw attachment

Note
Two different fixing lugs are provided for screw mounting for technical reasons:
• For basic unit, expansion modules, decoupling module: Order No. 3RP1903
• For current measuring modules and current / voltage measuring modules, 45 mm and
55 mm wide: Order No. 3RV2928-0B

Removable terminals

Note
The removable terminals are mechanically coded and will only fit in a certain position!

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 449
Mounting, wiring, interfaces
13.2 Mounting

13.2 Mounting

13.2.1 Mounting basic units, expansion modules, and decoupling module

You can attach these system components as follows:
● Snap-on mounting onto a 35 mm standard mounting rail, without tools
● Snap-on mounting of basic units (no tools required) onto current measuring modules of
45 mm and 55 mm in width (up to 100 A) with integrated standard mounting rail
● Screw mounting with mounting lugs (order No: 3RP1903) and screws for mounting on a
level surface. These fixing lugs are only suitable for basic units, expansion modules and
the decoupling module!

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

450 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Mounting, wiring, interfaces
13.2 Mounting

Figure 13-1 Mounting of basic units, expansion modules and the decoupling module

13.2.2 Digital modules DM-F Local and DM-F PROFIsafe

See "Failsafe Digital Modules SIMOCODE pro Safety" manual
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/50564852), Chapter "Mounting and
connection."

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 451
Mounting, wiring, interfaces
13.2 Mounting

13.2.3 Mounting of current measuring modules

You can attach these system components as follows:
● Current measuring modules up to 100 A: On a standard mounting rail or by screw
mounting with mounting lugs (order No: 3RV2928-0B) and screws for mounting on a level
surface. These mounting lugs are suitable only for current measuring modules and
current / voltage measuring modules! For current measuring modules up to 25 A you will
require an additional 25 mm spacer.
● Current measuring modules up to 200 A: Rail-mounting or screw attachment
● Current measuring modules up to 630 A: Screw attachment.

Figure 13-2 Mounting the current measuring modules

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

452 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Mounting, wiring, interfaces
13.2 Mounting

13.2.4 Mounting the current / voltage measuring modules

You can attach these system components as follows:
● Current / voltage measuring modules up to 100 A: On a standard mounting rail or by
screw mounting with mounting lugs (order No: 3RV2928-0B) and screws for mounting on
a level surface. These mounting lugs are suitable only for current / voltage measuring
modules (and current measuring modules)! For current / voltage measuring modules up
to 25 A you will require an additional spacer, 25 mm in length.
● Current / voltage measuring modules up to 200 A: Standard mounting rail or screw
attachment.
● Current / voltage measuring modules up to 630 A: Screw attachment.

Figure 13-3 Mounting the current / voltage measuring modules

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 453
Mounting, wiring, interfaces
13.2 Mounting

13.2.5 Operator panel and operator panel with display

The operator panels are designed for installation in the front panels of motor control centers,
for example, or in control cabinet doors.

Note
Product version of the operator panel with display
For use with the SIMOCODE pro V PN basic unit, an operator panel with display version
*E07* is required.

To install, proceed as follows:

Table 13- 2 Sequence for installing the operator panel / operator panel with display

Step Description
1 Make a cutout, e.g. in the front panel or control cabinet door. Dimensions: See figures below.
2 Position the operator panel or the operator panel with display in the cutout.
3 Snap the four mounting brackets onto the operator panel.
4 Lock the operator panel in position by tightening the four screws on the securing brackets.

Figure 13-4 Mounting the operator panel

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

454 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Mounting, wiring, interfaces
13.2 Mounting

Figure 13-5 Mounting the operator panel with display

WARNING
Tightening torque of the screws
To ensure that the panel will function correctly and is sealed to comply with IP54, the
tightening torque of the screws provided must not be set too high when mounting and the
seal must be properly fitted.

Note
Only a connecting cable is required for connecting the operator panel with display to
SIMOCODE pro (see Chapter An overview of system components (Page 52)). Additional
wiring for the power supply or ground is not required.

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 455
Mounting, wiring, interfaces
13.2 Mounting

13.2.6 Exchanging a 3UF52 operator panel for a 3UF720 operator panel

To exchange a 3UF52 operator panel for the smaller 3UF720 operator panel, proceed as
follows:

Table 13- 3 Exchanging a 3UF52 operator panel for a 3UF720 operator panel

Step Description
1 Unscrew the four mounting bracket screws and remove the 3UF52 operator panel from the front panel or
control cabinet door.
2 Ensure that the dimensions of the cutout in the front panel or control cabinet door measure 91.5 + 0.5 mm
(width) and 54.5 + 0.5 mm (height) (see figure).
3 Slide the seal provided onto the operator panel adapter (see figure below).
4 Position the operator panel adapter in the cutout.
5 Position the operator panel in the adapter.
6 Snap the four mounting brackets onto the operator panel.
7 Lock the operator panel in position by tightening the four mounting bracket screws (see figure and safety
information!).

Figure 13-6 Mounting the operator panel adapter (1)

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

456 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Mounting, wiring, interfaces
13.2 Mounting

Figure 13-7 Mounting the operator panel adapter (2)

WARNING
Tightening torque of the screws
To ensure that the panel will function correctly and is sealed to comply with IP54, the
tightening torque of the screws provided must not be set too high when mounting and the
seal must be properly fitted

Note
A SIMOCODE pro 3UF7 system operator panel is not compatible with
SIMOCODE DP 3UF5, and vice versa.

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 457
Mounting, wiring, interfaces
13.3 Wiring

13.3 Wiring

13.3.1 Basic units, expansion modules and the decoupling module

Basic units, expansion modules and the decoupling module have removable terminals. You
do not have to detach the wiring to exchange these devices!

Figure 13-8 Removable terminals on basic units, expansion modules and the decoupling module

Note
The removable terminals are mechanically coded and will only fit in a certain position!

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

458 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Mounting, wiring, interfaces
13.3 Wiring

Cables
The cable cross sections are the same for all devices. The following table shows conductor
cross sections, stripped lengths, and tightening torques of the cables for the removable
terminals:

Table 13- 4 Cable cross sections, stripped lengths and tightening torques of the cables

Removable terminals Screwdriver Tightening torque

PZ2 / Ø 5 to 6 mm TORQUE:
7 to 10.3 LB.IN
0.8 to 1.2 Nm
Stripped length Conductor cross section
Solid 2x 0.5 to 2.5 mm2 / 1x 0.5 to 4 mm2
2x AWG 20 to 14 / 1x AWG 20 to 12

Finely stranded 2x 0.5 to 1.5 mm2 / 1x 0.5 - 2.5 mm2

with / without end 2x AWG 20 to 16 / 1x AWG 20 to 14
sleeve

Supplying the inputs of the basic unit

There are three possibilities for supplying the inputs:
● a): 24 V DC internal
● b): 24 V DC external. Input 3 is the reference potential, i.e. three inputs are available.
● c): 24 V DC external. Only possible for a basic unit with 24 V DC supply voltage!

Figure 13-9 24 V DC for powering the inputs

All inputs work reaction-free, i.e. the signal statuses on neighboring inputs do not influence
each other.

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 459
Mounting, wiring, interfaces
13.3 Wiring

Pin assignment of basic unit

The following table shows the pin assignments of the removable terminals:

Table 13- 5 Pin assignments of the removable terminals of the basic unit

Connection Assignment
Upper terminals
1 Common potential for relay outputs 1
and 2
2 Relay output OUT1
3 Relay output OUT2
4 Digital input IN3
5 Digital input IN4
T2 Thermistor connection (binary PTC)
6 Relay output OUT3
7 Relay output OUT3
8 24 V DC only for IN1 to IN4
9 Digital input IN1
10 Digital input IN2
T1 Thermistor connection (binary PTC)
Lower terminals
A1 Supply voltage terminal 1
A2 Supply voltage terminal 2
PORT 1 PROFINET connection 1
PORT 2 PROFINET connection 2
SPE System shielding

Pin assignment for the removable terminals of the basic unit

Proceed as follows:

Table 13- 6 Wiring the removable terminals of the basic unit

Step Description
1 Connect the cables to the upper and lower terminals.
2 Connect the equipment shield to the SPE terminal.

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

460 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Mounting, wiring, interfaces
13.3 Wiring

Basic unit connection example

Figure 13-10 Basic unit connection example

Supplying the inputs of the digital module

● Digital module with 24 V DC input supply
● Digital module with 110 to 240 V AC / DC input supply

Figure 13-11 Supplying the inputs of the digital module

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 461
Mounting, wiring, interfaces
13.3 Wiring

Digital module pin assignment

The following table shows the pin assignments of the removable terminals:

Table 13- 7 Pin assignments of the removable terminals of the digital module

Connection Assignment
Upper terminals
20 Common potential for relay outputs 1
and 2
21 Relay output OUT1
22 Relay output OUT2
23 Digital input IN1
24 Digital input IN2
25 N / M for IN1 to IN4
Lower terminals
26 Digital input IN3
27 Digital input IN4
SPE System shielding

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

462 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Mounting, wiring, interfaces
13.3 Wiring

Digital module connection example

Figure 13-12 Digital module connection example

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 463
Mounting, wiring, interfaces
13.3 Wiring

Ground-fault module pin assignment

The following table shows the pin assignments of the removable terminals:

Table 13- 8 Pin assignments of the removable terminals of the ground-fault module

Connection Assignment
Upper terminals
40 Input C1 residual current transformer
43 Input C2 residual current transformer
Lower terminals
SPE System shielding

NOTICE
Types of ground-fault module
The 3UF7 500-1AA00-0 ground-fault module requires the 3UL22 residual current
transformer.
The 3UF7 510-1AA00-0 ground-fault module requires the 3UL23 residual current
transformer.

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

464 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Mounting, wiring, interfaces
13.3 Wiring

Ground-fault module connection example

Figure 13-13 Ground-fault module connection example

The output signal of the 3UL22/3UL23 transformers is connected to terminals C1 and C2 of

the corresponding ground-fault module.
Information on installing the 3UL23 residual current transformer: See Manual "3UG4/3RR2
Monitoring Relay" (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/50426183/133300),
Chapter 14.2.5.

NOTICE
Routing the connecting cables / using shielded cables
To avoid interference injection, which could result in incorrect measurements, route these
connecting cables parallel and twisted, if possible, or use shielded cables.

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 465
Mounting, wiring, interfaces
13.3 Wiring

Temperature module pin assignment

The following table shows the pin assignments of the removable terminals:

Table 13- 9 Pin assignments of the removable terminals of the temperature module

Connection Assignment
Upper terminals
50 Input T3, temperature sensor 1
51 Input T3, temperature sensor 2
52 Input T3, temperature sensor 3
53 Input T2, temperature sensor 1
54 Input T2, temperature sensor 2
55 Input T2, temperature sensor 3
Lower terminals
56 Input T1, temperature sensor 1 to 3
57 Input T1, temperature sensor 1 to 3
SPE System shielding

You can connect up to three 2-wire or three 3-wire temperature sensors.

● 2-wire temperature sensors: Connect a jumper between the T2 terminals and T3
terminals.
● 3-wire temperature sensors: Assign terminals 56 and 57 twice when three sensors are
used.

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

466 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Mounting, wiring, interfaces
13.3 Wiring

Temperature module connection example

Figure 13-14 Temperature module connection example

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 467
Mounting, wiring, interfaces
13.3 Wiring

Analog module pin assignment

The following table shows the pin assignments of the removable terminals:

Table 13- 10 Pin assignments of the removable terminals of the analog module

Connection Assignment
Upper terminals
30 Analog input IN1+
31 Analog input IN2+
33 Analog input IN1+
34 Analog input IN2+
Lower terminals
36 Analog output OUT+
37 Analog output OUT+
SPE System shielding

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

468 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Mounting, wiring, interfaces
13.3 Wiring

Analog module connection example

Figure 13-15 Analog module connection example

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 469
Mounting, wiring, interfaces
13.3 Wiring

Decoupling module pin assignment

The following table shows the pin assignments of the removable terminals:

Table 13- 11 Pin assignments of the removable terminals of the decoupling module

Connection Assignment
Upper terminals
—
Lower terminals
SPE System shielding

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

470 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Mounting, wiring, interfaces
13.3 Wiring

Decoupling module connection example

Figure 13-16 Circuit diagram of decoupling module

Figure 13-17 Decoupling module - configuration with basic unit and current / voltage measuring
module

Wiring the removable terminals of the expansion modules and the decoupling module
Connect the equipment shield to the SPE terminal.

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 471
Mounting, wiring, interfaces
13.3 Wiring

13.3.2 Digital modules DM-F Local and DM-F PROFIsafe

Wiring
See "Failsafe Digital Modules SIMOCODE pro Safety" manual
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/50564852), Chapter "Mounting and
connection."

WARNING
Loss of safety function is possible
For the 24 V DC power supply, always use an SELV or PELV power supply unit!

Note
Surge suppressors are required for inductive loads.

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

472 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Mounting, wiring, interfaces
13.3 Wiring

Pin assignment for digital module DM-F Local

The following table shows the pin assignments of the removable terminals:

Table 13- 12 Terminal assignment of the removable terminals of the DM-F Local digital module, 24 V DC version and
110 to 240 V UC version

Connection Assignment
Upper terminals
60, 66 Digital module, relay outputs 1 (60) and 2 (66)
61, 67 Relay enabling circuit 1, NO
62, 68 Relay enabling circuit 2, NO
Y12, Y22 Sensor input channel 1, channel 2
T1, T2 Supply for sensor inputs (24 V DC, pulsed)
Y33 Start button (start after rising and falling edge)
Y34 Feedback circuit
Lower terminals
A1 (+) Power supply connection 110 to 240 V AC/DC or
+24 V DC
A2 (-) N or -24 V
M Ground (reference potential for sensor inputs,
3UF7320-1AU00-0 only)
1 Cascade input
T3 Supply for sensor inputs (24 V DC, static)
SPE Protective earth

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 473
Mounting, wiring, interfaces
13.3 Wiring

Pin assignment for digital module DM-F PROFIsafe

The following table shows the pin assignments of the removable terminals:

Table 13- 13 Pin assignment of the removable terminals of the DM-F PROFIsafe digital module, 24 V DC version and
110 to 240 V UC version

Connection Assignment
Upper terminals
80, 86 Digital module, relay outputs 1 (80) and 2
(86)
81, 87 Relay enabling circuit 1, NO
82, 88 Relay enabling circuit 2, NO
83 (IN1) Digital module, inputs 1, 2, 3
85 (IN2)
89 (IN3)
84 Digital module supply, inputs 1 to 3, 24 V DC
90 (T) Feedback circuit supply (FBC) 24 V DC
91 (FBC) Feedback circuit
Lower terminals
A1 (+) Power supply connection 110 to
240 V AC/DC or +24 V DC
A2 (-) N or -24 V
M Ground (reference potential inputs, only
3UF7320-1AU00-0)
1 Cascade input
T3 Supply for sensor inputs (24 V DC, static)
SPE Protective earth

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

474 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Mounting, wiring, interfaces
13.3 Wiring

Digital module DM-F Local connection example

DM-F Local with cross-circuit detection, 2 NCs, 2 channels, monitored start

WARNING
Fuse protection required!
Always install the prescribed fuse protection.
This ensures safe tripping in the event of a fault.

Figure 13-18 Connection example for "DM-F Local with cross-circuit detection, 2 NCs, 2 channels,
monitored start"

For further connection examples: See "Failsafe Digital Modules SIMOCODE pro Safety"
manual (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/50564852)

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 475
Mounting, wiring, interfaces
13.3 Wiring

Digital module DM-F PROFIsafe connection example

WARNING
Fuse protection required!
Always install the prescribed fuse protection.
This ensures safe tripping in the event of a fault.

Figure 13-19 Block diagram of DM-F PROFIsafe

Connection examples: See "Failsafe Digital Modules SIMOCODE pro Safety" manual
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/50564852)

13.3.3 Current measuring module

Selection
Select the appropriate current measuring module according to the motor current:
● Through-hole technology up to 200 A: The cables of the three phases are passed through
the feed-through openings.
● Bus connection system from 20 A to 630 A, also for direct connection to Siemens
contactors.

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

476 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Mounting, wiring, interfaces
13.3 Wiring

The following table shows the various current measuring modules:

Table 13- 14 Current measuring modules

Current measuring module Main circuit connection

3UF7100-1AA00-0, 0.3 to 3 A Through-hole technology
Ø feed-through openings: 7.5 mm
3UF7101-1AA00-0, 2.4 to 25 A
Ø feed-through openings: 7.5 mm
3UF7102-1AA00-0, 10 - 100 A
Ø feed-through openings: 14 mm

3UF7103-1AA00-0, 20 to 200 A
Ø feed-through openings: 25 mm

3UF7103-1BA00-0, 0 to 200 A Bus connection system

Conductor cross section: 16 to 95 mm²,
AWG 5 to 3/0

3UF7104-1BA00-0, 63 to 630 A
Conductor cross section:
50 to 240 mm², AWG 1/0 to 500 kcmil

Note
When connecting or routing the cables of the individual phases of the main circuit, ensure
correct assignment of the phases on the current measuring module and correct routing
direction!
Please note the information in the operating instructions. You will also find the operating
instructions for SIMOCODE pro at Manuals/operating instructions
(http://www.siemens.com/sirius/manuals)

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 477
Mounting, wiring, interfaces
13.3 Wiring

13.3.4 Current / voltage measuring modules

Select the appropriate current / voltage measuring module according to the motor current.
● Through-hole technology up to 200 A: The cables of the three phases are passed through
the feed-through openings.
● Bus connection system from 20 A to 630 A, also for direct connection to Siemens
contactors.
The following figure shows the various current / voltage measuring modules:

Table 13- 15 Current / voltage measuring modules

Current / voltage measuring module Main circuit connection

3UF7110-1AA00-0, 0.3 - 3 A Through-hole technology
Ø feed-through openings: 7.5 mm
3UF7111-1AA00-0, 2.4 - 25 A,
Ø feed-through openings: 7.5 mm

3UF7112-1AA00-0, 10 - 100 A
Ø feed-through openings: 14 mm

3UF7113-1AA00-0, 20 - 200 A
Ø feed-through openings: 25 mm

3UF7113-1BA00-0, 20 to 200 A Bus connection system

Conductor cross section:
16 to 95 mm², AWG 5 to 3/0

3UF7114-1BA00-0, 63 to 630 A
Conductor cross section:
50 to 240 mm²,
AWG 1/0 to 500 kcmil

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

478 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Mounting, wiring, interfaces
13.3 Wiring

Safety information

Note
Measurement of voltage or power-related variables
Connect the main circuit L1, L2, L3 of a current / voltage measuring module to the clamps
(L1, L2, L3) of the removable terminal with a 3-core cable. The supply cables may require
additional cable protection, for example, via short-circuit proof cable or fuses.

Note
Routing of cables
When connecting or routing the cables of the individual phases of the main circuit, ensure
correct assignment of the phases on the current / voltage measuring module and correct
routing direction! Please note the information in the operating instructions.
You will also find the operating instructions for SIMOCODE pro at Manuals/operating
instructions (http://www.siemens.com/sirius/manuals)

Removable terminals
The following table shows cable cross sections, stripped lengths and tightening torques of
the cables for the removable terminals:
The following figure shows the pin assignment of the removable terminals:

Table 13- 16 Cable cross sections, stripped lengths and tightening torques of the cables

Removable Screwdriver Tightening torque

terminals
PZ2 / Ø 5 to 6 mm TORQUE:
7 to 10.3 LB.IN
0.8 to 1.2 Nm
Stripped length Conductor cross section
Solid 2x 0.5 to 2.5 mm2 / 1x 0.5 to 4 mm2
2x AWG 20 to 14 / 1x AWG 20 to 12

Finely stranded with / 2x 0.5 - 1.5 mm2 / 1x 0.5 - 2.5 mm2

without end sleeve 2x AWG 20 to 16 / 1x AWG 20 to 14

The following figure shows the pin assignment of the removable terminals:

Figure 13-20 Pin assignment of the terminals of the current / voltage measuring modules

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 479
Mounting, wiring, interfaces
13.3 Wiring

13.3.5 Measuring current with an external current transformer (interposing transformer)

Description
SIMOCODE pro can be operated with external current transformers. The secondary cables
of the current transformer are looped through the three feed-through openings of the current
measuring module, and short-circuited. The secondary current of the external current
transformer is the primary current of the SIMOCODE pro current measuring module.

Note
If the main circuit is using rated current, the secondary current of the current transformer
must be within the setting range of the current measuring module used!

Figure 13-21 Measuring current with an external 3UF18 current transformer

Transformation ratio
The transformation ratio is calculated using the following formula:

In the following examples, the displayed actual current flowing does not need to be
converted, even when an interposing transformer is used, since SIMOCODE pro only
outputs the proportional value, based upon the parameterized set current Is.

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

480 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Mounting, wiring, interfaces
13.3 Wiring

Technical data of the current transformer

● Secondary current: 1 A
● Frequency: 50 Hz/60 Hz
● Transformer rating: Recommended ≥ 2.5 VA, depending on the secondary current and
cable length
● Overcurrent factor: 5P10 or 10P10
● Accuracy class: 1

Example 1
● 3UF1868-3GA00 current transformer:
– Primary current: 820 A at nominal load
– Secondary current: 1 A.
● SIMOCODE pro with 3UF7100-1AA00-0 current measuring module, set current
0.3 A to 3 A. This means:
– The secondary current of the current transformer is 1 A at rated load and is, therefore,
within the 0.3 to 3 A setting range of the current measuring module used
– The set current Is to be parameterized in SIMOCODE pro is 1 A.

Figure 13-22 Example (1 of 2) for measuring current with an 3UF18 external current transformer

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 481
Mounting, wiring, interfaces
13.3 Wiring

Example 2
● 3UF1868-3GA00 current transformer:
– Primary current: 205 A at nominal load
– Secondary current: 0.25 A.
● SIMOCODE pro with 3UF7100-1AA00-0 current measuring module, set current
0.3 to 3 A. This means:
– The secondary current of the current transformer is 0.25 A at rated load and is,
therefore, not within the 0.3 to 3 A setting range of the current measuring module
used.
– The secondary current must be boosted by multiple looping of the secondary cables
through the feed-through openings of the current measuring module. Double-looping
results in 2 x 0.25 A = 0.5 A.
– The set current Is to be parameterized in SIMOCODE pro is 0.5 A.

Figure 13-23 Example (2 of 2) for measuring current with an external 3UF18 current transformer

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

482 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Mounting, wiring, interfaces
13.4 System interfaces

13.4 System interfaces

13.4.1 General

Information about the system interfaces

● SIMOCODE pro system components are connected to each other via the system
interfaces. The system interfaces are provided on the front and bottom of the devices.
● Connecting cables of different lengths are available for connecting the system
components.
● The PC cables and memory modules can be plugged directly into the system interface.
● The system is always configured according to the basic unit. Basic units have two system
interfaces:
– Lower/left: For outgoing connecting cable to the current measuring module.
– Front side: For outgoing connecting cables leading to an expansion module or
operator panel, or for PC cables, memory modules or addressing plugs.
● Current measuring modules have one system interface:
– Bottom or front: Incoming connecting cable from the basic unit.
● Expansion modules have 2 interfaces on the front.
– Left: For incoming connecting cables from the upstream expansion module or basic
unit SIMOCODE pro V.
– Right: For outgoing connecting cables leading to an expansion module or operator
panel, and for PC cables, memory modules or addressing plugs.
● Decoupling modules have 2 interfaces on the front:
– Left: For incoming connecting cable from the upstream expansion module or basic
unit.
– Right: Exclusively for the outgoing connecting cable to the current / voltage measuring
module.
● Operator panels have two system interfaces:
– Front side: For PC cables and memory modules
– Rear side: For incoming connecting cable from the upstream expansion module or
basic unit.
● System interfaces not in use are closed with the cover (see Closing the system interfaces
with the system interface cover (Page 491)).

WARNING
Hazardous voltage
Connect the system interfaces only when they are fully de-energized!

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 483
Mounting, wiring, interfaces
13.4 System interfaces

13.4.2 System interfaces on basic unit, expansion modules, decoupling module,

current measuring modules and current / voltage measuring modules

Examples of connection of system components to the system interface and system structure
Use the system interface cover to close system interfaces which are not in use (see closure
of system interfaces by means of the system interface cover Closing the system interfaces
with the system interface cover (Page 491).

WARNING
System interface on the operator panels (degree of protection IP54):
To ensure degree of protection IP 54
• Press the cover firmly into the socket as far as it will go when it is used for the first time!
• When fastening the operator panel with the screws supplied, do not apply an excessive
tightening torque.

WARNING
Hazardous voltage
Connect the system interfaces only when they are fully de-energized!

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

484 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Mounting, wiring, interfaces
13.4 System interfaces

The following figure shows an example of connecting system components to the system
interfaces - SIMOCODE pro V PN

Figure 13-24 Connecting system components to the system interface

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 485
Mounting, wiring, interfaces
13.4 System interfaces

Sequence for connecting cables to the system interface

Proceed as follows:

Table 13- 17 Connecting to the system interface

Step Description
1 Place the plug in the plug shaft, keeping it is as straight as possible. Ensure the locking
mechanisms of the connector slot audibly snap onto the connector enclosure.
2 System interfaces not in use can be closed using the system interface cover.

Figure 13-25 Procedure for connecting cables to the system interfaces

Safety information

Note
Only a current / voltage measuring module may be connected to the system interface on the
right of the decoupling module. Memory modules, addressing plugs or PC cables will not be
recognized there.

Note
Observe the color coding of the connecting cable (see diagram).

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

486 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Mounting, wiring, interfaces
13.4 System interfaces

13.4.3 System interfaces on the digital modules DM-F Local and DM-F PROFIsafe
See System Manual "Failsafe Digital Modules SIMOCODE pro Safety" manual
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/50564852), Chapter "Mounting and
connection."

13.4.4 System interfaces on the operator panel and the operator panel with display
The operator panel has two system interfaces:
● Rear system interface. This is not normally accessible on an integrated operator panel.
The incoming cable from the basic unit or expansion module is always connected here.
● Front system interface. This is normally accessible on an integrated operator panel.
Components are only connected directly when needed, and removed again after use.
These can be:
– Memory module
– PC cable for connecting a PC / PG
– Cover (if the system interface is not in use).

WARNING
Hazardous voltage
Connect the system interfaces only when they are fully de-energized!

WARNING
System interface on the operator panels (degree of protection IP54)
To ensure degree of protection IP54
• Press the cover firmly into the socket as far as it will go when it is used for the first time!
• When fastening the operator panel with the screws supplied, do not apply an excessive
tightening torque.

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 487
Mounting, wiring, interfaces
13.4 System interfaces

Sequence for connecting cables to the system interface of the operator panel and the operator panel
with display
Proceed as follows:

Table 13- 18 Connecting system components to the system interface

Step Description
1 Place the plug in the plug shaft, keeping it is as straight as possible. Ensure the locking
mechanisms of the connector slot audibly snap onto the connector enclosure.
The incoming connecting cable is connected on the rear.
2 Use the cover to close system interfaces that are not in use

Note
Throughout connection, you can place the cover on one of the two "park positions" (see
figure below).

Note
Observe the color coding of the connecting cable (see diagram).

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

488 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Mounting, wiring, interfaces
13.4 System interfaces

Figure 13-26 Sequence for connecting cables to the system interface of the operator panel

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 489
Mounting, wiring, interfaces
13.4 System interfaces

Figure 13-27 Sequence for connecting cables to the system interface of the operator panel with
display

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

490 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Mounting, wiring, interfaces
13.4 System interfaces

13.4.5 Closing the system interfaces with the system interface cover

Examples of closing the system interface with the system interface cover

Figure 13-28 Examples of closing the system interface with the system interface cover

WARNING
System interface on the operator panels (degree of protection IP54):
To ensure degree of protection IP 54
• Press the cover firmly into the socket as far as it will go when it is used for the first time!
• When fastening the operator panel with the screws supplied, do not apply an excessive
tightening torque.

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 491
Mounting, wiring, interfaces
13.4 System interfaces

13.4.6 Ethernet cable to RJ45 socket

The ETHERNET cable is connected to the basic unit.

NOTICE
Ethernet connector
Connect using only industrial Ethernet connectors, e.g.
• Siemens IE FC RJ45 PLUG 180 2x2, RJ45 connector (10/100MBIT/S) with robust metal
housing and Fast Connect connection method, for IE FC Cable 2x2 180° cable outlet,
order number 6GK1901-1BB10-2AA0 or
• Siemens IE FC RJ45 PLUG 90 2x2, RJ45 connector (10/100MBIT/S) with robust metal
housing and Fast Connect connection method, for IE FC Cable 2x2 90° cable outlet,
order number 6GK1901-1BB20-2AA0.

Sequence for connecting ETHERNET to the basic unit

Proceed as follows:

Table 13- 19 Connecting the ETHERNET cable to the basic unit

Step Description
1 Connect the Ethernet cable to the Ethernet interface 1 and/or Ethernet interface 2

The following connection options are available:

Figure 13-29 Connecting the Ethernet cable to the basic unit

● with connector IE FC RJ45 Plug 180 on interface 1 and/or interface 2 (left)

● with connector IE FC RJ45 Plug 90 on interface 1 (right).

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

492 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Mounting, wiring, interfaces
13.4 System interfaces

13.4.7 Installation guidelines for the PROFINET

PROFINET installation guidelines

Please also note the PROFINET installation guidelines of the PROFIBUS user organization.
These contain important information about planning, installing, and commissioning
PROFINET networks.

Publisher:
PROFIBUS-Nutzerorganisation e. V.
Haid-und-Neu-Strasse 7
76131 Karlsruhe / Germany
Phone: ++49 721 965 85 90
Fax: ++49 721 965 85 89
Internet: PI - PROFIBUS & PROFINET International Home (http://www.profibus.com)

PROFINET installation guidelines:

● PROFINET planning
Version: 1.04
Order No.: 8.061
Language: German
● PROFINET installation
Version: 1.0
Order No.: 8.071
Language: German
● PROFINET commissioning
Version: 1.01
Order No.: 8.081
Language: German
● PROFINET commissioning
Checklist version: 1.01
Order No.: 8.091
Language: German.

For an overview of the structure and configuration of Industrial Ethernet networks with
SIMATIC NET: See also "Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual" system manual
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/27069465)

Further information
See "SIMATIC NET PROFIBUS Networks" manual
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/1971286)

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 493
Mounting, wiring, interfaces
13.4 System interfaces

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

494 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
Commissioning and service 14
In this chapter
In this chapter, you will find information about how SIMOCODE pro is commissioned, how
components are replaced and how statistics are read.

Target groups
This chapter addresses the following target groups:
● Commissioning engineers
● Technicians
● Service and maintenance personnel

Required knowledge
You will require the following knowledge:
● Basic general knowledge about SIMOCODE pro
● Parameterization with SIMOCODE ES

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 495
Commissioning and service
14.1 General information about commissioning and service

14.1 General information about commissioning and service

Safety information

WARNING
Hazardous voltage!
Can cause electric shock and burns.
Before starting work, disconnect the system and the device from the power supply.

Note
Please also observe the following SIMOCODE pro operating instructions (enclosed with the
devices):

Table 14- 1 SIMOCODE pro operating instructions

Device Order No.

Basic unit 3ZX1012-0UF70-3AA1
Operator panel 3ZX1012-0UF72-1AA1
Operator panel adapter 3ZX1012-0UF78-2BA1
Operator panel with display 3ZX3012-0UF72-2AA1
Digital module 3ZX1012-0UF73-1AA1
DM-F Local fail-safe digital module 3ZX1012-0UF73-1BA1
DM-F PROFIsafe fail-safe digital module 3ZX1012-0UF73-3BA1
Expansion modules 3ZX1012-0UF75-1BA1
Current measuring module 3ZX1012-0UF71-1AA1
Current / voltage measuring module 3ZX1012-0UF77-1BA1
Door adapter 3ZX1012-0UF78-1AA1
Decoupling module 3ZX1012-0UF71-5BA1
Initialization module 3ZX1012-0UF70-2AA1
You will also find the operating instructions for SIMOCODE pro at Manuals/operating instructions
(http://www.siemens.com/industrial-controls/manuals)

Requirements
The following requirements must be fulfilled for commissioning and servicing:
● SIMOCODE pro is already installed and wired
● The motor is switched off.

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

496 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Commissioning and service
14.1 General information about commissioning and service

Parameterization methods
You can parameterize SIMOCODE pro as follows:
● With the memory module in which the parameters have already been saved from a basic
unit. The memory module is plugged into the system interface. If the memory module is
connected to the system interface and the supply voltage returns to the basic unit, the
basic unit will be automatically parameterized by the memory module. The parameters
can also be downloaded to the basic unit from the memory module by brief actuation of
the TEST / RESET button.
● With the SIMOCODE ES software via serial or USB interface: The PC / PG is connected
to the system interface with a PC cable.
● With an automation system and/or the SIMOCODE ES software via PROFINET: For this
purpose, the Ethernet cable is connected to Ethernet interface 1 or 2 of the basic unit or
to another free Ethernet interface in the network from which the basic unit can be
accessed via PROFINET (e.g. to a free RJ-45 socket of a switch).
● With the initialization module in which the parameters have already been saved from a
basic unit. The initialization module is permanently installed in the switchboard in a Motor
Control Center (MCC). If a withdrawable unit with a SIMOCODE pro V PN basic unit is
inserted into the MCC and the power supply returns to the basic unit, it will automatically
be parameterized by the initialization module.

Commissioning options
There are two commissioning options:
1. Standard case: SIMOCODE pro has not yet been parameterized and has the factory
setting
2. SIMOCODE pro has already been parameterized:
– The parameters have already been loaded into the basic unit.
– The parameters from a previous application still exist. Test whether the PROFINET
parameters (IP parameters, device name) and the device parameters, such as current
setting are correct for the new application. Change these accordingly, if necessary.

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 497
Commissioning and service
14.2 Commissioning

14.2 Commissioning

14.2.1 Step sequence

Please observe the information in Chapter General information about commissioning and
service (Page 496).
To commission SIMOCODE pro, proceed as follows:

Table 14- 2 Commissioning the basic unit

Step Description
1 Switch on the power supply. In a fault-free state, the following LEDS should light up green:
• "Device" (lights up)
• "PORT 1 / PORT 2" when the PROFINET cable is connected (lighted or flashing).
Continue with step 2.
Otherwise, carry out diagnostics according to the LED display. For more information, see Chapter
Diagnostics via LED display on the basic unit and on the operator panel (Page 500). Try to rectify the fault.
2 If you want to make SIMOCODE pro available to PROFINET, you must set the IP parameters and the
PROFINET device names. For more information, see Chapter Setting IP parameters and PROFINET
device name (Page 499).
3 Parameterize SIMOCODE pro or check the existing parameterization, e.g. with a PC on which
SIMOCODE ES software is installed. For this, connect the PC / PG to the system interface with the PC
cable (see the figure below).
4 Start SIMOCODE ES.

Figure 14-1 Connecting a PC to the basic unit

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

498 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Commissioning and service
14.2 Commissioning

14.2.2 Setting IP parameters and PROFINET device name

Setting IP parameters and PROFINET device name on a plant-specific basis

The setting of IP parameters and the PROFINET device name is a mandatory step for
communication via PROFINET.
These parameters can be set in different ways, depending on the needs of the plant
configuration.
For a detailed description of these options, see Chapter Configuration of further properties of
SIMOCODE pro V PN as an IO device (Page 403).

Setting IP parameters and PROFINET device name with SIMOCODE ES via PC cable
Proceed as follows:

Table 14- 3 Setting IP parameters and PROFINET device name with SIMOCODE ES via PC cable

Step Description
1 Plug the PC cable into the system interface.
2 Start SIMOCODE ES.
3 Open the "Switching device" > "Open Online" menu.
4 In the "Local device interface" tab, select the associated COM interface. Click OK to
confirm.
5 Open the "PROFINET parameters" dialog box.
6 Select "Overwrite IP parameters" and set the IP address, subnet mask, and router as
appropriate.
7 Select "Overwrite device name in device" and assign the device name.
8 Save the data in the basic unit with "Target System > Load to Device." IP parameters
and device name are now set.

Setting the PROFIsafe address on DM-F PROFIsafe

See Chapter Safety-oriented tripping (Page 341).

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 499
Commissioning and service
14.2 Commissioning

14.2.3 Set the time manually after switch-on or recovery of the supply voltage

Setting the timer with SIMOCODE ES

If the internal realtime clock of the devices is not automatically synchronized via NTP, you
can make the setting manually with SIMOCODE ES.
To do so, follow these steps:
Set the time manually after switch-on or recovery of the supply voltage

Step Description
1 Start SIMOCODE ES.
2 Establish an online connection with "Switching device → Open online."
3 Set the internal realtime clock of the device with "Target system → Command → Set time."

14.2.4 Diagnostics via LED display on the basic unit and on the operator panel
The basic unit and the operating panel have LEDs for displaying specific device states:

Table 14- 4 Diagnostics via LED display

LED Status Display Description Corrective measures for

faults
Device Device status Green Device ON _
Green – flickering Internal fault Send back the basic unit
Yellow Memory module recognized, _
TEST/RESET buttons control the
memory module
Yellow – flashing Read in memory module; factory settings _
restored (duration: 3 s)
Yellow – flickering Memory module programmed _
(duration: 3 s)
Red Device defective (also GEN. FAULT on) Replace the basic unit!
Red – flashing Memory module or expansion modules Reprogram/replace the
defective (also GEN. FAULT on - memory module, replace
flashing) the expansion modules
Off Supply voltage too low Check whether the
supply voltage is
connected/switched on
Flashing green PE energy saving mode active _
Bus Bus status Off No communication with the IO Controller Connect the bus or
of the PLC/PCS via PROFINET check PROFINET
parameters (IP
parameters, device
name)
Green Communication with the IO Controller of _
the PLC/PCS via PROFINET is active

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

500 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Commissioning and service
14.2 Commissioning

LED Status Display Description Corrective measures for

faults
Gen. Fault Fault status Red Fault pending; reset has been saved Rectify fault, e.g.,
overload
Red – flashing Fault pending; reset has not been saved _
Off No fault _
PORT1 (only Bus status Green Ethernet connection available _
on basic unit) Off No Ethernet connection available Check the Ethernet
connection and the
wiring
Flashing Station flash test for device location _
active
PORT2 (only Bus status Green Ethernet connection available _
on basic unit) Off No Ethernet connection available Check the Ethernet
connection and the
wiring
Flashing Station flash test for device location _
active

14.2.5 Diagnostics via LED display on the modules DM-F Local or DM-F PROFIsafe
See Chapter Technical data of the DM-F LOCAL digital module (Page 667) and Technical
data of the DM-F-PROFIsafe digital module (Page 669) or "Failsafe Digital Modules
SIMOCODE pro Safety" manual
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/50564852)

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 501
Commissioning and service
14.3 Service

14.3 Service

14.3.1 Preventive maintenance

Preventive maintenance - general information

Preventive maintenance is an important step towards avoiding faults and unforeseen costs.
Industrial plants require regular professional maintenance so that e.g. production losses due
to plant downtimes are avoided. Preventive maintenance ensures that all components are
always kept in perfect working order.

Reading out statistical data

SIMOCODE pro makes statistical data available that can, for example, be read out with
SIMOCODE ES under Target System → Service data / statistical data. For example, via
"Motor Operating Hours" and "Number of Starts", you can decide whether motor and/or
motor contactors should be replaced.

Figure 14-2 Reading out statistical data

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

502 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Commissioning and service
14.3 Service

14.3.2 Backing up and saving parameters

Always save the parameters in the memory module or in a SIMOCODE ES file. This
particularly applies if you replace a basic unit, or if you wish to transfer data from one basic
unit to another.

Saving parameters from the basic unit to the memory module

Note
This function will not be available if the "TEST/RESET" button has been disabled.

Proceed as follows:

Table 14- 5 Saving the parameters into the memory module

Step Description
1. Plug the memory module into the system interface. The "Device" LED lights up yellow for
approx. 10 seconds. During this time, press the "TEST/RESET" button for approx.
3 seconds. The parameters will be saved in the memory module. After successful data
transfer, the "Device" LED flickers yellow for approx. 3 seconds.
2. If necessary, unplug the memory module from the system interface.

Saving parameters from the basic unit to a SIMOCODE ES file

Note
This function will not be available if the "TEST/RESET" button has been disabled.

Proceed as follows:

Table 14- 6 Saving parameters to a SIMOCODE ES file

Step Description
1. Plug the PC cable into the system interface.
2. Start SIMOCODE ES.
3. Open the menu Target System → Load to PC. The parameters are loaded into the main
memory from the basic unit.
4. Open menu Switching Device → Save copy as ..... The parameters are saved from the main
memory into a SIMOCODE ES file.

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 503
Commissioning and service
14.3 Service

Saving parameters from the memory module to the basic unit

Note
This function will not be available if the "TEST/RESET" button has been disabled.

Proceed as follows:

Table 14- 7 Saving parameters from the memory module to the basic unit

Step Description
1. Plug the memory module into the system interface. The "Device" LED lights up yellow for
approx. 10 seconds. During this time, briefly press the "TEST / RESET" button. The
parameters will be transferred to the basic unit. After successful data transfer, the "Device"
LED flashes yellow for approx. 3 seconds.
2. If necessary, unplug the memory module from the system interface.

Note
If the memory module is plugged in, the parameters will be transferred from the memory
module to the basic unit when the supply voltage is switched on.

Saving parameters from a SIMOCODE ES file into the basic unit

Proceed as follows:

Table 14- 8 Saving parameters from a SIMOCODE ES file into the basic unit

Step Description
1. Plug the PC cable into the system interface.
2. Start SIMOCODE ES.
3. Open menu Switching Device → Open. The parameters from the SIMOCODE ES file are
loaded into the main memory.
4. Open menu Target System → Load to Switching Device. The parameters will be saved into
the basic unit from the main memory.

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

504 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Commissioning and service
14.3 Service

14.3.3 Replacing SIMOCODE pro components

Safety information

WARNING
Requirement
The main power for the feeder and the supply voltage for the basic unit must be switched
off before replacing current measuring modules and current / voltage measuring modules.

Note
Please observe the information contained in the operating instructions!
You will also find the operating instructions for SIMOCODE pro at Manuals/operating
instructions (http://www.siemens.com/industrial-controls/manuals)

Note
It is not necessary to detach the wiring from the removable terminals to replace the
components!

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 505
Commissioning and service
14.3 Service

Replacing the basic unit

Proceed as follows:

Table 14- 9 Replacing the basic unit

Step Description
1. Save the parameters. For information on this, see Chapter Backing up and saving
parameters (Page 503).
2. Switch off the main power for the unit feeder and the power supply for the basic unit.
3. Withdraw the PC cable if necessary, then remove the cover or the connecting cable from the
system interface.
Remove the PROFINET cable(s). Note which interface the cables are connected to.
4. Withdraw the removable terminals. You do not need to detach the wiring.
5. Dismantle the basic unit.
6. Withdraw the removable terminals from the new basic unit.
7. Mount the new basic unit.
8. Connect the wired, removable terminals.
9. Connect the cables to the system interfaces.
Connect the PROFINET cable(s). Make sure the connector(s) is/are connected to the same
PROFINET interface again.
10. Switch on the supply voltage for the basic unit.
11. Save the parameters into the basic unit. For information on this, see Chapter Backing up and
saving parameters (Page 503).
12. Switch on the main power for the unit feeder.

Replacing an expansion module or a decoupling module

Proceed as follows:

Table 14- 10 Replacing an expansion module or a decoupling module

Step Description
1. Switch off the main power for the feeder and switch off the power supply for the basic unit
and the DM-F.
2. Withdraw the PC cable if necessary, then remove the cover or the connecting cable from the
system interface.
3. Withdraw the removable terminals. You do not need to detach the wiring.
4. Remove the expansion module or decoupling module.
5. Withdraw the removable terminals from the new basic expansion module or decoupling
module.
6. Install the new expansion module or decoupling module.
7. Connect the wired, removable terminals.
8. Connect the cables to the system interfaces.
9. Switch on the power supply for the DM-F Local and the basic unit.
10. Switch on the main power for the unit feeder.

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

506 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Commissioning and service
14.3 Service

Replacing a DM-F
Proceed as follows:

Table 14- 11 Replacing a DM-F

Step Description
1 First, switch off the main power for the feeder and then the supply voltage for the basic unit
and the DM-F.
2 Withdraw the PC cable if necessary, then remove the cover or the connecting cable from the
system interface.
3 Withdraw the removable terminals. You do not need to detach the wiring.
4 Dismantle the DM-F.
5 Withdraw the removable terminals from the new DM-F.
6 Mount the new DM-F.
7 Connect the wired, removable terminals.
8 Connect the cables to the system interfaces.
9 DM-F PROFIsafe only:
Set the DIP switches for the PROFIsafe address according to the configuration in the F-
controller (see Chapter "Configuring the DM-F PROFIsafe and integrating it into the fail-safe
automation system" in "Failsafe Digital Modules SIMOCODE pro Safety" manual
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/50564852)).
10 Switch on the power supply for the DM-F and the basic unit.
11 DM-F LOCAL only:
Configure the DM-F LOCAL accordingly (see Chapter "Configuring the DM-F Local" in
"Failsafe Digital Modules SIMOCODE pro Safety" manual
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/50564852)).
12 Switch on the main power for the unit feeder.

Replacing the current measuring module and the current / voltage measuring module
Proceed as follows:

Table 14- 12 Replacing the current measuring module and the current / voltage measuring module

Step Description
1 Switch off the main power for the unit feeder and the power supply for the basic unit.
2 Pull out the connecting cable from the system interface.
3 Remove the removable terminal from the module as illustrated below (current / voltage
measuring modules only)
4 Disconnect the three cables of the three phases of the main circuit.
5 Replace the module.
6 Connect the three cables of the main circuit, leading them through the feed-hole openings.
7 Plug the removable terminals onto the module (current / voltage measuring modules only).
8 Connect the cable to the system interface.
9 Switch on the supply voltage for the basic unit.
10 Switch on the main power for the unit feeder.

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 507
Commissioning and service
14.3 Service

Figure 14-3 Replacing current / voltage measuring modules

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

508 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Commissioning and service
14.3 Service

14.3.4 Restoring factory settings

With the factory settings, all parameters are reset to the factory values.

Restoring the factory settings with the TEST/RESET button on the basic unit
Proceed as follows (also deletes any previous password setting!):

Table 14- 13 Restoring the factory settings with the "TEST/RESET" button

Step Description
1 Switch off the supply voltage for the basic unit.
2 Press the "TEST/RESET" button on the basic unit and keep it pressed.
3 Switch on the supply voltage for the basic unit. The "Device" LED is yellow.
4 Release the "TEST/RESET" button after approx. two seconds.
5 Press the "TEST/RESET" button again after approx. two seconds.
6 Release the "TEST/RESET" button after approx. two seconds.
7 Press the "TEST/RESET" button again after approx. two seconds.
8 The factory setting is restored.

Note
If any of the steps stated above are not carried out correctly, the basic unit will revert to
normal operation.

Note
This function is always active, irrespective of the "TEST/RESET keys disabled" parameter.

Restoring the factory settings with the SIMOCODE ES software

Requirement: SIMOCODE pro is connected to the PC / PG via PROFINET or via the system
interface and SIMOCODE ES is started.
Proceed as follows (resets to factory settings, excluding the password):

Table 14- 14 Restoring the factory settings with the SIMOCODE ES software

Step Description
1. Select menu item Switching device → Open online.
2. From the menu, select Target system → Command → Factory Settings.
3. Confirm with "Yes".
4. The factory setting is restored.

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 509
Commissioning and service
14.4 Reading our error buffer / error log (protocol)

14.4 Reading our error buffer / error log (protocol)

Timestamping in the error buffer is based on the operating hours (resolution: 1 s) of
SIMOCODE pro.
The "Error/Fault" and "Power - On" events are logged. Each of these events is given a time
stamp.
● Error/Fault: The last 21 errors are stored in a ring buffer; the incoming error (rising edge)
is always logged. An outgoing error (falling edge) will not be logged.
● Power on: If the most recent entry is "Power - On," this is not logged multiple times.
Instead, the error number is used as a power-on counter. Thus, the error buffer cannot be
deleted by frequent on/off operations.
Entry 1 is the most recent entry and entry 21 the oldest.
The data will be displayed via the "SIMOCODE ES" software.
Example:

Figure 14-4 Example of event logging using the "SIMOCODE ES" software

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

510 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Commissioning and service
14.4 Reading our error buffer / error log (protocol)

SIMOCODE pro has an error buffer in which the 21 most recent errors / faults and "Power -
On" events are recorded with a time stamp. Time stamps are based upon the operating
hours of the device (resolution 1 s), i.e. the amount of time that the device is supplied with
control supply voltage.
If there is a valid time (synchronized via NTP or set manually with SIMOCODE ES), the
events are additionally logged in the error buffer with date and time (realtime stamping).
Example:
The most recent "Power - On" event was logged at a device operating time of 17 days,
21 hours and 31 minutes. Therefore, at the moment of "Power - On", the device was
operating (supplied with voltage) for 17d 21h 31min. The "Number of starts >" fault was
logged at a device operating time of 18 days, 22 hours, 17 minutes, i.e. 24h 46min after the
most recent "Power - On."
When using a DM-F, the events "Enabling circuit closed" and "Enabling circuit open" are
logged for the DM-F Local and/or the DM-F PROFIsafe in a separate window:
● Time
● Event: "Enabling circuit closed" or "Enabling circuit open"
– Number:
Line 1: 200 or 202
Line 2: 201 or 203
– Text:
Line 1: "DM-F Local enabling circuit 0 → 1" or "DM-F PROFIsafe enabling circuit 0 → 1
Line 2 "DM-F Local enabling circuit 1 → 0" or "DM-F PROFIsafe enabling circuit 1 → 0..
The current DIP switch position of the DM-F Local and/or the DM-F PROFIsafe is displayed
under "DIP switch position DM-F during the last event".
See also Chapter Data record 72 - Error buffer (Page 558).

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 511
Commissioning and service
14.5 Event memory

14.5 Event memory

In addition to the error buffer, various events can be stored in the event buffer.
The following events are stored:
● Last event "DM-F enabling circuit closed"
● Last event "DM-F enabling circuit open"
● Initialization module read in
● Initialization module written.
See also Chapter Data record 73 - Event memory (Page 559).

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

512 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
Alarm, fault, and system events 15
In this chapter
In this chapter you will find information about troubleshooting.

Target groups
This chapter addresses the following target groups:
● Commissioning engineers
● Service and maintenance personnel
● Configuring engineers
● PLC programmers

Required knowledge
You will require the following knowledge:
● Basic general knowledge about SIMOCODE pro
● Knowledge about SIMOCODE ES software
● Knowledge about PROFINET

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 513
Alarm, fault, and system events
15.1 Alarms, faults, and system events - error handling

15.1 Alarms, faults, and system events - error handling

Table 15- 1 Alarm, fault, and system events

Event Description Troubleshooting Acknowledg- Contactor Error

(alphabetical) ment / fault control No. 1)
rectification
Analog An open circuit has occurred in Check the measured value Reset 64
module 1/2 the analog value measuring sensor and the measuring
open circuit circuit. circuit.
Startup The startup parameter block
parameter block prevents transfer of
active SIMOCODE pro parameters
that can be transferred from
the IO controller during startup.
The block may not be set if
SIMOCODE pro is integrated
in STEP7 via the
SIMOCODE pro object
manager (OM). 2)
Antivalence Only for positioner control Limit switch defective, open Tripped
function: The change-over circuit limit switch
contacts of the limit switch do
not issue an antivalent signal.
Configuration The configured unit • Check whether all the Clear the fault; Tripped 3
error configuration does not match configured components reset
the actual configuration. are available
• Check the actual
configuration with
"Configuration".
Execution stop The motor feeder could not be • The contactor contact is Clear the fault; Tripped 9
command turned off after a STOP welded reset
command was issued.
• Parameter execution time
is too short
• The "open" end position
has not been reached
during the parameterized
runtime (only for the
"Positioner" and
"Solenoid valve" control
functions).
Execution ON The motor feeder could not be • Main circuit is interrupted Reset Tripped 8
command turned on after an ON (fuse, circuit breaker)
command is issued.
• The motor contactor or
contactor control is
defective
• Parameter execution time
is too short.

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

514 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Alarm, fault, and system events
15.1 Alarms, faults, and system events - error handling

Event Description Troubleshooting Acknowledg- Contactor Error

(alphabetical) ment / fault control No. 1)
rectification
Trip level cos The power factor cos phi has Please check the application Tripped 44
phi < undershot the trip level. that is being driven by the
Possible cause: The motor is motor.
being operated without a load.
Trip level I < The maximum current has Please check the application Tripped 41
undershot undershot the trip level. that is being driven by the
motor.
Trip level I > The maximum current has Please check the application Tripped 40
overshot overshot the trip level. that is being driven by the
motor.
Trip level P < The active power of the motor Please check the application Tripped 43
undershot has undershot the trip level. that is being driven by the
motor.
Trip level P > The active power of the motor Please check the application Tripped 42
overshot has overshot the trip level. that is being driven by the
motor.
Trip level U < The voltage in the motor feeder Check the motor feeder. Tripped 45
undershot has undershot the trip level.
Possible causes:
• Undervoltage in the
network
• Fuse has tripped
Trip level The measured value at the Check the measuring station. Tripped 47
0/4 - 20 mA < analog input has undershot the
undershot trip level.
Trip level The measured value at the Check the measuring station. Tripped 46
0/4 - 20 mA > analog input has overshot the
overshot trip level.
Operational An "Operational Protection Reset Tripped; for 19
protection OFF Off (OPO)" signal is pending. A positioners
(OPO) switched-on motor feeder has QE1 or QE2
been switched off. The feeder switched on
cannot be switched on while until end
the OPO signal is active. position is
reached -
depending
upon
configuratio
n
Motor operating The configured limit value for Please adopt the
hours > motor operating hours maintenance measures
monitoring has been intended for the feeder.
exceeded.
Stalled rotor The maximum motor current Please check the application Reset Tripped 48
has exceeded the threshold for that is being driven by the
stalled rotor protection. motor.
Possible cause: The motor is
blocked.

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 515
Alarm, fault, and system events
15.1 Alarms, faults, and system events - error handling

Event Description Troubleshooting Acknowledg- Contactor Error

(alphabetical) ment / fault control No. 1)
rectification
Stalled The torque switch has • The positioner may be Counter Tripped 12
positioner activated before or without the blocked. command
respective limit switch. "OPEN /
• Acknowledge the fault by CLOSED!"
releasing with the
"OPEN/CLOSED" counter
command.
• Please check the
positioner application and
the limit switches.
DM-F feedback The DM-F Local or DM-F • Check the wiring of the Rectify the fault Tripped
circuit PROFIsafe has detected a feedback circuit so that the
fault in the feedback circuit (the feedback circuit
feedback circuit must be • Check the contact blocks is closed.
closed as the enabling circuit is in the feedback circuit.
switched on); the "SF" (general
fault) LED on the front of the
DM-F Local or DM-F
PROFIsafe is flashing red.
DM-F safety- The DM-F has tripped the The motor cannot be Acknowledge Tripped 66
related tripping enabling circuit for safety switched on again until the with "Reset", if
reasons. enabling circuits of the DM-F auto-reset is not
are closed again. active.
DM-F - test The enabling circuits of the The function of the enabling Please apply
requirement DM-F Local or DM- circuit relay contacts can only the
F PROFIsafe have not been be tested when they are maintenance
opened and closed again switched. Perform a function measures
within the configured time test. prescribed for
period. this scenario.
DM-F wiring DM-F module wiring fault • Check the wiring of the Reset Tripped 67
(short-circuit to ground in the sensor circuits / feedback
sensor circuit/feedback circuit); circuit
the "SF" (general fault) LED on
the front of the DM-F Local is • Rectify the fault.
illuminated red.
DM-FL - The actual configuration of the Check whether the effective
configuration DM-F Local does not configuration of the DM-F
deviation correspond to the Local corresponds to the
parameterized set parameterized set
configuration. configuration. Correct the
effective configuration by
changing the DIP switch
settings or adjusting the set
configuration by means of
parameterization if required.
DM-FL The DM-F Local has detected Check the switching Rectify the fault Tripped
simultaneity a discrepancy error in the two- elements in the sensor by opening or
channel sensor circuit. circuit. closing the
sensor inputs.

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

516 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Alarm, fault, and system events
15.1 Alarms, faults, and system events - error handling

Event Description Troubleshooting Acknowledg- Contactor Error

(alphabetical) ment / fault control No. 1)
rectification
DM-FL The DM-F Local is in Complete the configuration
configuration "configuration mode"; the (see Manual SIMOCODE pro
mode "DEVICE" LED on the front of Safety fail-safe digital
the DM-F Local is illuminated modules
yellow. (http://support.automation.sie
mens.com/WW/view/en/5056
4852), Chapter 7.4).
DM-FL cross Cross circuit in sensor circuit of • Check the wiring of both Reset Tripped 68
circuit DM-F Local; the "SF" (general sensor circuits for cross
fault) LED on the front of the circuiting
DM-F Local is illuminated red.
• Rectify the fault.
DM-FL waiting The DM-F LOCAL is in the Carry out the start-up test by
for start-up test "Waiting for start-up test" actuating the sensor in the
status. sensor circuit.
DM-FP Prm The parameter settings of the Check the
error PROFIsafe profile are incorrect PROFINET / PROFIsafe
or the set PROFIsafe address parameters of
is not identical to the SIMOCODE pro that were
configured address. set on the IO controller.
Double 0 Both torque switches have • Open circuit torque Tripped 13
activated simultaneously. The switch.
motor feeder has been turned
off. • Torque switch is
defective.
Double 1 Both limit switches have Limit switch is defective. Tripped 14
activated simultaneously.
End position Except positioner 5 control Counter Tripped 15
function: The state of the limit command
switch has changed without a "OPEN /
command (positioner has left CLOSED!"
the end position without a
command).
External ground External ground-fault Please check the motor Reset Tripped 29
fault monitoring has responded. An connection cable for damage.
impermissibly high fault current
is flowing.
External fault 1, A signal is pending at the input Check the motor feeder. Tripped 56, 57,
2, 3, 4, 5 or 6 (socket) of the "External fault 1, 58, 59,
2, 3, 4, 5 or 6" standard 60, 61
function.
Required At least one parameterized Activate only the functions
function is not function is not supported by the that are supported by the
supported version of the basic unit. version of the basic unit.
Hardware fault The SIMOCODE pro basic unit Replace the basic unit. See Clear the fault. Tripped 0
hardware is faulty. Chapter Replacing
SIMOCODE pro components
(Page 505).

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 517
Alarm, fault, and system events
15.1 Alarms, faults, and system events - error handling

Event Description Troubleshooting Acknowledg- Contactor Error

(alphabetical) ment / fault control No. 1)
rectification
Initialization The initialization module is Deactivate write protection of
module write- completely write-protected. the initialization module
protected
Initialization The initialization module is Deactivate write protection of
module write- completely or partially write- the initialization module
protected, protected.
parameter Reparameterization of
changes not SIMOCODE pro is denied
allowed because the initialization
module is write-protected.
Initialization Reparameterization has been • Select a parameterization
module - rejected because the with identical addressing
identification initialization module is write- and I&M data
data write- protected.
protected • Deactivate the partial
write protection of the
initialization module
Initialization The parameters of the
module read in initialization module were read
into SIMOCODE.
Initialization The reparameterization was
module accepted in the initialization
programmed module.
Initialization The initialization module was
module cleared cleared and is now back in the
as-delivered state.
Internal ground Internal ground-fault monitoring Please check the motor Reset Tripped 28
fault has responded. An connection cable for damage.
impermissibly high fault current
is flowing.
No start The permissible number of Reset Tripped
permitted starts in the monitoring
timeframe has been attained.
The next start should not be
carried out until the interlocking
time has expired.
Module fault At least 1 SIMOCODE pro • Connecting cable Clear the fault; Tripped 1
module is not ready for use. defective or incorrectly reset
connected
• Module defective.
Replace the module. See
Chapter Replacing
SIMOCODE pro
components (Page 505).

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

518 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Alarm, fault, and system events
15.1 Alarms, faults, and system events - error handling

Event Description Troubleshooting Acknowledg- Contactor Error

(alphabetical) ment / fault control No. 1)
rectification
Module supply Supply voltage on the DM-F • The terminals are not Clear the fault; Tripped
voltage is not Local is too low or not present. wired properly reset
present
• Module defective.
Replace the module. See
Chapter Replacing
SIMOCODE pro
components (Page 505).
Power failure The power failure lasted longer Clear the fault; Tripped 18
(UVO) than the set power failure time. reset
Just one start The start after the next one
possible should not be carried out until
the interlocking time has
expired.
Parameter is The parameter data is The designation of the faulty Clear the fault; Tripped 4
incorrect incorrect. parameter can be found via reset
("General fault" the number (byte No.) in
category) Chapter Tables (Page 525).
Parameter is The parameter data transferred Check the parameter data
incorrect to the unit is incorrect. Errors in (data records 130 - 135) that
("Event" the parameter data can occur, has been transmitted to the
category) for example, if the device has device for correct content.
not been parameterized with See Chapter Data formats
SIMOCODE ES. and data records (Page 551)
Parameter You attempted to change at Many parameters can only
changes not least one parameter that be changed if the motor
allowed in the cannot be changed in the feeder is switched off and not
current current operating state. in "Remote" mode. The
operating state following parameters can
always be changed: See
Chapter Data formats and
data records (Page 551).
Wrong SIMOCODE pro parameters Please use the correct
password are protected by a password. password for changing the
An attempt has been made to parameters. If you do not
change the parameters without know the password, new
entering the password. parameters can only be
entered after the factory
settings have been restored.
For a description of how to
restore the factory settings,
see Chapter Restoring
factory settings (Page 509).
Phase The limit value for phase Check the motor feeder and Reset Tripped 25
unbalance unbalance has been exceeded. the motor.
Phase unbalance can cause
an overload. Possible causes:
• Phase failure
• Fault in the motor windings.

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 519
Alarm, fault, and system events
15.1 Alarms, faults, and system events - error handling

Event Description Troubleshooting Acknowledg- Contactor Error

(alphabetical) ment / fault control No. 1)
rectification
Feedback The current flow in the motor • The main circuit has been Reset Tripped 11
(FB) OFF feeder has been interrupted interrupted (fuse, circuit
without the motor feeder being breaker, main switch).
turned off.
• The motor contactor or
contactor control is
defective
Feedback (FB) Current is flowing in the motor • Contactor contacts have Clear the fault; Tripped 10
ON feeder without the motor feeder been manually activated reset
being switched on
• Contactor has not been
switched on via
SIMOCODE
Test position Current is flowing in the motor The main circuit is not Reset Tripped 17
feedback (TPF) feeder although the motor interrupted in test operation.
feeder is in the test
position (TPF).
Memory module The parameters of the memory
read in module were read into
SIMOCODE.
Memory module The memory module was
cleared cleared and is now back in as-
delivered state.
Memory module The reparameterization was
programmed accepted in the memory
module.
Memory module The memory module is Deactivate write protection of
write-protected completely write-protected. the memory module.
Status - cooling The motor feeder has been The motor can only be
down period switched off due to overload. switched on again after the
active cooling down period has
expired.
Status - DM-F Shows the status of the
enabling circuit enabling circuit:
• closed or
• tripped
Status - The thermal memory has been The motor can be switched
emergency start deleted with the function on again immediately after an
executed "Emergency start". overload trip.
Status - test The motor feeder is in the test 17
position (TPF) position (TPF). The main circuit
has been interrupted and the
feeder can be "cold started".
Stop time > The configured limit value for Please adopt the
motor stop time monitoring has maintenance measures
been exceeded. intended for the feeder. If
possible, switch on the
feeder.

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

520 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Alarm, fault, and system events
15.1 Alarms, faults, and system events - error handling

Event Description Troubleshooting Acknowledg- Contactor Error

(alphabetical) ment / fault control No. 1)
rectification
Fault - bus PROFINET communication Check the PROFINET Reset, auto- Tripped 5
has been interrupted or is connection (plugs, cables, reset
interrupted. etc.).
Fault - The PLC that controls the Check the operating state of Reset, auto- Tripped 6
PLC/PCS feeder was or is in STOP the PLC. reset
mode.
Fault The limit switches are not • Limit switch open circuit Counter Tripped 16
antivalence reporting any antivalent command
• Please check the
signals. "OPEN/
positioner application and CLOSED"
the limit switches.
Fault - EM open A short circuit has occurred in Check the wiring to the Reset 38
circuit the wiring to the 3UL23 residual current
3UL23 residual current transformer
transformer.
Fault - A short-circuit has occurred in Check the wiring to the Reset 39
EM short-circuit the wiring to the 3UL23 residual current
3UL23 residual current transformer
transformer.
Fault end Positioner/solenoid valve has Acknowledge the fault by Reset; counter Tripped 15
position left the end position without a releasing with the counter command
command being issued. The command "OPEN/CLOSED".
motor feeder has been turned
off.
Fault - One of the following Replace the defective Clear the fault; Tripped 2
temporary components is defective: components. See Chapter reset
components Replacing SIMOCODE pro
• Memory module
(e.g. memory components (Page 505).
module) • PC cable.
Temperature The temperature trip level has Check the temperature 35
module 1/2 - trip been overshot. measuring station.
level exceeded
Temperature The temperature warning level Check the temperature 35
module 1/2 - has been exceeded. measuring station.
warning level
exceeded
Temperature Temperature sensor is Check the temperature Reset Tripped 37
module 1/2 out delivering impermissible sensor.
of range values.
Temperature Either a short circuit or an open Check the temperature Clear the fault; Tripped 36
module 1/2 circuit has occurred in the sensor and the sensor cable. reset
sensor fault temperature sensor circuit.
Test trip The motor feeder has been Reset Tripped 65
checked and switched off by a
test trip.

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 521
Alarm, fault, and system events
15.1 Alarms, faults, and system events - error handling

Event Description Troubleshooting Acknowledg- Contactor Error

(alphabetical) ment / fault control No. 1)
rectification
Thermistor trip Thermistor protection Please check the motor and Reset, auto- Tripped 31
level response. The temperature of the application that is being reset
the motor is too high. driven by the motor. The
motor cannot be switched on
again until the temperature
has reached the reset point
of the thermistor.
Thermistor open An open circuit has occurred in Check the thermistor sensor Clear the fault; Tripped 33
circuit the thermistor sensor cable. cable and the thermistor. reset
Thermistor short A short circuit has occurred in Check the thermistor sensor Clear the fault; Tripped 32
circuit the thermistor sensor cable. cable and the thermistor. reset
Overload The motor feeder has been Please check the motor and Reset, auto- Tripped 26
overloaded. the application that is being reset
driven by the motor. The
motor can be switched on
again after the cooling down
period has expired or after an
emergency start.
Overload and There is a load unbalance on Check the motor feeder and Reset, auto- Tripped 27
unbalance the motor feeder phases. the motor. The motor can be reset
Possible causes: switched on again after the
cooling down period has
• Phase failure
expired or after an
• Fault in the motor windings. emergency start.
Prewarning The motor feeder is in overload Please check the motor and
overload operation. If this condition the application that is being
(I > 115 %) continues to persist, the motor driven by the motor.
feeder will trip within a short
period of time due to overload.
Warning level The power factor cos phi has Please check the application
cos phi < undershot the warning level. that is being driven by the
Possible cause: The motor is motor.
being operated without a load.
Warning level I< The maximum current has Please check the application
undershot undershot the warning level. that is being driven by the
motor.
Warning level I> The maximum current has Please check the application
overshot overshot the warning level. that is being driven by the
motor.
Warning The active power of the motor Please check the application
level P< has undershot the warning that is being driven by the
undershot level. motor.
Warning The active power of the motor Please check the application
level P> has overshot the warning level. that is being driven by the
overshot motor.

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

522 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Alarm, fault, and system events
15.1 Alarms, faults, and system events - error handling

Event Description Troubleshooting Acknowledg- Contactor Error

(alphabetical) ment / fault control No. 1)
rectification
Warning The voltage in the motor feeder Check the motor feeder.
level U< has undershot the warning
undershot level. Possible causes:
• Undervoltage in the
network
• Fuse has tripped.
Warning level The measured value at the Check the measuring station.
0/4 - 20 mA < analog input has undershot the
undershot warning level.
Warning level The measured value at the Check the measuring station.
0/4 - 20 mA > analog input has overshot the
overshot warning level.
Permissible The permissible number of Reset Tripped 52
number of starts starts in the monitoring
exceeded timeframe has already been
exceeded. The next start
should not be carried out until
the interlocking time has
expired.

1) See also "Error number" in Chapter Data record 72 - Error buffer (Page 558)

Note
2) Parameter block
On devices in the as-delivered condition or after the factory settings have been restored, the
parameter block is not active!

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 523
Alarm, fault, and system events
15.1 Alarms, faults, and system events - error handling

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

524 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
Tables 16
In this chapter
In this chapter, you will find various tables that can help you when working with
SIMOCODE pro.

Target groups
This chapter is addressed to the following target group: Configuring engineers.

Required knowledge
You need sound knowledge of SIMOCODE pro.

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 525
Tables
16.1 Active control stations, contactor controls, lamp controls and status information for the control functions

16.1 Active control stations, contactor controls, lamp controls and status
information for the control functions

Table 16- 1 Active control stations of control functions

Designation/control function Control station

ON << ON < OFF ОN > ON >>
Overload - - - - -
Direct starter - - OFF ON -
Reversing starter - LEFT OFF RIGHT -
Circuit breaker - - OFF ON -
Star-delta starter - - OFF ON -
Star-delta reversing starter - LEFT OFF RIGHT -
Dahlander - - OFF SLOW FAST
Dahlander reversing starter LEFT-FAST LEFT-SLOW OFF RIGHT-SLOW RIGHT-FAST
Pole-changing starter - - OFF SLOW FAST
Pole-changing reversing starter LEFT-FAST LEFT-SLOW OFF RIGHT-SLOW RIGHT-FAST
Solenoid valve - - CLOSED OPEN -
Positioner 1 - CLOSED STOP OPEN -
Positioner 2 - CLOSED STOP OPEN -
Positioner 3 - CLOSED STOP OPEN -
Positioner 4 - CLOSED STOP OPEN -
Positioner 5 - CLOSED STOP OPEN -
Soft starter - - OFF ON -
Soft starter with reversing contactor - LEFT OFF RIGHT -

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

526 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Tables
16.1 Active control stations, contactor controls, lamp controls and status information for the control functions

Table 16- 2 Contactor control with control functions

Designation/control function Contactor control

QE1 QE2 QE3 QE4 QE5
Overload - - Active - -
Direct starter ON - - - -
Reversing starter RIGHT LEFT - - -
Circuit breaker ON pulse - OFF pulse - -
Star-delta starter Star contactor Delta contactor Line contactor - -
Star-delta reversing starter Star contactor Delta contactor RIGHT line LEFT line -
contactor contactor
Dahlander FAST SLOW Star contactor - -
FAST
Dahlander reversing starter RIGHT-FAST RIGHT-SLOW Star contactor LEFT-SLOW LEFT-FAST
FAST
Pole-changing starter FAST SLOW - - -
Pole-changing reversing starter RIGHT-FAST RIGHT-SLOW - LEFT-SLOW LEFT-FAST
Solenoid valve OPEN - - - -
Positioner 1 OPEN CLOSED - - -
Positioner 2 OPEN CLOSED - - -
Positioner 3 OPEN CLOSED - - -
Positioner 4 OPEN CLOSED - - -
Positioner 5 OPEN CLOSED - - -
Soft starter ON line - Reset ON command -
contactor
Soft starter with reversing contactor RIGHT line LEFT line Reset ON command -
contactor contactor

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 527
Tables
16.1 Active control stations, contactor controls, lamp controls and status information for the control functions

Table 16- 3 Lamp control with control functions

Designation/control function Lamp control

QLE << QLE < (ON <) QLA (OFF) QLE < (ON >) QLE >>
(ON <<) (ON >>)
Overload - - - - -
Direct starter - - OFF ON -
Reversing starter - LEFT OFF RIGHT -
Circuit breaker - - OFF ON -
Star-delta starter - - OFF ON -
Star-delta reversing starter - LEFT OFF RIGHT -
Dahlander - - OFF SLOW FAST
Dahlander reversing starter LEFT-FAST LEFT-SLOW OFF RIGHT-SLOW RIGHT-FAST
Pole-changing starter - - OFF SLOW FAST
Pole-changing reversing starter LEFT-FAST LEFT-SLOW OFF RIGHT-SLOW RIGHT-FAST
Solenoid valve - - CLOSED OPEN -
Positioner 1 - CLOSED STOP OPEN -
Positioner 2 - CLOSED STOP OPEN -
Positioner 3 - CLOSED STOP OPEN -
Positioner 4 - CLOSED STOP OPEN -
Positioner 5 - CLOSED STOP OPEN -
Soft starter - - OFF ON -
Soft starter with reversing contactor - LEFT OFF RIGHT -

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

528 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Tables
16.2 OPC UA variables

16.2 OPC UA variables

Node IDs
The name of the variable is composed of the namespace ID2 and the node ID as follows:
ns=http://siemens.com/automation/simocode/provpn;i=Node ID of the relevant variable.
Example:
You want to access the maximum motor current. You search for the node ID of the variable
"Max. Current I_max" in the following table: Node ID=33

Table 16- 4 Node IDs (1)

Node ID Data type Description

Acyclic receive
11 Boolean Acyclic receive - Bit 0.0
12 Boolean Acyclic receive - Bit 0.1
13 Boolean Acyclic receive - Bit 0.2
14 Boolean Acyclic receive - Bit 0.3
15 Boolean Acyclic receive - Bit 0.4
16 Boolean Acyclic receive - Bit 0.5
17 Boolean Acyclic receive - Bit 0.6
18 Boolean Acyclic receive - Bit 0.7
19 Boolean Acyclic receive - Bit 1.0
20 Boolean Acyclic receive - Bit 1.1
21 Boolean Acyclic receive - Bit 1.2
22 Boolean Acyclic receive - Bit 1.3
23 Boolean Acyclic receive - Bit 1.4
24 Boolean Acyclic receive - Bit 1.5
25 Boolean Acyclic receive - Bit 1.6
26 Boolean Acyclic receive - Bit 1.7
27 Unsigned word Acyclic receive - analog value
Measured values
30 Unsigned byte Thermal memory
31 Unsigned byte Phase unbalance
32 Unsigned byte Cos phi
33 Unsigned word Max. current I_max
34 Unsigned word Current I_L1
35 Unsigned word Current I_L2
36 Unsigned word Current I_L3
37 Unsigned word Last trip current
38 Unsigned word Time to trip
39 Unsigned word Cooling down period
40 Unsigned word Phase voltage UL1-N
41 Unsigned word Phase voltage UL2-N
42 Unsigned word Phase voltage UL3-N

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 529
Tables
16.2 OPC UA variables

Node ID Data type Description

43 Unsigned word AM1 output
44 Unsigned word AM1 input 1
45 Unsigned word AM1 input 2
46 Unsigned word AM1 input 3
47 Unsigned word TM1 max. temperature
48 Unsigned word TM1 temperature 1
49 Unsigned word TM1 temperature 2
50 Unsigned word TM1 temperature 3
51 Unsigned Dword Active power P
52 Unsigned Dword Apparent power S
53 Unsigned word AM2 output
54 Unsigned word AM2 input 1
55 Unsigned word AM2 input 2
56 Unsigned word AM2 input 3
57 Unsigned word Max. temperature
58 Unsigned word TM2 temperature 1
59 Unsigned word TM2 temperature 2
60 Unsigned word TM2 temperature 3
61 Unsigned Word EM Ground Fault Current
62 Unsigned Word EM Last Trip Current
Statistics
70 Unsigned byte Permissible starts - actual value
71 Unsigned byte Time until test required
72 Unsigned word Number of parameterizations
73 Unsigned word Number of overload trips
74 Unsigned word Int. number of overload trips
75 Unsigned word Motor stop time
76 Unsigned word Timer 1
77 Unsigned word Timer 2
78 Unsigned word Timer 3
79 Unsigned word Timer 4
80 Unsigned word Counter 1
81 Unsigned word Counter 2
82 Unsigned word Counter 3
83 Unsigned word Counter 4
84 Unsigned word Calculation module 1 - output
85 Unsigned word Calculation module 2 - output
86 Unsigned Dword Motor operating hours
87 Unsigned Dword Int. motor operating hours
88 Unsigned Dword Device operating hours
89 Unsigned Dword Number of starts
90 Unsigned Dword Int. number of direct starts

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

530 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Tables
16.2 OPC UA variables

Node ID Data type Description

91 Unsigned Dword Int. number of reverse starts
92 Unsigned Dword Consumed energy
93 Unsigned word Timer 5
94 Unsigned word Timer 6
95 Unsigned word Counter 5
96 Unsigned word Counter 6
97 Unsigned word Calculation module 3 - output
98 Unsigned word Calculation module 4 - output
99 Unsigned word Analog multiplexer - output
Diagnostic status
108 Boolean Status - General fault
109 Boolean Status - General warning
110 Boolean Status - Device OK
111 Boolean Status - Bus OK
112 Boolean Status - PLC/DCS in run
113 Boolean Status - Current flowing
114 Boolean Status - PE command Start_Pause is pending
115 Boolean Status - PE energy-saving mode active
116 Boolean Status - On<<
117 Boolean Status - On <
118 Boolean Status - Off
119 Boolean Status - On >
120 Boolean Status - On >>
121 Boolean Status - Start active
122 Boolean Status - Interlocking time active
123 Boolean Status - Change-over pause active
124 Boolean Status - Positioner running in open direction
125 Boolean Status - Positioner running in open direction
126 Boolean Status - Feedback closed (FC)
127 Boolean Status - Feedback open (FO)
128 Boolean Status - Torque closed (TC)
129 Boolean Status - Torque open (TO)
130 Boolean Status - Test position (TPF)
131 Boolean Status - Operational Protection OFF (OPO)
132 Boolean Status - Remote mode
133 Boolean Status - Emergency start executed
134 Boolean Status - Cooling down period active
135 Boolean Status - Pause time active
136 Boolean Status - Device check active
137 Boolean Status - Phase-sequence 1-2-3
138 Boolean Status - Phase-sequence 3-2-1
139 Boolean Status - Enabling circuit closed

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 531
Tables
16.2 OPC UA variables

Node ID Data type Description

Diagnostic events
140 Boolean Event - Prewarning overload (I>115%Is)
141 Boolean Event - Unbalance
142 Boolean Event - Overload
143 Boolean Event - Overload + loss of phase
144 Boolean Event - Internal ground fault
145 Boolean Event - External Ground Fault
146 Boolean Event - Warning external ground fault
147 Boolean Event - Thermistor trip level
148 Boolean Event - Thermistor short circuit
149 Boolean Event - Thermistor open circuit
150 Boolean Event - TM1 warning level T>
151 Boolean Event - TM1 trip level T>
152 Boolean Event - TM1 sensor fault
153 Boolean Event - TM1 out of range
154 Boolean Event - EM Open Circuit
155 Boolean Event - EM Short Circuit
156 Boolean Event - Warning level I>
157 Boolean Event - Warning level I<
158 Boolean Event - Warning level P>
159 Boolean Event - Warning level P<
160 Boolean Event - Warning level cos phi<
161 Boolean Event - Warning level U<
162 Boolean Event - AM1 warning level 0/4-20mA>
163 Boolean Event - AM1 warning level 0/4-20mA<
164 Boolean Event - Trip level I>
165 Boolean Event - Trip level I<
166 Boolean Event - Trip level P>
167 Boolean Event - Trip level P<
168 Boolean Event - Trip level cos phi<
169 Boolean Event - Trip level U<
170 Boolean Event - AM1 trip level 0/4-20mA>
171 Boolean Event - AM1 trip level 0/4-20mA<
172 Boolean Event - Stalled rotor
175 Boolean Event - No start possible
176 Boolean Event - No. of starts>
177 Boolean Event - Just one start possible
178 Boolean Event - Motor operating hours >
179 Boolean Event - Motor stop time >
180 Boolean Event - Limit monitor 1
181 Boolean Event - Limit monitor 2
182 Boolean Event - Limit monitor 3

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

532 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Tables
16.2 OPC UA variables

Node ID Data type Description

183 Boolean Event - Limit monitor 4
184 Boolean Event - External fault 1
185 Boolean Event - External fault 2
186 Boolean Event - External fault 3
187 Boolean Event - External fault 4
188 Boolean Event - External fault 5
189 Boolean Event - External fault 6
192 Boolean Event - AM1 open circuit
193 Boolean Event - DM-F safety-related tripping
194 Boolean Event - Monitoring interval for mandatory testing - test required
195 Boolean Event - Time set (NTP)
196 - -
197 Boolean Event - Time synchronized (NTP)
198 Boolean Event - DM-F LOCAL o.k.
199 Boolean Event - DM-F PROFIsafe active
200 Boolean Event - Configured operation panel missing
201 Boolean Event - Module not supported
202 Boolean Event - No module voltage
204 Boolean Event - Memory module read in
205 Boolean Event - Memory module programmed
206 Boolean Event - Memory module cleared
208 Boolean Event - Initialization module read in
209 Boolean Event - Initialization module programmed
210 Boolean Event - Initialization module cleared
212 Boolean Event - Parameter blocking during start-up active
213 Boolean Event - Parameter changes not allowed in the current operating state
214 Boolean Event - Device does not support the required functions
215 Boolean Event - Wrong parameter
216 Boolean Event - Wrong password
217 Boolean Event - Password protection active
218 Boolean Event - Factory settings
219 Boolean Event - Parameter setting active
220 Unsigned byte Event - Prm error number
228 Boolean Event - DM-F LOCAL configuration mode
229 Boolean Event - DM-F LOCAL - actual configuration and desired configuration
different
230 Boolean Event - DM-F LOCAL waiting for start-up test
231 Boolean Event - DM-F incorrect PROFIsafe address or incorrect PROFIsafe
parameter
232 Boolean Event -
Initialization Module write protected, parameter changes not allowed

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 533
Tables
16.2 OPC UA variables

Node ID Data type Description

233 Boolean Event - Memory module write-protected
234 Boolean Event - Initialization module write-protected
235 Boolean Event - Initialization module identification data write-protected
Diagnostic warnings (1)
236 Boolean Warning - Prewarning overload (I>115%Is)
237 Boolean Warning - Unbalance
238 Boolean Warning - Overload
239 Boolean Warning - Overload + loss of phase
240 Boolean Warning - Internal ground fault
241 Boolean Warning - External ground fault
243 Boolean Warning - Thermistor trip level
244 Boolean Warning - Thermistor short circuit
245 Boolean Warning - Thermistor open circuit

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

534 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Tables
16.2 OPC UA variables

Table 16- 5 Node IDs (2)

Node ID Data type Description

Diagnostic warnings (2)
246 Boolean Warning - TM1 warning level T>
248 Boolean Warning - TM1 sensor fault
249 Boolean Warning - TM1 out of range
250 Boolean Warning - EM Open Circuit
251 Boolean Warning - EM Short Circuit
252 Boolean Warning - Warning level I>
253 Boolean Warning - Warning level I<
254 Boolean Warning - Warning level P>
255 Boolean Warning - Warning level P<
256 Boolean Warning - Warning level cos phi<
257 Boolean Warning - Warning level U<
258 Boolean Warning - AM1 warning level 0/4-20mA>
259 Boolean Warning - AM1 warning level 0/4-20mA<
260 Boolean Warning - Stalled rotor
263 Boolean Warning - No start possible
264 Boolean Warning - No. of starts>
265 Boolean Warning - Just one start possible
266 Boolean Warning - Motor operating hours >
267 Boolean Warning - Motor stop time >
268 Boolean Warning - External fault 1
269 Boolean Warning - External fault 2
270 Boolean Warning - External fault 3
271 Boolean Warning - External fault 4
272 Boolean Warning - External fault 5
273 Boolean Warning - External fault 6
276 Boolean Warning - AM1 open circuit
277 Boolean Warning - Safety-related tripping
278 Boolean Warning - Test required
282 Boolean Warning - Feedback circuit
283 Boolean Warning - Simultaneity
Diagnostic trips
284 Boolean Trip - Hardware fault basic unit
285 Boolean Trip - Module fault
286 Boolean Trip - Temporary components
287 Boolean Trip - Configuration fault
288 Boolean Trip - Parameterization
289 Boolean Trip - Bus
290 Boolean Trip - PLC/DCS
292 Boolean Trip - Execution on-command
293 Boolean Trip - Execution stop command

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 535
Tables
16.2 OPC UA variables

Node ID Data type Description

294 Boolean Trip - Feedback on
295 Boolean Trip - Feedback off
296 Boolean Trip - Stalled positioner
297 Boolean Trip - Double 0
298 Boolean Trip - Double 1
299 Boolean Trip - End position
300 Boolean Trip - Antivalence
301 Boolean Trip - Test position feedback (TPF)
302 Boolean Trip - Power failure (UVO)
303 Boolean Trip - Operational Protection OFF (OPO)
309 Boolean Trip - Unbalance
310 Boolean Trip - Overload
311 Boolean Trip - Overload + loss of phase
312 Boolean Trip - Internal ground fault
313 Boolean Trip - External ground fault
315 Boolean Trip - Thermistor trip level
316 Boolean Trip - Thermistor short circuit
317 Boolean Trip - Thermistor open circuit
319 Boolean Trip - TM1 trip level T>
320 Boolean Trip - TM1 sensor fault
321 Boolean Trip - TM1 out of range
322 Boolean Trip - EM Open Circuit
323 Boolean Trip - EM Short Circuit
324 Boolean Trip - Trip level I>
325 Boolean Trip - Trip level I<
326 Boolean Trip - Trip level P>
327 Boolean Trip - Trip level P<
328 Boolean Trip - Trip level cos phi<
329 Boolean Trip - Trip level U<
330 Boolean Trip - AM1 trip level 0/4-20mA>
331 Boolean Trip - AM1 trip level 0/4-20mA<
332 Boolean Trip - Stalled rotor
336 Boolean Trip - No. of starts >
340 Boolean Trip - External fault 1
341 Boolean Trip - External fault 2
342 Boolean Trip - External fault 3
343 Boolean Trip - External fault 4
344 Boolean Trip - External fault 5
345 Boolean Trip - External fault 6
348 Boolean Trip - AM1 open circuit
349 Boolean Trip - Test shutdown
350 Boolean Trip - Safety-related tripping
351 Boolean Trip - Wiring
352 Boolean Trip - Cross circuit

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

536 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Tables
16.2 OPC UA variables

Node ID Data type Description

356 Boolean Trip - TM2 trip level T>
357 Boolean Trip - TM2 sensor fault
358 Boolean Trip - TM2 out of range
364 Boolean Trip - AM2 trip level 0/4-20mA>
365 Boolean Trip - AM2 trip level 0/4-20mA<
372 Boolean Trip - AM2 open circuit
Diagnostic warnings
388 Boolean Warning - TM2 warning level T>
390 Boolean Warning - TM2 sensor fault
391 Boolean Warning - TM2 out of range
396 Boolean Warning - AM2 warning level 0/4-20mA>
397 Boolean Warning - AM2 warning level 0/4-20mA<
404 Boolean Warning - AM2 open circuit
Diagnostic events
420 Boolean Event - TM2 warning level T>
421 Boolean Event - TM2 trip level T>
422 Boolean Event - TM2 sensor fault
423 Boolean Event - TM2 out of range
428 Boolean Event - AM2 warning level 0/4-20mA>
429 Boolean Event - AM2 warning level 0/4-20mA<
430 Boolean Event - AM2 trip level 0/4-20mA>
431 Boolean Event - AM2 trip level 0/4-20mA<
432 Boolean Event - Limit monitor 5
433 Boolean Event - Limit monitor 6
444 Boolean Event - AM2 open circuit
Acyclic send
450 Boolean Acyclic send data 0.0
451 Boolean Acyclic send data 0.1
452 Boolean Acyclic send data 0.2
453 Boolean Acyclic send data 0.3
454 Boolean Acyclic send data 0.4
455 Boolean Acyclic send data 0.5
456 Boolean Acyclic send data 0.6
457 Boolean Acyclic send data 0.7
458 Boolean Acyclic send data 1.0
459 Boolean Acyclic send data 1.1
460 Boolean Acyclic send data 1.2
461 Boolean Acyclic send data 1.3
462 Boolean Acyclic send data 1.4
463 Boolean Acyclic send data 1.5
464 Boolean Acyclic send data 1.6
465 Boolean Acyclic send data 1.7

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 537
Tables
16.3 Abbreviations and specifications

16.3 Abbreviations and specifications

Abbreviations
The following abbreviations are used in the tables:

Table 16- 6 Abbreviations

Abbreviation Meaning
BU Basic unit
IM Current measuring module
UM Current / voltage measuring module
DM1 Digital module 1
DM2 Digital module 2
DM-FL DM-F Local fail-safe digital module
DM-FP DM-F PROFIsafe fail-safe digital module
OP Operator panel
OPD Operator panel with display
AM Analog module
EM 3UF7500 ground-fault module
EM+ 3UF7510 ground-fault module
TM Temperature module
Th Thermistor
GF General fault, control function
Cycl. Cyclic
Acycl. Acyclic
F Fault
M Event
W Warning

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

538 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Tables
16.3 Abbreviations and specifications

Specifications
The following specifications apply in the tables:

Table 16- 7 Table specifications (example)

Designation Type Range Unit Information

Reserved *) Byte[4] *)
Max. current I_max Word 0 … 65535 1 % / Is

*) Items in italics are not relevant (reserved) and must be filled with "0" when written to.
Parameters that can be changed during operation.

Event - PRM error number (bytes):

If parameterization is not possible, the number of the parameter group (PRM group) which
caused the error is transmitted here.

Figure 16-1 Example for parameter group

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 539
Tables
16.4 Socket assignment table - digital

16.4 Socket assignment table - digital

This table contains all assignment numbers (No.) of the sockets (digital). You only need
these assignment numbers if you, for example, use a user program to fill data records and
write these back.

Table 16- 8 Socket assignment table - digital

No. Designation Designation Information

0 Static level Not connected
1 Fixed level value,0
2 Fixed level value,1
3 Reserved
4 Events – Level monitoring Event – Warning 0/4 - 20mA> AM2
5 Events – Level monitoring Event – Warning 0/4 - 20mA< AM2
6 Event – Trip 0/4 - 20mA> AM2
7 Event – Trip 0/4 - 20mA< AM2
8 Basic unit (BU) BU - Test / Reset button
9 BU - Input 1
10 BU - Input 2
11 BU - Input 3
12 BU - Input 4
13 Reserved
14 Reserved
15 Reserved
16 Digital module DM DM1 - Input 1 DM1
17 DM1 - Input 2 DM1
18 DM1 - Input 3 DM1
19 DM1 - Input 4 DM1
20 DM2 - Input 1 DM2
21 DM2 - Input 2 DM2
22 DM2 - Input 3 DM2
23 DM2 - Input 4 DM2
24 DM-FL sensor channel 1 Y12 DM-FL
25 DM-FL sensor channel 1 Y22 DM-FL
26 Reserved
27 Reserved
28 Events - Protection Event – TM2 sensor fault TM2
29 Event – TM2 out of range TM2
30 Event – TM2 warning T> TM2
31 Event – TM2 trip T> TM2

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

540 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Tables
16.4 Socket assignment table - digital

No. Designation Designation Information

32 Operator panel OP / OPD OP – Test / Reset button OP, OPD
33 OP – Button 1 OP, OPD
34 OP – Button 2 OP, OPD
35 OP – Button 3 OP, OPD
36 OP – Button 4 OP, OPD
37 Reserved
38 Events – Limit 5+6 Event – Limit 5
39 Event – Limit 6
40 PC/OPC-UA [OCM] Acyclic receive data - Bit 0.0
41 Acyclic receive data - Bit 0.1
42 Acyclic receive data - Bit 0.2
43 Acyclic receive data - Bit 0.3
44 Acyclic receive data - Bit 0.4
45 Acyclic receive data - Bit 0.5
46 Acyclic receive data - Bit 0.6
47 Acyclic receive data - Bit 0.7
48 Acyclic receive data - Bit 1.0
49 Acyclic receive data - Bit 1.1
50 Acyclic receive data - Bit 1.2
51 Acyclic receive data - Bit 1.3
52 Acyclic receive data - Bit 1.4
53 Acyclic receive data - Bit 1.5
54 Acyclic receive data - Bit 1.6
55 Acyclic receive data - Bit 1.7
56 PLC/PCS interface PLC [PN] (cyclic Cyclic receive data - Bit 0.0
data)
57 Cyclic receive data - Bit 0.1
58 Cyclic receive data - Bit 0.2
59 Cyclic receive data - Bit 0.3
60 Cyclic receive data - Bit 0.4
61 Cyclic receive data - Bit 0.5
62 Cyclic receive data - Bit 0.6
63 Cyclic receive data - Bit 0.7
64 Cyclic receive data - Bit 1.0
65 Cyclic receive data - Bit 1.1
66 Cyclic receive data - Bit 1.2
67 Cyclic receive data - Bit 1.3
68 Cyclic receive data - Bit 1.4
69 Cyclic receive data - Bit 1.5
70 Cyclic receive data - Bit 1.6
71 Cyclic receive data - Bit 1.7

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 541
Tables
16.4 Socket assignment table - digital

No. Designation Designation Information

72 Enabled control command Enabled control command ON<< Dependent on the
73 Enabled control command ON< control function
74 Enabled control command - OFF
75 Enabled control command ON>
76 Enabled control command ON>>
77 Reserved
78 Reserved
79 Reserved
80 Contactor controls Contactor controls 1 QE1 Dependent on the
81 Contactor controls 2 QE2 control function

82 Contactor controls 3 QE3

83 Contactor controls 4 QE4
84 Contactor controls 5 QE5
85 Reserved
86 Reserved
87 Reserved
88 Lamp controls Display - QLE<<(ON<<) Dependent on the
89 Display - QLE<(ON<) control function
90 Indication - QLA (OFF)
91 Display - QLE>(ON>)
92 Display - QLE>>(ON>>)
93 Indication - QLS (fault)
94 Reserved
95 Reserved
96 Status information - General Status - General fault
97 Status - General warning
98 Status - Device
99 Status - Bus
100 Status - PLC/PCS
101 Status - Motor current flowing IM UM
102 Status – PE command Start_Pause pending
103 Reserved
104 Status information - Receive Status - ON<< Dependent on the
105 Status - ON< control function
106 Status - Off
107 Status - ON>
108 Status - ON>>
109 Status - Start active
110 Status - Interlocking time active All reversing starters
and positioners

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

542 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Tables
16.4 Socket assignment table - digital

No. Designation Designation Information

111 Status - Change-over pause active Star-delta, Dahlander,
pole-changing starters
112 Status - Runs in open direction Dependent on the
113 Status - Runs in closed direction control function
114 Status - FC
115 Status - FO
116 Status - TC
117 Status - TO
118 Status - Cold start (TPF)
119 Status - OPO
120 Status - Remote mode
121 Status information - Protection Status - Emergency start executed IM UM
122 Status - Cooling down period active IM UM
123 Status - Pause time active IM UM
124 Status information - Miscellaneous Status - Device check active
125 Status - Phase sequence 1-2-3 UM
126 Status - Phase sequence 3-2-1 UM
127 Status - DM-F enabling circuit DM-F
128 Events - Protection Event - Overload operation IM UM
129 Event - Unbalance IM UM
130 Event - Overload IM UM
131 Event - Overload + loss of phase IM UM
132 Event - Internal ground fault IM UM
133 Event - External ground fault EM
134 Event - Warning ext. ground fault EM
135 Event - Thermistor overload Th
136 Event - Thermistor short-circuit Th
137 Event - Thermistor open circuit Th
138 Event - TM1 warning T> TM1
139 Event - TM1 trip T> TM1
140 Event - TM1 sensor fault TM
141 Event - TM1 out of range TM
142 Event - EM+ open circuit EM+
143 Event - EM+ short-circuit EM+
144 Events - Level monitoring Event - Warning I> IM UM
145 Event - Warning I< IM UM
146 Event - Warning P> UM
147 Event - Warning P< UM
148 Event - Warning cos phi< UM
149 Event - Warning U< UM
150 Event - warning 0/4 - 20mA> AM1
151 Event - warning 0/4 - 20mA< AM1

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 543
Tables
16.4 Socket assignment table - digital

No. Designation Designation Information

152 Event - Trip I> IM UM
153 Event - Trip I< IM UM
154 Event - Trip P> UM
155 Event - Trip P< UM
156 Event - Trip cos phi< UM
157 Event - Trip U< UM
158 Event - Trip 0/4-20 mA> AM1
159 Event - Trip 0/4-20 mA< AM1
160 Event - Stalled rotor IM UM
161 Reserved
162 Reserved
163 Event - No start possible
164 Event - No. of starts >
165 Event - Just one start possible
166 Event - Motor operating hours >
167 Event - Motor stop time >
168 Event - Limit 1
169 Event - Limit 2
170 Event - Limit 3
171 Event - Limit 4
172 Events - Miscellaneous Event - External fault 1
173 Event - External fault 2
174 Event - External fault 3
175 Event - External fault 4
176 Event - External fault 5
177 Event - External fault 6
178 Reserved
179 Event - AM2 open circuit AM2
180 Event - AM1 open circuit AM1, AM2
181 Event - DM-F safety-related tripping DM-F
182 Event - DM-F - Test requirement DM-F
183 Reserved
184 Reserved
185 Reserved
186 Events - Miscellaneous Event - DM-FL safety o.k DM-FL
187 Event - DM-FP PROFIsafe active DM-FP
188 Events - System interface Event - Configured operator panel missing
189 Reserved
190 Warnings - Miscellaneous Warning - DM-F feedback circuit DM-F
191 Warning - DM-FL simultaneity DM-FL

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

544 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Tables
16.4 Socket assignment table - digital

No. Designation Designation Information

192 Faults - General Fault - HW fault basic unit
193 Fault - Module fault (e.g. IM, DM)
194 Fault - temporary components (e.g. memory
module)
195 Fault - Configuration fault
196 Fault - Parameterization
197 Fault - Bus
198 Fault - PLC/PCS
199 Reserved
200 Faults - Control Fault - Execution Time ON Not for overload
201 Fault - Execution time OFF relays
202 Fault - FB ON
203 Fault - FB OFF
204 Fault - Stalled positioner Positioner
205 Fault - Double 0 Solenoid valve /
positioner
206 Fault - Double 1 Solenoid valve /
positioner
207 Fault - End position Solenoid valve /
positioner
208 Fault - Antivalence Positioner
209 Fault - Cold start (TPF) fault
210 Fault - UVO fault
211 Fault - OPO fault
212 Reserved
213 Reserved
214 Freely programmable elements Signal conditioner 5 output
215 Signal conditioner 6 output
216 Truth table 1 3I/1O output
217 Truth table 2 3I/1O output
218 Truth table 3 3I/1O output
219 Truth table 4 3I/1O output
220 Truth table 5 3I/1O output
221 Truth table 6 3I/1O output
222 Truth table 7 2I/1O output
223 Truth table 8 2I/1O output
224 Truth table 9 5I/2O output 1
225 Truth table 9 5I/2O output 2
226 Truth table 10 3I/1O output
227 Truth table 11 3I/1O output
228 Counter 5 output
229 Counter 6 output
230 Timer 5 output

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 545
Tables
16.4 Socket assignment table - digital

No. Designation Designation Information

231 Timer 6 output
232 Timer 1 output
233 Timer 2 output
234 Timer 3 output
235 Timer 4 output
236 Counter 1 output
237 Counter 2 output
238 Counter 3 output
239 Counter 4 output
240 Signal conditioner 1 output
241 Signal conditioner 2 output
242 Signal conditioner 3 output
243 Signal conditioner 4 output
244 Non-volatile Element 1 output
245 Non-volatile Element 2 output
246 Non-volatile Element 3 output
247 Non-volatile Element 4 output
248 Flashing 1 output
249 Flashing 2 output
250 Flashing 3 output
251 Flicker 1 output
252 Flicker 2 output
253 Flicker 3 output
254 PWM output
255 Reserved

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

546 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Tables
16.5 Socket assignment table - analog

16.5 Socket assignment table - analog

This table contains all assignment numbers (No.) of the sockets (analog). You only need
these assignment numbers if you, for example, use a user program to fill data records and
write these back. All inputs for analog data can only process values of type "Word" (2 bytes).
In order to also be able to process values of type "Byte", the following applies: The byte
value is processed as a low byte, the high byte is always 0.

Table 16- 9 Socket assignment table - analog

No. Designation Unit Information

0 Not connected
1 Fixed level
2 Reserved
3 Reserved
4 Timer 1 - Actual value 100 ms
5 Timer 2 - Actual value 100 ms
6 Timer 3 - Actual value 100 ms
7 Timer 4 - Actual value 100 ms
8 Counter 1 - Actual value
9 Counter 2 - Actual value
10 Counter 3 - Actual value
11 Counter 4 - Actual value
12 Counter 5 - Actual value
13 Counter 6 - Actual value
14 Timer 5 - Actual value 100 ms
15 Timer 6 - Actual value 100 ms
16 Max. current I_max 1 % / Is IM UM
17 Current I_L1 1 % / Is IM UM
18 Current I_L2 1 % / Is IM UM
19 Current I_L3 1 % / Is IM UM
20 Phase unbalance 1% IM UM
21 Reserved
22 Reserved
23 Voltage U_min 1V UM
24 Voltage U_L1 1 V see 2) UM
25 Voltage U_L2 1 V see 2) UM
26 Voltage U_L3 1 V see 2) UM
27 Cos phi 1% UM
28 Reserved
29 Reserved
30 Number of overload trips
31 Int. number of overload trips
32 Thermal motor model 2% IM UM
33 Time to trip 100 ms IM UM

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 547
Tables
16.5 Socket assignment table - analog

No. Designation Unit Information

34 Recovery time 100 ms IM UM
35 Last trip current 1 % / Is IM UM
36 TM1 - max. temperature 1K TM1
37 TM1 - temperature 1 1K TM1
38 TM1 - temperature 2 1K TM1
39 TM1 - temperature 3 1K TM1
40 Permissible starts - Actual value
41 Motor stop time 1h
42 DM-F - Time until test required 1 week DM-F
43 EM+ - last trip current 1 mA EM+
44 AM1 - input 1 See 1) AM1
45 AM1 - input 2 See 1) AM1
46 AM1 - input 3 See 1)
47 EM+ - ground fault current 1 mA
48 Acyclic receive data - analog value
49 Cyclic receive data - analog value 1
50 Cyclic receive data - analog value 2
51 Number of parameterizations
52 Motor operating hours - H word 1s
53 Motor operating hours - L word 1s
54 Int. motor operating hours - H word 1s
55 Int. motor operating hours - L word 1s
56 Device operating hours - H word 1s
57 Device operating hours - L word 1s
58 Number of starts - H word
59 Number of starts - L word
60 Int. number of starts right - H word
61 Int. number of starts CW - L word
62 Int. number of starts left - H word
63 Int. number of starts left - L word
64 Energy W - high word 1 kWh UM
65 Energy W - low word 1 kWh UM
66 Reserved
.. Reserved
69 Reserved
70 Active power P - H word 1W
71 Active power P - L word 1W
72 Apparent power S - H word 1 VA
73 Apparent power S - L word 1 VA
74 Reserved
.. Reserved
85 Reserved

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

548 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Tables
16.5 Socket assignment table - analog

No. Designation Unit Information

86 Calculation module 1 - Output
87 Reserved
88 Reserved
89 Reserved
90 Calculation module 2 - Output
91 Analog arithmetic 1 output
92 Analog arithmetic 2 output
93 Analog multiplexer output
94 Reserved
.. Reserved
103 Reserved
104 Max. current I_max_10mA 10 mA UM IM
105 Current I_L1_10mA 10 mA UM IM
106 Current I_L2_10mA 10 mA UM IM
107 Current I_L3_10mA 10 mA UM IM
108 Max. current I_max_100mA 100 mA UM IM
109 Current I_L1_100mA 100 mA UM IM
110 Current I_L2_100mA 100 mA UM IM
111 Current I_L3_100mA 100 mA UM IM
112 Reserved
113 Reserved
114 Reserved
115 Reserved
116 TM2 - max. temperature 1K TM2
117 TM2 - temperature 1 1K TM2
118 TM2 - temperature 2 1K TM2
119 TM2 - temperature 3 1K TM2
120 AM2 - input 1 AM2
121 AM2 - input 2 AM2
122 AM2 - input 3 AM2
123 Reserved
.. Reserved
255 Reserved
1) S7 format: 0/4mA=0; 20mA=27648
2) If "line-to-line voltage = 1," "Voltage U_Lx" contain the line-to-line voltages

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 549
Tables
16.5 Socket assignment table - analog

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

550 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
Data formats and data records 17
In this chapter
In this chapter, you will find information about the data records of SIMOCODE pro.

Target groups
This chapter addresses the following target groups:
● Configuring engineers
● PLC programmers

Required knowledge
You will require the following knowledge:
● Sound knowledge of writing/reading data records
● Sound knowledge of SIMOCODE pro

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 551
Data formats and data records

Data records - overview

Table 17- 1 Data records - overview

Data record No. Length [byte] Description Read / write

63 200 Analog value recording Read
67 10 Process image output Read
69 30 Process image input Read
72 126 Error buffer Read
73 168 Event memory Read
92 46 Device diagnostics (faults, warnings, status information) Read
94 172 Measured values Read
95 148 Service / statistical data Read / write
130 92 Basic device parameter 1 Read / write
131 124 Basic device parameter 2 Read / write
132 144 Extended device parameter 1 Read / write
133 100 Extended device parameter 2 Read / write
134 180 Extended device parameter 1 Read / write
135 114 Extended device parameter 2 Read / write
139 200 Marking Read / write
140 200 Markings 2 Read / write
165 168 Identification Read / write
224 24 Password protection Write

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

552 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Data formats and data records
17.1 Handling data records

17.1 Handling data records

17.1.1 Writing / reading data records

Access to data records via the slot and index

● Index: Data record number

Writing / reading data records with STEP7

You can access the data records from the user program.
● Writing data records: By calling SFB 53 "WR_REC"
● Reading data records: By calling SFB 52 "RD_REC"
Further information
You can find additional information about the SFBs
● in System Software for S7-300/400, System and Standard Functions reference manual
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/1214574)
● In the STEP7 online help

Byte arrangements
When data longer than one byte is stored, the bytes are arranged as follows ("big endian"):

Figure 17-1 Byte arrangement in "big endian" format

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 553
Data formats and data records
17.1 Handling data records

17.1.2 Abbreviations
The following abbreviations are used in the tables:

Table 17- 2 Abbreviations

Abbreviation Meaning
BU Basic unit
IM Current measuring module
UM Current / voltage measuring module
DM1 Digital module 1
DM2 Digital module 2
DM-FL DM-F Local fail-safe digital module
DM-FP DM-F PROFIsafe fail-safe digital module
OP Operator panel
OPD Operator panel with display
AM Analog module
EM Ground-fault module
TM Temperature module
Th Thermistor
GF Control function
Cycl. Cyclic
Acycl. Acyclic
F Fault
M Event
W Warning

17.1.3 Specifications
The following specifications apply in the tables:

Table 17- 3 Table specifications (example)

Designation Type Range Unit Information

Reserved *) Byte[4] *)

Max. current Word 0 … 65535 1 % / Is

I_max
*) Items in italics are not relevant (reserved) and must be filled with "0" when written to.

Parameters that can be changed during operation.

Settings are valid/can only be made when the corresponding system components are used.

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

554 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Data formats and data records
17.2 Data record 63 - Analog value recording

17.2 Data record 63 - Analog value recording

You can read out the data of the "Analog value recording" function stored in the device.

Table 17- 4 Data record 63 - Analog value recording

Byte.Bit Designation Type Range Information

0.0 StartPos Word 0
2.0 Channel No. Byte 1
3.0 Analog value record currently Bit 0, 1
running
3.1 Trigger event occurred Bit 0, 1
3.2 Reserved Bit[6] 0
4.0 Measured value (0) Word 0 - 65535
6.0 Measured value (1) Word 0 - 65535
...
122.0 Measured value (59) Word 0 - 65535
124.0 Reserved Byte[76] 0
The unit of the measured value is dependent on the assigned analog value. You will find all
available analog values with their units in Chapter Socket assignment table - analog
(Page 547).

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 555
Data formats and data records
17.3 Data record 67 - Process image output

17.3 Data record 67 - Process image output

Table 17- 5 Data record 67 - Process image output

Byte.Bit Designation Default (also see parameters) Type Information

0.0 Cyclic receive - Bit 0.0 Control station - PLC/PCS [PN] ON< Bit
0.1 Cyclic receive - Bit 0.1 Control station - PLC/PCS [PN] OFF Bit
0.2 Cyclic receive - Bit 0.2 Control station - PLC/PCS [PN] ON> Bit
0.3 Cyclic receive - Bit 0.3 Test 1 Bit
0.4 Cyclic receive - Bit 0.4 Motor protection - Emergency start Bit
0.5 Cyclic receive - Bit 0.5 Mode selector S1 Bit
0.6 Cyclic receive - Bit 0.6 Reset 1 Bit
0.7 Cyclic receive - Bit 0.7 Not assigned Bit
1.0 Cyclic receive - Bit 1.0 Not assigned Bit
1.1 Cyclic receive - Bit 1.1 Not assigned Bit
1.2 Cyclic receive - Bit 1.2 Not assigned Bit
1.3 Cyclic receive - Bit 1.3 Not assigned Bit
1.4 Cyclic receive - Bit 1.4 Not assigned Bit
1.5 Cyclic receive - Bit 1.5 Not assigned Bit
1.6 Cyclic receive - Bit 1.6 Not assigned Bit
1.7 Cyclic receive - Bit 1.7 Not assigned Bit
2.0 Cyclic receive - analog value 1 Not assigned Word
4.0 Cyclic receive - analog value 2 Not assigned Word
6.0 Reserved Bytes[4]

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

556 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Data formats and data records
17.4 Data record 69 - Process image input

17.4 Data record 69 - Process image input

Table 17- 6 Data record 69 - Process image input

Byte.Bit Designation Default (also see parameters) Type Information

0.0 Cyclic send - Bit 0.0 Status - ON< Bit
0.1 Cyclic send - Bit 0.1 Status - Off Bit
0.2 Cyclic send - Bit 0.2 Status - ON> Bit
0.3 Cyclic send - Bit 0.3 Event - Overload operation Bit
0.4 Cyclic send - Bit 0.4 Status - Interlocking time active Bit
0.5 Cyclic send - Bit 0.5 Status - Remote mode Bit
0.6 Cyclic send - Bit 0.6 Status - General fault Bit
0.7 Cyclic send - Bit 0.7 Status - General warning Bit
1.0 Cyclic send - Bit 1.0 Not assigned Bit
1.1 Cyclic send - Bit 1.1 Not assigned Bit
1.2 Cyclic send - Bit 1.2 Not assigned Bit
1.3 Cyclic send - Bit 1.3 Not assigned Bit
1.4 Cyclic send - Bit 1.4 Not assigned Bit
1.5 Cyclic send - Bit 1.5 Not assigned Bit
1.6 Cyclic send - Bit 1.6 Not assigned Bit
1.7 Cyclic send - Bit 1.7 Not assigned Bit
2.0 PLC/PCS analog input 1 Max. current I_max Word
4.0 PLC/PCS analog input 2 Not assigned Word
6.0 PLC/PCS analog input 3 Not assigned Word
8.0 PLC/PCS analog input 4 Not assigned Word
10.0 PLC/PCS analog input 5 Not assigned Word
12.0 PLC/PCS analog input 6 Not assigned Word
14.0 PLC/PCS analog input 7 Not assigned Word
16.0 PLC/PCS analog input 8 Not assigned Word
18.0 PLC/PCS analog input 9 18.0 Word
20.0 Reserved Bytes[10]

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 557
Data formats and data records
17.5 Data record 72 - Error buffer

17.5 Data record 72 - Error buffer

Table 17- 7 Data record 72 - Error buffer

Byte.Bit Entry Designation Type Information

0.0 1 Time stamp D-word
4.0 Type Byte
5.0 Error number Byte
6.0 2 Time stamp D-word
10.0 Type Byte
11.0 Error number Byte
...
120.0 21 Time stamp D-word
124.0 Type Byte
125.0 Error number Byte

Time stamp
The operating hours of the device are used as a time stamp (resolution: 1 s).

Type/error number
If the type has the value 71, the entry contains an error: Refer to the error numbers for
detailed information. You will find the mean in Chapter Data record 92 - Device diagnostics
(Page 560) in column "Error number" of table "Data record 92 - Device diagnostics."
If the type has the value 255, the entry displays "Power - On". In this case, the error number
contains the number of power ON operations, reduced by 1 (0 = 1x power ON, ...).

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

558 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Data formats and data records
17.6 Data record 73 - Event memory

17.6 Data record 73 - Event memory

Table 17- 8 Data record 73 - Event memory

Byte.Bit Entry Designation Type Information

0.0 1 Time stamp D-word
4.0 Entry - Type Byte
5.0 Entry - Info Byte[3]
8.0 2 Time stamp D-word
12.0 Entry - Type Byte
13.0 Entry - Info Byte[3]
16.0 3 Time stamp D-word
20.0 Entry - Type Byte
21.0 Entry - Info Byte[3]
...
160.0 21 Time stamp D-word
164.0 Entry - Type Byte
165.0 Entry - Info Byte[3]

The high byte of the system number is 98 in the event memory.

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 559
Data formats and data records
17.7 Data record 92 - Device diagnostics

17.7 Data record 92 - Device diagnostics

Table 17- 9 Data record 92 - Diagnostics

Byte.Bit Designation Information PNIO Diagn. **) Error No. ***)

0.0 Reserved
1.0 Status information - Status - General fault
General
1.1 Status - General warning
1.2 Status - Device
1.3 Status - Bus
1.4 Status - PLC/PCS
1.5 Status - Motor current flowing IM UM
1.6 Reserved
1.7 Reserved
2.0 Status information - Status - ON<< Dependent on
Receive the control
2.1 Status - ON< function
2.2 Status - Off
2.3 Status - ON>
2.4 Status - ON>>
2.5 Status - Start active
2.6 Status - Interlocking time active All reversing
starters and
positioners
2.7 Status - Change-over pause active Star-delta,
Dahlander, pole-
changing
starters
3.0 Status - Runs in open direction Dependent on
3.1 Status - Runs in close direction the control
function
3.2 Status - FC
3.3 Status - FO
3.4 Status - TC
3.5 Status - TO
3.6 Status - Cold starting (TPF) 1 0x1009
3.7 Status - OPO
4.0 Status - Auto mode
4.1 Status information - Status - Emergency start executed IM UM 1 0x1031
Protection
4.2 Status - Cooling down period active IM UM 1 0x1032
4.3 Status - Pause time active IM UM
4.4 Status information - Status - Device check active
Miscellaneous

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

560 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Data formats and data records
17.7 Data record 92 - Device diagnostics

Byte.Bit Designation Information PNIO Diagn. **) Error No. ***)

4.5 Status - Phase sequence 1-2-3 UM
4.6 Status - Phase sequence 3-2-1 UM
4.7 Status - DM-F enabling circuit DM-F
5.0 Events - Protection Event - Overload operation IM UM
5.1 Event - Unbalance IM UM
5.2 Event - Overload IM UM
5.3 Event - Overload + loss of phase IM UM
5.4 Event - Internal ground fault IM UM
5.5 Event - External ground fault EM
5.6 Event - Warning ext. ground fault EM
5.7 Event - Thermistor overload Th
6.0 Event - Thermistor short-circuit Th
6.1 Event - Thermistor open circuit Th
6.2 Event - TM1 warning T> TM1
6.3 Event - TM1 trip T> TM1
6.4 Event - TM1 sensor fault TM1
6.5 Event - TM1 out of range TM
6.6 Event - EM+ open circuit EM+ 1)
6.7 Event - EM+ short-circuit EM+ 1)
7.0 Events - Level Event - Warning I> IM UM
monitoring
7.1 Event - Warning I< IM UM
7.2 Event - Warning P> UM
7.3 Event - Warning P< UM
7.4 Event - Warning cos phi< UM
7.5 Event - Warning U< UM
7.6 Event - Warning 0/4-20 mA> AM1
7.7 Event - Warning 0/4-20 mA< AM1
8.0 Event - Trip I> IM UM
8.1 Event - Trip I< IM UM
8.2 Event - Trip P> UM
8.3 Event - Trip P< UM
8.4 Event - Trip cos phi< UM
8.5 Event - Trip U< UM
8.6 Event - Trip 0/4-20 mA> AM1
8.7 Event - Trip 0/4-20 mA< AM1
9.0 Event - Stalled rotor IM UM
9.1 Reserved
9.3 Event - No start possible
9.4 Event - No. of starts >
9.5 Event - Just one start possible
9.6 Event - Motor operating hours >

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 561
Data formats and data records
17.7 Data record 92 - Device diagnostics

Byte.Bit Designation Information PNIO Diagn. **) Error No. ***)

9.7 Event - Motor stop time >
10.0 Event - Limit 1
10.1 Event - Limit 2
10.2 Event - Limit 3
10.3 Event - Limit 4
10.4 Events - Event - Ext. fault 1
Miscellaneous
10.5 Event - Ext. fault 2
10.6 Event - Ext. fault 3
10.7 Event - Ext. fault 4
11.0 Event - Ext. fault 5
11.1 Event - Ext. fault 6
11.2 Reserved
11.3 Reserved
11.4 Event - AM1 open circuit AM1
11.5 Event - DM-F safety-related DM-F
tripping
11.6 Event - DM-F - Test requirement DM-F
11.7 Event - NTP clock set
12.0 Events - Time stamp Event - Timestamping function
function active + OK
12.1 Events - Event - NTP clock synchronized
Miscellaneous
12.2 Event - DM-FL safety ok DM-FL
12.3 Event - DM-FP PROFIsafe active DM-FP
12.4 Events - System Event - Configured operator panel
interfaces missing
12.5 Event - Module not supported
12.6 Event - No module voltage
12.7 Reserved
13.0 Events - Memory Event - Memory module read in
module /
initialization module
13.1 Event - Memory module
programmed
13.2 Event - Memory module cleared
13.3 Reserved
13.4 Event - Initialization module read in
13.5 Event - Initialization module
programmed
13.6 Event - Initialization module
cleared
13.7 Reserved

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

562 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Data formats and data records
17.7 Data record 92 - Device diagnostics

Byte.Bit Designation Information PNIO Diagn. **) Error No. ***)

14.0 Events - Event - Start-up parameter block ***)
parameterization active
14.1 Event - Parameter changes not 1 0x0010
allowed in the current operating
state
14.2 Event - Device does not support 1 0x0010
the required functions
14.3 Event - Wrong parameter 1 0x0010
14.4 Event - Wrong password 1 0x0010
14.5 Event - Password protection active
14.6 Event - Factory settings
14.7 Event - Parameterization active
15.0 Event - PRM error number (bytes)
16.0 Event - DM-FL configuration mode
16.1 Event - DM-FL configuration
deviation
16.2 Event - DM-FL waiting for start-up
test
16.3 Event - DM-FP F-Prm error *) 3 0x0010
16.4 Event - Initialization module write- 1 0x0010
protected, parameter changes not
allowed
16.5 Events - Memory Event - Memory module write-
module - protected
initialization
module (InM)
16.6 Event - Initialization module write-
protected
16.7 Event - Initialization module
identification data write-protected
17.0 Warnings - Warning - Overload operation IM UM 2 0x1020
Protection
17.1 Warning - Unbalance IM UM 2 0x1021
17.2 Warning - Overload IM UM 2 0x1022
17.3 Warning - Overload + phase failure IM UM 2 0x1023
17.4 Warning - Internal ground fault IM UM 2 0x1027
17.5 Warning - External ground fault EM 2 0x1028
17.6 Reserved
17.7 Warning - Thermistor overload Th 2 0x1024
18.0 Warning - Thermistor short circuit Th 2 0x1025
18.1 Warning - Thermistor open circuit Th 2 0x1026
18.2 Warning - TM1 warning T > TM1 2 0x102B
18.3 Reserved
18.4 Warning - TM1 sensor fault TM1 2 0x102C
18.5 Warning - TM1 out of range TM1 2 0x102D

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 563
Data formats and data records
17.7 Data record 92 - Device diagnostics

Byte.Bit Designation Information PNIO Diagn. **) Error No. ***)

18.6 Warning - EM+ open circuit EM+ 1) 2 0x1029
18.7 Warning - EM+ short-circuit EM+ 1) 2 0x102A
19.0 Warnings - Level Warning - Warning I> IM UM 2 0x1040
monitoring
19.1 Warning - Warning I< IM UM 2 0x1041
19.2 Warning - Warning P> UM 2 0x1042
19.3 Warning - Warning P< UM 2 0x1043
19.4 Warning - Warning cos phi< UM 2 0x1045
19.5 Warning - Warning U< UM 2 0x1047
19.6 Warning - Warning 0/4-20 mA> AM1 2 0x1048
19.7 Warning - Warning 0/4-20 mA< AM1 2 0x1049
20.0 Warning - Stalled rotor IM UM 2 0x104C
20.1 Reserved
20.3 Warning - No start possible 2 0x1056
20.4 Warning - Number of starts > 2 0x1057
20.5 Warning - Just one start possible 2 0x1058
20.6 Warning - Motor operating hours> 2 0x1059
20.7 Warning - Motor stop time > 2 0x105A
21.0 Warnings - Warning - Ext. fault 1 2 0x1070
Miscellaneous
21.1 Warning - Ext. fault 2 2 0x1071
21.2 Warning - Ext. fault 3 2 0x1072
21.3 Warning - Ext. fault 4 2 0x1073
21.4 Warning - Ext. fault 5 2 0x1074
21.5 Warning - Ext. fault 6 2 0x1075
21.6 Reserved
21.7 Reserved
22.0 Warning - AM1 open circuit AM1 2 0x105B
22.1 Warning - DM-F safety-related DM-F 2 0x0019
tripping
22.2 Warning - DM-F test requirement DM-F 2 0x105E
22.3 Reserved
22.6 Warning - DM-F feedback circuit DM-F 2 0x105F
22.7 Warning - DM-FL simultaneity DM-FL 2 0x1060
23.0 Faults - General Fault - HW fault basic unit 3 0x0009
23.1 Fault - Module fault (e.g. module 3 0x0009
IM, UM, DM)
23.2 Fault - Temporary components 3 0x0009
(e.g. memory module)
23.3 Fault - Configuration fault 3 0x0010
23.4 Fault - Parameterization 3 0x0010
23.5 Fault - Bus
23.6 Fault - PLC/PCS

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

564 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Data formats and data records
17.7 Data record 92 - Device diagnostics

Byte.Bit Designation Information PNIO Diagn. **) Error No. ***)

23.7 Reserved
24.0 Faults - Control Fault - Execution ON command 3 0x1000
24.1 Fault - Execution STOP command 3 0x1001
24.2 Fault - FB ON 3 0x1002
24.3 Fault - FB OFF 3 0x1003
24.4 Fault - Stalled positioner CF = positioner 3 0x1004
24.5 Fault - Double 0 CF = positioner 3 0x1005
24.6 Fault - Double 1 CF = positioner 3 0x1006
24.7 Fault - End position CF = positioner 3 0x1007
25.0 Fault - Antivalence CF = positioner 3 0x1008
25.1 Fault - Cold starting (TPF) fault 3 0x100A
25.2 Fault - UVO fault 3 0x100B
25.3 Fault - OPO fault 3 0x100C
25.4 Reserved
26.0 Reserved
26.1 Fault - Protection Fault - Unbalance IM UM 3 0x1021
26.2 Fault - Overload IM UM 3 0x1022
26.3 Fault - Overload + phase failure IM UM 3 0x1023
26.4 Fault - Int. ground fault IM UM 3 0x1027
26.5 Fault - Ext. ground fault EM 3 0x1028
26.6 Reserved
26.7 Fault - Thermistor overload Th 3 0x1024
27.0 Fault - Thermistor short circuit Th 3 0x1025
27.1 Fault - Thermistor open circuit Th 3 0x1026
27.2 Reserved
27.3 Fault - TM1 trip T> TM1 3 0x102B
27.4 Fault - TM1 sensor fault TM1 3 0x102C
27.5 Fault - TM1 out of range TM1 3 0x102D
27.6 Fault - EM+ open circuit EM+ 3 0x1029
27.7 Fault - EM+ short-circuit EM+ 3 0x102A
28.0 Faults - Level Fault - Trip I> IM UM 3 0x1040
monitoring
28.1 Fault - Trip I< IM UM 3 0x1041
28.2 Fault - Trip P> UM 3 0x1042
28.3 Fault - Trip P< UM 3 0x1043
28.4 Fault - Trip cos phi< UM 3 0x1045
28.5 Fault - Trip U< UM 3 0x1047
28.6 Fault - Trip 0/4-20 mA> AM1 3 0x1048
28.7 Fault - Trip 0/4-20 mA< AM1 3 0x1049
29.0 Fault - Stalled rotor IM UM 3 0x104C
29.1 Reserved
29.4 Fault - Number of starts > 3 0x1057

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 565
Data formats and data records
17.7 Data record 92 - Device diagnostics

Byte.Bit Designation Information PNIO Diagn. **) Error No. ***)

29.5 Reserved
30.0 Faults - Fault - External fault 1 3 0x1070
Miscellaneous
30.1 Fault - External fault 2 3 0x1071
30.2 Fault - External fault 3 3 0x1072
30.3 Fault - External fault 4 3 0x1073
30.4 Fault - External fault 5 3 0x1074
30.5 Fault - External fault 6 3 0x1075
30.6 Reserved
30.7 Reserved
31.0 Fault - AM1 open circuit AM1 3 0x105B
31.1 Fault - Test trip 3 0x1055
31.2 Fault - DM-F safety-related tripping DM-F 3 0x0019
31.3 Fault - DM-F wiring DM-FL 3 0x1061
31.4 Fault - DM-FL cross circuit DM-FL 3 0x1062
31.5 Reserved
32.0 Faults - Protection Fault - TM2 trip T > TM2 3 0x102E
extended
32.1 Fault - TM2 sensor fault TM2 3 0x102F
32.2 Fault - TM2 out of range TM2 3 0x1030
32.3 Reserved
33.0 Faults - Level Fault - Trip 0/4-20mA > AM2 3 0x104A
monitoring extended
33.1 Fault - Trip 0/4-20mA < AM2 3 0x104B
33.2 Reserved
34.0 Faults - Fault - AM2 open circuit AM2 3 0x105C
Miscellaneous
extended
34.1 Reserved
36.0 Warnings - Warning - TM2 warning T > TM2 2 0x102E
Protection extended
36.1 Reserved
36.2 Warning - TM2 sensor fault TM2 2 0x102F
36.3 Warning - TM2 out of range TM2 2 0x1030
36.4 Reserved
37.0 Warnings - Level Warning - Warning 0/4-20mA > AM2 2 0x104A
monitoring extended
37.1 Warning - Warning 0/4-20mA < AM2 2 0x104B
37.2 Reserved
38.0 Warnings - Warning - AM2 open circuit AM2 2 0x105C
Miscellaneous
extended
38.1 Reserved
39.0 Reserved

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

566 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Data formats and data records
17.7 Data record 92 - Device diagnostics

Byte.Bit Designation Information PNIO Diagn. **) Error No. ***)

40.0 Events - Protection Event - TM2 warning T> TM2
extended
40.1 Event - TM2 trip T> TM2
40.2 Event - TM2 sensor fault TM2
40.3 Event – TM2 out of range TM2
40.4 Reserved
41.0 Events - Level Event - Warning 0/4-20mA > AM2
monitoring
41.1 Event - Warning 0/4-20mA < AM2
41.2 Event - Trip 0/4-20mA > 2 AM2
41.3 Event - Trip 0/4-20mA < AM2
41.4 Event - Limit 5 Limit monitor 5
41.5 Event - Limit 6 Limit monitor 6
41.6 Reserved
42.0 Reserved
43.0 Events - Event - AM2 open circuit AM2
Miscellaneous
extended
43.1 Reserved
44.0 Reserved Bit[16]
*) The "GEN. FAULT" LED on the basic unit is not controlled; instead, the "SF" LED lights up
on the DM-FP (because PROFIsafe is not active)
**) Left column: PNIO diagnostics status for the raised alarm:
● 1 = Maintenance required
● 2 = Maintenance demanded
● 3 = Failure
Right column: PNIO error number (channel error type)
***) No PNIO diagnostics
1) 3UF7510-1AA00-0 ground-fault module

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 567
Data formats and data records
17.8 Data record 94 - measured values

17.8 Data record 94 - measured values

Table 17- 10 Data record 94 - measured values

Byte.Bit Designation Type Range Unit Information

0.0 Reserved Byte[4]
4.0 Thermal motor model Byte 0 - 255 See 2) IM UM
5.0 Phase unbalance Byte 0 - 100 1% IM UM
6.0 cos phi Byte 0 - 100 1% UM
7.0 Reserved Byte[5]
12.0 Max. current I_max Word 0 - 65535 1 % / Is IM UM
14.0 Current I_L1 Word 0 - 65535 1 % / Is IM UM
16.0 Current I_L2 Word 0 - 65535 1 % / Is IM UM
18.0 Current I_L3 Word 0 - 65535 1 % / Is IM UM
20.0 Last trip current Word 0 - 65535 1 % / Is IM UM
22.0 Time to trip Word 0 - 65535 100 ms IM UM
24.0 Cooling down period Word 0 - 65535 100 ms IM UM
26.0 Voltage U_L1 Word 0 - 65535 1V UM
28.0 Voltage U_L2 Word 0 - 65535 1V UM
30.0 Voltage U_L3 Word 0 - 65535 1V UM
32.0 AM1 - output Word 0 - 32767 See 1) AM1
34.0 AM1 - input Word 0 - 32767 AM1
36.0 AM1 - input 2 Word 0 - 32767 AM1
38.0 Reserved
40.0 TM1 - max. temperature Word 0 - 65535 1 K see 3) TM1
42.0 TM1 - temperature 1 Word 0 - 65535 TM1
44.0 TM1 - temperature 2 Word 0 - 65535 TM1
46.0 TM1 - temperature 3 Word 0 - 65535 TM1
48.0 EM+ 4) - ground-fault current Word 0 - 65535 EM+
50.0 EM+ 4 - last trip current Word 0 - 65535 EM+
52.0 Active power P D-word 0 - 0xFFFFFFFF 1W UM
56.0 Apparent power S D-word 0 - 0xFFFFFFFF 1 VA UM
60.0 Reserved Byte[14]
64.0 Reserved Byte[28]
92.0 Reserved Byte[24]
116.0 AM2 - output Word 0 - 32767 See 1) AM2
118.0 AM2 - input 1 Word 0 - 32767 AM2
120.0 AM2 - input 2 Word 0 - 32767 AM2
122.0 Reserved

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

568 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Data formats and data records
17.8 Data record 94 - measured values

Byte.Bit Designation Type Range Unit Information

124.0 TM2 - max. temperature Word 0 - 65535 1 K see 3) TM2
126.0 TM2 - temperature 1 Word 0 - 65535 TM2
128.0 TM2 - temperature 2 Word 0 - 65535 TM2
130.0 TM2 - temperature 3 Word 0 - 65535 TM2
132.0 Reserved
140.0 Reserved Byte[32]
1) S7 format:
0/4 mA = 0
20 mA = 27648
2) Representation of the "Thermal motor model":
Value always refers to symm. trip level,
representation in steps of 2% in bits 6 - 0 (range 0 to 254%), bit 7 shows unbalance (fixed
level 50%).
3) Representation in Kelvin.
4) 3UF7510-1AA00-0 ground-fault module

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 569
Data formats and data records
17.9 Data record 95 - Service data/statistical data

17.9 Data record 95 - Service data/statistical data

Writing the service data/statistical data

Writing is only possible if password protection is not active.

Additional abbreviations:
● r / w = value can be written / changed
● r = value can only be read

Table 17- 11 Data record 95 - service data/statistical data

Byte.Bit Designation Type Range Unit Information

0.0 Coordination Byte[4]
4.0 Permissible starts - Actual value Byte 0 - 255 r1)
5.0 DM-F - Time until test required Byte 0 - 255 1 week r
6.0 Reserved Byte[2]
8.0 Number of parameterizations Word 0 - 65535 r
10.0 Number of overload trips Word 0 - 65535 r/w
12.0 Number of internal overload Word 0 - 65535 r
trips
14.0 Motor stop time Word 0 - 65535 1h r/w
16.0 Timer 1 - Actual value Word 0 - 65535 100 ms r
18.0 Timer 2 - Actual value Word 0 - 65535 100 ms r
20.0 Timer 3 - Actual value Word 0 - 65535 100 ms r
22.0 Timer 4 - Actual value Word 0 - 65535 100 ms r
24.0 Counter 1 - Actual value Word 0 - 65535 r
26.0 Counter 2 - Actual value Word 0 - 65535 r
28.0 Counter 3 - Actual value Word 0 - 65535 r
30.0 Counter 4 - Actual value Word 0 - 65535 r
32.0 Calculation module 1 - Output Word 0 - 65535 r
34.0 Calculation module 2 - Output Word 0 - 65535 r
36.0 Reserved Byte[4] 0
40.0 Motor operating hours D-word 0 - 0xFFFFFFFF 1s r/w
44.0 Int. motor operating hours D-word 0 - 0xFFFFFFFF 1s r
48.0 Device operating hours D-word 0 - 0xFFFFFFFF 1s r
52.0 Number of starts D-word 0 - 0xFFFFFFFF r/w
56.0 Internal number of starts CW D-word 0 - 0xFFFFFFFF r
60.0 Internal number of starts CCW D-word 0 - 0xFFFFFFFF r
64.0 Energy consumed D-word 0 - 0xFFFFFFFF 1 kWh r/w UM
68.0 Reserved D-word[2]
76.0 Reserved D-word[6]
100.0 Reserved Byte[16]
116.0 Timer 5 - Actual value Word 0 - 65535 100 ms r

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

570 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Data formats and data records
17.9 Data record 95 - Service data/statistical data

Byte.Bit Designation Type Range Unit Information

118.0 Timer 6 - Actual value Word 0 - 65535 100 ms r
120.0 Counter 5 - Actual value Word 0 - 65535 r
122.0 Counter 6 - Actual value Word 0 - 65535 r
124.0 Analog arithmetic 1 output Word 0 - 65535 r
126.0 Analog arithmetic 2 output Word 0 - 65535 r
128.0 Analog multiplexer output Word 0 - 65535 r
130 Reserved Word[9]

1) Can only be written when the start monitoring function is active!

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 571
Data formats and data records
17.10 Data record 130 - Basic device parameters 1

17.10 Data record 130 - Basic device parameters 1

Table 17- 12 Data record 130 - Basic device parameters 1

Byte Designation (PRM group) Type Range Unit Default Note Information
.Bit
0.0 Coordination (byte[4] Byte
4.0 Device class Byte 5, 7, 9, 1 5 = BU1
3 7 = BU0
9 = BU2
13 = BU3
5.0 Thermistor (Th) Bit 0, 1 1 = active; thermistor in the BU
5.1 Reserved Bit[5]
5.6 Reserved
5.7 Initialization module (InM) Bit 0, 1
6.0 Operator panel (OP) Bit 0, 1
6.1 Analog module (AM1) Bit 0, 1
6.2 Temperature module (TM1) Bit 0, 1
6.3 Ground-fault module (EM) Bit 0, 1
6.4 Digital module 1 (DM1) Bit[2] 0-3 0 = no digital module
6.6 Digital module 2 (DM2) Bit[2] 0-2 1 = monostable
2 = bistable
3 = DM-F (see Byte.Bit 3.4)
7.0 Operator panel with display Bit 0, 1
(OPD)
7.1 Ground-fault module for Bit 0, 1
3UL23 transformer (EM+)
7.2 Analog module 2 (AM2) Bit 0, 1
7.3 Temperature module 2 (TM2) Bit 0, 1
7.4 DM1 - Special type Bit[2] 0, 1 0 = DM-FL
1 = DM-FP
7.6 Reserved
8.0 Current measuring (IM) Bit[7] 0 .. 5 0 = no current measurement
1 = 0.3 A - 3 A
2 = 2.4 A - 25 A
3 = 10 A - 100 A
4 = 20 A - 200 A
5 = 63 A - 630 A
8.7 Voltage measuring module Bit 0, 1
(UM)
9.0 Reserved

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

572 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Data formats and data records
17.10 Data record 130 - Basic device parameters 1

Byte Designation (PRM group) Type Range Unit Default Note Information
.Bit
10.0 Control function (CF) Byte 0x00 0x00 = Overload
0x10 0x10 = Direct starter
0x11 0x11 = Reversing starter
0x12 0x12 = Linked device
0x20 0x20 = Star-delta starter
0x21 0x21 = Star-delta reversing
0x30 starter
0x31 0x30 = Dahlander
0x40 0x31 = Reversing Dahlander
starter
0x41
0x40 = Pole-changing starter
0x50
0x41 = Pole-changing
0x60
reversing starter
0x61
0x50 = Solenoid valve
0x62
0x60 = Positioner 1
0x63
0x61 = Positioner 2
0x64
0x62 = Positioner 3
0x70
0x63 = Positioner 4
0x71
0x64 = Positioner 5
0x70 = Soft starter
0x71 = Soft starter with
reversing contactor
11.0 Reserved Bit[8]
12.0 Bit parameters (16)
12.0 No configuration fault due to Bit 0, 1 0
OP
12.1 Startup parameter block active Bit 0, 1 1
12.2 Test/Reset keys disabled Bit 0, 1 0
12.3 Bus and PLC/PCS - Reset Bit 0, 1 0 0 = Manual
1 = Auto
12.4 Reserved Bit 0
12.5 Reserved Bit 0
12.6 Reserved Bit 0
12.7 Reserved Bit 0
13.0 Diagnostics for process events Bit 0, 1 0
13.1 Diagnostics for process Bit 0, 1 1
warnings
13.2 Diagnostics for process faults Bit 0, 1 1
13.3 Diagnostics for device faults Bit 0, 1 1
13.4 Reserved Bit 0
13.5 Reserved Bit 0
13.6 Bus monitoring Bit 0, 1 1

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 573
Data formats and data records
17.10 Data record 130 - Basic device parameters 1

Byte Designation (PRM group) Type Range Unit Default Note Information
.Bit
13.7 PLC/PCS monitoring Bit 0, 1 1
14.0 Overload protection - Type of Bit 0, 1 0 0 = 3-phase IM UM
load 1 = 1-phase
14.1 Overload protection - Reset Bit 0, 1 0 0 = Manual IM UM
1 = Auto
14.2 Reserved Bit 0
14.3 Save change-over command Bit 0, 1 0
14.4 Non-maintained command Bit 0, 1 0
mode
14.5 Cold start level (TPF) Bit 0, 1 0 0 = NO contact
1 = NC contact
14.6 Type of consumer load Bit 0, 1 0 0 = Motor
1 = Resistive load
14.7 Reserved Bit 0
15.0 External fault 1 - Type Bit 0, 1 0 0 = NO contact
15.1 External fault 2 - Type Bit 0, 1 0 1 = NC contact
15.2 External fault 3 - Type Bit 0, 1 0
15.3 External fault 4 - Type Bit 0, 1 0
15.4 External fault 1 - Activity Bit 0, 1 0 0 = Always
15.5 External fault 2 - Activity Bit 0, 1 0 1 = Only motor ON
15.6 External fault 3 - Activity Bit 0, 1 0
15.7 External fault 4 - Activity Bit 0, 1 0
16.0 Bit[2] - Parameters (20)
16.0 Thermistor - Overload Bit[2] 1, 2, 3 3 0 = Deactivated Th
response 1 = Signaling
16.2 Thermistor - Response to Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 2 2 = Warning Th
sensor fault
3 = Tripping
16.4 Internal ground fault - Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0
Response
16.6 Motor protection - Overload Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 3 IM
response
17.0 Motor protection - Overload Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 2 IM
response
17.2 Unbalance protection - Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 2 IM
Response
17.4 Trip response I> Bit[2] 0, 1, 3 0
17.6 Warning response I> Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 0
18.0 Trip response I< Bit[2] 0, 1, 3 0
18.2 Warning response I< Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 0
18.4 Stalled rotor - Response Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0
18.6 EM+ 1)- Response to sensor Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0
fault

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

574 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Data formats and data records
17.10 Data record 130 - Basic device parameters 1

Byte Designation (PRM group) Type Range Unit Default Note Information
.Bit
19.0 Monitoring the number of starts Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0
- Response to overshoot
19.2 Monitoring the number of starts Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 0
- Response to prewarning
19.4 Motor operating hours Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 0
monitoring - Response
19.6 Motor stop time monitoring - Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 0
Response
20.0 External fault 1 – Response Bit[2] 1, 2, 3 1
20.2 External fault 2 – Response Bit[2] 1, 2, 3 1
20.4 External fault 3 – Response Bit[2] 1, 2, 3 1
20.6 External fault 4 – Response Bit[2] 1, 2, 3 1
21.0 Reserved Bit[2] 0
21.2 Basic unit - Delays inputs Bit[2] 0-3 10 ms 1 Offset 6 ms
21.4 Timer 1 - Type Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 0 = With closing delay,
21.6 Timer 2 - Type Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 1 = Closing delay with memory
2 = With opening delay
3 = With fleeting closing
22.0 Signal conditioner 1 - Type Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 0 = Non-inverting
22.2 Signal conditioner 2 - Type Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 1 = Inverting
22.4 Non-volatile element 1 - Type Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 2 = Edge rising with memory
22.6 Non-volatile element 2 - Type Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 3 = Edge falling with memory
23.0 EM+ 2) - monitoring Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 0 = on
23.2 EM+ 2) - monitoring warning Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 1 = on+
2 = run
3 = run+
23.4 EM - response to an external Bit[2] 1, 3 1 0 = Deactivated
ground fault 1 = Signaling
23.6 EM - response to warning of Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 0 2 = Warning
an external ground fault
3 = Tripping
24.0 Bit[4] - Parameters (24)
24.0 External fault 1 - Reset also by Bit[4] 0 - 1111B 0101B Bit[0] = Panel reset
24.4 External fault 2 - Reset also by Bit[4] 0 - 1111B 0101B Bit[1] = Auto-reset
25.0 External fault 3 - Reset also by Bit[4] 0 - 1111B 0101B Bit[2] = Remote reset
25.4 External fault 4 - Reset also by Bit[4] 0 - 1111B 0101B Bit[4] = OFF command reset
26.0 Limit monitor - Hysteresis for Bit[4] 0 - 15 1% 5
limit monitoring
26.4 EM+ 2) - hysteresis Bit[4] 0 - 15 1% 5
27.0 Reserved Bit[4] 0
27.4 Reserved Bit[4] 0

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 575
Data formats and data records
17.10 Data record 130 - Basic device parameters 1

Byte Designation (PRM group) Type Range Unit Default Note Information
.Bit
28.0 Byte parameters (28)
28.0 Internal ground fault - Delay Byte 0 .. 255 100 ms 5 IM UM
29.0 Overload protection - Class Byte 5, 10 .. 35, 10
40
30.0 Motor protection - Delay with Byte 0 - 255 100 ms 5 IM UM
overload operation
31.0 Motor protection - unbalance Byte 0 - 100 1% 40 IM UM
protection level
32.0 Motor protection - Unbalance Byte 0 - 255 100 ms 5 IM UM
protection - Delay in the event
of unbalance
33.0 Interlocking time Byte 0 - 255 1s 0
34.0 FB time Byte 0 - 255 100 ms 5 0 = Deactivated
35.0 Trip level I> Byte 0 - 255 4 % / Is 0 IM UM
36.0 Warning level I> Byte 0 - 255 4 % / Is 0 IM UM
37.0 Trip level I< Byte 0 - 255 4 % / Is 0 IM UM
38.0 Warning level I< Byte 0 - 255 4 % / Is 0 IM UM
39.0 Stalled rotor level Byte 0 - 255 4 % / Is 0 IM UM
40.0 Trip delay I> Byte 0 - 255 100 ms 5 IM UM
41.0 Warning delay I> Byte 0 - 255 100 ms 5 IM UM
42.0 Trip delay I< Byte 0 - 255 100 ms 5 IM UM
43.0 Warning delay I< Byte 0 - 255 100 ms 5 IM UM
44.0 Blocking delay Byte 0 - 255 100 ms 5 IM UM
45.0 Monitoring the number of starts Byte 1 - 255 1
- Permissible starts
46.0 Reserved Byte 0
47.0 EM+ 2) - delay Byte 0 - 255 100 ms 0
48.0 Truth table 1 type 3I/1O Byte 0- 0
1111111
1B
49.0 Truth table 2 type 3I/1O Byte 0- 0
1111111
1B
50.0 Truth table 3 type 3I/1O Byte 0- 0
1111111
1B
51.0 Reserved Byte 0

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

576 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Data formats and data records
17.10 Data record 130 - Basic device parameters 1

Byte Designation (PRM group) Type Range Unit Default Note Information
.Bit
52.0 Word parameters (32)
52.0 Motor protection - Cooling Word 600 - 100 ms 3000 IM UM
down period 65535
54.0 Motor protection - Pause time Word 0 - 65535 100 ms 0 0 = Deactivated IM UM
56.0 Execution time Word 0 - 65535 100 ms 10 0 = Deactivated
58.0 Monitoring the number of starts Word 0 - 65535 1 s 0
- Time range for starts
60.0 Monitoring the number of starts Word 0 - 65535 1 s 0
- Interlocking time
62.0 Motor stop time level > Word 0 - 65535 1 h 0
64.0 Timer 1 - Limit Word 0 - 65535 100 ms 0
66.0 Timer 2 - Limit Word 0 - 65535 100 ms 0
68.0 Counter 1 - Limit Word 0 - 65535 0
70.0 Counter 2 - Limit Word 0 - 65535 0
72.0 EM+ 2) - trip level Word 30 - 1 mA 1000
40000
74.0 EM+ 2) - warning level Word 30 - 1 mA 500
40000
76.0 D-word parameters (36)
76.0 Operator control enables Bit[32] 0 - 1-1B 0-0B
80.0 Motor protection - Set current D- 1) 10 mA 30 IM UM
Is1 word
84.0 Motor operating hours level > D- 0- 1s 0
word 0xFFFFF
FFF
88.0 Reserved D- 0
word

1) Value range dependent on current range of the IM / UM and the conversion factor
2) 3UF7510-1AA00-0 ground-fault module

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 577
Data formats and data records
17.11 Data record 131 - Basic device parameters 2 (plug binary)

17.11 Data record 131 - Basic device parameters 2 (plug binary)

Table 17- 13 Data record 131 - Basic device parameters 2

Byte.Bit Designation (PRM group) Type Range Default Note Information

0.0 Reserved Byte[4]
4.0 Byte parameters (40)
4.0 BU - Output 1 Byte 0 - 255 0
5.0 BU - Output 2 Byte 0 - 255 0
6.0 BU - Output 3 Byte 0 - 255 0
7.0 Reserved Byte 0
8.0 OP - LED green 1 Byte 0 - 255 0 OP OPD
9.0 OP - LED green 2 Byte 0 - 255 0 OP OPD
10.0 OP - LED green 3 Byte 0 - 255 0 OP OPD
11.0 OP - LED green 4 Byte 0 - 255 0 OP OPD
12.0 OP - LED yellow 1 Byte 0 - 255 0 OP
13.0 OP - LED yellow 2 Byte 0 - 255 0 OP
14.0 OP - LED yellow 3 Byte 0 - 255 0 OP
15.0 Reserved Byte 0
16.0 Cyclic send - Bit 0.0 Byte 0 - 255 105 Default: Status - ON<
17.0 Cyclic send - Bit 0.1 Byte 0 - 255 106 Default: Status - Off
18.0 Cyclic send - Bit 0.2 Byte 0 - 255 107 Default: Status - ON>
19.0 Cyclic send - Bit 0.3 Byte 0 - 255 128 Default: Event - Overload
operation
20.0 Cyclic send - Bit 0.4 Byte 0 - 255 110 Default: Status - Interlocking
time active
21.0 Cyclic send - Bit 0.5 Byte 0 - 255 120 Default: Status - Auto mode
22.0 Cyclic send - Bit 0.6 Byte 0 - 255 96 Default: Status - General
fault
23.0 Cyclic send - Bit 0.7 Byte 0 - 255 97 Default: Status - General
warning
24.0 OPC-UA send - Bit 1.0 Byte 0 - 255 0
25.0 OPC-UA send - Bit 1.1 Byte 0 - 255 0
26.0 OPC-UA send - Bit 1.2 Byte 0 - 255 0
27.0 OPC-UA send - Bit 1.3 Byte 0 .. 255 0
28.0 OPC-UA send - Bit 1.4 Byte 0 - 255 0
29.0 OPC-UA send - Bit 1.5 Byte 0 - 255 0
30.0 OPC-UA send - Bit 1.6 Byte 0 - 255 0
31.0 OPC-UA send - Bit 1.7 Byte 0 - 255 0
32.0 OPC-UA send - Bit 0.0 Byte 0 - 255 0
33.0 OPC-UA send - Bit 0.1 Byte 0 - 255 0
34.0 OPC-UA send - Bit 0.2 Byte 0 - 255 0
35.0 OPC-UA send - Bit 0.3 Byte 0 - 255 0
36.0 OPC-UA send - Bit 0.4 Byte 0 - 255 0
37.0 OPC-UA send - Bit 0.5 Byte 0 - 255 0
38.0 OPC-UA send - Bit 0.6 Byte 0 - 255 0

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

578 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Data formats and data records
17.11 Data record 131 - Basic device parameters 2 (plug binary)

Byte.Bit Designation (PRM group) Type Range Default Note Information

39.0 OPC-UA send - Bit 0.7 Byte 0 - 255 0
40.0 OPC-UA send - Bit 1.0 Byte 0 - 255 0
41.0 OPC-UA send - Bit 1.1 Byte 0 - 255 0
42.0 OPC-UA send - Bit 1.2 Byte 0 - 255 0
43.0 OPC-UA send - Bit 1.3 Byte 0 - 255 0
44.0 OPC-UA send - Bit 1.4 Byte 0 - 255 0
45.0 OPC-UA send - Bit 1.5 Byte 0 - 255 0
46.0 OPC-UA send - Bit 1.6 Byte 0 - 255 0
47.0 OPC-UA send - Bit 1.7 Byte 0 - 255 0
48.0 Monitoring PLC/PCS input Byte 0 - 255 0
49.0 Motor protection - Emergency Byte 0 - 255 60 Default: Cyclic receive - IM UM
start Bit 0.4
50.0 Reserved Byte 0
51.0 Reserved Byte 0
52.0 Mode selector S1 Byte 0 - 255 61 Default: Cyclic receive -
Bit 0.5
53.0 Mode selector S2 Byte 0 - 255 2 Default: Fixed level value "1"
54.0 Control station - Local control Byte 0 - 255 0 Dependent on
[LC] ON< the control
55.0 Control station - Local control Byte 0 - 255 0 function
[LC] OFF
56.0 Control station - Local control Byte 0 - 255 0
[LC] ON>
57.0 Control station - PLC/PCS [PN] Byte 0 - 255 56 Default: Cyclic receive -
ON< Bit 0.0
58.0 Control station - PLC/PCS [PN] Byte 0 - 255 57 Default: Cyclic receive -
OFF Bit 0.1
59.0 Control station - PLC/PCS [PN] Byte 0 - 255 58 Default: Cyclic receive -
ON> Bit 0.2
60.0 Control station - PC/OPC- Byte 0 - 255 0
UA[OCM] ON<
61.0 Control station - PC/OPC- Byte 0 - 255 0
UA[OCM] OFF
62.0 Control station - PC/OPC- Byte 0 - 255 0
UA[OCM] ON>
63.0 Control station - Operator panel Byte 0 - 255 0
[OP] ON<
64.0 Control station - Operator panel Byte 0 - 255 0
[OP] OFF
65.0 Control station - Operator panel Byte 0 - 255 0
[OP] ON>
66.0 Control function - ON< Byte 0 - 255 73 Default: Group control station
ON<
67.0 Control function - OFF Byte 0 - 255 74 Default: Group control station
OFF
68.0 Control function - ON> Byte 0 - 255 75 Default: Group control station
ON>

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 579
Data formats and data records
17.11 Data record 131 - Basic device parameters 2 (plug binary)

Byte.Bit Designation (PRM group) Type Range Default Note Information

69.0 Control function - Feedback ON Byte 0 - 255 101 Default: Status - Motor
current flowing
70.0 External fault 1 - Input Byte 0 - 255 0
71.0 External fault 2 - Input Byte 0 - 255 0
72.0 External fault 3 - Input Byte 0 - 255 0
73.0 External fault 4 - Input Byte 0 - 255 0
74.0 External fault 1 - Reset Byte 0 - 255 0
75.0 External fault 2 - Reset Byte 0 - 255 0
76.0 External fault 3 - Reset Byte 0 - 255 0
77.0 External fault 4 - Reset Byte 0 - 255 0
78.0 Cold start (TPF) Byte 0 - 255 0
79.0 Test 1 - Input Byte 0 - 255 59 Default: Cyclic receive -
Bit 0.3
80.0 Test 2 - Input Byte 0 - 255 0
81.0 Reset 1 - Input Byte 0 - 255 62 Default: Cyclic receive -
Bit 0.6
82.0 Reset 2 - Input Byte 0 - 255 0
83.0 Reset 3 - Input Byte 0 - 255 0
84.0 Reserved Byte 0
85.0 Reserved Byte 0
86.0 Reserved Byte 0
87.0 Reserved Byte 0
88.0 Truth table 1 3I/1O - Input 1 Byte 0 - 255 0
89.0 Truth table 1 3I/1O - Input 2 Byte 0 - 255 0
90.0 Truth table 1 3I/1O - Input 3 Byte 0 - 255 0
91.0 Truth table 2 3I/1O - Input 1 Byte 0 - 255 0
92.0 Truth table 2 3I/1O - Input 2 Byte 0 - 255 0
93.0 Truth table 2 3I/1O - Input 3 Byte 0 - 255 0
94.0 Truth table 3 3I/1O - Input 1 Byte 0 - 255 0
95.0 Truth table 3 3I/1O - Input 2 Byte 0 - 255 0
96.0 Truth table 3 3I/1O - Input 3 Byte 0 - 255 0
97.0 Reserved Byte 0
98.0 Timer 1 - Input Byte 0 - 255 0
99.0 Timer 1 - Reset Byte 0 - 255 0
100.0 Timer 2 - Input Byte 0 - 255 0
101.0 Timer 2 - Reset Byte 0 - 255 0
102.0 Counter 1 - Input + Byte 0 - 255 0
103.0 Counter 1 - Input - Byte 0 - 255 0
104.0 Counter 1 - Reset Byte 0 - 255 0
105.0 Counter 2 - Input + Byte 0 - 255 0
106.0 Counter 2 - Input - Byte 0 - 255 0
107.0 Counter 2 - Reset Byte 0 - 255 0
108.0 Signal conditioner 1 - Input Byte 0 - 255 0

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

580 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Data formats and data records
17.11 Data record 131 - Basic device parameters 2 (plug binary)

Byte.Bit Designation (PRM group) Type Range Default Note Information

109.0 Signal conditioner 1 - Reset Byte 0 - 255 0
110.0 Signal conditioner 2 - Input Byte 0 - 255 0
111.0 Signal conditioner 2 - Reset Byte 0 - 255 0
112.0 Non-volatile element 1 - Input Byte 0 - 255 0
113.0 Non-volatile element 1 - Reset Byte 0 - 255 0
114.0 Non-volatile element 2 - Input Byte 0 - 255 0
115.0 Non-volatile element 2 - Reset Byte 0 - 255 0
116.0 Flashing 1 - Input Byte 0 - 255 0
117.0 Flashing 2 - Input Byte 0 - 255 0
118.0 Flashing 3 - Input Byte 0 - 255 0
119.0 Flicker 1 - Input Byte 0 - 255 0
120.0 Flicker 2 - Input Byte 0 - 255 0
121.0 Flicker 3 - Input Byte 0 - 255 0
122.0 Analog parameters (44)
122.0 PLC/PCS analog input Byte 0 - 255 16 Default: Max. current I_max
123.0 Reserved Byte 0

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 581
Data formats and data records
17.12 Data record 132 - Extended device parameters 1

17.12 Data record 132 - Extended device parameters 1

Table 17- 14 Data record 132 - Extended device parameters 1

Byte.Bit Designation (PRM group) Type Range Unit Default Note Information
0.0 Reserved Byte[4]
4.0 Bit parameters (17)
4.0 Reserved
4.1 Reserved
4.2 Reserved Bit 0
4.3 Reserved Bit 0
4.4 Reserved Bit 0
4.5 Reserved Bit 0
4.6 Reserved Bit 0
4.7 Reserved Bit 0
5.0 Reserved Bit 0
5.1 Voltage measuring - Type of Bit 0, 1 0 0 = 3-phase
load 1 = 1-phase
5.2 OPD - Warnings Bit 0, 1 0 0 = Do not display
5.3 OPD - Faults Bit 0, 1 1 1 = Display
5.4 AM1 - Measuring range input Bit 0, 1 0 0 = 0-20mA AM1
5.5 AM1 - Measuring range Bit 0, 1 0 1 = 4-20mA AM1
output
5.6 Reserved Bit 0
5.7 Reserved Bit 0
6.0 Overshooting/undershooting Bit 0, 1 0 0 = ">" (overshooti
limit 1 ng)
6.1 Overshooting/undershooting Bit 0, 1 0 1 = "<"
limit 2 (undershooting)
6.2 Overshooting/undershooting Bit 0, 1 0
limit 3
6.3 Overshooting/undershooting Bit 0, 1 0
limit 4
6.4 Line-to-line voltage Bit 0, 1 0 0 = No
1 = Yes
6.5 OPO level Bit 0, 1 0 0 = NO contact
1 = NC contact
6.6 Positioner response for OPO Bit 0, 1 0 0 = CLOSED
1 = OPEN
6.7 Star-delta - Transformer Bit 0, 1 0 0 = Delta
mounting 1 = In supply line
7.0 External fault 5 - Type Bit 0, 1 0 0 = NO contact
7.1 External fault 6 - Type Bit 0, 1 0 1 = NC contact
7.2 Reserved Bit 0
7.3 Reserved Bit 0

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

582 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Data formats and data records
17.12 Data record 132 - Extended device parameters 1

Byte.Bit Designation (PRM group) Type Range Unit Default Note Information
7.4 Monitoring external fault 5 Bit 0, 1 0 0 = Always
7.5 Monitoring external fault 6 Bit 0, 1 0 1 = Only motor ON
7.6 Reserved Bit 0
7.7 Reserved Bit 0
8.0 Calculator 2, Operating Bit 0, 1 0 0 = Word
mode 1 = D-word
8.1 Reserved Bit 0
8.2 DM-F - Safe tripping function Bit 0, 1 0 0 = No DM-F
1 = Yes
8.3 DM-F - Safety-related Bit 0, 1 0 0 = Manual DM-F
tripping reset 1 = Auto
8.4 Reserved
8.5 Reserved Bit 0
8.6 Reserved Bit 0
8.7 Reserved Bit 0
9.0 DM-FL - Configuration 1 Bit 0, 1 0 Configurable DM-FL
9.1 DM-FL - Configuration 2 Bit 0, 1 0 parameters DM-FL
comparable with
9.2 DM-FL - Configuration 3 Bit 0, 1 0 the module DM-FL
9.3 DM-FL - Configuration 4 Bit 0, 1 0 configuration DM-FL
9.4 DM-FL - Configuration 5 Bit 0, 1 0 DM-FL
9.5 DM-FL - Configuration 6 Bit 0, 1 0 DM-FL
9.6 DM-FL - Configuration 7 Bit 0, 1 0 DM-FL
9.7 DM-FL - Configuration 8 Bit 0, 1 0 DM-FL
10.0 Bit[2] - Parameters (21)
10.0 Reserved Bit[2]
10.2 Reserved Bit[2] 0
10.4 UVO timebase Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 0
10.6 UVO operating mode Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 0 0 = Deactivated
1 = Activated
11.0 Trip monitoring U< Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 1 0 = ON (always) UM
11.2 Warning monitoring U< Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 1 1 = ON+ (always, UM
not TPF)
2 = RUN (motor
ON, not TPF)
11.4 Reserved Bit[2] 0
11.6 Reserved Bit[2] 0

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 583
Data formats and data records
17.12 Data record 132 - Extended device parameters 1

Byte.Bit Designation (PRM group) Type Range Unit Default Note Information
12.0 Trip monitoring 0/4-20 mA> Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 0 = ON (always) AM1
12.2 Warning monitoring 0/4-20 Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 1 = ON + (always, AM1
mA> not TPF)
12.4 Trip monitoring 0/4-20 mA< Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 2 = RUN (motor AM1
12.6 Warning monitoring 0/4-20 Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 ON, not TPF) AM1
mA< 3 = RUN+ (motor
ON, not TPF,
13.0 Monitoring limit 1 Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0
startup override)
13.2 Monitoring limit 2 Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0
13.4 Monitoring limit 3 Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0
13.6 Monitoring limit 4 Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0
14.0 Reserved Bit[2] 0
14.2 Reserved Bit[2] 0
14.4 Reserved Bit[2] 0
14.6 AM1 - active inputs Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 0 0 = 1 input AM1
1 = 2 inputs
2 = 3 inputs
15.0 DM - Delays inputs Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 10 ms 1 Offset 6ms DM1 DM2
15.2 AM1 - Response for open Bit[2] 1, 2, 3 2 0 = Deactivated AM1
circuit 1 = Signaling
15.4 EM - Response to external Bit[2] 1, 3 1 2 = Warning EM EM+
ground fault
3 = Tripping
15.6 EM - response to warning of Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 0 EM EM+
an external ground fault
16.0 Reserved Bit[2] 0
16.2 Reserved Bit[2] 0
16.4 DM-F - Test requirement Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 0 0 = Deactivated DM-F
response 1 = Signaling
16.6 DM-F - safety-related Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 2 = Warning DM-F
tripping response
3 = Tripping
17.0 TM1 - Trip response T> Bit[2] 1, 3 3 TM1
17.2 TM1 - Warning response T> Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 2 TM1
17.4 TM1 - Response to a sensor Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 2 TM1
fault / out of range
17.6 TM1 - Active sensors Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 2 0 = 1 sensor TM1
1 = 2 sensors
2 = 3 sensors

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

584 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Data formats and data records
17.12 Data record 132 - Extended device parameters 1

Byte.Bit Designation (PRM group) Type Range Unit Default Note Information
18.0 Trip response P> Bit[2] 0, 1, 3 0 0 = Deactivated UM
18.2 Warning response P> Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 0 1 = Signaling UM
18.4 Trip response P< Bit[2] 0, 1, 3 0 2 = Warning UM
18.6 Warning response P< Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 0 3 = Tripping UM
19.0 Trip response cos phi < Bit[2] 0, 1, 3 0 UM
19.2 Warning response cos phi < Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 0 UM
19.4 Trip response U< Bit[2] 0, 1, 3 0 UM
19.6 Warning response U< Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 0 UM
20.0 Trip response 0/4-20 mA> Bit[2] 0, 1, 3 0 AM1
20.2 Warning response 0/4-20 Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 0 AM1
mA>
20.4 Trip response 0/4-20 mA< Bit[2] 0, 1, 3 0 AM1
20.6 Warning response 0/4-20 Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 0 AM1
mA<
21.0 Reserved Bit[2] 0
21.2 Reserved Bit[2] 0
21.4 Reserved Bit[2] 0
21.6 Reserved Bit[2] 0
22.0 External fault 5 – Response Bit[2] 1, 2, 3 1 0 = Deactivated
22.2 External fault 6 – Response Bit[2] 1, 2, 3 1 1 = Signaling
2 = Warning
3 = Tripping
22.4 Reserved Bit[2] 0
22.6 Reserved Bit[2] 0
23.0 Analog-value recording - Bit[2] 0, 1 0 0 = positive
Trigger edge 1 = negative
23.2 Reserved Bit[2] 0
23.4 Reserved Bit[2] 0
23.6 Reserved Bit[2] 0
24.0 Reserved Bit[2] 0
24.2 Reserved Bit[2] 0
24.4 Reserved Bit[2] 0
24.6 Reserved Bit[2] 0
25.0 Timer 3 - Type Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 0 = With closing
25.2 Timer 4 - Type Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 delay
1 = Closing delay
with memory
2 = With opening
delay
3 = With fleeting
closing

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 585
Data formats and data records
17.12 Data record 132 - Extended device parameters 1

Byte.Bit Designation (PRM group) Type Range Unit Default Note Information
25.4 Signal conditioner 3 - Type Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 0 = Non-inverting
25.6 Signal conditioner 4 - Type Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 1 = Inverting
26.0 Non-volatile element 3 - Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 2 = Edge rising
Type with memory
26.2 Non-volatile element 4 - Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 3 = Edge falling
Type with memory
26.4 Calculator 2, Operator Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 0=+
1=-
2=*
3=/
26.6 Reserved Bit[2] 0
27.0 Reserved Bit[2] 0
27.2 Reserved Bit[2] 0
27.4 OPD - Operator panel Bit[2] 0-4 2 0 = Manual
display (bit 0 to 1) 1=3s
27.6 OPD - Operator panel Bit[2] 0-4 2 2 = 10 s
display (bit 2 to 3)
3 = 1 min
4 = 5 min
28.0 Bit[4] - Parameters (25)
28.0 TM1 - sensor type Bit[3] + 000B to 1 000B 000B = PT100 TM1
Bit 00B 001B = PT100
010B = KTY83
011B = KTY84
100B = NTC
28.4 OPD language Bit[4] 0-7 1 0 = English
1 = German
2 = French
3 = Polish
4 = Spanish
5 = Portuguese
6 = Italian
7 = Finnish
29.0 External fault 5 - Reset also Bit[4] 0 - 1111B 0101B Bit[0] = Panel
by reset
29.4 External fault 6 - Reset also Bit[4] 0 - 1111B 0101B Bit[1] = Auto-reset
by Bit[2] = Remote
reset
Bit[3] = OFF
command reset
30.0 OPD - Contrast (bit 0 to 3) Bit[4] 0 - 255 1% 50
30.4 OPD - Contrast (bit 4 to 7) Bit[4]
31.0 OPD - Profile (bit 0 to 3) Bit[4] 0 - 26 0
31.4 OPD - Profile (bit 4 to 7) Bit[4]

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

586 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Data formats and data records
17.12 Data record 132 - Extended device parameters 1

Byte.Bit Designation (PRM group) Type Range Unit Default Note Information
32.0 Truth table 7 type 2I/1O Bit[4] 0 - 1111B 0
32.4 Truth table 8 type 2I/1O Bit[4] 0 - 1111B 0
33.0 Is1 conversion factor - Bit[4] 0 - 15 0
Denominator
33.4 Is2 conversion factor - Bit[4] 0 - 15 0
Denominator
34.0 Hysteresis P - Cos phi - U Bit[4] 0 - 15 5 1% UM
34.4 Hysteresis 0/4-20 mA Bit[4] 0 - 15 5 1% AM1 AM2
35.0 Hysteresis free limits Bit[4] 0 - 15 5 1%
35.4 OPD - Lighting Bit[4] 0-4 2 0 = Off
1=3s
2 = 10 s
3 = 1 min
4 = 5 min
36.0 Byte parameters (29)
36.0 Reserved Byte 0
37.0 EM - Delay Byte 0 - 255 100 ms 5 EM
38.0 Trip level cos phi< Byte 0 - 100 1% 0 UM
39.0 Warning level cos phi< Byte 0 - 100 1% 0 UM
40.0 Trip level U< Byte 0 - 255 8V 0 UM
41.0 Warning level U< Byte 0 - 255 8V 0 UM
42.0 Trip level 0/4-20 mA> Byte 0 - 255 *128 0 AM1
43.0 Warning level 0/4-20 mA> Byte 0 - 255 *128 0 AM1
44.0 Trip level 0/4-20 mA< Byte 0 - 255 *128 0 AM1
45.0 Warning level 0/4-20 mA< Byte 0 - 255 *128 0 AM1
46.0 Trip delay P> Byte 0 - 255 100 ms 5 UM
47.0 Warning delay P> Byte 0 - 255 100 ms 5 UM
48.0 Trip delay P< Byte 0 - 255 100 ms 5 UM
49.0 Warning delay P< Byte 0 - 255 100 ms 5 UM
50.0 Trip delay cos phi< Byte 0 - 255 100 ms 5 UM
51.0 Warning delay cos phi< Byte 0 - 255 100 ms 5 UM
52.0 Trip delay U< Byte 0 - 255 100 ms 5 UM
53.0 Warning delay U< Byte 0 - 255 100 ms 5 UM
54.0 Trip delay 0/4-20 mA> Byte 0 - 255 100 ms 5 AM1
55.0 Warning delay 0/4-20 mA> Byte 0 - 255 100 ms 5 AM1
56.0 Trip delay 0/4-20 mA< Byte 0 - 255 100 ms 5 AM1
57.0 Warning delay 0/4-20 mA< Byte 0 - 255 100 ms 5 AM1
58.0 Delay limit 1 Byte 0 - 255 100 ms 5

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 587
Data formats and data records
17.12 Data record 132 - Extended device parameters 1

Byte.Bit Designation (PRM group) Type Range Unit Default Note Information
59.0 Delay limit 2 Byte 0 - 255 100 ms 5
60.0 Delay limit 3 Byte 0 - 255 100 ms 5
61.0 Delay limit 4 Byte 0 - 255 100 ms 5
62.0 TM - Hysteresis Byte 0 - 255 1K 5 TM1 TM2

63.0 Max. star time Byte 0 - 255 1s 20 Star-delta starter

64.0 UVO time Byte 0 - 255 100 ms 0
65.0 Staggering time Byte 0 - 255 1s 0
66.0 Analog value recording - Byte 0 - 20 5% 0
Sampling rate
67.0 Calculator 2, Denominator 1 Byte 0 - 255 0
68.0 Calculator 2, Numerator 2 Byte 0 - 255 0
69.0 Calculator 1, Denominator Byte 0 - 255 0
70.0 Truth table 4 type 3I/1O Byte 0- 0
1111111
1B
71.0 Truth table 5 type 3I/1O Byte 0- 0
1111111
1B
72.0 Truth table 6 type 3I/1O Byte 0- 0
1111111
1B
73.0 Calculator 2, Numerator 1 Byte -128 - 0
127
74.0 Calculator 2, Denominator 2 Byte -128 - 0
127
75.0 DM-F - Test requirement Byte 0 - 255 1 week 0
level
76.0 Word parameters (33)
76.0 Analog module - Start value Word 0 - 65535 0 Value for 0/4mA AM1
output
78.0 Analog Module - End value Word 0 - 65535 27648 Value for 20mA AM1
output
80.0 TM1 - Trip level T> Word 0 - 65535 1 K 0 TM1
82.0 TM1 - Warning level T> Word 0 - 65535 1 K 0 TM1
84.0 Limit monitor 1 - Limit Word 0 - 65535 0
86.0 Limit monitor 2 - Limit Word 0 - 65535 0
88.0 Limit monitor 3 - Limit Word 0 - 65535 0
90.0 Limit monitor 4 - Limit Word 0 - 65535 0
92.0 Timer 3 - Limit Word 0 - 65535 100 ms 0
94.0 Timer 4 - Limit Word 0 - 65535 100 ms 0

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

588 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Data formats and data records
17.12 Data record 132 - Extended device parameters 1

Byte.Bit Designation (PRM group) Type Range Unit Default Note Information
96.0 Counter 3 - Limit Word 0 - 65535 0
98.0 Counter 4 - Limit Word 0 - 65535 0
100.0 Change-over pause Word 0 - 65535 10 ms 0
102.0 Analog value recording - Word 1 - 50000 1 ms 100
Sampling rate
104.0 Is1 conversion factor - Word 0 - 65535 0
Numerator
106.0 Is2 conversion factor - Word 0 - 65535 0
Numerator
108.0 D-word parameters (37)
108.0 Motor protection - Set D-word 1) 10 mA 0
current Is2
112.0 Trip level P> D-word 0- 1W 0 UM
0xFFFFF
FFF
116.0 Warning level P> D-word 0- 1W 0 UM
0xFFFFF
FFF
120.0 Trip level P< D-word 0- 1W 0 UM
0xFFFFF
FFF
124.0 Warning level P< D-word 0- 1W 0 UM
0xFFFFF
FFF
128.0 Truth Table 9 5I/2O type - Bit[32] 0 - 1-1B 0
Output 1
132.0 Truth Table 9 5I/2O type - Bit[32] 0 - 1-1B 0
Output 2
136.0 Calculator 2, Offset D-word - 0
0x800000
00 -
0x7FFFF
FFF
140.0 Calculator 1, D-word 2x - 0
Numerator/Offset 32768 -
32767

1) Value range dependent on current range of the IM / UM and the conversion factor

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 589
Data formats and data records
17.13 Data record 133 - Extended device parameters 2 (plug binary)

17.13 Data record 133 - Extended device parameters 2 (plug binary)

Table 17- 15 Data record 133 - Extended device parameters

Byte.Bit Designation (PRM group) Type Range Default Note Information

0.0 Reserved Byte[4]
4.0 Byte parameters (41)
4.0 DM1 - Output 1 Byte 0 - 255 0 DM1 DM-F
5.0 DM1 - Output 2 Byte 0 - 255 0 DM1 FM-F
6.0 DM2 - Output 1 Byte 0 - 255 0 DM2
7.0 DM2 - Output 2 Byte 0 - 255 0 DM2
8.0 Reserved Byte 0
9.0 Reserved Byte 0
10.0 Reserved Byte 0
11.0 Reserved Byte 0
12.0 Reserved
13.0 Reserved
14.0 Reserved
15.0 Reserved
16.0 Reserved
17.0 Reserved
18.0 Reserved
19.0 Reserved
20.0 Analog value recording - Trigger input Byte 0 - 255 0
21.0 Reserved Byte 0
22.0 Control station - Local control [LC] ON<< Byte 0 - 255 0 Dependent
23.0 Control station - Local control [LC] ON>> Byte 0 - 255 0 on the
control
24.0 Control station - PLC/PCS [PN] ON<< Byte 0 - 255 0 function
25.0 Control station - PLC/PCS [PN] ON>> Byte 0 - 255 0
26.0 Control station - PC/OPC-UA[OCM] ON<< Byte 0 - 255 0
27.0 Control station - PC/OPC-UA[OCM] ON<< Byte 0 - 255 0
28.0 Control station - Operator panels [OP] Byte 0 - 255 0
ON>>
29.0 Control station - Operator panels Byte 0 - 255 0
[OP]<>/<<>>
30.0 Control function - ON<< Byte 0 - 255 0
31.0 Control function - ON>> Byte 0 - 255 0
32.0 Auxiliary control input - FC Byte 0 - 255 0
33.0 Auxiliary control input - FO Byte 0 - 255 0
34.0 Auxiliary control input - TC Byte 0 - 255 0
35.0 Auxiliary control input - TO Byte 0 - 255 0
36.0 External fault 5 - Input Byte 0 - 255 0
37.0 External fault 6 - Input Byte 0 - 255 0
38.0 Reserved Byte 0

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

590 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Data formats and data records
17.13 Data record 133 - Extended device parameters 2 (plug binary)

Byte.Bit Designation (PRM group) Type Range Default Note Information

39.0 Reserved Byte 0
40.0 External fault 5 - Reset Byte 0 - 255 0
41.0 External fault 6 - Reset Byte 0 - 255 0
42.0 Reserved Byte 0
43.0 Reserved Byte 0
44.0 UVO fault Byte 0 - 255 0
45.0 OPO error Byte 0 - 255 0
46.0 Truth table 4 3I/1O - Input 1 Byte 0 - 255 0
47.0 Truth table 4 3I/1O - Input 2 Byte 0 - 255 0
48.0 Truth table 4 3I/1O - Input 3 Byte 0 - 255 0
49.0 Truth table 5 3I/1O - Input 1 Byte 0 - 255 0
50.0 Truth table 5 3I/1O - Input 2 Byte 0 - 255 0
51.0 Truth table 5 3I/1O - Input 3 Byte 0 - 255 0
52.0 Truth table 6 3I/1O - Input 1 Byte 0 - 255 0
53.0 Truth table 6 3I/1O - Input 2 Byte 0 - 255 0
54.0 Truth table 6 3I/1O - Input 3 Byte 0 - 255 0
55.0 Truth table 7 2I/1O - Input 1 Byte 0 - 255 0
56.0 Truth table 7 2I/1O - Input 2 Byte 0 - 255 0
57.0 Truth table 8 2I/1O - Input 1 Byte 0 - 255 0
58.0 Truth table 8 2I/1O - Input 2 Byte 0 - 255 0
59.0 Truth table 9 5I/2O - Input 1 Byte 0 - 255 0
60.0 Truth table 9 5I/2O - Input 2 Byte 0 - 255 0
61.0 Truth table 9 5I/2O - Input 3 Byte 0 - 255 0
62.0 Truth table 9 5I/2O - Input 4 Byte 0 - 255 0
63.0 Truth table 9 5I/2O - Input 5 Byte 0 - 255 0
64.0 Timer 3 - Input Byte 0 - 255 0
65.0 Timer 3 - Reset Byte 0 - 255 0
66.0 Timer 4 - Input Byte 0 - 255 0
67.0 Timer 4 - Reset Byte 0 - 255 0
68.0 Counter 3 - Input + Byte 0 - 255 0
69.0 Counter 3 - Input - Byte 0 - 255 0
70.0 Counter 3 - Reset Byte 0 - 255 0
71.0 Counter 4 - Input + Byte 0 - 255 0
72.0 Counter 4 - Input - Byte 0 - 255 0
73.0 Counter 4 - Reset Byte 0 - 255 0
74.0 Signal conditioning 3 - Input Byte 0 - 255 0
75.0 Signal conditioning 3 - Reset Byte 0 - 255 0
76.0 Signal conditioning 4 - Input Byte 0 - 255 0
77.0 Signal conditioning 4 - Reset Byte 0 - 255 0
78.0 Non-volatile element 3 - Input Byte 0 - 255 0
79.0 Non-volatile element 3 - Reset Byte 0 - 255 0
80.0 Non-volatile element 4 - Input Byte 0 - 255 0

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 591
Data formats and data records
17.13 Data record 133 - Extended device parameters 2 (plug binary)

Byte.Bit Designation (PRM group) Type Range Default Note Information

81.0 Non-volatile element 4 - Reset Byte 0 - 255 0
82.0 Reserved Byte 0
83.0 Reserved Byte 0
84.0 Reserved Byte 0
85.0 Reserved Byte 0
86.0 Reserved Byte 0
87.0 Reserved Byte 0
88.0 Analog parameters (45)
88.0 AM1 - Output Byte 0 - 255 0 AM1
89.0 Analog input limit 1 Byte 0 - 255 0
90.0 Analog input limit 2 Byte 0 - 255 0
91.0 Analog input limit 3 Byte 0 - 255 0
92.0 Analog input limit 4 Byte 0 - 255 0
93.0 Calculator 1, Input Byte 0 - 255 0
94.0 Analog value recording - Analog input Byte 0 - 255 0
95.0 PLC/PCS analog input 2 Byte 0 - 255 0
96.0 PLC/PCS analog input 3 Byte 0 - 255 0
97.0 PLC/PCS analog input 4 Byte 0 - 255 0
98.0 Calculator 2, Input 1 Byte 0 - 255 0
99.0 Calculator 2, Input 2 Byte 0 - 255 0

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

592 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Data formats and data records
17.14 Data record 134 - Extended device parameters 1

17.14 Data record 134 - Extended device parameters 1

Table 17- 16 Data record 134 - ExtendedPlus device parameters

Byte.Bit Designation (PRM group) Type Range Unit Default Note Information
0.0 Coordination Byte[4]
4.0 Part - Bit parameters
4.0 AM2 - Measuring range input Bit 0, 1 0 0 = 0 - 20 mA AM2
4.1 AM2 - Measuring range Bit 0, 1 0 AM2
output
4.2 Overshooting/undershooting 0
limit 5
4.3 Overshooting/undershooting 0
limit 6
4.4 Reserved
4.5 Reserved
4.6 Reserved
4.7 Reserved
5.0 Reserved
5.1 Reserved
5.2 Reserved
5.3 Reserved
5.4 Reserved
5.5 Reserved
5.6 Reserved
5.7 Reserved
6.0 Reserved
6.1 Reserved
6.2 Reserved
6.3 Reserved
6.4 Reserved
6.5 Reserved
6.6 Reserved
6.7 Reserved
7.0 Reserved
7.1 Reserved
7.2 Reserved
7.3 Reserved
7.4 Reserved
7.5 Reserved
7.6 Reserved
7.7 Reserved

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 593
Data formats and data records
17.14 Data record 134 - Extended device parameters 1

Byte.Bit Designation (PRM group) Type Range Unit Default Note Information
8.0 Part - Bit[2] parameters
8.0 Trip monitoring 0/4-20 mA> Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 0 = ON AM2
8.2 Warning monitoring 0/4-20 Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 (always) AM2
mA> 1 = on+ (always,
8.4 Trip monitoring 0/4-20 mA< Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 not TPF) AM2
8.6 Warning monitoring 0/4-20 Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 2 = run (motor AM2
ON, not TPF,
mA<
startup
override)
9.0 Monitoring limit 5 Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0
9.2 Monitoring limit 6 Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0
9.4 AM2 - Active inputs Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 0 Like AM1 AM2
9.6 AM2 - Response to open Bit[2] 1, 2, 3 2 0 = deactivated AM2
circuit 1 = signaling
10.0 TM2 - Trip response T> Bit[2] 1,3 3 2 = warning TM2
10.2 TM2 - Warning response T> Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 2 3 = tripping TM2
10.4 TM2 - Response to a sensor Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 2 TM2
fault / out of range
10.6 TM2 - Active sensors Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 2 0 = 1 sensor TM2
1 = 2 sensors
2 = 3 sensors
11.0 Trip response 0/4-20mA > Bit[2] 0, 1, 3 0 0 = deactivated AM2
11.2 Warning response 0/4-20 Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 0 1 = signaling AM2
mA> 2 = warning
11.4 Trip response 0/4-20 mA< Bit[2] 0, 1, 3 0 3 = tripping AM2
11.6 Warning response 0/4-20 Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 0 AM2
mA<
12.0 Timer 5 type Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0
12.2 Timer 6 type Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0
12.4 Signal conditioning 5 type Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0
12.6 Signal conditioning 6 type Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0
13.0 Calculator 3 Operator 1 Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 0 = +,
13.2 Calculator 3 Operator 2 Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 1=-
13.4 Calculator 3 Operator 3 Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 2=*
3=/
13.6 Reserved
14.0 Calculator 4 Operator 1 Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 0 = +,
14.2 Calculator 4 Operator 2 Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 1=-
14.4 Calculator 4 Operator 3 Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 2=*
3=/
14.6 Reserved
15.0 Calculator 3 Priority 1 Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 2 0 = L,
15.2 Calculator 3 Priority 2 Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 1 1 = M,
15.4 Calculator 3 Priority 3 Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 0 2=H
15.6 Reserved

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

594 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Data formats and data records
17.14 Data record 134 - Extended device parameters 1

Byte.Bit Designation (PRM group) Type Range Unit Default Note Information
16.0 Calculator 4 Priority 1 Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 2 0 = L,
16.2 Calculator 4 Priority 2 Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 1 1 = M,
16.4 Calculator 4 Priority 3 Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 0 2=H
16.6 Reserved
17.0 Reserved
17.2 Reserved
17.4 Reserved
17.6 Reserved
18.0 Reserved
18.2 Reserved
18.4 Reserved
18.6 Reserved
19.0 Reserved
19.2 Reserved
19.4 Reserved
19.6 Reserved
20.0 Reserved
20.2 Reserved
20.4 Reserved
20.6 Reserved
21.0 Reserved
21.2 Reserved
21.4 Reserved
21.6 Reserved
22.0 Part - Bit[4] parameters
22.0 TM2 - sensor type Bit[3+1] 000B to 100B 000B Like TM1 TM2
22.4 Reserved
23.0 Reserved
23.4 Reserved
24.0 Reserved
24.4 Reserved
25.0 Reserved
25.4 Reserved
26.0 Reserved
26.4 Reserved
27.0 Reserved
27.4 Reserved
28.0 Reserved
28.4 Reserved
29.0 Reserved
29.4 Reserved

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 595
Data formats and data records
17.14 Data record 134 - Extended device parameters 1

Byte.Bit Designation (PRM group) Type Range Unit Default Note Information
30.0 Part - Byte parameters
30.0 Trip level 0/4-20 mA > Byte 0 - 255 *128 0 AM2

31.0 Warning level 0/4-20 mA > Byte 0 - 255 *128 0 AM2

32.0 Trip level 0/4-20 mA < Byte 0 - 255 *128 0 AM2

33.0 Warning level 0/4-20 mA < Byte 0 - 255 *128 0 AM2

34.0 Trip delay 0/4-20 mA > Byte 0 - 255 100 ms 5 AM2

35.0 Warning delay 0/4-20 mA > Byte 0 - 255 100 ms 5 AM2

36.0 Trip delay 0/4-20 mA < Byte 0 - 255 100 ms 5 AM2

37.0 Warning delay 0/4-20 mA < Byte 0 - 255 100 ms 5 AM2

38.0 Delay limit 5 Byte 0 - 255 100 ms 5

39.0 Delay limit 6 Byte 0 - 255 100 ms 5
40.0 Truth table 10 type 3I/1O Byte 0 - 11111111B 0
41.0 Truth table 11 type 3I/1O Byte 0 - 11111111B 0
42.0 Reserved
43.0 Reserved
44.0 Reserved
45.0 Reserved
46.0 Reserved
47.0 Reserved
48.0 Reserved
49.0 Reserved
50.0 Reserved
51.0 Reserved
52.0 Reserved
53.0 Reserved
54.0 Reserved
55.0 Reserved
56.0 Reserved
57.0 Reserved
58.0 Reserved
59.0 Reserved

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

596 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Data formats and data records
17.14 Data record 134 - Extended device parameters 1

Byte.Bit Designation (PRM group) Type Range Unit Default Note Information
60.0 Part - Word parameters
60.0 AM2 - Start value output Word 0 - 65535 0 Value for AM2
0/4 mA

62.0 AM2 - End value output Word 0 - 65535 27648 Value for AM2
20 mA

64.0 TM2 - Trip level T> Word 0 - 65535 1K 0 TM2

66.0 TM2 - Warning level T> Word 0 - 65535 1K 0 TM2

68.0 Limit level 5 Word 0 - 65535 0

70.0 Limit level 6 Word 0 - 65535 0
72.0 Timer 5 value Word 0 - 65535 100 ms 0
74.0 Timer 6 value Word 0 - 65535 100 ms 0
76.0 Counter 5 value Word 0 - 65535 0
78.0 Counter 6 value Word 0 - 65535 0
80.0 Calculator 3 const 1 Word 0 - 65535 0
82.0 Calculator 3 const 2 Word 0 - 65535 0
84.0 Calculator 3 const 3 Word 0 - 65535 0
86.0 Calculator 3 const 4 Word 0 - 65535 0
88.0 Calculator 4 const 1 Word 0 - 65535 0
90.0 Calculator 4 const 2 Word 0 - 65535 0
92.0 Calculator 4 const 3 Word 0 - 65535 0
94.0 Calculator 4 const 4 Word 0 - 65535 0
96.0 Analog multiplexer const 1 Word 0 - 65535 0
98.0 Analog multiplexer const 2 Word 0 - 65535 0
100.0 Analog multiplexer const 3 Word 0 - 65535 0
102.0 Analog multiplexer const 4 Word 0 - 65535 0
104.0 PWM input const Word 0 - 65535 0
106.0 PWM input Min Word 0 - 65535 0
108.0 PWM input Max Word 0 - 65535 0
110.0 PWM duration Word 0 - 65535 100 ms 20
112.0 Reserved Word
114.0 Reserved Word
116.0 Reserved Word
118.0 Reserved Word
120.0 Reserved Word
122.0 Reserved Word

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 597
Data formats and data records
17.14 Data record 134 - Extended device parameters 1

Byte.Bit Designation (PRM group) Type Range Unit Default Note Information
124.0 Reserved Word
126.0 Reserved Word
128.0 Reserved Word
130.0 Reserved Word
132.0 Reserved Word
134.0 Reserved Word
136.0 Reserved Word
138.0 Reserved Word
140.0 Part - D-word parameters
140.0 PE - min. pause time motor D-word 0 - FFFFFFFF 1 ms 0
144.0 Reserved D-word
148.0 Reserved D-word
152.0 Reserved D-word
156.0 Reserved D-word
160.0 Reserved D-word
164.0 Reserved D-word
168.0 Reserved D-word
172.0 Reserved D-word
176.0 Reserved D-word

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

598 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Data formats and data records
17.15 Data record 135 - Extended device parameters 2

17.15 Data record 135 - Extended device parameters 2

Table 17- 17 Data record 135 - ExtendedPlus device parameters 2

Byte.Bit Designation (PRM group) Type Range Unit Default Note Information
0.0 Coordination Byte[4]
4.0 Part - DI byte parameters
4.0 Truth table 10 3I/1O - Input 1 DI byte 0 - 255 0
5.0 Truth table 10 3I/1O - Input 2 DI byte 0 - 255 0
6.0 Truth table 10 3I/1O - Input 3 DI byte 0 - 255 0
7.0 Truth table 11 3I/1O - Input 1 DI byte 0 - 255 0
8.0 Truth table 11 3I/1O - Input 2 DI byte 0 - 255 0
9.0 Truth table 11 3I/1O - Input 3 DI byte 0 - 255 0
10.0 Timer 5 input DI byte 0 - 255 0
11.0 Timer 5 reset DI byte 0 - 255 0
12.0 Timer 6 input DI byte 0 - 255 0
13.0 Timer 6 reset DI byte 0 - 255 0
14.0 Counter 5 input + DI byte 0 - 255 0
15.0 Counter 5 input - DI byte 0 - 255 0
16.0 Counter 5 reset DI byte 0 - 255 0
17.0 Counter 6 input + DI byte 0 - 255 0
18.0 Counter 6 input - DI byte 0 - 255 0
19.0 Counter 6 reset DI byte 0 - 255 0
20.0 Signal conditioning 5 input DI byte 0 - 255 0
21.0 Signal conditioning 5 reset DI byte 0 - 255 0
22.0 Signal conditioning 6 input DI byte 0 - 255 0
23.0 Signal conditioning 6 reset DI byte 0 - 255 0
24.0 Analog multiplexer S1 DI byte 0 - 255 0
25.0 Analog multiplexer S2 DI byte 0 - 255 0
26.0 Reserved
27.0 Reserved
28.0 Reserved
29.0 Reserved
30.0 Reserved
31.0 Reserved
32.0 Reserved
33.0 Reserved
34.0 Reserved
35.0 Reserved
36.0 Reserved
37.0 Reserved
38.0 Reserved
39.0 Reserved

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 599
Data formats and data records
17.15 Data record 135 - Extended device parameters 2

Byte.Bit Designation (PRM group) Type Range Unit Default Note Information
40.0 Reserved
41.0 Reserved
42.0 Reserved
43.0 Reserved
44.0 Reserved
45.0 Reserved
46.0 Reserved
47.0 Reserved
48.0 Reserved
49.0 Reserved
50.0 Reserved
51.0 Reserved
52.0 Reserved
53.0 Reserved
54.0 Reserved
55.0 Reserved
56.0 Reserved
57.0 Reserved
58.0 Reserved
59.0 Reserved
60.0 Reserved
61.0 Reserved
62.0 Reserved
63.0 Reserved
64.0 Part - AI byte parameters
64.0 AM2 - Output AI byte 0 - 255 0 AM2
65.0 SPS/PLS_analog input 5 AI byte 0 - 255 0
66.0 SPS/PLS_analog input 6 AI byte 0 - 255 0
67.0 SPS/PLS_analog input 7 AI byte 0 - 255 0
68.0 SPS/PLS_analog input 8 AI byte 0 - 255 0
69.0 SPS/PLS_analog input 9 AI byte 0 - 255 0
70.0 Analog input limit 5 AI byte 0 - 255 0
71.0 Analog input limit 6 AI byte 0 - 255 0
72.0 Analog arithmetic 1 input 1 AI byte 0 - 255 0
73.0 Analog arithmetic 1 input 2 AI byte 0 - 255 0
74.0 Analog arithmetic 1 input 3 AI byte 0 - 255 0
75.0 Analog arithmetic 1 input 4 AI byte 0 - 255 0
76.0 Analog arithmetic 2 input 1 AI byte 0 - 255 0
77.0 Analog arithmetic 2 input 2 AI byte 0 - 255 0
78.0 Analog arithmetic 2 input 3 AI byte 0 - 255 0
79.0 Analog arithmetic 2 input 4 AI byte 0 - 255 0
80.0 Analog multiplexer input 1 AI byte 0 - 255 0

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

600 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Data formats and data records
17.15 Data record 135 - Extended device parameters 2

Byte.Bit Designation (PRM group) Type Range Unit Default Note Information
81.0 Analog multiplexer input 2 AI byte 0 - 255 0
82.0 Analog multiplexer input 3 AI byte 0 - 255 0
83.0 Analog multiplexer input 4 AI byte 0 - 255 0
84.0 PWM input AI byte 0 - 255 0
85.0 Reserved AI byte
86.0 Reserved AI byte
87.0 Reserved AI byte
88.0 Reserved AI byte
89.0 Reserved AI byte
90.0 Reserved AI byte
91.0 Reserved AI byte
92.0 Reserved AI byte
93.0 Reserved AI byte
94.0 Reserved AI byte
95.0 Reserved AI byte
96.0 Reserved AI byte
97.0 Reserved AI byte
98.0 Reserved AI byte
99.0 Reserved AI byte
100.0 Reserved AI byte
101.0 Reserved AI byte
102.0 Reserved AI byte
103.0 Reserved AI byte
104.0 Reserved AI byte
105.0 Reserved AI byte
106.0 Reserved AI byte
107.0 Reserved AI byte
108.0 Reserved AI byte
109.0 Reserved AI byte
110.0 Reserved AI byte
111.0 Reserved AI byte
112.0 Reserved AI byte
113.0 Reserved AI byte

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 601
Data formats and data records
17.16 Data record 139 - Marking

17.16 Data record 139 - Marking

For external faults, limit monitors, and monitoring functions of the temperature and analog
modules, user-specific texts can be configured for marking.
You can access the following texts via data record 139:
● External fault 1 to 6 (status information, warnings, and faults)
● Limit 1 to 4 (status information)
● TM1 warnings T> / trip T> (status information, warnings, and faults)
● AM1 warning/tripping 0/4 - 20 mA<> (status information, warnings and faults).
Can be parameterized to have various meanings, e.g. fill level >, bearing hot, etc. To simplify
diagnostics, these texts can be saved in the device. These can be created, read out and
displayed, for example, with SIMOCODE ES. The texts do not contain any functions.

Note
Changing the marking
Each change to the marking requires that the communication interface be restarted when the
web server is active. A new start interrupts all Ethernet and PROFINET links and
reestablishes them afterward.

Table 17- 18 Data record 139 - Marking

Byte.Bit Designation Type Information

0.0 Reserved Byte[4]
4.0 Reserved Byte[6]
10.0 Marking - External fault 1 Byte[10]
20.0 Marking - External fault 2 Byte[10]
30.0 Marking - External fault 3 Byte[10]
40.0 Marking - External fault 4 Byte[10]
50.0 Marking - External fault 5 Byte[10]
60.0 Marking - External fault 6 Byte[10]
70.0 Reserved Byte[10]
80.0 Reserved Byte[10]
90.0 Marking limit 1 Byte[10]
100.0 Marking limit 2 Byte[10]
110.0 Marking limit 3 Byte[10]
120.0 Marking limit 4 Byte[10]
130.0 Marking - TM warning T> Byte[10]
140.0 Marking - TM trip T> Byte[10]
150.0 Marking - Warning 0/4-20 mA> Byte[10]
160.0 Marking - Warning 0/4-20 mA< Byte[10]
170.0 Marking - Trip 0/4-20 mA> Byte[10]
180.0 Marking - Trip 0/4-20 mA< Byte[10]
190.0 Reserved Byte[10]

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

602 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Data formats and data records
17.17 Data record 140 - Marking 2

17.17 Data record 140 - Marking 2

For limit monitors, and monitoring functions of the temperature and analog modules, user-
specific texts can be configured for marking.
You can access the following texts via data record 140:
● Limit 5 and 6
● TM2 warnings T> / trip T>
● AM2 warning / trip 0/4-20mA<>.

Note
Changing the marking
Each change to the marking requires that the communication interface be restarted when
the web server is active. A new start interrupts all Ethernet and PROFINET links and
reestablishes them afterward.

Table 17- 19 Data record 140 - Marking 2

Byte.Bit Designation Type Information

0.0 Coordination Byte[4]
4.0 Reserved
10.0 Marking limit 5 Byte[10]
20.0 Marking limit 6 Byte[10]
30.0 Marking - TM2 warning T> Byte[10]
40.0 Marking - TM2 trip T> Byte[10]
50.0 Marking - Warning 0/4-20 mA> Byte[10]
60.0 Marking - Warning 0/4-20 mA< Byte[10]
70.0 Marking - Trip 0/4-20 mA> Byte[10]
80.0 Marking - Trip 0/4-20 mA> Byte[10]
90.0 Reserved Byte[110]

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 603
Data formats and data records
17.18 Data record 165 - Identification

17.18 Data record 165 - Identification

You can access the following identifiers stored in the device:
● Plant identifier
● Location designation
● Installation date
● Comment.

Table 17- 20 Data record 165 - Identification

Byte.Bit Designation Type Information

0.0 Reserved Byte[4]
4.0 Plant identifier Byte[32]
36.0 Location designation Byte[22]
58.0 Date Byte[16]
74.0 Reserved Byte[38]
112.0 Comment Byte[54]

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

604 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Data formats and data records
17.19 Data record 224 - Password protection

17.19 Data record 224 - Password protection

Description
● Password protection ON
If the data record is received with this control flag, the password protection is activated
and the password applied. If "Password protection on" and the password are not identical
at the time of receipt, the event "Event - Wrong password" is set and no change will be
made.
● Password protection OFF
If the data record is received with this control flag, the password protection is deactivated.
If the password is incorrect, the event "Event - Wrong password" is set and no change is
made.

Table 17- 21 Data record 224 - Password protection

Byte.Bit Designation Type Information

0.0 Reserved Byte[4]
4.0 Control flag: Bit
0 = Password protection off, 1 = Password protection on
4.1 Reserved Bit[31]
8.0 Password Byte[8]
16.0 Reserved Byte[8]

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 605
Data formats and data records
17.20 Assignment of cyclic receive and send data for existing control functions

17.20 Assignment of cyclic receive and send data for existing control
functions

17.20.1 Overload relay

Table 17- 22 Assignment of cyclic receive / send data, overload relay

Cycl. receive data

Bit 0.0 Not connected
Bit 0.1 Not connected
Bit 0.2 Not connected
Bit 0.3 Further function blocks → Standard functions → Test / Reset → Test1 - Input
Bit 0.4 Further function blocks → Standard functions → Emergency start → Emergency start - Input
Bit 0.5 Not connected
Bit 0.6 Further function blocks → Standard functions → Test / Reset → Reset1 - Input
Bit 0.7 Not connected
Bit 1.0 Not connected
Bit 1.1 Not connected
Bit 1.2 Not connected
Bit 1.3 Not connected
Bit 1.4 Not connected
Bit 1.5 Not connected
Bit 1.6 Not connected
Bit 1.7 Not connected
Byte 2/3 ) (analog value) Not connected
Byte 4/5 **) (analog value) Not connected
Cycl. send data
Bit 0.0 Not connected
Bit 0.1 Not connected
Bit 0.2 Not connected
Bit 0.3 Event - Prewarning overload (I>115 %)
Bit 0.4 Not connected
Bit 0.5 Not connected
Bit 0.6 Status - General fault
Bit 0.7 Status - General warning
Bit 1.0 Not connected
Bit 1.1 Not connected
Bit 1.2 Not connected
Bit 1.3 Not connected
Bit 1.4 Not connected
Bit 1.5 Not connected
Bit 1.6 Not connected
Bit 1.7 Not connected

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

606 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Data formats and data records
17.20 Assignment of cyclic receive and send data for existing control functions

Byte 2/3 (analog value) Maximum current I_max

Byte 4/5 (analog value)
*) Not connected
Byte 6/7 *) (analog value) Not connected
Byte 8/9 (analog value)
*) Not connected
Byte 10/11 **) (analog value) Not connected
Byte 12/13 **) (analog value) Not connected
Byte 14/15 **) (analog value) Not connected
Byte 16/17 **) (analog value) Not connected
Byte 18/19 **) (analog value) Not connected

*) for SIMOCODE pro V PN, basic types 1 and 3 only

**) for SIMOCODE pro V PN, basic type 3 only

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 607
Data formats and data records
17.20 Assignment of cyclic receive and send data for existing control functions

17.20.2 Direct starter

Table 17- 23 Assignment of cyclic receive / send data, direct starter

Cycl. receive data

Bit 0.0 Not connected
Bit 0.1 Device parameters → Motor control → Control stations → PLC/PCS [PN] → OFF
Bit 0.2 Device parameters → Motor control → Control stations → PLC/PCS [PN] → ON
Bit 0.3 Further function blocks → Standard functions → Test / Reset → Test1 - Input
Bit 0.4 Further function blocks → Standard functions → Emergency start → Emergency start - Input
Bit 0.5 Device parameters → Motor control → Control stations → Mode selector S1
Bit 0.6 Further function blocks → Standard functions → Test / Reset → Reset 1 - Input
Bit 0.7 Not connected
Bit 1.0 Not connected
Bit 1.1 Not connected
Bit 1.2 Not connected
Bit 1.3 Not connected
Bit 1.4 Not connected
Bit 1.5 Not connected
Bit 1.6 Not connected
Bit 1.7 Not connected
Byte 2/3 *) (analog value) Not connected
Byte 4/5 **) (analog value) Not connected
Cycl. send data
Bit 0.0 Not connected
Bit 0.1 Status - Off
Bit 0.2 Status - ON>
Bit 0.3 Event - Prewarning overload (I>115 %)
Bit 0.4 Not connected
Bit 0.5 Status - Remote mode
Bit 0.6 Status - General fault
Bit 0.7 Status - General warning
Bit 1.0 Not connected
Bit 1.1 Not connected
Bit 1.2 Not connected
Bit 1.3 Not connected
Bit 1.4 Not connected
Bit 1.5 Not connected
Bit 1.6 Not connected
Bit 1.7 Not connected
Byte 2/3 (analog value) Maximum current I_max
Byte 4/5 (analog value)
*) Not connected
Byte 6/7 *) (analog value) Not connected
Byte 8/9 (analog value)
*) Not connected

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

608 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Data formats and data records
17.20 Assignment of cyclic receive and send data for existing control functions

Byte 10/11 **) (analog value) Not connected

Byte 12/13 **) (analog value) Not connected
Byte 14/15 **) (analog value) Not connected
Byte 16/17 **) (analog value) Not connected
Byte 18/19 **) (analog value) Not connected

*) for SIMOCODE pro V PN, basic type 1 only

**) for SIMOCODE pro V PN, basic type 3 only

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 609
Data formats and data records
17.20 Assignment of cyclic receive and send data for existing control functions

17.20.3 Reversing starter

Table 17- 24 Assignment of cyclic receive / send data, reversing starter

Cycl. receive data

Bit 0.0 Device parameters → Motor control → Control stations → PLC/PCS [PN] → ON
Bit 0.1 Device parameters → Motor control → Control stations → PLC/PCS [PN] → OFF
Bit 0.2 Device parameters → Motor control → Control stations → PLC/PCS [PN] → ON
Bit 0.3 Further function blocks → Standard functions → Test / Reset → Test1 - Input
Bit 0.4 Further function blocks → Standard functions → Emergency start → Emergency start - Input
Bit 0.5 Device parameters → Motor control → Control stations → Mode selector S1
Bit 0.6 Further function blocks → Standard functions → Test / Reset → Reset 1 - Input
Bit 0.7 Not connected
Bit 1.0 Not connected
Bit 1.1 Not connected
Bit 1.2 Not connected
Bit 1.3 Not connected
Bit 1.4 Not connected
Bit 1.5 Not connected
Bit 1.6 Not connected
Bit 1.7 Not connected
Byte 2/3 *) (analog value) Not connected
Byte 4/5 **) (analog value) Not connected
Cycl. send data
Bit 0.0 Status - ON<
Bit 0.1 Status - Off
Bit 0.2 Status - ON>
Bit 0.3 Event - Prewarning overload (I>115 %)
Bit 0.4 Status - Interlocking time active
Bit 0.5 Status - Remote mode
Bit 0.6 Status - General fault
Bit 0.7 Status - General warning
Bit 1.0 Not connected
Bit 1.1 Not connected
Bit 1.2 Not connected
Bit 1.3 Not connected
Bit 1.4 Not connected
Bit 1.5 Not connected
Bit 1.6 Not connected
Bit 1.7 Not connected
Byte 2/3 (analog value) Maximum current I_max
Byte 4/5 (analog value)
*) Not connected
Byte 6/7 *) (analog value) Not connected
Byte 8/9 (analog value)
*) Not connected

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

610 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Data formats and data records
17.20 Assignment of cyclic receive and send data for existing control functions

Byte 10/11 **) (analog value) Not connected

Byte 12/13 **) (analog value) Not connected
Byte 14/15 **) (analog value) Not connected
Byte 16/17 **) (analog value) Not connected
Byte 18/19 **) (analog value) Not connected

*) for SIMOCODE pro V PN, basic type 1 only

**) for SIMOCODE pro V PN, basic type 3 only

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 611
Data formats and data records
17.20 Assignment of cyclic receive and send data for existing control functions

17.20.4 Molded-case circuit breaker (MCCB)

Table 17- 25 Assignment of cyclic receive / send data, molded-case circuit breaker (MCCB)

Cycl. receive data

Bit 0.0 Not connected
Bit 0.1 Device parameters → Motor control → Control stations → PLC/PCS [PN] → OFF
Bit 0.2 Device parameters → Motor control → Control stations → PLC/PCS [PN] → ON
Bit 0.3 Further function blocks → Standard functions → Test / Reset → Test1 - Input
Bit 0.4 Further function blocks → Standard functions → Emergency start → Emergency start - Input
Bit 0.5 Device parameters → Motor control → Control stations → Mode selector S1
Bit 0.6 Further function blocks → Standard functions → Test / Reset → Reset 1 - Input
Bit 0.7 Not connected
Bit 1.0 Not connected
Bit 1.1 Not connected
Bit 1.2 Not connected
Bit 1.3 Not connected
Bit 1.4 Not connected
Bit 1.5 Not connected
Bit 1.6 Not connected
Bit 1.7 Not connected
Byte 2/3 *) (analog value) Not connected
Byte 4/5 **) (analog value) Not connected
Cycl. send data
Bit 0.0 Not connected
Bit 0.1 Status - Off
Bit 0.2 Status - ON>
Bit 0.3 Event - Prewarning overload (I>115 %)
Bit 0.4 Not connected
Bit 0.5 Status - Remote mode
Bit 0.6 Status - General fault
Bit 0.7 Status - General warning
Bit 1.0 Not connected
Bit 1.1 Not connected
Bit 1.2 Not connected
Bit 1.3 Not connected
Bit 1.4 Not connected
Bit 1.5 Not connected
Bit 1.6 Not connected
Bit 1.7 Not connected
Byte 2/3 (analog value) Maximum current I_max
Byte 4/5 (analog value)
*) Not connected
Byte 6/7 *) (analog value) Not connected
Byte 8/9 (analog value)
*) Not connected

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

612 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Data formats and data records
17.20 Assignment of cyclic receive and send data for existing control functions

Byte 10/11 **) (analog value) Not connected

Byte 12/13 **) (analog value) Not connected
Byte 14/15 **) (analog value) Not connected
Byte 16/17 **) (analog value) Not connected
Byte 18/19 **) (analog value) Not connected

*) for SIMOCODE pro V PN, basic type 1 only

**) for SIMOCODE pro V PN, basic type 3 only

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 613
Data formats and data records
17.20 Assignment of cyclic receive and send data for existing control functions

17.20.5 Star-delta starter

Table 17- 26 Assignment of cyclic receive / send data, star/delta starter

Cycl. receive data

Bit 0.0 Not connected
Bit 0.1 Device parameters → Motor control → Control stations → PLC/PCS [PN] → OFF
Bit 0.2 Device parameters → Motor control → Control stations → PLC/PCS [PN] → ON
Bit 0.3 Further function blocks → Standard functions → Test / Reset → Test1 - Input
Bit 0.4 Further function blocks → Standard functions → Emergency start → Emergency start - Input
Bit 0.5 Device parameters → Motor control → Control stations → Mode selector S1
Bit 0.6 Further function blocks → Standard functions → Test / Reset → Reset 1 - Input
Bit 0.7 Not connected
Bit 1.0 Not connected
Bit 1.1 Not connected
Bit 1.2 Not connected
Bit 1.3 Not connected
Bit 1.4 Not connected
Bit 1.5 Not connected
Bit 1.6 Not connected
Bit 1.7 Not connected
Byte 2/3 *) (analog value) Not connected
Byte 4/5 **) (analog value) Not connected
Cycl. send data
Bit 0.0 Not connected
Bit 0.1 Status - Off
Bit 0.2 Status - ON
Bit 0.3 Event - Prewarning overload (I>115 %)
Bit 0.4 Status - Change-over pause active
Bit 0.5 Status - Remote mode
Bit 0.6 Status - General fault
Bit 0.7 Status - General warning
Bit 1.0 Not connected
Bit 1.1 Not connected
Bit 1.2 Not connected
Bit 1.3 Not connected
Bit 1.4 Not connected
Bit 1.5 Not connected
Bit 1.6 Not connected
Bit 1.7 Not connected
Byte 2/3 (analog value) Maximum current I_max
Byte 4/5 (analog value)
*) Not connected
Byte 6/7 *) (analog value) Not connected
Byte 8/9 (analog value)
*) Not connected

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

614 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Data formats and data records
17.20 Assignment of cyclic receive and send data for existing control functions

Byte 10/11 **) (analog value) Not connected

Byte 12/13 **) (analog value) Not connected
Byte 14/15 **) (analog value) Not connected
Byte 16/17 **) (analog value) Not connected
Byte 18/19 **) (analog value) Not connected

*) for SIMOCODE pro V PN, basic type 1 only

**) for SIMOCODE pro V PN, basic type 3 only

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 615
Data formats and data records
17.20 Assignment of cyclic receive and send data for existing control functions

17.20.6 Star-delta reversing starter

Table 17- 27 Assignment of cyclic receive / send data, star/delta reversing starter

Cycl. receive data

Bit 0.0 Device parameters → Motor control → Control stations → PLC/PCS [PN] → ON <
Bit 0.1 Device parameters → Motor control → Control stations → PLC/PCS [PN] → OFF
Bit 0.2 Device parameters → Motor control → Control stations → PLC/PCS [PN] → ON >
Bit 0.3 Further function blocks → Standard functions → Test / Reset → Test1 - Input
Bit 0.4 Further function blocks → Standard functions → Emergency start → Emergency start - Input
Bit 0.5 Device parameters → Motor control → Control stations → Mode selector S1
Bit 0.6 Further function blocks → Standard functions → Test°/ Reset → Reset 1 - Input
Bit 0.7 Not connected
Bit 1.0 Not connected
Bit 1.1 Not connected
Bit 1.2 Not connected
Bit 1.3 Not connected
Bit 1.4 Not connected
Bit 1.5 Not connected
Bit 1.6 Not connected
Bit 1.7 Not connected
Byte 2/3 *) (analog value) Not connected
Byte 4/5 **) (analog value) Not connected
Cycl. send data
Bit 0.0 Status - ON<
Bit 0.1 Status - Off
Bit 0.2 Status - ON>
Bit 0.3 Event - Prewarning overload (I>115 %)
Bit 0.4 Status - Change-over pause active
Bit 0.5 Status - Remote mode
Bit 0.6 Status - General fault
Bit 0.7 Status - General warning
Bit 1.0 Not connected
Bit 1.1 Not connected
Bit 1.2 Not connected
Bit 1.3 Status - Interlocking time active
Bit 1.4 Not connected
Bit 1.5 Not connected
Bit 1.6 Not connected
Bit 1.7 Not connected
Byte 2/3 (analog value) Maximum current I_max
Byte 4/5 (analog value)
*) Not connected
Byte 6/7 *) (analog value) Not connected
Byte 8/9 (analog value)
*) Not connected

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

616 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Data formats and data records
17.20 Assignment of cyclic receive and send data for existing control functions

Byte 10/11 **) (analog value) Not connected

Byte 12/13 **) (analog value) Not connected
Byte 14/15 **) (analog value) Not connected
Byte 16/17 **) (analog value) Not connected
Byte 18/19 **) (analog value) Not connected

*) for SIMOCODE pro V PN, basic type 1 only

**) for SIMOCODE pro V PN, basic type 3 only

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 617
Data formats and data records
17.20 Assignment of cyclic receive and send data for existing control functions

17.20.7 Dahlander

Table 17- 28 Assignment of cyclic receive / send data, Dahlander

Cycl. receive data

Bit 0.0 Device parameters → Motor control → Control stations → PLC/PCS [PN] → ON >>
Bit 0.1 Device parameters → Motor control → Control stations → PLC/PCS [PN] → OFF
Bit 0.2 Device parameters → Motor control → Control stations → PLC/PCS [PN] → ON >
Bit 0.3 Further function blocks → Standard functions → Test / Reset → Test1 - Input
Bit 0.4 Further function blocks → Standard functions → Emergency start → Emergency start - Input
Bit 0.5 Device parameters → Motor control → Control stations → Mode selector S1
Bit 0.6 Further function blocks → Standard functions → Test / Reset → Reset 1 - Input
Bit 0.7 Not connected
Bit 1.0 Not connected
Bit 1.1 Not connected
Bit 1.2 Not connected
Bit 1.3 Not connected
Bit 1.4 Not connected
Bit 1.5 Not connected
Bit 1.6 Not connected
Bit 1.7 Not connected
Byte 2/3 *) (analog value) Not connected
Byte 4/5 **) (analog value) Not connected
Cycl. send data
Bit 0.0 Status - ON>>
Bit 0.1 Status - Off
Bit 0.2 Status - ON>
Bit 0.3 Event - Prewarning overload (I>115 %)
Bit 0.4 Status - Change-over pause active
Bit 0.5 Status - Remote mode
Bit 0.6 Status - General fault
Bit 0.7 Status - General warning
Bit 1.0 Not connected
Bit 1.1 Not connected
Bit 1.2 Not connected
Bit 1.3 Not connected
Bit 1.4 Not connected
Bit 1.5 Not connected
Bit 1.6 Not connected
Bit 1.7 Not connected
Byte 2/3 (analog value) Maximum current I_max
Byte 4/5 (analog value)
*) Not connected
Byte 6/7 *) (analog value) Not connected
Byte 8/9 (analog value)
*) Not connected

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

618 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Data formats and data records
17.20 Assignment of cyclic receive and send data for existing control functions

Byte 10/11 **) (analog value) Not connected

Byte 12/13 **) (analog value) Not connected
Byte 14/15 **) (analog value) Not connected
Byte 16/17 **) (analog value) Not connected
Byte 18/19 **) (analog value) Not connected

*) for SIMOCODE pro V PN, basic type 1 only

**) for SIMOCODE pro V PN, basic type 3 only

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 619
Data formats and data records
17.20 Assignment of cyclic receive and send data for existing control functions

17.20.8 Dahlander reversing starter

Table 17- 29 Assignment of cyclic receive / send data, Dahlander reversing starter

Cycl. receive data

Bit 0.0 Device parametersr → Motor controlr → Control stations → PLC/PCS [PN]r → ON >>
Bit 0.1 Device parameters → Motor control → Control stations → PLC/PCS [PN] → OFF
Bit 0.2 Device parameters → Motor control → Control stations → PLC/PCS [PN] → ON >
Bit 0.3 Further function blocks → Standard functions → Test / Reset → Test1 - Input
Bit 0.4 Further function blocks → Standard functions → Emergency start → Emergency start - Input
Bit 0.5 Device parameters → Motor control → Control stations → Mode selector S1
Bit 0.6 Further function blocks → Standard functions → Test / Reset → Reset 1 - Input
Bit 0.7 Not connected
Bit 1.0 Device parameters → Motor control → Control stations → PLC/PCS [PN] → ON <<
Bit 1.1 Not connected
Bit 1.2 Device parameters → Motor control → Control stations → PLC/PCS [PN] → ON <
Bit 1.3 Not connected
Bit 1.4 Not connected
Bit 1.5 Not connected
Bit 1.6 Not connected
Bit 1.7 Not connected
Byte 2/3 *) (analog value) Not connected
Byte 4/5 **) (analog value) Not connected
Cycl. send data
Bit 0.0 Status - ON>>
Bit 0.1 Status - Off
Bit 0.2 Status - ON>
Bit 0.3 Event - Prewarning overload (I>115 %)
Bit 0.4 Status - Change-over pause active
Bit 0.5 Status - Remote mode
Bit 0.6 Status - General fault
Bit 0.7 Status - General warning
Bit 1.0 Status - ON<<
Bit 1.1 Not connected
Bit 1.2 Status - ON<
Bit 1.3 Status - Interlocking time active
Bit 1.4 Not connected
Bit 1.5 Not connected
Bit 1.6 Not connected
Bit 1.7 Not connected
Byte 2/3 (analog value) Maximum current I_max
Byte 4/5 (analog value)
*) Not connected
Byte 6/7 *) (analog value) Not connected
Byte 8/9 (analog value)
*) Not connected

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

620 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Data formats and data records
17.20 Assignment of cyclic receive and send data for existing control functions

Byte 10/11 **) (analog value) Not connected

Byte 12/13 **) (analog value) Not connected
Byte 14/15 **) (analog value) Not connected
Byte 16/17 **) (analog value) Not connected
Byte 18/19 **) (analog value) Not connected

*) for SIMOCODE pro V PN, basic type 1 only

**) for SIMOCODE pro V PN, basic type 3 only

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 621
Data formats and data records
17.20 Assignment of cyclic receive and send data for existing control functions

17.20.9 Pole-changing starter

Table 17- 30 Assignment of cyclic receive / send data, pole-changing starter

Cycl. receive data

Bit 0.0 Device parameters → Motor control → Control stations → PLC/PCS [PN] → ON >>
Bit 0.1 Device parameters → Motor control → Control stations → PLC/PCS [PN] → OFF
Bit 0.2 Device parameters → Motor control → Control stations → PLC/PCS [PN] → ON >
Bit 0.3 Further function blocks → Standard functions → Test / Reset → Test1 - Input
Bit 0.4 Further function blocks → Standard functions → Emergency start → Emergency start - Input
Bit 0.5 Device parameters → Motor control → Control stations → Mode selector S1
Bit 0.6 Further function blocks → Standard functions → Test / Reset → Reset 1 - Input
Bit 0.7 Not connected
Bit 1.0 Not connected
Bit 1.1 Not connected
Bit 1.2 Not connected
Bit 1.3 Not connected
Bit 1.4 Not connected
Bit 1.5 Not connected
Bit 1.6 Not connected
Bit 1.7 Not connected
Byte 2/3 *) (analog value) Not connected
Byte 4/5 **) (analog value) Not connected
Cycl. send data
Bit 0.0 Status - ON>>
Bit 0.1 Status - Off
Bit 0.2 Status - ON>
Bit 0.3 Event - Prewarning overload (I>115 %)
Bit 0.4 Status - Change-over pause active
Bit 0.5 Status - Remote mode
Bit 0.6 Status - General fault
Bit 0.7 Status - General warning
Bit 1.0 Not connected
Bit 1.1 Not connected
Bit 1.2 Not connected
Bit 1.3 Not connected
Bit 1.4 Not connected
Bit 1.5 Not connected
Bit 1.6 Not connected
Bit 1.7 Not connected
Byte 2/3 (analog value) Maximum current I_max
Byte 4/5 *) (analog value) Not connected
Byte 6/7 *) (analog value) Not connected
Byte 8/9 *) (analog value) Not connected

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

622 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Data formats and data records
17.20 Assignment of cyclic receive and send data for existing control functions

Byte 10/11 **) (analog value) Not connected

Byte 12/13 **) (analog value) Not connected
Byte 14/15 **) (analog value) Not connected
Byte 16/17 **) (analog value) Not connected
Byte 18/19 **) (analog value) Not connected

*) for SIMOCODE pro V PN, basic type 1 only

**) for SIMOCODE pro V PN, basic type 3 only

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 623
Data formats and data records
17.20 Assignment of cyclic receive and send data for existing control functions

17.20.10 Pole-changing reversing starter

Table 17- 31 Assignment of cyclic receive / send data, pole-changing reversing starter

Cycl. receive data

Bit 0.0 Device parameters → Motor control → Control stations → PLC/PCS [PN] → ON >>
Bit 0.1 Device parameters → Motor control → Control stations → PLC/PCS [PN] → OFF
Bit 0.2 Device parameters → Motor control → Control stations → PLC/PCS [PN] → ON >
Bit 0.3 Further function blocks → Standard functions → Test / Reset → Test1 - Input
Bit 0.4 Further function blocks → Standard functions → Emergency start → Emergency start - Input
Bit 0.5 Device parameters → Motor control → Control stations → Mode selector S1
Bit 0.6 Further function blocks → Standard functions → Test / Reset → Reset 1 - Input
Bit 0.7 Not connected
Bit 1.0 Device parameters → Motor control → Control stations → PLC/PCS [PN] → ON <<
Bit 1.1 Not connected
Bit 1.2 Device parameters → Motor control → Control stations → PLC/PCS [PN] → ON <
Bit 1.3 Not connected
Bit 1.4 Not connected
Bit 1.5 Not connected
Bit 1.6 Not connected
Bit 1.7 Not connected
Byte 2/3 *) (analog value) Not connected
Byte 4/5 **) (analog value) Not connected
Cycl. send data
Bit 0.0 Status - ON>>
Bit 0.1 Status - Off
Bit 0.2 Status - ON>
Bit 0.3 Event - Prewarning overload (I>115 %)
Bit 0.4 Status - Change-over pause active
Bit 0.5 Status - Remote mode
Bit 0.6 Status - General fault
Bit 0.7 Status - General warning
Bit 1.0 Status - ON<<
Bit 1.1 Not connected
Bit 1.2 Status - ON<
Bit 1.3 Status - Interlocking time active
Bit 1.4 Not connected
Bit 1.5 Not connected
Bit 1.6 Not connected
Bit 1.7 Not connected
Byte 2/3 (analog value) Maximum current I_max
Byte 4/5 (analog value)
*) Not connected
Byte 6/7 *) (analog value) Not connected
Byte 8/9 (analog value)
*) Not connected

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

624 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Data formats and data records
17.20 Assignment of cyclic receive and send data for existing control functions

Byte 10/11 **) (analog value) Not connected

Byte 12/13 **) (analog value) Not connected
Byte 14/15 **) (analog value) Not connected
Byte 16/17 **) (analog value) Not connected
Byte 18/19 **) (analog value) Not connected

*) for SIMOCODE pro V PN, basic type 1 only

**) for SIMOCODE pro V PN, basic type 3 only

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 625
Data formats and data records
17.20 Assignment of cyclic receive and send data for existing control functions

17.20.11 Solenoid valve

Table 17- 32 Assignment of cyclic receive/send data, solenoid valve

Cycl. receive data

Bit 0.0 Not connected
Bit 0.1 Device parameters → Motor control → Control stations → PLC/PCS [PN] → CLOSED
Bit 0.2 Device parameters → Motor control → Control stations → PLC/PCS [PN] → OPEN
Bit 0.3 Further function blocks → Standard functions → Test / Reset → Test1 - Input
Bit 0.4 Not connected
Bit 0.5 Device parameters → Motor control → Control stations → Mode selector S1
Bit 0.6 Further function blocks → Standard functions → Test / Reset → Reset 1 - Input
Bit 0.7 Not connected
Bit 1.0 Not connected
Bit 1.1 Not connected
Bit 1.2 Not connected
Bit 1.3 Not connected
Bit 1.4 Not connected
Bit 1.5 Not connected
Bit 1.6 Not connected
Bit 1.7 Not connected
Byte 2/3 *) (analog value) Not connected
Byte 4/5 **) (analog value) Not connected
Cycl. send data
Bit 0.0 Not connected
Bit 0.1 Status - OFF (Closed)
Bit 0.2 Status - ON > (Open)
Bit 0.3 Not connected
Bit 0.4 Not connected
Bit 0.5 Status - Remote mode
Bit 0.6 Status - General fault
Bit 0.7 Status - General warning
Bit 1.0 Not connected
Bit 1.1 Not connected
Bit 1.2 Not connected
Bit 1.3 Not connected
Bit 1.4 Not connected
Bit 1.5 Not connected
Bit 1.6 Not connected
Bit 1.7 Not connected
Byte 2/3 (analog value) Not connected
Byte 4/5 (analog value)
*) Not connected
Byte 6/7 *) (analog value) Not connected
Byte 8/9 (analog value)
*) Not connected

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

626 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Data formats and data records
17.20 Assignment of cyclic receive and send data for existing control functions

Byte 10/11 **) (analog value) Not connected

Byte 12/13 **) (analog value) Not connected
Byte 14/15 **) (analog value) Not connected
Byte 16/17 **) (analog value) Not connected
Byte 18/19 **) (analog value) Not connected

*) for SIMOCODE pro V PN, basic type 1 only

**) for SIMOCODE pro V PN, basic type 3 only

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 627
Data formats and data records
17.20 Assignment of cyclic receive and send data for existing control functions

17.20.12 Positioner

Table 17- 33 Assignment of cyclic receive / send data, positioner

Cycl. receive data

Bit 0.0 Device parameters → Motor control → Control stations → PLC/PCS [PN] → CLOSED
Bit 0.1 Device parameters → Motor control → Control stations → PLC/PCS [PN] → Stop
Bit 0.2 Device parameters → Motor control → Control stations → PLC/PCS [PN] → OPEN
Bit 0.3 Further function blocks → Standard functions → Test / Reset → Test1 - Input
Bit 0.4 Further function blocks → Standard functions → Emergency start → Emergency start - Input
Bit 0.5 Device parameters → Motor control → Control stations → Mode selector S1
Bit 0.6 Further function blocks → Standard functions → Test / Reset → Reset 1 - Input
Bit 0.7 Not connected
Bit 1.0 Not connected
Bit 1.1 Not connected
Bit 1.2 Not connected
Bit 1.3 Not connected
Bit 1.4 Not connected
Bit 1.5 Not connected
Bit 1.6 Not connected
Bit 1.7 Not connected
Byte 2/3 *) (analog value) Not connected
Byte 4/5 **) (analog value) Not connected
Cycl. send data
Bit 0.0 Status - ON < (Closed)
Bit 0.1 Status - OFF (Stop)
Bit 0.2 Status - ON > (Open)
Bit 0.3 Event - Prewarning overload (I>115 %)
Bit 0.4 Status - Interlocking time active
Bit 0.5 Status - Remote mode
Bit 0.6 Status - General fault
Bit 0.7 Status - General warning
Bit 1.0 Status - Positioner runs in open direction
Bit 1.1 Not connected
Bit 1.2 Status - Positioner runs in close direction
Bit 1.3 Not connected
Bit 1.4 Not connected
Bit 1.5 Not connected
Bit 1.6 Not connected
Bit 1.7 Not connected
Byte 2/3 (analog value) Maximum current I_max
Byte 4/5 (analog value)
*) Not connected
Byte 6/7 *) (analog value) Not connected
Byte 8/9 (analog value)
*) Not connected

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

628 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Data formats and data records
17.20 Assignment of cyclic receive and send data for existing control functions

Byte 10/11 **) (analog value) Not connected

Byte 12/13 **) (analog value) Not connected
Byte 14/15 **) (analog value) Not connected
Byte 16/17 **) (analog value) Not connected
Byte 18/19 **) (analog value) Not connected

*) for SIMOCODE pro V PN, basic type 1 only

**) for SIMOCODE pro V PN, basic type 3 only

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 629
Data formats and data records
17.20 Assignment of cyclic receive and send data for existing control functions

17.20.13 Soft starter

Table 17- 34 Assignment of cyclic receive / send data, soft starter

Cycl. receive data

Bit 0.0 Not connected
Bit 0.1 Device parameters → Motor control → Control stations → PLC/PCS [PN] → OFF
Bit 0.2 Device parameters → Motor control → Control stations → PLC/PCS [PN] → ON
Bit 0.3 Further function blocks → Standard functions → Test / Reset → Test1 - Input
Bit 0.4 Further function blocks → Standard functions → Emergency start → Emergency start - Input
Bit 0.5 Device parameters → Motor control → Control stations → Mode selector S1
Bit 0.6 Further function blocks → Standard functions → Test / Reset → Reset 1 - Input
Bit 0.7 Not connected
Bit 1.0 Not connected
Bit 1.1 Not connected
Bit 1.2 Not connected
Bit 1.3 Not connected
Bit 1.4 Not connected
Bit 1.5 Not connected
Bit 1.6 Not connected
Bit 1.7 Not connected
Byte 2/3 *) (analog value) Not connected
Byte 4/5 **) (analog value) Not connected
Cycl. send data
Bit 0.0 Not connected
Bit 0.1 Status - Off
Bit 0.2 Status - ON>
Bit 0.3 Event - Prewarning overload (I>115 %)
Bit 0.4 Not connected
Bit 0.5 Status - Remote mode
Bit 0.6 Status - General fault
Bit 0.7 Status - General warning
Bit 1.0 Not connected
Bit 1.1 Not connected
Bit 1.2 Not connected
Bit 1.3 Not connected
Bit 1.4 Not connected
Bit 1.5 Not connected
Bit 1.6 Not connected
Bit 1.7 Not connected
Byte 2/3 (analog value) Maximum current I_max
Byte 4/5 (analog value)
*) Not connected
Byte 6/7 *) (analog value) Not connected
Byte 8/9 (analog value)
*) Not connected

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

630 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Data formats and data records
17.20 Assignment of cyclic receive and send data for existing control functions

Byte 10/11 **) (analog value) Not connected

Byte 12/13 **) (analog value) Not connected
Byte 14/15 **) (analog value) Not connected
Byte 16/17 **) (analog value) Not connected
Byte 18/19 **) (analog value) Not connected

*) for SIMOCODE pro V PN, basic type 1 only

**) for SIMOCODE pro V PN, basic type 3 only

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 631
Data formats and data records
17.20 Assignment of cyclic receive and send data for existing control functions

17.20.14 Soft starter with reversing contactor

Table 17- 35 Assignment of cyclic receive / send data, soft starter with reversing contactor

Cycl. receive data

Bit 0.0 Device parameters → Motor control → Control stations → PLC/PCS [PN] → ON <
Bit 0.1 Device parameters → Motor control → Control stations → PLC/PCS [PN] → OFF
Bit 0.2 Device parameters → Motor control → Control stations → PLC/PCS [PN] → ON >
Bit 0.3 Further function blocks → Standard functions → Test / Reset → Test1 - Input
Bit 0.4 Further function blocks → Standard functions → Emergency start → Emergency start - Input
Bit 0.5 Device parameters → Motor control → Control stations → Mode selector S1
Bit 0.6 Further function blocks → Standard functions → Test / Reset → Reset 1 - Input
Bit 0.7 Not connected
Bit 1.0 Not connected
Bit 1.1 Not connected
Bit 1.2 Not connected
Bit 1.3 Not connected
Bit 1.4 Not connected
Bit 1.5 Not connected
Bit 1.6 Not connected
Bit 1.7 Not connected
Byte 2/3 *) (analog value) Not connected
Byte 4/5 **) (analog value) Not connected
Cycl. send data
Bit 0.0 Status - ON<
Bit 0.1 Status - Off
Bit 0.2 Status - ON>
Bit 0.3 Event - Prewarning overload (I>115 %)
Bit 0.4 Status - Interlocking time active
Bit 0.5 Status - Remote mode
Bit 0.6 Status - General fault
Bit 0.7 Status - General warning
Bit 1.0 Not connected
Bit 1.1 Not connected
Bit 1.2 Not connected
Bit 1.3 Not connected
Bit 1.4 Not connected
Bit 1.5 Not connected
Bit 1.6 Not connected
Bit 1.7 Not connected
Byte 2/3 (analog value) Maximum current I_max
Byte 4/5 (analog value)
*) Not connected
Byte 6/7 *) (analog value) Not connected
Byte 8/9 (analog value)
*) Not connected

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

632 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Data formats and data records
17.20 Assignment of cyclic receive and send data for existing control functions

Byte 10/11 **) (analog value) Not connected

Byte 12/13 **) (analog value) Not connected
Byte 14/15 **) (analog value) Not connected
Byte 16/17 **) (analog value) Not connected
Byte 18/19 **) (analog value) Not connected

*) for SIMOCODE pro V PN, basic type 1 only

**) for SIMOCODE pro V PN, basic type 3 only

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 633
Data formats and data records
17.20 Assignment of cyclic receive and send data for existing control functions

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

634 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
Dimension drawings 18
In this chapter
This chapter contains the technical dimension drawings of the SIMOCODE pro system
components.

Target groups
This chapter addresses the following target groups:
● Configuring engineers
● Technicians

Required knowledge
You need sound knowledge of switchgear configuration.

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 635
Dimension drawings
18.1 3UF70 basic unit

18.1 3UF70 basic unit

18.1.1 SIMOCODE pro V PN basic unit 3UF7011

Figure 18-1 SIMOCODE pro V PN basic unit 3UF7011

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

636 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Dimension drawings
18.2 3UF710 current measuring module

18.2 3UF710 current measuring module

18.2.1 Current measuring module (through-hole converter) 3UF7100, 0.3 A to 3 A,

3UF7101, 2.4 A to 25 A

Figure 18-2 Current measuring module (through-hole converter) 3UF7100. 0.3 A to 3 A, 3UF7101,
2.4 A to 25 A

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 637
Dimension drawings
18.2 3UF710 current measuring module

18.2.2 Current measuring module (through-hole converter) 3UF7102, 10 A to 100 A

Figure 18-3 Current measuring module (through-hole converter) 3UF7102, 10 A to 100 A

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

638 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Dimension drawings
18.2 3UF710 current measuring module

18.2.3 Current measuring module (through-hole converter) 3UF7103, 20 A to 200 A

Figure 18-4 Current measuring module (through-hole converter) 3UF7103, 20 A to 200 A

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 639
Dimension drawings
18.2 3UF710 current measuring module

18.2.4 Current measuring module (bus connection) 3UF7103, 20 A to 200 A

Figure 18-5 Current measuring module (bus connection) 3UF7103, 20 A to 200 A

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

640 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Dimension drawings
18.2 3UF710 current measuring module

18.2.5 Current measuring module (bus connection) 3UF7104, 63 A to 630 A

Figure 18-6 Current measuring module (bus connection) 3UF7104, 63 A to 630 A

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 641
Dimension drawings
18.3 Current / voltage measuring modules

18.3 Current / voltage measuring modules

18.3.1 Current / voltage measuring module (through-hole converter) 3UF7110, 0.3 A to

3 A, 3UF7111, 2.4 A to 25 A

Figure 18-7 Current / voltage measuring module (through-hole converter) 3UF7110, 0.3 A to 3 A,
3UF7111, 2.4 A to 25 A

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

642 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Dimension drawings
18.3 Current / voltage measuring modules

18.3.2 Current measuring module (through-hole converter) 3UF7112, 10 A to 100 A

Figure 18-8 Current / voltage measuring module (through-hole converter) 3UF7112, 10 A to 100 A

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 643
Dimension drawings
18.3 Current / voltage measuring modules

18.3.3 Current measuring module (through-hole converter) 3UF7113-1AA, 20 A to

200 A

Figure 18-9 Current / voltage measuring module (through-hole converter) 3UF7113-1AA, 20 A to

200 A

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

644 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Dimension drawings
18.3 Current / voltage measuring modules

18.3.4 Current measuring module (bus connection) 3UF7113-1BA, 20 A to 200 A

Figure 18-10 Current / voltage measuring module (bus connection) 3UF7113-1BA, 20 A to 200 A

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 645
Dimension drawings
18.3 Current / voltage measuring modules

18.3.5 Current measuring module (bus connection) 3UF7114, 63 A to 630 A

Figure 18-11 Current measuring module (bus connection) 3UF7114, 63 A to 630 A

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

646 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Dimension drawings
18.4 3UF7200 and 3UF7210 operator panels

18.4 3UF7200 and 3UF7210 operator panels

18.4.1 3UF7200 operator panel

Figure 18-12 3UF7200 operator panel

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 647
Dimension drawings
18.4 3UF7200 and 3UF7210 operator panels

18.4.2 3UF7210 operator panel with display

Figure 18-13 3UF7210 operator panel with display

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

648 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Dimension drawings
18.5 Expansion modules/decoupling module

18.5 Expansion modules/decoupling module

Figure 18-14 Expansion modules/decoupling module

● 3UF73 digital modules

● 3UF7500-1AA00-0 and 3UF510-1AA00-0 ground-fault modules
● 3UF7700 temperature module
● 3UF7400 analog module
● 3UF715 decoupling module

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 649
Dimension drawings
18.6 Digital modules DM-F Local, DM-PROFIsafe

18.6 Digital modules DM-F Local, DM-PROFIsafe

Figure 18-15 Digital module DM-F Local, DM-PROFIsafe

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

650 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Dimension drawings
18.7 Accessories

18.7 Accessories

18.7.1 Door adapter

Figure 18-16 Door adapter

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 651
Dimension drawings
18.7 Accessories

18.7.2 Operator panel adapter

Figure 18-17 Operator panel adapter

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

652 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Dimension drawings
18.7 Accessories

18.7.3 Initialization module

Figure 18-18 Initialization module

Figure 18-19 Y connecting cable

18.7.4 3UL23 residual current transformer

Dimension drawings residual current transformer 3UL23

See Manual "3UG4/3RR2 Monitoring Relay"
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/50426183/133300).

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 653
Dimension drawings
18.7 Accessories

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

654 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
Technical data 19
In this chapter
This chapter contains information about SIMOCODE pro technical data.

Target groups
This chapter is addressed to the following target group:
● Configuring engineers

Required knowledge
You will require the following knowledge:
● Sound knowledge of switchgear configuration
● Sound knowledge of SIMOCODE pro

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 655
Technical data
19.1 Common technical data

19.1 Common technical data

Common technical data

Standards EN 60204-1, EN 1760-1, ISO 13849-1, IEC 61508, IEC/EN 60947-4-
1, IEC/EN 60947-5-1
Test verification documents See Certificates (http://www.siemens.com/sirius/approvals).
Permissible ambient temperature
In operation -25 to +60℃ 1)
For storage and transport -40 to +80℃ 2)
at installation altitude above MSL
≤ 3000 m Max. +50 °C (no safe isolation)
≤ 4000 m Max. +40 °C (no safe isolation)
Relative humidity during operation 5 ... 95 %
Degree of protection (according to IEC 60529)
All components (except current measuring modules with bus connection, IP20
operator panel and door adapter)
Current measuring modules with bus connection IP00
Operator panel (front) and door adapter (front) with cover IP54
Vibration resistance 1-6 Hz / 15 mm; 6-500 Hz / 2 g
Shock resistance (sine pulse) 15 g / 11 ms
according to DIN EN 60068-2-27
Mounting position Any
Frequencies 50/60 Hz ±5 %
EMC stability according to IEC 60947-1 Corresponds to degree of severity 3
• IEC 60947-1, IEC 60947-5-1, SN 27095, NE21
• DM-F: IEC 61326-3-1
Conducted interference, burst according to IEC 61000-4-4 2 kV (power ports)
Surge suppressor is required for inductive
loads.
1 kV (signal ports)
Conducted interference, high-frequency according to IEC 61000-4-6 10 V
Conducted interference, surge according to IEC 61000-4-5 2 kV (line to ground)
1 kV (line to line)
Electrostatic discharge, ESD according to IEC 61000-4-2 4) 8 kV (air discharge)
6 kV (contact discharge) 3)

Field-related interference according to IEC 61000-4-3 10 V/m

This is a Class A product. This product can cause radio interference if DIN EN 55011/DIN EN 55022
used in a domestic environment. Therefore, the user may need to (CISPR11/CISPR22)
implement suitable countermeasures. (corresponds to Degree of Severity A)
Conducted and radiated interference emission

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

656 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Technical data
19.1 Common technical data

Common technical data

Safe isolation according to IEC 60947-1 All SIMOCODE pro circuits are isolated from
each other according to IEC 60947-1, i.e.
dimensioned with double creepage distance
and air clearance.
Notice
Please observe the information in
the "Protective Separation" test report,
No. 2668.
Connecting cable 3UF73
Rated insulation voltage 300 V
Rated operating voltage 24 V

1) for operator panel with display 3UF721 0 - 60 °C

2) for operator panel with display 3UF721 -20 - 70 °C
3) for operator panel with display 3UF721 4kV

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 657
Technical data
19.2 Technical data of the basic unit

19.2 Technical data of the basic unit

Technical data of the basic unit

Mounting Snap-mounted onto 35 mm standard mounting rail or screw-mounted
using additional push-in lugs
Mounting position Any
Display
Red/green/yellow "DEVICE" LED • Red: "Function test negative, device disabled"
• Green: "Ready for operation"
• Yellow: "Memory module detected"
• OFF: "No control supply voltage"
Green "BUS" LED • Continuous light: "Communication with PLC/PCS"
• Flashing: "Baud rate recognized/communication with PC/PG"
Red "GEN. FAULT" LED Continuous light/flashing: "Feeder fault", e.g. overload tripping
Green "PORT1" LED • Continuous light: Ethernet connection available
• Flashing: Station flash test
Green "PORT2" LED • Continuous light: Ethernet connection available
• Flashing: Station flash test
"TEST/RESET" button • Resets the device after tripping
• Function test (system self-test)
• Operation of memory module
System interfaces
Front For connecting an operator panel or expansion modules. The memory
module or a PC cable can also be connected to the system interface for
parameterization purposes.
Bottom Connection of a current measuring module or a current / voltage
measuring module
ETHERNET interface
Connection system 2 x RJ45 (LAN)
Transmission rate Max. 100 Mbit/s
Number of interfaces according to PROFINET 2
PROFINET conformity class B
Protocols supported PROFINET IO, PROFIsafe, LLDP, SNMP,
Address Resolution Protocol (ARP), HTTP, HTTPS, OPC UA Server,
NTP
Autonegation Yes
Autosensing Yes
MRP/MRRT redundancy method Yes
PROFINET IO system redundancy Yes
PROFIenergy measured values Yes
PROFIenergy shutdown Yes

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

658 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Technical data
19.2 Technical data of the basic unit

Technical data of the basic unit

Rated control supply voltage Us (according to 110 V - 240 V AC/DC, 50/60 Hz 24 V DC
DIN EN 61131-2)
Warning
For the 24 V DC power supply, always use an
SELV or PELV power supply unit!
Operating range 0.85 x Us to 1.1 x Us 0.85 x Us to 1.2 x Us (startup)
0.80 x Us to 1.2 x Us (operation)
Power consumption
(including two expansion modules connected to 12 VA/8 W 8W
basic unit)
Rated insulation voltage Ui 300 V (at pollution degree 3)
Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp 4 kV
Power failure backup time(longer power failures • 24 V DC Typ. 20 ms
lead to shutdown of the relay outputs
• 110 V to 240 V AC/DC
(monostable))
Relay outputs
Number 3 monostable relay outputs
Function Isolated NO contacts (NO contact response parameterizable via internal
signal conditioning), 2 relay outputs connected to common potential, one
separate relay output, freely-assignable to control functions (e.g. line,
star or delta contactor or operating state status information.)
Stipulated short-circuit protection for auxiliary • Fuse links, operating class gG 6 A, quick-response 10 A (IEC 60947-
contacts (relay outputs) 5-1)
• Miniature circuit breaker 1.6 A, C characteristic (IEC 60947-5-1)
• Miniature circuit breaker 6 A, C characteristic (Ik < 500 A)
Rated uninterrupted current • 5A
• 6 A at max. +50 °C
Rated switching capacity • AC-15:
6 A / 24 V AC;

6 A / 120 V AC;
3 A / 230 V AC
• DC-13:
2 A/24 V DC;
0.55 A/60 V DC;
0.25 A/125 V DC
Contact rating of the auxiliary contacts B300/R300
according to UL
Electrical durability (operating cycles) Typical: 100.000
Mechanical durability (operating cycles) Typical: 10.000.000

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 659
Technical data
19.2 Technical data of the basic unit

Technical data of the basic unit

Inputs (binary) 4 inputs connected to common potential that are supplied via the device
electronics (24 V DC) for measuring process signals (e.g. local control
station, key-operated switch, limit switch, etc.), freely-assignable to
control functions.
24 V DC
Cable lengths (single) 300 m
Input characteristic Type 1 according to EN 61131-2
Thermistor motor protection (PTC binary)
Total cold resistance ≤ 1.5 kOhm
Response value 3.4 kOhm to 3.8 kOhm
Return value 1.5 kOhm to 1.65 kOhm
Cable lengths (single), conductor cross Cross section: Length:
sections: 2.5 mm2 250 m
1.5 mm2 150 m
0.5 mm2 50 m
Connection
Tightening torque TORQUE: 7 LB.IN to 10.3 LB.IN; 0.8 Nm to 1.2 Nm
Connection cross sections
• Solid 2 x 0.5 mm2 - 2.5 mm2; 1 x 0.5 mm2 - 4 mm2;
2 x AWG 20 to 14 / 1 x AWG 20 to 12
• Finely stranded with end sleeve 2 x 0.5 mm2 - 1.5 mm2; 1 x 0.5 mm2 - 2.5 mm2;
2 x AWG 20 to 16 / 1 x AWG 20 to 14

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

660 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Technical data
19.3 Technical data of the current measuring modules or current / voltage measuring modules

19.3 Technical data of the current measuring modules or current / voltage

measuring modules

Technical data of the current measuring modules or current / voltage measuring modules
Mounting
Set current Is = 0.3 A to 3 A; 2.4 A to 25 A; Snap-mounted onto 35 mm standard mounting rail or screw-mounted using
10 A to 100 A additional push-in lugs
(3UF71.0, 3UF71.1, 3UF71.2)
Set current Is = 20 A to 200 A Snap-on mounting onto 35 mm standard mounting rails, screw attachment
(3UF7103, 3UF7113) onto the mounting plate or direct mounting onto the contactor
Set current Is = 63 A to 630 A (3UF7104, Screw attachment to the mounting plate or direct mounting onto the contactor
3UF7 114)
System interface for main circuit For connection to a basic unit or decoupling module
Set current Is 3UF71.0: 0.3 A to 3 A 3UF71.3: 20 A to 200 A
3UF71.1: 2.4 A to 25 A 3UF71.4: 63 A to 630 A
3UF71.2: 10 A to 100 A
Rated insulation voltage Ui (at pollution 690 V1)
degree 3)
Rated operating voltage Ue 690 V
Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp 6 kV2)
Rated frequency 50 / 60 Hz
Type of current Three-phase
Short circuit Additional short-circuit protection is required in the main circuit 3)

Accuracy of current measuring (ranging +/- 3 %

from 1 x minimum set current Iu to 8 x
maximum set current Io)
Typical voltage measuring range
Line-to-line voltage / voltage between lines 110 V - 690 V (only the phase voltages are available in the system as
(e.g. UL1L2) measured values)
Phase voltage (e.g. UL1) 65 V to 400 V
Voltage measuring accuracy in the range +/- 3 % (typical)
from 230 V to 400 V
Accuracy of cos phi measurement (in the +/- 5 % (typical)
nominal load range cos phi = 0.4 to 0.8)
Accuracy of apparent power measurement +/- 5 % (typical)
(in the nominal load range)
Notes on voltage measurement
Current / voltage measuring modules must Caution
be used with a decoupling module for Note that the supply cables for voltage measurement may require additional
certain network types. See Table 1-35 in cable protection.
Chapter Decoupling module (DCM) for
current / voltage measuring modules
(Page 105), device series
SIMOCODE pro V PN.

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 661
Technical data
19.3 Technical data of the current measuring modules or current / voltage measuring modules

Technical data of the current measuring modules or current / voltage measuring modules
Feed-through opening Diameter
Set current 0.3 A to 3 A; 2.4 A to 25 A 7.5 mm
Set current 10 A - 100 A: 14.0 mm
Set current 20 A - 200 A: 25.0 mm
Bus connection 4)
Set current Is 20 A - 200 A 63 A - 630 A
Connection screw M8x25 M10x30
Tightening torque 10 Nm - 14 Nm 14 Nm - 24 Nm
Solid with cable lug 16 mm2 - 95 mm2 4) 5) 50 mm2 - 240 mm2 4) 6)
Stranded with cable lug 25 mm2 - 120 mm2 4) 5) 70 mm2 - 240mm2 4) 6)
AWG cable 6 kcmil - 300 kcmil 1/0kcmil - 500 kcmil
Connection for voltage measurement
Tightening torque TORQUE: 7 LB.IN to 10.3 LB.IN; 0.8 Nm to 1.2 Nm
Connection cross sections
• Solid 2 x 0.5 mm2 to 2.5 mm2 / 1 x 0.5 mm2 - 4 mm2;
2 x AWG 20 to 14 / 1 x AWG 20 to 12
• Finely stranded with end sleeve 2 x 0.5 mm2 - 1.5 mm2 / 1 x 0.5 mm2 - 2.5 mm2;
2 x AWG 20 to 16 / 1 x AWG 20 to 14
1) for 3UF7103 or 3UF104 to 1000 V
2) for 3UF7103 or 3UF104 to 8 kV
3) You will find more information at SIMOCODE (http://www.siemens.com/simocode)and in Chapter Short-circuit protection
with fuses for motor feeders for short-circuit currents up to 100 kA and 690 V (Page 678).
4) Screw connection is possible with an appropriate 3RT19 box terminal.
5) When connecting cable lugs complying with DIN 46235 to cables with a cross section larger than 95 mm2, the 3RT19
56-4EA1 terminal cover is required to maintain phase separation.
6) When connecting cable lugs complying with DIN 46234 to cables with a cross section larger than 240 mm2 and when
connecting cable lugs complying with DIN 46235 to cables with a cross section larger than 185 mm2, the 3RT19 56-4EA1
terminal cover is required to maintain phase separation.

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

662 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Technical data
19.4 Technical data of the decoupling module

19.4 Technical data of the decoupling module

Technical data of the decoupling

module
Mounting Snap-mounted onto 35-mm standard mounting rail or screw-
mounted using additional push-in lugs
Display
• Green "READY" LED
System interfaces The left interface is for connection to a basic unit or an expansion module, the right
interface is exclusively for connection to a current / voltage measuring module.
Connection
Tightening torque Torque: 7 LB.IN - 10.3 LB.IN;
0.8 Nm to 1.2 Nm
Connection cross sections
• Solid 2 x 0.5 mm2 to 2.5 mm2 / 1 x 0.5 mm2 - 4 mm2;
2 x AWG 20 to 14 / 1 x AWG 20 to 12
• Finely stranded with end sleeve 2 x 0.5 mm2 - 1.5 mm2 / 1 x 0.5 mm2 - 2.5 mm2;
2 x AWG 20 to 16 / 1 x AWG 20 to 14

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 663
Technical data
19.5 Technical data of the expansion modules

19.5 Technical data of the expansion modules

19.5.1 Technical data of the digital modules

Technical data of the digital modules

Mounting Snap-mounted onto 35-mm standard mounting rail or screw-
mounted using additional push-in lugs
Display
Green "READY" LED • Continuous light: "Ready for operation"
• Flashing: "No connection to basic unit"
System interfaces For connecting to a basic unit, an additional expansion module, a current
measuring module or a current / voltage measuring module or the operator
panel
Control circuit
Rated insulation voltage Ui 300 V (at pollution degree 3)
Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp 4 kV
Relay outputs
• Number 2 monostable or bistable relay outputs (depending on the variant)

• Function Isolated NO contacts (NC contact response parameterizable via internal

signal conditioning), relay outputs all with connection to common potential,
freely-assignable to control functions (e.g. line, star or delta contactor or
operating state status information).
• Stipulated short-circuit protection for • Fuse links, operating class gL/gG 6 A, quick-response 10 A (IEC
auxiliary contacts (relay outputs) 60947-5-1)
• Miniature circuit breaker 1.6 A, C characteristic (IEC 60947-5-1)
• Miniature circuit breaker 6 A, C characteristic (Ik < 500 A)

• Rated uninterrupted current • 5A

• 6 A at max. +50 °C

• Rated switching capacity

AC-15 6 A / 24 V AC;
6 A / 120 V AC;
3 A / 230 V AC
DC-13 2 A / 24 V DC;
0.55 A/60 V DC;
0.25 A/125 V DC
Inputs (binary) 4 externally supplied, isolated inputs (24 V DC or 110 V - 240 V AC / DC,
depending on version), connected to common potential for measuring
process signals (e.g. local control station, key-operated switches, limit
switches, ...), freely-assignable to control functions.

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

664 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Technical data
19.5 Technical data of the expansion modules

Technical data of the digital modules

24 V DC:
Cable lengths (single) 300 m
Input characteristic Type 2 according to EN 61131-2
110 V to 240 V AC/DC:
Cable lengths (single) 200 m (cable capacitance 300 nF/km)
Input characteristic -
Connection Removable terminal block with screw connection
Tightening torque Torque: 7 LB.IN to 10.3 LB.IN; 0.8 Nm to 1.2 Nm
Connection cross sections
• Solid 2 x 0.5 mm2 to 2.5 mm2 / 1 x 0.5 mm2 - 4 mm2;
2 AWG 20 to 14 / 1 x AWG 20 to 12
• Finely stranded with end sleeve 2 x 0.5 mm2 - 1.5 mm2 / 1 x 0.5 mm2 - 2.5 mm2;
2 x AWG 20 to 16 / 1 x AWG 20 to 14

19.5.2 Technical data, digital modules DM-F Local and DM-F PROFIsafe

Technical data, digital modules DM-F Local and DM-F PROFIsafe

Technical data, digital modules DM-F Local and DM-F PROFIsafe

Mounting Snap-mounted onto 35 mm standard mounting rail or screw-mounted using additional push-in
lugs
Enclosure width 45 mm
System interfaces For connecting to a basic unit, an additional expansion module, a current measuring module
or a current / voltage measuring module or the operator panel
Rated control supply • 24 V DC
voltage Us (according to
• 110 V - 240 V AC/DC, 50/60 Hz
DIN EN 61131-2)
Operating range • 24 V DC: 0.8 to 1.2 x Us
• 110 V to 240 V AC/DC: 0.85 to 1.1 x Us
Power consumption DM-F LOCAL:
• 24 V DC: 3 W
• 110 V to 240 V AC/DC: 9.5 VA/4.5 W
DM-F PROFIsafe:
• 24 V DC: 4 W
• 110 V to 240 V AC/DC: 11.0 VA/5.5 W
Safe isolation according to Between relay enabling circuits / relay outputs and electronics
IEC 60947-1
Rated insulation voltage Ui 300 V (at pollution degree 3)
Rated impulse withstand 4 kV
voltage Uimp

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 665
Technical data
19.5 Technical data of the expansion modules

Technical data, digital modules DM-F Local and DM-F PROFIsafe

Mains buffering time • 24 V DC, typ. 20 ms at 0.8 x Us
• 110 V - 240 V AC/DC: typ. 20 ms at 0.85 x Us; typ. 200 ms at 230 V
Relay outputs 2 monostable relay outputs
• Number Common potential connection is internally disconnected in a fail-safe manner by a relay
enabling circuit
• Function Normally open contact, freely assignable to the control functions

Electrical service life of 0.1 million switching cycles (AC-15, 230 V/3 A)
relay outputs
Relay enabling circuits
• Number 2 common switching-type, fail-safe relay enabling circuits

• Function Fail-safe normally open contacts

• Stipulated short-circuit Fuse links operating class gL/gG 4 A (IEC 60947-5-1), separate for each relay enabling
protection for relay circuit
enabling circuits / relay
outputs

• Rated uninterrupted 5A
current of relay
enabling circuits

• Rated switching AC-15: 3 A / 24 V AC; 3 A / 120 V AC; 1.5 A / 230 V AC;

capacity of relay DC-13: 4 A / 24 V DC; 0.55 A / 60 V DC; 0.22 A / 125 V DC; 0.11 A / 250 V DC
enabling circuits

• Electrical service life of 0.1 million switching cycles (AC-15, 240 V/ 2 A)

relay enabling circuits

• Switching rate of the 2000/h

relay enabling circuits
Connection Removable terminals with screw connection
Tightening torque TORQUE: 7 LB.IN to 10.3 LB.IN 0.8 Nm to 1.2 Nm
Connection cross sections
• Solid 2x 0.5 mm2 to 2.5 mm2 / 1x 0.5 mm2to 4 mm2;
2x AWG 20 to 14 / 1x AWG 20 to 12
• Finely stranded with 2x 0.5 mm2 to 1.5 mm2 / 1x 0.5 mm2to 2.5 mm2;
end sleeve 2x AWG 20 to 16 / 1x AWG 20 to 14

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

666 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Technical data
19.5 Technical data of the expansion modules

19.5.3 Technical data of the DM-F LOCAL digital module

Technical data of the DM-F Local digital module

LEDs on DM-F LOCAL Color Meaning
"READY" OFF System interface not connected/supply voltage too low/device defective
Green Device ON/system interface OK
Flashing green Device ON/system interface not active or not OK
"DEVICE" OFF Supply voltage too low
Green Device ON
Flashing green Self-test
Yellow Configuration mode
Flashing yellow Error in configuration
Red Device defective or faulty
"OUT" OFF Safety-related output not active
Green Safety-related output active
Flashing green Feedback circuit not closed although start condition satisfied
"IN" OFF Input not active
Green Input active
Flashing green Fault detected (e.g., cross-circuit at input, sensor simultaneity not fulfilled)
"GF" OFF No general fault
Red Group fault (wiring error, cross-circuit, configuration error)
Flashing red Group fault (feedback circuit fault, simultaneity condition not satisfied)
"1" OFF Cross-circuit detection Off
Yellow Cross-circuit detection On
Flashing yellow Configuration mode, waiting for confirmation
Flickering yellow Error in configuration
"2" OFF NC contact/NO contact
Yellow NC contact/NC contact
Flashing yellow Configuration mode, waiting for confirmation
Flickering yellow Error in configuration
"3" OFF 2 x 1-channel
Yellow 1 x 2-channel
Flashing yellow Configuration mode, waiting for confirmation
Flickering yellow Error in configuration
"4" OFF Debounce time Y12, Y22, Y34 ~ 50 ms
Yellow Debounce time Y12, Y22, Y34 ~ 10 ms
Flashing yellow Configuration mode, waiting for confirmation
Flickering yellow Error in configuration
"5" OFF Sensor circuit, automatic start
Yellow Sensor circuit, monitored start
Flashing yellow Configuration mode, waiting for confirmation
Flickering yellow Error in configuration

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 667
Technical data
19.5 Technical data of the expansion modules

Technical data of the DM-F Local digital module

"6" OFF Cascading input 1, automatic start
Yellow Cascading input 1, monitored start
Flashing yellow Configuration mode, waiting for confirmation
Flickering yellow Error in configuration
"7" OFF With start-up testing
Yellow Without start-up testing
Flashing yellow Configuration mode, waiting for confirmation
Flickering yellow Error in configuration
"8" OFF Automatic starting after power failure
Yellow No automatic starting after power failure
Flashing yellow Configuration mode, waiting for confirmation
Flickering yellow Error in configuration
DIP switch for setting safety functions
"SET/RESET" button • Application of parameters set via DIP switch
• Resetting of faults (also possible via "TEST/RESET" button on basic unit)
Inputs with safety relay 2 sensor inputs 24 V DC (Y12, Y22)
function
• Supply via terminal T1 and T2 with cross-circuit detection or external supply (static
+24 V DC) without cross-circuit detection
• Functions parameterizable via DIP switch
1 start signal input 24 V DC (Y33)
• For monitored reconnection of the relay enabling circuits after a safety-related trip
• Supply via terminal T1 with/without T3 (static +24 V DC) without cross-circuit detection
1 cascading input 24 V DC (1)
• For use in connection with a higher-level safety relay
• Supply via terminal T3 (static +24 V DC)
1 feedback circuit input 24 V DC (Y34)
• For contactor monitoring of the motor and incoming supply contactors via series-connected
auxiliary switch normally-closed contacts
• Supply via terminal T2 with/without T3 (static +24 V DC) without cross-circuit detection
Cable length (single) 1500 m
Input characteristic Type 2 according to EN 61131-2

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

668 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Technical data
19.5 Technical data of the expansion modules

19.5.4 Technical data of the DM-F-PROFIsafe digital module

Technical data of the DM-F PROFIsafe digital module

LED display DM- Color Meaning
F PROFIsafe
"READY" OFF System interface not connected/supply voltage too low/device defective
Green Device ON/system interface OK
Flashing green Device ON/system interface not active or not OK
"DEVICE" OFF Supply voltage too low
Green Device ON
Red Device defective or faulty
"OUT" OFF Safety-related output not active
Green Safety-related output active
Flashing green Feedback circuit not closed although start condition satisfied
"GF" OFF No general fault
Red Group fault (PROFIsafe not active, incorrect PROFIsafe address, wiring
error, device defective)
"1" Yellow PROFIsafe address 1
"2" Yellow PROFIsafe address 2
"3" Yellow PROFIsafe address 4
"4" Yellow PROFIsafe address 8
"5" Yellow PROFIsafe address 16
"6" Yellow PROFIsafe address 32
"7" Yellow PROFIsafe address 64
"8" Yellow PROFIsafe address 128
"9" Yellow PROFIsafe address 256
"10" Yellow PROFIsafe address 512
DIP switch for setting the PROFIsafe address
"SET/RESET" button • Displays the set PROFIsafe address
• Application of the set PROFIsafe address (restart of the module)
• Resetting of faults (also possible via "TEST/RESET" button on basic unit)
Inputs binary • 3 inputs (83, 85, 89) 24 V DC
• Supply via terminal 84 or external supply (static +24 V)
• Common connected, electrically isolated inputs for acquiring process signals (e.g., local
control station, keyswitch, limit switch, etc.), freely assignable to control functions
Input with safety relay • 1 feedback circuit input (91/FBC) 24 V DC
function
• For contactor monitoring of the motor and incoming supply contactors via series-connected
auxiliary switch contacts
• Supply via terminal 90/T
Cable length (single) 300 m
Input characteristic Type 2 according to EN 61131-2

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 669
Technical data
19.5 Technical data of the expansion modules

19.5.5 Safety-related technical data of the digital modules DM-F Local and DM-F
PROFIsafe
See Chapter "Technical data" in "Failsafe Digital Modules SIMOCODE pro Safety" manual
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/50564852).

19.5.6 Technical data of the analog module

Technical data of the analog module

Mounting Snap-mounted onto 35 mm standard mounting rail or screw-mounted using additional
push-in lugs
Display
Green "READY" LED • Continuous light: "Ready for operation"
• Flashing: "No connection to basic unit"
System interfaces For connecting to a basic unit, an additional expansion module, a current measuring
module or a current / voltage measuring module or the operator panel.
Control circuit
Connection type: 2-wire connection
Inputs:
• Channels 2 (passive)

• Parameterizable measuring 0/4 mA - 20 mA

ranges

• Cable shielding Recommended for up to 30 m and outside the control cabinet; shielding mandatory for
cables over 30 m
• Max. input current 40 mA
(destruction limit)

• Accuracy ±1 %

• Input resistance 50 ohm

• Conversion time 150 ms

• Resolution 12 bits

• Open-circuit detection For measuring range 4 mA - 20 mA

• Isolation of the inputs to the No

device electronics

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

670 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Technical data
19.5 Technical data of the expansion modules

Technical data of the analog module

Output:
• Channels 1

• Parameterizable output 0/4 mA - 20 mA

range

• Cable shielding Recommended for up to 30 m and outside the control cabinet; shielding mandatory for
cables over 30 m
• Max. output voltage 30 V DC

• Accuracy ±1 %

• Max. output load 500 ohm

• Conversion time 25 ms

• Resolution 12 bits

• Short-circuit proof Yes

• Isolation of the outputs to the No

device electronics
Connection
Tightening torque TORQUE: 7 LB.IN to 10.3 LB.IN; 0.8 Nm to 1.2 Nm
Connection cross sections
• Solid 2x 0.5 mm2 to 2.5 mm2 / 1x 0.5 mm2to 4 mm2;
2x AWG 20 to 14 / 1x AWG 20 to 12
• Finely stranded with end 2x 0.5 mm2 to 1.5 mm2 / 1x 0.5 mm2to 2.5 mm2;
sleeve 2x AWG 20 to 16 / 1x AWG 20 to 14

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 671
Technical data
19.5 Technical data of the expansion modules

19.5.7 Technical data of the ground-fault module 3UF7500-1AA00-0

Technical data of the ground-fault module 3UF7500-1AA00-0

Mounting Snap-mounted onto 35-mm standard mounting
rail or screw-mounted using additional push-in lugs.
Display
Green "READY" LED • Continuous light: "Ready for operation"
• Flashing: "No connection to basic unit"
System interface For connecting to a basic unit, an additional expansion
module, a current measuring module or a current / voltage
measuring module or the operator panel.
Control circuit
Connectable 3UL22 residual current transformer with rated 0.3 / 0.5 / 1 A
fault currents IN
• Iground fault ≤ 50 % IN No tripping

• Iground fault ≥ 100 % IN Tripping

Response delay (conversion time) 300 ms to 500 ms, additional delay possible
Connection
Tightening torque TORQUE: 7 LB.IN to 10.3 LB.IN 0.8 Nm to 1.2 Nm
Connection cross sections
• Solid: 2x 0.5 mm2 to 2.5 mm2 / 1x 0.5 mm2 to 4 mm2;
2x AWG 20 to 14 / 1x AWG 20 to 12
• Finely stranded with end sleeve: 2x 0.5 mm2 to 1.5 mm2 / 1x 0.5 mm2to 2.5 mm2;
2x AWG 20 to 16 / 1x AWG 20 to 14

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

672 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Technical data
19.5 Technical data of the expansion modules

19.5.8 Technical data of the ground-fault module 3UF7510-1AA00-0

Table 19- 1 Technical data of the ground-fault module

Technical data of the ground-fault module

Mounting Snap-mounted onto 5-mm standard mounting rail or screw-
mounted using additional push-in lugs.
Display
• Green "READY" LED • Continuous light: "Ready for operation"
• Flashing: "No connection to basic unit"
System interface For connecting to a basic unit, an additional expansion module, a current
measuring module or a current / voltage measuring module or the operator panel.
Control circuit
Cable to the residual current transformer
Notice
• We recommend using twisted cables.
• Cables of lengths > 10 m must additionally be shielded and grounded.
Conductor cross section 0.5 mm2 1.0 mm2 1.5 mm2 2.5 mm2 4.0 mm2
AWG 20 kcmil 18 kcmil 16 kcmil 14 / 12 kcmil 10 kcmil
Max. cable length 70 m 140 m 210 m 300 m 550 m
Connectable residual current 35 mm to 210 mm
transformer 3UL23 1) - feed-through
diameter
Type of current to be monitored AC and pulsating DC (type A)
Measurable line frequency 16 Hz to 400 Hz
Response value current (settable) 0.03 A to 40 A
Measuring accuracy (relative) ground- ±5 %
fault module
Measuring accuracy (relative) ±2,5 %
transformer 3UL23
Reaction time (maximal) 100 ms

Connection
Tightening torque TORQUE: 7 LB.IN to 10.3 LB.IN 0.8 Nm to 1.2 Nm
Connection cross sections
• Solid 2x 0.5 mm2 to 2.5 mm2 / 1x 0.5 mm2 to 4 mm2
2x AWG 20 to 14 / 1x AWG 20 to 12
• Finely stranded with end sleeve 2x 0.5 mm2 to 1.5 mm2 / 1x 0.5 mm2 to 2.5 mm2
2x AWG 20 to 16 / 1x AWG 20 to 14

1) Technical data residual current transformer 3UL23: See Manual "3UG4/3RR2 Monitoring
Relay" (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/50426183/133300).

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 673
Technical data
19.5 Technical data of the expansion modules

19.5.9 Technical data of the temperature module

Technical data of the temperature module

Mounting Snap-mounted onto 35 mm standard mounting rail or screw-
mounted using additional push-in lugs.
Display
Green "READY" LED • Continuous light: "Ready for operation"
• Flashing: "No connection to basic unit"
System interfaces For connecting to a basic unit, an additional expansion module, a
current measuring module or a current / voltage measuring
module or the operator panel.
Sensor circuit
Conversion time 500 ms
Type of connection 2-wire or 3-wire connection
Typical sensor current:
• PT100 1 mA (typical)

• PT1000 / KTY83 / KTY84 / NTC 0.2 mA (typical)

Open circuit detection / short-circuit detection /

measuring range:
• PT100/PT1000 Open circuit, short circuit; measuring range: -50 °C to +500 °C

• KTY83-110 Open circuit, short circuit; measuring range: -50 ℃ to +175 ℃

• KTY84 Open circuit, short circuit; measuring range: -40 ℃ to +300 ℃

• NTC Short circuit; measuring range: +80 °C to +160 °C

Measuring accuracy at an ambient temperature of 20 < ±2 K, ±1 digit

°C (T20)
Deviation due to ambient 0.05 per K deviation from T20
temperature (as % of measured value)
Isolation of the inputs to the device electronics No
Connection
Tightening torque TORQUE: 7 LB.IN to 10.3 LB.IN
0.8 Nm to 1.2 Nm
Connection cross sections
• Solid 2x 0.5 mm2 to 2.5 mm2 / 1x 0.5 mm2 to 4 mm2
2x AWG 20 to 14 / 1x AWG 20 to 12
• Finely stranded with end sleeve 2x 0.5 mm2 to 1.5 mm2 / 1x 0.5 mm2 to 2.5 mm2
2x AWG 20 to 16 / 1x AWG 20 to 14

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

674 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Technical data
19.6 Technical data of the operator panels

19.6 Technical data of the operator panels

19.6.1 Technical data of the operator panel

Technical data of the operator panel

Mounting Installation in a control cabinet door or in a front panel, with IP54 system
interface cover.
LED displays
• Red/green/yellow "DEVICE" LED • Red blocked: "Function test negative, device disabled"
• Green: "Ready for operation"
• Flashing green: "No connection to basic unit"
• Yellow: "Memory module detected"
• OFF: "No control supply voltage"

• Green "BUS" LED • Continuous light: "Communication with PLC/PCS"

• Flashing: "Baud rate recognized/communication with PC/PG"

• Red "GEN. FAULT" LED • Continuous light/flashing: "Feeder fault", e.g. overload tripping

• 3 yellow LEDs / 4 green LEDs For freely assigning any status signals

Buttons
• TEST/RESET • Resets the device after tripping
• Function test (system self-test)
• Operation of memory module

• Control buttons • For controlling the motor feeder, freely assignable

System interfaces
• Front For connecting a memory module or a PC cable for parameterization
purposes
• Rear For connecting a cable to the basic unit or the expansion module

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 675
Technical data
19.6 Technical data of the operator panels

19.6.2 Technical data of the operator panel with display

Table 19- 2 Technical data of the operator panel with display

Technical data of the operator panel with display

Mounting Installation in a control cabinet door or in a front panel, with IP54 system interface
cover.
LED displays
• Red/green/yellow "DEVICE" • Red blocked: "Function test negative, device disabled"
LED • Green: "Ready for operation"
• Flashing green: "No connection to basic unit"
• Yellow: "Memory module detected"
• OFF: "No control supply voltage"

• Green "BUS" LED • Continuous light: "Communication with PLC/PCS"

• Red "GEN. FAULT" LED • Continuous light/flashing: "Feeder fault", e.g. overload tripping

• 4 green LEDs For freely assigning any status signals (preferably for feedback on the switching
state, e.g. ON, OFF, LEFT, RIGHT)
Display Graphic display of actual measured values, operating and diagnostics data or status
information.
Buttons
• Control buttons • Control of the motor feeder, freely assignable

• Arrow keys • Navigation in the display menu

• Softkeys • Various functions, depending upon the menu, e.g. test, reset, operation of
memory module
System interfaces
• Front For connecting a memory module or a PC cable for parameterization purposes

• Rear Connection to the basic unit or to an expansion module

Note
Product version of the operator panel with display
For use with the SIMOCODE pro V PN basic unit, an operator panel with display version
*E07* or higher is required.

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

676 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Technical data
19.7 Technical data compartment identification

19.7 Technical data compartment identification

Technical data of the initialization module

Technical data of the initialization module

Order No. (MLFB) 3UF7 902-0AA00-0
Ambient temperature -25 to +80 ℃
Rated voltage 300 V
Rated operating voltage 24 V

Technical data of the Y connecting cable

Technical data of the Y connecting cable

Order No. (MLFB) 3UF7 931-0CA00-0, 3UF7 932-0CA00-0,
3UF7 937-0CA00-0
Lengths of system cable / open end of cable
3UF7 931-0CA00-0 0.1 m / 1.0 m
3UF7 932-0CA00-0 0.5 m / 1.0 m
3UF7 937-0CA00-0 1.0 m / 1.0 m

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 677
Technical data
19.8 Short-circuit protection with fuses for motor feeders for short-circuit currents up to 100 kA and 690 V

19.8 Short-circuit protection with fuses for motor feeders for short-circuit
currents up to 100 kA and 690 V

Short-circuit protection with fuses for motor feeder for short-circuit currents up to 100 kA and 690 V

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

678 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Technical data
19.8 Short-circuit protection with fuses for motor feeders for short-circuit currents up to 100 kA and 690 V

Figure 19-1 Short-circuit protection with fuses for motor feeder for short-circuit currents up to 100 kA
and 690 V for 3UF7 8 (1)

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 679
Technical data
19.8 Short-circuit protection with fuses for motor feeders for short-circuit currents up to 100 kA and 690 V

You will find the selection tables for fuseless motor feeders in the manuals "Configuring
SIRIUS Innovations - Selection Data for Fuseless and Fused Load Feeders"
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/39714188) and "SIRIUS Configuration
- Selection Data for Fuseless Load Feeders"
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/40625241).
1) , 2) , 3) , 4): See below.

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

680 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Technical data
19.8 Short-circuit protection with fuses for motor feeders for short-circuit currents up to 100 kA and 690 V

Figure 19-2 Short-circuit protection with fuses for motor feeder for short-circuit currents up to 100 kA
and 690 V for 3UF7 8 (2)

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 681
Technical data
19.8 Short-circuit protection with fuses for motor feeders for short-circuit currents up to 100 kA and 690 V

You will find the selection tables for fuseless motor feeders in the following manuals.
● "Configuring SIRIUS Innovations - Selection Data for Fuseless and Fused Load Feeders"
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/39714188)
● "SIRIUS Configuration - Selection Data for Fuseless Load Feeders"
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/40625241)
● "Configuration Manual Configuring SIRIUS Innovations UL - Selection Data for Fuseless
and Fused Load Feeders"
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/53433538)
● "Configuration Manual Configuring SIRIUS - Selection Data for Load Feeders in Fuseless
Design" (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/40625241).
1) Assignment and short-circuit protective devices acc. to IEC 60947-4-1

WARNING
Type of coordination 1
With type of coordination 1, the contactor or starter must not pose a hazard to people or
equipment in the event of a short circuit!
The contactor or starter must be suitable for further operation without repair and
replacement of parts.

WARNING
Type of coordination 2
With type of coordination 2, the contactor or starter must not pose a hazard to people or
equipment in the event of a short circuit!
The contactor or starter must be suitable for further use.
There is a risk of contact welding.

2) No contactor installation possible

3)

NOTICE
Operating voltage
Pay attention to the operating voltage!

4)

WARNING
Maximum AC3 operating current
Ensure that there is a sufficient safety margin between the maximum AC-3 operating
current and the rated fuse current.

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

682 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Technical data
19.9 Typical reaction times of SIMOCODE pro V PN device series

19.9 Typical reaction times of SIMOCODE pro V PN device series

Time: Inputs Time: Processing Time: Outputs

Basic unit Set debounce time 5 ms 10 ms
Thermistor 400 ms -
PROFINET 5 ms 5 ms
Current measurement 300 ms -
Voltage measurement 300 ms -
Active power / cos phi 1000 ms -
Internal ground fault 300 ms - 600 ms + set delay -
Ground-fault module / external 100 ms + set delay -
ground fault
Digital module (24 V) 15 ms + debounce time 25 ms
Digital module (110 V - 240 V) 50 ms + debounce time 25 ms
Analog module 150 ms 25 ms
Temperature module 500 ms -
DM-F Local ≤ 75 ms + debounce time 30 ms
DM-F PROFIsafe 15 ms + debounce time 30 ms

1) Based upon a typical hardware set-up: Basic unit + current measuring module +
2 expansion modules
Reaction time = inputs conversion time + internal processing time + outputs conversion time
Example:
You wish to switch a relay output of the basic unit via PROFINET when the "remote" bit is
set: Reaction time = 5 ms + 5 ms + 10 ms = 20 ms

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 683
Technical data
19.9 Typical reaction times of SIMOCODE pro V PN device series

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

684 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
Example circuits 20
In this chapter
In this chapter you will find example circuits for the following parameterizable control
functions:
● Overload relay
● Direct starter
● Reversing starter
● Molded-case circuit breaker (MCCB)
● Star-delta starter
● Star-delta reversing starter
● Dahlander
● Dahlander reversing starter
● Pole-changing starter
● Pole-changing reversing starter
● Solenoid valve
● Positioner
● Soft starter
● Soft starter with reversing contactor
● Direct starter for single-phase loads

Target groups
This manual is addressed to the following target groups:
● Planners
● Configuring engineers
● Technicians
● Electricians
● Commissioning engineers

Required knowledge
You will require the following knowledge:
● Basic SIMOCODE pro knowledge (see Chapter System description (Page 23))
● Basic knowledge about SIMOCODE ES parameterization software.

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 685
Example circuits
20.1 Example circuits - purpose, steps, preconditions

20.1 Example circuits - purpose, steps, preconditions

Purpose of example circuits

The example circuits should:
● Show you how to implement a circuit for a specific control function using SIMOCODE pro
● Help you modify these examples for your respective application
● Help you implement other applications easily.

Fundamental steps
● Implementation of external wiring (for control and feedback of main circuit devices and
control and signaling devices)
● Implementation / activation of internal SIMOCODE pro functions, with control and
evaluation of the SIMOCODE pro inputs / outputs (internal SIMOCODE pro wiring) (see
function circuit diagrams with the function blocks of the graphic editor of the "SIMOCODE
ES" configuration software)
● Setting up the cyclic receive and send data for the communication of SIMOCODE pro
with a PLC (see function circuit diagrams and the "Assignment of cyclic receive and send
data" tables).

Requirements
● Load feeder / motor is present
● PLC/PCS with PROFINET interface is present
● The main circuit is already connected.
● PC / PG is present
● SIMOCODE ES software is installed
● The basic unit has the factory settings. You can find out how to restore the basic factory
settings in Section " Restoring factory settings."

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

686 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Example circuits
20.2 "Overload relay" example circuit

20.2 "Overload relay" example circuit

20.2.1 "Overload relay" circuit diagram

Figure 20-1 "Overload relay" circuit diagram

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 687
Example circuits
20.2 "Overload relay" example circuit

20.2.2 "Overload relay" function circuit diagram

Figure 20-2 "Overload relay" function circuit diagram

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

688 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Example circuits
20.3 "Direct-on-line starter" example circuit

20.3 "Direct-on-line starter" example circuit

20.3.1 "Direct starter" circuit diagram

Figure 20-3 "Direct starter" circuit diagram

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 689
Example circuits
20.3 "Direct-on-line starter" example circuit

20.3.2 "Direct starter" function circuit diagram

Figure 20-4 "Direct starter" function circuit diagram

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

690 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Example circuits
20.4 "Reversing starter" example circuit

20.4 "Reversing starter" example circuit

20.4.1 "Reversing starter" circuit diagram

Figure 20-5 "Reversing starter" circuit diagram

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 691
Example circuits
20.4 "Reversing starter" example circuit

20.4.2 "Reversing starter" function circuit diagram

Figure 20-6 "Reversing starter" function circuit diagram

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

692 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Example circuits
20.5 "3VL molded-case circuit breaker (MCCB)" example circuit

20.5 "3VL molded-case circuit breaker (MCCB)" example circuit

20.5.1 "3VL molded-case circuit breaker (MCCB)" circuit diagram

Figure 20-7 "3VL molded-case circuit breaker (MCCB)" circuit diagram

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 693
Example circuits
20.5 "3VL molded-case circuit breaker (MCCB)" example circuit

20.5.2 "3VL molded-case circuit breaker (MCCB)" function circuit diagram

Figure 20-8 "3VL molded-case circuit breaker (MCCB)" function circuit diagram

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

694 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Example circuits
20.6 "Star-delta starter" circuit example

20.6 "Star-delta starter" circuit example

20.6.1 "Star-delta starter" circuit diagram (current measuring in delta)

Figure 20-9 "Star-delta starter" circuit diagram (current measuring in delta)

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 695
Example circuits
20.6 "Star-delta starter" circuit example

20.6.2 "Star-delta starter" function circuit diagram (current measuring in delta)

Figure 20-10 "Star-delta starter" function circuit diagram (current measuring in delta)

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

696 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Example circuits
20.6 "Star-delta starter" circuit example

20.6.3 "Star-delta starter" circuit diagram (current measuring in supply cable)

Figure 20-11 "Star-delta starter" circuit diagram (current measuring in supply cable)

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 697
Example circuits
20.6 "Star-delta starter" circuit example

20.6.4 "Star-delta starter" function circuit diagram (current measuring in supply cable)

Figure 20-12 "Star-delta starter" function circuit diagram (current measuring in supply cable)

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

698 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Example circuits
20.7 "Star-delta reversing starter" circuit example

20.7 "Star-delta reversing starter" circuit example

20.7.1 "Star delta reversing starter" circuit diagram

Figure 20-13 "Star delta reversing starter" circuit diagram

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 699
Example circuits
20.7 "Star-delta reversing starter" circuit example

20.7.2 "Star-delta reversing starter" function circuit diagram

Figure 20-14 "Star-delta reversing starter" function circuit diagram

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

700 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Example circuits
20.8 "Dahlander" circuit diagram

20.8 "Dahlander" circuit diagram

20.8.1 "Dahlander" circuit diagram

Figure 20-15 "Dahlander" circuit diagram

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 701
Example circuits
20.8 "Dahlander" circuit diagram

20.8.2 "Dahlander" function circuit diagram

Figure 20-16 "Dahlander" function circuit diagram

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

702 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Example circuits
20.9 "Dahlander reversing starter" circuit diagram

20.9 "Dahlander reversing starter" circuit diagram

20.9.1 "Dahlander reversing starter" circuit diagram

Figure 20-17 "Dahlander reversing starter" circuit diagram

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 703
Example circuits
20.9 "Dahlander reversing starter" circuit diagram

20.9.2 "Dahlander reversing starter" function circuit diagram

Figure 20-18 "Dahlander reversing starter" function circuit diagram (1/2)

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

704 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Example circuits
20.9 "Dahlander reversing starter" circuit diagram

Figure 20-19 "Dahlander reversing starter" function circuit diagram (2/2)

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 705
Example circuits
20.10 "Pole-changing starter" example circuit

20.10 "Pole-changing starter" example circuit

20.10.1 "Pole-changing starter" circuit diagram

Figure 20-20 "Pole-changing starter" circuit diagram

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

706 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Example circuits
20.10 "Pole-changing starter" example circuit

20.10.2 "Pole-changing starter" function circuit diagram

Figure 20-21 "Pole-changing starter" function circuit diagram

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 707
Example circuits
20.11 "Pole-changing reversing starter" circuit example

20.11 "Pole-changing reversing starter" circuit example

20.11.1 "Pole-changing reversing starter" circuit diagram

Figure 20-22 "Pole-changing reversing starter" circuit diagram

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

708 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Example circuits
20.11 "Pole-changing reversing starter" circuit example

20.11.2 "Pole-changing reversing starter" function circuit diagram

Figure 20-23 "Pole-changing reversing starter" function circuit diagram (1/2)

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 709
Example circuits
20.11 "Pole-changing reversing starter" circuit example

Figure 20-24 "Pole-changing reversing starter" function circuit diagram (2/2)

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

710 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Example circuits
20.12 "Solenoid valve" example circuit

20.12 "Solenoid valve" example circuit

20.12.1 "Solenoid valve" circuit diagram

Figure 20-25 "Solenoid valve" circuit diagram

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 711
Example circuits
20.12 "Solenoid valve" example circuit

20.12.2 "Solenoid valve" function circuit diagram

Figure 20-26 "Solenoid valve" function circuit diagram

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

712 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Example circuits
20.13 "Positioner" example circuit

20.13 "Positioner" example circuit

20.13.1 "Positioner 1" circuit diagram

Figure 20-27 "Positioner 1" circuit diagram

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 713
Example circuits
20.13 "Positioner" example circuit

20.13.2 "Positioner 1" function circuit diagram

Figure 20-28 "Positioner 1" function circuit diagram

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

714 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Example circuits
20.13 "Positioner" example circuit

20.13.3 "Positioner 2" circuit diagram

Figure 20-29 "Positioner 2" circuit diagram

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 715
Example circuits
20.13 "Positioner" example circuit

20.13.4 "Positioner 2" function circuit diagram

Figure 20-30 "Positioner 2" function circuit diagram

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

716 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Example circuits
20.13 "Positioner" example circuit

20.13.5 "Positioner 3" circuit diagram

Figure 20-31 "Positioner 3" circuit diagram

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 717
Example circuits
20.13 "Positioner" example circuit

20.13.6 "Positioner 3" function circuit diagram

Figure 20-32 "Positioner 3" function circuit diagram

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

718 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Example circuits
20.13 "Positioner" example circuit

20.13.7 "Positioner 4" circuit diagram

Figure 20-33 "Positioner 4" circuit diagram

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 719
Example circuits
20.13 "Positioner" example circuit

20.13.8 "Positioner 4" function circuit diagram

Figure 20-34 "Positioner 4" function circuit diagram

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

720 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Example circuits
20.13 "Positioner" example circuit

20.13.9 "Positioner 5" circuit diagram

Figure 20-35 "Positioner 5" circuit diagram

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 721
Example circuits
20.13 "Positioner" example circuit

20.13.10 "Positioner 5" function circuit diagram

Figure 20-36 "Positioner 5" function circuit diagram

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

722 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Example circuits
20.14 "Soft starter" (3RW402, 3RW403, 3RW404) example circuit

20.14 "Soft starter" (3RW402, 3RW403, 3RW404) example circuit

20.14.1 Circuit diagram "Soft starter" (example 3RW402, 3RW403, 3RW404)

Figure 20-37 Circuit diagram "Soft starter" (example 3RW402, 3RW403, 3RW404)

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 723
Example circuits
20.14 "Soft starter" (3RW402, 3RW403, 3RW404) example circuit

20.14.2 Function circuit diagram "Soft starter" (example 3RW402, 3RW403, 3RW404)

Figure 20-38 Function circuit diagram "Soft starter" (example 3RW402, 3RW403, 3RW404)

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

724 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Example circuits
20.15 "Soft starter" (3RW405, 3RW407) example circuit

20.15 "Soft starter" (3RW405, 3RW407) example circuit

20.15.1 Circuit diagram "Soft starter" (example 3RW405, 3RW407)

Figure 20-39 Circuit diagram "Soft starter" (example 3RW405, 3RW407)

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 725
Example circuits
20.15 "Soft starter" (3RW405, 3RW407) example circuit

20.15.2 Function circuit diagram "Soft starter" (example 3RW405, 3RW407)

Figure 20-40 Function circuit diagram "Soft starter" (example 3RW405, 3RW407)

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

726 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Example circuits
20.16 Circuit diagram "Soft starter with reversing contactor" (3RW402, 3RW403, 3RW404)

20.16 Circuit diagram "Soft starter with reversing contactor" (3RW402,

3RW403, 3RW404)
20.16.1 Circuit diagram "Soft starter with reversing contactor" (3RW402, 3RW403,
3RW404)

Figure 20-41 Circuit diagram "Soft starter with reversing contactor" (3RW402, 3RW403, 3RW404)

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 727
Example circuits
20.16 Circuit diagram "Soft starter with reversing contactor" (3RW402, 3RW403, 3RW404)

20.16.2 Function circuit diagram of "Soft starter with reversing contactor" (3RW402,
3RW403, 3RW404)

Figure 20-42 Function circuit diagram of "Soft starter with reversing contactor" (3RW402, 3RW403,
3RW404)

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

728 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Example circuits
20.17 Example circuit "Soft starter with reversing contactor" (3RW405, 3RW407)

20.17 Example circuit "Soft starter with reversing contactor" (3RW405,

3RW407)
20.17.1 Circuit diagram "Soft starter with reversing contactor" (3RW405, 3RW407)

Figure 20-43 Circuit diagram "Soft starter with reversing contactor" (3RW405, 3RW407)

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 729
Example circuits
20.17 Example circuit "Soft starter with reversing contactor" (3RW405, 3RW407)

20.17.2 Function circuit diagram "Soft starter with reversing contactor" (3RW405,
3RW407)

Figure 20-44 Function circuit diagram "Soft starter with reversing contactor" (3RW405, 3RW407)

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

730 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Example circuits
20.18 Example circuit "Direct-on-line starter for 1-phase loads"

20.18 Example circuit "Direct-on-line starter for 1-phase loads"

20.18.1 Circuit diagram "Direct-on-line starter for 1-phase loads"

Figure 20-45 Circuit diagram "Direct-on-line starter for 1-phase loads"

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 731
Example circuits
20.18 Example circuit "Direct-on-line starter for 1-phase loads"

20.18.2 Function circuit diagram "Direct-on-line starter for 1-phase loads"

Figure 20-46 "Direct starter for 1-phase loads" function circuit diagram

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

732 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
Safety and commissioning information for EEx areas 21
In this chapter
In this chapter you will find safety and commissioning information for hazardous areas. It is
imperative that you observe this information for the protection of any motors in hazardous
areas.

Target groups
This chapter addresses the following target groups:
● Planners and configuring engineers
● Commissioning engineers
● Service and maintenance personnel

Required knowledge
You will require the following knowledge:
● Explosion protection
● IEC 60079-14 / EN 60079-14 / DIN VDE 0165-1 Electrical equipment for locations with
explosive gas atmosphere - Electrical installations in hazardous areas (except mines)
● IEC 60079-17/EN 60079-17/DIN VDE 0165-10-1 Electrical equipment for locations with
explosive gas atmosphere - Testing and maintenance of electrical installations in
hazardous areas (except mines)
● IEC 61241-14/DIN VDE 0165-2 Electrical equipment for use in the presence of
combustible dust - Selection and installation
● IEC 61241-17/DIN VDE 0165-10-2 Electrical equipment for use in the presence of
combustible dust - Inspection and maintenance of electrical installations in hazardous
areas (other than mines)
● VDE 0118 Erection of electrical installations in mines
● Betriebssicherheitsverordnung - BetrSichV (German Ordinance on Industrial Safety and
Health)

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 733
Safety and commissioning information for EEx areas
21.1 Information and standards

21.1 Information and standards

Information and standards

Type of protection EEx e and EEx d:
The overload protection and the thermistor motor protection of the SIMOCODE pro system
comply with the requirements for overload protection of explosion-proof motors of the
following types of protection:
● EEx d "explosion-proof enclosure," e.g. according to DIN EN 50018 or DIN EN 60079
● EEx e "increased safety," e.g. according to DIN EN 50019 or DIN EN 60079-7.
Increased danger in hazardous areas means it is necessary to carefully observe the
following notes and standards:
● IEC 60079-14 / EN 60079-14 / DIN VDE 0165-1 Electrical equipment for locations with
explosive gas atmosphere - Electrical installations in hazardous areas (except mines)
● IEC 60079-17/EN 60079-17/DIN VDE 0165-10-1 Electrical equipment for locations with
explosive gas atmosphere - Testing and maintenance of electrical installations in
hazardous areas (except mines)
● IEC 61241-14/DIN VDE 0165-2 Electrical equipment for use in the presence of
combustible dust - Selection and installation
● IEC 61241-17/DIN VDE 0165-10-2 Electrical equipment for use in the presence of
combustible dust - Inspection and maintenance of electrical installations in hazardous
areas (other than mines)
● VDE 0118 Erection of electrical installations in mines
● German Ordinance on Industrial Safety and Health - BetrSichV.
All 3UF7 devices are approved under Device Group I, Category "M2" (mining) and Device
Group II, Category 2 in the area "GD" (areas in which explosive gas, steam, fog, air mixtures
and inflammable dust are present):
● BVS 06 ATEX F 001 I (M2) *)
● BVS 06 ATEX F 001 II (2) GD *).
*)

Note
This safety and commissioning information is also valid for devices with certificate numbers
BVS 04 ATEX F 003.

The devices are suitable for protecting motors in potentially explosive areas in accordance
with the above standards.

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

734 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Safety and commissioning information for EEx areas
21.1 Information and standards

Tests other than those legally stipulated (Ordinance on Industrial Safety and Health) are not
required.

WARNING
Qualified personnel required
All work involved in connecting, commissioning and maintenance must be carried out by
qualified, responsible personnel.
Improper handling may result in serious personal injury and considerable material damage.

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 735
Safety and commissioning information for EEx areas
21.2 Set-up and commissioning

21.2 Set-up and commissioning

21.2.1 Set-up and commissioning

Note
Please observe the following SIMOCODE pro operating instructions (enclosed with the
devices):

Device Order No.

Basic unit 3ZX1012-0UF70-3AA1
Digital module 3ZX1012-0UF73-1AA1
DM-F Local fail-safe digital module 3ZX1012-0UF73-1BA1
DM-F PROFIsafe fail-safe digital module 3ZX1012-0UF73-3BA1
Current measuring module 3ZX1012-0UF71-1AA1
Current / voltage measuring module 3ZX1012-0UF77-1BA1
You will also find the operating instructions for SIMOCODE pro at Manuals/operating instructions
(http://www.siemens.com/sirius/manuals)

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

736 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Safety and commissioning information for EEx areas
21.2 Set-up and commissioning

21.2.2 Setting the rated motor current

Notes/examples
Set the 3UF7 to the rated motor current (according to the type plate or design test certificate
of the motor).

Note
Pay attention to the trip class or the tripping characteristic of the 3UF7.
Choose the trip class so that the motor is thermally protected even with a blocked rotor.
The motor, cables, and contactor must be dimensioned for the selected trip class.

Note
Set the response of the overload protection to "Trip"!

Example
Motor 500 V, 50 / 60 Hz, 110 kW, 156 A, temperature class T3, time TE = 11 s, IA / Is = 5.5:

Figure 21-1 Tripping conditions of the EExe motor, selected: CLASS 10

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 737
Safety and commissioning information for EEx areas
21.2 Set-up and commissioning

21.2.3 SIMOCODE pro with thermistor input

On 3UF70, you can use temperature sensor type A with a characteristic according to
IEC 60947-8 (DIN VDE 0660, part 303), DIN 44081 and DIN 44082.
Depending on the number of sensors, the following tripping and restart temperatures apply.

Figure 21-2 Typical characteristic curve of a type A sensor (logarithmic scale)

Depending on the number of sensors, the following tripping and restart temperatures will
result based on the TNF (rated response temperature of the sensor):

Table 21- 1 Tripping and restart temperatures

Tripping temperature Restart temperature

3 sensors TNF +4 K TNF -7 K
6 sensors TNF -5 K TNF -20 K

The temperatures listed are limit values.

CAUTION
Response setting
Set the response for the activated thermistor to "Trip"!

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

738 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Safety and commissioning information for EEx areas
21.2 Set-up and commissioning

21.2.4 Sensor circuit wiring

NOTICE
Installing the measuring circuit cables
Lay the measuring circuit cables as separate control cables. It is not permissible to use the
cores of the motor supply cable or other main supply cables.
Shielded control cables should be used if extremely inductive or capacitive interference is
expected as a result of power cables routed in parallel.

Maximum cable lengths of the sensor circuit cables:

Table 21- 2 Maximum cable length of the sensor circuit cables

Cable cross section Cable lengths (single) at the thermistor input

Without short-circuit detection With short-circuit detection 1)
2.5 mm2 2800 m 250 m
1.5 mm2 1500 m 150 m
0.5 mm2 500 m 50 m
1) A short circuit in the sensor circuit will be detected up to these maximum cable lengths.

Evaluating the short-circuit detection of the sensor cable is recommended.

If the short-circuit detection of the sensor cable is not evaluated, when commissioning or
after modifications / maintenance work (assembly, disassembly) of the system, the sensor
resistor must be measured using a suitable measuring instrument.

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 739
Safety and commissioning information for EEx areas
21.2 Set-up and commissioning

21.2.5 Short-circuit protection for type of coordination 2 according to IEC 60947-4-1

Short-circuit protection must be carried out by separately arranged overcurrent protection
devices.

NOTICE
Fuse protection of the contactor for type of coordination 2
When combining with other contactors, observe the respective maximum fuse protection of
the contactor for type of coordination 2.

21.2.6 Cable protection

NOTICE
Cable cross sections
Avoid impermissibly high cable surface temperatures by correctly dimensioning the cross
sections!
Choose a sufficient cable cross section, especially for heavy-starting motors CLASS 20 to
CLASS 40 (see Chapter Short-circuit protection with fuses for motor feeders for short-circuit
currents up to 100 kA and 690 V (Page 678)).

21.2.7 Test

Testing - general information

SIMOCODE pro offers users a convenient method of checking the complete motor protection
chain (incl. actuators and sensors such as contactors, circuit breakers, thermistors). This can
be used, for example, for testing according to IEC 60079-17. The test encompasses a full
function test. For this purpose, all three test phases are to be carried out (hardware test,
current feedback, motor protection tripping, see below). The test can be carried out using the
"TEST/RESET" buttons provided, or automatically via the bus. Due to existing self-test
routines, tripping currents do not need to be injected in order to carry out testing.

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

740 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Safety and commissioning information for EEx areas
21.2 Set-up and commissioning

Test phases
● Phase 1: Hardware test / lamp test (0 to 2 s):
The hardware (e.g. the thermistor electronics) is tested, all LEDs and displays are
activated, including the lamp control. Contactor controls remain unchanged.
● Phase 2: Hardware test results (2 s to 5 s):
If there is a fault, the "HW fault basic unit" fault is triggered.
If there is no fault:
– The "GEN. FAULT" LED flashes when no main current is flowing.
– The "GEN. FAULT" LED flickers if main current is flowing in all three phases
(exception: with a "1-phase load" in one phase).
● Phase 3: Relay test (> 5 s):
If testing is carried out with tripping, the contactor controls are deactivated.
The following table shows the test phases performed when the "TEST/RESET" button is
pressed for the required length of time:

Table 21- 3 States of the status LEDs / contactor controls during testing

Test State Without main current With main current

phase OK Fault *) OK Fault
Hardware test / lamp test
<2s "DEVICE" LED orange green orange green
"GEN.FAULT" LED
Contactor control Unchanged Unchanged Unchanged Unchanged
Show QL *)
Results of the hardware test / lamp test
2-5s "DEVICE" LED green red green red
"GEN.FAULT" LED
Contactor control Unchanged Deactivated Unchanged Deactivated
Relay test
>5s "DEVICE" LED green red green red
"GEN.FAULT" LED
Contactor control Deactivated Deactivated Deactivated Deactivated

LED illuminated/switched on
LED flashing
LED flickering
LED off
*) "Fault" only displayed after 2 s

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 741
Safety and commissioning information for EEx areas
21.2 Set-up and commissioning

21.2.8 Further safety guidelines

WARNING
Safety information for DM-F Local and DM-F PROFIsafe fail-safe digital modules
Pay attention to the safety notes in manual "Failsafe Digital Modules SIMOCODE pro
Safety" manual (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/50564852).

CAUTION
Using relay outputs for the protection function
For the protection function, only the relay outputs of the 3UF70 basic unit, of a monostable
3UF730 digital module or of a fail-safe 3UF733 expansion module may be used!

WARNING
The 3UF7 is not suitable for installation in hazardous areas
The device may only be installed in a control cabinet with the minimum degree of protection
of IP 4x.
If installed in hazardous areas, there must be no ignition hazard from the 3UF7. Appropriate
measures must be taken (e.g. encapsulation).

WARNING
Electrical isolation required
When using SIMOCODE pro devices with a 24 V DC control voltage, electrical separation
must be ensured using a battery or a safety transformer according to EN 61558-2-6.

Note
The 3UF7 is not suitable for load-side operation on frequency converters.

21.2.9 Ambient conditions

Permissible ambient temperature range:
● Storage / transportation: -40 ℃ to +80 ℃
● Operation: -25 °C to +60 °C; OPD: 0 ℃ to +60 ℃.

21.2.10 Safety data

● SIL (IEC 61508): SIL 1
● PFDavg (IEC 61508) < 3.0 * 10-2
● Repeat test: DIN EN 60079-17, Section 4.4

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

742 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Safety and commissioning information for EEx areas
21.3 Maintenance and repairs

21.3 Maintenance and repairs

These devices are maintenance-free.

WARNING
Repairs
Repairs to the device may only be carried out by the manufacturer.

21.4 Warranty

Note
To meet the conditions of the warranty, you must observe the safety and commissioning
instructions from the following operating instructions.
You will also find the operating instructions for SIMOCODE pro at Manuals/operating
instructions (http://www.siemens.com/sirius/manuals)

Device Order No.

Basic unit 3ZX1012-0UF70-3AA1
Operator panel 3ZX1012-0UF72-1AA1
Operator panel adapter 3ZX1012-0UF78-2BA1
Operator panel with display 3ZX3012-0UF72-2AA1
Digital module 3ZX1012-0UF73-1AA1
DM-F Local fail-safe digital module 3ZX1012-0UF73-1BA1
DM-F PROFIsafe fail-safe digital module 3ZX1012-0UF73-3BA1
Expansion modules 3ZX1012-0UF75-1BA1
Current measuring module 3ZX1012-0UF71-1AA1
Current / voltage measuring module 3ZX1012-0UF77-1BA1
Door adapter 3ZX1012-0UF78-1AA1
Decoupling module 3ZX1012-0UF71-5BA1
Initialization module 3ZX1012-0UF70-2AA1

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 743
Safety and commissioning information for EEx areas
21.5 Further information

21.5 Further information

You will find further information on the Internet:
● Internet (http://www.siemens.com/simocode)
● Information and Download Center (http://www.siemens.com/sirius/infomaterial)
● Product Information System (ProdIS) (http://www.siemens.com/sirius/support)
● Service and support (http://www.siemens.com/sirius/technical-assistance)
● ATEX (http://www.siemens.com/sirius/atex)
● Certificates (http://www.siemens.com/sirius/approvals)

See also
SIMOCODE pro operating instructions (http://www.siemens.com/sirius/manuals)
"Failsafe Digital Modules SIMOCODE pro Safety" manual
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/50564852)

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

744 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
Compartment identification (PROFINET) 22
In this chapter
This chapter provides information about how SIMOCODE pro is operated with an
initialization module that is permanently installed in the switchgear.

Target groups
This chapter addresses the following target groups:
● Configuring engineers
● Commissioning engineers
● Technicians
● Service and maintenance personnel

Required knowledge
You will require the following knowledge:
● Basic general knowledge about SIMOCODE pro
● Knowledge about the "SIMOCODE ES" software

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 745
Compartment identification (PROFINET)
22.1 Introduction to compartment identification

22.1 Introduction to compartment identification

Applications and advantages of compartment identification

The compartment identification described in this chapter is mainly used in application in
which SIMOCODE pro is used in a withdrawable motor control center (MCC).
In withdrawable motor control centers, all components belonging to the motor feeder are
grouped together as one unit in a switchgear-specific enclosure. In this way, a complete
withdrawable module can be replaced very quickly and without isolating the MCC if a
component is defective.
This principle is very often used in the various branches of the process industry. That is why
a SIMOCODE pro with such a design is used in very many of its applications.
With the compartment identification mechanism, programming a SIMOCODE pro device
when a withdrawable module is replaced is completely automated.
The initialization module (3UF7 902-0AA00-0) permanently installed in the switchgear
contains a copy of the SIMOCODE device parameters and the device addressing, which are
taken over completely automatically by the new SIMOCODE device after replacement of the
withdrawable module.
In the future, no special knowledge of SIMOCODE will be necessary to replace withdrawable
modules and at the same time the risk of incorrect parameterization in the SIMOCODE
device is also reduced.

Figure 22-1 Compartment identification

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

746 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Compartment identification (PROFINET)
22.1 Introduction to compartment identification

A configuration such as the one shown above ensures,

● that, during device start-up of SIMOCODE pro V PN, the parameters, the device
addressing, and the I&M data of the initialization module are loaded into the SIMOCODE
basic unit
● when parameterizing SIMOCODE pro, the parameters, the device addressing, and I&M
data are additionally also written into the initialization module.
This makes it simple for a user to change a withdrawable module without having to deal with
further details of parameterization or address assignment.
The advantages of operation with a permanently installed initialization module in the
switchgear:
● Device parameters and device addressing are automatically stored in the initialization
module in the motor control center and loaded form this initialization module (initialized).
● It is possible to replace an MCC motor feeder without special knowledge of SIMOCODE
pro.
● Manual addressing and parameterization are no longer necessary. The simplifies
operation of the switchgear.

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 747
Compartment identification (PROFINET)
22.2 Hardware and software requirements for compartment identification

22.2 Hardware and software requirements for compartment identification

Basis unit versions

The "compartment identification" function is supported by the SIMOCODE pro V PN basic
unit as from product version E01, firmware version V1.0.

NOTICE
Current measuring module required
To operate SIMOCODE pro with an initialization module, a current measuring module must
be connected to the basic unit.

Version of the operator panel with display

The "compartment identification" function is supported by operator panels with display as
from product version *E07*.

SIMOCODE ES version
The "compartment identification" function is supported as from version
"SIMOCODE ES 2007+SP4."

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

748 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Compartment identification (PROFINET)
22.3 Operating compartment identification

22.3 Operating compartment identification

Safety information

Note
Start-up with an initialization module
During device start-up with an initialization module, there must be no memory module in the
system interface of the SIMOCODE basic unit.
If there is a memory module in the system interface of the SIMOCODE pro basic unit,
• the "Fault - parameterization" fault message will be output
• the "Gen.Fault" LED will flash red.

Note
Contacting of the initialization module
The initialization module must be contacted before or together with the voltage supply of the
basic unit.

Loading parameters from the initialization module

As soon as contact has been established with the initialization module and the supply
voltage of the basic unit has been switched on, the parameters of the initialization module
are loaded into the basic unit. The previous parameterization of the basic unit is overwritten
and the compartment identification is activated (see also the following topic "Autoactivation
of compartment identification").
You can also track successful read-in of the parameters from the initialization module with
the "initialization module read in" event in the SIMOCODE ES online functions.

Note
Connection of a SIMOCODE pro V PN basic unit with an empty initialization module
Because a SIMOCODE basic unit does not find any valid parameters on start-up with an
empty initialization module, "Trip - Parameterization" is signaled. The "General Fault" LED of
the basic unit flashes red.
Reparameterization of the device, e.g. with SIMOCODE ES, writes valid parameters to the
basic unit and the initialization module again.
You can then acknowledge the fault message.

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 749
Compartment identification (PROFINET)
22.3 Operating compartment identification

Saving parameters onto the initialization module

If an initialization module is connected to a SIMOCODE pro V PN basic unit, all parameters
that are saved to the SIMOCODE pro V PN basic unit, e.g. SIMOCODE ES, are
automatically copied into the initialization module.
You can also track successful writing of the parameters into the initialization module with the
"initialization module programmed" event in the SIMOCODE ES online functions.

Parameter settings in the "SIMOCODE ES" software.

Technologically, the initialization module is handled like an extension module of SIMOCODE
pro V PN.
To use the mechanism of compartment identification, choose the "initialization module"
option in the "Device configuration" dialog box in the "SIMOCODE ES" software.

Autoactivation of compartment identification

If a SIMOCODE pro V PN basic unit detects a connected initialization module during device
start-up, it will automatically load the parameters stored in it and will start with these
parameters.
At the same time, the "Initialization module" parameter of the device configuration in the
SIMOCODE pro V PN basic unit is activated so that on each new device start-up an
initialization module is expected.

Note
Device start-up when the "initialization module" parameter is activated
If no initialization module is detected during device start-up, SIMOCODE pro will signal "Trip
- Configuration fault." The "General Fault" LED of the basic unit flashes.
The basic unit can only be reset when the configuration error has been remedied by
connecting an initialization module or when a configuration has been loaded into the device
without an initialization module.

Deactivation of the compartment identification

To prevent SIMOCODE pro V PN from expecting an initialization module during device start-
up, you clear the "Initialization module" check mark in the "Device configuration" dialog box.
In this case, no initialization module must be connected to the SIMOCODE pro V PN when
this configuration is downloaded into a SIMOCODE pro V PN basic unit.
A further way of deactivating the compartment identification is to reset the SIMOCODE pro V
PN basic unit to the factory settings. Resetting is performed in the "Commands" dialog box.
The parameter settings can then also be reloaded into the SIMOCODE pro V PN basic unit.

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

750 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Compartment identification (PROFINET)
22.3 Operating compartment identification

Commands

"Initialization module write protection on" command:

All contents of the initialization module are write-protected. This prevents any inadvertent
changes to the contents of the initialization module and any parameter changes for the
connected SIMOCODE pro V PN basic unit. An inadvertent change of parameters for a
motor feeder is prevented. SIMOCODE pro signals successful execution of the command
with the "initialization module write-protected" event.

"Initialization module write protection off" command:

With this command, you can remove the write protection of the initialization module.

"Initialization module write protection identification data on" command:

The device addressing stored in the initialization module and the I&M data (identification &
maintenance) are write-protected. With this command, you can
● prevent inadvertent changes to the PROFINET parameters (e.g., device names) and the
I&M data for the motor feeder.
● continue to make parameter changes in the initialization module as well as in the
SIMOCODE pro V PN basic unit if the address data and I&M data are identical to the
data already contained in the device when parameters are downloaded
SIMOCODE pro signals the successful execution of the command with the "initialization
module identification data write-protected" event.

"Initialization module write protection identification data off" command:

With this command, you can remove the write protection of the identification data of the
initialization module.

"Delete initialization module data" command:

With this command
● all contents of the initialization module are deleted
● The initialization module is reset to the as-delivered state.
SIMOCODE pro signals the successful deletion with the "Initialization module cleared" event.
On start-up with an empty initialization module, the basic unit signals "Fault -
Parameterization". The "General Fault" LED of the basic unit flashes red.
Reparameterization of the device, e.g., with SIMOCODE ES, writes valid parameters to the
basic unit and the initialization module again. You can then acknowledge the fault message.

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 751
Compartment identification (PROFINET)
22.3 Operating compartment identification

Events
You can check the states of the initialization module by the following events (in the
"Faults/warnings/events" dialog box of the "SIMOCODE ES" software):
● Initialization module write-protected
● Initialization module write-protected, parameter changes not allowed
● Initialization module identification data write-protected
● Initialization module read in
● Initialization module programmed
● Initialization module cleared.
See Chapter Alarm, fault, and system events for compartment identification (Page 757) or
Chapter Alarm, fault, and system events (Page 513)).

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

752 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Compartment identification (PROFINET)
22.4 Mounting, wiring, interfaces, compartment identification

22.4 Mounting, wiring, interfaces, compartment identification

Mounting the initialization module in the switchgear

Mounting the initialization module with the mounting lugs in the switchgear

Figure 22-2 Mounting the initialization module

Wiring the initialization module

Unlike the other expansion components of the system, the initialization module does not
have a connector. It is intended for installation in the fixed part of the switchgear. Connect
the initialization module to the control connector of a motor control center on the switchgear
side using the four connecting wires.
On the mating side, there is a withdrawable module to whose control connectors the
corresponding four connecting wires of the Y connecting cable are connected (see figure).
Connect each of the wires that are of the same color on the initialization module and the Y
connecting cable.

NOTICE
Note the correct colors!
Incorrect wiring can destroy the initialization module.

Note
Cable routing
When wiring the initialization module make sure the individual conductors are routed as
close together as possible (ribbon cable).
The entire length of the connecting cable, including the wiring to the initialization module,
must be exceed 3 m.

NOTICE
Maximum length of connecting cables
The total length of all connecting cables must not exceed 3 m on either of the system
interfaces of the basic unit!

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 753
Compartment identification (PROFINET)
22.4 Mounting, wiring, interfaces, compartment identification

Figure 22-3 Wiring the initialization module

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

754 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Compartment identification (PROFINET)
22.4 Mounting, wiring, interfaces, compartment identification

Connecting the Y connecting cable to the basic unit and to the current measuring module or
to the current / voltage measuring module
● Connect the connector in the middle of the Y connecting cable (1) on the basic unit
● Connect the connector at the end of the Y connecting cable (2) to a current measuring
module or current / voltage measuring module
● If you are using a decoupling module:
– Connect the connector at the end of the initialization cable (2) on the decoupling
module
– Connect the decoupling module with a system interface connecting cable to the
current measuring module or current / voltage measuring module

Figure 22-4 Connecting the Y connecting cable to the basic unit and to the current measuring
module or to the current / voltage measuring module

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 755
Compartment identification (PROFINET)
22.5 Commissioning and service compartment identification

22.5 Commissioning and service compartment identification

General safety information

Note
Operating instructions
During commissioning and service work, also heed the relevant "Initialization module"
operating instructions!
You will find the operating instructions for SIMOCODE pro at Manuals/operating instructions
(http://www.siemens.com/industrial-controls/manuals)

Commissioning the initialization module

Sequence for initial start-up of a new SIMOCODE pro basic unit and a new initialization
module

Step Description
1 Connect the SIMOCODE pro V PN basic unit to the planned expansion modules and to the
initialization module.
2 Switch on the power supply. The following LED states result:
• The "DEVICE" LED lights up green
• The "BUS" LED lights up or flashes green when the bus is connected
• The "GEN.FAULT" LED flashes red.
At the same time, the "Fault - Parameterization" fault message is output.
3 Parameterize SIMOCODE pro with a PC with the SIMOCODE ES software installed. For this,
connect the PC / PG to the system interface with the PC cable (see the figure below) or to
the basic unit via "PROFINET."
4 Acknowledge the pending fault either locally on the device or via the SIMOCODE ES
software by means of the "TEST/RESET button".

Sequence for initial start-up of a new SIMOCODE pro V PN basic unit and a new initialization module

Figure 22-5 Connecting a PC to the SIMOCODE pro V PN basic unit

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

756 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Compartment identification (PROFINET)
22.6 Alarm, fault, and system events for compartment identification

22.6 Alarm, fault, and system events for compartment identification

Events

Table 22- 1 Alarm, fault, and system events

Event Description Troubleshooting

Initialization module write-protected The initialization module is completely Deactivate write protection of the
write-protected. initialization module
Initialization module write-protected, The initialization module is completely Deactivate write protection of the
parameter changes not allowed or partially write-protected. initialization module
Reparameterization of SIMOCODE pro
is denied because the initialization
module is write-protected.
Initialization module identification data The device addressing and the I&M • Select a parameterization with
write-protected data in the initialization module are identical addressing and I&M data
write-protected. Parameterization will
only be accepted by SIMOCODE if the • Deactivate the partial write
new parameter set is identical to the protection of the initialization
data stored in the initialization module module
at that time.
Initialization module read in The parameters of the initialization -
module were read into SIMOCODE.
Initialization module programmed The reparameterization was accepted -
in the initialization module.
Initialization module cleared The initialization module was cleared -
and is now back in the as-delivered
state.

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 757
Compartment identification (PROFINET)
22.7 Dimension drawings compartment identification

22.7 Dimension drawings compartment identification

Figure 22-6 Dimension drawing initialization module

Figure 22-7 Dimension drawing Y connecting cable

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

758 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
List of abbreviations A
A.1 List of abbreviations

Overview

Table A- 1 Guide to the abbreviations

Abbreviation Term
AM Analog module
API Application Process Identifier
AS Alarm switch
ATEX "Atmosphère explosible" according to ATEX Directive 94/9/EC
AWG American Wire Gauge
Acycl. Acyclic
OP Operator panel
OPD Operator Panel with Display for SIMOCODE pro
OPO Operational protection OFF
CP Communications Processor
CPU Central Processing Unit
DCM Decoupling module
DIP Dual In-Line Package
DM Digital module
DM-F Fail-safe digital module (DM-FL or DM-FP)
DM-FL DM-F Local fail-safe digital module (F Local digital module)
DM-FP DM-F PROFIsafe fail-safe digital module (F-PROFIsafe digital module)
TO Torque open
TC Torque closed
DP Distributed peripherals
DS Data record
DTM Device Type Manager
EEx European Norm EXplosion-proof: Specifies the protection classes for categorizing motors for use in
hazardous areas.
ex Explosion-proof
EM Ground-fault module
EMF Electromotive force
EMC Electromagnetic compatibility
F-CPU Fail-safe CPU (controller)
FMS Fieldbus Message Specification
BU Basic unit

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 759
List of abbreviations
A.1 List of abbreviations

Abbreviation Term
GSD Generic station description files
HMI Human-Machine Interface
AUXS Auxiliary switch
I&M Identification and Maintenance
InM Initialization module
IT Isolation-Terre (isolation ground)
IM Current measuring module
MAC Media Access Control
MLFB Machine-readable product designation
MRP Media Redundancy Protocol
NTC Negative temperature coefficient (resistance dependent on temperature)
NTP Network Time Protocol
OB Organization block
OSSD Part of the electro-sensitive protective equipment (ESPE) that is connected to the machine control
system and that switches to the OFF state if the sensor part is tripped during operation for the intended
purpose.
PCS Process Control System
PDM Process Device Manager
PELV Protective Extra Low Voltage
PFD Probability of failure of demand: Probability of dangerous failure of a safety function on demand
PFDavg Mean probability of dangerous failure of a safety function on demand
PFHD Probability of dangerous failure per hour: Average probability of hazardous failure occurring each hour
PG Programming device
PL Performance Level
PCS Process Control System
PROFINET Process Field Network
PTC Positive temperature coefficient (resistance dependent on temperature)
PZ Pozidriv
FB Feedback
FO Feedback open
TPF Test position feedback
FC Feedback closed
SELV Safety Extra Low Voltage
GF General fault, control function
SIL Safety Integrity Level
SFB System function block
SFC System function
SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol
PLC Programmable logic controller
Th Thermistor
TM Temperature module

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

760 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 List of abbreviations
A.1 List of abbreviations

Abbreviation Term
TOFDT Total one fault delay time (maximum response time when error is present)
TWCDT Total worst case delay time (maximum response time in error-free state)
UA Unified Architecture
UM Current / voltage measuring module
UVO Undervoltage off
USI User Structure Identifier
LC Local control
Cycl. Cyclic

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 761
List of abbreviations
A.1 List of abbreviations

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

762 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
Appendix B
B.1 Correction sheet

Correction sheet
Have you noticed any errors while reading this manual? If so, please use this form to tell us
about them. We welcome comments and suggestions for improvement.
Fax response

From (please complete):

To Name
SIEMENS AG
DF CP PRM IM 2 Company / Department
92220 Amberg / Germany
Address

_________________________________________________________________________________
Fax: +49 (0)9621-80-3337

Manual title:
Errors, comments, and suggestions for improvements

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 763
Appendix
B.1 Correction sheet

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

764 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
Glossary

Analog module (AM)

The analog module provides a way of optionally extending the basic unit with analog inputs
and outputs (0/4 mA - 20 mA). This makes it possible to measure and monitor any arbitrary
process variables which can be mapped onto a 0/4 mA to 20 mA signal. The automation
system has free access to the measured process variables.

ATEX
French abbreviation for "atmosphère explosible" (explosive atmosphere).
ATEX is used as a synonym for the two directives of the European Communities covering
explosion protection, i.e. the ATEX product directive 94/9/EC and the ATEX workplace
directive 1999/92/EC.

Basic unit (BU)

The basic unit is the fundamental component of the SIMOCODE pro system. It is always
necessary when SIMOCODE pro is used. It has an enclosure width of 45 mm and
detachable terminals
It contains all functions and requirements for motor protection, motor control, diagnostics,
and monitoring.

Baud rate
The baud rate is the speed at which data is transferred and indicates the number of
transmitted bits per second (baud rate = bit rate).

Bus
A common transmission path with which all stations are connected. It has two defined ends.

Cascade input
Safe, 1-channel input of a safety relay, e.g. DM-F LOCAL and DM-F PROFIsafe. Internally,
this input is evaluated like a sensor signal. If no voltage is present, the safety relay trips the
enabling circuits (outputs) in a safety-related way.

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 765
Glossary

Class
Unit for the trip class. Indicates the maximum tripping time in which SIMOCODE must trip at
a current that is 7.2 times the value of the set current Is in a cold state (motor protection
according to IEC 60947). If Class 10 is set for SIMOCODE pro, for example, it is ensured
that the (cold) motor will switch off after 10 seconds if a current occurs that is 7.2 times the
set current. The trip class can be set to 8 different settings ranging from Class 5 to Class 40.

Connecting cable
Connecting cables are necessary for connecting the individual basic units with their current
measuring modules and, if required, with their expansion modules or operator panels. They
are available in various versions and lengths (ribbon cable 0.025 m, 0.1 m, 0.3 m, 0.5 m;
round cable 0.5 m, 1.0 m, 2.5 m).
Notice
Maximum length of connecting cables
The total length of all connecting cables must not exceed 3 m per system!

Contactor
Electromagnetically operated low-voltage switch with only one position of rest; it cannot be
manually operated. Contactors can connect, carry, and disconnect currents in a circuit under
normal operating conditions, including operational overload. The contact system consists of
main and auxiliary contacts (NC, NO). Depending on the size of the contactor, the main
contacts can switch several hundred amps while the auxiliary contacts are only rated for
control currents of a few amps.

Control functions
Control functions (e.g. direct starters, reversing starters) are used for controlling load
feeders. They are characterized by the following important features:
● Monitoring the switch-on / switch-off process (no current flows in the main circuit without
the ON command)
● Monitoring the OFF state (no current flows in the main circuit without the ON command)
● Monitoring the ON status
● Tripping if a fault occurs.

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

766 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Glossary

Control stations
Control stations are places from which control commands are issued to the motor. The
"Control Stations" function block is used for administration, switching and prioritization of
these different control stations. SIMOCODE pro allows parallel administration of up to four
different control stations. Dependent on the control function, up to five different control
commands can be transmitted from every control station to SIMOCODE pro.
● Local control, in the direct vicinity of the motor. Control commands via pushbuttons.
● PLC/PCS, switching commands are issued by the automation system (remote).
● PC, control commands are issued via an operator control station or via PROFINET with
the SIMOCODE ES software.
● Operator panel / operator panel with display, control commands are issued via the
buttons of the operator panel / operator panel with display in the control cabinet door.

Cos phi monitoring

Cos phi monitoring monitors the load condition of inductive loads. The main field of
application is for asynchronous motors in 1-phase or 3-phase networks with loads that
fluctuate significantly. The measuring principle for the power factor (cos phi) is based on the
evaluation of the phase displacement between voltage and current in one phase.

Current / voltage measuring module (UM)

It allows a current / voltage measuring module to be used instead of a current measuring
module. In addition to measuring the motor current, current / voltage measuring modules
also enable:
● Monitoring voltages up to 690 V
● Calculation and monitoring of power and cos phi
● Monitoring of the phase sequence.

Current limit monitoring

Current limit monitoring is used for process monitoring. This enables incipient anomalies in
the system to be detected in good time. If a current limit is exceeded but is still below the
overload limit, it can, for example, indicate a dirty filter on a pump, or an increasingly
sluggish motor bearing. If the current limit is undershot, it can be the first sign of a worn-out
drive motor belt.

Current measuring module (IM)

Current measuring modules are used together with the basic unit. The current measuring
module must be selected according to the set current to be monitored (rated operating
current of the motor). The current measuring modules cover current ranges between 0.3 A
and 630 A, with intermediate transformers up to 820 A.

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 767
Glossary

Decoupling module
A module for connection in series upstream from a current / voltage measuring module at the
system interface when voltage and power measurements are implemented in non-grounded
networks.

Device name
Before an IO device can be addressed by an IO controller, it must have a device name
because the IP address is permanently assigned to the device name. In the case of
PROFINET, this method was chosen because names are easier to handle than complex IP
addresses.
Assignment of a device name for a specific IO device is comparable to setting the
PROFIBUS address on a DP slave.
An IO device does not have a device name when it is delivered. It can only be addressed by
an IO controller once a device name has been assigned to it, e.g. for transmission of the
configuration data (including the IP address) during startup or for exchanging useful data in
cyclic operation.

Digital module (DM)

Digital modules offer the possibility of increasing the type and number of binary inputs and
outputs on the basic unit to meet requirements. Up to two digital modules can be connected
to a basic unit. All versions can be combined with each other. In this way, SIMOCODE
pro V PN can be expanded to a maximum of twelve binary inputs and seven binary outputs.

DIP switch
Small switch used to make certain basic settings. The abbreviation stands for Dual In-line
Package, in other words a device package with two parallel rows of electrical connecting
pins.

DM-F Local and DM-F PROFIsafe digital modules

The DM-F Local and DM-F PROFIsafe fail-safe digital modules are used as safety relays in
EMERGENCY STOP devices in accordance with EN 418 and in safety circuits in
accordance with EN 60204 (11.98):
DM-F Local digital module:
For applications that require local safety-related tripping with EMERGENCY OFF buttons.
DM-F PROFIsafe digital module:
For applications that require decentralized safety-related tripping with EMERGENCY OFF
buttons. A fail-safe SIMATIC controller applies the logical connection between the
EMERGENCY OFF button and DM-F PROFIsafe digital module.

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

768 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Glossary

Door adapter
The door adaptor is necessary for making the system interface of a basic unit available at an
easily accessible location (e.g. front panel), thus enabling fast parameterization.

Emergency start
Emergency start deletes the thermal memory from SIMOCODE pro each time it is activated.
This allows the motor to be immediately restarted after an overload trip. This function can be
used to:
● Enable an immediate restart/reset after an overload trip
● Influence the thermal memory (motor model) during operation, if required.
Since the emergency start is edge-triggered, this function cannot permanently affect the
thermal motor model.

EMERGENCY STOP
Shutdown in case of an emergency according to EN 418 (ISO 13850).
An action in an emergency that is intended to stop a process or motion that would result in a
hazard.

EMERGENCY STOP command device

Contact block ("EMERGENCY STOP" mushroom pushbutton according to
EN EN 418 (ISO 13850), cable-operated switch with positive opening contacts according to
EN 60204-1) that causes the process, machine or plant to be stopped when actuated in
hazardous situations. This must have positive-opening contacts, be easy to reach and be
tamper-proof.

EMERGENCY STOP device

Protective device that is operated in response to an emergency according to
EN 418 (ISO 13850), EN 60204-1.

Enabling circuit
An enabling circuit is used to generate a safety-related output signal. From an external
viewpoint, enabling circuits act as NO contacts (however, in terms of functionality, safety-
related opening is always the most important aspect). A single enabling circuit that is
internally redundantly configured in the safety relay (two-channel) can be used for Category
3/4 according to EN 954-1 (ISO 13849-1).

European norm EXplosion safe (EEx)

Specifies the protection classes for categorizing motors for use in hazardous areas.

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 769
Glossary

Expansion modules
Expansion modules serve as optional additions for the SIMOCODE pro V PN device series.
The following expansion modules are available:
● Digital module (DM)
● Analog module (AM)
● Ground-fault module (EM)
● Temperature module (TM).
All expansion modules have the same design with an enclosure width of 22.5 mm. They are
equipped with 2 system interfaces (incoming/outgoing) and removable terminals.

F_WD_Time
Monitoring time in the fail-safe PROFIsafe option. A valid, current safety message frame
must be received from the F-CPU within this monitoring time. Otherwise, the PROFIsafe
option goes to the safe state.

Factory settings
The factory settings are used to reset all parameters of a device to the default settings to
which they were set at the factory. The factory settings can be restored using the "TEST /
RESET" button on the basic unit or via the SIMOCODE ES software.

Feedback circuit
A feedback circuit is used to monitor controlled actuators (e.g., relays or contactors with
positively driven contacts). The evaluation unit can only be activated if the feedback circuit is
closed.
Note:
The NC contacts of the relays to be monitored are connected in series and integrated into
the feedback circuit of the safety relay. If a contact in the enabling current path is welded, the
safety relay can no longer be activated because the feedback circuit remains in the open
position.

Field/field level
The field or field level of an automation system contains the individual sensors and
actuators, as opposed to the control level which is located above it in the hierarchy.

Fieldbus
Industrial communication system that connects a large number of field devices such as
probes (sensors), actuators and drives to a control device.

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

770 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Glossary

Function block
Defined group of functions that can be freely parameterized by the user and connected to
other function blocks in order to create a complete feeder-specific logic system. This means
conventional wired control circuits containing auxiliary relays, time relays, etc. can be
completely replaced.

Ground-fault module (EM)

The ground-fault module enables implementation of a powerful external ground fault
monitoring system in conjunction with the 3UL22 (for 3UF7 500-1AA00-0) and 3UL23 (for
3UF7 510-1AA00-0) residual current transformers. In addition to the internal ground-fault
monitoring function which is supported by both device series, SIMOCODE pro V N can be
extended by an additional and more precise external ground-fault monitoring system.

Ground-fault monitoring
See "Ground-fault monitoring."
SIMOCODE pro acquires and monitors all three phase currents. By evaluating the
summation current of the three current values, the motor feeder can be monitored for a
possible fault current or ground fault. There is a difference between internal and external
ground-fault monitoring:
Internal ground-fault monitoring:
Internal ground-fault monitoring via current measuring modules or current / voltage
measuring modules is only possible for motors with a 3-phase connection in power systems
that are either grounded solidly or with low impedance. The basic unit uses the total current
to detect a possible residual current / ground-fault current.
External ground-fault monitoring with SIMOCODE pro V PN:
The external ground-fault monitoring using residual current transformer and ground-fault
module is normally used for power systems that are grounded with high impedance, or in
cases, in which precise detection of the ground-fault current is necessary, for example, for
condition monitoring. The ground-fault module (EM) evaluates rated residual currents using
an externally connected residual current transformer (e.g. 3UL23).

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 771
Glossary

Ground-fault monitoring
See "Ground-fault monitoring."
SIMOCODE pro acquires and monitors all three phase currents. By evaluating the
summation current of the three current values, the motor feeder can be monitored for a
possible fault current or ground fault. There is a difference between internal and external
ground-fault monitoring:
Internal ground-fault monitoring:
Internal ground-fault monitoring via current measuring modules or current / voltage
measuring modules is only possible for motors with a 3-phase connection in power systems
that are either grounded solidly or with low impedance. The basic unit uses the total current
to detect a possible residual current / ground-fault current.
External ground-fault monitoring with SIMOCODE pro V PN:
The external ground-fault monitoring using residual current transformer and ground-fault
module is normally used for power systems that are grounded with high impedance, or in
cases, in which precise detection of the ground-fault current is necessary, for example, for
condition monitoring. The ground-fault module (EM) evaluates rated residual currents using
an externally connected residual current transformer (e.g. 3UL23).

GSD file
The properties of a PROFINET device are described in a GSD (General Station Description)
file that contains all the necessary information for configuration. You can use a GSD file to
integrate a PROFINET device in exactly the same way as a PROFIBUS device into an
automation system (SIMATIC S7 environment or any DP standard master system).
In the case of PROFINET IO, the GSD file is in XML format. The structure of the GSD file
conforms to ISO 15734, the worldwide standard for device descriptions.

I&M data
Identification and maintenance data.
Information stored in a module that help you to check the plant configuration, to located
hardware modifications in a plant, or to remedy errors in a plant. I&M data can be used to
identify modules uniquely on the network.

I/O
The term I/O devices is used in automation engineering to refer to peripheral devices, for
example, devices that are connected to centralized controls.

Independent operation
SIMOCODE pro V PN protects and controls the motor feeder, independently of the
automation system. Even if the automation system (PLC) fails, or if communication is
disrupted, the motor feeder remains fully protected and controllable. SIMOCODE pro can be
used without a connection to the PROFINET. This can easily be connected later, if required.

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

772 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Glossary

Initialization module
Memory module permanently installed in the switchgear or the motor control center in which
the device parameters of intelligent switching devices are stored.
The initialization module is used in motor control centers with a withdrawable design in which
all functions concerning the motor feeder are fitted in an exchangeable withdrawable
module.
The initialization module can be permanently installed in the switchgear and enable backup
of all parameters of a system and completely automatic transmission to a new system, e.g.
device replacement.

IP address
To enable a PROFINET device to be addressed as a node on Industrial Ethernet, this device
also requires an IP address that is unique within the network. The IP address is made up of
4 decimal numbers with a range of values from 0 through 255. The decimal numbers are
separated by a period.
The IP address is made up of
● The address of the (sub)net and
● The address of the node (generally called the host or network node)

IT system
The IT system (FR Isolé Terre) is a specific type of ground connection for increased fail-safe
protection in case of insulation faults.

Logic modules
Logical operations, time relay functions and counter functions are implemented using logic
modules.

Low voltage
All voltage levels used for the distribution of electricity that are within a range whose upper
limit in AC systems is generally 1000 V.

MAC address
Each PROFINET device is assigned a globally unique device identifier at the factory.
This 6-byte long device identifier is the MAC address.
The MAC address is divided up as follows:
● 3 bytes manufacturer's ID and
● 3 bytes device identifier (consecutive number).
The MAC address can generally be read from the front on the device,
e.g. 08-00-06-6B-80-C0.

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 773
Glossary

Media redundancy
SIMOCODE pro V PN supports media redundancy according to the Media Redundancy
Protocol (MRP). This function is configured using the configuration tool of the automation
system, e.g. with STEP 7 HW Config.

Memory module
The memory module is plugged into the system interface and is used for fast reading in or
out of the entire SIMOCODE pro parameterization, e.g. if a unit is exchanged.
Note
Memory module variant
For the SIMOCODE pro V PN basic unit, a PC cable serial 3UF7940-0AA00-0 as from
product version *E02* or a PC cable USB 3UF7941-0AA00-0 can be used.

Monitoring 0/4 A - 20 mA
SIMOCODE pro supports two-level monitoring of the analog signals of a transducer
(standardized 0/4 - 20 mA output signal). The analog signals are fed to the "0/4 - 20 mA"
function block via the analog module.

Monitoring functions
The following monitoring functions
● Ground-fault monitoring
● Current limit monitoring
● Voltage monitoring
● Cos phi monitoring
● Active power monitoring
● Monitoring 0/4 A - 20 mA
● Operation monitoring
● Temperature monitoring (analog)
Operate "in the background" in the same way as motor protection and motor control. They
can be active or not, according to the control function selected.

Motor protection
The basic unit has several protection mechanisms for current-dependent motor protection:
● Overload protection
● Unbalance protection
● Stalled rotor protection
● Thermistor protection

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

774 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Glossary

Network time protocol

Implementation of a TCP/IP protocol for time synchronization in networks. The NTP
procedure uses hierarchical time synchronization, that is, an external clock (e.g. SICLOCK
TM or a PC in the network) is used for synchronization.

Number of starts monitoring

Monitoring the number of starts can protect system parts (motors and switching devices such
as soft starters and converters) from too many start processes within a parameterizable time
frame and thus prevent damage. This is particularly useful for commissioning or manual
control.

OPC UA server
The OPC server provides the OPC client with a wide range of functions with which it can
communicate via industrial networks. SIMOCODE pro V PN provides extensive process data
via OPC UA.

OPC Unified Architecture (UA)

OPC Unified Architecture (UA) is the next generation technology of the OPC Foundation for
secure and reliable data transfer and defines access to industrial communication networks.

OPC UA client
An OPC UA client is a user program that accesses process data via the OPC UA interface.
Access to the process data is made possible by the OPC UA server.

Operating hours monitoring

The motor operating hours monitoring function enables the operating hours (service life) of a
motor to be recorded so that motor maintenance prompts can be generated in good time as
applicable.

Operation monitoring
SIMOCODE pro can monitor the operating hours and stop times of a motor and restrict the
number of start-ups in a defined time frame in order to avoid plant downtimes due to failed
motors caused by running or being stopped for too long.

Operational Protection OFF (OPO)

The "Operational Protection OFF (OPO)" function block puts the positioner into a safe
position and switches the motor off.

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 775
Glossary

Operator panel (OP)

The operator panel controls the motor feeder from the control cabinet. It contains all the
status LEDs which are on the basic units, the "TEST / RESET" button and the external
system interface.

Operator panel with display (OPD)

The operator panel with display can be used as an alternative to the standard operator panel
(OP). It displays the actual measured values, operating and diagnostic data, status
information for the motor feeder at the control cabinet and the device-internal error log. It
also contains all the status LEDs that are present on the basic unit and facilitates access to
the system interface from outside the control cabinet. Its keys can be used to control the
motor and to navigate the display menu.
For use with the SIMOCODE pro V PN basic unit, an operator panel with display version
*E07* is required.

Organization block
Organization blocks form the interface between the CPU operating system and the user
program. The order that the user program is processed in is specified in the organization
blocks.

Overload protection
SIMOCODE pro protects three-phase or AC motors in accordance with IEC 60947-4-1
requirements. The trip class can be set to eight different settings, ranging from Class 5 to
Class 40.

Pause time
The pause time is the specified time for the cooling down response of the motor when
tripped under normal operating conditions (not in the case of an overload trip). After this
interval, the thermal memory in SIMOCODE pro is deleted and a new cold start is possible.
This means that many startups can be performed in a short space of time.

PC cable
The PC cable is used to connect the serial interface of the PC to the system interface of a
basic unit for device parameterization.
Note
PC cable variant
For SIMOCODE pro V PN, a PC cable serial 3UF7940-0AA00-0 as from product version
*E02* or a PC cable USB 3UF7941-0AA00-0 can be used.

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

776 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Glossary

Performance Level (PL)

Defined by standard EN ISO 13849-1 as "a discrete level specifying the ability of safety-
related control parts to execute a safety function under anticipated conditions." Five
Performance Levels are specified (a to e) with defined ranges of the probability of a
dangerous failure per hour. PL "e" corresponds to SIL 3 and is specified as the highest level.

Pozidriv (PZ)
Type of fixing screws and cross-tip screwdrivers.

Process Automation (PA)

Automation of continuous production processes. For instance, it controls production
processes in the chemical industry or in water supply systems.

PROFIenergy
Profile for power management in production plants.
PROFIenergy uses the PROFINET communication protocol. It controls the power
consumption of automation equipment in production via a PROFINET network.

PROFINET
PROFINET (Process Field Network) is the open Industrial Ethernet Standard from Profibus &
Profinet International (PI) for automation.
Within the context of Totally Integrated Automation (TIA), PROFINET is the systematic
development of the following systems:
● PROFIBUS DP, the established fieldbus
● Industrial Ethernet, the communications bus for the cell level.
Experiences from both systems have been and are being integrated in PROFINET.

PROFINET IO device
Distributed field device assigned to one of the IO controllers.

PROFINET IO Supervisor
PG/PC for commissioning and diagnostics.

PROFINET IO controller
Device via which the connected IO devices are addressed. This means the IO controller
exchanges input and output signals with assigned field devices. The IO controller is often the
controller on which the automation program runs.

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 777
Glossary

PROFIsafe
The PROFIBUS safety profile specifies communication between fail-safe I/O devices and
fail-safe controllers. It is based on the standards for safety-related applications as well as on
the experience of PLC users and manufacturers who are members of PROFIBUS
International (PI). The PROFIBUS safety profile has TÜV and BIA (Institute for Occupational
Safety and Health of the German Social Accident Insurance) certification. The newest
version of the PROFIsafe specification is the Profile for Safety Technology V1.11, published
in 07/2001.

Programmable logic controller (PLC)

Electronic module used for open-loop and closed-loop control tasks in an automation
system. It is basically a control unit with specialized input and output interfaces for sensors
and actuators. A PLC can consequently control, monitor, and influence processes.

Programming device
A compact and transportable PC, suitable for industrial purposes. Its distinguishing feature is
the special hardware and software for SIMATIC programmable logic controllers.

Protection functions
The protection functions
● Overload protection
● Unbalance protection
● Stalled rotor protection
● Thermistor protection
operate alongside motor control "at a higher level in the background." They can be active or
not, according to the control function selected.

Protective Extra Low Voltage (PELV)

Protective measure against electric shock (formerly referred to as "protective extra low
voltage with safe isolation").
In contrast to an SELV circuit, live parts and exposed conductive parts of the equipment may
be grounded and connected to the protective conductor. Safe isolation means that the
primary circuit of the transformer must be separated from the secondary circuit by double or
reinforced insulation. PELV is used whenever operational reasons dictate that live
conductors of the low voltage or bodies of the equipment must be grounded. This is the
case, for instance, if equipotential bonding is necessary to prevent sparking in containers or
hazardous areas. However, owing to the chassis ground, dangerous leakage currents can
flow through the body regardless of the low voltage if a fault occurs in the higher-level power
system.

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

778 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Glossary

RT communication
As a motor management system, SIMOCODE pro V PN does not have any time-critical
communication functions itself but it does support the PROFINET hardware RT used. The
integrated 2-port switch is therefore used to forward RT data.

SELV
Safety extra low voltage Low electric voltage that offers significant protection against electric
shock due to its low value and insulation. For certain requirements, the highest voltage may
be defined below 50 V AC or 120 V smoothed DC, especially if direct contact with live parts
is permissible. At a rated voltage of 120 V, the highest peak value in a smoothed DC system
is 140 V, and at a rated voltage of 60 V it is 70 C.
Use of power supply units according to IEC 60536, protection class III (SELV or PELV):
See Chapters "Safety-related tripping", "Fail-safe digital modules (DM-F)", and "DM-F Local
and DM-F PROFIsafe digital modules."

SFB
System function block A block integrated in the S7 CPU operating system that can be called
like a function block (FB) in the user program if required.

SFC
System function:
A function integrated in the S7 CPU operating system that can be called like a function (FC)
in the user program if required.

Shared device
Shared device is the function with which an IO device is used simultaneously by two or more
IO controllers.
Use of this function depends on whether the automation system supports the function. It is
configured using the configuration tool of the automation system, e.g. with STEP 7
HW Config.

SIL (Safety Integrity Level)

Measure defined in IEC 61508 for the safety-related performance of an electrical or
electronic control device.
The IEC standard defines four SIL levels SIL1 to SIL4, which are defined as the safety
implementations of electrical and electronic equipment. The SIL value describes the
specified safety function in the event of a fault.

SIMATIC
Name of products and systems for industrial automation from Siemens AG.

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 779
Glossary

SIMATIC PDM
You can also configure SIMOCODE pro using the SIMATIC PDM (Process Device Manager)
software. The following options exist:
● SIMATIC PDM as a standalone program
● PDM integrated in STEP 7

SIMOCODE ES
Standard parameterization software for SIMOCODE pro, which can be run on a PC / PG
under Windows XP or Windows 7 Ultimate and Professional.

SIMOCODE pro S7 slave

The SIMOCODE pro S7 slave is a special slave with the following characteristics:
● It supports the S7 model (diagnostic interrupts, process interrupts)
● It can be parameterized

SIMOCODE pro Object Manager (OM)

Part of SIMOCODE ES. When SIMOCODE ES and SIMOCODE pro Object Manager are
installed on a PC/PG, SIMOCODE ES can be called directly from STEP 7 HW Config. This
enables simple and universal SIMATIC S7 configuration.

Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP)

Network protocol for monitoring and controlling network elements (e.g. switches).

Stalled rotor protection

If the motor current rises above an adjustable stalled rotor protection level (current
threshold), a defined and delayable response can be configured for SIMOCODE pro. In this
case, for example, the motor can be shut down independently of the overload protection.
The stalled rotor protection is only active after the parameterized class time has elapsed,
e.g. for Class 10 after 10 seconds, and prevents unnecessarily high thermal and mechanical
loads as well as premature aging of the motor.

Standard function
Standard functions are typical motor functions that can be activated according to need and,
as applicable, individually set for each motor feeder. They are already available, work
independently of the selected control function and can be used/activated as optional
additions.

Station
A device which can send, receive or amplify data via the bus, e.g. master, slave.

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

780 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Glossary

Statistical data
SIMOCODE pro makes statistical data available which can be read out with SIMOCODE ES
under Target System > Service Data / Statistical Data (for example).

STEP7
The basic STEP 7 software is the standard tool for the SIMATIC S7, SIMATIC C7 and
SIMATIC WinAC automation systems.

Stop category 0
Non-controlled shutdown by immediately switching off the power to the machine's drive
elements.

Stop time monitoring

SIMOCODE pro can monitor the stop times of a motor to avoid plant downtimes due to failed
motors caused by either running too long (wearing out) or being stopped for too long.

System interface cover IP54

Cover to protect the system interface on the door adaptor or on the operator panel/operator
panel with display from soiling or to seal it.

Temperature module (TM)

The temperature module offers the option of expanding SIMOCODE pro V PN with an
analog temperature monitoring system. With this, up to three analog sensor measuring
circuits (two-wire or three-wire systems) can be connected. The temperatures recorded can
be fully integrated and monitored in the process and are also available for a higher-level
automation system. You can, for example, implement analog temperature monitoring of the
motor windings, bearings, coolant or gearbox oil. SIMOCODE pro V PN supports various
sensor types (NTC, KTY83/84, PT100, and PT1000) for use with hard, fluid or gaseous
media.

Temperature monitoring
See temperature module (TM).

Terminal block
Insulating part comprised of one or more terminals, insulated from one another, for mounting
on a strip.

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 781
Glossary

Test position feedback (TPF)

If the motor feeder is in the test position, its main circuit is isolated from the network.
However, the control voltage is connected.
The "cold run" function test is performed with the feeder in this state. This means the motor
feeder is tested without a current in the main circuit.

Thermistor protection
The basic unit provides the option of connecting thermistor sensors (binary PTC) for
monitoring the motor temperature.

TN-C system
In a TN-C system (FR Terre Neutre Combiné) 1 wire is used simultaneously as a protective
earth (SPE) and neutral wire (N).

TN-S system
In a TN-S system (FR Terre Neutre Séparé) the neutral wire and the protective earth are led
separately from the transformer up to the appliance.

Trip class
See "Class".

Unbalance protection
The extent of the phase unbalance can be monitored and transmitted to the control system.
A definable and delayable response can be tripped when an adjustable limit has been
overshot. If the phase unbalance is more than 50%, the tripping time is also automatically
reduced in accordance with the overload characteristic since the heat generation of the
motors increases in asymmetrical conditions.

Universal Current (UC)

Universal current. Property of devices that can be operated with both AC and DC.

USB PC cable
The USB PC cable is used to connect the USB interface of the PC to the system interface of
a basic unit for device parameterization.

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

782 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Glossary

Voltage monitoring
See monitoring voltage
SIMOCODE pro supports two-phase undervoltage monitoring of either a three-phase
network or a single-phase network for freely selectable limits, direction of rotation (for AC) or
readiness to start. The response of SIMOCODE pro on reaching a prewarning level or trip
level can be freely parameterized and delayed. Voltage measuring is carried out using
current / voltage measuring modules.

Voltage monitoring
See monitoring voltage
SIMOCODE pro supports two-phase undervoltage monitoring of either a three-phase
network or a single-phase network for freely selectable limits, direction of rotation (for AC) or
readiness to start. The response of SIMOCODE pro on reaching a prewarning level or trip
level can be freely parameterized and delayed. Voltage measuring is carried out using
current / voltage measuring modules.

Y connecting cable
Connecting cable with which a connection can be made via the system interface from a
SIMOCODE pro basic unit to both an initialization module and a current measuring module.

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 783
Glossary

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

784 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
Index
Access to SIMOCODE pro V PN-OPC-UA
variables, 437
" Accessories, 56, 115
Acknowledgment of faults, 328
"At operating temperature" state, 167
Activating the OPC-UA server, 434
"Delete initialization module data" command:, 751
Activating the web server, 443
"DM1 Inputs" function block as DM-F Local fail-safe
Active control stations of control functions, 243, 526
digital module, 309
Active power limits, 93
"DM1 Inputs" function block as DM-F PROFIsafe fail-
Active power monitoring, 43, 247, 266
safe digital module, 310
Activity of trip level, warning level, ground-fault
"External fault" response, 333
monitoring, 255
"Initialization module write protection identification data
Adapt display settings, 96
off" command, 751
Addressing levels, 420
"Initialization module write protection identification data
Addressing plug, 483
on" command, 751
Alarm processing, 419
"Initialization module write protection off"
Alarm, fault, and system events, 514, 757
command, 751
Alarms, 513
"Initialization module write protection on"
AM 1/2 inputs function blocks, 123
command, 751
AM 1/2 output function blocks, 123
"SET/RESET" button, 342, 668, 669
AM1 warning/tripping 0/4 - 20 mA<> (status
"TEST/RESET" button, 61, 658
information, warnings and faults), 602
"TEST/RESET" DM-F button, 112
Ambient conditions, 742
Analog module, 32, 44, 54, 113, 269
Analog module 1/2 open circuit, 514
0 Analog module connection example, 469
0/4 A - 20 mA (AM1) monitoring, 269 Analog module inputs, 299, 302, 314
0/4 A - 20 mA (AM2) monitoring, 269 Analog module output, 281, 283
0/4 to 20 mA monitoring, 247 Analog module outputs, 291
0/4-20 mA limits, 94 Analog module pin assignment, 468
Analog modules, 110
Analog multiplexer, 49, 353
1 Analog multiplexer example, 384
Analog multiplexer function block, 124
1 NC + 1 NO evaluation / 2 NC evaluation, 344
Analog value recording, 319, 320, 321
Analog value recording function block, 123
Analog value recording of measured curve, 321
2 Antivalence, 514
2x 1-channel / 1x 2-channel, 344 Application examples analog module output, 292
Application examples of overload protection, 164
Application selection, 191
3 Assigning device names using the configuration tool of
the automation system, 403
3UL23 residual current transformer, 653
Assignment of cyclic receive and send data
Dahlander, 618
Assignment of cyclic receive and send data Dahlander
A reversing starter, 620
Abbreviations, 538, 554 Assignment of cyclic receive and send data molded-
About SIMOCODE, 82 case circuit breaker (MCCB), 612

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 785
Index

Assignment of cyclic receive and send data overload C

relay, 606
Cable cross sections, 459
Assignment of cyclic receive and send data pole-
Cable length (single), 668, 669
changing reversing starter, 624
Cable lengths of the sensor circuit cables, 739
Assignment of cyclic receive and send data pole-
Cable protection, 740
changing starter, 622
Calculation modules (calculators), 353
Assignment of cyclic receive and send data
Calculator, 49, 377
positioner, 628
Calculator 1 function block, 125
Assignment of cyclic receive and send data reversing
Calculator 2 function block, 126
starter, 610
Calculator 3, 381
Assignment of cyclic receive and send data soft
Calculator 4, 381
starter, 630
Calculator examples, 379
Assignment of cyclic receive and send data soft starter
Calculators 3, 4 function block, 126
with reversing contactor, 632
Calculators logic modules, 377
Assignment of cyclic receive and send data solenoid
Cascading input automatic start / monitored start, 344
valve, 626
Change-over
Assignment of cyclic receive and send data star/delta
pause, 194, 208, 209, 212, 214, 216, 218, 220, 221, 22
reversing starter, 616
3, 224, 227
Assignment of cyclic receive and send data star/delta
Changing the marking, 332
starter, 614
Channel diagnostics data records, 416
Autoactivation of compartment identification, 750
ChannelErrorType, 426
Automatic acknowledgement of faults, 328
ChannelNumber, 422
Auto-Reset, 332
ChannelProperties, 422
ChannelProperties.Accumulative (bit 8), 423
ChannelProperties.Direction (bit 13 - 15), 425
B ChannelProperties.Specifier (bit 11/12), 425
Backing up and saving parameters, 503 ChannelProperties.Type (Bit 0 - 7), 423
Basic unit, 41, 736, 743 Characteristic curve of a type A sensor, 738
Basic unit (BU), 52 Circuit breaker, 186, 205, 526
Basic unit commissioning, 496, 498 Circuit diagram
Basic unit connection example, 461 3VL molded-case circuit breaker (MCCB), 693
Basic unit inputs, 302, 303 Dahlander, 701
Basic unit inputs, 302, 303 Dahlander reversing starter, 703
Basic unit inputs function block, 130 Direct starter, 689
Basic unit outputs, 283, 284 Direct-on-line starter for single-phase loads, 731
Basic unit outputs function block, 130 Overload relay, 687
Box terminal blocks, 57 Pole-changing reversing starter, 708
Bus connection Pole-changing starter, 706
Current / voltage measuring module, 662 Positioner 1, 713
Current measuring module, 662 Positioner 2, 715
Bus connection system from 20 A to 630 A, 476, 478 Positioner 3, 717
Bus fault response, 349 Positioner 4, 719
Bus monitoring, 348 Positioner 5, 721
Bus termination module, 57 Reversing starter, 691
Buttons of the operator panel, 675 Soft starter (example 3RW402, 3RW403,
Buttons of the operator panel with display, 676 3RW404), 723
Buttons on the operator panel with display, 306 Soft starter (example 3RW405, 3RW407), 725
Byte arrangements, 553 Soft starter with reversing contactor (3RW402,
3RW403, 3RW404), 727
Soft starter with reversing contactor (3RW405,
3RW407), 729
Solenoid valve, 711

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

786 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Index

Star-delta reversing starter, 699 DM-F LOCAL digital module, 666

Star-delta starter (current measuring in delta), 695 DM-F PROFIsafe digital module, 666
Star-delta starter (current measuring in supply Connection conductor basic unit, 660
cable), 697 Connection conductor digital module, 665
Circuit diagram of a reversing starter control Connection conductors analog module, 671
circuit, 149, 149 Connection conductors ground-fault module, 672, 673
Class, 165 Connection conductors temperature module, 674
Class time, 171 Connection for voltage measurement
Clear memory module, 98 Current / voltage measuring module, 662
Clockwise rotation, 210 Current measuring module, 662
Cold run, 330 Connection monitoring, 440
Color coding of the connecting cable, 486, 488 Connection to a web client, 444
Combination of ChannelProperties.Qualifier (bit 9/10) Contacting of the initialization module, 749
and ChannelProperties.Specifier (bit 11/12), 424 Contactor control, 188, 244, 527
Commands, 82, 751 Contactor control with control functions, 244
Commands, operator panel with display, 78 Control circuit
Comment, 604 Digital module, 664
Commissioning, 495, 736 Control circuit ground-fault module, 672, 673
Commissioning the initialization module, 756 Control circuit of the analog module, 670
Common technical data, 656 Control
Communication, 29, 81, 387 commands, 175, 182, 200, 203, 206, 210, 214, 217, 22
Communication, operator panel with display, 74 1, 224, 231, 236, 239
Compartment identification, 745 Control function, 175, 186
Conductor cross section, 477, 478 Control functions, 39, 46
Configuration error, 514 Control functions - overview, 526
Configuration of the OPC-UA receive and send data Control of lamps for displaying operating states, 285
with SIMOCODE ES 2007, 438 Control station, 175, 243, 526
Configuration of the user name and password, 444 Control station - Local control, 37, 146, 177
Configuring a reversing starter, 145 Control station - Operator panel, 179
Configuring device names with SIMOCODE ES 2007 Control station - PC/OPC-UA [OCM], 178
parameterization software and transfer into the Control station - PLC/PCS [PN], 178
device, 404 Control station settings, 184
Configuring system redundancy with Control stations, 177
PROFINET IO, 412 Control stations function block, 135
Configuring the diagnostics response, 417 Cooling down period, 167
Configuring the ports, 402 Correction sheet, 763
Configuring the SIMOCODE pro V PN OPC-UA server Cos phi, 103
- Requirements, 434 Cos phi limits, 93
Connecting cable, 56, 116, 483 Cos phi monitoring, 43, 247, 264
3UF73, 657 Cos phi monitoring function block, 138
Connecting plugs with sockets, 122 Counter, 49, 353, 359, 360
Connecting system components to the system Counter function block, 143
interface, 485 Counter-clockwise rotation, 210
Connecting the ETHERNET cable to the basic Cover, 62
unit, 492 Covers for box terminals, 57
Connecting the Y connecting cable to the basic unit Covers for cable lugs and busbar connections, 57
and to the current measuring module or to the current / Covers for screw terminals, 57
voltage measuring module, 755 Cross-circuit detection, 344
Connecting to the SIMOCODE pro OPC-UA Current / voltage measuring
server, 435 module, 32, 103, 257, 261, 266, 736, 743
Connection Current / voltage measuring module 3UF7110, 0.3 A to
Decoupling module, 663 3 A, 642

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 787
Index

Current / voltage measuring module 3UF7111, 2.4 A to Data block "BlockLength", 421
25 A, 642 Data block "BlockType", 421
Current / voltage measuring module 3UF7112, 10 A to Data block "BlockVersion", 421
100 A, 643 Data block "ChannelErrorType", 426
Current / voltage measuring module 3UF7113-1AA, 20 Data block "ChannelNumber", 422
A to 200 A, 644 Data block "ChannelProperties", 422
Current / voltage measuring module 3UF7113-1BA, 20 Data block "ChannelProperties.Accumulative (bit
A to 200 A (bus connection), 645 8)", 423
Current / voltage measuring module 3UF7114, 63 A to Data block "ChannelProperties.Direction (bits 13 -
630 A, 646 15)", 425
Current / voltage measuring module Data block "ChannelProperties.Specifier
commissioning, 496 (Bit 11/12)", 425
Current / voltage measuring modules, 53, 478 Data block "ChannelProperties.Type (Bit 0 -7)", 423
Current limit, 42 Data block "User Structure Identifier (USI)", 427
Current limit monitoring, 247, 258, 259 Data blocks "SlotNumber," "SubslotNumber", 422
Current limits, 93 Data blocks, diagnostics data records, 421
Current limits function block, 136 Data formats, 551
Current measuring module, 209, 257, 736, 743 Data record 130 - Basic device parameters 1, 572
Variants, 102 Data record 131 - Basic device parameters 2, 578
Current measuring module 3UF7100, 0.3 A to 3 A, 637 Data record 132 - Extended device parameters 1, 582
Current measuring module 3UF7102, 10 A to 100 Data record 133 - Extended device parameters, 590
A, 638 Data record 134 - ExtendedPlus device
Current measuring module 3UF7103, 20 A to 200 parameters, 593
A, 639 Data record 135 - ExtendedPlus device parameters
Current measuring module 3UF7103, 20 A to 200 A 2, 599
(bus connection), 640 Data record 139 - Marking, 602
Current measuring module 3UF7104, 63 A to 630 Data record 140 - Marking 2, 603
A, 641 Data record 165 - Identification, 604
Current measuring module commissioning, 496 Data record 224 - Password protection, 605
Current measuring module installed, 213 Data record 63 - Analog value recording, 555
Current measuring module installed in supply line:, 194 Data record 67 - Process image output, 556
Current measuring modules, 52, 477 Data record 69 - Process image input, 557
Current threshold, 171 Data record 72 - Error buffer, 558
Cyclic data from SIMOCODE pro V (PN), 397 Data record 73 - Event memory, 559
Cyclic data to SIMOCODE pro V (PN), 395 Data record 92 - Diagnostics, 560
Cyclic Receive, 316 Data record 94 - measured values, 568
Cyclic receive byte 0 (1, 2/3, 4/5) function block, 144 Data record 95 - service data/statistical data, 570
Cyclic Send, 296 Data records, 551, 553
Cyclic send byte 0 (1, 2/3, 4/9, 10/19) function Data records - overview, 552
blocks, 144 Data transfer, 392
Cyclic send data, 283, 297, 316 Deactivation of the compartment identification, 750
Cyclic Send Data, 156 Decoupling module, 53, 104, 105, 649, 743
Cyclic services, 297, 316 Decoupling module commissioning, 496
Decoupling module connection example, 471
Decoupling module in different networks, 106
D Decoupling module pin assignment, 470
Degree of protection (according to IEC 60529), 656
Dahlander, 46, 60, 186, 192, 216, 526, 618
Delay for inputs, 311
Reversing starter, 186, 220
Delay for sensor inputs 50 ms / 10 ms, 344
Dahlander control function, 214
Delays, 111
Dahlander reversing starter, 192, 526, 620
Delta networks, 109
Dahlander reversing starter control function, 217
Detailed diagnostics with STEP 7 HW Config, 418
Data block "API", 422

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

788 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Index

Device I/Os, 81 DM1(2) inputs, DM-F = DM-F Local, or DM-F

Device I/Os, operator panel with display, 75 PROFIsafe function blocks, 127
Device name, 388, 403 DM-F - test requirement, 516
Device replacement, 116 DM-F feedback circuit, 516
Device replacement without removable data storage DM-F Local, 45
medium, 393 DM-F LOCAL digital module, 110, 650
Diagnosis alarm, 416 DM-F Local fail-safe digital module, 736, 743
Diagnostic status, 416 DM-F Local fail-safe digital module commissioning, 496
Diagnostics, 416 DM-F PROFIsafe, 45
Diagnostics data, 28, 51 DM-F PROFIsafe digital module, 110, 650
Diagnostics data records, 420 DM-F PROFIsafe fail-safe digital module, 736, 743
Diagnostics data records - data blocks, 421 DM-F PROFIsafe fail-safe digital module
Diagnostics data records at slot level, 420 commissioning, 496
Diagnostics for device faults, 417 DM-F safety-related tripping, 516
Diagnostics for process events, 417 DM-F system interfaces, 112
Diagnostics for process faults, 417 DM-F wiring, 516
Diagnostics for process warnings, 417 DM-FL - configuration deviation, 516
Diagnostics in the STEP 7 user program, 418 DM-FL - configuration mode, 517
Diagnostics via LED display, 500 DM-FL - cross circuit, 517
Diagnostics with STEP 7 HW Config, 418 DM-FL - simultaneity, 516
Digital module, 110, 736, 743 DM-FL waiting for start-up test, 517
Digital module 1 inputs, 302 DM-FP Prm error, 517
Digital module 1 outputs, 283 Door adapter, 56, 116, 651, 743
Digital module 2 inputs, 302 Door adapter commissioning, 496
Digital module 2 outputs, 283 Double 0, 517
Digital module commissioning, 496 Double 1, 517
Digital module connection example, 463
Digital module inputs, 308
Digital module inputs function blocks, 127 E
Digital module outputs, 289
EEx e applications, 166, 173, 277
Digital module outputs function blocks, 127
Electrical service life of relay outputs
Digital modules, 53, 110
DM-F LOCAL digital module, 666
Digital modules, fail-safe, 54
DM-F PROFIsafe digital module, 666
Dimension drawings, 635
EMC stability according to IEC 60947-1, 656
DIP switch, 668, 669
Emergency start, 48, 324, 339, 339
Direct starter, 35, 46, 60, 186, 192, 199, 526, 608, 608
Emergency Start function block, 131
Direct starter control function, 198
Enables, 175, 182
Display ground-fault module, 672
End position, 517
Display of all pending faults, 99
End_Pause, 431
Display of all pending status information, 99
Engineering software migration from V7 to V8, 59
Display of all pending warnings, 99
Engineering software V7, 59
Display of measured values in the measured values
Engineering software V8, 59
display, 86
Error buffer, 82
Display of statistical and maintenance-relevant
Error messages, 513
information on the statistics/maintenance display, 89
Ethernet / OPC-UA Receive, 302
Display of the operator panel with display, 676
ETHERNET communication, 47
Display settings, 81
Ethernet connector, 492
Display settings, operator panel with display, 77
ETHERNET interface, basic unit, 658
Displays
Evaluating diagnostics alarms with SFB 54 "RALRM" in
Lamp control, 189
OB 82, 419
Displays of the operator panel with display, 68, 81
Evaluating diagnostics with SIMATIC S7 300/400 and
Displays the current status of all device I/Os, 91
STEP 7 V5, 418

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 789
Index

Event memory, 82, 100, 512 Feedback

Event memory, operator panel with display, 79 Fault, 194
Events, 82 Test position (TPF), 329
Example - Pulse width modulator, 386 Feedback OFF, 520
Example circuits, 685 Feedback ON, 193, 520
Example of the diagnostics data records, 428 Feedback
Execution ON command, 514 time, 194, 199, 202, 205, 209, 213, 216, 220, 223, 227,
Execution stop command, 514 235, 238, 242
Execution Feed-through opening, 476, 478
time, 194, 199, 202, 205, 209, 213, 216, 220, 223, 227, Current / voltage measuring module, 662
230, 235, 238, 242 Current measuring module, 662
Expansion module, 110, 743 Flashing, 49, 353, 371
Expansion modules, 40, 649 Flashing function block, 125
Expansion modules commissioning, 496 Flicker, 49, 353, 372
Explosion protection, 733 Flicker function block, 129
Extended control function block, 129 Floating License for one user, 58
Extended protection function block, 128 FO, 193
External current transformers, 480 Formula Calculators 3, 4, 382
External fault, 48, 324, 331, 332, 517 Formulas calculators 1, 2, 379
External fault, 48, 324, 331, 332, 517 Frequencies, 656
External fault, 48, 324, 331, 332, 517 Front system interface, 487
External fault, 48, 324, 331, 332, 517 Full motor protection, 27
External fault 1 to 6 (status information, warnings, and Function blocks, 120
faults), 602 Function blocks (alphabetical), 123
External fault function block, 129 Function blocks for SIMATIC S7, 432
External ground fault, 517 Function circuit diagram
External ground-fault monitoring, 42, 248 3VL molded-case circuit breaker (MCCB), 694
External ground-fault monitoring (with 3UL22 residual Dahlander, 702
current transformer), 253 Dahlander reversing starter, 704
External ground-fault monitoring (with 3UL23 Direct starter, 690
summation current transformer), 254 Direct starter for 1-phase loads, 732
Overload relay, 688
Pole-changing reversing starter, 709
F Pole-changing starter, 707
Positioner 1, 714
Factory settings, 98, 146, 686
Positioner 2, 716
Fail-safe digital module, 111
Positioner 3, 718
Failure, 416
Positioner 4, 720
Fault - bus, 521
Positioner 5, 722
Fault - EM open circuit, 521
Reversing starter, 692
Fault - EM short-circuit, 521
Soft starter (example 3RW402, 3RW403,
Fault - PLC/PCS, 521
3RW404), 724
Fault - temporary components, 521
Soft starter (example 3RW405, 3RW407), 726
Fault - Test position feedback (TPF), 330
Soft starter with reversing contactor (3RW402,
Fault antivalence, 521
3RW403, 3RW404), 728
Fault current, 248
Soft starter with reversing contactor (3RW405,
Fault end position, 521
3RW407), 730
Fault memory, operator panel with display, 79
Solenoid valve, 712
Fault message, 18
Star-delta reversing starter, 700
Faults, 82
Star-delta starter (current measuring in delta), 696
Faults, operator panel with display, 79
Star-delta starter (current measuring in supply
FB ON, 193
cable), 698
FC, 193

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

790 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Index

G Inputs, 299
with safety relay function, 668, 669
Ground fault limits, 93
Inputs (binary)
Ground-fault detection, 32
Basic unit, 660
Ground-fault module, 54, 110, 114
Digital module, 664
Ground-fault module connection example, 465
Inputs binary, 299, 669
Ground-fault monitoring, 42, 247, 248
Inputs of the analog module, 670
Ground-fault monitoring function block with
Installation, 736
3UF7500 ground-fault module, 139
Installation date, 604
Ground-fault monitoring function block with
Installation in hazardous areas, 742
3UF7510 ground-fault module, 139
Integration of SIMOCODE pro V PN in SIMATIC STEP
GSD file, 119, 388
7 V5 via OM SIMOCODE pro, 400
Guidelines on information security in industrial
Interface covers, 56
automation, 391
Interfaces, 447
Interlocking
time, 194, 200, 202, 213, 220, 227, 235, 242, 275
H Internal ground fault, 518
Hardware and software requirements for compartment Internal ground-fault monitoring, 32, 42, 248, 248, 252
identification, 748 IO Device, 388
Hardware fault, 517 IP address, 388
Hardware test, 327, 741 IP parameters, 403
Hysteresis for monitoring functions, 279
Hysteresis ground-fault current, 256
J
Just one start possible, 519
I
I/O configurations, 395
Identification, 82 K
Identification data, 407
Key-operated switch operation, 180
Identification of the motor feeder and the SIMOCODE
pro components, 101
Identification, operator panel with display, 80
Independent operation, 33
L
Industrial Ethernet Networking Manual system Labeling strips, 57, 63, 66
manual, 493 Lamp control, 189, 245, 528
Information and standards, 734 Lamp control with control functions, 245, 528
Initialization module, 56, 116, 448, 496, 653, 743 Lamp test, 327, 741
Initialization module - identification data write- Last event "DM-F enabling circuit closed", 512
protected, 518 Last event "DM-F enabling circuit open", 512
Initialization module cleared, 518, 757 LED display, 658
Initialization module events, 752 Decoupling module, 663
Initialization module identification data write- Digital module, 664
protected, 757 DM-F PROFIsafe, 669
Initialization module programmed, 518, 757 Operator panel, 675
Initialization module read in, 512, 518, 757 Temperature module, 674
Initialization module write-protected, 518, 757 LED display ground-fault module, 673
Initialization module write-protected, parameter LED display of the analog module, 670
changes not allowed, 518, 757 LED display of the operator panel with
Initialization module written, 512 display, 287, 676
Input characteristic, 668, 669 LEDs for device diagnostics basic unit / operator
Input types, 301 panel, 500
LEDs for DM-F device diagnostics, 112

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 791
Index

LEDs of the operator panel, 286 Memory module cleared, 520

LEDs on DM-F LOCAL, 667 Memory module programmed, 520
Limit 1 to 4 (status information), 602 Memory module read in, 520
Limit monitor, 44, 49, 353, 373 Memory module write protection off, 98
Limit monitor function block, 130 Memory module write protection on, 98
Limit monitor limit, 94 Memory module write-protected, 520
Limit overshoot, 373 Menu of the operator panel with display, 70
Limit undershoot, 373 Messages, operator panel with display, 78
List of abbreviations, 759 Minimum pause time, 431
Load feeder, 36 Mode selector, 185
Load type, 169 Modes of calculator 2, 378
Loading parameters from the initialization module, 749 Module fault, 518
Local control, 184 Module replacement without exchangeable
Local control station, 149, 153, 308 medium/PC, 401
Location designation, 604 Module statuses in diagnostics with
Logging on to the web server, 444 STEP 7 HW Config, 418
Logic modules, 49, 351, 352 Module supply voltage is not present, 519
Logic modules, 49, 351, 352 Molded case circuit breaker (MCCB), 612
Molded-case circuit breaker (MCCB), 46, 60, 192
Molded-case circuit breaker (MCCB), 46, 60, 192
M Molded-case circuit breaker (MCCB), 46, 60, 192
Molded-case circuit breaker (MCCB) control
MAC address, 389
function, 203
Main circuit
Monitor 0/4-20 mA AM1-2 function block, 138
Current / voltage measuring module, 661
Monitoring
Current measuring module, 661
Current limits, 42
Main display, 81
Undervoltage, 43
Main display, operator panel with display, 71
Monitoring for further availability, 43
Main entry, 72, 345, 682
Monitoring functions, 39, 42, 247
Main menu, operator panel with display, 70
Monitoring interval for mandatory testing, 247, 278
Mains buffering time
Monitoring interval for mandatory testing function
Basic unit, 659
block, 140
DM-F LOCAL digital module, 666
Monitoring of voltages, 103
DM-F PROFIsafe digital module, 666
Motor control, 28, 175
Maintenance, 743
Motor current monitoring, 257
Maintenance demand (maintenance requested), 416
Motor feeder, 35
Maintenance required, 416
Motor operating hours, 515
Manual operation, 180
Motor protection, 157
Max. star time, 194, 209, 213
Motor protection and motor control status, 88
Maximum AC3 operating current, 682
Motor stop time, 43, 274
Maximum distance between modules, 31
Motor temperature, 41
Maximum length of connecting cables, 31, 753
Mounting, 447
Maximum number of IO devices - system
Analog module, 670
redundancy, 411
Current / voltage measuring module, 661
Measured curves, 27
Current measuring module, 661
Measured values display, 81, 86
Digital module, 664
Measured values, operator panel with display, 71
DM-F LOCAL digital module, 665
Measurement functions, 39
DM-F PROFIsafe digital module, 665
Media redundancy, 393
Operator panel, 675
Media redundancy - information material, 409
Mounting lugs, 449, 450, 452, 453
Media redundancy support, 409
Mounting of basic unit, 451
Memory module, 56, 62, 483, 487
Mounting of coupling module, 451
Memory module "park position", 64, 67

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

792 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Index

Mounting of current measuring modules, 452 OPC-UA server certificate, 435

Mounting of expansion module, 451 OPC-UA services of the SIMOCODE pro V PN OPC-
Mounting of operator panel adapter, 456 UA server - supported, 435
Mounting of the basic unit, 658 Operating data, 28, 50
Mounting of the decoupling module, 663 Operating hours, 43
Mounting of the operator panel with display, 676 Operating hours monitoring, 273, 273, 273
Mounting operator panel (OP), 454 Operating modes, 175, 180
Mounting operator panel with display (OPD), 454 Selector, 181
Mounting position, 656, 658 Operating range
Mounting the current / voltage measuring modules, 453 DM-F LOCAL digital module, 665
Mounting the initialization module in the DM-F PROFIsafe digital module, 665
switchgear, 753 Operation monitoring, 247, 272
Operation monitoring function block, 125
Operational protection OFF (OPO), 515
N Operational Protection OFF (OPO), 48, 324, 334
Operational Protection OFF (OPO), 48, 324, 334
Navigating the menu of the operator panel with
Operator controls and display elements, system
display, 70
interfaces basic unit, 61
No start permitted, 518
Operator controls of the operator panel with display, 69
Node IDs, 529
Operator panel, 52, 62, 185, 647, 743
Non-maintained command
Operator panel adapter, 57, 116, 652, 743
mode, 193, 199, 202, 205, 209, 213, 216, 220, 223, 22
Operator panel adapter commissioning, 496
7, 230, 235, 238, 242, 440
Operator panel buttons, 299, 302, 306
Non-safety functions (fail-safe digital modules), 311
Operator panel buttons function block, 124
Non-volatile element function block, 131
Operator panel commissioning, 496
Non-volatile elements, 49, 353, 368
Operator panel LEDs, 283
NOR function, 367, 370
Operator panel LEDs function block, 124
Number of starts, 43, 275
Operator panel with display, 32, 52, 64, 648, 743
Number of starts monitoring, 274
Operator panel with display commissioning, 496
Number of starts overshoot, 273
OPO function block, 125
Number of starts prewarning, 273
Output response of the timer, 363
Outputs, 281, 283
Outputs of the analog module, 671
O Overload, 166, 522, 526
OFF command reset, 332 Relay, 186
OM SIMOCODE pro Object Manager, 118 Overload and unbalance, 522
OM SIMOCODE pro V PN, 400 Overload protection, 41, 157, 158, 161, 171
ON <, 193 Overload protection response, 160
ON <<, 193 Overload relay, 46, 60, 192, 197, 606
ON >>, 193 Overload relay control function, 196
OPC, 433 Overtemperature, 277
OPC basics, 433
OPC UA, 47
OPC UA client, 389 P
OPC UA Receive, 317
Panel reset, 332
OPC UA receive data 0 (1, 2/3) function block, 132
Parameter changes not allowed in the current
OPC UA send data 0 (1) function block, 131
operating state, 519
OPC UA server, 389
Parameter is incorrect ("Event" category), 519
OPC Unified Architecture (UA), 389
Parameter settings in the "SIMOCODE ES"
OPC-UA Receive, 438
software., 750
OPC-UA send, 283, 298, 440
Parameterization, 150
OPC-UA Send Data, 298
Parameterization methods, 497

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 793
Index

Parameterization with SIMOCODE ES, 152 Power consumption

Parameters, 81, 93 DM-F LOCAL digital module, 665
Parameters for control functions, 193 DM-F PROFIsafe digital module, 665
Parameters, operator panel with display, 76 Power consumption of basic unit, 659
Password protection OFF, 605 Power failure (UVO), 519
Password protection ON, 605 Power failure monitoring, 48
Pause time, 168 Power failure monitoring (UVO), 324, 337
PC cable, 115, 483, 487 Power failure time, 338
PC/OPC-UA [OCM], 184 Power monitoring function block, 140
Performance Level, 45, 111 Powerpack for SIMOCODE ES 2007 Basic, 58, 58
Permissible ambient temperature, 656 Power-up behavior, 161
Permissible number of starts exceeded, 523 Preventive maintenance, 502
Permissible starts, 275 Prewarning level, 169
Phase failure protection, 41 Prewarning overload, 522
Phase sequence, 103 Process monitoring, 42
Phase sequence detection, 44 PROFIBUS-Nutzerorganisation e. V., 493
Phase unbalance, 170, 519 PROFIenergy, 394
Phase unbalance formula, 170 PROFIenergy - definition, 430
Pin assignment of DM-F Local, 473, 475 PROFIenergy - functions supported, 430
Pin assignment of DM-F PROFIsafe, 474, 476 PROFINET, 328, 389
Pin assignment of removable terminals, 479 PROFINET (Cycl. receive), 302
Pin assignments of the removable terminals of the PROFINET installation guidelines, 493, 493
analog module, 468 PROFINET IO, 47, 146
Pin assignments of the removable terminals of the PROFINET IO controller, 389
basic unit, 460 PROFINET IO Supervisor, 389
Pin assignments of the removable terminals of the PROFINET Security Guideline, 391
decoupling module, 470 Program memory module, 98
Pin assignments of the removable terminals of the Protection functions, 39, 41
digital module, 462 Protection/Control function block, 133
Pin assignments of the removable terminals of the PTC, 172
ground-fault module, 464 PTC thermistor, 172
Pin assignments of the removable terminals of the Pulse width modulator, 353
temperature module, 466 Pulse width modulator formulas, 385
Plant identifier, 604 Pulse width modulator function block, 132
PLC / PCS fault response, 349 Pulse width modulator PWM, 49
PLC/PCS [PN], 184 Pump, 37, 42
PLC/PCS monitoring, 48, 348 Push-in lugs for screw mounting, 57
PN/IO with non-redundant I/Os, 411
Pole-changing reversing starter, 60, 192, 227, 526, 624
Pole-changing reversing starter control function, 224 Q
Pole-changing starter, 46, 186, 192, 223, 526, 622
Query_Measurement, 432
Pole-changing starter control function, 221
Pole-changing", "reversing starter, 186
Positioner, 46, 60, 186, 192, 234, 335, 628
Positioner 1, 526
R
Positioner 2, 526 Rated control supply voltage Us
Positioner 3, 526 DM-F LOCAL digital module, 665
Positioner 4, 526 DM-F PROFIsafe digital module, 665
Positioner 5, 526 Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp, 659
Positioner control function, 231 DM-F LOCAL digital module, 665
Positioner control, variants, 234 DM-F PROFIsafe digital module, 665

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

794 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Index

Rated insulation voltage Ui, 659 Response to warning level, ground-fault

DM-F LOCAL digital module, 665 monitoring, 255
DM-F PROFIsafe digital module, 665 Restart, 98
Rated motor current, 737 Restart temperature, 738
Read and adapt main display, 83 Restart time delay, 338
Read memory module, 98 Restoring factory settings, 509
Reading and writing data records in the STEP7 user Restoring the factory settings with the "TEST/RESET"
program, 429 button, 509
Reading diagnostics data records with SFB Restoring the factory settings with the SIMOCODE ES
52 "RDREC" in OB 1, 419 software, 509
Reading out statistical data, 502, 502 Reversing
Reading out the device-internal error buffer, 99 starter, 46, 60, 146, 151, 186, 192, 202, 526, 610
Reading out the device-internal event memory, 100 Reversing starter control function, 200
Reading out the error buffer, 510 Reversing starter with motor feeder and local control
Reading out the error log, 510 station, 147
Rear system interface, 487 RT communication, 393
Receive data from PROFINET, 299 Runtime license V7, 59, 59
Relative humidity during operation, 656
Relay enabling circuits
DM-F LOCAL digital module, 666 S
DM-F PROFIsafe digital module, 666
S7-400 H system with redundant I/Os, 410
Relay outputs
Safe isolation according to IEC 60947-1, 657
Basic unit, 659
DM-F LOCAL digital module, 665
Digital module, 664
DM-F PROFIsafe digital module, 665
DM-F LOCAL digital module, 666
Safe tripping, 324
DM-F PROFIsafe digital module, 666
Safe tripping reset, 347
Relay test, 327, 741
Safe tripping response, 347
Remote operation, 180
Safe tripping, DM-F Local function block, 134
Remote reset, 332
Safe tripping, DM-F PROFIsafe function block, 134
Remote/Automatic, 180
Safety and commissioning information for EEx
Removable terminals, 449, 479
areas, 733
Repair, 743
Safety functions, 39
Replacing a decoupling module, 506
Safety information, 479, 486
Replacing a DM-F, 507
Current measuring module, 448
Replacing an expansion module, 506
DM-F Local fail-safe digital module, 448
Replacing SIMOCODE pro components, 505
Safety information for adapter for operator panel, 448
Replacing the basic unit, 506
Safety information for basic unit, 448
Replacing the current / voltage measuring module, 507
Safety information for current / voltage measuring
Replacing the current measuring module, 507
module, 448
Required function is not supported, 517
Safety information for decoupling module, 448
Reset, 48, 99, 169, 324
Safety information for digital module, 448
Bus / PLC fault, 349
Safety information for DM-F PROFIsafe fail-safe digital
Reset function, 325, 326
module, 448
Reset function block, 136
Safety information for door adapter, 448
Resetting, testing and parameterizing via
Safety information for expansion modules, 448
commands, 98
Safety information for operator panel, 448
Residual current transformer, 32
Safety information for operator panel with display, 448
Resistive load, 194
Safety Integrity Level, 45, 111
Response, 18
Safety-related tripping, 45, 48, 341
Response to sensor fault, ground-fault monitoring, 256
Safety-related tripping, 45, 48, 341
Response to trip level, ground-fault monitoring, 255
Save change-over
command, 193, 202, 213, 216, 220, 223, 227, 242

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 795
Index

Saving parameters from a SIMOCODE ES file into the Settings of the DIP switches (DM-F Local), 343
basic unit, 504 Settings of the DIP switches, DM-F PROFIsafe, 346
Saving parameters from the basic unit to a SIMOCODE Settings of the web browser for access to the
ES file, 503 information, 444
Saving parameters from the basic unit to the memory Shared device, 393, 414
module, 503 Shared device configuration, 408
Saving parameters from the memory module to the Shared device provision, 408
basic unit, 504 Shock resistance (sine pulse), 656
Saving parameters onto the initialization module, 750 Short-circuit protection according to IEC 60947-4-1,
Screw attachment, 449, 450, 452, 453 type of coordination 2, 740
Security functions - supported by the Short-circuit protection with fuses for motor feeder for
SIMOCODE pro V PN OPC-UA server, 436 short-circuit currents up to 100 kA and 690 V, 678
Sensor circuit fault, 173 Signal conditioning, 49, 353, 365
Sensor circuit of the temperature module, 674 Signal conditioning function block, 133
Sensor circuit wiring, 739 SIMATIC NET PROFIBUS Networks manual, 493
Sensor fault, 173 SIMOCODE
Sensor input automatic start / monitored start, 344 ES, 117, 146, 157, 281, 299, 319, 323, 351
Sensor measuring circuits, 43 SIMOCODE ES 2007 Basic, 58
Sensor types, 114 SIMOCODE ES 2007 Premium, 58
Separate DM-FL/FP function from control function, 193 SIMOCODE ES 2007 Standard, 58
Separate fail-safe function from control SIMOCODE ES Professional, 178
function, 197, 199, 202, 205, 209, 213, 216, 220, 223, SIMOCODE pro block library for SIMATIC PCS 7
227, 230, 235, 238, 242 Version V7, 59
Sequence for initial start-up of a new SIMOCODE pro function block library for
SIMOCODE pro V PN basic unit and a new SIMATIC PCS 7, 59
initialization module, 756 SIMOCODE pro operating instructions, 448, 496
Service, 495 SIMOCODE pro PCS 7 library, 119
Service data, 28, 50 SIMOCODE pro V PN basic unit, 31, 52, 60
Set current Is1, 161 SIMOCODE pro V PN basic unit 3UF7011, 636
Set current Is2, 161, 163, 163 SIMOCODE pro V PN communication functions, 392
Set current ls1, 162 SIMOCODE pro V PN memory module, 116
Set currents, 93 SIMOCODE pro V PN with system redundancy, 410
Set IP parameters and PROFINET device names with Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP), 446
STEP 7 HW Config, 155 Single-phase networks, 109
Set IP parameters and PROFINET IO device names Snap-on mounting, 450
with SIMOCODE ES, 155 Socket assignment table, analog, 547
Set time (= PC time), 98 Socket assignment table, digital, 540
Setting IP parameters and PROFINET device name on Soft run-down time, 242
a plant-specific basis, 499 Soft starter, 46, 60, 186, 192, 238, 526, 630
Setting IP parameters and PROFINET device name With reversing contactor, 186, 242
with SIMOCODE ES via PC cable, 499 Soft starter control function, 236
Setting selected parameters using the operator panel Soft starter with reversing contactor, 192, 526, 632
with display, 76 Soft starter with reversing contactor control
Setting the DM-F DIP switches, 112 function, 239
Setting the IP configuration and station name, 154 Software, 58, 117
Setting the IP parameters, 435, 443 Software Update Service, 58, 59
Setting the PROFIsafe address on DM-F Solenoid valve, 46, 60, 186, 192, 230, 526, 626
PROFIsafe, 499 Solenoid valve control function, 228
Setting the rated motor current, 737 Specifications, 539, 554
Setting the timer with SIMOCODE ES, 500 Stalled positioner, 516
Settings Calculators 1, 2, 378 Stalled rotor, 515
Settings for media redundancy, 409 Stalled rotor level, 171

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

796 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Index

Stalled rotor protection, 41, 157, 158, 171 System interface ground-fault module, 672, 673
Stalled rotor response, 160 System interface of the operator panel, 487
Standard functions, 48, 323, 324 System interface of the operator panel with
Standard rail mounting, 452, 453 display, 487
Standards, 656 System interface, connection of cables, 486, 488
Star networks, 107 System interface, connection of system
Star-delta connection, 211, 248 components, 488
Star-delta reversing starter, 192, 526, 616 System interfaces, 483
Star-delta reversing starter control function, 210 System interfaces of basic unit, 658
Star-delta starter, 46, 60, 186, 192, 209, 526, 614 System interfaces of the operator panel with
Reversing starter, 186, 213 display, 676
Star-delta starter control function, 206 System redundancy, 393, 410
Start_Pause, 431 System redundancy - topologies, 415
Start-up override, 194, 270 System redundancy with H CPUs, 410
Startup parameter block active, 514 System redundancy with media redundancy, 415
Start-up with an initialization module, 749
State of status LED, 327
Statistics/Maintenance, 81 T
Statistics/maintenance, operator panel with display, 73
Tables, 525
Status - cooling down period active, 520
TC, 193
Status display, 81
Technical data, 655
Status display about communication, 90
Technical data of the analog module, 670
Status DM-F enabling circuit, 520
Technical data of the basic unit, 658
Status emergency start executed, 520
Technical data of the current measuring modules or
Status information, 189
current / voltage measuring modules, 661
Status test position (TPF), 520
Technical data of the decoupling module, 663
Stop time >, 520
Technical data of the digital modules, 664
Stop time monitoring, 273, 274, 274
Technical data of the DM-F Local digital module, 667
Stripped lengths, 459, 479
Technical data of the DM-F PROFIsafe digital
Structure of the diagnostics data records, 421
module, 669
Summation current evaluation, 248
Technical data of the ground-fault module, 673
Supply of digital module inputs, 461
Technical data of the ground-fault module 3UF7500-
Supply of the basic unit inputs, 304, 459
1AA00-0, 672
Switch, 393
Technical data of the initialization module, 677
Switching
Technical data of the operator panel, 675
Direction of rotation, 224
Technical data of the operator panel with display, 676
Speed, 224
Technical data of the Y connecting cable, 677
Switching from star to delta, 206, 210
Temperature limit, 172
Switching the direction of rotation, 200, 210, 217, 239
Temperature limits, 94
Switching the direction of travel, 232
Temperature module, 43, 55, 114
Switching the speed, 214, 217, 221
Temperature module 1/2 - trip level exceeded, 521
System events, 513
Temperature module 1/2 - warning level exceeded, 521
System interface, 661
Temperature module 1/2 out of range, 521
Analog module, 670
Temperature module 1/2 sensor fault, 521
Current / voltage measuring module, 661
Temperature module connection example, 467
Decoupling module, 663
Temperature module inputs, 299, 302, 312
Digital module, 664
Temperature module pin assignment, 466
DM-F LOCAL digital module, 665
Temperature modules, 110
DM-F PROFIsafe digital module, 665
Temperature monitoring, 43, 114, 247, 276
Operator panel, 675
Temperature sensor, 32
Temperature module, 674
Temperature sensors, 276
System interface cover, 116, 487
Temperature TM1/2 monitoring function block, 141

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 797
Index

Terminal covers, 57 Trip Operational Protection OFF (OPO), 336

Test, 48, 99, 324, 740 Tripping characteristic curve, 737
Test function, 325, 326 Tripping temperature, 738
Test function block, 136 Tripping time, 161, 165
Test interval, 278 Truth table, 49
Test phases, 327, 741 Truth table 2I / 1O, 353
Test position feedback (TPF), 48, 324, 520 Truth table 2I/1O, 357, 357
Test position feedback (TPF) function block, 132, 329 Truth table 3I/1O, 353, 354
Test trip, 521 Truth table 5I / 2O, 353, 358, 358
Test verification documents, 656 Truth table for 2I / 1O function block, 142
TEST/RESET, 325 Truth table for 3I / 1O function block, 141
Testing, 326 Truth Table for 3I / 1O logic modules, 354
Thermal motor model, 167, 326 Truth table for 5I / 2O function block, 142
Thermistor, 172 Type of consumer
Thermistor function block, 136 load, 194, 197, 199, 202, 205, 209, 213, 216, 220, 223,
Thermistor motor protection with PTC (binary), 660 227, 235, 238, 242
Thermistor open circuit, 522 Type of coordination 2, 682
Thermistor protection, 41, 157, 158, 172 Type of protection EEx e and EEx d:, 734
Thermistor sensor, 41 Types of signals/output responses of non-volatile
Thermistor short circuit, 522 elements, 369
Thermistor trip level, 522
Through-hole technology up to 200 A, 476, 478
Tightening torque of the screws, 455, 457 U
Tightening torques, 459, 479
Unbalance level, 170
Time range for starts, 275, 275
Unbalance protection, 41, 157, 158, 170
Time-of-day synchronization by the NTP
Unbalance protection response, 160
procedure, 445
Upgrade for PCS 7 block library SIMOCODE pro, V 6.0
Timer, 49, 353, 362
or V 7 to version SIMOCODE pro V 8, 59
Timer function block, 137
Upgrade for SIMOCODE ES as from 2004, 58
TM1 warnings T> / trip T> (status information,
Upgrade for SIMOCODE pro PCS 7 block library, V6.0
warnings, and faults), 602
or V6.1 to version SIMOCODE pro V7.0/V7.1, 59
TM1/2 inputs function blocks, 137
USB PC cable, 56, 115
TO, 193
USB-to-serial adapter, 56
Transferring IP parameters, 406
Use of residual current transformers, 114
Transferring the parameters to the basic unit and
User Structure Identifier (USI), 427
commissioning, 153
UVO fault, 337
Transformation ratio, 480
UVO function block, 141
Transformation ratio - active, 162, 163
Transformation ratio - primary, 162, 163
Transformation ratio - secondary, 162, 163
Trip class, 161, 165, 737
V
Trip classes for 2-pole loads, 166 VDI guideline, 391
Trip classes for 3-pole symmetrical loads, 165 Vibration resistance, 656
Trip level 0/4 - 20 mA < undershot, 515 Voltage limits, 93
Trip level 0/4 - 20 mA > overshot, 515 Voltage measurement
Trip level cos phi <, 515 Current / voltage measuring module, 661
Trip level I < undershot, 515 Current measuring module, 661
Trip level I > overshot, 515 Voltage monitoring, 43, 247, 261
Trip level P < undershot, 515 Voltage monitoring function block, 140
Trip level P > overshot, 515
Trip level U < undershot, 515
Trip level, warning level, ground-fault monitoring, 254

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

798 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002
 Index

W
Warning level 0/4 - 20 mA < undershot, 523
Warning level 0/4 - 20 mA > overshot, 523
Warning level cos phi <, 522
Warning level I< undershot, 522
Warning level I> overshot, 522
Warning level P< undershot, 522
Warning level P> overshot, 522
Warning level U< undershot, 523
Warnings, 82
Warnings, operator panel with display, 78
Warranty, 743
Watchdog, 48, 348
Watchdog, 48, 348
Watchdog (PLC / PCS monitoring), 324
Watchdog function block, 143
Web browser, 444
Web diagnostics (web server), 443
Web server, 47
Wiring, 447
Wiring of basic units, 458
Wiring of coupling module, 458
Wiring of current / voltage measuring module, 478
Wiring of current measuring module, 476
Wiring of expansion modules, 458
Wiring of removable terminals on the basic unit, 460
Wiring of the main circuit and the control circuit with
SIMOCODE pro, 148
Wiring the initialization module, 753
Wiring the removable terminals of the basic unit, 460
Wiring the removable terminals of the expansion
modules and the decoupling module, 471
Wiring with external current transformers (interposing
transformers), 480
With automatic starting / without automatic starting
after power failure, 345
Working range of basic unit, 659
Writing / reading data records with STEP7, 553
Wrong parameter, 519
Wrong password, 519

Y
Y connecting cable, 56, 653

О
ОN >, 193

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002 799
Index

SIMOCODE pro PROFINET

800 System Manual, 01/2015, NEB631672702000/RS-AB/002